JP2024071568A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of games. [Solution] A slot machine 10 may hold a lottery for transition to an advantageous zone such as an attack mode based on the lottery results of each game. The number of remaining games in the attack mode, etc. is stored in RAM as the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone, and when an opportunity to add to the number of remaining games occurs, an addition process is performed on the number of remaining games, and the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone is updated. During the addition process, if the sum of the expected increase/decrease in the gaming media by the added amount and the increase/decrease up to that point exceeds the upper limit increase in the advantageous zone, the number of games equivalent to that excess is stored as the number of games prepared to disappear. Then, when the attack mode, etc., ends based on the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone, information on the number of games prepared to disappear is stored as the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone. [Selected Figure] Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, in slot machines, when medals have been bet as gaming media and the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is conducted and the reels begin to spin. If the stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop in response to the results of the internal lottery, a bonus according to the result is awarded (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the gaming machines mentioned above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

The present invention relates to
A plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of patterns applied thereto in a circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated;
A stop operation means for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
a mode notifying means capable of executing mode notifying regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode by a predetermined notifying means based on a lottery result by the lottery means,
At least a normal state and a specific state in which the execution frequency of the status notification by the status notification means is higher than that of the normal state are provided,
a transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result;
a means for starting a specific notification by turning on the specific notification means when the specific state is transitioned to, and for ending the specific notification by turning off the specific notification means when the specific state is ended;
a means for executing a special notification corresponding to the content of the specific state that is the target of the specific notification at a timing before the specific notification is started;
The present invention is characterized in that it is provided with:

The present invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of games.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment. 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door closed. 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the pay lines. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the pay lines. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device; 5 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a lottery process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel control process. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop buttons and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining reel stop control. 13 is a flowchart showing RT state processing. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the first RT state. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop buttons and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the second RT state. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the third RT state. 13 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop buttons and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for BB state. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition relationship between states. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of a display mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a lottery result handling process. 13 is a flowchart showing the first specific role processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the second specific role processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the third specific role processing. FIG. 13 shows an example of a premonition game number table. 13 is a flowchart showing a mode change notification process. An explanatory diagram showing an overview of the push order notification presentation performed on the auxiliary display unit. A flowchart showing the push order processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning result response process. 13 is a flowchart showing a game number management process. 13 is a flowchart showing an end determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for a specialized zone. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process by a sub-side display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a bet time effect setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for notifying the order of pressing. A flowchart showing the setting process for the added effects. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a notification timing table. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects at the time of each stop operation. A diagram showing the relationship between notification timing and additional performance. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects when all stops are performed. A flowchart showing the bonus performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for announcing a specific role. 13 is a flowchart showing a continuous performance setting process. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a continuous performance. 13 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode shift lottery probability and the setting difference. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining an overview of an indication monitor and a section display. 13 is a flowchart showing a first section display process. 13 is a diagram for explaining a display start mode table of a section indicator. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. A diagram to explain the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous zone and the display of the zone indicator. A diagram to explain the relationship between the type of advantageous zone and the display mode of the zone indicator. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the display start mode table of the interval indicator in the first modified example. FIG. In Modification 2, (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the lottery process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process for a specific state. 13 is a diagram for explaining a display start mode table of a section indicator for a specific state. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a display start mode table of the section indicator in the third modified example. 13 is a flowchart showing a first section display process. 13A is a flowchart showing a part of a reel control process, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a third section display process. This is a timing chart to explain the relationship between the type of advantageous zone and the timing at which the zone indicator starts displaying. A timing chart to explain the relationship between the type of advantageous zone and the display start timing of the zone indicator in variant example 4. A timing chart to explain the relationship between the type of advantageous zone and the display start timing of the zone indicator in variant example 5. FIG. 23 is a front view of a slot machine in a sixth modified example. 13 is a diagram for explaining a display start mode table of a section indicator. FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining a display start mode table of the section indicator in the seventh modification example. In the eighth modified example, (a) is a diagram showing a part of the lottery table for the normal gaming state and the first RT state, and (b) is a flowchart showing the start waiting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a first section display process. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the display start timing of a section indicator. 23 is a flowchart showing a first section display process in Modification 9. 13 is a diagram for explaining a display end mode table of a section indicator. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel control process in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing special RT state processing. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for a special RT state. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for a special RT state. 13 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing. 13 is a flowchart showing RT state processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a first section display process. 13 is a flowchart showing a fourth section display process. A diagram to explain the relationship between the special RT state and the indication monitor and section indicator. A diagram showing the relationship between the winning patterns of various replay results for the special RT state and the main stopping outcomes. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop buttons and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. A flowchart showing the push order processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for notifying the order of pressing. 13 is a flowchart showing a notification process for special RT. (a) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the notification content during a special replay and the instruction monitor, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping results during a special replay and the types of advantageous zones. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for a special RT state in variant example 1. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for a special RT state. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop buttons and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the notification content and the key points when a specific role is won. 13 is a flowchart showing a notification process for special RT. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the notification content and the key points when a special replay is won. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for notifying a specific role in variant example 2. 10A is a flowchart showing a notification cancellation process, and FIG. 10B is a diagram for explaining an example of a cancellation table. 13 is a flowchart showing a notification process for special RT. This is a diagram to explain the relationship between specific roles during special RT and the content of notifications during special replays. A diagram for explaining the relationship between a winning role and the RT state to which the player transitions in variant example 3. 13 is a flowchart showing special RT state processing. A diagram for explaining the relationship between a winning role and the RT state to which the player transitions in variant example 4. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the benefit provided in the fifth modified example. 13 is a flowchart showing RT state processing. 13 is a flowchart showing special RT state processing. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for a special RT state in the third embodiment. A diagram showing the relationship between the winning patterns of various replay results for the special RT state and the main stopping outcomes. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop buttons and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a special RT command receiving process by the display control device. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a notification scenario table. 13 is a flowchart showing a notification process for special RT. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing performed by the display control device when a special replay is won. 13 is a flowchart showing the first specific role processing in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. 13 is a flowchart showing remaining game number management processing. A diagram to explain the number of games in the advantageous zone. 13 is a flowchart showing the game number addition lottery process. A figure showing an example of an add-on lottery table. A flowchart showing the process of lottery for the number of added games. A figure showing an example of an additional game number lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing the game number addition process. A figure showing an example of a first special notification lottery table. A flowchart showing the setting process for the added effects. 13 is a flowchart showing a first special notification setting process. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a display presentation by the auxiliary display unit, and 13C is a figure showing an example of a first special notification type table. A diagram to explain the relationship between the number of games in the advantageous zone and special notifications. 13 is a flowchart showing a various mode selection process in Modification 1. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning result response process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a mode selection table. A figure showing an example of a second special notification lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing a second special notification setting process. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a display presentation by the auxiliary display unit, and 13C is a figure showing an example of a second special notification type table. In the second variant example, (a) is a flowchart showing the lottery process for adding the number of games, and (b) is a flowchart showing the lottery process for adding the number of games. 13 is a flowchart showing the game number addition process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting an added command. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a third special notification lottery table, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a third special notification type table. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of setting an added command in the third modified example. A figure showing an example of a third special notification lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process in the fourth modified example. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process in Modification 5. A figure showing an example of a fourth special notification lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting an attack mode end effect. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a fourth special notification lottery table in variant example 6, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a fourth special notification lottery table in variant example 7. FIG. A figure showing an example of a fourth special notification type table 1 and a fourth special notification type table 2 in variant example 8. 23 is a flowchart showing a second section display process in the ninth modified example. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining various areas in the RAM of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a data initialization process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special section setting process. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a special section table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a push order notification lottery table when a special replay is won. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state. 13A is a flowchart showing the game number management process, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the push order role processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a special replay notification process. A figure showing an example of a premonition game number table in variant example 10. A flowchart showing the game number addition process in variant example 11. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the third special notification setting process in variant example 12. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. A figure to explain the relationship between the actual number of remaining games in the advantageous zone and the displayed number of remaining games in variant example 13. A flowchart showing the setting process for the added effects. 13 is a flowchart showing the rear-loading performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a first special notification setting process. A flowchart showing the pseudo-additional game number lottery process in variant example 14. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-additional game number table for suggesting setting values, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the pseudo-additional game number and the suggested content. 13 is a flowchart showing the second specific role processing in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the third specific role processing. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a table for a specialized zone transition lottery. 13 is a flowchart showing a mode change notification process. A flowchart showing the push order processing. A flowchart showing the setting process for the added effects. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. A figure showing an example of a lottery result and a display presentation by the auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 13 is a flowchart showing a top-up process for a specialized zone. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an additional notification timing table. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a specialized zone end effect. 13 is a flowchart showing the in-zone rear-board lottery processing in variant example 1. A figure showing an example of a special top-up notification timing table. In the second variant example, (a) is a flowchart showing the in-zone rear-loading lottery process, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display presentation by the auxiliary display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a table of various additional notification timings. 13 is a flowchart showing the in-zone rear-loading lottery processing in variant example 3. A figure showing an example of an additional notification timing table in modified examples 3 to 5. A flowchart showing the setting process for the additional effects in variant example 6. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting an attack mode end effect. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 23 is a flowchart showing a mobile terminal process in Modification 7. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 20 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the attack mode end effect in variant example 8. A figure showing an example of display presentation by the auxiliary display unit in the sixth embodiment. A flowchart showing the setting process for the added effects. 13 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process when the first stop is ON. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for notifying an additional charge when the device is completely stopped. 13 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the post-loading effect. 13 is a flowchart showing the first stop ON time effect setting process in the first modified example. In the second modified example, (a) is a flowchart showing the effect setting process during normal replay, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process for a selected counter. 13 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process when the first stop is ON. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for additional notification at full stop in the third modified example. 13 is a flowchart showing a correction process. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. A timing chart for explaining the end conditions of the favorable zone in the seventh embodiment. This is a timing chart to explain the end conditions of the advantageous zone. This is a diagram to explain the winning probability of each role depending on the state. A diagram to explain the expected net increase in number of coins by state. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. 13 is a flowchart showing remaining game number management processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a remaining number management process. 13 is a flowchart showing the game number addition process. A figure showing an example of a fifth special notification lottery table. A figure showing an example of a fifth special notification type table. 11 is a timing chart for explaining a state in which a first excess flag is set. 11 is a timing chart for explaining a state in which a second excess flag is set. 13 is a timing chart illustrating the relationship between each excess flag and the fifth special notification. In variant example 1, (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining game number management process, (b) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining number management process, and (c) and (b) are figures showing an example of a fifth special notification type table. In variant example 2, (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining game number management process, (b) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining number management process, and (c) is a figure showing an example of a fifth special notification type table. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process in Modification 3. 13 is a flowchart showing a sixth special notification process. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a sixth special notification lottery table, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a sixth special notification type table. A flowchart showing the sixth special notification process in variant example 4. A figure showing an example of each sixth special notification lottery table. (a) is a figure showing a part of the 6th special notification processing in variant example 5, (b) is a figure showing a part of the 6th special notification processing in variant example 6, and (c) and (d) are figures for explaining an example of notification that the excess flag has been set. A flowchart showing a part of the sixth special notification process in variant example 7. 20 is a flowchart showing a special section setting process in the eighth modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a special section table. 13 is a flowchart showing a part of the number of games management process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting an attack mode end effect. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. This is a diagram to explain what happens when the number of coins increasing or decreasing in the favorable zone is less than expected in variant example 9. 13 is a flowchart showing a reallocation process. A flowchart showing the game number addition process in variant example 10. 13A is a flowchart showing the process of moving the number of games lost, and FIG. 13B is a diagram for explaining various counter areas in the RAM of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the sixth special notification process in variant example 11. A flowchart showing the CB push order notification process in variant example 12. This is a diagram to explain what happens when the number of coins increasing or decreasing in the favorable zone is greater than expected in variant example 13. 13 is a flowchart showing the seventh special notification process. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a seventh special notification lottery table, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a seventh special notification type table. 23 is a flowchart showing a special section setting process in the fourteenth modification example. 1A is a flowchart showing a part of the game number management process, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing a part of the push order role process. A figure showing an example of a push order notification table when a special replay is won. In the fifteenth modified example, (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining number management process, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by the auxiliary display unit. A figure showing an example of a seventh special notification lottery table. 23 is a flowchart showing a remaining number management process in the sixteenth modification. In variant example 17, (a) is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for the first RT state, and (b) is a diagram showing changes in the increase or decrease of medals. 23 is a flowchart showing the process of setting an added command in the eighteenth modification example. 13 is a flowchart showing a first adjustment process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second adjustment process. 13 is a flowchart showing a third adjustment process. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining how a predicted number of sheets is corrected; 23 is a flowchart showing a remaining number management process in Modification 19. This is a diagram to explain what happens when a bonus is won near the end of the advantageous zone in variant example 20. 13 is a flowchart showing a premonition setting process when a bonus is won. A diagram to explain how the adjustment game number is added to the premonition game number. This is a figure to explain what happens when a bonus is won near the end of the challenge mode in variant example 21. 13 is a flowchart showing the premonition setting process when a duplicate target role is won during a commercial. 13 is a diagram for explaining how a challenge mode extension process is performed. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the premonition setting process when a duplicate target role is won during a commercial in variant example 22. (a) is a diagram for explaining how the extension process of the second challenge mode is performed, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the difference in the degree of advantage between the first challenge mode and the second challenge mode. FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the illumination start timing and the forced termination condition when the illumination start condition of the section indicator is changed in Modification Example 23. 13 is a flowchart showing a first section display process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the state of a preliminary interval and a target interval. FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the preliminary interval and the upper limit increase number in Modification Example 24. 13A is a flowchart showing the second section display process, and FIG. 13B is a diagram for explaining the difference in the degree of advantage between the first challenge mode and the second challenge mode.

First Embodiment
An embodiment of the present invention, which is applied to a reel type gaming machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a front view of a slot machine 10, Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with a front door 12 closed, Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with a front door 12 open, Fig. 4 is a rear view of the front door 12, and Fig. 5 is a front view of a cabinet 11.

As shown in Figures 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is generally formed in a box shape with an open front, and is attached to the so-called island equipment by nailing it when installing it in an amusement hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a, 14b at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a, 13b. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 is supported rotatably around an opening and closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a, 13b with respect to the housing 11, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. The front door 12 is locked and cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on its back side. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 that notifies the player of the game status is provided at the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 25 has three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R arranged side by side, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into two parts, an upper part and a lower part, by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 is provided with a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical (annular) shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is supported so that it can rotate with its central axis being the axis of rotation of the reel. The axes of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one to each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

Here, we will briefly explain the configuration of the reel unit 31.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be rotated individually, i.e., independently, by driving each stepping motor. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving a drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse) of, for example, 504 pulses, and this excitation pulse controls the rotational position of the stepping motor, i.e., the rotational position of the reel. In addition, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has rotated once are installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the reel unit 31. When the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, it outputs a detection signal to the main control device 101 described later. Therefore, the main control device 101 can check and correct the angular position of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input.

On the outer periphery of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, multiple symbols are drawn in the long side direction (rotation direction) as identification information. More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, to switch from one symbol to the next symbol at a specified position, it is necessary to output 24 excitation pulses (= 504 pulses ÷ 21 symbols). Furthermore, the main control device 101 can determine which symbols are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R and stop a specified symbol at a position visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input.

Next, we will explain the symbols depicted on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 6 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Numbers from 0 to 20 are also assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but these numbers are numbers used by the main control device 101 to identify the symbols that are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are 11 types of symbols: "Red Bell" symbol (e.g., the 7th symbol on the left reel 32L), "White Bell" symbol (e.g., the 20th symbol on the left reel 32L), "First Replay" symbol (e.g., the 19th symbol on the left reel 32L), "Second Replay" symbol (e.g., the 6th symbol on the left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (e.g., the 10th symbol on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (e.g., the 8th symbol on the left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., the 4th symbol on the left reel 32L), "Black BAR" symbol (e.g., the 18th symbol on the left reel 32L), "White BAR" symbol (e.g., the 17th symbol on the left reel 32L), "LUCKY" symbol (e.g., the 5th symbol on the left reel 32L), and "Youth" symbol (e.g., the 0th symbol on the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement of the various symbols are completely different on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that of the 21 symbols on the corresponding reel, only three symbols are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window 26L, 26M, 26R.

In this slot machine 10, the game results of each game are announced using a total of three combinations of symbols, one symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the symbols that can be seen. As described above, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible, and as combinations of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, there are combinations of symbols that stop on the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, combinations of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and combinations of symbols that stop on the lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a line L4 that slopes downward to the right, connecting the top symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the bottom symbols on the right reel 32R, and combinations of symbols that stop on a line L5 that slopes upward to the right, connecting the bottom symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the top symbols on the right reel 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a curved line L6, connecting the top symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols on the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the symbols are lined up, and the curved line L6 is a line that bends when the symbols are lined up. There are other combinations of symbols that stop on lines that bend, other than the curved line L6, but we will not explain them here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, some are activated and some are not, depending on the number of medals bet. When symbols stop in a specified combination on an activated line, i.e., an activated line, a win is achieved and a bonus is awarded in which a specified number of medals, which serve as gaming media, are paid out, or a bonus is awarded in which the gaming state is changed. On the other hand, when symbols stop in a specified combination on an inactivated line, a win is not achieved and the bonus is not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, there are cases where only the downward-right line L4 is the active line as shown in FIG. 8(a), cases where the two combination lines of the lower line L3 and the downward-right line L4 are the active lines as shown in FIG. 8(b), and cases where only the bent line L6 is the active line as shown in FIG. 8(c). More specifically, when three medals are bet and the game is started, only the downward-right line L4 is the active line, and when two medals are bet and the game is started, the lower line L3 and the downward-right line L4 are the active lines. Also, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is the active line. The three combination lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward-right line L5 are not the active lines. Hereinafter, a game started with three medals bet is also called a 3-bet game, a game started with two medals bet is also called a 2-bet game, and a game started with one medal bet is also called a 1-bet game.

Figures 9 to 11 show the correspondence between winning combinations of symbols and the benefits that will be awarded if a winning combination is achieved.

The small prize winnings that result in medal payouts include the 1st small prize winning to the 32nd small prize winning.

When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the first small win is achieved. When the first small win is achieved, 9 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

Although the winning symbol combinations for the 2nd small prize winnings to the 26th small prize winnings are different, in a 3-bet game, the winning patterns are when the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white BAR" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "white bell" symbol or "LUCKY" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white BAR" symbol, "youth" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the top line L1, i.e., the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M and 32R stop on the top line L1. For example, if the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops on the top row, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops on the middle row, and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the bottom row, the eighth small win is achieved. As shown in FIG. 6, the "red bell" symbol is arranged on the middle reel 32M at a position (number 12) adjacent to the "cherry" symbol (number 11) on the upstream side, and the "red bell" symbol is arranged on the right reel 32R at a position (number 20) one symbol away from the "white BAR" symbol (number 18) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the eighth small win is achieved on the right-downward line L4, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop on the upper line L1. If the 2nd to 26th small wins are achieved, 3 medals will be paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals will be paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 27th minor prize is determined by the stopping pattern of the left reel 32L as a specified reel among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, the 27th minor prize is won when the "cherry" pattern of the left reel 32L stops in the upper or lower row. In this case, the stopping patterns of the center reel 32M and the right reel 32R do not affect the winning judgment. In other words, regardless of the stopping patterns of the center reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the 27th minor prize is won when the "cherry" pattern of the left reel 32L stops in the upper row or stops, that is, when the "cherry" pattern or the "second replay" pattern stops on the winning line. When the 27th minor prize is won, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 28th minor win occurs when the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops on the top or bottom row, and the "cherry" symbols stop all together on the downward-right line L4. More specifically, the 28th minor win occurs when the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol, the "white bell" symbol or the "cherry" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops on the right reel 32R. When the 29th minor win occurs, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

To further explain the relationship between the 27th and 28th small wins, when the "cherry" or "second replay" symbols on the left reel 32L stop, the 27th small win is achieved regardless of the symbols stopped on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, but depending on the symbols stopped on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, the 28th small win may be achieved instead of the 27th small win. In other words, although the winning patterns that result in the 27th small win include the winning patterns that result in the 28th small win, the 27th and 28th small wins are clearly distinguished when making the winning judgment.

The 29th minor win occurs when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R all stop on an active line. In other words, if the sloping right line L4 is the active line, the 29th minor win occurs when the "watermelon" symbols all stop sloping right. When the 29th minor win occurs, 5 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 30th small win occurs when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R all stop on the top line L1. More specifically, the 30th small win occurs when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R all stop on an active line. When the 30th small win occurs, 5 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "Black BAR", "Young Man", "Watermelon" and "First Replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M and the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 31st minor win is achieved. When the 31st minor win is achieved, 9 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

For the 32nd to 35th small prizes, if they are achieved in a 3 bet game, 3 medals will be paid out, and in a 2 bet game, 14 medals will be paid out.

The 36th minor prize occurs when, for example, the player operates the stop switches 42-44 to aim for the "watermelon" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the "watermelon" symbols on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M, or the left reel 32L and right reel 32R, stop on an active line, while the "watermelon" symbols on the remaining reels do not stop on an active line, resulting in a so-called "watermelon tenpai miss" winning outcome. When the 36th minor prize occurs, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR", "Watermelon" and "Cherry" symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell", "White Bell" and "Youth" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 37th minor win is achieved. As shown in FIG. 6, the left reel 32L has the "Red Bell" symbol (No. 7) and the "Second Replay" symbol located adjacent to it (No. 6) downstream, and the "First Replay" symbols located adjacent to the main "White Bell" symbols (No. 3, No. 12, No. 15 and No. 20) and the downstream side (No. 2, No. 11, No. 14 and No. 19). On the right reel 32R, the "1st replay" or "2nd replay" symbols are arranged in adjacent positions (3, 6, 16, 0) to the main "red bell" symbols (2, 5, 12, 20), and the "1st replay" symbol is arranged in adjacent position (11) to the upstream side of the "white bell" symbol (10). Therefore, when the 37th small win is established on the right-downward line L4, the "bell" and "replay" symbols are mainly in tenpai on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, while the "bell" and "replay" symbols on the center reel 32M do not stop, resulting in a so-called double tenpai stop result. When the 37th small win is established, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "White BAR", "Young Man", "Watermelon" and "First Replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "First Replay", "Watermelon" and "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 38th small win is achieved. In a 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch when the No. 4 "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the top to bottom row, the 38th small win is achieved, and the "Red Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on the middle line L2. If the 38th minor win is achieved, 3 medals will be paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals will be paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 39th small win is won. Details will be explained later, but the 39th small win is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 39th small win is achieved, 9 medals are paid out.

When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 40th small win is won. Details will be explained later, but the 40th small win is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 40th small win is achieved, 9 medals are paid out.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol or the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 41st minor win is achieved. When the 41st minor win is achieved, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The winning combinations that grant the replay privilege, which allows the player to play the next game without inserting a medal, include the 1st replay winning combination to the 8th replay winning combination. If the 2nd replay winning combination is achieved, the game state transitions to the 1st RT state, if the 3rd replay winning combination is achieved, the game state transitions to the 2nd RT state, and if the 4th or 5th replay winning combination is achieved, the game state transitions to the 3rd RT state. The 1st replay winning combination to the 8th replay winning combination are winning combinations that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game.

State transition winnings that only result in a transition of the game state include the 1st BB winning, the 2nd BB winning, and the CB winning.

When the "red 7" symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on an active line, a first BB win is achieved, and when the "white BAR" symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on an active line, a second BB win is achieved. When these BB wins are achieved, the game state transitions to the BB state. When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "watermelon", "first replay", and "black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a CB win is achieved. When a CB win is achieved, the game state transitions to the CB state.

In addition, although not a winning combination, there are some winning combinations that cause the game state to transition to the first RT state. Specifically, when the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white BAR" symbol, "LUCKY" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "white bell" symbol, and "cherry" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol and "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the game state transitions to the first RT state. Also, when the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "white BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol, and "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the game state transitions to the first RT state. In the following, the combinations of the above symbols are referred to as transition results.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, i.e., to start the variable display of the patterns. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate.

Button-shaped stop switches 42-44 are provided to the right of the start lever 41 and are operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each stop switch 42-44 is located directly below the display window 26L, 26M, and 26R that corresponds to the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are connected to the main control device 101, which will be described later. The main control device 101 then determines that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a output a detection signal of a LOW signal, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the detection signal switches from a LOW signal to a HIGH signal. The main control device 101 determines that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated by determining this signal switch. When the main control device 101 determines that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, it controls the reel corresponding to the operated switch to stop spinning.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the left reel 32L stops spinning, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the middle reel 32M stops spinning, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the right reel 32R stops spinning. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means that is operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal insertion slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting game media. In addition, considering that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the action of the player directly inserting medals, it can also be said to constitute a direct input means for directly inputting game media.

The medals inserted through the medal insertion port 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46, which serves as a passage switching means provided on the back of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 stored inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to a medal tray 50 from a medal discharge port 49 provided on the lower front surface of the front door 12, and are returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out medals to players. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48, and pays out the medals to a medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. In addition, a reserve tank 54 is provided to the right of the hopper device 51 to prevent medals from being stored in the storage tank 52 by more than a predetermined amount. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a is provided to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion port 45. If the return switch 55 is operated when a medal inserted into the medal insertion port 45 is stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically linked and operated, and the medal stuck in the selector 46 is returned from the medal ejection port 49.

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 is provided for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56, and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time. The credit insertion switches 56 to 58, together with the medal insertion slot 45, constitute an input means for inputting game media. In addition, while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the action of the player directly inserting medals, the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 only involve the action of inserting virtual medals based on the stored memory. Considering this, it can also be said that they constitute an indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media.

Between the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57, there is provided an effect switch 66 that is operated when an effect occurs. In other words, to the left of the effect switch 66, there are the first credit input switch 56 and the third credit input switch 58, and to the right of the effect switch 66, there is the second credit input switch 57.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores as virtual medals any surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) or medals paid out when a prize is won, and when the settlement switch 59 is operated while virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, when focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, the settlement switch 59 can also be said to constitute a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display section 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, a remaining payout number display section 61 that displays the number of medals remaining to be paid out until the BB state ends, and a payout number display section 62 that displays the number of medals paid out when a win occurs. These display sections 60 to 62 are made up of seven-segment displays, but can of course be replaced with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25, to the right of the payout number display unit 62, there is provided an instruction monitor 68 having a push order indicator that notifies the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and a zone indicator that indicates an advantageous zone, which is a zone in which the player can play in an advantageous situation by changing the winning rate of minor roles by notifying the operation order. The instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

At the top of the front door 12, there are provided an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, a pair of left and right speakers 64 that play various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game status, and an auxiliary display unit 65 that gives the player various information. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and since the game using each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be performed by the main display unit, it is referred to as the auxiliary display unit 65 in this embodiment. At the back of the auxiliary display unit 65, there is provided a display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65.

Inside the housing 11, a power supply box 70 is provided to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside and is equipped with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is an activation switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. The setting key insertion hole 73 is for the hall manager or the like to adjust the medal payout. In other words, the hall manager or the like can set the winning probability of the slot machine 10 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it ON. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting an error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls the game is attached to the cabinet 11.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams in Figures 12 and 13.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around the CPU 102, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. This main control device 101 functions as the main board built into the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main control device 101, there are the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects when each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45, a payout detection sensor 51a that detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51, a first credit insertion detection sensor 52a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, and a second credit insertion detection sensor 53a that detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. 6a, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, a third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the third credit insertion switch 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON, and other sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104.

The power supply unit 91 is connected to the input side of the main control unit 101 via the input/output port 104. The power supply unit 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to the main control unit 101 and each electronic device of the slot machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power supply cut-off state and generates a power failure signal not only during a power failure but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. For this reason, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 volts DC in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and is configured to determine that the power supply has been cut off and output a power failure signal when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volts, for example. The power failure signal is supplied to both the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal and executes the power failure processing described below. The power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts to be used as a drive voltage in control systems such as the main control unit 101, even if the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time for which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to allow the main control unit 101 to perform power outage processing.

The output side of the main control device 101 is connected via an input/output port 104 to the reel unit 31 (more specifically, the stepping motor for rotating each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided on the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit display unit 60, the remaining number of coins to be paid out display unit 61, the number of coins to be paid out display unit 62, the instruction monitor 68, the display control device 81, and an external centralized terminal board 121 that can transmit information to a hall management device (not shown), etc.

The above-mentioned CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, a RAM 106 that secures a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105, and various counters, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, and other processing circuits required for the slot machine 10, as well known in the art (not shown). The ROM 105 and RAM 106 form a main memory as a storage means, and the programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-mentioned ROM 105 as part of the control programs.

RAM 106 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from power supply device 91 even after power to slot machine 10 is cut off. RAM 106 is provided with a backup area in addition to memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the results of a winning combination lottery, a stop information storage area 106b for storing stop information used when controlling the stop of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a status information storage area 106c for storing game status such as BB status.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power interruption (including power interruption by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below) in the event that power is interrupted due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage is resolved (including power on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before power was interrupted based on the information in the backup area. Writing to the backup area is performed when power is interrupted by the power outage processing (see Figure 14), and the restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed during main processing when power is turned on.

The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. When the power is cut off, an NMI interrupt process is immediately executed as a power outage flag generation process.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181, which is a calculation processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181, and a RAM 183 for securing a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), with the main control device 101 connected to the input side and the upper lamps 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 connected to the output side. The display control device 81 drives and controls the upper lamps 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 based on various commands input from the main control device 101. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that performs auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that manages the overall game. In other words, by providing a sub-board for sounds, lamps, and displays indirectly related to the game, the burden on the main board is reduced.

The display control device 81 is connected to an input side of the display control device 81 with a performance switch 66 (more specifically, a performance switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the performance switch 66). The display control device 81 may also be configured to drive and control the various display units 60 to 62, 68.

Next, the control processes executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processes of the CPU 102 can be broadly divided into main processing which is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing which is started periodically (every 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing which is started when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal. Below, the processes related to the progress of the game among these processes, i.e. timer interrupt processing, and normal processing performed in the main processing will be described with reference to Figures 14 to 41.

Figure 14 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the main control unit 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control unit 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 that are used in normal processing, which will be described later, are saved to a backup area in the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here is an overview of how power outages are handled.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power outage signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power outage signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes an NMI interrupt process and sets a power outage flag in a power outage flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure process, first, it is determined whether the transmission of the command has been completed, and if the transmission has not been completed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process, and the transmission of the command is terminated. If the transmission of the command has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a RAM judgment value for judging whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal or not when the power failure is resolved is calculated and saved in the backup area, thereby prohibiting subsequent access to the RAM. After the above process is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power being completely cut off and processing being unable to be executed. Note that, in consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise, for example, the power failure signal is checked to see if it is being output before entering the infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not being output, it means that the power failure state has been recovered, so writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the power failure signal continues to be output, the infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, even in an infinite loop, it checks whether the power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, it transitions to the main process.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are carried out.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clear process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed to enable the CPU 102 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S106, a stepping motor control process is performed to drive the stepping motors that are the reel drive motors for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to rotate. In step S107, a sensor monitoring process is performed to read the status of various sensors such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input/output port 104 (see FIG. 12), and to monitor whether the read results are normal or not. In step S108, a timer calculation process is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to send various commands, such as a lottery result command, to the display control device 81. In step S111, a segment data setting process is performed to set the segment data to be displayed in the credit display unit 60, the remaining number of coins to be paid display unit 61, and the number of coins to be paid display unit 62. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed to supply the segment data set in the segment data setting process to each display unit 60 to 62 and display the corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. In step S113, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register that were saved to the backup area in the previous step S101 are restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, the normal processing that performs the main control related to the game will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 15.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. In step S202, a pre-start process is performed to enable play. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 and the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like finishes, the game management process shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As part of the game management process, in step S203, various game information and other data (e.g., random number values used in the previous game) stored in the RAM 106 are cleared. Then, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether any replay winning was achieved in the previous game. If any replay winning was achieved, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically insert virtual medals in the same number as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is terminated. Specifically, if a replay winning is achieved in a 3 bet game, a process to automatically insert three virtual medals is performed, and if a replay winning is achieved in a 1 bet game, a process to automatically insert one virtual medal is performed. Incidentally, in this embodiment, a replay winning is not achieved in a 2 bet game, but if the replay winning can be achieved in a 2 bet game as well, it is advisable to set this automatic insertion process to automatically insert two virtual medals.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. In other words, if any replay winning was achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals he owns and without inserting medals. If no replay winning was achieved, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether there is an abnormality in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process. If an abnormality is detected, an abnormality occurrence process is performed to put the slot machine 10 into an error state and notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the sensor reading result is normal, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated, and if the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process is performed to pay out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, it is determined whether medals have been inserted or the credit insertion switches 56-58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, and if either has been done, a medal insertion process is carried out to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process ends. Also, if neither medals have been inserted nor the credit insertion switches 56-58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process ends as is.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether the number of medals bet has reached the specified number. In this slot machine 10, the specified number in the CB state is set to "2", and the specified numbers in the game states other than the CB state (specifically, the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the BB state) are set to "1" and "3". In other words, in the CB state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "2", and in the game states other than the CB state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "1" or "3". In other words, in the game states other than the CB state, if medals have not been bet, or if medals have been bet but the number of medals is "2", a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of medals bet has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the process from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards is performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, the mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. Such mode transition notification process will be described in detail later.

After the processing of step S206 has been performed, a bet command including information on the processing result of step S206 and information on the number of bets that was determined to be positive in step S205 is set as an output target to the display control device 81, which acts as a sub-control device. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt processing. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the bet command will be explained in detail later.

After executing the process of step S207, it is determined in step S208 whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the process from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards is carried out.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, it means that a start command has been issued to start the game, since the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that a prescribed number of medals have been bet. In such a case, in step S209, an effective line setting process is performed to set the combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line. That is, in a 3-bet game, only the right-downward line L4 is set as an effective line, and in a 2-bet game, the lower line L3 and the right-downward line L4 are set as effective lines. Also, in a 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. In step S210, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process in step S211, the reel control process in step S212, the medal payout process in step S213, the RT state process in step S214, and the bonus state process in step S215 are executed in order, and then the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S211 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG. 16.

In step S301, a random number is obtained to be used when determining whether a winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuitry latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates random numbers between 0 and 65535, and the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuitry in the RAM 106 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuitry of this slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table is selected to determine whether the winning combination has been achieved. The slot machine 10 has six game states, broadly categorized as a normal game state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state, and a lottery table is set for each game state.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is selected. For example, if the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, and a lottery table for the normal gaming state is selected. In addition, in this slot machine 10, six winning probabilities from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are prepared in advance, and it is possible to set which winning probability is used to execute the internal processing by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole and turning it on, and performing a predetermined operation. In step S302, when the setting state is "Setting 1", a lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "Setting 6", a lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here we provide additional information about the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process that is started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is started after the initialization process when the power is turned on in a state where the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned ON. In the winning probability setting process, the setting value is updated by one for each operation of the start lever 41 as a predetermined operation, and for example, the setting value is updated so that "setting 1" → "setting 2" → "setting 3" → "setting 4" → "setting 5" → "setting 6" → "setting 1" every time the start lever 41 is operated once. Note that each setting value is displayed, for example, on the credit display unit 60, and the display is updated each time the setting value is updated. Then, based on the setting key detection sensor 73a being turned OFF, the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display of the credit display unit 60 is also terminated. The setting value set in the winning probability setting process is stored in RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a lottery table selection process is performed based on the stored setting value.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. Figure 17 is a lottery table for the normal game mode selected in the normal game mode of "Setting 3". The lottery table has index values IV set, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and has a point value PV set.

After the lottery table is selected, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, a judgment value DV is set to be used when judging whether the hand is a hit or a miss. In this judgment value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current judgment value DV to set a new judgment value DV. Note that in the initial judgment value setting process, the random number value acquired in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV (1) is added to this random number value to set the new judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is judged. In the winning combination judgment, it is judged whether the judgment value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, it is judged in step S306 whether the first BB, the second BB, or the CB is won. Specifically, it is judged whether the index value IV (IV = 32 to 48) including any of the first BB, the second BB, or the CB is judged in step S305 in a positive judgment. If the judgment is positive in step S306, a process is performed in which the corresponding bonus winning flag (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag) is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S307. If the judgment is negative in step S306 or after the processing of step S307 is performed, a process is performed in step S308 in which the winning flag of each small winning combination corresponding to the index value IV judged in a positive judgment in step S305 is set in the winning flag storage area 106a. For example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=32, the 1st BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th small win flag, the 33rd small win flag, and the 35th small win flag are set in step S308. Also, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=15, winning flags indicating that the 30th and 41st small wins have been won are set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S308.

Incidentally, if the winning flag that has been set is not a winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (first BB winning flag) or a winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (second BB winning flag), the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag was set ends (see S203 in normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is a first BB winning flag or a second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset on the condition that the corresponding winning has been achieved. In other words, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over multiple games.

In addition, in steps S306 to S308 when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a combination other than the 1st BB, 2nd BB, or CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and if a combination other than the 1st BB, 2nd BB, or CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 32, the 1st BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th small win flag, the 33rd small win flag, and the 35th small win flag are set. Also, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 33, for example, the 2nd BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th small win flag, the 33rd small win flag, and the 35th small win flag are set.

It is also possible to prepare a separate lottery table for when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, and perform lottery processing using the separately prepared lottery table when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over. In this case, it is preferable to set each index value IV and point value PV in the separately prepared lottery table so that the first BB, second BB, and CB are not won.

If the judgment value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV has not been won. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S309, and in the following step S310, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a target for judgment of whether it is a hit or a miss. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target for judgment of whether it is a hit or a miss, the process returns to step S304, and the judgment of the hit or miss of the hand is continued. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used to judge whether the previous hand is a hit or a miss (i.e., the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S305, the hand is judged based on the judgment value DV. Incidentally, when the winning combination is judged using the lottery table shown in FIG. 17, the probability of winning a normal replay (probability of winning when IV=1) is about 1 in 7.3, the probability of winning a strong cherry (probability of winning when IV=13) is about 1 in 300, and the probability of winning a weak cherry (probability of winning when IV=14) is about 1 in 183. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV=15) is about 1 in 300, the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV=16) is about 1 in 218, the probability of winning Chance A (probability of winning when IV=17) is about 1 in 252, and the probability of winning Chance B (probability of winning when IV=18) is about 1 in 252. The probability of winning a middle bell (probability of winning when IV=19) is about 1 in 32,800, and the probability of winning a no-question bell (probability of winning when IV=20) is about 1 in 65,500. The probability of winning the forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, and pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 21 to 24) is about 1 in 43.7, the probability of winning the center push bell 1, center push bell 2, right push bell 1, and right push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 25 to 28) is about 1 in 21.8. The probability of winning the strong cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is about 1 in 1770, the probability of winning the strong cherry overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is about 1 in 4680, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 34) is about 1 in 3280, and the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is about 1 in 6550. The probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is about 1 in 3280, and the probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 37) is about 1 in 6550. The probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is about 1 in 13100, and the probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is about 1 in 6550. The probability of winning Chance A overlap 1, Chance A overlap 2, Chance B overlap 1, and Chance B overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 40 to 43) is each about 1 in 3280. The probability of winning the middle bell overlap 1 and middle bell overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 44, 45) is each about 1 in 2620. The probability of winning the 1st BB and 2nd BB alone (probability of winning when IV = 46, 47) is each about 1 in 65500. The probability of winning CB (the probability of winning when IV = 48) is approximately 1 in 19.9. Also, the probability of not winning any role is approximately 1 in 1.96.

In addition, in the lottery table for the normal game mode, 0 is set for the point values PV of IV = 2 to 12, 29 to 31, and 49 to 52. Therefore, in the normal game mode, these index values IV do not result in a win.

After the winning flag is set in step S308, or if it is determined in step S310 that there are no targets to be judged, this means that the judgment of the winning or losing role has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S311, where a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a specified period of time.

In the following step S312, a lottery result response process is performed. In the lottery result response process, a process for determining whether or not to change the game state depending on the results of the lottery in steps S301 to S311, a process for notifying the push order role, etc. are performed. The lottery result response process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S312, a lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the result of the hand win/loss judgment. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no command is sent to the display control device 81. The command is sent to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S314, a stop information setting process is executed to set symbols that can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to a winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in steps S306 to S308. For example, when a strong cherry is won (won when IV=13) and the strong cherry winning flag is set, the stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the 28th small combination, the 32nd small combination, the 35th small combination, and the 1st BB winning are allowed to be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, when a strong cherry overlap 1 is won (won when IV=32) and the strong cherry winning flag and the 1st BB winning flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the 28th small combination, the 33rd small combination, the 35th small combination, and the 1st BB winning are allowed to be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the following step S315, if multiple stoppable symbol information was set in step S314, a priority setting process is executed to set the priority order. For example, if multiple roles out of small win, replay, and bonus have been won, the following priority order is set. If a small win and a bonus have been won, the priority order is set so that a small win is given priority, and if a small win cannot be won, a bonus win is won. If a replay and a bonus have been won, the priority order is set so that a replay win is given priority.

For example, if Strong Cherry Duplicate 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th, 33rd, and 35th minor symbols and the 1st BB win is set, the priority is set so that the 28th, 33rd, and 35th minor symbols win takes precedence over the 1st BB win. Also, for example, if the 1st BB win is carried over and a normal replay is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 1st BB win and the 1st replay win is set, the priority is set so that the 1st replay win takes precedence over the 1st BB win.

After executing the process of step S315, the first section display process is executed in step S316, and then the lottery process ends. The first section display process is a process related to the display control of the indication monitor 68, and this process will be described in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S212 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG. 18.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a spin effect process is performed. The spin effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during an invalid period, based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311. In step S402, a spin start process is performed to start the spinning of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the spin start process, it is checked whether a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reels started spinning in the previous game, and if not, it waits until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and a motor control initialization process is performed to set spin start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106. By performing this process, the stepping motor acceleration process is started in the stepping motor control process (step S106) of the timer interrupt process, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts spinning. For this reason, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not start spinning immediately. After that, it waits until each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R spins at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and the spin start process is terminated. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 lights up the lamps (not shown) of each stop switch 42-44 to notify the player that it is possible to issue a stop command.

Following the spin start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the process waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, where it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, i.e., whether a stop command has been generated. If a stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S403, where it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. If a stop command has been generated, a stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to allow the display control device 81 to know which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop command. If a stop command command has been set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the spinning reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (lower in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, five stop modes are prepared as stop modes for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated: a stop mode in which the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for one symbol, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for two symbols, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for three symbols, and a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for four symbols. Therefore, in step S407, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol that will actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, a reel stop process is performed in step S410 to stop the rotation of the reel. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

The second stop information setting process is a process for changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels have stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that has been set and the stop results of the stopped reels. In this slot machine 10, for example, when a win occurs when IV=24 to 31, that is, when a win occurs on the sequential push bell 1, sequential push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, center push bell 1, center push bell 2, right push bell 1, and right push bell 2 (hereinafter, these are also collectively referred to as "push order bells") (see FIG. 17), the second stop information setting process is performed to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

Figure 19 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning form that is achieved. For example, when the center push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the second, seventh, or ninth small role win is achieved when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the stop information is set so that the first small role win is achieved when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, and the stop information is set so that the second, seventh, or ninth small role win is achieved when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. However, even if the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding win may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The arrangement of symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, in a game state other than the CB state in the normal game mode (3-bet game), the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, and only the right-downward line L4 is set as an active line. Therefore, when the same symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of four symbols or less, when a winning symbol is formed, the winning symbol can be stopped on the active line regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switch 43. On the other hand, for symbols arranged so that a section of five symbols or more is formed, the player needs to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 while aiming at the symbol in order to stop it on the active line.

As an example, a case will be described in which the center push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42, the center stop switch 43, and the right stop switch 44 are operated in that order. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the second small win, the seventh small win, or the ninth small win.

The second small win symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol. The "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also function as the seventh small win symbol and the ninth small win symbol. The second small win symbols (the seventh small win symbols and the ninth small win symbols) are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the interval between them is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol stops on the upper row regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "cherry" symbol number 4 on the left reel 32L has reached the middle row, the "red bell" symbol number 7 stops on the upper row as shown in FIG. 20(a). As a result, there is still room for the second small win, the seventh small win, or the ninth small win to be established on the right-downward line L4.

The second small win symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white BAR" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "white BAR" symbol is only located at the 18th position. The seventh small win symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is only located at the 14th position. And the ninth small win symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "cherry" symbol is only located at the 11th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second small win symbol, the seventh small win symbol, or the ninth small win symbol may stop on an active line, or none of the second small win symbol, the seventh small win symbol, or the ninth small win symbol may stop on an active line.

Specifically, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any one of the "First Replay" symbols (No. 13) to the "First Replay" symbols (No. 17) has reached the bottom row, the "White BAR" symbol, which is the second small win symbol, stops in the middle row. As a result, there is room for the second small win symbol to be established on the right-downward line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any one of the "Second Replay" symbols (No. 9) to the "First Replay" symbols (No. 13) has reached the bottom row, the "Red 7" symbol, which is the seventh small win symbol, stops in the middle row, as shown in FIG. 20(b). As a result, there is room for the seventh small win symbol to be established on the right-downward line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any one of the "White Bell" symbols (No. 6) to the "Youth" symbols (No. 10) has reached the bottom row, the "Cherry" symbol, which is the ninth small win symbol, stops in the middle row. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at any other time, the second, seventh, and ninth minor win symbols cannot be stopped in the middle row even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after sliding four symbols. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such a time, the number 2 "LUCKY" symbol or the number 6 "white bell" symbol will stop in the middle row.

When the 7th minor winning symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 7th minor winning symbol can be achieved.

The seventh minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white bell" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white bell" symbol is only located at the number 10 position. Therefore, depending on the timing of the operation of the right stop switch 44, the seventh minor winning symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated when any of the "first replay" symbol (number 6) to the "white bell" symbol (number 10) has reached the bottom row, the "white bell" symbol, which is the seventh minor winning symbol, stops at the bottom row, as shown in FIG. 20(c). As a result, the seventh minor winning symbol is established on the right downward line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other time, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the bottom row. For example, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the "Second Replay" symbol (3) reaches the bottom row, the "Watermelon" symbol (4) stops at the bottom row as shown in FIG. 20(d). The combination of the "White Bell" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition result as shown in FIG. 11.

When the 9th minor winning symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 9th minor winning symbol can be achieved.

The 9th minor symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Youth" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "Youth" symbol is located at the 15th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the 9th minor symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when any of the "First Replay" symbol (11th) to the "Youth" symbol (15th) has reached the bottom row, the "Youth" symbol, which is the 9th minor symbol, stops at the bottom row. As a result, the 9th minor symbol wins on the right downward line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other timing, the "Watermelon" symbol or the "First Replay" symbol stops at the bottom row. The combination of the "White Bell" symbol ("Red Bell" symbol), the "Cherry" symbol, and the "Watermelon" symbol ("First Replay" symbol) from the left is a transition result as shown in FIG. 11.

When the second small win symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the second small win can be achieved.

The second small win symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white BAR" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white BAR" symbol is located at the 18th position. Therefore, depending on the timing of the operation of the right stop switch 44, the second small win symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated when any of the "watermelon" symbol at 14 to the "white BAR" symbol at 18 has reached the bottom row, the "white BAR" symbol, which is the second small win symbol, stops at the bottom row. As a result, the second small win is established on the right downward line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other time, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the bottom row. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), the "white BAR" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) is a transition result, as shown in Figure 11.

If the second, seventh and ninth minor win symbols on the middle reel 32M do not stop in the middle row, i.e. if the "LUCKY" or "white bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M stop in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the "watermelon" or "first replay" symbol stops in the lower row.

The "watermelon" and "first replay" symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R so that the distance between each of the "watermelon" and "first replay" symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" or "first replay" symbol stops on the lower row regardless of the timing of the operation. The combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "LUCKY" symbol ("white bell" symbol), and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition result as shown in FIG. 11.

In this way, if center push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → center stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 are operated in that order, the second small win will be made, the seventh small win will be made, the ninth small win will be made, or the transition result will stop.

Next, we will explain an example in which the center push bell 1 is won and the center stop switch 43, left stop switch 42, and right stop switch 44 are operated in that order. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the first small win.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor winning symbol, are arranged so that the distance between each "red bell" symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "red bell" symbols will stop in the middle row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the left reel 32L, the first minor symbols, the "red bell" and "white bell", are arranged so that the distance between each of the first minor symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol stops on the top row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the right reel 32R, the first minor winning symbols, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, are arranged so that the distance between each first minor winning symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol will stop on the bottom row regardless of the timing of the operation.

As described above, if center push bell 1 is won and the center stop switch 43, left stop switch 42, and right stop switch 44 are operated in that order, the first small prize will be won regardless of the timing of the operation.

If the push order bell is won, and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in one or two pre-defined operating sequences, the first small prize will be won regardless of the timing of the operation, and if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in any other operating sequence, a small prize will be won or the transition result will stop on an active line depending on the timing of the operation. Incidentally, if the middle bell is won, the 38th small prize will be won regardless of the operating sequence and timing, and if the no-question bell is won, the first small prize will be won regardless of the operating sequence and timing.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process for setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the winning combination is lined up on an active line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on an active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the symbols stopped on the lower row of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and it is determined whether or not a winning combination is established on the active line. If a winning combination is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. If the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the payout number corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an error occurrence process is performed to notify the user of the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, a winning result response process is performed in step S414. In the winning result response process, a process for shifting the game state based on the winning result is performed. The winning result response process will be described in detail later.

After the winning result processing is performed, the second section display processing is executed in step S415. The second section display processing is processing related to the display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this processing will be explained in detail later. After that, in step S416, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 knows the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control processing is terminated.

Next, we will provide an overview of the medal payout process in step S213.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether the payout number set in the payout information storage area is 0. If the payout number is 0, it means that the previous payout determination process determined that no small winning combination was achieved. In such a case, it is determined whether any of the first replay winning combination to the eighth replay winning combination was achieved, based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the replay winning combinations was achieved, the medal payout process is terminated as is, and if any of the replay winning combinations was achieved, a replay setting process is performed to set the game state to a replay state, and the medal payout process is terminated. Note that in the start waiting process (step S204) described above, if it is determined that the current game state is a replay state, an automatic insertion process is performed.

On the other hand, if the payout number set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the system pays out medals in the same number as the payout number, and ends the medal payout process. Specifically, when the credit counter count value has not reached the upper limit (the number of medals stored is 50), the system adds the payout number to the credit counter count value, and displays the added value on the credit display unit 60. When the credit counter count value has reached the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the payout number, the system drives the medal payout rotating plate, and pays out medals from the hopper device 51 to the medal tray 50 via the medal discharge port 49. In addition, the medal payout process also performs a process of changing the payout number displayed on the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the payout of medals. In addition, when the current game state is BB state, the system subtracts the payout number from the value of the remaining payout number counter described later, and subtracts the remaining payout number displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61.

Next, the RT state processing in step S214 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 21.

In step S501, it is determined whether the transition result has stopped on the winning line. If the transition result has stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, where it is determined whether the current game state is a normal game state. If the current game state is a normal game state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. Then, this process is terminated. If it is determined in step S501 that the transition result has not stopped on the winning line, the process proceeds to step S504, where it is determined whether the second replay winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If the second replay winning has been established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. Then, this process is terminated. Furthermore, if the transition result stops on a pay line in a game state other than the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, and this process ends.

If the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the game state transitions to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table for the first RT state is selected.

Figure 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the first RT state of "setting 3". When compared to the lottery table for the normal game state (see Figure 17), the lottery table for the first RT state has different point values PV for IV = 1 to 5, and the same point values PV are set for the other index values IV. For this reason, when using this lottery table to determine whether a combination is a win or lose, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 52 is equal to the respective winning probabilities in the normal game state, the probability of winning when IV = 1 is approximately 1 in 67.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2 to 5 is approximately 1 in 32.8. The probability of not winning any combination is approximately 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22, if a win occurs when IV=1, a normal replay is won, if a win occurs when IV=2, a first promotion replay 1 is won, if a win occurs when IV=3, a first promotion replay 2 is won, if a win occurs when IV=4, a first promotion replay 3 is won, and if a win occurs when IV=5, a first promotion replay 4 is won. The probability of winning when IV=1 to 5 is about 1 in 7.30. The probability of winning a normal replay under normal gaming conditions is also about 1 in 7.30. In other words, when the gaming state transitions to the first RT state, the odds of winning small roles, replays, and bonuses are the same as in the normal gaming state, while the winning mode in which the replay privilege is awarded changes to one different from that in the normal gaming state. More specifically, in the normal game state, only the first replay win, which does not transition the game state, is achieved, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first replay win, the third replay win, which transitions to the second RT state, is achieved.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), in addition to the above-mentioned case where the push order bell is won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning pattern that is established depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command, even if the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 are won.

Figure 23(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning form that is achieved. Unlike when the push order bell is won, when the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, the first replay win or the third replay win is always achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. For the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4, one of the six operation sequences is associated with the third replay, and the other operation sequences are associated with the first replay.

In addition, in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, seventh replay, and eighth replay are also allocated as winning roles. However, these sixth replay to eighth replay are not associated with any of the six operation sequences described above. Therefore, even if the sixth replay to eighth replay are winning in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, they will not win regardless of the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44.

More specifically, for the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is assigned the first replay and the third replay, the first promotion replay 2 is assigned the sixth replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the first promotion replay 3 is assigned the seventh replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 4 is assigned the eighth replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay. However, for any of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replay is either the first replay or the third replay. This is to make it difficult to understand the operation sequence that results in the third replay winning. That is, for example, if there is only one type of first promotion replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay winning will also be only one type, and it may be possible to intentionally achieve the third replay winning when the first promotion replay is won. This relationship is not limited to the relationship between the first promotion replays 1 to 4, but can also be said for other overlapping roles.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S504 that the second replay winning combination has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S506, where it is determined whether or not the third replay winning combination has been achieved, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If the third replay winning combination has been achieved, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, and this process ends.

If the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the game state transitions to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table for the second RT state is selected.

Figure 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the first RT state (see Figure 22), the point values PV for IV = 1 to 10 in the second RT state are different, and the same point values PV are set for the other index values IV. For this reason, when the lottery table is used to determine whether a winning combination is a winning combination, the probability of winning when IV = 11 to 52 is equal to the winning probability in the first RT state, the probability of winning when IV = 1 is about 1 in 13.2, the probability of not winning when IV = 2 to 5, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is about 1 in 10.5, and the probability of winning when IV = 9 and 10 is about 1 in 7.00. The probability of losing, i.e. not winning any combination, is about 1 in 150. In other words, when the game transitions to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal game state and the first RT state, which is advantageous for the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first replay win that does not transition the game state, the second replay win that transitions to the first RT state, and the fourth and fifth replay wins that transition to the third RT state are achieved.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), in addition to the above-mentioned cases where the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning pattern that is established depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command, even when the fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, and second promotion replay 2 are won.

Figure 23(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning patterns that are achieved. If Fall Replay 1 to Fall Replay 3 are won, the first replay win or the second replay win will always be achieved, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. If Second Promotion Replay 1 is won, the first replay win, the fourth replay win, or the fifth replay win will always be achieved, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. If Second Promotion Replay 2 is won, the first replay win or the fourth replay win will always be achieved, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The numbers attached to the 4th replay in the diagram correspond to the symbol combination when the 4th replay win is established. "1" corresponds to the symbol combination that results in a scatter, and "2" corresponds to the symbol combination that results in a red 7, red 7, and black BAR stopping in the middle row (see FIG. 11). For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first when the 2nd promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination that results in a scatter will stop and the 4th replay win will be established, or the symbol combination that results in a red 7, red 7, and black BAR stopping in the middle row will stop and the 4th replay win will be established.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S509, where it is determined whether the fourth replay winning or the fifth replay winning has been achieved based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If the fourth replay winning or the fifth replay winning has not been achieved, the process ends as is. If the fourth replay winning or the fifth replay winning has been achieved, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, and the process ends.

If the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, the game state transitions to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the third RT state based on the fact that the third RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table for the third RT state is selected.

Figure 25 is a lottery table for the third RT state selected in the third RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the second RT state (see Figure 24), the point values PV for IV = 9 to 12 in the third RT state are different, and the same point values PV are set for the other index values IV. For this reason, when the lottery table is used to determine whether a winning combination is a winning combination, the probability of winning when IV = 1 to 8, 13 to 52 is equal to the respective winning probabilities in the second RT state, the winning combination is not a winning combination when IV = 9, 10, and the winning combination is about 1 in 7.00 when IV = 11, 12. The probability of losing when none of the combinations are won is about 1 in 150. In other words, when the game state transitions to the third RT state, the winning combinations of small combinations, replays, and bonuses are won with the same probability as in the second RT state, while the winning combination in which the replay privilege is granted changes to one different from that in the second RT state. More specifically, in the third RT state, in addition to the first replay winning event that does not result in a transition to the game state and the second replay winning event that transitions to the first RT state, the sixth replay winning event, the seventh replay winning event, and the eighth replay winning event that does not result in a transition to the game state, and the third replay winning event that transitions to the second RT state are also achieved.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), even if BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won, the stop information is set to change the winning pattern that is established depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

Figure 23(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of stop switches 42-44, and the winning mode that is achieved. If BAR Replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of stop switches 42-44, one of the first replay winning, sixth replay winning, seventh replay winning, or third replay winning will always be achieved. If BAR Replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of stop switches 42-44, one of the first replay winning, sixth replay winning, eighth replay winning, or third replay winning will always be achieved.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 26.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a bonus state, i.e., whether the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If it is not a bonus state, the bonus determination process shown in steps S602 to S614 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, in step S602, it is determined whether any of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, or CB winning flag is set. If any of the winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether a CB winning has occurred based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If a CB winning has occurred, in step S604, a CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. In step S605, a remaining payout counter for counting the number of medals remaining that can be paid out during the bonus state, which is provided in the state information storage area 106c, is set to 15. By performing the processes of steps S604 to S605, the game state transitions to the CB state.

Here is a brief explanation of CB and CB states.

When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon", "first replay" or "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a CB win occurs. The CB symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R so that there is a gap of 4 symbols or less between each CB symbol. Therefore, when a CB win occurs, the CB win occurs regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44.

When the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the main control device 101 determines that the game state is in the CB state. Then, in step S205 of the normal processing, it determines whether the number of medals bet has reached "2" instead of "3", and in the active line setting process (step S209), it sets the lower line L3 and the right-downward line L4 as active lines.

In step S302 of the lottery process, a lottery table for the CB state is selected. Although the illustration of the lottery table for the CB state is omitted, in the lottery table for the CB state, the point value PV for IV = 1 to 48 is set to "0", and the point value for IV = 49 to 52 is set to "16384" (see FIG. 17 for the correspondence between IV and winning roles). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning CB small/medium role 1 (probability of winning when IV = 49) is about 1 in 4.00, the probability of winning CB small/medium role 2 (probability of winning when IV = 50) is about 1 in 4.00, the probability of winning CB small/medium role 3 (probability of winning when IV = 51) is about 1 in 4.00, and the probability of winning CB small/medium role 4 (probability of winning when IV = 52) is about 1 in 4.00. No events of losing occur.

Figure 27 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode that is established. Although detailed explanation is omitted, regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, regardless of which of the CB small and medium roles 1 to 4 is won, some small role winning is always established. Since the CB state is a two-bet game, when the 1st small role winning, the 27th small role winning, the 31st small role winning, the 36th small role winning to the 38th small role winning are established, 15 medals are paid out, and when the 2nd small role winning to the 26th small role winning, the 28th small role winning to the 30th small role winning, the 32nd small role winning to the 35th small role winning are established, 14 medals are paid out. In other words, when the game transitions to the CB state, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out.

In addition to or in addition to CB as a winning combination and the CB state as a game state, a single bonus (SB) that allows one game (JAC game) to be played as a winning combination, and an SB state to which a transition occurs based on the winning of the single bonus (winning) may be provided.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that a CB win has not been achieved, this means that a bonus win flag other than CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether a 1st BB win or a 2nd BB win has been achieved.

If any of the BB wins is achieved, the BB win flag set in the win flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S611. After that, in step S612, the remaining payout counter is set to 216, and the remaining payout display unit 61 is caused to display 216. The number set in step S612 corresponds to the upper limit payout number in the BB state, and the BB state is ended on the condition that medals paid out in the BB state equal to or more than this number have been paid out.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the game state transitions to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding lottery table for the BB state is selected.

Figure 28 shows a lottery table for the BB state, which is selected in the BB state to which the first BB or second BB transition occurs. In the lottery table for the BB state, the point value PV for IV = 1 to 28, 32 to 52 is set to "0", and the point value for IV = 29 to 31 is set to "21845". Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning BB small/medium role 1 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is about 1 in 3.00, the probability of winning BB small/medium role 2 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is about 1 in 3.00, and the probability of winning BB small/medium role 3 (probability of winning when IV = 34) is about 1 in 3.00. The probability of not winning any role is about 1 in 65,500.

Figure 27 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode that is established. As described above, the first small role winning is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, even if BB small/medium role 1, BB small/medium role 2, or BB small/medium role 3 is won, regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, one of the first small role winning, the 39th small role winning, and the 40th small role winning will always be established. Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, when the first small role winning, the 39th small role winning, and the 40th small role winning are established, 9 medals are paid out. Since the probability of a miss in the BB state is about 1 in 65,500, it can be said that the BB state is a game state in which 9 medals are paid out with a very high probability.

If the result of step S609 is negative and any BB win has been achieved, a carryover command is set in step S613. The carryover command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the display control device 81 that a bonus win has not been achieved in the bonus winning game and that a so-called carryover state has occurred. This carryover command is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process.

In this embodiment, in games played in the carryover state, winning other bonuses is restricted. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal game state (FIG. 17), if a player wins a combination with a bonus (first BB, second BB, CB) with IV=32 to 48, the winning flags corresponding to these bonuses are not set. Therefore, for example, if a player wins a combination with each of the minor winning combinations with IV=32 to 45, the winning flags for these minor winning combinations are set, but the winning flags corresponding to the bonuses are not set, and only the winning of the minor winning combination is valid. In other words, the carryover state can be said to be a state in which the selection of bonuses is restricted.

If the game state has transitioned to the CB state or the BB state, a positive determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S614. In the end determination process, it is determined whether the value of the remaining payout counter has reached 0, and if it has reached 0, a process is performed to clear the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag. Furthermore, in the end determination process, if the BB setting flag is cleared, an end flag is set to indicate that the BB state has ended in this game. The end determination process will be described in detail later.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB winning is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game state when the CB winning is established will be returned to. For example, when the CB winning is established under the normal game state, the game state will be returned to the normal game state after the CB state ends, and when the CB winning is established under the third RT state, the game state will be returned to the third RT state after the CB state ends. On the other hand, when the first BB and the second BB are won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether the corresponding BB winning is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, the game state will be transitioned to the normal game state even if the first BB winning is established under the second RT state. Incidentally, if a player transitions to the CB state, he or she can expect to gain an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals by the time the CB state ends. If a player transitions to the BB state, he or she can expect to gain an increase of approximately 144 (=9x24-3x24) medals by the time the BB state ends.

When none of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, and CB winning flag are set (when step S602 is NO), when none of the first BB winning, second BB winning, and CB winning are established and a carryover command is set (when the process of step S613 is executed), when a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout counter in steps S605 and S612, and when the end determination process is performed in step S614, the process proceeds to step S606 and a status command is set. Here, the status command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to allow the display control device 81 to grasp the game status at the time of the end of the game (i.e., the game status of the next game), and in step S606, a status command corresponding to the setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is set. After setting the status command, in step S607, an external signal setting process is performed to set an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10. Then, this process ends.

<Overview of game state transitions and display modes>
Here, the transition of the gaming state will be described with reference to Figure 29. Note that the CB state is not shown in the figure.

If the game state is BB state, when the number of medals paid out in that BB state reaches 216, the BB state ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state.

When the game state is the normal game state, the game state transitions to the first RT state when the transition result stops on a winning line, and the game state transitions to the BB state when a BB win is made. The transition result stops on a winning line when a miss occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the normal game state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4, which trigger a transition to the second RT state, and the second promotion replays 1 and 2, which trigger a transition to the third RT state, are not won, so there is no transition from the normal game state to the second RT state or the third RT state (see Figure 17).

When the game state is the first RT state, the game state transitions to the second RT state by the establishment of the third replay winning. The third replay winning is established when any of the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a specified operating sequence (see FIG. 23(a)). In the lottery process using the lottery table for the first RT state, the second promotion replays 1 and 2, which trigger the transition to the third RT state, are not won, so there is no transition from the first RT state to the third RT state.

In addition, if a BB win is not achieved in a game in which a BB win flag is set, i.e., if the BB win flag is carried over, the game state will transition to the normal game state, and if a BB win is achieved in a game in which a BB win flag is set, the game state will transition to the BB state. There is no transition from the first RT state to the third RT state.

When the game state is in the second RT state, the game state transitions to the third RT state by the establishment of the fourth replay winning or the fifth replay winning. In addition, when the second replay winning is established and when the transition result stops on the valid line, the game state transitions to the first RT state. The fourth replay winning and the fifth replay winning are established when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 23(b)). The second replay winning is established when any of the fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition result stops on the valid line when a miss occurs in the game in which the push order bell is won. In addition, if a BB win is not achieved in a game in which a BB win flag is set, i.e., if the BB win flag is carried over, the game state transitions to the normal game state, and if a BB win is achieved in a game in which a BB win flag is set, the game state transitions to the BB state.

When the game state is in the third RT state, the game state transitions to the second RT state by the establishment of the third replay winning. In addition, when the second replay winning is established and when the transition result stops on the winning line, the game state transitions to the first RT state. The third replay winning is established when BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 23(c)). The second replay winning is established when any of Fall Replay 1 to Fall Replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition result stops on the winning line when a miss occurs in the game where the push order bell is won. In addition, if the corresponding BB win is not achieved in the game in which the winning flag is set, i.e., if the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state transitions to the normal game state, and if the corresponding BB win is achieved in the game in which the BB winning flag is set, the game state transitions to the BB state.

In this slot machine 10, the main control unit 101 manages six game states: normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, BB state, and CB state, and also manages five display modes, broadly classified as normal mode, challenge mode, attack mode (including added-on specialization zone), VB mode (including added-on specialization zone), and BB mode.

Figure 30 shows the transition between display modes.

The BB mode is a display mode that is entered when the first BB win or the second BB win is achieved, and ends when the BB state ends. In other words, the BB mode is a display mode that corresponds to the BB state. Therefore, when entering the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of approximately 144 medals.

When transitioning from normal mode or challenge mode to BB mode, a lottery for transitioning to challenge mode and a lottery for transitioning to attack mode are held in the BB mode. If the transition lottery for transitioning to attack mode is won, transition to attack mode will occur after the BB mode ends, and if the transition lottery for transitioning to challenge mode is won, transition to challenge mode will occur after the BB mode ends. If neither transition lottery is won, transition to normal mode will occur after the BB mode ends. If transitioning from attack mode to BB mode, return to attack mode after the BB mode ends. If transitioning from VB mode to BB mode, return to VB mode after the BB mode ends.

Normal mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 is not announced when the push order bell is won, or when 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, and BAR replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order replays") are won. In normal mode, a lottery for transition to challenge mode and a lottery for transition to attack mode are held. If the lottery for transition to challenge mode is won, the mode transitions from normal mode to challenge mode, and if the lottery for transition to attack mode is won, the mode transitions from normal mode to attack mode. There is no transition to VB mode from normal mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each of the game states of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the normal mode, when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified, so it is rare to transition to the second RT state or the third RT state, and it corresponds almost entirely to the normal game state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that approximately 1.59 medals will be lost for each game played, and if the game state at that time is the second RT state or the third RT state, it can be expected that approximately 0.06 medals will be lost for each game played.

The challenge mode is a display mode in which the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell or push order replay is won, just like the normal mode. In the challenge mode, a lottery is held to determine whether to switch to the attack mode. However, the probability of winning the lottery to switch to the attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the probability of winning the lottery to switch to the attack mode in the normal mode. In other words, the challenge mode is set as a mode in which it is easy to switch to the attack mode, although the operation sequence is not notified, just like the normal mode. If the lottery to switch to the attack mode is won, the mode switches from the challenge mode to the attack mode. If the game is played a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times) without winning the above-mentioned lottery to switch, the mode switches from the challenge mode to the normal mode. There is no transition to the VB mode from the challenge mode.

The challenge mode corresponds to each of the game states of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the challenge mode, since the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when a push order replay is won, it rarely transitions to the second RT state or the third RT state, and it almost always corresponds to the normal game state or the first RT state. In the challenge mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that approximately 1.59 medals will be lost for each game played, and if the game state at that time is the second RT state or the third RT state, it can be expected that approximately 0.06 medals will be lost for each game played.

The attack mode is a display mode in which the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. The attack mode is made up of four attack modes, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, which have different probabilities of transitioning to the VB mode, and the probability of transitioning to the VB mode is higher in each attack mode than in the normal mode. If the transition lottery to the VB mode is won, the mode transitions from the attack mode to the VB mode. If the game is played a predetermined number of times (e.g. 50 times) without winning the transition lottery to the VB mode, the mode transitions from the attack mode to the normal mode.

The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set to have different probabilities of winning the lottery to transition to VB mode. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to VB mode is set to be highest for the fourth attack mode and lowest for the first attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery to transition to VB mode is set to increase in the order of the first attack mode, the second attack mode, the third attack mode, and the fourth attack mode.

The attack mode corresponds to each of the game states of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the attack mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in both the case of winning the push order bell and the case of winning the push order replay, so if the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation sequence, it corresponds to approximately the second RT state. In the attack mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it is expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 per game, and if the game state at that time is the second RT state or the third RT state, it is expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 per game. Since the attack mode continues for at least 50 games after the game state transitions to the second RT state, when the attack mode is entered, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals.

VB mode, like attack mode, is a display mode in which the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. The difference between VB mode and attack mode is that when the second promotion replay 1 or second promotion replay 2 is won, the attack mode announces the operation sequence for achieving the first replay win, whereas the VB mode announces the operation sequence for achieving the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win (see FIG. 23(b)).

The VB mode corresponds to each of the game states of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the VB mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in both the case of winning the push order bell and the case of winning the push order replay, and the operation sequence for establishing the fourth replay prize or the fifth replay prize in the case of winning the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is notified. Therefore, the VB mode corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation sequence. In the VB mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it is expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 for each game, and if the game state at that time is the second RT state or the third RT state, it is expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game. In VB mode, the game state continues for at least 25 games after transitioning to the third RT state, so when transitioning to VB mode, players can expect to gain an additional 50 medals.

Regarding the transition of display modes when the number of medals owned by a player increases, the general flow is to transition from normal mode to challenge mode, from challenge mode to attack mode, and then from attack mode back to normal mode. In attack mode, a lottery is held to transition to VB mode, so if a loop occurs in which attack mode transitions to VB mode and then back to attack mode, the player can expect to increase the number of medals owned.

As mentioned above, when comparing normal mode and challenge mode, the probability of winning the lottery to switch to attack mode is set to be higher in challenge mode than in normal mode. Therefore, challenge mode is also called a chance zone that creates hope for switching to attack mode.

In addition, the attack mode is set to the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode differs for each attack mode. When transitioning from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the attack mode, the mode basically transitions to the first attack mode. In the first attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is held, and a lottery for transition to the second attack mode is held. If the lottery for transition to the second attack mode is won, the mode transitions to the second attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode increases. In the second attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is held, and a lottery for transition to the third attack mode is held. If the lottery for transition to the third attack mode is won, the mode transitions to the third attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode increases. In the third attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is held, and a lottery for transition to the fourth attack mode is held. If you win the lottery to transition to the 4th attack mode, you will transition to the 4th attack mode, and your chances of winning the lottery to transition to the VB mode will increase.

Therefore, when transitioning to attack mode, the attack mode is promoted from first attack mode → second attack mode → third attack mode → fourth attack mode, increasing the probability of transitioning to VB mode, making it easier for a loop between attack mode and VB mode to occur.

As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured so that the player can increase the number of medals owned in each of the display modes, attack mode, VB mode, and BB mode. In addition, in conjunction with each display mode, multiple RT states and multiple states such as BB state and CB state are switched back and forth depending on the winning of each replay or the stopping of the transition result. As described above, when the push order replay is won or the push order bell is won, the corresponding replay winning is achieved or the transition result is stopped depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 43. Also, in the attack mode and VB mode, when the push order bell is won, the operation sequence that can achieve the first minor prize is announced, so that the player can expect to increase the number of medals owned.

The display mode configuration is explained below.

The configurations related to the display modes are broadly divided into (1) processing related to the lottery for switching between display modes, (2) processing for switching the game state based on the results of the lottery for switching between display modes, (3) processing for switching the display mode based on the winning result, and (4) processing related to the notification effects on the sub side. Each will be explained in order below.

<Processing for lottery for switching display modes>
<Lottery result processing>
The process related to the display mode transition lottery in (1) is performed in the lottery result response process (step S312) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main control device 101. Hereinafter, the lottery result response process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S701, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, chances A and B and a middle bell, strong cherry overlap 1, 2, weak cherry overlap 1, 2, strong watermelon overlap 1, 2, weak watermelon overlap 1, 2, chance A overlap 1, 2, chance B overlap 1, 2, middle bell overlap 1, 2 (for example, see FIG. 17, IV=13-19, 32-45, hereinafter these roles are collectively referred to as "special roles") or not. If the lottery result is a special role, it is determined in step S702 whether any of the bonus winning flags of the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag has already been set.

In the processing of step S702, when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag has already been set, this indicates a carryover state, and does not include games in which the 1st BB or the 2nd BB has been won. In other words, when it is determined in step S702 that the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag has not already been set, this includes cases in which a specific role has not been won that results in a double win with the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, as well as cases in which a specific role has been won that results in a double win with the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. In other words, if a specific role that results in a double win with the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won during the carryover state, a positive determination is made in step S702.

If the result of step S702 is negative, the process of switching the display mode based on the specific combination is executed in steps S703 to S709. On the other hand, if the result of step S701 is that the specific combination has not been won or if the bonus win flag is set in step S702, the process of switching the display mode is executed in steps S710 to S713.

Specifically, if it is determined in step S701 that a specific role has been won and if it is determined in step S702 that the bonus win flag has not been set, then in step S703 it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal game state or the first RT state. If a positive determination is made in step S703, then in step S704 it is determined whether or not an attack mode win flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The attack mode win flag is a flag that is set when the attack mode transition lottery is won and is cleared when transitioning to the attack mode. If a negative determination is made in step S704, then in step S705 the first specific role process is executed.

<First specific role processing>
The first specific role processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the first specific role processing is performed when the player is in the normal game state or the first RT state and has not won the attack mode. The display mode in this case corresponds to the normal mode or the challenge mode. In the first specific role processing, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not the display mode should be transitioned to the challenge mode, and a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not the display mode should be transitioned to the attack mode. In addition, in the first specific role processing, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, a process is performed to add to the number of continued games in the challenge mode.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether the current display mode is in the challenge mode or not. When the current display mode is not in the challenge mode, it means that the current display mode is the normal mode. If the determination is negative in step S801, in step S802, a normal time table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for the attack mode lottery. On the other hand, if the determination is positive in step S801, in step S803, a challenge mode table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for the attack mode lottery. In the normal time table and the challenge mode table, the transition probability to the attack mode is set according to the type of specific combination. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the transition probability to the attack mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. In addition, the transition probability to the attack mode is different overall between the normal time table and the challenge mode table, and the transition probability to the attack mode is set higher for the challenge mode table than for the normal time table.

After the table for the attack mode transition lottery is acquired in step S802 or step S803, the attack mode lottery process is executed in step S804. In this process, the counter for the lottery is acquired from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106, and the lottery counter is compared with the lottery table acquired in step S802 or step S803 to perform the lottery for transition to the attack mode.

In step S805, based on the processing result of step S804, it is determined whether or not the lottery for switching to the attack mode has been won. If the lottery for switching to the attack mode has been won, in step S806, it is determined whether or not the currently won attack mode is the super attack mode. The super attack mode is an attack mode that is started after passing through the add-on specialization zone. For example, if the initial number of games in the normal attack mode is 50, the attack mode is started with the initial number of games of 50 plus the number of games added in the add-on specialization zone. Therefore, the degree of advantage for the player differs between the normal attack mode and the super attack mode, and the super attack mode is more advantageous for the player than the attack mode. The super attack mode is set to be won in a portion (for example, 1%) of the cases in which the attack mode is won in the attack mode lottery processing of step S804.

The probability of winning Super Attack Mode may be set to be different when the table for normal times is obtained (step S802) and when the table for challenge mode is obtained (step S803). In this case, if the probability of winning Super Attack Mode is set to be higher in challenge mode than in normal times, the advantage of challenge mode is guaranteed. Also, although the probability of winning Attack Mode is lower in normal times than in challenge mode, it may be set so that the proportion of Super Attack Mode when winning is high. Furthermore, the probability of winning Super Attack Mode and the proportion of Super Attack Mode when Attack Mode is won may be set to be different depending on the type of specific role.

If it is determined in step S806 that the Super Attack Mode has been won, the process of setting the Specialized Zone Winning Flag is executed in step S807.

If the determination in step S806 is negative, or after the processing in step S807 has been executed, the processing to set the attack mode winning flag is performed in step S808. That is, when the attack mode is won, the attack mode winning flag is set, and in some cases (when the super attack mode is won), the specialized zone winning flag is set.

After the process of step S808, the process for setting the premonition mode is performed in steps S809 to S812. The premonition mode is a mode in which a winning suggestion effect that suggests that an attack mode, a challenge mode, or the like has been won is more likely to occur, and after each game in the premonition mode, a winning notification that an attack mode, a challenge mode, or the like has been won is made. The premonition mode continues for 0 to 32 games, and the number of games that the premonition mode continues is set to differ depending on the type of attack mode, challenge mode, or the like that has been won, and whether or not a bonus has been won at the same time. If an attack mode, a challenge mode, or the like has been won at the same time as a bonus, a bonus winning notification is made after the premonition mode, and a notification that an attack mode, a challenge mode, or the like has been won is made after the bonus state ends. If the number of premonition games is set to 0, a winning notification is made without going through the premonition mode.

Specifically, in step S809, a process is performed to obtain the premonition game number table from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 35, in the premonition game number table, the number of premonition games to be selected is set to be different depending on the current display mode (normal mode or challenge mode) and whether or not a bonus has been won at the same time. Specifically, when the current display mode is the normal mode and when the attack mode is won, if the bonus has not been won at the same time, 1 to 5 games are selected with an 80% probability, and 6 to 10 games are selected with an 20% probability. On the other hand, even if the current display mode is the normal mode, if the attack mode and the bonus have been won at the same time, 1 to 5 games are selected with an 10% probability, 6 to 10 games are selected with an 20% probability, 11 to 20 games are selected with an 50% probability, and 21 to 32 games are selected with an 20% probability. In other words, when the display mode is the normal mode, if the bonus has been won at the same time, a longer premonition game number is more likely to be selected than if the bonus has not been won at the same time. In other words, if a bonus is not won at the same time, the attack mode will be announced a relatively short number of games after the attack mode winning game. On the other hand, if the current display mode is challenge mode, 0 games will be selected as the premonition game count regardless of whether a bonus is won at the same time. In other words, in this case, the premonition mode will not be set, and the attack mode will be announced in the game following the winning game.

In addition, when the Super Attack Mode, which is an attack mode with an additional special zone, is won, if the bonus is not won at the same time, 1 to 5 games are selected with a 70% probability, and 6 to 10 games are selected with a 30% probability. On the other hand, if the bonus is won at the same time when the Attack Mode is won, 1 to 5 games are not selected, 6 to 10 games are selected with a 20% probability, 11 to 20 games are selected with a 30% probability, and 21 to 32 games are selected with a 50% probability. In other words, even when the Super Attack Mode is won, if the bonus is won at the same time, a longer number of premonition games is more likely to be selected than when the bonus is not won at the same time, and if the bonus is not won at the same time, the Super Attack Mode is announced with a relatively short number of games from the Super Attack Mode winning game. Even when the Super Attack Mode is won, if the current display mode is the Challenge Mode, 0 games is selected as the premonition game number regardless of whether the bonus is won at the same time or not. In other words, in this case, the premonition mode will not be set, and a winning notification for the Super Attack mode will be made in the game following the winning game.

In step S810, a process is performed to select the number of games to be played in the premonition mode this time based on the premonition game number table obtained in step S809 and the counter for selection obtained from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. Then, in step S811, a process is performed to input the premonition game number to the premonition counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. The premonition counter is a counter that is decremented by one for each game, and when the premonition counter reaches 0, the premonition mode ends and a winning notification is issued to inform the player that they have won the selection to transition to attack mode, etc.

In step S812, a process is executed to set the premonition command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is the sub-side control device. The premonition command includes information on the lottery result that triggered the premonition mode (the display mode to be transitioned to after the premonition mode, in the case of step S812 above, BB mode and attack mode) and the number of premonition games. The process on the display control device 81 side based on receiving the premonition command will be explained in detail later. After the process of step S812 is executed, the first specific role process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S805 that the lottery for transition to the attack mode has not been won, the process proceeds to step S813. In step S813, a challenge mode lottery process is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process, a table for the challenge mode lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The table for the challenge mode lottery has a probability of transition to the challenge mode set according to the type of specific combination. For example, between a strong cherry and a weak cherry, the probability of transition to the challenge mode is set higher for the strong cherry than for the weak cherry.

The case where step S813 is performed includes a case where the display mode is the challenge mode. In this case, too, step S813 executes a challenge mode lottery process, and the lottery table is a common table for the normal mode and the challenge mode. Note that, as in steps S801 to S803, the lottery table may be different depending on whether or not the game is in the challenge mode.

In step S814, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode has been selected based on the processing result of step S813. If it is determined that the challenge mode has been selected, in step S815, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If it is the normal mode and not the challenge mode, in step S816, a process is executed to set a challenge mode selection flag in the various flags storage area 106d of the RAM 106.

After the processing of step S816 is performed, the setting processing for the premonition mode is performed in steps S817 to S820 in the same manner as in steps S809 to S812. That is, the premonition game number table is obtained in step S817, a lottery process for the premonition game number is performed in step S818, the premonition game number is set in step S819, the premonition command is set in step S820, and then the first specific role processing is terminated.

In the premonition game number table obtained in step S817, as shown in FIG. 35, if the challenge mode is won alone, games 1 to 5 are selected with a 90% probability, and games 6 to 10 with a 10% probability. On the other hand, if the challenge mode is won simultaneously with a bonus, games 1 to 5 are selected with a 20% probability, games 6 to 10 with a 30% probability, and games 11 to 20 with a 50% probability. In other words, even when the challenge mode is won, if the bonus is also won simultaneously, a longer premonition game number is more likely to be selected than if the bonus is not won simultaneously, and if the bonus is not won simultaneously, the challenge mode win is announced a relatively short number of games after the challenge mode winning game.

In addition, regarding the number of premonition games, regardless of whether or not a bonus is won at the same time, a longer number of premonition games is more likely to be selected for the attack mode than for the challenge mode, and a longer number of premonition games is more likely to be selected for the super attack mode than for the attack mode, and if a display mode that is advantageous to the player is won, a longer number of premonition games is more likely to be selected. Also, if a bonus is not won at the same time, a premonition game number of 10 games or less is selected, and if the premonition mode continues for 11 games or more, it is confirmed that a bonus and a premonition game have been won at the same time. Even if a bonus and a premonition game are won at the same time, a premonition game number of 20 games or less is selected when the challenge mode and a bonus are won at the same time, while a premonition game number of 21 games or more is also selected when the attack mode or super attack mode and a bonus are won at the same time, and if the premonition mode continues for 21 games or more, it is confirmed that it is a bonus + attack mode or super attack mode. In this way, the fun of predicting the winning content in relation to the number of premonition games is added.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a specific role is won, if the attack mode, challenge mode, etc. is not won, the mode may transition to a pseudo premonition mode. This process will be described later, but the number of games set as the pseudo premonition mode is anywhere from 1 game to 20 games. Therefore, if the winning indication effect occurs frequently over 21 games or more, it is confirmed that the premonition mode or pseudo premonition mode transitioned to due to the specific role is the premonition mode.

If it is determined in step S815 that the player has been selected to play in challenge mode again during the challenge mode, processing for adding additional games to the challenge mode is performed in steps S821 to S825. That is, in step S821, it is determined whether or not the bonus win flag is set. If the bonus win flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S822, where a lottery process for the number of games to be added to the challenge mode is performed.

Here, "adding" refers to adding the number of continuing games in challenge mode or attack mode, and the number of added games corresponds to the value to be added to the number of continuing games. In step S822, the value to be added to the number of continuing games in challenge mode is determined by lottery.

Specifically, in the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for lottery of the number of added games in challenge mode is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The table for lottery of the number of added games in challenge mode is set so that the number of added games increases according to the type of specific role. For example, a strong cherry adds 30 challenge mode games with an 80% probability, and 50 games with a 20% probability. Also, a weak cherry adds 5 games with an 80% probability, and 20 games with a 20% probability.

In step S823, a process of adding the number of games in the challenge mode is performed. In this process, a process of adding a value corresponding to the number of added games drawn in step S822 to a counter that manages the number of continued games in the challenge mode (more specifically, a challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106) is performed. Then, in step S824, a process of setting the add-on command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then this first specific role process is terminated. The add-on command contains information that an add-on has occurred, the number of added games, and the target for the add-on (challenge mode or attack mode). The process on the display control device 81 side that receives the add-on command will be explained in detail later, but the display control device 81 performs an add-on notification (add-on performance) as a notification of the information contained in the add-on command based on the reception of the add-on command.

If the bonus win flag is set in step S821, the process proceeds to step S825. In step S825, a challenge mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the first specific role process is terminated. The challenge mode addition flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the condition for adding the number of games in the challenge mode has been met. As will be described in detail later, if the bonus ends while the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode is added at the end of the bonus. In other words, the game for which the addition notification is made is set to differ depending on whether or not a bonus is won at the same time.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result response process (FIG. 31), if a negative judgment is made in step S703 or a positive judgment is made in step S704, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the second RT state. If it is the second RT state, it is determined in step S707 whether or not the VB mode win flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The VB mode win flag is a flag that is set when the VB mode transition lottery is won and is cleared when transitioning to the VB mode. If a negative judgment is made in step S707, a second specific role process is executed in step S708. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S706 or a positive judgment is made in step S707, a third specific role process is executed in step S709.

<Second specific role processing>
The second specific combination processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The second specific role processing is performed when the player is in the second RT state and has not won the VB mode. In this case, the display mode corresponds to the attack mode. In the second specific role processing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the display mode should be switched to the VB mode. In addition, in the second specific role processing, a lottery is performed to upgrade the rank of the attack mode, and a process is performed to increase the number of continuing games in the attack mode.

That is, in step S901, a process is performed to determine the rank of the attack mode. As already explained, in this embodiment, four attack mode ranks are provided, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, and the probability of transitioning to the VB mode differs for each rank. Therefore, in step S901, it is determined whether the rank of the current attack mode is the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode.

In step S902, a VB mode lottery table corresponding to the rank of the attack mode grasped in step S901 is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set according to the type of specific combination. For example, between strong cherry 1 and weak cherry, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set higher for strong cherry 1 than for weak cherry. In addition, in the VB mode lottery table for each rank, the probability of transition to the VB mode is generally different, and it is set so that the probability of transition to the VB mode is higher for the second attack mode than for the first attack mode, the probability of transition to the VB mode is higher for the third attack mode than for the second attack mode, and the probability of transition to the VB mode is higher for the fourth attack mode than for the third attack mode.

In step S903, a lottery for switching to VB mode is performed using the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counter acquired from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S903 corresponds to winning the VB mode.

If the result of step S904 is positive, a process is performed in step S905 to set a VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. After that, a process for setting the premonition game number is performed in steps S906 to S909. That is, a premonition game number table is obtained in step S906, the premonition game number is drawn in step S907, the premonition game number is set in step S908, and the premonition command is set in step S909, and then the second specific role process is terminated. However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, for VB mode winning during attack mode, the premonition game number is set to 0 in all cases. Therefore, if VB mode is won during attack mode, the winning notification will be made in the next game.

If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not a VB mode win, the process proceeds to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processes for promoting the rank of the attack mode.

In step S910, an attack mode promotion lottery process is performed. In this process, a table for the promotion lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. There are multiple tables for the promotion lottery according to the rank of the attack mode, and specifically, there are three tables for the first attack mode, a table for the second attack mode, and a table for the third attack mode (promotion lottery is not performed when the player is in the fourth attack mode). In each table, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set according to the type of specific role. For example, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. Additionally, the tables for each attack mode are set so that the table for the second attack mode has a lower promotion probability than the table for the first attack mode, and the table for the third attack mode has a lower promotion probability than the table for the second attack mode, so that as the attack mode rank is promoted, it becomes more difficult to be promoted to the next rank.

In step S911, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step S910 was a promotion win. If a promotion win was found, in step S912, attack mode promotion processing is performed. In this processing, the rank flag provided in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106 is rewritten from the rank flag corresponding to the current attack mode rank to a rank flag one rank higher. Then, in step S913, a promotion command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The promotion command includes information on the attack mode to be promoted to. The display control device 81, which has received the promotion command, controls the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., to perform a presentation for the attack mode of the promoted rank. As an attack mode effect in the auxiliary display unit 65, for example, a different background color effect is set depending on the rank of the attack mode, and when the display control device 81 receives the above promotion command, it notifies the user that the attack mode rank has been promoted, and controls the attack mode effect to be performed in a background color according to the rank to which the user has been promoted.

If it is determined in step S911 that the player has not won the promotion lottery, or after the processing of step S913 has been executed, processing is performed in steps S915 to S920 to add to the number of continuing games in attack mode.

That is, in step S914, a lottery process for adding on the number of games in attack mode is performed. In this lottery process, a table for attack mode add-on lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The table for attack mode add-on lottery is set so that the probability of winning the add-on lottery differs depending on the type of specific role. For example, a strong cherry has an 80% probability of winning the add-on lottery, and a weak cherry has a 20% probability of winning the add-on lottery. The probability of winning may differ depending on the rank of the attack mode. Then, in step S915, it is determined whether or not the add-on lottery has been won. If it is determined that the add-on lottery has not been won, the second specific role process is terminated.

If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, in step S916, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S917, where a lottery process for the number of additional games in attack mode is performed. In this lottery process for the number of additional games, a table for lottery for the number of additional games in attack mode is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The table for lottery for the number of additional games in attack mode is set so that the number of additional games differs depending on the type of specific combination. For example, with a strong cherry, 20 games of attack mode are added with a 90% probability, and 80 games are added with a 10% probability. Also, with a weak cherry, 5 games are added with a 95% probability, and 100 games are added with a 5% probability.

In step S918, a process of adding the number of games in attack mode is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of added games drawn in step S917 is added to a counter that manages the number of continued games in attack mode (more specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106). Then, in step S919, a process of setting the add-on command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then this second specific role process is terminated.

If the bonus win flag is set in step S916, the process proceeds to step S920. In step S920, an attack mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second specific combination process is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the condition for adding the number of games in the attack mode has been met. As will be described in detail later, if the bonus ends while the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode is added at the end of the bonus. In other words, similar to the notification of the number of games added in the challenge mode, the game for which the addition notification is made is set to differ depending on whether or not a bonus is won at the same time.

<Third specific role processing>
Next, the third specific combination process executed in step S709 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The third specific combination process is performed when the player is in the third RT state, or when the player is in the second RT state and has won the VB mode. In this case, the display mode corresponds to the attack mode or the VB mode. The third specific combination process performs a process to add to the number of continuing games in the attack mode.

That is, in step S1001, a lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. This process is similar to the process in step S914. Note that the probability of winning the additional lottery may be different between the lottery process in step S914 and the lottery process in step S1001.

In step S1002, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step S1001 was a winning result for the additional bonus. If it is determined that the additional bonus lottery has been won, in step S1003, it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1004, where a lottery process for the number of additional bonus games in attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1005, the number of games in attack mode is added, and in step S1006, the process of setting the additional bonus command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the third specific role process is terminated. The processes in steps S1003 to S1006 are the same as the processes in steps S916 to S919. The number of additional bonus games may be different in the lottery process in step S916 and the lottery process in step S1004.

If the result of step S1002 is negative, the third specific combination process is terminated. If the result of step S1003 is that the bonus win flag is set, the attack mode add-on flag is set in step S1007, and the third specific combination process is terminated. The attack mode add-on flag is as described above.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result response process (Figure 31), if it is determined in step S701 that the result of this lottery process is not a win for a specific role, or if it is determined in step S702 that a bonus win flag is set even if a specific role is won, it is determined in step S710 whether or not the result of this lottery process is a win for a push order replay or a push order bell (hereinafter, these are also collectively referred to as "push order roles"). If a push order role is won, push order role processing is executed in step S711. Such push order role processing will be explained in detail later.

After executing any of the processes of step S705, step S708, step S709, and step S711, or after a negative judgment in step S710, the process proceeds to step S712. In step S712, it is judged whether or not a specialized zone flag corresponding to the added specialized zone is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The specialized zone flag is a flag that is set based on the establishment of the seventh replay winning, and the added specialized zone indicates a state in which the number of continued games in the attack zone is added with a high probability over multiple games. If the specialized zone flag is set in step S712, specialized zone processing is executed in step S713. The specialized zone flag, specialized zone, and specialized zone processing will be described in detail later. If a negative judgment is made in step S712, or after the processing of step S713 is executed, this lottery result response processing is terminated.

As described above, when a specific role is determined to have been won in the lottery result response process, a lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode, and processing for adding to the number of continued games in challenge mode or attack mode, etc. are performed, provided that the game is not in a carryover state. In other words, even if a specific role is won, during the carryover state, a lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode, and processing for adding to the number of continued games in challenge mode or attack mode, etc. are not performed, and their implementation is restricted. When the transition lottery to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode is won, a premonition game is played, and then a notification that the transition lottery has been won is made. Therefore, the process for transitioning the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery will be described below.

<Process for transitioning game state based on result of lottery for transition of display mode>
(2) In the process for shifting the game state based on the result of the lottery for shifting the display mode, a process for notifying the winning of the lottery for shifting the display mode and a process for notifying the winning of the lottery for shifting the game state are performed. First, the process for notifying the winning of the lottery for shifting the display mode will be described.

<Mode transition notification process>
The notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode transition notification process is performed when a predetermined betting operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is the specified number). The mode transition notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S1101, it is determined whether the number of premonition games is 0. The number of premonition games is counted in the winning result corresponding process described below, and the number of premonition games is decremented by 1 each time a game is played. If the number of premonition games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated.

If the number of premonition games is 0, in step S1102 it is determined whether or not the bonus win flag is set. In other words, it is determined whether or not the current premonition mode was a premonition mode triggered by a bonus win. If the bonus win flag is set, in step S1103 a bonus win notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the mode transition notification process is terminated. Upon receiving the bonus win notification command, the display control device 81 notifies the player that a bonus has been won, for example by displaying "Bonus confirmed!!" on the auxiliary display unit 65. Note that the type of bonus that has been won (either the first BB or the second BB) may also be notified.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, if a bonus and an attack mode, a challenge mode, or the like are simultaneously won, a winning notification of the attack mode, etc. is made at the end of the bonus notified in step S1103. The process related to such winning notification will be explained in detail later, but if a winning notification of the attack mode, etc. is made in conjunction with a winning notification of the bonus, it is recommended to set a winning notification command for the attack mode, etc. in conjunction with the bonus winning notification command set in step S1103.

If the determination in step S1102 is negative, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode win flag is set. In other words, it is determined whether or not the present premonition mode was a premonition mode triggered by the win of the challenge mode. If the challenge mode win flag is set, the challenge mode win flag is cleared in step S1105. Then, in step S1106, a challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The challenge mode flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S1107, a challenge mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode start command notifies the user that the challenge mode is about to start by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later.

Then, in step S1108, counting the number of times the challenge mode will continue is started. Specifically, an initial value (e.g., 10) for the number of games to continue in the challenge mode is set in the challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1108 is performed, the processing for notifying the transition to this mode is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1104 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1109 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the present premonition mode was a premonition mode triggered by the winning of the attack mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1110. Then, in step S1111, an attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The attack notification flag is a flag for transitioning the game state to the second RT state in response to the winning of the attack mode transition lottery. Then, in step S1112, an attack mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode winning notification command notifies the player that the attack mode transition lottery has been won by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing step S1112, the mode transition notification process ends.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the winning notification mode for the Super Attack mode is different from the winning notification mode for the Attack mode. Therefore, in step S1112, it is preferable to set the Attack mode winning notification command so as to include information on whether or not it is the Super Attack mode. The winning notification mode for the Attack mode and the winning notification mode for the Super Attack mode need only be different enough for the player to distinguish, and more preferably, the winning notification mode for the highly advantageous Super Attack mode should be more flashy than the winning notification mode for the Attack mode.

The winning notification format for the Attack Mode and Super Attack Mode may be made the same. By doing so, it is possible to make it appear as if the winning content has been upgraded from Attack Mode to Super Attack Mode between the Attack Mode winning notification game and the start notification game, eliminating the drag caused by the difference between the Attack Mode winning notification game and the start notification game.

If it is determined in step S1109 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1113 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. In other words, it is determined whether or not the present premonition mode was a premonition mode triggered by the winning of the VB mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1114. Then, in step S1115, a VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The VB notification flag is a flag for transitioning the game state to the third RT state in association with the winning of the VB mode transition lottery. Then, in step S1116, a VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command notifies the player that the VB mode transition lottery has been won by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S1116, this mode transition notification process ends. Also, if it is determined in step S1113 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the mode transition notification process ends.

That is, of the challenge mode, attack mode, and VB mode, which are transitioned through the premonition mode, the challenge mode is initiated based on a bet operation made when the premonition game count in the premonition mode reaches 0. On the other hand, for the attack mode and VB mode, only a notification that the attack mode transition lottery or the VB mode transition lottery has been won is made based on a bet operation made when the premonition game count in the premonition mode reaches 0, and the attack mode or VB mode does not start even if the premonition game count reaches 0. This is due to the difference that the challenge mode as a display mode does not involve a transition in the game state, while the attack mode and VB mode involve a transition in the game state; specifically, the attack mode is initiated by transitioning to the second RT state, and the VB mode is initiated by transitioning to the third RT state.

As already explained, the second RT state is entered when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, and the third RT state is entered when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay wins are established. And when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, it is the case that the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning these promotion replays corresponds to the third replay win, etc. Therefore, when the transition lottery to the attack mode or VB mode is won, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in the game in which the role that will transition these game states is won, making it possible to transition the game state. In addition, after a notification is made that the player has won the lottery to switch to attack mode or VB mode, a notification of the preparation state (for example, a notification that says "preparing") is made until the attack mode or VB mode starts (until the game state switches).

<Explanation about display mode transition>
The notification process for changing the game state is performed in the push order role process (step S711) in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 31). Prior to the explanation of the push order role process, an overview of the case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be explained with reference to FIG.

＜Outline of the push order announcement＞
Notification of the operation sequence when the push order role is won (push order notification, push order notification performance, sequence notification) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the instruction monitor 68. Here, the push order notification performance on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be explained using as an example a case where the push order role is won when the operation sequence to be notified this time is center → right → left. The push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 will be explained in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 37(a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, of the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 in the figure) is marked with the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. In addition, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning role (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). This allows the player to recognize the winning role in the current game and that the stop switch that should be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. In addition, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display is displayed with the number 2 and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 to indicate that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 37(b), the center button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 is displayed large. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 37(c), the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the left button display corresponding to the left stop switch 42 is displayed large. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

To explain the timing of the push order notification, it is set to be executed during the inactive period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts, through the acceleration period, until the reels reach constant speed rotation. By configuring the push order notification to be executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective in this way, it is possible for the player to recognize the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 and then operate the stop switches 42 to 44 as desired, allowing the game to progress at a good tempo.

<Push order processing>
Next, the push order role processing executed in step S711 in the lottery result response processing (Figure 31) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 38.

In step S1201, it is determined whether the current lottery result is any one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. A positive determination is made in step S1201 when the first replay or the third replay wins, depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1202, where it is determined whether an attack notification flag has been set in the various flags storage area 106d of RAM 106. As already explained, the attack notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of premonition games in the premonition mode becomes 0 after the transition lottery to the attack mode is won in the mode transition notification process (Figure 36).

If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1203, processing for notifying the push order for the third replay is executed. Specifically, of the first and third replays, the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay winning is notified (see FIG. 23(a)). Then, in step S1204, processing is performed to set the push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is the sub-side control device, and then this push order role processing is terminated. The push order notification command contains information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on receiving the push order notification command will be explained in detail later.

The case where the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay winning is notified in step S1203 is basically assumed to be after the lottery for transition to attack mode is won, and the winning notification for attack mode is made after passing through the premonition mode, but before transition to attack mode. That is, in the lottery table in the second RT state and the third RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 cannot be won, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 can only be won in the first RT state. However, even during attack mode, there are cases where the game state falls from the second RT state to the first RT state due to an incorrect operation, etc., and even in such a case, it is possible to quickly return to the second RT state by winning the first promotion replays 1 to 4.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1201, then in step S1205 it is judged whether the current lottery result is any of Fall Replays 1 to 3. A positive judgment is made in step S1205 when the first replay or the second replay wins based on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1206 it is judged whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, then in step S1207 processing for the push order notification for the first replay is executed. Specifically, out of the first replay and the second replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay winning is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). Thereafter, in step S1208, a push order notification command is set, and then this push order processing is terminated.

In this way, if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in a situation where the transition lottery to attack mode has been won, the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay win is notified, making it possible to transition the game state to the second RT state. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1202, the push order role processing ends without performing the process for the push order notification. Therefore, for example, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning attack mode in the first RT state, there are cases where the first replay win is achieved and cases where the third replay win is achieved.

In addition, if fall replays 1 to 3 are won while the attack notification flag is set, the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay win is notified, making it possible to prevent the game state from transitioning to the first RT state. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1206, the push order role processing ends without performing the process for the push order notification. Therefore, for example, when the attack mode ends, the attack notification flag is cleared, and the display mode transitions to the normal mode, the second replay win may be established by winning fall replays 1 to 3, and the RT state will transition from the second RT state to the first RT state.

Also, for example, in the first RT state, if the first promotion replays 1-4 are won without winning the attack mode, and the operation sequence happens to correspond to the third replay win and the third replay win is achieved (even if the state transitions to the second RT state), the second replay win can be achieved by winning the fall replays 1-3. Therefore, as described above, even if the state transitions to the second RT state by chance without winning the attack mode, the state will then promptly transition to the first RT state.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1205, then in step S1209 it is judged whether the current lottery result is either the second promotion replay 1 or 2. A positive judgment is made in step S1209 when the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay wins depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1210 it is judged whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, then in step S1211 it is judged whether the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. As already explained, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 36) when the number of premonition games in the premonition mode becomes 0 after the transition lottery to the VB mode is won.

If the VB notification flag is set, processing for notifying the push order for the 4th replay or the 5th replay is executed in step S1212. Specifically, among the 1st replay, 4th replay, and 5th replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the 4th replay winning or the 5th replay winning is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1213, processing is performed to set the push order notification command, and then this push order role processing is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1210, the push order notification process is not performed and the push order role processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1211, the push order notification process for the first replay is executed in step S1207, and the push order notification command is set in step S1208, after which the push order role processing is terminated. Therefore, if the player wins the second promotion replay 1 or 2 without winning VB mode, if the player is in attack mode, a push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay win is performed, but if the player is not in attack mode, no push order notification effect is performed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1209, in step S1214, it is judged whether the current lottery result is either BAR Replay 1 or 2. If a positive judgment is made in step S1214, any of the first replay, third replay, and sixth replay to eighth replay will win depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1215, it is judged whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1216, it is judged whether the VB notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set and the VB notification flag is set, in step S1217, processing for notification of the push order for the sixth replay to the eighth replay is executed. Specifically, among the first replay, third replay, and sixth replay to eighth replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the sixth replay winning to the eighth replay winning is announced (see FIG. 23 (c)). Then, in step S1218, the push order notification command is set, and the push order processing ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1215, the push order notification process is not performed and the push order role processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1216, the push order notification process for the first replay is executed in step S1207, and the push order notification command is set in step S1208, after which the push order role processing ends. Therefore, if BAR replay 1 or 2 is won without winning VB mode, if the player is in attack mode, a push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay win is performed, but if the player is not in attack mode, no push order notification effect is performed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1214, then in step S1219 it is judged whether or not the current lottery result is a push order bell win. If a push order bell win is made, then in step S1220 it is judged whether or not the current display mode is normal mode or challenge mode. If it is not normal mode or challenge mode, then in step S1221 a push order notification process is executed to notify the operation sequence corresponding to the first minor win (see FIG. 19). Then, in step S1222 a process is executed to set a push order notification command, and then the main push order role process is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S1219 or a positive judgment is made in step S1220, the main push order role process is terminated without executing the push order notification process.

<Processing for switching display modes based on winning results>
<Winning Result Processing>
Next, the process when the winning combination corresponding to the transition of the gaming state is won as a result of the notification for transition of the gaming state as described above will be described (3). This process is performed in the winning result corresponding process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). The winning result corresponding process will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 39.

In step S1301, a game count management process is executed. Details will be described later, but in this game count management process, in addition to counting the number of premonition games in the premonition mode, the number of continued games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is also counted.

In the next step S1302, it is determined whether or not the current stop result is the third replay winning. As described above, if the third replay winning is established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing is performed to transition the game state to the second RT state. In this case, in step S1303, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is not set, it means that the third replay winning is established without the transition condition to the attack mode being established, and in this case, the winning result response processing is terminated without performing processing for starting the attack mode. When the attack notification flag is set, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is in the attack mode in step S1304. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. Incidentally, in addition to the attack mode flag, there are also provided a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag as flags for specifying the display mode. In this embodiment, when the display mode is a mode corresponding to a higher RT state than the attack mode (VB mode, added specialized zone), the attack mode flag coexists with the corresponding flag of that mode (VB mode flag, specialized zone flag). Therefore, for example, in step S1304, cases in which it is determined that the attack mode flag is set include when in attack mode, when in VB mode, and when in the specialized zone.

If the attack mode flag is set in step S1304, the display mode is already attack mode, so this winning result response process ends. On the other hand, if the attack mode flag is not set, processing to start attack mode is performed in steps S1305 to S1307.

That is, in step S1305, the attack mode flag is set. In the following step S1306, the attack mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the attack mode start command, notifies the player that the attack mode will start from the next game, using the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. This notification will be described in detail later. After that, in step S1307, the attack mode continuation number is started to be counted. Specifically, the attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106 is set to an initial value (e.g., 50) for the number of continuing games in the attack mode.

After performing the processing of step S1307, it is determined in step S1308 whether or not the specialized zone flag is set. If a positive determination is made in step S1308, it means that the attack mode that has been won this time is the super attack mode, in which case the specialized zone winning flag is cleared in step S1309, and the process proceeds to the process for starting the added-on specialized zone (steps S1318 to S1320). The process for starting the added-on specialized zone will be explained later. If a negative determination is made in step S1308, the winning result response process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1302 that the third replay winning has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S1310. In step S1310, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth replay winnings have been achieved as the current stop result. As described above, if the fourth and fifth replay winnings have been achieved, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing is performed to transition the game state to the third RT state. In this case, in step S1311, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is not set, this is the case where the fourth and fifth replay winnings have been achieved without winning the VB mode transition lottery, in which case, the winning result response processing is terminated without performing the VB mode start processing. If the VB notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1312 whether or not the VB mode flag is set. If the VB mode flag is set, the display mode is already in VB mode, so this winning result response processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing to start VB mode is performed in steps S1313 to S1315.

That is, in step S1313, a process is performed to set the VB mode flag. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because VB mode is a mode that is transitioned to via attack mode, and after VB mode ends, the transition to attack mode is always made.

After that, in step S1314, the VB mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the VB mode start command, notifies the user, via the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, that VB mode will start from the next game. This notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1315, counting the number of VB mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (e.g., 60) for the number of continued games in VB mode is set in a VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1315 has been performed, this winning result response processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1310 that the 4th and 5th replay winnings have not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S1316. In step S1316, it is determined whether or not the 7th replay winnings have been achieved as the current stopping result. In this embodiment, if the 7th replay winnings have been achieved, that is, if the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle of the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle of the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle of the right reel 32R, and the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the combination line in the middle, the configuration is such that the game moves to the add-on specialization zone. In the add-on specialization zone, the number of continued games in the attack mode is added not only for specific roles, but also for all roles that can be won (push order roles, specific roles, and bonuses). The seventh replay win occurs when BAR Replay 1 is won, and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the operation sequence corresponding to the seventh replay win (FIG. 23(c)), and the seventh replay out of the first, sixth, and seventh replays is won in the lottery. For example, when BAR Replay 1 is won, there is a 1 in 20 chance of winning the lottery for the seventh replay.

If the seventh replay win has been achieved, in step S1317, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is set, processing for starting the specialized zone is performed in steps S1318 to S1320. As already explained, at the start of the Super Attack mode, even if a positive determination is made in step S1308 and processing in step S1309 is performed, processing in steps S1318 to S1320 is also performed.

Specifically, in step S1318, a process is performed to set a specialized zone flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The specialized zone flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that it is the above-mentioned added specialized zone, and when the specialized zone flag is set, the count of the number of continued games in the VB mode is stopped. In this case, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the specialized zone flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d.

After that, in step S1319, the specialized zone start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the specialized zone start command, notifies the user, via the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, that the specialized zone will start from the next game. Such notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1320, counting the number of specialization zone continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (e.g., 5) for the number of specialization zone continuation games is set in the specialization zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1320 is performed, this winning result response processing is terminated. Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step S1316 or step S1317, the winning result response processing is terminated.

As described above, a process for transitioning the display mode is performed separately from the RT state process (Fig. 21) based on the winning of a combination (third to fifth replay) that corresponds to a transition in the game state. This is to avoid a situation where an attack mode or the like is started based on the winning of a combination that corresponds to a transition in the game state even though the lottery for transitioning the display mode has not been won.

In addition, when the display mode transition is accompanied by a transition of the game state, transition to a higher mode, i.e., transition from normal mode or challenge mode to attack mode, transition from attack mode to VB mode, or transition from VB mode to specialized zone, is configured to transition based on the winning result of the corresponding role. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of transition to a lower mode, for example, when the game state transitions due to a second replay win as a fall replay or the stopping of a transition result, the display mode is not transitioned. When transitioning to a lower mode, the game state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when transitioning to a lower mode, the transition of the game state and the transition of the display mode may be performed in separate games.

<Game Number Management Processing>
The game count management process executed in step S1301 of the winning result response process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 40. In the game count management process, the number of premonition games in the premonition mode is counted, and the number of continued games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is counted, and when the number of continued games in these display modes becomes 0, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game count management process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether the number of bets is a specific number. As already explained, in this embodiment, each game can be played with a bet number of 1 to 3, and in step S1401, it is determined whether the specific number is 3 bets. If it is not 3 bets, the game count management process ends. In other words, in games with 1 or 2 bets, the number of games in premonition mode and the number of continued games in challenge mode, etc. are not counted.

If the game to be ended this time is a 3-bet game, proceed to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether the bonus win flag is set or whether the game is in a bonus state. If a positive determination is made in step S1402, the display mode flags, namely the challenge mode flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag, are cleared in step S1403, and then this game count management process is terminated. In other words, if the bonus win flag is set or during a bonus, the number of games in attack mode, etc. is not counted. Note that if any flag is not set in step S1403, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1403, the attack mode flag, VB mode flag, etc. are cleared, but the attack notification flag and VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the bonus ends, after going through a preparation state such as attack mode, these flags will notify the push order to transition the gaming state, making it possible to return to the gaming state before the bonus. On the other hand, if a bonus is won during challenge mode or specialized zone, the challenge mode or specialized zone will end when the bonus is won.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1402, then in step S1404 it is judged whether the number of premonition games is 0. If it is not 0, then in step S1405 the number of premonition games is decremented by 1. If the number of premonition games is 0 in step S1404 (if not in premonition mode), or after the processing of step S1405 has been executed, then in steps S1406 to S1428 the number of continued games in each mode is counted.

That is, in step S1406, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If it is the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1407, where the challenge mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby decrementing the number of games to be continued in the challenge mode. Then, in step S1408, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game count management process ends. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1409, and a challenge mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1410. The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode end command notifies the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like that the challenge mode will end in the current game. After the process of step S1410 has been performed, the game count management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1406 that the mode is not the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. If it is the attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1412, and it is determined whether or not the mode is a specialized zone in the attack mode. In other words, if the specialized zone is entered at the start of the attack mode, as in the super attack mode, a positive determination is made in step S1412. If it is in the specialized zone, game number management processing for the specialized zone is performed in steps S1425 to S1428. These processes will be explained later.

If it is determined in step S1412 that the zone is not a specialized zone, the attack mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1413, thereby decrementing the number of games in attack mode. Then, in step S1414, it is determined whether the attack mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process ends. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1415, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1416. Then, in step S1417, the attack mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode end command notifies the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like that the attack mode will end in this game. Such notification will be described in detail later. After the process of step S1417 is performed, the game number management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1411 that the mode is not the attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1418. In step S1418, it is determined whether the current display mode is the VB mode. If it is the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S1419 to determine whether it is an add-on specialization zone. If it is not an add-on specialization zone, the VB mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1420, thereby decrementing the number of games in the VB mode. Then, in step S1421, it is determined whether the VB mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1422, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1423. Then, in step S1424, the VB mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. In the display control device 81 that has received the VB mode end command, a notification that the VB mode will end in this game is made on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After step S1424 is performed, the game count management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1419 that the zone is an added specialized zone, the process proceeds to step S1425. As already explained, if it is determined in step S1412 that the zone is a specialized zone in attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1425. In step S1425, the specialized zone continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby decrementing the number of games continued in the specialized zone. Then, in step S1426, it is determined whether the specialized zone continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is 0, the specialized zone flag is cleared in step S1427, and the specialized zone end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1428. In the display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone end command, a notification that the specialized zone will end in this game is made on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. As such a notification, for example, a notification of the total number of games successfully added in the current specialized zone is made. After the processing of step S1428 is performed, the game number management process is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S1418 or step S1426, the game count management process ends.

<End Determination Process>
Next, the end determination process as the process at the end of the bonus will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 41. As already described, the end determination process is a process carried out in step S615 in the bonus state process (Fig. 26). In the end determination process, it is determined whether the bonus end condition is met, and when the bonus is to be ended, a process for notifying the winning of the attack mode or the like which has been won in combination with the bonus is performed, and a process for adding the number of games in the attack mode or the like which has been won in combination with the bonus is performed.

That is, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a small win has been achieved. As already explained, during the bonus, the first small win (BB small/medium win 1) is achieved with a high probability (Figure 28). Also, if the BB small/medium win 2 (IV = 30) is won, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation sequence corresponding to the 39th small win (Figure 27 (b)), and further, if the lottery for the 39th small win of the first and 39th small wins is won, the 39th small win is achieved. In this embodiment, for example, if the BB small/medium win 2 is won, the lottery for the 39th small win is won with a probability of 1 in 100. When the BB small/medium role 3 (IV=31) is won, the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the operation sequence corresponding to the 40th small role winning (FIG. 27(b)), and further, when the lottery for the 40th small role winning of the 1st small role and the 40th small role is won, the 40th small role winning is established. In this embodiment, for example, when the BB small/medium role is won, the lottery for the 40th small role winning is won with a probability of 1 in 200. In addition, the configuration may be such that the probability of the 39th small role winning and the 40th small role winning is adjusted by adjusting the winning probability of the BB small/medium role 2 and the BB small/medium role 3. More specifically, the point value PV is allocated so that the BB small/medium role 2 is won with a probability of about 1 in 100 of the above configuration, and the point value PV is allocated so that the BB small/medium role 3 is won with a probability of about 1 in 200 of the above configuration. And, if the player performs a stop operation aiming for the corresponding small win (the 39th small win or the 40th small win) when BB small/medium win 2 or BB small/medium win 3 is won, the corresponding small win can be achieved.

If it is determined in step S1501 that a small win has been achieved, the process of subtracting the payout amount for this game from the remaining payout amount is performed in step S1502. If the determination in step S1501 is negative, or after the process of step S1502 has been executed, it is determined in step S1503 whether the remaining payout amount has become 0. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated. If it is 0, a bonus end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1504, and then in steps S1505 to S1518, processing for notifying a win such as attack mode and processing for adding to the number of continued games such as attack mode are performed.

That is, in step S1505, it is determined whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, a lottery process for the number of premonition games is performed in step S1506, the number of premonition games is set in step S1507, and a premonition command is set in step S1508. Incidentally, in this embodiment, in the lottery process for the number of premonition games in step S1506, a lottery is performed in which the number of premonition games is 0 with a 100% probability. That is, in step S1507, the number of premonition games is always set to 0 games, and a winning notification of the attack mode, etc. is made in the game following the bonus ending game. After the process of step S1508 is executed, the end determination process is terminated.

If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1505, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the process for the premonition mode in steps S1506 to S1508 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1509, it is determined in step S1510 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the premonition mode in steps S1506 to S1508 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. In other words, if the bonus ends while the challenge mode or VB mode has also been won, a premonition game is played after the bonus ends, and then a winning announcement for the challenge mode or VB mode is made.

When the attack mode win flag or challenge mode win flag is set, the bonus ends when attack mode, challenge mode, etc. and a bonus are won simultaneously, or when a bonus is won during a premonition mode of a win announcement for attack mode, challenge mode, etc. On the other hand, when the VB mode win flag is set, the bonus ends when VB mode and a bonus are won simultaneously during attack mode, or when a bonus is won during a premonition mode of a win announcement for VB mode (in this case, the premonition mode of 0 games is selected, so the game after VB mode was won).

If the VB mode win flag is not set in step S1510, proceed to step S1511. In step S1511, it is determined whether or not the attack mode add-on flag is set. If the attack mode add-on flag is set, a lottery process for the number of attack mode add-on games is performed in step S1512, a process for adding the number of attack mode games is performed in step S1513, and an add-on command is set in step S1514. The processes in steps S1512 to S1514 are the same as the processes in steps S917 to S919. After the process in step S1514 is executed, the end determination process is terminated.

If the attack mode addition flag is not set in step S1511, it is determined in step S1515 whether or not the challenge mode addition flag is set. If the challenge mode addition flag is set, a lottery process for the number of games to be added in the challenge mode is performed in step S1516, a process for adding the number of games in the challenge mode is performed in step S1517, and an addition command is set in step S1518. The processes in steps S1516 to S1518 are the same as the processes in steps S822 to S824. If a negative determination is made in step S1515, or after the process in step S1518 has been executed, the end determination process is terminated.

<Specialized Zone Treatment>
Next, the specialized zone process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 42. The specialized zone process is executed in step S713 in the lottery result process (Fig. 31). As already explained, the specialized zone is entered during VB mode, and during the specialized zone, the number of continued games in the attack mode is added for each game.

That is, in the specialized zone processing, first, in step S1601, the result of the current lottery processing is grasped. In the following step S1602, a lottery processing for the number of added games in attack mode is performed. In the following step S1603, a processing for adding the number of games in attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1604, an add-on command is set, and the specialized zone processing is terminated. The processing of steps S1602 to S1604 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S919. However, the number of games selected in the lottery processing for the number of added games in step S1602 is greater than the lottery processing for the number of added games in step S917.

<Processing related to notification performance on the sub side>
Next, as (4) processing related to notification performance on the sub side, various notification processing performed by the sub side display control device 81 will be described. As the processing for various notifications, a performance setting process executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. The performance setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the performance setting process, first in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, in step S1702, a process is executed to store the received command in RAM 183. A command storage area is provided in RAM 183, and this command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read out previously stored commands.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1701, or after the processing of step S1702 is executed, in step S1703, it is judged whether or not the newly received command is a bet command. A bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on a bet operation being performed, and includes the bet command set in step S207 of the normal processing, as well as the challenge mode start command in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 36), the attack mode winning notification command, the VB mode winning notification command, the bonus winning notification command, and the like. If it is one of these bet commands, in step S1704, the bet performance setting processing is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1703, or after the processing of step S1704 has been executed, in step S1705, it is judged whether or not the newly received command was a start command. A start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and includes the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery processing, as well as premonition commands and added commands set in the first to third specific role processing (Figures 32 to 34), and push order notification commands set in the push order role processing (Figure 38). If it is one of these start commands, in step S1706, the start performance setting processing is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1705, or after the processing of step S1706 is executed, in step S1707, it is judged whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a stop command command set in step S405 of the reel control processing (FIG. 18). If the stop command is a stop command at each stop operation, in step S1708, a process for setting the performance at each stop operation is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1707, or after the processing of step S1708 is executed, in step S1709, it is judged whether or not the newly received command is an all stop command. An all stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and includes the winning result command set in step S411 of the reel control processing (FIG. 18), as well as the attack mode start command, VB mode start command, specialized zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, specialized zone end command, etc., which are set in the winning result response processing (FIG. 39). If it is one of these all stop commands, in step S1710, the all stop performance setting processing is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1709, or after the processing of step S1710 has been executed, other processing is executed in step S1711, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In step S1711, settings are made for effects based on commands from the main control device 101 other than when a bet is made, when the game is started, or when the game is stopped (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59), effects based on signals from sensors connected without going through the main control device 101 (such as an effect switch detection sensor), settings for error notification, etc.

Below, we will explain the bet time performance setting process, start time performance setting process, each stop operation time performance setting process, and all stop time performance setting process. Note that when explaining each performance setting process, we will refer to the overview diagrams of the display performances in Figures 55 to 60.

<Bet time performance setting process>
The bet time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the currently received bet time command includes a challenge mode start command. If the challenge mode start command is included, in step S1802, processing is performed to set the challenge mode start effect. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Challenge mode start" and displays a display (for example, a specified character display) suggesting that the display mode to be transitioned to is a chance mode that is likely to win the attack mode transition lottery. In addition, in the challenge mode start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a man's rough voice saying "Seize attack mode!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the challenge mode start command is not included in step S1801, it is determined in step S1803 whether the currently received bet time command includes an attack mode win notification command. If the attack mode win notification command is included, in step S1804, processing is performed to set the attack mode win notification effect. In the attack mode win notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Attack mode confirmed." In addition, in the attack mode win notification effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice saying "Attack number one!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S1803, then in step S1805 it is determined whether or not the currently received bet time command includes a VB mode winning notification command. If the VB mode winning notification command is included, then in step S1806 a process is performed to set up a VB mode winning notification effect. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "VICTORY BONUS CONFIRMED." Additionally, in the VB mode winning notification effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male and female voice saying "Victory!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the VB mode winning notification command is not included in step S1805, it is determined in step S1807 whether or not the currently received bet time command includes a bonus winning notification command. If the bonus winning notification command is included, processing is performed in step S1808 to set up a bonus winning notification effect. In the bonus winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Yay! Bonus confirmed." In addition, in the bonus winning notification effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male and female voice saying "Yay!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

After any of the processes in steps S1802, S1804, S1806, and S1808 has been executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S1807, in step S1809, other bet time effects are set, and then this effect setting process ends. In the process in step S1809, for example, in response to the reception of a bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit insertion switches 56-58 for the corresponding bet number are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted, or for example, a process for returning from a demo mode in which a certain condition is entered when no play has been made for a predetermined period of time, or a process for turning on a lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been validated, etc. are performed.

<Start-time performance setting process>
Next, the start-time performance setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1901, a display mode setting process is performed. In this process, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main control device 101 side is normal mode, challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or specialized zone, and the display performance of the auxiliary display unit 65 is set in the corresponding display mode. Specifically, the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side also has an area for setting a challenge mode flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag as flags for grasping the display mode, and the corresponding flag is set when each mode starts and cleared when it ends. For example, in the process of setting the challenge mode start performance in step S1802 above, the challenge mode flag is set. In step S1901, by grasping these various mode corresponding flags, the current display mode is identified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding performance is performed.

In the next step S1902, it is determined whether the lottery result of the game to be started is a push order role win based on the received lottery result command. If the push order role wins, in step S1903, a push order notification process is performed. Here, the push order notification process is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 46.

In step S2001, it is determined whether the currently received start command includes a push order notification command. If the push order notification command is not included, the push order notification process is terminated. If the push order notification command is included, the process proceeds to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether the current lottery result is the first promotion replay 1 to 4. If it is the first promotion replay 1 to 4, in step S2003, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify the push order that will result in the third replay win, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2002 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not the winning combination, then in step S2004 it is determined whether the current lottery result is fall replays 1 to 3. If it is fall replays 1 to 3, the process proceeds to step S2005, where the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify the player of the push order that will result in the first replay winning combination, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2004 that the result is not one of the fall replays 1 to 3, then in step S2006 it is determined whether the current lottery result is the second promotion replay 1 or 2. If it is the second promotion replay 1 or 2, then in step S2007 it is determined whether the VB mode winning notification effect has already been performed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S1806, a notification flag indicating that a VB win has been notified is set in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. The notification flag is cleared upon transition to VB mode. Then, in step S2007, it is preferable to determine whether or not the notification flag exists. If a VB mode winning has been notified, then in step S2008 the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to perform a push order notification in which the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, and then the push order notification process is terminated. If a win has not been notified in VB mode, proceed to step S2005, notify the push order for the first replay win, and then end the push order notification process.

If it is determined in step S2006 that the result is not the second promotion replay 1 or 2, then in step S2009 it is determined whether the current lottery result is BAR replay 1 or 2. If it is BAR replay 1 or 2, then in step S2010 the mode flag is checked to determine whether the current display mode is VB mode. If it is in VB mode, then in step S2011 the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. is controlled to notify the push order for the sixth to eighth replay wins, and then the push order notification process is terminated. If it is not in VB mode, then the process proceeds to step S2005, where a push order notification for the first replay win is performed, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2009 that the result is not BAR replay 1 or 2, then in step S2012 it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a bell. If a bell has been won, then in step S2013 the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. is controlled to notify the press order in which a bell win is achieved as the first minor win, and then the press order notification process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S2012, then the press order notification process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the start-time performance setting process (FIG. 45), if it is determined in step S1902 that the push order role has not been won, it is determined in step S1904 whether or not a specific role has been won. If a specific role has been won, processing for announcing a specific role is performed in step S1905. The processing for announcing a specific role will be explained in detail later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1904, or after the processing of step S1903 or step S1905 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, it is judged whether or not an add-on command has been received as the current start command. If an add-on command has been received, in step S1907, a process is performed to set up the add-on effect in advance so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed at the time of stopping. As an example of the add-on effect, as shown in FIG. 59(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a number corresponding to the number of games to be added as "+10". In addition, in the add-on effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound like "Kyukyukyukyukyueen!").

The details of the setting process for the additional effects in step S1907 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 47.

In step S2101, a process is performed to determine the number of games to be added based on the currently received add-on command. In the following step S2102, a notification timing lottery process is executed. The notification timing lottery process is a process of drawing lots to determine the timing in the game at which the addition effect will be performed, assuming that an addition effect will be performed in the current game.

The execution timing of the additional effects is set to differ depending on the number of additional games. Specifically, as shown in the lottery table of FIG. 48, the execution timing of the additional effects in the current game is set to be when the first reel is stopped, when the second reel is stopped, and when the third reel is stopped, assuming that the order of the stop operations for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel. Also, the timing of the stop ON operation, which is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed among the stop operations for each reel, and the stop OFF operation, which is when the pressing operation is ended, are set.

Here, we will provide additional explanation regarding the operation of the stop switches 42-44. The stop switches 42-44 can be moved from an initial position located at the front to an operating position located at the back. When placed at the initial position, the detection signal from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a is in a LOW state, and by operating the stop switches from the initial position to the operating position, the detection signal from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a switches from a LOW signal to a HI signal. Then, based on the detection signal switching from a LOW signal to a HI signal, the main control device 101 understands that a stop ON operation has been performed, which means that the stop switches 42-44 have been pressed.

The stop switches 42-44 are also biased toward their initial positions by springs or the like. Therefore, when the hand is released from the stop switches 42-44 and the operating force (pressing force) applied to the operating positions is no longer applied, the stop switches 42-44 return to their initial positions by the biasing force of the springs or the like. In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a switch from a HI signal to a LOW signal. Then, based on the detection signal switching from a HI signal to a LOW signal, the main control device 101 determines that a stop OFF operation has been performed, which means that the pressing operation of the stop switches 42-44 has ended.

The added effects are set to occur when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop either when the stop switch is turned on or when the stop switch is turned off. In other words, in a game in which added effects occur, the added effects can occur not only when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, but also when the pressing operation ends.

In the execution timing table for the added effects, when the number of added games is relatively small, for example 5 to 10 games, the timing when the first reel's stop ON operation is performed is selected 5% of the time, the timing when the first reel's stop OFF operation is performed 10%, the timing when the second reel's stop ON operation is performed 15%, the timing when the second reel's stop OFF operation is performed 20%, the timing when the third reel's stop ON operation is performed 20%, and the timing when the third reel's stop OFF operation (when all reels are stopped) is selected 30% of the time. In this case, the timing when the stop OFF operation is performed is more likely to be selected than the timing when the stop ON operation is performed for each reel, and the timing when the operation is performed on the rear side is more likely to be selected.

On the other hand, when the number of added games is relatively large, for example 100 or more games are added, the timing when the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected 5% of the time, the stop OFF operation of the first reel is selected 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is selected 5%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is selected 30%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is selected 5%, and the stop OFF operation of the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is selected 45% of the time. In this case too, the stop OFF operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation, and the operation on the rear side is relatively more likely to be selected.

In other words, in this embodiment, the setting is made so that the additional effects are more likely to occur when the reels are turned off than when they are turned on. Also, when comparing the first to third reels, the setting is made so that the third reel is most likely to be selected when it is stopped (ON operation, OFF operation), the second reel is next most likely to be selected when it is stopped, and the first reel is most likely to be selected when it is stopped.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process of the additional effects, after the notification timing lottery process is performed in step S2102, in step S2103, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S2102 was when any of the reels were stopped ON. If it was when the reels were stopped ON, in step S2104, the target reel for generating the additional effects is set, and the additional effects are set to occur when the target reel is stopped ON. Specifically, a process is performed to set one of the flags for when the first reel is stopped ON to the flag for when the third reel is stopped ON in the various flag storage area 183a. These flags are flags that allow the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of when the additional effects occur. In addition, in step S2104, the performance data of the additional effects corresponding to the number of additional games to be generated when the stop ON is operated is read from the performance data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined performance data setting area. When the CPU 181 determines that an additional performance will occur at a timing corresponding to the stop ON operation time flag, it reads out the performance data temporarily stored in the performance data setting area and performs the additional performance.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2103, in step S2105, it is judged whether or not the first or second reel was stopped and turned OFF. If these reels were stopped and turned OFF, in step S2106, a target reel for generating an additional effect is set, and the additional effect is set to occur when the target reel is stopped and turned OFF. Specifically, a process is performed to set either a flag for when the first reel is stopped and OFF or a flag for when the second reel is stopped and turned OFF in the various flag storage area 183a. These flags are also flags that allow the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of the additional effect occurrence. Also in step S2106, the effect data for the additional effect corresponding to the number of games for additional play is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined effect data setting area.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2105, in step S2107, the current additional effect is set to occur when all reels are stopped (when the third reel is turned OFF). Specifically, a process is performed to set a flag when the third reel is turned OFF in the various flag storage area 183a. Also in step S2107, a temporary storage process is performed for the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games. After the process of step S2104, step S2106, or step S2107 is executed, the process of setting the additional effect is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the start-up effect setting process, if no top-up command is received in step S1906, or after the process of step S1907 is executed, the bonus effect setting process is executed in step S1908, the continuous effect setting process is executed in step S1909, and then other start-up effects are set in step S1910, after which the start-up effect setting process ends. The bonus effect setting process and the continuous effect setting process will be explained in detail later. The process of step S1910 performs, for example, a process of setting an effect suggesting a lottery result in response to the start of the game, or turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted.

<Performance setting process at each stop operation>
Next, the process of setting the effects to be produced at each stop operation, which is performed in step S1708, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2201, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. A stop ON operation command is a command that is output from the main control device 101 when the stop switch 42 to 44 is pressed during the stop operation of each reel.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2202, where it is determined whether or not an effect that occurs when the reel is turned on for stop is set as the effect for this game. If it is not set, this setting process is terminated. If it is set, in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the stop ON operation command received this time is for the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the effect that is set for the stop ON operation. If it is not a stop ON operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated. If it is a stop ON operation of the target reel, in step S2204, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that an effect is performed when the stop ON operation is performed, and then this setting process is terminated.

For example, if an additional effect is set as the effect at the time of the current stop ON operation, as shown in FIG. 50(a), an additional effect occurs on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed (ON operation). In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is also emitted from the speaker 64.

Also, for example, if the current game is a push order role win and the push order notification effect is set, the push order notification effect will change to an effect indicating the reel to be operated next by stopping the corresponding reel based on each stop ON operation. Specifically, if all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning before the stop ON operation effect, a display indicating the first reel to be operated as shown in FIG. 37(a) is displayed. Then, when the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) stops due to the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the effect changes to an effect indicating the next reel to be operated (right reel 32R in the figure) as shown in FIG. 37(b). Also, if two reels are spinning before the stop ON operation effect, a display indicating the second reel to be stopped as shown in FIG. 37(b) is displayed, and based on the second reel stopping due to the stop ON operation, the display changes to an effect indicating the third reel to be stopped (FIG. 37(c)).

If the determination in step S2201 is negative, the process proceeds to step S2205, where it is determined whether the stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. A stop OFF operation command is a command that is output from the main control device 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, which is one of the stop operations for each reel, is completed.

If the determination in step S2205 is positive, the process proceeds to step S2206, where it is determined whether or not an effect that occurs when the reel is stopped and turned OFF is set as the effect for this game. If it is not set, this setting process is terminated. If it is set, in step S2207, it is determined whether or not the stop OFF operation command received this time is a stop operation for the reel that is the target of the effect set for the stop OFF operation. If it is not a stop OFF operation for the target reel, this setting process is terminated. If it is a stop OFF operation for the target reel, in step S2208, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that an effect is performed when the stop OFF operation is performed, and then this setting process is terminated.

For example, if an additional effect is set as the effect at the time of the current stop OFF operation, as shown in FIG. 50(b), when the pressing operation of the stop switch 42-44 is terminated and the hand is released from the stop switch 42-44, an additional effect occurs on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64. If a negative judgment is made in step S2205, this effect setting process is terminated.

<Performance setting process when all stops>
Next, the complete stop effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes a challenge mode end command. If the challenge mode end command is included, in step S2302, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that a challenge mode end effect is performed. In the challenge mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Challenge mode end." In addition, in the challenge mode end effect, control is performed so that a sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, a man's rough voice saying "Put yourself together!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the challenge mode end command is not included in step S2301, then in step S2303 it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes an attack mode start command. If the attack mode start command is included, then in step S2304 processing is performed to set the attack mode start effect. In the attack mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Attack mode!! Ver. 1". In addition, in the attack mode start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice saying "Attack mode start!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

The "Ver.1" display during the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. In other words, it is a display indicating that the attack mode being started this time is the first attack mode. Then, when the attack mode rank is promoted to the second attack mode (when a promotion command is received), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the words "Attack Mode!! Ver.2" as a promotion effect. When the attack mode rank is promoted to the third attack mode, the words "Attack Mode!! Ver.3" are displayed, and when it is promoted to the fourth attack mode, the words "Attack Mode!! Ver.4" are displayed.

If the attack mode start command is not included in step S2303, it is determined in step S2305 whether the currently received stop command includes an attack mode end command. If the attack mode end command is included, processing is performed in step S2306 to set the attack mode end effect. In the attack mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "ATTACK MODE END" and displays the number of games to be continued in this attack mode (including VB mode and specialized zone), and also displays the total number of coins paid out in this attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus). In addition, in the attack mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice saying "See you later").

If the attack mode end command is not included in step S2305, then in step S2307 it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes a VB mode start command. If the VB mode start command is included, then in step S2308 a process is performed to set the VB mode start effect. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "777 VICTORY!!". Additionally, in the VB mode start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male and female voice saying "Victory Bonus Start") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2307, it is determined in step S2311 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a VB mode end command. If the VB mode end command is included, in step S2312, processing is performed to set the VB mode end effect. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "VICTORY BONUS END", displays the number of continued games in the attack mode (including VB mode and specialized zone) at the end of the current VB mode, and displays the total number of payouts in the attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus) at the end of the current VB mode. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male and female voice saying "It's not over yet").

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2311, it is determined in step S2313 whether the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone start command. If the specialized zone start command is included, processing is performed in step S2314 to set the specialized zone start effect. In the specialized zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 59(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Add-on challenge!!" and displays a character indicating that this is a special mode in which attack mode add-ons are likely to occur. In addition, in the specialized zone start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a boy's voice saying "Let's go") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If a specialized zone start command is not included in step S2313, it is determined in step S2315 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone end command. If a specialized zone end command is included, in step S2316, processing is performed to set a specialized zone end effect. In the specialized zone end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of games that have been added in the current specialized zone. In addition, in the specialized zone end effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound such as "Kyukyukyukyukyueen!") is emitted from the speaker 64. It is preferable to vary the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect emitted from the speaker 64 depending on the total number of games that have been added.

If the specialized zone end command is not included in step S2315, it is determined in step S2317 whether the currently received stop command includes a bonus end command. If the bonus end command is included, processing is performed in step S2318 to set the bonus end effect. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of coins paid out during the current bonus, and if the bonus was entered into attack mode, VB mode, or a specialized zone, the total number of coins paid out in attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus) is displayed. In addition, in the bonus end effect, depending on whether the attack mode was successful, whether the challenge mode was successful, and the number of added games, characters or the like are used to suggest these contents.

After executing any of the processes in steps S2302, S2304, S2306, S2308, S2312, S2314, S2316, and S2318, or after a negative judgment is made in step S2317, the process proceeds to steps S2309 and S2319. In steps S2309 and S2319, if an additional performance is set, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled to execute the additional performance. As already explained, the setting of the additional performance is performed in step S1907 in the start-time performance setting process. Specifically, if the timing of the occurrence of the current additional performance is set to when all reels stop in the setting process of the additional performance (FIG. 47), the additional performance is generated in the auxiliary display unit 65 when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop, as shown in FIG. 50(c). In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional performance is also emitted from the speaker 64.

After that, in steps S2310 and S2320, other stop time effects are set, and then this effect setting process ends. In steps S2310 and S2320, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, a sound effect corresponding to the payout amount of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, and a sound effect corresponding to an automatic bet during a replay is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

As described above, various processes for notifying the transition of display modes are performed on the display control device 81 side based on various commands from the main control device 101, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. In addition to notifying the transition of display modes, the display control device 81 side also performs various in-game presentation processes.

<Processing for various in-game effects>
In this embodiment, continuous effects and bonus effects are provided as effects during various games. Continuous effects are effects that make the player expect a favorable result (winning a bonus, attack mode, challenge mode, VB mode, etc.), and can be continued over multiple games (four games in this embodiment), and are effects that notify the player whether the favorable result was achieved in the final game. Bonus effects are effects that are performed in each game during the bonus state that is transitioned to based on winning the first BB or the second BB.

The outline of the continuous performance is explained with reference to Figure 60.

For example, as shown in FIG. 60(a), at the start of the first game in which the consecutive effects are set, a display is made suggesting the number of times the consecutive effects will continue (the figure shows a four-stage daruma drop effect corresponding to the four consecutive effects of the game). Then, at the end of the first game in which the consecutive effects are set, a display is made to notify whether the consecutive effects will continue or not (the figure shows a display indicating that the first stage of the daruma drop was successful, indicating that the consecutive effects will continue). If the consecutive effects are interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the consecutive effects are set, a display is made to notify that the consecutive effects will end halfway (for example, a display indicating that the first stage of the daruma drop failed). The display regarding whether the consecutive effects will continue or not is the same for each game in the consecutive effects.

As shown in FIG. 60(b), at the start of the second game in which consecutive effects are set, a display is made suggesting the number of consecutive effects remaining (in the figure, a daruma drop effect with three stages remaining). Then, at the end of the second game, a display is made to notify whether the consecutive effects will continue (in the figure, a display is shown indicating that the second stage of the daruma drop was successful, indicating that the consecutive effects will continue).

As shown in FIG. 60(c), at the start of the third game in which consecutive effects are set, a display is made suggesting the number of remaining consecutive effects (in the figure, the remaining two stages of Daruma Drop effects). Then, at the end of the third game, a display is made to notify whether the consecutive effects will continue or not (in the figure, a display is shown indicating that the third stage of Daruma Drop was successful, indicating that the consecutive effects will continue).

As shown in FIG. 60(d), at the start of the final game (the fourth game) of the series, a display is displayed indicating that it is the final game of the series (in the figure, a one-stage Daruma Drop display). Then, at the end of the final game, a display is displayed indicating whether the result was favorable for the player (in the figure, a display indicating that the final Daruma Drop was successful).

As described above, in continuous performance, the performance of the next game is set by taking over the performance of the previous game, and the performance of each game has continuity. Also, it is possible to clearly recognize which game the current game is from the start of the continuous performance (how many games there are until the end of the continuous performance).

Here, in each game of the continuous performance, the continuation rate of the continuous performance is set to be higher as the game of the continuous performance progresses. In other words, the possibility of the continuous performance being notified that it will not continue is highest at the end of the first game of the continuous performance, and the more the game progresses, the lower the possibility of the non-continuation being notified. Therefore, in the continuous performance, the level of interest of the player varies greatly depending on which game in the continuous performance the current game is, and interest increases as the game progresses from the starting game to the ending game.

Below, we will explain the processes related to the continuous effects and bonus effects, including the bonus effect setting process (step S1908), the specific role notification process (step S1905), and the continuous effect setting process (step S1909) in the start effect setting process (Figure 45).

<Bonus performance processing>
First, the bonus effect processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the bonus effect setting process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not a bonus game will start from the current game. The bonus game refers to the game following the first or second BB win until the end of the bonus. A positive determination is made in step S2401 when the first or second BB win was achieved in the previous game. In this case, in step S2402, the number of bonus effect games is set in the bonus effect counter in the various counter area 183b in the RAM 183. The bonus effect counter is a counter for executing the effect set for each game in accordance with the progress of the bonus game, and the effect corresponding to the counter is displayed by the auxiliary display unit 65, etc.

As already explained, in this embodiment, in the first BB or second BB bonus game, a combination in which nine medals are paid out per game is won, and the bonus ends with the payment of 216 medals. In other words, the first BB or second BB bonus game ends after 24 games. The effects in the bonus game are set to be executed over 24 games, and the bonus effect counter is a counter for determining which game out of the 24 games the effect should be executed in. Then, in step S2402, the bonus effect counter is set to 24 as the number of bonus effect games. After the process of step S2402 is performed, in step S2403, a bonus effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The bonus effect flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to determine that a bonus effect is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, or after the process of step S2403 is performed, this bonus effect setting process ends.

<Processing for notifying specific roles>
Next, the specific role notification process executed in step S1905 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not a premonition command is included as the start command for this time. If a premonition command is not included, in step S2502, it is determined whether or not an additional command is included as the start command for this time. If an additional command is not included, in step S2503, it is determined whether or not a bonus has been won. If a bonus has not been won, that is, if a specific role has been won as a result of the lottery, and if the lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode or the lottery for the additional number of continued games has not been won, and if a bonus has not been won, in step S2504, a lottery process for the pseudo premonition mode is executed. The pseudo premonition mode is a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the premonition mode in appearance, but in the premonition mode, a result advantageous to the player (such as winning the challenge mode) is notified based on the end of the premonition game number, while in the pseudo premonition mode, the game ends without notifying the player of a result advantageous to the player based on the end of the pseudo premonition game number.

In step S2504, a table for the pseudo premonition mode lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter area 183b, and a lottery is held as to whether or not to execute the pseudo premonition mode. In the table for the pseudo premonition mode lottery, the probability of winning the lottery for the pseudo premonition mode is set to differ depending on the type of specific role that has been won, and for example, it is set so that a strong cherry has a higher probability of winning the lottery for the pseudo premonition mode than a weak cherry.

In step S2505, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-omen mode lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S2504. If the lottery has been won, in step S2506, a lottery process is performed to determine the number of games in the pseudo-omen mode. This process corresponds to step S810 on the main control device 101 side, and the number of pseudo-omen games is randomly determined by lottery to be 1 out of 1 to 32. In the following step S2507, a process is performed to set the number of pseudo-omen games determined in step S2506 to a continuous performance counter provided in the various counter area 183b. The continuous performance counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result is notified, and is decremented by 1 for each game. For example, in a configuration in which a continuous performance of 4 games is performed, the continuous performance is started in a game in which the continuous performance counter is 4, and the result is notified in a game in which the continuous performance counter is 0. In this embodiment, when the premonition mode or pseudo-omen mode is set, the premonition mode or pseudo-omen mode ends after the continuous performance. Then, in step S2507, the number of pseudo premonition games is input into the continuous performance counter, and when the number of remaining games in the pseudo premonition mode corresponds to the start of the continuous performance (4 games remaining), the continuous performance will start.

In step S2508, a process is executed to set a pseudo flag indicating that the pseudo premonition mode is being set in the various flag storage area 183a. In the following step S2509, a continuous performance flag is set. After that, the process for notifying a specific role is terminated. Also, if a positive judgment is made in any of steps S2501 to S2503, or if a negative judgment is made in step S2505, the process for notifying a specific role is terminated.

<Continuous performance setting process>
Next, the continuous performance setting process performed in step S1909 of the start-time performance setting process (FIG. 45) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the start command currently received includes a premonition command. If a premonition command is included, in step S2602, the number of premonition games in the premonition mode included in the premonition command is input to the continuous performance counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the premonition mode corresponds to the start of the continuous performance (4 games remaining), the continuous performance will start. Note that if the number of premonition games from 1 to 3 games is input to the continuous performance counter in step S2602, the continuous performance will start halfway through. For example, if 2 is input to the continuous performance counter in step S2602, the continuous performance will start from the current game, and will be performed from the third game of the continuous performance in FIG. 60(c). In addition, if 0 is input to the continuous performance counter, that is, if a winning notification such as an attack mode is made without going through the premonition mode, the continuous performance will not be executed. After the processing in step S2602 is performed, in step S2603, the continuous performance flag is set.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2601, or after the processing of step S2603 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2604. In step S2604, it is judged whether or not the continuous performance flag is set. If the continuous performance flag is set, the process of subtracting 1 from the continuous performance counter is performed in step S2605. Then, in step S2606, it is judged whether or not the continuous performance counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to continuous performance. If the continuous performance counter is a number corresponding to continuous performance, it is judged whether or not the pseudo flag is set in step S2607. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2608, where the performance table for this premonition is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2609, the performance data of the corresponding continuous performance is identified from the performance table for this premonition and the continuous performance counter, the corresponding performance data is obtained from the performance data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the process of setting it as the current continuous performance is performed. The performance data for the consecutive performances specified by this premonition performance table is such that if the consecutive performance counter is between 1 and 3, the performance data indicates that the consecutive performances will continue into the next game, and if the consecutive performance counter is 0, the performance data indicates that the current consecutive performance will end successfully.

If it is determined in step S2607 that the pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2610. In step S2610, a pseudo premonition effect table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2611, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is identified from the pseudo premonition effect table and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is obtained from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and a process is performed to set it as the current continuous effect. The effect data of the continuous effect identified from the pseudo premonition effect table is effect data indicating that the continuous effect will continue until the next game or effect data indicating that it will not continue if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, and effect data indicating that the current continuous effect will end in failure if the continuous effect counter is 0.

Note that when the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, the performance data specified from the pseudo premonition performance table includes those in which no continuous performance is set. For example, when the continuous performance counter is 3 or 2, no continuous performance data is set, when the continuous performance counter is 1, performance data for the first game of the continuous performance is set, which indicates that the continuous performance will continue until the next game in FIG. 60(a), and when the continuous performance counter is 0, performance data for the second game of the continuous performance is set, which indicates that the continuous performance will not continue until the next game in FIG. 60(b). In this way, it is possible to set a performance in which the continuous performance is interrupted midway in a game in which the number of pseudo premonition games in the pseudo premonition mode is 0.

After performing the processing of step S2609 or step S2611, in step S2612 it is determined whether the continuous performance counter is 0. If the continuous performance counter is 0, in step S2613 the continuous performance flag and pseudo flag are cleared. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. If a negative determination is made in step S2606 or step S2612, or after performing the processing of step S2613, this continuous performance setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2604 that the continuous performance flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2614. In step S2614, it is determined whether or not the bonus performance flag is set. If it is set, in step S2615, the bonus performance counter is decremented. Specifically, the bonus performance counter is decremented by 1. In the following step S2616, a bonus performance table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2617, the performance data of the corresponding bonus performance is identified from the bonus performance table and the bonus performance counter, the corresponding performance data is obtained from the performance data storage area 182b, and the corresponding performance data is set as the current bonus performance. In step S2618, it is determined whether or not the bonus performance counter is 0. If the bonus performance counter is 0, in step S2619, the bonus performance flag is cleared. After that, this continuous performance setting process is terminated.

As described above, in this slot machine 10, the main control device 101 performs a lottery process based on the insertion of medals as game media and the start operation of the start lever 41, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts to rotate, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. If the combination of symbols that stops on an active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the corresponding bonus is awarded. In this configuration, multiple RT states with different probabilities of a replay being the result of the lottery process are provided, and the RT state is changed when a corresponding promotion replay or fall replay is won. Whether or not the corresponding replay is won is determined by the result of the win/lose lottery and the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the notification of the operation order is made by winning the display mode transition lottery that is held according to the result of the lottery process. As a result of the lottery process, a push order bell is provided, and depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to achieve the push order bell winning and win medals. Then, by transitioning to the second RT state or the third RT state as a gaming state in which the replay probability is improved, and transitioning to a display mode in which the operation order is notified, in that RT state, it is possible to achieve the push order bell winning in a state in which the replay probability is improved, and it is possible to win a large number of medals.

The trigger events of winning a large number of medals, such as the display mode transition lottery, the execution of the lottery for adding the number of continuing games such as attack mode, and winning the bonus lottery, occur when a specific role such as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, Chance A, B, or middle bell is won. In other words, as specific roles, small roles (single roles) or overlapping roles with IV = 13 to 19 and 32 to 45 are set, and when these specific roles are won, the trigger events are the display mode transition lottery, the addition lottery, and winning the bonus lottery. Specific roles are roles that have a relatively low probability of being won compared to bells, replays, etc., and are also called rare roles. Therefore, players play each game while hoping for the occurrence of such trigger events with a relatively low probability.

Here, the lottery for switching display modes based on specific combinations and the lottery for winning or losing a bonus will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 shows the lottery table for normal gameplay, the lottery for switching display modes, and the relationship with the setting values.

As already explained, the special roles are single roles such as strong cherries with an IV of 13 to 19, and bonus combination roles with an IV of 32 to 45.

When the 1st BB or 2nd BB bonus is won with a combination of a bonus with IV = 32 to 45, or when the bonus is won with a single bonus with IV = 46 or 47, the winning flag corresponding to the bonus win (1st BB winning flag, 2nd BB winning flag) is set. On the other hand, when a single bonus with IV = 13 to 19 is won, the bonus is not won. In other words, when it is determined in step S305 of the lottery process in FIG. 16 that a win has been made with IV = 13 to 19, the winning flags of the minor roles corresponding to these IV = 13 to 19 (strong cherry winning flag, weak cherry winning flag, strong watermelon winning flag, weak watermelon winning flag, chance A winning flag, chance B winning flag, middle bell winning flag) are set in step S308, but the bonus winning flag (1st BB winning flag, 2nd BB winning flag) is not set in step S307. In other words, the trigger event for a bonus win occurs in games where IV = 32 to 45, but does not occur in games where IV = 13 to 19.

The probability of a bonus winning event occurring may vary depending on the setting value that changes the payout rate. In other words, for IV = 32 to 45, the winning probability of a combination with the first BB is the same regardless of the setting value, and the occurrence probability is the same, whereas the winning probability of a combination with the second BB differs depending on the setting value, and the occurrence probability is different. More specifically, the probability of winning strong cherry overlap 1 (IV=32), weak cherry overlap 1 (IV=34), strong watermelon overlap 1 (IV=36), weak watermelon overlap 1 (IV=38), chance A overlap 1 (IV=40), chance B overlap 1 (IV=42), and middle bell overlap 1 (IV=44) is set to be the same regardless of the set value, while the probability of winning strong cherry overlap 2 (IV=33), weak cherry overlap 2 (IV=35), strong watermelon overlap 2 (IV=37), weak watermelon overlap 2 (IV=39), chance A overlap 2 (IV=41), chance B overlap 2 (IV=43), and middle bell overlap 2 (IV=45) is set to be different depending on the set value. And the probability of winning the first BB and the second BB alone is set to be the same regardless of the set value. Therefore, the first BB is set to have the same occurrence probability regardless of the setting value, while the second BB is set to have a different occurrence probability depending on the setting value.

The display mode transition lottery is performed when a single role with IV = 13 to 19 and a overlapping role with IV = 32 to 45 that is set to have the same occurrence probability depending on the setting value is won, but is not performed when a overlapping role with IV = 32 to 45 that is set to have a different occurrence probability depending on the setting value is won (or is performed but the winning probability is set to 0). In other words, regardless of whether or not there is an overlap with a bonus, when a role with a different winning probability depending on the setting value is won, a display mode transition lottery is not performed, but when a role with the same winning probability set by the setting value is won, a display mode transition lottery is performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, unlike the trigger event for winning a bonus, the occurrence probability of the trigger event related to the display mode is set so that it does not differ depending on the setting value. Regarding the trigger event related to the display mode, not only the display mode transition lottery but also the winning probability of the additional lottery for the number of continued games in the attack mode and challenge mode and the number of additional games when won are set so that their performance does not differ depending on the setting value.

In other words, in this embodiment, when comparing a first advantageous state as a bonus state in which the probability of winning or losing a minor role (lottery table) changes to give the player an advantageous state, and a second advantageous state such as an attack mode in which the player is informed of the operation sequence of the push order roles, the winning probability (transition probability) for the first advantageous state differs depending on the setting value, while the winning probability (transition probability) for the second advantageous state does not differ depending on the setting value.

The appeal of playing so-called slot machines is that a lottery is held in each game to see whether a winning combination will be achieved, and the reels are stopped according to the results. The second advantageous state, which allows the player to obtain a special benefit by specifying the order in which the reels are stopped, is considered to be a secondary game. From this perspective, while it is acceptable for the probability of winning the first advantageous state to differ depending on the setting value, it is considered undesirable for the probability of winning to differ even for the second advantageous state of the secondary game. If the probability of winning the secondary game also differs depending on the setting value, the difference in the payout rate due to the probability of winning each combination, which is the main game, would be small, and as a result, the main and secondary roles of the game could be reversed.

As such, by adjusting the payout rate according to the first advantageous state as described above and treating the second advantageous state as merely a secondary game, it is possible to realize gameplay that combines the first and second advantageous states without eliminating the original gameplay of the slot machine.

The first and second advantageous states are implemented separately and are set so that they do not overlap. In other words, as shown in Figures 29 and 30, when the first BB or second BB is won and a transition to a bonus state (BB state) occurs, the bonus state is maintained until a specified number of payouts are made, and a transition to an RT state or the like does not occur. The display mode also transitions to BB mode, and this BB mode is maintained until the bonus state ends (a transition to an attack mode or the like does not occur). Then, when the first BB or second BB is won during attack mode, the display mode transitions to BB mode, and attack mode resumes after BB mode ends (Figure 40).

On the other hand, the configuration is such that during one advantageous state, a trigger event for the other advantageous state can occur. More specifically, during the first advantageous state, which is the main game, trigger events related to the second advantageous state, which is a secondary game, do not occur (attack mode transition lottery, additional lottery, etc.), but during the second advantageous state, trigger events related to the first advantageous state (bonus win) can occur. Specifically, for each small role (IV = 29 to 31) during the bonus state as the first advantageous state, the attack mode transition lottery and additional lottery are not performed, and trigger events related to the second advantageous state do not occur. On the other hand, during the attack mode or VB mode as the second advantageous state, overlapping roles of IV = 32 to 45 can be won, so trigger events related to the first advantageous state can occur. In this way, while limiting the overlapping of both advantageous states, trigger events for the other state can occur, making it easier for a chain of both advantageous states to occur, which increases interest.

When the second advantageous state is reached and the operation order of the push order role is announced, in addition to the push order announcement by the auxiliary display unit 65 in FIG. 37 (push order announcement by the display control device 81), the push order announcement is also made by the instruction monitor 68 connected to the main control device 101. The configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be explained with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 62(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display content.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), the indication monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of each of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one display segment, or any combination of display segments. This allows the indication monitor 68 to display a specific symbol (including letters and numbers) individually. Note that each of the individual light sources emits light of the same color, so the same color is displayed on each of the display segments N1 to N8.

Regarding each of the display segments N1 to N8 in more detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are arranged so that they can at least display the numbers "1" to "6". The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged to the side of the lower right part of the area in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are arranged. Therefore, the indication monitor 68 can at least display "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

In addition, as long as the indication monitor 68 can display multiple patterns of symbols individually, the shape and arrangement of each display segment N1 to N8 can be arbitrary, and a configuration using seven segments instead of eight segments, or nine segments, etc., may be used. In addition, it is not essential that the colors displayed in each display segment N1 to N8 are the same, and the colors displayed in each display segment N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, it is not essential to control the lighting or extinguishing of each display segment N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of a light source, and as long as the display control can be performed individually for each display segment N1 to N8, the segment display may be configured with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Furthermore, instead of applying a segment display to each display area, symbols may be displayed using other types of display devices such as liquid crystal display devices, organic EL display devices, CRTs, and dot matrices.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used to notify the operation sequence of the push order role. For example, as shown in FIG. 62(b), when the operation sequence of each stop switch 42-44 is "left" → "middle" → "right" to provide a winning mode advantageous to the player, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and display "1". Also, when the operation sequence of each stop switch 42-44 is "right" → "left" → "middle" to provide a winning mode advantageous to the player, the first display segment N1, the second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit and display "5". In other words, the numbers (symbols) displayed on each display segment N1 to N7 correspond one-to-one to the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 to stop based on the numbers (symbols) displayed on the display segments N1 to N7, the player can win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit when the display mode is normal mode and the player wins the lottery to switch to attack mode, super attack mode, or challenge mode, or when the player wins the bonus (first BB) that can be won at the same time as switching to attack mode, super attack mode, or challenge mode. It is also turned off when attack mode, super attack mode, challenge mode, or first BB ends and the player switches to normal mode (except when the player switches back to attack mode, etc. after passing through premonition mode, etc.).

In other words, an advantageous zone (specific game state, specific mode) is a zone that includes a navigation state (attack mode, super attack mode, high frequency mode) in which the operation sequence of the push order bell and push order replay is easily notified, making it easier for the player to win in an advantageous manner, a chance state (challenge mode, first BB, high probability mode) in which it is easier to win the lottery to transition to the navigation state, or a winning state (winning mode) in which the player has won the lottery to transition to the navigation state or chance state but has not transitioned to the navigation state or chance state, and the eighth display segment N8 lights up during the advantageous zone and turns off during normal zones that are not advantageous zones, thereby forming a zone indicator (specific notification means) that clearly indicates whether or not the zone is advantageous.

The eighth display segment N8 starts with the game in which the game result (such as a specific combination such as a strong cherry) that triggered the advantageous zone such as the navigation state, chance state, or winning state is won, and the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up as a notification that the advantageous zone has been entered before the player is allowed to play in the game following the start game. More specifically, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game result winning that triggered the advantageous zone is realized or not, that is, regardless of whether a miss occurs, the game in which the game result is won is the start game, and the eighth display segment N8 is turned on before the player is allowed to play in the next game as a betting operation. In other words, the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up before the start of the game following the game in which the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone was won.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order indicator and the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is disposed near the side of the payout number display unit 62 on the gaming panel 25. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is disposed above the stop switches 42 to 44 etc. operated by the player, in other words, it is not disposed on the decorative panel, which is the front part of the gaming machine, below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 etc. are provided. Therefore, the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand operating the stop switches 42 to 44 etc., and it can be said that it is disposed in a position where it is easily visible to the player. In addition, since it is disposed near the payout number display unit 62 where the player who is playing the game aiming to win medals can easily focus on it, it can be said that the player is prevented from overlooking it.

Furthermore, the brightness of the corresponding LED is set so that the eighth display segment N8 in the instruction monitor 68 is brighter than the brightness of the surrounding display parts (e.g., the payout number display part 62 and the backlight of the gaming panel 25) (more specifically, twice as bright as the surrounding display parts). Therefore, even if the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display parts are both controlled to emit light (when they are in a lit state), the eighth display segment N8 stands out. The illuminance of the corresponding LED is also set so that the eighth display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine than the surrounding display parts (more specifically, twice as bright as the surrounding display parts). This configuration also improves the visibility of the eighth display segment N8, and prevents the eighth display segment N8 from being overlooked when it is in a lit state.

Below, we will explain the section display process 1 and section display process 2 as processes related to turning on/off the eighth display segment N8.

<First section display process>
First, the first section display process will be described with reference to Fig. 63. The first section display process is a process carried out in step S316 in the lottery process (Fig. 16), and is carried out after the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and a lottery for switching the display mode is carried out based on the lottery result (lottery result corresponding process).

In step S2701, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, when the eighth display segment N8 is being lit, this indicates that the player has won the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone, Attack Mode, Super Attack Mode, or Challenge Mode, or is in these modes. If a negative determination is made in step S2701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S2702.

In step S2702, it is determined whether or not either the challenge mode win flag or the attack mode win flag is set. When the eighth display segment N8 is off and either the challenge mode win flag or the attack mode win flag is set, this means that the transition lottery to the challenge mode, or the transition lottery to the attack mode or the super attack mode has been won in this lottery process. As already explained, in the first specific role process (Figure 32), if the transition lottery to the challenge mode is won, the challenge mode win flag is set, and if the transition lottery to the attack mode or the super attack mode is won, the attack mode win flag is set. If neither flag is set in step S2702, the first section display process is terminated as it is.

If either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2703, and a display start mode lottery process is executed. In the display start mode lottery process, a display start mode table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and the lighting mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery when transitioning to the advantageous zone. In the display start mode table in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, the lighting start timing of the eighth display segment N8 is set to differ depending on the contents of the advantageous zone.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the lighting start timing of the eighth display segment N8 is set to be when the start lever 41 is operated, when the first reel is stopped ON, when the first reel is stopped OFF, when the second reel is stopped ON, when the second reel is stopped OFF, when the third reel is stopped ON, when the third reel is stopped OFF, and when the medal payout based on the winning is completed. In this case, the section display first process is one of the lottery processes performed based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the operation of the start lever 41 among the lighting start timings indicates the operation of the start lever 41 that triggered the lottery process, and lighting starts immediately after the section display first process. In addition, the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel are the first reel that is stopped first among the three stop switches 42 to 44, the second reel that is stopped next, and the third reel that is stopped last. The stop ON operation and stop OFF operation are as described above. The stop ON operation is the operation of pushing the stop switches 42-44 from the initial position located at the front to the operating position located at the back, and the stop OFF operation is the operation of returning the stop switches 42-44 from the operating position to the initial position by, for example, releasing the hand from the stop switches. Also, when the medal payout is complete, if no winning is achieved due to a missed medal or the like, the light will start to turn on without going through the payout process.

When transitioning to Challenge Mode (when the Challenge Mode winning flag is set), the following selection rates are achieved: 5% when the start lever 41 is operated, 10% when the first reel is stopped ON, 55% when the first reel is stopped OFF, 5% when the second reel is stopped ON, 15% when the second reel is stopped OFF, 3% when the third reel is stopped ON, 6% when the third reel is stopped OFF, and 1% when medal payout is completed. In addition, when transitioning to attack mode (when the attack mode winning flag is set), the following selection rates are achieved: when the start lever 41 is operated 3%, when the first reel is turned on to stop 3%, when the first reel is turned off to stop 6%, when the second reel is turned on to stop 10%, when the second reel is turned off to stop 55%, when the third reel is turned on to stop 5%, when the third reel is turned off to stop 15%, and when medal payout is completed 3%. Then, when transitioning to Super Attack Mode (when the Attack Mode winning flag is set and the Specialized Zone flag is set), the following selection rates are achieved: 1% when the start lever 41 is operated, 2% when the first reel is stopped ON, 4% when the first reel is stopped OFF, 8% when the second reel is stopped ON, 20% when the second reel is stopped OFF, 8% when the third reel is stopped ON, 50% when the third reel is stopped OFF, and 7% when the medal payout is complete.

That is, in this embodiment, when transitioning to an advantageous zone, the display start timing of the zone indicator (8th display segment N8) selected for transitioning to the challenge mode, the attack mode, and the super attack mode is set to be different, and in the challenge mode, the first reel is most likely to be selected when the stop OFF operation is performed, in the attack mode, the second reel is most likely to be selected when the stop OFF operation is performed, and in the super attack mode, the third reel is most likely to be selected when the stop OFF operation is performed. The challenge mode is a so-called chance zone that is likely to transition to the attack mode, the attack mode is a navigation state in which push order notification is likely to be performed, and the super attack mode is a navigation state in which transition is made to the attack mode via the added-on specialization zone, so the attack mode is more advantageous to the player than the challenge mode, and the super attack mode is more advantageous to the player than the attack mode. In other words, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up and transitions to an advantageous zone, the degree of advantage for the player can vary greatly depending on the contents of that advantageous zone. Because the display start mode associates the contents and degree of advantage of such an advantageous zone with the eighth display segment surface and N8, it is possible to draw great interest in the timing at which the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up in games in which the transition lottery to these modes has been won.

In addition, in this embodiment, the later the timing at which the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up, the easier it is for the player to move into the advantageous zone of the mode that is advantageous to him/her. Therefore, the system is designed to gradually and stepwise create a sense of excitement as to whether or not the eighth display segment N8 will light up.

Moreover, while the selection rate of the display start timing in each mode is ranked higher or lower, any of the display start timings can be selected when any of the modes is selected. That is, for example, when the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up when the start lever 41 is operated, the player is most likely to have won the lottery to transition to the Challenge mode and least likely to have won the lottery to transition to the Super Attack mode; however, the possibility of winning the Super Attack mode, which has the lowest probability, is not zero. In this way, even if the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up at a timing different from the timing the player desires, the player can be prevented from giving up until the mode selection is announced.

As already explained, the notification that the challenge mode has been won (challenge mode start effect, step S1802) and the notification that the attack mode has been won (attack mode winning notification effect, step S1804) are made at the time of betting operation for the next game after the premonition mode in which the premonition game count becomes 0. In contrast, the eighth display segment N8 as the interval indicator starts lighting up at a timing before the betting operation for the next game is permitted, with the game in which the game result that triggered the transition lottery to the challenge mode or the like is established as the start game. In other words, even if the premonition mode is set to 0 games, when comparing the winning notification effect for each mode transition and the notification of the advantageous zone by the interval indicator, the notification of the advantageous zone by the interval indicator is made first. In this relationship, since it is configured so that it is not possible to completely specify which mode has been won when the interval indicator starts lighting up, it is also possible to provide a sense of excitement during the period from when the interval indicator starts lighting up to when the winning notification effect for each mode transition is made.

In addition, when looking at the operation to stop each reel, the stop OFF operation is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation. Therefore, in a situation where it is not certain whether the eighth display segment N8 will light up or not, it is thought that the stop OFF operation will be operated with a higher expectation of the light being lit than the stop ON operation. In this case, because the corresponding reel stops when the stop switches 42 to 44 are turned on, and there is a high possibility that the corresponding reel is stopped when the stop switches 42 to 44 are turned off, it is thought that the stop switches 42 to 44 will be operated with a higher expectation of the eighth display segment N8 being lit up when the corresponding reel is stopped than in the situation before the corresponding reel stops.

For example, when comparing the 27th minor win with a weak cherry and the 28th minor win with a strong cherry, if a stop operation is performed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R aiming for a "cherry" symbol in these 27th and 28th minor wins, the left reel 32L stops with the same results, and the "cherry" symbol stops in the upper or lower row of the left reel 32L in both cases. In this case, stopping the middle reel 32M determines whether the 27th or 28th minor win was the winning. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that there is a possibility of winning the lottery to move to the advantageous zone for both the 27th and 28th minor wins. In other words, if the eighth display segment N8 is not lit when the left reel 32L is stopped, the following cases are considered: (1) the game result of the current game is a weak cherry win, and the timing for the eighth display segment N8 to light has not yet come, (2) the game result of the current game is a weak cherry win, and none of the transition lotteries to the advantageous zone have been won, (3) the game result of the current game is a strong cherry win, and the timing for the eighth display segment N8 to light has not yet come, or (4) the game result of the current game is a strong cherry win, and none of the transition lotteries to the advantageous zone have been won. Then, by stopping the center reel 32M or the right reel 32R as the second reel, it is determined whether the case is (1) or (2), or (3) or (4). Since the configuration is such that it is easier to win the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone when a strong cherry is won than when a weak cherry is won, it is considered that the player performs the stop operation of the center reel 32M and the right reel 32R while hoping that the case is (3) or (4) rather than (1) or (2). In other words, it is considered that the player performs the stop operation while hoping that the "cherry" symbol will stop, since the "cherry" symbol stops at a predetermined position on the center reel 32M and the right reel 32R as well, and it is determined that the case is (3) or (4). Then, the stop OFF operation in that situation can be said to be an operation for determining whether the case is either (3) or (4), and the player can enjoy more purely whether the zone indicator is lit or not. In other words, since the eighth display segment N8 is configured to be difficult to light when the player performs the stop ON operation while hoping that the "cherry" symbol will stop, the player can enjoy the game of stopping the "cherry" symbol more purely at the time of the stop ON operation. In this way, by dividing the areas that are likely to interest players into stages so that they do not overlap, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being distracted, which can make it difficult for them to enjoy the game.

Returning to the explanation of the first section display process, after the display start mode lottery process is executed in step S2703, a process for setting the display start mode is executed in step S2704 based on the lottery result of step S2703. In this case, a process for setting a flag corresponding to the timing determined by the lottery is executed. Then, in a display start process (not shown) that is started separately as a process for starting the display of the section display (8th display segment N8), a process for determining whether or not it is a timing corresponding to each of these flags is executed, and if it is a corresponding timing, a determination is made as to whether or not the flag corresponding to that timing is set, and if it is set, the display of the 8th display segment N8 as the section display is started. For example, if the first stop OFF operation time is determined in step S2703, a flag corresponding to the first stop OFF operation is set. In the above display start process, each of the determination processes is performed to determine whether it is the timing for operating the start lever 41, whether it is the timing for the first stop ON operation, and whether it is the timing for the first stop OFF operation, and if it is determined that it is the timing for the first stop OFF operation and the flag corresponding to the first stop OFF operation is set as described above, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started (switched from an off state to an on state). Note that the above display start process is configured as a periodic process that is started every predetermined period (for example, every 1.49 msec), and is started, for example, as one process of the timer interrupt process.

In addition, when the main control device 101 starts displaying the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator by turning it on, it outputs a command for sound output to the display control device 81 so that a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound like "Gagg!") is output from the speaker 64. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 so that the predetermined sound effect is emitted based on the command for sound output. Note that when the eighth display segment N8 starts to be displayed, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect is generated in the auxiliary display unit 65 or another display unit. In this case, a corresponding command may be output to the display control device 81, and the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. may be controlled so that the corresponding effect is generated by the display control device 81.

After executing the processing of step S2704, in step S2705, a process is executed to start measuring the number of games continued in the advantageous zone, and then the first zone display process is terminated. The number of games continued in the advantageous zone is measured by measuring the advantageous zone game number AG provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, and in step S2705, a process is executed to set the advantageous zone game number AG to an initial value of 0. The advantageous zone game number AG is increased by 1 for each game in the advantageous zone.

If it is determined in step S2701 that the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed as a section indicator, then in step S2706, processing is performed to continue display during the favorable section, and then this section display first processing is terminated. Specifically, in step S2706, processing is performed to continue the situation in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit.

<Second Section Display Process>
Next, the second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 65. As already described, the second section display process is a process performed in step S415 of the reel control process, and is performed after the medal payout (payout determination process) and the game state transition based on the winning result (winning result response process) are performed at the end of one game.

In step S2801, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 is lit as a zone indicator. If it is off (not lit, not displayed), the second zone display process ends. If it is lit, the process proceeds to step S2802. In step S2802, a process is executed to count the number of games played in the advantageous zone. Specifically, a process is executed to add 1 to the advantageous zone game count AG. The advantageous zone game count AG is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games played in the advantageous zone, and the number of games played while the eighth display segment N8 is lit is measured.

After executing the processing of step S2802, in step S2803, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous zone AG has reached the upper limit of "1500". If it has reached "1500", in step S2804, the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is cleared to 0, and then in step S2805, a process is performed to turn off the eighth display segment N8 as a process to end the display of the zone display. Then, in step S2806, a data initialization process is performed, and the second zone display process is terminated.

The data initialization process is a process that resets flags and counters that were set when moving to the current favorable zone, and flags and counters that were set during the current favorable zone, to their initial values. For example, if a challenge mode win flag or attack mode win flag is set when moving to the favorable zone, or a VB mode win flag is set during attack mode, and the flags remain set until this initialization process, these win flags are cleared. In addition, in the initialization process, if an attack notification flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, specialized zone flag, etc. are set, these flags are also cleared. Furthermore, if a premonition counter, counter for the number of continued games in attack mode, etc., are greater than 0, all of these counters are reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables or parameters that affect the performance related to the push order notification with respect to the favorable zone as a favorable state using the push order notification, and is a process that clears the RAM for such variables or parameters.

If it is determined in step S2803 that the number of games in the favorable zone AG has not reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S2807 to determine whether the favorable zone has ended. That is, in step S2807, it is determined whether neither the challenge mode win flag nor the attack mode win flag is set, and in step S2808, it is determined whether neither the challenge mode flag nor the attack mode flag is set. If both steps S2807 and S2808 are determined to be positive, it means that the favorable zone has ended before reaching the upper limit number of games in the favorable zone. In this case, in step S2809, the number of games in the favorable zone AG is cleared to 0, and in step S2810, the display of the zone indicator is terminated, and the second zone display process is terminated. If either step S2807 or step S2808 is determined to be negative, it is determined that the favorable zone is still in progress, and the second zone display process is terminated. In this case, the zone indicator (the eighth display segment N8) continues to be lit.

<About the push order indicator and section indicator displays and game progress>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous zone and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator will be explained with reference to Figures 66 and 67.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the slot machine 10, in the normal zone, which is not an advantageous zone, the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator is turned off (not lit). In this normal zone, the push order notification effect is not performed. In other words, in contrast to the advantageous zone, which has the performance related to the instruction function such as the push order notification, the normal zone can be said to be a zone that does not have such instruction function. The situation in which the display mode is in the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal zone.

In the normal zone, for example, if a player wins the lottery to move to a favorable zone such as challenge mode or attack mode by winning a weak watermelon role, the game in which the winning result is realized will be the starting game, and before the player is allowed to place a bet in the game following the starting game, the eighth display segment N8, which serves as a zone indicator, will light up and notification of the favorable zone will begin.

In this case, in the game in which the weak watermelon role is won as described above, the game is in a state before the transition to the advantageous zone, and is included in the normal zone. In this case, if the notification of the advantageous zone by the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator indicating the advantageous zone is made at the timing when a bet operation is permitted for the game following the starting game in which the weak watermelon role is won, that is, at the timing when the game in which the advantageous zone starts becomes playable, then, as described above, the notification of the eighth display segment N8 being lit in the weak watermelon role winning game (starting game) can be said to be an advance notification made before the notification of the advantageous zone (state notification, mode notification). And, as described above, in this embodiment, such an advance notification is configured to suggest the contents or degree of advantage of the advantageous zone when the notification of the advantageous zone is made.

After that, when it is notified that the player is in the advantageous zone, a push order notification is generated using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. In this case, the push order information ("1" to "6") is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as described above, and the player can understand the push order based on the push order information. In the push order notification, the push order information starts to be displayed when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If the game is not the last game in the advantageous zone, only the display of the push order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, and the display of the advantageous zone by the eighth display segment N8 continues. Then, if a push order role is won again in the next game or later, the push order information corresponding to that push order role is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit, etc., and it becomes the final game of the advantageous zone, the eighth display segment N8 also goes out and the notification of the advantageous zone ends. The number of games in the advantageous zone is counted in the games in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit; specifically, the game following the start game is counted as the first game, and the number of games in the advantageous zone is up to the final game in which the eighth display segment N8 goes out.

In this embodiment, in the final game of the advantageous zone, the eighth display segment N8 goes out when medal payout ends (by the second zone display process, which is the process following the payout determination process). If medal payout is not performed in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 goes out when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game was the final game of the advantageous zone.

In this way, the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the advantageous zone is reached, and turns off when the advantageous zone ends. The eighth display segment N8 not only starts to light up when a mode is transitioned to a challenge mode, an attack mode, or the like, but also when a lottery for transitioning to a challenge mode, an attack mode, or the like is won. In other words, even if a notification is not given in a game in which a lottery for transitioning to these modes is won, by checking whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is lit, it is possible to clearly understand whether or not a transition lottery has been won. In this way, it is possible to prevent a difference in the degree of advantage between a player who has won the lottery for transitioning to these modes but quits the game without knowing it, and a successor player who sits down after him.

In addition, the slot machine 10 is configured so that there is no difference in the degree of advantage depending on the setting value for the playability that changes the degree of advantage due to push order notifications such as challenge mode and attack mode. Therefore, by setting the degree of advantage of push order notifications to a uniform degree for each gaming machine (setting value) and each game (situation), it is possible to eliminate advantages/disadvantages between players, while still being able to fully enjoy the original playability of the slot machine 10, which is to aim for pictures to obtain bonuses, and to create a well-balanced gaming machine in relation to the playability due to the accompanying push order notifications.

On the other hand, in terms of playability based on push order notification, players are interested in whether or not they will win the lottery to transition to challenge mode, attack mode, etc., and whether or not these modes will continue. The fact that this is immediately apparent based on whether the eighth display segment N8 is lit or not may be an advantage in terms of ensuring equality between players, but it can be a disadvantage in terms of playability and presentation effects. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first section display process, the timing at which the eighth display segment N8 starts to light (display start mode) is configured to differ depending on the contents of the advantageous section to which it is transitioned by lighting it.

Figure 67 shows the relationship between the timing of lighting the eighth display segment N8 and the contents of the advantageous zone to which the winning is subsequently notified (transition) when a weak watermelon role is won as a specific role in the normal zone.

For example, as shown in FIG. 67(a), in the case where a weak watermelon role is won, the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up when the first reel is stopped and turned off. The player can recognize that he has won the lottery to move to the advantageous zone when the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up, and predicts that the current advantageous zone is challenge mode because it started to light up when the first reel was stopped and turned off (see FIG. 64). The player then goes through the premonition mode, and when the challenge mode start effect occurs as an announcement game, he confirms that the current advantageous zone is challenge mode. As already explained, the measurement of the advantageous zone starts when the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up, meaning that the advantageous zone is still in the premonition mode.

Figure 67 (b) shows a case where, in the case where a weak watermelon role is won, the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up when the second reel is stopped and turned OFF. In this case, the player predicts that he has won the lottery to move to the advantageous zone, and that the current advantageous zone is attack mode (see Figure 64). Then, after the premonition mode, an attack mode confirmation effect occurs as an announcement game, confirming that the current advantageous zone is attack mode.

Figure 68 (c) shows a case where, in the case where a weak watermelon role is won, the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up when the third reel is stopped and turned OFF. In this case, the player predicts that he has won the lottery to move to the advantageous zone, and that the current advantageous zone is the Super Attack Mode (see Figure 64). Then, after the premonition mode, an add-on specialization zone confirmation performance occurs as an announcement game, and the player confirms that the current advantageous zone is the Super Attack Mode with an add-on specialization zone.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

In a configuration in which the eighth display segment N8, which serves as a section indicator, lights up to indicate that the section is favorable, and turns off to indicate that the section is not favorable, by varying the manner in which the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the section indicator (eighth display segment N8) while still ensuring the notification function of whether or not the section is favorable.

By making the lighting start mode of the eighth display segment N8 different depending on the contents of the advantageous zone, not only can the player know that he has won the lottery to move to the advantageous zone when the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up, but he can also predict the contents of the advantageous zone, which can significantly increase the attention it attracts when the eighth display segment N8 lights up.

In particular, by configuring the lighting start mode of the eighth display segment N8 to be determined by lottery depending on the contents of the advantageous zone, there is no one-to-one relationship between the lighting start mode and the contents of the advantageous zone, so even if the lighting starts in a mode that is not desirable for the player, the player can continue playing while maintaining a sense of anticipation for the mode to be transitioned to afterwards.

Moreover, it is premised on a configuration in which the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up by the game following the starting game, and after the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up, notifications of the transition to challenge mode or attack mode (such as a challenge mode start notification effect or an attack mode winning notification effect) occur several games after the premonition mode has passed. This allows the player to predict the contents of the advantageous zone when the lighting starts, and during the premonition mode, enjoy the thrill of wondering whether the prediction was correct or not. In this way, it is possible to play a game in which the eighth display segment N8 serves as a so-called definitive notification, while predicting the contents even after the definitive notification has been made.

As described above, the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up by the game following the start game, so the end of the lighting start timing is predetermined. In such a performance with a set end time, the eighth display segment N8 is configured to display the contents of the advantageous zone when it starts to light up before the end time, which dramatically increases the attention to the performance that notifies the contents of the advantageous zone. In other words, for a player who is interested in whether or not he or she has won the lottery to move to the advantageous zone, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 starts to be displayed is of great interest, and since the end time of the display start timing is set, it can be said that the timing when the player should be interested in the eighth display segment N8 is concentrated. Under such a premise, if the eighth display segment N8 is configured to notify the contents of the advantageous zone, it is possible to provide a notification that attracts overwhelming attention compared to notifications of the contents of the advantageous zone made at other times or by other display means.

The eighth display segment N8 is configured to light up mainly when the stop switches 42-44 are operated, so in games where it may light up (games where a specific role is won), it is possible to perform the stop operation while building up a sense of anticipation for it to light up, which strengthens the impression that it has been lit up by the player's own operation, compared to a configuration where the light comes on regardless of the player's operation.

Also, by configuring the stop switches 42-44 to light up based on the operation of the stop switches, it is possible to determine whether or not the lights will light up based on the relationship with the stop results that will stop on the operated reel. Specifically, for example, when a strong or weak cherry is won, it is possible to win a lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode, etc., but the winning probability of the transition lottery differs between strong and weak cherries, with strong cherries having a higher winning probability than weak cherries. Therefore, it is considered that the player will operate the stop switches 42-44 while hoping that the lottery result of this game will be a strong cherry win, not a weak cherry, and the player can perform the stop operation while predicting whether it will be a strong cherry or a weak cherry in relation to the lighting timing of the eighth display segment N8.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery according to the contents of the advantageous zone, and no matter which display start mode is used, the challenge mode, attack mode, or super attack mode is possible, but the display start mode and the contents of the advantageous zone may correspond one-to-one. Also, a display start mode that is one-to-one associated with a display start mode that is not associated (any mode is possible) may exist.

For example, FIG. 68(a) shows an example of a display start mode table in which the contents of the advantageous zone and the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 correspond one-to-one. That is, in this example, if the contents of the advantageous zone this time are the challenge mode, the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up based on the stop operation of the first reel, if the contents of the advantageous zone this time are the attack mode, the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up based on the stop operation of the second reel, and if the contents of the advantageous zone this time are the super attack mode, the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up based on the stop operation of the third reel. In this way, the contents of the advantageous zone this time can be clearly understood based on the lighting start mode. In particular, the eighth display segment N8 is smaller than other notification units such as the auxiliary display unit 65, and is easily recognized only by players who are playing the game, and it is highly likely that only players who are playing the gaming machine can understand the contents of the advantageous zone based on the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8. In this way, for example, a player who realizes that Super Attack Mode is active based on the display start state of the eighth display segment N8 can wait for the subsequent Super Attack Mode winning notification display while basking in the feeling of superiority that he or she knows information that other players do not.

In this example, the display is set to be more advantageous when the second reel is stopped than when the first reel is stopped, and the third reel is stopped than when the second reel is stopped, so that the display is set to be more advantageous when the second reel is stopped. This allows for a game that allows players to enjoy a balance between wanting the display to start early and the transition to the advantageous zone to be confirmed, and wanting the display to start later and the transition to the advantageous zone to be made. For example, if the first reel or the second reel is stopped and the player predicts/understands that a role (e.g., a middle bell role) that is likely to be won in the Super Attack Mode based on the stop results is won, the player will operate the first reel or the second reel while hoping that the display will not start when the first reel or the second reel is stopped, and if the player predicts/understands that a role (e.g., a weak cherry role) that is unlikely to be won even in the Challenge Mode is won when the first reel is stopped, the player will operate the first reel while hoping that the display will start when the first reel is stopped. In other words, even in a configuration where the display start mode and the contents of the advantageous zone correspond one-to-one, by setting the ratio of selection rates between the stop ON operation and the stop OFF operation as described above, it is possible to enjoy whether or not the display will start in relation to the stop result.

Figure 68(b) shows an example of a display start mode table in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between the contents of the advantageous zone and the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8, and there is also no correspondence. In this example, in addition to the correspondence between the stop operation of each reel and the contents of the advantageous zone in the table of Figure 68(a) above, the eighth display segment N8 may also start displaying when the payout ends, and the payout end time can be selected regardless of the contents of the advantageous zone. In this way, compared to the example of Figure 68(a) above, where it is determined that either the Super Attack mode has been won or the transition to the advantageous zone has been lost when the stop operation is completed up to the second reel, it is possible to enjoy a sense of suspense until the very end.

<Modification 2>
In this embodiment, a specific state (specific situation) that affects the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is provided as the game state (game situation). In this modified example, the specific state does not have a lottery table that changes from the normal game state like each RT state or bonus state, and does not have a performance change related to the push order notification like challenge mode or attack mode, and there is no difference in the degree of advantage for the player depending on whether or not it is a specific state, but the display start mode table when the transition lottery to the advantageous zone is won differs depending on whether or not it is a specific state.

Figure 69 (a) shows a part of the lottery process (Figure 16) in this modified example. That is, in this modified example, after the priority setting process is performed in step S315, the specific state process is performed in step S2901, and then the first section display process is executed in step S316.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 69(b), in the processing for the specific state, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed (lit). If it is being displayed (lit), the processing for the specific state ends. If it is not being displayed (unlit), in step S3002, it is determined whether or not the result of the current lottery processing, that is, the game result of the current game, is a win for a specific role. If it is not a win for a specific role, the processing for the specific state ends. If it is a win for a specific role, the processing proceeds to step S3003.

In step S3003, it is determined whether a specific state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The specific state flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine whether or not a specific state is in progress. If the specific state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3004, where it is determined whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, in step S3004, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery to the advantageous zone has been won in this game. If it has been won, the specific state processing is terminated as is. If it has not been won, the process proceeds to step S3005, where the specific state selection process is executed. The specific state selection process is a process that determines by lottery whether or not to transition to a specific state, and for example, a lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. In this case, the probability of winning the transition lottery may differ depending on the type of specific role. For example, as in the transition lottery to challenge mode, etc., strong cherries may have a higher probability of winning than weak cherries, or conversely, weak cherries may have a higher probability of winning than strong cherries. By making it inverse to the ease of winning the transition lottery to challenge mode, etc. (the more likely a role is to win the transition lottery to challenge mode, etc., the less likely it is to win the transition lottery to a specific state, and the more unlikely a role is to win the transition lottery to challenge mode, etc., the more likely it is to win the transition lottery to a specific state), it is possible to attract players' interest even in roles that are less likely to win the transition lottery to challenge mode, etc.

After the specific state lottery process is performed in step S3005, in step S3006, it is determined whether or not the result of step S3005 is a winning result. If it is a non-winning result, the specific state process ends, and if it is a winning result, the process proceeds to step S3007. In step S3007, a process is performed to input "3" as a predetermined value to the state counter K provided in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The state counter K is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the continuation conditions during the specific state, and is decremented by one each time a specific role is won. In the following step S3008, a specific state flag is set, and then the specific state process ends. By setting the specific state flag in step S3008, it becomes possible to make a positive determination in the above step S3003.

If it is determined in step S3003 that the specific state flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3009. In step S3009, as in step S3004, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery to the advantageous zone has been won in this game by determining whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. If the transition lottery has not been won, the state counter K is decremented by 1 in step S3010, and it is determined in step S3011 whether or not the state counter K has become 0. If the state counter K is not 0, the process for this specific state is terminated as it is, and if the state counter K is 0, the specific state flag is cleared in step S3012, and the process for the specific state is terminated. Also, if it is determined in step S3009 that the transition lottery to the advantageous zone has been won, the state counter K is cleared to 0 in step S3013, and the specific state flag is cleared in step S3012, and the process for the specific state is terminated.

As described above, in this modified example, the specific state is entered in some cases where a player does not win the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone in a game in which the player wins a specific role in the normal zone, and continues thereafter until a predetermined number of games occur in which the player wins a specific role but does not win the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone, three times. In other words, the specific state is a state to which the player enters based on the occurrence of an event that is unfavorable to the player in terms of the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone.

In the first section display process in this modified example, the display start mode lottery process (step S2703) obtains a display start mode table that differs depending on whether or not it is a specific state. In other words, if it is not a specific state, a display start mode table such as that in FIG. 64 is obtained and a lottery is performed for the display start mode, whereas if it is a specific state, a display start mode table for a specific state such as that in FIG. 70 is obtained and a lottery is performed for the display start mode. The display start mode table for a specific state is different from the display start mode table for normal times (for states that are not specific states).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 70, the selection rate of the display start mode differs not only depending on the contents of the advantageous zone, but also on the setting value that changes the rate of increase or decrease of medals.

For example, if the transition lottery to the challenge mode is won, the timing can be selected at the time of operation of the start lever 41, at the time of the stop OFF operation of the first reel, at the time of the stop OFF operation of the third reel, and at the time of the end of the payout, but the selection rate of each timing differs depending on the setting value. Specifically, when the challenge mode is won, the probability that the display of the eighth display segment N8 starts when the start lever 41 is operated is higher for settings 2, 4, and 6 than for settings 1, 3, and 5, and the even setting is more likely to be selected than the odd setting. In other words, if the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the start lever 41 is operated and then the game mode is switched to, the setting value of this gaming machine is more likely to be an even setting than an odd setting. Also, when the challenge mode is won, the probability that the display of the eighth display segment N8 starts when the payout is completed is higher for setting 5 than for setting 4, higher for setting 6 than for setting 5, and 0 for settings 3 and below. Therefore, if the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the payout is completed and then the game mode is switched to, it is determined that the setting is 4 or higher. Also, when the challenge mode is selected, the third reel stop OFF operation is not selected in setting 1. Therefore, when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed, the eighth display segment N8 lights up, and if the game then transitions to challenge mode, it is confirmed that the setting is 2 or higher.

On the other hand, if the transition lottery to the attack mode is won, the timings selected are the time when the start lever 41 is operated, the time when the second reel is stopped OFF, the time when the third reel is stopped OFF, and the time when the payout ends, but the selection rate for each timing differs depending on the setting value. Specifically, when the attack mode is won, the probability that the display of the eighth display segment N8 starts when the start lever 41 is operated is higher for settings 1, 3, and 5 than for settings 2, 4, and 6, and the odd setting is more likely to be selected than the even setting. In other words, the setting is set to be the opposite of the challenge mode, and when the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the start lever 41 is operated and then the transition to the attack mode occurs, the setting value of this gaming machine is more likely to be the odd setting than the even setting, and when the transition to the challenge mode occurs, the setting value of this gaming machine is more likely to be the even setting than the odd setting. Also, when the attack mode is won, the time when the payout ends is not selected for setting 1. That is, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up at the end of the payout and then the mode transitions to the challenge mode, as described above, the setting is determined to be 4 or more, but when the mode transitions to the attack mode, the setting is determined to be 2 or more. Therefore, on the premise that a high setting value is preferable to the player, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up at the end of the payout, transitioning to the challenge mode is more preferable to the player than the attack mode, and the advantageous degree of the contents of the advantageous zone and the favorability of the player are reversed. Also, when the challenge mode is won, the time of the stop OFF operation of the third reel is not selected for a setting of 3 or less. Therefore, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the third reel is stopped and then the mode transitions to the challenge mode, the setting is determined to be 4 or more. That is, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the third reel is stopped and then the mode transitions to the challenge mode, as described above, the setting is determined to be 2 or more, but when the mode transitions to the attack mode, the setting is determined to be 4 or more. Therefore, if the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the third reel is stopped and turned off, it is more favorable for the player to switch to attack mode rather than challenge mode, and the degree of advantage of the advantageous zone content matches what is favorable for the player.

In the display start mode table for a specific state, if the lottery for transition to the Super Attack mode is won, the end of payout is selected regardless of the set value. In other words, if the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone is won in a specific state, if the display of the eighth display segment N8 starts before the end of payout, some set value can be guessed, and even if the payout ends, if the advantageous zone to be transitioned to is Challenge mode or Attack mode, the set value can be guessed, but if the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 starts at the end of payout and it is Super Attack mode, the set value cannot be guessed. In this way, an exciting game can be created that utilizes the desire to transition to the Super Attack mode based on the advantageous degree of the Super Attack mode and the desire to make setting guesses.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, a plurality of display start modes, which differ in the elapsed time from a starting event, are set as the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8.

As shown in FIG. 71, in the display start mode table in this modified example, regardless of the contents of the advantageous zone, the eighth display segment N8 starts to light after the third reel is stopped or at the end of the payout. The time elapsed from the third reel's stop ON operation is set to be different, and it can be set to 0 sec after the third reel's stop ON operation (i.e., when the third reel is stopped), 5 sec after the third reel's stop ON operation, 10 sec after the third reel's stop ON operation, or 15 sec after the third reel's stop ON operation. For example, when the challenge mode is selected, 5 sec after the third reel's stop ON operation is most likely to be selected, when the attack mode is selected, 10 sec after the third reel's stop ON operation is most likely to be selected, and when the super attack mode is selected, 15 sec after the third reel's stop ON operation is most likely to be selected. In other words, the later the timing of the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 is from the stop ON operation of the third reel, the closer the transition to the advantageous zone that is more advantageous for the player.

In the first section display process in this modified example, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 72, in steps S3101 to S3103, the same process as the process of steps S2701 to S2703 is performed. However, in the lottery process of step S3103, a lottery is performed based on the display start mode table of FIG. 71. In step S3104, a process is performed to store the display start timing according to the lottery result based on the processing result of step S3103. In this case, for example, a flag or the like that can determine the determined display start timing (i.e., how many seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel, or the time of the end of the payout) is set, and the display start timing can be determined after the fact by the flag. In step S3105, a process is performed to set a display start game flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The display start game flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the display of the eighth display segment N8 will start in the current game.

After executing the processing of step S3105, measurement of the number of games in the favorable zone AG is started in step S3106, and then the first processing of zone display is terminated. The processing of step S3106 is the same as the processing of step S2705. Also, if it is determined in step S3101 that the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed, display continuation processing is performed in step S3107, and then the first processing of zone display is terminated. The processing of step S3107 is the same as the processing of step S2706.

In the reel control process (Figure 18) of this modified example, as shown in Figure 73 (a), after it is determined in step S411 that all reels have stopped, the third section display process is performed in step S3201. After the process of step S3201 is performed, a payout determination process is performed in step S413, a winning result process is performed in step S414, a second section display process is performed in step S415, and a winning result command is set in step S416 before the reel control process ends. The processes of steps S413 to S416 are as described above.

The third section display process in step S3201 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 73(b).

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the display start game flag is set. As already explained, the display start game flag is a flag that is set in the first section display process. If it is not set, the third section display process is terminated. If it is set, in step S3302, a process is performed to clear the display start game flag. Then, in step S3303, a freeze setting process is performed. The freeze setting process is a process for generating a so-called freeze effect that temporarily restricts processing based on the player's operation or the progress of the game when the eighth display segment N8 is lit in this modified example.

Specifically, in step S3303, the freeze period is set to 1 sec, 6 sec, 11 sec, or 16 sec. Here, the timing at which the section display third process is performed is the timing at which all reels have stopped, and the timing at which the stop ON operation of the third reel is performed. The freeze period set in step S3303 is a period in which 1 sec has been added as a predetermined period to each period in which the 8th display segment N8 is displayed after the stop ON operation of the third reel in this modified example, and is 0 sec + 1 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, 5 sec + 1 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, 10 sec + 1 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, and 15 sec + 1 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel. In step S3303, the display start mode of the 8th display segment N8 this time is grasped, and the freeze period is set according to the grasped start mode. That is, if the start mode is 0 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, the freeze period is set to 1 sec, if it is 5 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, the freeze period is set to 6 sec, if it is 10 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, the freeze period is set to 11 sec, if it is 15 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, the freeze period is set to 16 sec. Also, if the current start mode is the end of payout, the current freeze period is set to 16 sec, which is the longest freeze period when the start mode is after the stop operation of the third reel. The freeze period is set, for example, by inputting a value according to the length of the freeze period into a timer counter that is updated (decremented) at a predetermined cycle, and starting to update the timer counter. The freeze state is assumed to continue until the timer counter becomes the initial value (0), and the CPU 102 refers to the value of the timer counter to determine whether or not to proceed to the next process (payout determination process of step S413). In other words, the third section display process waits until the timer counter reaches its initial value.

After the process of step S3304, a process of setting the display start timing is performed in step S3305. That is, based on the information of the display start timing that can be determined afterwards in step S3104 of the above-mentioned section display first process, a process of synchronizing with the information of the freeze period set in the above-mentioned step S3305 is performed. Specifically, if the display start timing is set to 0 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, the 8th display segment N8 is set to start displaying 0 sec after the freeze start, if the display start timing is set to 5 sec after the stop ON operation, the 8th display segment N8 is set to start displaying 5 sec after the freeze start, if the display start timing is set to 10 sec after the stop ON operation, the 8th display segment N8 is set to start displaying 10 sec after the freeze start, and if the display start timing is set to 15 sec after the stop ON operation, the 8th display segment N8 is set to start displaying 15 sec after the freeze start. Also, if the display start timing is set to end of dispensing, the eighth display segment N8 is set to start displaying when dispensing ends after the current freeze period ends. In this case, for example, a flag indicating that display should start when dispensing ends is set, and the presence or absence of such a flag is determined to determine whether display should start during the freeze period, and whether display should start when dispensing ends.

After performing the processing of step S3305, in step S3306, a display start command is output to the display control device 81, which is the sub-side control device, and the third section display processing is then terminated. The display control device 81, which has received the display start command, controls the auxiliary display unit 65 so that a freeze effect (e.g., a blackout effect) corresponding to the freeze period is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and controls the speaker 64 so that a corresponding sound effect (e.g., a "whoosh" sound as if a machine is breaking down) is emitted. In this case, the freeze effect and its sound effect may be configured to differ depending on the length of the freeze period.

In this modified example, the relationship between the timing at which the eighth display segment N8 starts to be displayed and the contents of the favorable zone will be explained with reference to the timing chart in Figure 74.

Figure 74 (a) shows a case where 6 seconds is set as the freeze period during which the player's operation and processing based on the operation are invalidated. When the third reel stops at the timing of ta1 and the freeze state continues from that point to the timing of ta3, the eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at the timing of ta2, which is slightly earlier than the timing of ta3. In this case, the period TB1 from the start of the freeze to the eighth display segment N8 during the freeze period is 5 seconds, and the period from the start of the display at the timing of ta2 to the release of the freeze at the timing of ta3 is 1 second. When the freeze is released at the timing of ta3, the payout of medals occurs, and the medal payout process is performed over the period TA until the timing of ta4. In this case, it is highly likely that the advantageous zone that starts is the challenge mode. When the medal payout process is completed at the timing of ta4, the operation of the next game (betting operation) is permitted.

Figure 74 (b) shows a case where the freeze period is set to 11 sec. When the third reel stops at the timing of tb1 and is frozen for the period from the timing of tb1 to the timing of tb3, the eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at the timing of tb2, which is slightly earlier than the timing of tb3. In this case, the period TB2 from the start of the freeze to the eighth display segment N8 during the freeze period is 10 sec, which is longer than the case of Figure 74 (a) above, while the period from the start of the display at the timing of tb2 to the release of the freeze at the timing of tb3 is 1 sec, which is the same length as the case of Figure 74 (a) above. When the freeze is released at the timing of tb3, the payout of medals occurs and the medal payout process is performed for the period TA until the timing of tb4. If the winning result of the game is the same as that of Figure 74 (a) above, the length of the medal payout process is also the same, and the period TA from tb3 to tb4 is the same length as that of Figure 74 (a) above. In this case, the advantageous period that starts is likely to be attack mode. When the medal payout process is completed at the timing of tb4, operations for the next game (betting operations) are permitted. In other words, in the case of FIG. 74(b), the timing at which operations for the next game are permitted is later than in the case of FIG. 74(a).

Figure 74 (c) shows a case where the freeze period is set to 16 sec. When the third reel stops at the timing of tc1 and is frozen for the period from the timing of tc1 to the timing of tc3, the eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at the timing of tc2, which is slightly earlier than the timing of tc3. In this case, the period TB3 from the start of the freeze during the freeze period to the eighth display segment N8 is 15 sec, which is longer than the case of Figure 74 (b) above, while the period from the start of display at the timing of tc2 to the release of the freeze at the timing of tc3 is 1 sec, which is the same length as the cases of Figures 74 (a) and 74 (b) above. When the freeze is released at the timing of tc3, the payout of medals occurs and the medal payout process is performed for the period TA until the timing of tc4. If the winning result of the game is the same as in Figures 74(a) and 74(b) above, the length of the period TA is the same as in Figures 74(a) and 74(b). In this case, the advantageous zone that starts is likely to be the Super Attack Mode. When the medal payout process is completed at the timing of tc4, operations for the next game (betting operations) are permitted. In other words, in the case of Figure 74(c), the timing at which operations for the next game are permitted is later than in the cases of Figures 74(a) and 74(b).

As described above, by setting a freeze state (freeze period, invalid period) that limits the game progress processing in the starting game that starts the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a period display device, it is possible to secure a period for the display start performance in the display start performance of the eighth display segment N8, which has a fixed end time for the start timing, and to diversify the display start performance.

Moreover, by relating the duration of the freeze state to the contents of the advantageous zone, it is possible to generate interest not only in the occurrence of the freeze state, but also in the length of that period.

In particular, by matching the period from the start of the frozen state to the timing when the eighth display segment N8 starts to be displayed with the contents of the advantageous zone, interest in the eighth display segment N8 after the frozen state is reached is overwhelmingly heightened, and it is possible to expect a significant dramatic effect, even though it is a simple effect of simply switching the eighth display segment N8 from an off state to a on state.

<Modification 4>
In this variation, the freeze state occurs while the reels are spinning, rather than after all the reels have stopped.

That is, for example, if 6 seconds is set as the freeze period, as shown in FIG. 75(a), the period from ta5 when any reel is spinning to ta7, 6 seconds later, is frozen, and even if the player operates stop switches 42-44 to stop the spinning reels, the stop drive control is not executed. The eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at ta6, which is slightly earlier than ta7. In other words, the display of the interval indicator begins after the TA1 period (5 seconds) has elapsed since the freeze state was entered. All reels stop at ta8, medal payout processing is performed from ta9 to ta10, and the next game operation is permitted at ta10.

When 11 seconds is set as the freeze period, as shown in FIG. 75(b), the freeze state lasts from tb5, when any reel is spinning, until tb7, 11 seconds later. The eighth display segment N8 is lit at tb6, slightly earlier than tb7. In other words, the display of the interval indicator begins after a period of TA2 (10 seconds) has elapsed since the freeze state was entered. All reels stop at tb8, medal payout processing is carried out from tb9 to tb10, and the next game operation is permitted at tb10.

When 16 seconds is set as the freeze period, as shown in FIG. 75(c), the period from tc5, when any reel is spinning, to tc7, 16 seconds later, is frozen, and even if the player operates stop switches 42-44 to stop a spinning reel, the stop drive control is not executed. The eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at tc6, which is slightly earlier than tc7. In other words, the display of the interval indicator begins after a period of TA3 (15 seconds) has elapsed since the freeze state was entered. All reels stop at tc8, medal payout processing is performed from tc9 to tc10, and the next game operation is permitted at tc10.

In this way, the period during which the freeze state is to be established in the starting game can be set at any timing, so long as there is a correspondence between the timing at which operations are permitted in the next game and the contents of the advantageous zone.

In particular, by configuring the freeze state to restrict the player's operations (stop operations in the above example), the player can become aware of the freeze state through the restriction on those operations. This makes it more difficult to determine the start timing of the freeze state compared to a freeze state in which the execution of processes unilaterally performed by the gaming machine, such as payout processes, is restricted, as in Variation 3 above. As a result, since the start timing is difficult to determine, the length of the freeze state is also difficult to determine, and even if the set length of the freeze state is not desirable for the player, it is possible to maintain a sense of anticipation while enjoying the suggestion of the contents of the advantageous zone by the start of the zone indicator.

In addition, by creating a freeze state in which the player's operations are restricted as described above, it becomes difficult to know when the freeze state will end. In other words, if a freeze state is created while the reels are spinning, the player must stop the reels that are spinning after the freeze state is released. From the viewpoint that the timing of the stop operation depends on the player, in a configuration in which a freeze state occurs while the reels are spinning, the timing at which operations for the next game are permitted will be affected not only by the length of the freeze state but also by the timing of the player's operation. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the notification of the contents of the advantageous zone while building up a sense of expectation beyond the set length of the freeze state, and it is also possible to create the benefit of delaying the end of the start timing of the display by the zone indicator.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, the eighth display segment N8 starts to be displayed at a timing different from that during the freeze period. That is, in this modified example, the eighth display segment N8 starts to be displayed when the payout ends, and a freeze state is generated in the starting game, and the length of the freeze period is made to correspond to the contents of the advantageous zone.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76(a), when the challenge mode is won, a freeze state occurs from ta11 to ta12 (6 sec, TC1). The reels stop at timing ta13, and the medal payout process takes place from ta14 to ta15 (TA). When the medal payout ends at timing ta15, the display of the eighth display segment N8 begins.

As shown in FIG. 76(b), when attack mode is selected, a freeze state occurs from tb11 to tb12 (11 sec, TC2). The reels stop at tb13, and the medal payout process takes place from tb14 to tb15 (TA). When the medal payout ends at tb15, the display of the eighth display segment N8 begins.

As shown in FIG. 76(c), when the Super Attack Mode is won, a freeze state occurs from tc11 to tc12 (16 sec, TC3). The reels stop at tc13, and the medal payout process takes place from tc14 to tc15 (TA). When the medal payout ends at tc15, the display of the eighth display segment N8 begins.

In this way, even if the display of the interval indicator does not start during the freeze state, as long as the length of the freeze state period is associated with the contents of the advantageous zone, it is also possible to play a game in which the contents of the advantageous zone are predicted from the length of the freeze state. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically improve the degree of freedom in the timing of when the freeze state occurs.

<Modification 6>
In this modification, the aspect of the section indicator is different. Figure 77 is a front view of the slot machine 10 in this modification.

In this modified example, the ninth display unit N9 is provided on the front side of the gaming machine as a section indicator. Specifically, the ninth display unit N9 is provided next to the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R (to the left of the display window 26L when viewed from the front) on the gaming panel 25 on the front side of the gaming machine. The ninth display unit N9 is a light-emitting unit whose front panel is formed of a resin material having optical transparency, and the front panel is integrally formed with the gaming panel 25. In the ninth display unit N9, an LED (not shown) is provided behind the front panel. The LED is connected to the main control device 101, and the LED is controlled to emit light by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101. The LED can emit light in multiple colors, and can emit light in four colors, for example, blue, green, red, and white. In this modified example, the eighth display segment N8 is also provided, but the ninth display unit N9 may be provided instead of the eighth display segment N8.

Incidentally, when the LED of the ninth display unit N9 is light-emitting controlled, it emits light so that its brightness and illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine are higher than the brightness and illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine of the surrounding display units (for example, the brightness or illuminance of the backlight of the gaming panel 25 and the brightness or illuminance of the auxiliary display unit 65). Therefore, when the ninth display unit N9 is light-emitting controlled, it is more noticeable than the surrounding display units, preventing the player from overlooking it.

In addition, each of the 9th display unit N9's illumination colors is set to a color that is easily noticeable in relation to other display units (such as the game panel 25), and no matter what color it is illuminated in, it is guaranteed to function as a zone indicator that clearly indicates that it is a favorable zone.

Figure 78 shows the display start mode table for this modified example.

In this modified example, the display start timing of the ninth display unit N9 as a section indicator is unified to the end of the payout in the starting game. Meanwhile, the light emission color of the LED of the ninth display unit N9 as a display start mode is made different depending on the contents of the advantageous section. Specifically, when the challenge mode is won, blue is likely to be selected out of blue, green, and red, when the attack mode is won, green is likely to be selected, and when the super attack mode is won, red is likely to be selected. Therefore, when the ninth display unit N9 starts to be displayed in the starting game, the contents of the advantageous section in which the light emission colors are red, green, and blue in that order are likely to be advantageous. In this way, the presentation effect of the section indicator can be enhanced, and the attention to the section indicator can be increased.

The ninth display unit N9, which acts as a zone indicator, emits light in red, green, or blue depending on the contents of the advantageous zone when the display starts, but from the game following the start game, i.e., during the advantageous zone, the emitted light color is unified to white. In other words, the game of predicting the contents of the advantageous zone from the display color of the ninth display unit N9 is limited to the start game, and the timing to pay attention to is concentrated, enhancing the presentation effect.

As described above, all of the colors emitted at the start of display are colors that are more noticeable than the white color emitted during the favorable zone. From this perspective, it is possible to make it easier for the display color of the ninth display section N9 at the start of display to attract a high level of interest.

As described above, when suggesting the contents of the advantageous zone by varying the start mode of the zone display, the difference in the start mode is not limited to the difference in the timing at which the display starts, but may also be a configuration in which the contents of the advantageous zone are suggested by the difference in the presentation content (color) on the zone display at the start of display.

In particular, by configuring each light color so that it stands out (is easy to recognize) in relation to other display parts regardless of the light color it emits, it is possible to expect a dramatic effect even with a zone indicator that has a relatively low dramatic effect, such as being lit during advantageous zones and turned off during normal zones, while still maintaining the function of clearly indicating advantageous zones.

<Modification 7>
In this modified example, the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 as the zone indicator is changed depending on the game result that triggered the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone. Figure 79 shows an example of a display start mode table in this modified example.

For example, Figure 79 (a) shows a display start mode table when the game result that triggered the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone, i.e., the game result in which the challenge mode win flag or attack mode win flag was set, was a strong cherry. In other words, when challenge mode is won based on a strong cherry win, the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is selected when the third reel is stopped and turned OFF. Also, when attack mode is won based on a strong cherry win, the display start mode of the second reel is selected when the second reel is stopped and turned OFF, and when super attack mode is won, the display start mode of the first reel is selected.

On the other hand, if the game result that triggered the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone was a weak cherry, as shown in FIG. 79(b), if Challenge Mode is won, the first reel's stop OFF operation is selected, if Attack Mode is won, the second reel's stop OFF operation is selected, and if Super Attack Mode is won, the third reel's stop OFF operation is selected.

For strong watermelon and weak watermelon, the display start mode is determined by a common display start mode table. In this case, as shown in FIG. 79(c), in challenge mode, the time when the third reel is turned on is selected, in attack mode, the time when the third reel is turned off is selected, and in super attack mode, the time when the payout ends is selected.

For other specific roles, the display start mode is determined by the display start mode table in FIG. 79(d). In this case, in the challenge mode, the time when the start lever 41 is operated is selected, in the attack mode, the time when the stop OFF operation of the first reel is selected is selected, and in the super attack mode, the time when the payout ends is selected.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to play a game in which the presence or absence of a transition to a favorable zone and the contents of the favorable zone in the case of a transition can be predicted from the game result and the display start mode of the zone indicator. Specifically, for example, when the "cherry" symbol stops on the lower or upper row of the left reel 32L, the game result this time is a strong cherry or a weak cherry. In this case, if the left reel 32L is stopped first and the left reel 32L is the first reel, when the left reel 32L is stopped and the eighth display segment N8 is lit, it is confirmed that the transition lottery to the challenge mode or the super attack mode has been won. In other words, it is confirmed that the attack mode is not in. Whether it is a strong cherry or a weak cherry can be determined by stopping the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R. If the "cherry" symbols are aligned and stopped on the active lines of these middle reels 32M and right reels 32R to form a triple cherry, it is a strong cherry, and if they are not aligned and stopped, it is a weak cherry. For example, when the second or third reel is stopped and a weak cherry is identified, the content of the current advantageous zone is determined to be the Super Attack Mode, since the eighth display segment N8 is lit when the first reel is stopped and turned off. On the other hand, when the second or third reel is stopped and a strong cherry is identified, the content of the advantageous zone is determined to be the Challenge Mode. In other words, from the standpoint of the probability of winning in the Challenge Mode or Attack Mode, a strong cherry is more preferable to a player than a weak cherry, but in the above situation, a weak cherry is more preferable to a player than a strong cherry, and the impression of the game result is reversed.

In addition, when the "cherry" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, if the eighth display segment N8 does not light up, it means that a strong cherry is won and the challenge mode or attack mode is won, a weak cherry is won and the attack mode or super attack mode is won, or a strong cherry or weak cherry is won and the lottery for moving to the favorable zone is not won. In this case, if the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the second reel is stopped and turned off, it is determined that the favorable zone is the attack mode regardless of whether it is a strong cherry or a weak cherry. On the other hand, if the eighth display segment N8 does not light up when the second reel is stopped and turned off, it means that a strong cherry is won and the challenge mode is won, a weak cherry is won and the super attack mode is won, or a strong cherry or weak cherry is won and the lottery for moving to the favorable zone is not won. When it is possible to distinguish between a strong cherry and a weak cherry from the stop result of the second reel, if it is determined to be a strong cherry, it means that the lottery for moving to the favorable zone is not won, or the challenge mode is won. However, in the case of a strong cherry, there is a high probability that the player will win the lottery to move to the advantageous zone in the first place, and in this case, there is a high probability that the player will win the challenge mode. On the other hand, if the cherry is determined to be a weak cherry, the player will either not win the lottery to move to the advantageous zone or will win the super attack mode, which is the situation with the greatest difference in the degree of advantage for the player. However, in the case of a weak cherry, there is a low probability that the player will win the lottery to move to the advantageous zone in the first place, and in this case, there is a high probability that the player will not win the lottery to move to the advantageous zone.

In this way, by associating the game result, i.e., the stop result, with the display start state of the zone indicator, it becomes possible to narrow down the winning combination as the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, making it possible to predict the contents of the advantageous zone in relation to the playability of the slot machine 10.

<Modification 8>
In this modified example, a lottery is performed for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode, or super attack mode in a predetermined replay among replays (replay results). Figure 80(a) shows a part of a win/loss lottery table for the normal game state and the first RT state in this modified example.

In this modified example, in the win/lose lottery table for the normal game state and the first RT state, a winning replay role is set as a type of replay role, which is won when the index value IV=53 is won and the first replay or the seventh replay wins. The winning replay role has the same probability of winning regardless of the set value, and specifically, the probability of winning is approximately 1 in 32,000. As described above, when a winning replay role is won, a replay is granted and the next game can be played without the need to insert new coins.

In this modified example, the winning replay role is treated as a specific role, similar to a strong cherry role and the like. Therefore, for example, in step S701 of the lottery result response processing (FIG. 31), if the winning replay role is won, a positive judgment is made that the specific role has been won, and processing proceeds to the first specific role processing (step S705) and the like. Then, in the first specific role processing in this modified example, a lottery is also held to transition to challenge mode, attack mode, or super attack mode based on the winning replay role.

The probability of winning the lottery for transition to Challenge mode, Attack mode, or Super Attack mode based on a winning replay is the same regardless of the setting value. Specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to Challenge mode is 0% regardless of the setting value, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to Attack mode is 50% regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to Super Attack mode is 50% regardless of the setting value. In other words, in the normal game state or the first RT state, if a winning replay is won while the display mode is in normal mode, attack mode or super attack mode is won, and the ratio is 1:1. Note that in this modified example, if a winning replay is won during challenge mode, there is a 100% probability of winning super attack mode.

As described above, when a winning replay role is achieved, a replay is awarded, just like other replay roles. However, compared to other replay roles, the configuration of the bet process when a replay is awarded is different. Figure 80 (b) is a flowchart showing the start waiting process in this modified example. The start waiting process is a process that is started in step S204 in the normal process (Figure 15), and is a process that is mainly used to set the number of bets (bet) for the game.

In step S3401, it is determined whether or not the previous game resulted in any replay winning. If it did, the processing of steps S3402 to S3404 is performed to award a replay. In this case, in this modified example, in step S3402, it is determined whether or not the replay that won in the previous game was a winning replay. If it was not a winning replay, automatic betting processing is performed in step S3403. In automatic betting processing, the number of bets in the previous game is determined, and a bet equal to the number of bets is set. For example, if 3 bets were placed in the previous game, processing to set 3 bets is performed in step S3403. Also, if 1 bet was placed in the previous game, processing to set 1 bet is performed in step S3403. After the processing of step S3403 is performed, the start waiting processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3402 that the previous game resulted in a winning replay role, then in step S3404, an operation time bet flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The operation time bet flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the current game is a game in which a replay is awarded, and that a replay has not yet been awarded. In this modified example, when the operation time bet flag is set, the number of bets in the previous game is temporarily stored in a register or the like, but a different operation time bet flag may be set depending on the number of bets in the previous game.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3401, or after the processing of step S3404 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S3405. In step S3405, it is judged whether or not a bet operation has been made. Specifically, it is judged whether or not any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been operated. If no operation has been made, the process waits, and if any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is operated, a positive judgment is made in step S3405. Note that if a medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 during the waiting period in step S3405, a bet process based on the insertion of the medal is performed, but a description of this configuration is omitted.

If the determination in step S3405 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S3406, where it is determined whether the above-mentioned bet flag during operation is set. If the bet flag during operation is not set, in step S3407, a bet process is performed in accordance with the operated credit insertion switch (bet switch). That is, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, a bet of 3 is set, when the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated, a bet of 1 is set, and when the third credit insertion switch 58 is operated, a bet of 2 is set. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3406 that the bet flag during operation is set, in step S3408, a bet of the same number as the number of bets in the previous game is set as a replay grant. For example, if the previous game was 3 bets, in step S3408, a bet of 3 is set, and if the game was 1 bet, in step S3408, a bet of 1 is set. After the process in step S3408 is executed, in step S3409, the bet flag during operation is cleared. Then, after the process in step S3407 or step S3409 is executed, the start waiting process is terminated.

As described above, the betting process when a replay is awarded differs between a winning replay and another replay. For another replay, a bet is automatically set equal to the number of bets in the previous game, and for a winning replay, the operation of any of the credit insertion switches 56-58 triggers a bet to be set equal to the number of bets in the previous game. If the previous game was not a replay win, automatic betting is not performed, and the current game is progressed by operating any of the credit insertion switches 56-58. However, if a winning replay is won, the operation to progress the game is the same as for game results other than a replay, in terms of whether or not the credit insertion switches 56-58 are operated.

Figure 81 shows the first section display process in this modified example.

In step S3501, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If it is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S3502, where it is determined whether either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. If neither winning flag is set, the first section display process is terminated. If either winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3503.

In step S3503, the winning trigger of the winning flag that was determined to be positive in step S3502 is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the specific role that triggered the winning of the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is a winning replay. As described above, a winning replay does not win the challenge mode, so a positive determination is made in step S3503 when the attack mode winning flag is set.

If the determination in step S3503 is negative, in steps S3504 and S3505, the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery, and processing for setting it is performed. The processing in steps S3504 and S3505 is the same as the processing in steps S2703 and S2704.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3503 that the winning opportunity is a winning replay, in step S3506, the display start mode of the current eighth display segment N8 is set to the time of the betting operation for the next game.

After performing the processing of step S3505 or step S3506, in step S3507, the processing to start measuring the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is performed, and then the first processing of the zone display is terminated. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step S3501, the processing to continue the zone display is performed in step S3508, and then the first processing of the zone display is terminated. The processing of these steps S3507 and S3508 is the same as the processing of the above steps S2705 and S2706.

The difference in the final timing at which the zone indicator starts displaying due to differences in the winning trigger of the favorable zone will be explained with reference to the timing chart in Figure 82.

Figure 82(a) shows a case where the winning trigger in the advantageous zone is a specific role other than a winning replay. All reels stop at timing ta16, and medals are paid out from timing ta17 to ta18. Then, medal payout for the current game (start game) ends at timing ta18, and if betting operations for the next game become valid at timing ta19, timing ta19 is the latest timing for displaying the zone indicator.

In this way, by configuring the interval indicator to be displayed in the starting game before the operation of the next game is permitted, the interval indicator will have already started to be displayed before the decision is made as to whether or not to play the next game, in other words, when the decision is made as to whether or not to end play at the end of the starting game, preventing the player from ending play even if they have won in an advantageous zone. Note that, as already explained, in the interval indicator display start mode table, the latest display start mode among the display start modes set is the end of the payout of ta18.

The betting operation becomes valid at the timing of ta19, and if the betting operation is performed by the timing of ta20, for example, the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will start based on the start operation (operation of the start lever 41) at the timing of ta21.

On the other hand, if the previous game was a winning replay, the latest timing for displaying the interval indicator is different, as shown in FIG. 82(b). Specifically, when the reels stop at timing tb16, no medals are paid out, but instead a replay is awarded. However, because the current replay is a winning replay, the operation time bet flag is set in the start waiting process in the normal processing (FIG. 80(b)), and a replay is awarded by a bet operation rather than an automatic bet.

In this case, if a bet operation is performed at tb18 during the valid period from when the bet operation becomes valid at tb17 to when tb19 occurs, a replay is awarded, a bet is set equal to the number of bets in the previous game, and the display of the interval indicator begins. Then, when a start operation is performed at tb20, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to spin.

In this way, when the display of the interval indicator starts based on a winning replay, the display of the interval indicator starts when a bet operation is made after the winning replay is won. Here, the bet operation made after the winning replay is won is an operation to obtain a replay obtained in the starting game, and can be said to be an operation accompanying the starting game. In other words, even with the above configuration, the effect of displaying the interval indicator in the starting game is guaranteed.

If the betting operation after winning a winning replay is considered as an operation associated with the start game in which the winning replay is won as described above, the game following that start game is started by operating the start lever 41. In that case, when starting the display of the interval indicator based on the winning replay, the latest timing for starting the display is the timing of tb20, which is the start operation of the next game.

As described above, if a minor role other than a replay (specific role, payout role) triggers a win in the advantageous zone, the zone indicator starts displaying before the bet operation for the next game, and if a specific replay (winning replay) triggers a win in the advantageous zone, the zone indicator starts displaying before the start lever 41 for the next game is operated. In this way, by varying the final timing for starting the display of the zone indicator, it is possible to greatly diversify the display start modes of the zone indicator.

Moreover, in the case of a winning replay, the trigger for granting a replay based on that winning replay is a betting operation. In other words, the game that was selected for that winning replay continues until the player makes a betting operation, making it possible to extend the start of the game.

If the winning replay is the trigger for winning the advantageous zone, the zone indicator is configured to be displayed based on the bet operation that triggers the granting of the replay. Under the assumption that the zone indicator would normally start displaying before the bet operation (if the winning trigger is another minor winning combination, etc.), the time of the bet operation that triggers the granting of the replay based on the winning replay is considered to be a situation where the player has already given up on the zone indicator starting to display, and if the zone indicator starts to display in such a situation, it can surprise and delight the player and produce a great dramatic effect.

The winning replay may be stopped as follows. Specifically, when the winning replay stops on an effective line, the winning replay stops on a line different from the effective line. In this way, it is possible to expect an effect that makes it seem as if the winning of the small role with the payout of the other medals has been established, and since the zone indicator has not started to display the winning of the small role with the payout of the other medals, it is possible to increase the effect of making the player think that the lottery for the transition to the advantageous zone has not been won based on the winning of the small role with the payout of the other medals. As a result of the above, it becomes easier to give up on winning the lottery for the transition to the advantageous zone, and it is possible to expect an effect of surprising and delighting the player.

<Modification 9>
In this modified example, when the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit game number and ends, the display end mode of the zone indicator is changed. Figure 83 shows the zone display first process in this modified example.

In step S3601, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If it is not being displayed, in steps S3602 to S3605, the same processing as in steps S2702 to S2705 is performed. If the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S3606, where an increment process is performed on the number of games in the advantageous zone AG. That is, in this modified example, the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is managed not in the second zone display process that is started at the end of the game (in the reel control process), but in the first zone display process that is started at the start of the game (in the lottery process). In step S3607, it is determined whether the number of games in the advantageous zone AG has reached the upper limit of "1500". If the upper limit has not been reached, in step S3608, a process is performed to continue the display of the eighth display segment N8, and then the first zone display process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3607 that the number of games in the advantageous zone AG has reached the upper limit, i.e., that the forced termination condition for ending the advantageous zone in the current game has been met, the process proceeds to step S3609. In step S3609, the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is reset to the initial value (0). Then, in step S3610, a process is performed to set a forced termination flag in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The forced termination flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the forced termination condition has been met.

In step S3611, a display end mode lottery process is performed. In this lottery process, a display end mode table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and the display end mode of the zone display when the advantageous zone ends is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 84, in the display end mode table, the display end mode (display end timing) is set to differ depending on the contents of the advantageous zone when the forced end condition is met and the setting value.

In other words, in step S3611, the display mode in the game where the forced termination condition is met (the game in which step S3611 is processed) is identified, and if the display mode is challenge mode or attack mode, the time when payout ends is set as the display end mode of the section indicator. On the other hand, if the display mode of the current game is VB mode or an add-on specialization zone, one of the following is determined from the set value: when the first reel is stopped OFF, when the second reel is stopped OFF, when the third reel is stopped OFF, or when payout ends.

Specifically, if the current game is in VB mode, when the first reel is stopped and turned off, setting 2 or higher is selected, but setting 1 is not selected. When the third reel is stopped and turned off, setting 4 or higher is selected, but setting 3 or lower is not selected. Also, when the second reel is stopped and turned off, settings 2, 4, and 6 are more likely to be selected than settings 1, 3, and 5.

If the current game is in a specialized zone, when the second reel is turned off, setting 4 or higher is selected, and setting 3 or lower is not selected. When the third reel is turned off, only setting 6 is selected. Also, when the first reel is turned off, settings 1, 3, and 5 are more likely to be selected than settings 2, 4, and 6.

In other words, the display end mode table is set so that the more favorable the situation (display mode) is for the player when the forced end condition of the advantageous zone is met, the easier it is to narrow down the setting value. In other words, if the forced end condition is met in a situation that is favorable for the player and where the number of continued games could be expected to increase further if there was no upper limit on the number of continued games in the advantageous zone, it is possible to play a game that allows the player to guess the setting value instead, which can compensate for the sense of loss caused by the end of the advantageous zone when there is still more to come.

After the display end mode lottery process is performed in step S3611, the display end mode according to the lottery result is set as the end mode of the current section display in step S3612, and then the first section display process is terminated. In this case, for example, if the time of the stop OFF operation of the first reel is set, the CPU 102 controls the display of the eighth display segment N8 to end based on the stop OFF operation. Also, if the time of the payout end is set, the CPU 102 controls the display of the eighth display segment N8 to end based on the medal payout end.

In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 85, in the second section display process, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If it is not being displayed, the second section display process is terminated as is, and if it is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S3702. In step S3702, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned forced termination flag is set, and if it is set, data initialization processing is performed in step S3703, and then the second section display process is terminated. Note that since the display of the eighth display segment N8 is terminated in the termination mode set by the processing of steps S3611 and S3612, when the forced termination flag is set, only data initialization is performed in the second section display process.

If it is determined in step S3702 that the forced termination flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3704. The processes in steps S3704 to S3707 are the same as those in steps S2807 to S2810.

As described above, improved performance in notifying the player of the push order has enabled the section indicator to start displaying when the player moves into a favorable section that is advantageous to the player, and end the display when the advantageous section ends. By varying the display end mode depending on the situation at the end, the player can grasp the situation at the end from the section indicator, allowing the player to bask in the afterglow of the situation at the end.

In particular, when the conditions for the forced termination of an advantageous zone are met in a situation favorable to the player, and the advantageous zone ends, it is possible to guess the set value as a type of information that may be beneficial to the player. In this way, the sense of loss felt when the zone is forced to terminate can be reduced, and the more advantageous the situation is for the player to be in, the easier it is to guess the set value, resulting in a well-balanced gameplay between the sense of loss felt when the zone is forced to terminate and the ease of obtaining potentially beneficial information.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, when the winning opportunity of the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone is a combination with a bonus, the contents of the advantageous zone are suggested in the games from the game in which the combination is won to the game in which the bonus is won. Here, the changes in the display mode of the zone indicator in this embodiment will be explained first.

As described above, the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone is based on winning a specific role such as a strong cherry or a strong watermelon. The lottery for moving to the advantageous zone is also based on winning a combination of a bonus and a strong cherry, etc. (particularly a combination with the first BB). In this embodiment, the display start mode of the zone indicator is different depending on whether the winning trigger of the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone is a combination with the first BB. Specifically, if the winning trigger of the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone is not a combination with the first BB, the game in which the winning trigger was a specific role is set as the start game as the game in which the specific role was established, as in the first embodiment, and the display of the zone indicator is started before the operation of the next game is allowed.

On the other hand, if the winning trigger of the transition lottery is a combination of the first BB and the specific combination that triggered the winning, the game in which the first BB win was achieved will be the starting game in which the specific combination was achieved, and the display of the interval indicator will begin before allowing the operation of the next game.

As already explained, the 1st BB is set as a winning mode for a symbol combination with a so-called missed opportunity, and if no winning is achieved in the winning game, the 1st BB winning flag is carried over. Therefore, if a combination with the 1st BB triggers a win in the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone, the game in which the overlapping role is won and the game in which the 1st BB win is achieved and becomes the starting game may be different. And, if a combination with the 1st BB triggers a win in the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone, the display of the zone indicator will not start in the game in which the overlapping role is won, and the start of the display of the zone indicator will be carried over until the game in which the 1st BB win is achieved.

In this embodiment, gameplay is achieved by taking advantage of whether or not the start of display of the interval indicator is carried over. The processing configuration related to this gameplay is explained below.

Figure 86 is a flowchart showing the reel control process in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, in steps S3801 to S3816, the same processing as in steps S401 to S416 is performed. Then, in step S3817, special RT state processing is performed, and then the reel control processing is terminated. In this embodiment, when the first BB or second BB is won, the game moves to a special RT state different from the first RT state to the third RT state that is moved to by the promotion replay or fall replay. In the special RT state, the winning probability of a predetermined replay is different from that in the normal game state, and specifically, is higher than that in the normal game state. The special RT state that is moved to based on the winning of the first BB or second BB ends when the first BB or second BB that triggered the move is won. In addition, in this embodiment, a special RT state that is moved to without being based on the winning of the first BB or second BB is also provided. The special RT state processing is a process for controlling such a special RT state.

In the special RT state processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87, in step S3901, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If it is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, in step S3902, it is determined whether the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set. In other words, it is determined whether the first BB or the second BB has been won in the normal gaming state or the first RT state.

If any of the BBs is won, in step S3903, it is determined whether the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, in step S3904, it is determined whether the specialized zone winning flag is set. If the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and further, the attack mode winning flag and the specialized zone winning flag are set, in step S3905, the special RT command with super attack mode is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The special RT state command with super attack mode is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the RT state will be transitioned based on the first BB or the second BB winning, and that the super attack mode has been won. More specifically, the special RT state command with super attack mode is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the special RT state will be transitioned based on the first BB winning, that the lottery for transitioning to the super attack mode has been won, and that the transition to the super attack mode has not yet occurred. The processing of the display control device 81 when it receives such a special RT command will be described later.

On the other hand, if the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and further, the attack mode winning flag is set but the specialized zone flag is not set, in step S3906, a special RT command with attack mode is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The special RT command with attack mode is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that a transition to the RT state will occur based on the first BB or second BB winning, and that the attack mode has been won. More specifically, the special RT state command with attack mode is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that a transition to the special RT state will occur based on the first BB winning, that the lottery for transitioning to the attack mode has been won, and that the transition to the attack mode has not yet occurred. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received such a special RT command will be described later.

If it is determined in step S3903 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3907. In step S3907, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, in step S3908, a process is performed to set the special RT state command with challenge mode as an output target to the display control device 81. The special RT state command with challenge mode is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the RT state will be transitioned to based on the first BB or second BB winning, and that the challenge mode has been won. More specifically, the special RT state command with challenge mode is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the special RT state will be transitioned to based on the first BB winning, that the lottery for transitioning to the challenge mode has been won, and that the transition to the challenge mode has not yet occurred. The process of the display control device 81 that has received such a special RT command will be described later.

If it is determined in step S3907 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, a special RT command is set as the output target to the display control device 81 in step S3909. The special RT state command is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that a transition to the RT state will occur based on the winning of the first BB or the second BB. More specifically, the special RT state command is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that a transition to the special RT state will occur based on the winning of the first BB, and that the transition lottery to the attack mode or the like has not been won. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives such a special RT state command will be described later.

If it is determined in step S3902 that neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3910. In step S3910, it is determined whether or not a specific role has been won in the current game. If it is determined that a specific role has been won, it is determined in step S3911 whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag has been set. If it is determined in step S3910 that a specific role has not been won, or if it is determined in step S3911 that either winning flag has been set even if a specific role has been won, the special RT state processing ends.

On the other hand, if a specific role is won and neither challenge mode nor attack mode is won, in step S3912, a process is executed to input "5" as the number of games to continue in the special RT state to the special RT counter provided in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The special RT counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games to continue in the special RT state to which the transition is made without being based on winning the first BB or second BB. The number of games to continue in the special RT state is arbitrary and may be less than 5 or more than 5. However, it is recommended to set the number of games to continue in the special RT state in relation to the probability of winning a special replay, which will be explained later.

In the following step S3913, the fake special RT state command is set as the output target to the display control device 81. The fake special RT state command is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that a transition to the RT state will occur without being based on winning the first BB or second BB. More specifically, the fake special RT state command is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that a transition to the special RT state will occur without being based on winning the first BB or second BB, and that a transition lottery such as an attack mode has not been won. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives such a special RT state command will be described later.

After executing any one of the processes of step S3905, step S3906, step S3908, step S3909, and step S3913, the process proceeds to step S3914. In step S3914, a process of storing the current game state is executed. Specifically, the current game state (normal game state or first RT state) is grasped, and if it is the first RT state, a process of storing the RT setting flag (first RT setting flag) in a specified memory area of RAM 106 is executed. The RT setting flag stored in such a memory area can be read out later, and for example, after the end of the first BB or second BB, or after the end of the special RT state, the RT state can be set based on the RT setting flag read out from the memory area.

Then, in step S3915, the stored RT setting flag is cleared, and in step S3916, the fourth RT setting flag is set, and the special RT state processing is terminated. The fourth RT setting flag corresponds to the special RT state. Through the processing of steps S3915 and S3916, the game state transitions to the fourth RT state as a special RT state.

Here, the winning/losing selection table for the 4th RT state will be explained with reference to Figures 88 and 89. Figure 88 shows a winning/losing selection table for the 4th RT state, which is entered based on winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB, and Figure 89 shows a winning/losing selection table for the 4th RT state, which is entered without being based on winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB.

In any of the winning/losing lottery tables for the 4th RT state, the winning probability of the specific combination of index values IV = 13-20, 32-45 and the push order bell of IV = 21-28 is the same as that in the normal game state and the 1st RT state. However, in the 4th RT state, which is transitioned based on the winning of the 1st BB or 2nd BB, even if the specific combination of index values IV = 32-45 is won, the 1st BB or 2nd BB will not be won. In other words, when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is set, the 1st BB or 2nd BB is newly won (double winning of the bonus) is avoided. For the same reason, in the 4th RT state based on the winning of the 1st BB or 2nd BB, various bonuses of index values IV = 46-48 are not won. In the fourth RT state, which is not based on the first or second BB, if you win with an index value IV of 32 to 45, you will also win the first or second BB, and you can also win various bonuses with index values IV of 46 to 48.

In the fourth RT state, the probability of winning a normal replay with index value IV = 1 and the probability of winning a special replay with index values IV = 53, 54 are higher than in the normal game state and the first RT state. More specifically, special replays with index values IV = 53, 54 are replays that can only be won in the fourth RT state, and the probability of winning in other game states is zero. Note that some replays may be won (with a low probability) in other game states. In addition, in the fourth RT state, the point value PV for index values IV = 2 to 12 is set to 0, and push order replays corresponding to these index values will not be won.

If you win Special Replay 1 with index value IV = 53, you will also win the 1st replay, 9th replay, and 11th to 15th replays. Also, if you win Special Replay 2 with index value IV = 54, you will also win the 1st replay, and 11th to 15th replays.

In the fourth RT state, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 1 is approximately 1 in 5.3, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 53 is approximately 1 in 43.7, and the probability of winning with an index value IV = 54 is approximately 1 in 43.7. Therefore, in the fourth RT state, the total probability of a replay is higher than in the normal game state and the first RT state, and the probability of a losing result is lower.

By the way, the replay probability in the 4th RT state is lower than that in the 2nd and 3rd RT states, and the probability of a miss is higher. Therefore, even when reel control is performed to prioritize a replay win over a BB win, it is possible to achieve a BB win relatively smoothly.

Returning to the explanation of the special RT state processing, if it is determined in step S3901 that the game state is not the normal game state or the first RT state, the process proceeds to step S3917. In step S3917, it is determined whether the game state is the special RT state by determining whether the above-mentioned fourth RT setting flag is set. If the game state is not the special RT state, the special RT state processing is terminated. If the game state is the special RT state, the process proceeds to step S3918.

In step S3918, it is determined whether or not either the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set. In other words, if the special RT state transition is based on the first BB or second BB winning, or if the transition is not based on the first BB or second BB winning but the first BB or second BB is subsequently won, the special RT state processing is terminated. If it is determined in step S3918 that none of the BB winning flags are set, in step S3919, a subtraction process is performed on the special RT counter. In other words, the special RT counter set in the above step S3912 is subtracted by one each time the game is played.

In step S3920, it is determined whether the special RT counter has become "0" based on the processing result of step S3919. If it is determined that the counter is not "0", it is determined in step S3921 whether either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. When the determination is positive in step S3921, it means that although the current special RT state is a special RT state that has been entered without being based on the first BB or the second BB, in the current game in the special RT state, a specific role that is not a role that overlaps with the first BB or the second BB has triggered a win in the challenge mode or the attack mode (super attack mode). As already explained, when a specific role that is not a role that overlaps with the first BB or the second BB is the trigger for the win, the interval display starts displaying the game as the start game.

If it is determined in step S3920 that the special RT counter is "0", or if in step S3921 the display of the section indicator begins with the current game as the starting game, the process proceeds to step S3922, where the RT setting flag stored in step S3914 is read. Note that if the game is in the normal game state in step S3914, the RT setting flag is not stored, and since the RT setting flag is not stored in the RT setting flag storage area in step S3914, it is determined that the game state before the transition was the normal game state. Then, in step S3923, a process is performed to return to the game state before the transition to the special RT state based on the result of the read process in step S3922. After the process in step S3923 is performed, the special RT state process is terminated.

When transitioning to the special RT state, the game state before the transition may not be stored, and a transition to a uniform game state (for example, the normal game state) may be made at the end of the special RT state. In particular, the special RT state is configured not to transition during the second RT state to the third RT state, and since there is not much difference in the degree of advantage between the normal game state and the first RT state, it is considered that the loss suffered by the player will be small regardless of whether the game state is returned to.

Next, the bonus state processing in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 90.

In this embodiment, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not the bonus state is established, and if the bonus state is not established, in step S4002, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If a positive determination is made in step S4002, it is determined in step S4003 whether or not a CB win has been established, and if established, the CB setting flag is set in step S4004, and the remaining payout number is set to "15" in step S4005. After that, in step S4006, a state command is set, and in step S4007, an external signal setting process is performed, and then the bonus state process is terminated. The processes in steps S4001 to S4007 are the same as those in steps S601 to S607 described above.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4003, then in step S4008 it is judged whether or not a first BB or second BB win has been achieved. If either BB win has been achieved, the process proceeds to step S4009, where a process is performed to clear the current RT setting flag. In step S4010, a process is performed to clear the BB win flag, and in step S4011, a process is performed to set the BB setting flag. Then, in step S4012, the remaining payout amount is set to "216". After that, in step S4013, a fourth section display process is performed. The fourth section display process is a process related to the display of the section indicator, and the details of which will be explained later.

If it is determined in step S4008 that a BB win has not been achieved, a carryover command is set in step S4014. Also, if it is determined in step S4001 that the bonus state is in progress, an end determination process is performed in step S4015. After the process of step S4013, step S4014, or step S4015 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4006, in the same way as after the process of step S4005 is executed, where the state command set process and external signal setting process are performed, and the bonus state process is terminated.

Next, the RT state processing in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 91.

In this embodiment, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the fourth RT setting flag is set. If the fourth RT setting flag is set, the RT state processing is terminated. If it is determined in step S4101 that the fourth RT setting flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4102, and processing similar to the processing in steps S501 to S511 above is performed in steps S4102 to S4112.

In other words, the 4th RT setting flag is set, and during the special RT state, the RT state will not transition until a BB is won or the number of continuing games in the special RT state becomes 0. Specifically, even if the transition roll stops, there is no transition to the 1st RT state, and no other promotion replays or fall replays (second replay to fifth replay) are won. Note that if the transition roll stops during the special RT state (4th RT state), a process to reset to the 4th RT state may be performed. In this case, the special RT counter may also be configured to be set to the initial value (5) again.

Next, the first section display process in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 92.

In step S4201, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If it is not being displayed, in step S4202, it is determined whether a waiting period flag is set in the various flags storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The waiting period flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to understand that although the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone has been won, the start of the display of the zone indicator has also been carried over due to the carryover of the BB win. If the waiting period flag is set, the first zone display process is terminated as it is. In other words, in a situation where the waiting period flag is set, the first zone display process does not perform processing to start the display of the zone indicator.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4202, then in step S4203 it is judged whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. If neither winning flag is set, the first section display process is terminated. If either winning flag is set, then the process proceeds to step S4204, where it is judged whether or not the 1st BB winning flag is set. If a positive judgment is made in step S4204, this means that the player has won the lottery for transitioning to the advantageous section in this game, and that the winning opportunity is a combination of the 1st BB.

As described above, since the configuration is such that overlapping roles with the 2nd BB or a single role of the 2nd BB (IV=47) will not win the lottery for moving to the favorable zone, only the presence or absence of the 1st BB winning flag is determined in step S4204. If the configuration is such that overlapping roles with the 2nd BB or a single role of the 2nd BB can win the lottery for moving to the favorable zone, it is recommended that the configuration is such that the presence or absence of the 2nd BB winning flag is also determined in step S4204.

If the result of step S4204 is negative and the winning trigger is not a duplicate role, steps S4205 to S4207 set the display start mode of the interval display in the same manner as steps S2703 to S2705 above, and perform processing to start measuring the number of continuing games in the advantageous interval, and then end this first interval display processing.

If the result of step S4204 is positive and the winning opportunity is a duplicate combination, the waiting period flag is set in step S4208, and the first process of displaying this section is then terminated. As a result of this process, the result of step S4202 above will be positive in the next game and onwards.

If it is determined in step S4201 that the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed, the process of continuing such display is performed in step S4209, and then the first section display process is terminated. The process of step S4209 is the same as the process of step S2706.

Next, the fourth section display process performed in step S4013 of the bonus state process (FIG. 90) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 93.

In step S4301, it is determined whether the above-mentioned waiting period flag is set. The waiting period flag is not set, for example, when the first BB or second BB is won while the interval indicator is displaying (during the favorable interval), or when the current bonus is the second BB. In this case, a negative determination is made in step S4301, and the fourth interval display process is terminated. If the waiting period flag is set, the process proceeds to step S4302, where the waiting period flag is cleared.

Then, in step S4303, the display of the interval indicator is started. In other words, if the waiting period flag is set, the display of the interval indicator is started in the fourth interval display process, which is performed based on the first BB winning, and the start of the display of the interval indicator is postponed until the first BB winning is achieved. In step S4304, the measurement start process of the AG of the number of games in the advantageous zone is performed. This process is the same as step S4207, etc. In other words, if the waiting period flag is set, the start of the measurement of the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone is also postponed until the first BB winning is achieved. After the process of step S4304 is performed, the fourth interval display process is terminated.

The flow of the special RT state is explained with reference to Figure 94.

In the normal zone, for example, when a stop result that results in a weak watermelon winning combination appears, several cases are possible: (1) the current game is a specific combination that is not a combination with BB (1st BB or 2nd BB) and the player has won the lottery to move to the favorable zone; (2) the current game is a specific combination that is not a combination with BB (1st BB or 2nd BB) and the player has not won the lottery to move to the favorable zone; (3) the current game is a combination with BB (1st BB) and the player has won the lottery to move to the favorable zone; or (4) the current game is a combination with BB (1st BB or 2nd BB) and the player has not won the lottery to move to the favorable zone.

In the case of (1) above, the game in which the winning combination for the weak watermelon role appears is set as the starting game, and the display of the section indicator begins. On the other hand, in the cases of (2) to (4) above, the display of the section indicator does not begin in the game in which the winning combination for the weak watermelon role appears. In the cases of (2) to (4), the game transitions to a special RT state. However, in the cases of (3) and (4), the special RT state is one in which the winning combination for the BB role is the end condition, and in the case of (2), the special RT state is one in which the number of games up to the maximum number of continuations of 5 is consumed is the end condition. In either case, during the special RT state, the display of the section indicator does not begin, the probability of winning a replay becomes higher, and the expectation of winning a BB or a favorable section is maintained.

In the lottery process for each game in the special RT state, if none of the index values result in a winning result, it is possible to achieve a winning BB win. In this case, if the interval indicator starts to display when the BB win is won, it is determined that the case is (3) above, and if the interval indicator does not start to display when the BB win is won, it is determined that the case is (4) above. On the other hand, in the case of (2) above, the special RT state ends when the maximum number of games that can be continued in the special RT state is played. In this case, the interval indicator does not start to display either.

When the special RT state is reached as described above, the probability of a replay increases. Most replays that are won during the special RT state are normal replays, and occasionally special replay 1 or special replay 2 is won. As already explained, special replay 1 is a combination of the first replay, ninth replay, and eleventh replay to fifteenth replay, and special replay 2 is a combination of the first replay and tenth replay to fifteenth replay.

As shown in FIG. 95, the 9th to 15th replays all provide a replay as a bonus, but the winning combinations are different. Note that the following explanation is based on the assumption that the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the winning line in a 3-bet game.

Specifically, the ninth replay is set to have a winning mode in which a win is achieved when the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. The tenth replay is set to have a winning mode in which a win is achieved when the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. The 11th replay is set to have a winning mode in which a win is established when the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. The 12th replay is set to have a winning mode in which a win is established when the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. In these 9th to 12th replays, even if you aim for the "black BAR" symbol on each of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, a replay win is achieved when the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on any of the reels, or when it does stop but the "black BAR" symbols do not stop in a straight line. In general, these are replays where a win is achieved when the reels stop without a black BAR tenpai.

More specifically, for example, if a player performs a stopping operation aiming for the "black BAR" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R during the 9th replay, when the 19th "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the top row, the 18th "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row. When the 9th "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the 8th "black BAR" symbol stops in the bottom row. When the 6th "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stops in the bottom row, the 7th "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row. In this case, the "black BAR" symbol will stop from the left reel 32L, to the middle row, bottom row, and middle row, and the "black BAR" symbol will be in a tenpai on the middle line L2 of the left reel 32L and right reel 32R, and the "black BAR" symbol will not stop on the tenpai line on the middle reel 32M, resulting in a stop result of a tenpai miss (left and right middle row tenpai miss).

In addition, if the player performs the stopping operation aiming for the "black BAR" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R during the 10th replay, when the 19th "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the top row, the 18th "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row. When the 7th "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the 8th "black BAR" symbol stops in the top row. And when the 5th "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stops in the bottom row, the 7th "black BAR" symbol stops in the top row. In this case, the "black BAR" symbol will stop on the left reel 32L, then the middle row, top row, and top row, and the "black BAR" symbol will be in a tenpai on the top line L1 of the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, and the "black BAR" symbol will not stop on the tenpai line on the left reel 32L, resulting in a stop result of a tenpai miss (middle and right upper row tenpai miss).

In the 11th replay, if the player performs the stopping operation aiming for the "black BAR" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the 20th "white bell" symbol stops on the top row of the left reel 32L, the 18th "black BAR" symbol stops on the bottom row. Also, the 8th "black BAR" symbol stops on the middle row of the center reel 32M. When the 6th "first replay" symbol stops on the bottom row of the right reel 32R, the 7th "black BAR" symbol stops on the middle row. In this case, the "black BAR" symbol will stop on the left reel 32L, then the bottom row, middle row, and middle row, and the "black BAR" symbol will be in a tenpai on the middle line L2 of the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, and the "black BAR" symbol will not stop on the tenpai line on the left reel 32L, resulting in a stop result of a tenpai miss (middle and right middle row tenpai miss).

During the 12th replay, if the player performs the stopping operation aiming for the "black BAR" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the 19th "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the top row, the 18th "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row. When the 9th "second replay" on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the 8th "black BAR" symbol stops in the bottom row. Then, on the right reel 32R, the 7th or 9th "black BAR" symbol stops in the bottom row. In this case, the "black BAR" symbol will stop on the left reel 32L, then the middle, bottom, and bottom (top) rows, and the "black BAR" symbol will be completed on the bottom line L3 of the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, and the "black BAR" symbol will not stop on the completed row on the left reel 32L (middle and right bottom row completed).

The 13th replay is set to a winning mode in which the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line to win. In particular, the winning mode of the 13th replay is set to a winning mode in which, when the "black BAR" symbol is aimed at and stopped on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the "black BAR" symbol stops on the top and bottom of the left reel 32L and the "black BAR" symbol stops on the middle of the middle reel 32M, but the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the right reel 32R, and the "black BAR" symbol is tenpai on the downward right line L4 and the upward right line L5, resulting in a black BAR double tenpai miss.

In the 14th replay, a winning mode is set in which the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line to win. In particular, the winning mode of the 14th replay is set to a winning mode in which, when a stopping operation is performed aiming for the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, the "black BAR" symbol stops on the top and bottom of the left reel 32L and the "black BAR" symbol stops on the middle of the middle reel 32M, the "black BAR" symbol stops on the top of the right reel 32R but not on the bottom, and the "black BAR" symbols stop on the upward-right line L5, resulting in a single black BAR line.

The 15th replay is set to a winning mode in which the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line to win. In particular, the winning mode of the 15th replay is set to a winning mode in which, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped with the aim of getting the "black BAR" symbol, the "black BAR" symbol stops on the top and bottom rows of the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol stops on the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol stops on the top and bottom rows of the right reel 32R, and the "black BAR" symbols stop together on the downward-right line L4 and the upward-right line L5, resulting in a stop result that is a miss of the black BAR tenpai.

Incidentally, both Special Replay 1 and Special Replay 2 include the first replay as a winning combination. As already explained (as shown in FIG. 11), the first replay is set to a winning mode in which the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol, "white bell" symbol, or "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line to win. In this case, in the first replay, if you perform a stopping operation aiming for the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the 20th "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops on the upper row, the 18th "black BAR" symbol stops on the lower row. Also, if the ninth "second replay" on the center reel 32M is stopped in the middle row, the eighth "black BAR" symbol will stop in the lower row. And if the fifth "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R is stopped in the lower row, the seventh "black BAR" symbol will stop in the upper row. In this case, the "black BAR" symbols will stop in the lower row, lower row, and upper row from the left reel 32L, and the "black BAR" symbol will be tenpai on the bottom line L3 of the left reel 32L and the center reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol will not stop on the tenpai line on the right reel 32R, resulting in a stop result that is a tenpai miss (left/middle lower row tenpai miss).

Special Replay 1 and Special Replay 2 are push order roles that result in different winning combinations depending on the stopping order. However, regardless of which role wins, the bonus awarded is a replay, and the degree of advantage to the player does not change. In other words, although the stopping order results in different winning combinations, the profit the player can obtain does not increase or decrease.

Figure 96 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations and the winning patterns that are achieved in accordance with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.

When Special Replay 1 is won, the first replay win is achieved when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the first stopping order of "left" → "center" → "right", and in this case, the "replay" symbols stop on the downward right line L4. The first replay win is also achieved when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the second stopping order of "left" → "right" → "center", and the "replay" symbols stop on the downward right line L4. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped aiming for the "black BAR" symbol, as described above, the win is achieved when the reels stop with the left and center lower row not forming a tenpai.

On the other hand, if the reels are stopped in the third stopping order of "center" → "left" → "right", a win will be achieved in either the 9th re-play, the 11th re-play, or the 13th re-play. In this case, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped aiming for the "black BAR" symbol, a win will be achieved with the stop result of the 9th re-play, the 11th re-play, or the 13th re-play being a black BAR tenpai miss (black BAR double tenpai miss). More specifically, if the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row on the center reel 32M, which is stopped first, a win will be achieved in the 11th re-play or the 13th re-play, but a win will not be achieved in the 9th re-play. In this case, when the "black BAR" symbol stops in the lower row on the left reel 32L, the 11th re-play win may be achieved but the 13th re-play win will not be achieved, and when the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row on the right reel 32R and the 11th re-play win is achieved, the middle and right middle rows will stop with a missed tenpai. When the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row of the middle reel 32M, if the "black BAR" symbol stops in the upper row of the left reel 32L, the 13th re-play win may be achieved but the 11th re-play win will not be achieved, and when the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row on the right reel 32R and the 13th re-play win is achieved, the black BAR double tenpai miss will be achieved on the downward right line L4 (and upward right line L5). When the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle row on the center reel 32M that is stopped first, but stops in the lower row, the 9th replay win may be achieved, but the 11th replay win and the 13th replay win will not be achieved. In this case, even if the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R are stopped with the aim of the "black BAR" symbol, the left and right middle row tenpai miss will be the stop result. In other words, even if any replay win is achieved, even if the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped with the aim of the "black BAR" symbol, the "black BAR" symbols will not stop in a straight line, and the stop result will be the black BAR tenpai miss. In other words, in this case, by aiming for the "black BAR" symbol and performing the stopping operation on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it is possible to make the stop result that results in a black BAR double tenpai miss appear, and it is also possible to make the stop result that results in a black BAR tenpai miss appear, and if the eye-pressing operation is accurate, a replay win will be achieved with the stop result that results in a black BAR double tenpai miss.

In special replay 1, if the reels are stopped in the fourth stopping order of "center" → "right" → "left", a winning combination will be achieved for the 10th, 11th, or 14th replay. In this case, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped aiming for the "black BAR" symbol, the "black BAR" symbols will stop aligned on the upward-right line L5 on the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R, resulting in a single black BAR winning combination for the 14th replay.

When the reels are stopped in the fifth stopping order of "right" → "left" → "center", a winning combination of the ninth replay, twelfth replay, or thirteenth replay is achieved. In this case, as in the third stopping order, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped with the aim of the "black BAR" symbol, the winning combination of the black BAR is not achieved. When the reels are stopped in the sixth stopping order of "right" → "center" → "left", a winning combination of the ninth replay, twelfth replay, or fifteenth replay is achieved. In this case, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped with the aim of the "black BAR" symbol, the winning combination of the fifteenth replay is achieved with the stop of a double black BAR.

In the case of Special Replay 2, the first replay win is established in both the first and second stop orders, and the "replay" symbols stop on the downward right line L4 in the same way as Special Replay 1. In this case, too, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the winning result is a black BAR tenpai miss. In the case of the third stop order, unlike Special Replay 1, the winning result is a 10th replay, 11th replay, or 14th replay, and if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the winning result is a black BAR single line, which is the 14th replay win. In the case of the fourth stop order, unlike Special Replay 1, the winning result is a 10th replay, 11th replay, or 13th replay. However, even in this case, if you try to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R aiming for the "black BAR" symbol, the reels will stop without the black BAR double tenpai.

In the case of the fifth stop order, unlike Special Replay 1, a winning combination of the tenth replay, twelfth replay, or fifteenth replay will be achieved, and if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped aiming for the "black BAR" symbol, the winning combination of the fifteenth replay will be a double black BAR combination. In the case of the sixth stop order, unlike Special Replay 1, a winning combination of the tenth replay, twelfth replay, or thirteenth replay will be achieved, and if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped aiming for the "black BAR" symbol, the winning combination of the double black BAR will be a miss.

In this embodiment, the difference in the winning numbers depending on the stopping order of special replays 1 and 2 during this special RT state is used to suggest the contents of the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone. Figure 97 shows the push order role processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the push order role processing is a process (Figure 37) that is performed in step S711 of the lottery result response processing (Figure 31) in the main control device 101.

The push order role processing in this embodiment is generally similar to the push order role processing in the first embodiment, with the difference being the processing when the current push order role is a win for special replays 1 and 2. That is, the processing in steps S4401 to S4422 is similar to the processing in steps S1201 to S1222 above, and a determination is made as to whether or not to perform a push order notification based on the relationship between the winning push order role and the display mode (whether or not the conditions for push order notification are met), and if a push order notification is to be performed, a push order notification is performed by the instruction monitor 68, and a push order notification command is output to the display control device 81. Note that the processing in steps S4401 to S4422 is processing that can cause a change in the degree of advantage for the player due to the push order notification.

In the push order role processing in this embodiment, if it is determined in step S4419 that the replay is not one of the various promotion replays, and is not a push order bell, the process proceeds to step S4423. In step S4423, it is determined whether or not the replay is special replay 1 or 2. If the replay is neither special replay 1 nor 2, the push order role processing ends. If the replay is either special replay 1 or 2, in step S4424, a push order notification command is set as the output target to the display control device 81, and then the push order role processing ends.

In other words, when special replays 1 and 2 are won, the push order notification is performed regardless of the display mode (whether the conditions for the push order notification are met or not), but the push order notification is not performed by the instruction monitor 68 connected to the main control device 101, and only the push order notification is performed by the display control device 81.

Figure 98 is a flowchart showing the push order notification process in this embodiment. As already explained, the push order notification process is the process (Figure 45) performed in step S1903 of the start-time performance setting process (Figure 44) in the sub-side display control device 81.

The push order notification process is also generally similar to that of the first embodiment, with the difference being the process when the current push order role is a win for special replays 1 and 2. Specifically, in steps S4501 to S4513, similar to steps S2001 to S2013 above, a decision is made as to whether or not to notify the push order based on the relationship between the winning push order role and the display mode (whether or not the conditions for the push order notification are met), and if a push order notification is to be issued, a push order notification display is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65.

In the push order notification process in this embodiment, if it is determined in step S4512 that the replay is neither a promotion replay nor a push order bell, the process proceeds to step S4514. In step S4514, it is determined whether or not the replay is special replay 1 or 2. If the replay is neither special replay 1 nor 2, the push order notification process ends. If the replay is either special replay 1 or 2, the special RT notification process is executed in step S4515, and then the push order notification process ends.

The special RT notification process in step S4515 above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 99.

In step S4601, it is determined whether or not a special RT command with super attack mode has been received. As already explained, in the display control device 81, when a new command is received in step S1701 of the performance setting process (FIG. 42), in step S1702, the display control device 81 performs a process of storing the received command in a command storage area of the RAM 183. In step S4601, by checking this command storage area, it is possible to determine whether or not the above-mentioned special RT state command has been received. Note that in the following processes, the process of determining whether or not a specified command has been received also checks the command storage area in a similar manner.

As already explained, the special RT command with super attack mode is a command that is set for output in step S3905 in the special RT state processing (Figure 87) described above. This command indicates that the special RT state will be transitioned to based on the first BB win, and that the super attack mode has been won and that the state is before the transition.

If it is determined in step S4601 that the above command has been received, then in step S4602, a push order notification effect resulting in a double black BAR line is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, if the current game result is special replay 1, the sixth stop order of "right" → "middle" → "left" is notified. Also, if the current game result is special replay 2, the fifth stop order of "right" → "left" → "middle" is notified. After the processing of step S4602 is performed, the special RT notification processing is terminated.

In this case, as a push order notification effect, along with the notification of each stop order, a notification is given that the player should aim for the "black BAR" on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and perform the stop operation. For example, as shown in FIG. 100(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the stop order of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R by assigning numbers to correspond to the relative positions of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and also displays the symbols to be aimed for on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In FIG. 100(a), the number "3" and the "black BAR" character are displayed on the left, the number "1" and the "black BAR" character are displayed in the middle, and the number "2" and the "black BAR" character are displayed on the right, indicating that the stopping order this time should be "center" → "right" → "left" and that the player should aim for the "black BAR" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, the number and the "black BAR" character in the middle are highlighted by a boy holding them up, making it easy to understand that they should be stopped first.

Incidentally, in this case, although the push order notification effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, the push order notification is not performed by the instruction monitor 68. This indicates that this push order notification effect is not a push order notification effect intended to cause a change in the player's degree of advantage. In other words, if the push order notification effect were intended to cause a change in the player's degree of advantage, the push order notification would always be generated by the instruction monitor 68.

If it is determined in step S4601 that a special RT command with super attack mode has not been received, the process proceeds to step S4603. In step S4603, it is determined whether a special RT state command with attack mode has been received.

As already explained, the special RT command with attack mode is a command that is set for output in step S3906 in the special RT state processing (Figure 87) described above. This command indicates that the special RT state will be transitioned to based on the first BB win, and that the attack mode has been won and that the state is before the transition.

If it is determined in step S4603 that the above command has been received, then in step S4604, a push order notification effect for a single black BAR is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, if the current game result is special replay 1, the fourth stop order of "middle" → "right" → "left" is notified. Also, if the current game result is special replay 2, the third stop order of "middle" → "left" → "right" is notified. After the processing of step S4604 is performed, the notification processing for special RT is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4603 that a special RT command with attack mode has not been received, the process proceeds to step S4605. In step S4605, it is determined whether a special RT state command with challenge mode has been received.

As already explained, the special RT command with challenge mode is a command that is set for output in step S3908 in the special RT state processing (Figure 87) described above. This command indicates that the special RT state will be transitioned to based on the first BB win, and that the challenge mode has been won and that the state is before the transition.

If it is determined in step S4605 that the above command has been received, then in step S4606, notification lottery process 1 is executed. Notification lottery process 1 is a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a push order notification effect when special replay 1 or special replay 2 is won, and is a process in which the winning probability is set to the first probability (80%). In this case, a lottery table with the first probability is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of ROM 182, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter area 183b of RAM 183, and the lottery process is performed.

If it is determined in step S4605 that a special RT command with challenge mode has not been received, proceed to step S4607. In step S4607, it is determined whether or not a special RT command has been received.

As already explained, the special RT command is a command that is set for output in step S3909 in the special RT state processing (Figure 87) described above. Such a command indicates that a transition to the special RT state will occur based on winning the first BB or second BB, and that the transition lottery to the attack mode, etc. has not been won.

If it is determined in step S4607 that the above command has been received, then in step S4608, notification lottery process 2 is executed. Notification lottery process 2 is a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a push order notification effect when special replay 1 or special replay 2 is won, and is a process in which the winning probability is set to a second probability (20%) lower than the first probability. In this case, a lottery table for the second probability is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of ROM 182, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter area 183b of RAM 183, and the lottery process is performed.

When it is determined in step S4607 that the above command has not been received, this is when the current special RT transition is not based on the first or second BB, and a fake special RT command has been received. When a fake special command has been received, notification lottery process 3 is executed in step S4609. Notification lottery process 3 is a lottery process that draws a lottery for whether or not to execute a push order notification effect when special replay 1 or special replay 2 is won, and is a process in which the winning probability is set to a third probability (5%) that is lower than the first probability and second probability. In this case, a lottery table that is the third probability is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter area 183b of the RAM 183, and the lottery process is performed.

After executing any of the processes in steps S4606, S4608, and S4609, in step S4610, it is determined whether or not a win has been obtained in each of the notification lottery processes. If a win has not been obtained in the notification lottery process, the notification process for the special RT ends. In this case, even if special replay 1 or special replay 2 is obtained, no push order notification effect is performed, and for example, when a stop operation is performed starting from left reel 32L, the first replay win is achieved. In this case, even if special replay 1 or special replay 2 is obtained, it becomes impossible to distinguish it from a normal replay with index value IV=1.

If it is determined in step S4610 that a win has been obtained in each of the notification lottery processes, then in step S4611, a push order notification effect is performed in which the black BAR double tenpai is missed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, if the current game result is special replay 1, the third stop order of "middle" → "left" → "right" or the fifth stop order of "right" → "left" → "middle" is notified. Also, if the current game result is special replay 2, the fourth stop order of "middle" → "right" → "left" or the sixth stop order of "right" → "middle" → "left" is notified. After the processing of step S4611 is performed, the notification processing for special RT is terminated.

The relationship between the push order notification effect when Special Replay 1 or Special Replay 2 is won and the contents of the advantageous zone will be explained with reference to Figure 100 (b).

When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped according to the push order notification, aiming for the "black BAR" symbol, and a replay win (either special replay 1 or special replay 2) is achieved with a stop result of a double black BAR, it is determined that the current special RT state is a special RT state based on the first BB, and that the first BB will be followed by a transition to the super attack mode. As shown in FIG. 61, the overlapping role with the second BB is set not to win the transition lottery to the favorable zone, and the situation in which the special RT command with the super attack mode is output and set in step S3905 is when the overlapping role with the first BB is the winning opportunity for the transition lottery to the favorable zone. Therefore, when the double black BAR is stopped by operating in the stop order according to the push order notification, it indicates that the special RT state is based on the first BB win of the first and second BBs, and that the transition lottery to the super attack mode has also been won.

When the player performs the stopping operation aiming for the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in accordance with the push order notification, and the replay wins (either special replay 1 or special replay 2) with the stop result of a single black BAR, it is determined that the current special RT state is a special RT state based on the first BB, and that the first BB will be followed by a transition to attack mode. As above, of the first and second BBs, a combination with the second BB will not win the transition lottery to attack mode. Therefore, the situation in which a special RT command with attack mode is output and set in step S3906 is when a combination with the first BB is the trigger for a win in the transition lottery to the advantageous zone.

When the player performs the stopping operation aiming for the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R according to the push order notification, and the replay wins (either special replay 1 or special replay 2) with the stopping result not resulting in a black BAR double tenpai, the current special RT state will be either (1) a special RT state based on the first BB and transitioning to challenge mode after the first BB, (2) a special RT state based on the first BB and not winning the lottery to transition to the favorable zone, (3) a special RT state based on the second BB, or (4) a special RT state not based on winning the first BB or second BB.

However, due to the difference in the winning probability of each of the above notification lottery processes, if a replay win occurs with a stop result that is not a black BAR double tenpai, it is most likely to be the case where the push order notification effect is performed after notification lottery process 1, i.e., case (1) above, and next most likely to be the case where the push order notification effect is performed after notification lottery process 2, i.e., case (2) or (3).

Furthermore, it is possible to predict which case it is from the game stop result that triggered the transition to the special RT state. For example, when a stop result that results in a middle bell winning appears and transitions to the special RT state, the transition to the special RT state is based on either a middle bell with index value IV = 19, a middle bell overlap 1 with index value IV = 44, or a middle bell overlap 2 with index value IV = 44. In the case of a middle bell overlap 1 with index value IV = 44, there is a 90% probability of winning the challenge mode, a 10% probability of winning the super attack mode, and no event occurs in which the transition to any mode is not won. In addition, in the case of a middle bell overlap 2 with index value IV = 45, no transition to any mode is won. Therefore, when a stop result that results in a middle bell winning appears and transitions to the special RT state, the push order notification performance of a black BAR single line-up that suggests the attack mode win does not occur.

In addition, if the stop result that results in a middle bell appears and the reel transitions to the special RT state, if the index value IV = 44, there is a 90% chance that the special RT command with challenge mode will be received, and no special RT command will be received. If the index value IV = 44, only the special RT command will be received. And if the reel transitions to the special RT state with index value IV = 19, a fake special RT command will be received.

In this case, if the stop result that results in a middle bell win appears and the player transitions to the special RT state, if the player aims for the "black BAR" symbol according to the push order notification performance and the stop result is not a black BAR tenpai, then it will be either (1) a case where the first BB and challenge mode are won at index value IV = 44, (2) a case where the second BB is won at index value IV = 45, or (3) a case where the result is based on a fake special RT command that does not win any of the above. However, the probability of winning the notification lottery in these cases (1) to (3) is 80%, 20%, and 5%, respectively, and it can be predicted that case (1) is the most likely. In addition, case (3) is based on the assumption that the player does not win any of the modes that occur in 10% of cases when the middle bell is won, so even if the player wins the notification lottery, it will be 0.5% when index value IV = 19 is won, and the possibility is extremely low.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When the first BB or second BB is in a carryover state, the execution of the lottery for transition to an advantageous zone such as attack mode is restricted, and if the lottery for transition to an advantageous zone was won in the game result that triggered the carryover state, the start of display of the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator is delayed until a bonus is won. By doing this, in a configuration in which the lottery for transition to an advantageous zone is performed with a combination of a bonus and a small win, it is possible to maintain the sense of anticipation of winning the transition lottery, even if the display of the eighth display segment N8 does not start in the winning game.

However, by doing as described above, there are more opportunities for the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone to be restricted, and since the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone is not held even if a specific role is won during the carry-over state, for example, the carry-over state can be considered a situation in which anticipation for the advantageous zone is reduced, and can be said to be an undesirable situation for the player. Therefore, in the above embodiment, the content of the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone, which is carried out based on the game result that triggered the move to the carry-over state, is notified and suggested by using the stop results of the special replay during the carry-over state. In this way, it is possible to play while having anticipation for the advantageous zone even during the carry-over state, and interest can be increased.

The carryover state is basically a state that is transitioned to based on a bonus win, and if a specific combination that does not overlap with a bonus win wins the transition lottery to the advantageous zone, the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the zone indicator in the game begins. Therefore, for example, if a stop result that results in a specific combination such as a strong watermelon appears, if the zone indicator display has not begun, it means that it is a minor combination that does not overlap with the bonus and does not win the transition lottery, that it overlaps with the bonus and does not win the transition lottery, or that it overlaps with the bonus and wins the transition lottery. In this way, if there are bonus overlapping combinations and bonus non-overlapping combinations, and the transition lottery is performed in either case, and the timing at which the zone indicator starts displaying is different depending on whether or not there is a bonus overlap as described above, the patterns of winning combinations and the start of zone indicator display can be diversified, and the playability can be significantly improved.

In particular, for example, the ending numbers for Strong Watermelon Overlap 1, which is an overlapping role with a bonus, and Strong Watermelon, which is a minor role that is not an overlapping role with a bonus, are the same, so in a winning game between Strong Watermelon Overlap 1 and Strong Watermelon, it is difficult to determine which result has occurred. This makes it possible to determine which result has occurred not only based on whether or not the carryover state occurs afterwards, but also based on the start of the display on the interval indicator.

For example, when comparing strong watermelon with weak watermelon as the lottery for transition to the favorable zone, strong watermelon has a higher probability of winning the lottery for transition to the favorable zone than weak watermelon, regardless of whether it overlaps with the first BB (Figure 61). Therefore, when comparing the case where the stopping result of strong watermelon appears and the zone indicator does not start to display with the case where the stopping result of weak watermelon appears and the zone indicator does not start to display, it can be determined that the former is more likely to be in a carryover state.

For example, with regard to the proportion of strong watermelon and weak watermelon that overlap with the first BB, strong watermelon has a higher proportion of overlap with the first BB than weak watermelon (Figure 61). Specifically, when a strong watermelon stop result appears, there is about a quarter of the chance that it overlaps with the first BB, whereas when a weak watermelon stop result appears, there is about a thirtieth of the chance that it overlaps with the first BB. Therefore, even when comparing a case where a strong watermelon stop result appears and the interval indicator does not start to display with a case where a weak watermelon stop result appears and the interval indicator does not start to display, it can be determined that the former is more likely to be in a carryover state.

During the carryover state, special replays 1 and 2 can be won, and the stop results of special replays 1 and 2 notify and suggest the contents of the advantageous zone. Specifically, when special replays 1 and 2 are won, if a push order notification effect is performed for a stop order that results in a double black BAR, it is notified that the lottery for transition to super attack mode has been won, if a push order notification effect is performed for a stop order that results in a single black BAR, it is notified that the lottery for transition to attack mode has been won, and if a push order notification effect is performed for a stop order that results in a black BAR not being tenpai, it is suggested that the lottery for transition to challenge mode has been won. In this way, if the push order notification effect is used to notify the contents of the transition lottery that is of interest to the player, while assuming that the player is given a sense of expectation for the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone during the carryover state in which the display of the zone indicator has not started, it is possible to suitably increase the attention paid to the push order notification effect.

Even if these black BAR push order notifications occur, the corresponding stop results will not appear unless the "black BAR" symbols are aimed at and stopped on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Therefore, when trying to understand and predict the contents of the advantageous zone from the relationship with the stop results, it is necessary to try to hit the "black BAR" symbols, which enhances the gameplay. In other words, it is possible to give the impression that the player has won the transition lottery to attack mode, etc., by aiming for and stopping the "black BAR" symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and stopping the "black BAR" symbols in the desired position, and this impression (the impression that the transition lottery cannot be won unless you aim for it) can also lead to active participation in the game.

Although the results of Special Replays 1 and 2 differ depending on the stopping order, the bonus obtained is a replay regardless of the stopping order, and it can be said that the push order notification effect does not affect the player's profits. Therefore, consistency is guaranteed with the push order notification effect being performed in an area where the execution of a lottery to transition to an advantageous area that changes the degree of advantage by push order notifications such as push order bells is restricted.

In addition, special replays 1 and 2 are replays that do not involve a transition to the RT state, like other promotion replays. Therefore, it can be said that the result is that not only is there no benefit of a replay granted, but there is also no change in the advantageous degree of the game state thereafter, and consistency is further ensured with the restriction on the lottery for transitions to the advantageous zone.

When performing the push order notification effect for special replays 1 and 2, the push order notification is not performed on the instruction monitor 68 on the main control device 101 side, and only the effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 on the sub side. In other words, when performing a push order notification that affects the player's benefit, the push order notification is always performed on the instruction monitor 68 on the main control device 101 side. By doing this, it is made clear that if, for example, an arcade manager wants to monitor the relationship between the stop order and the awarded benefits, he or she only needs to monitor the instruction monitor 68, and the degree of freedom in the presentation of the push order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 side is overwhelmingly improved.

Special replays 1 and 2, which can result in the push order notification effects, are game results that do not trigger a lottery for a transition to a favorable zone. This allows players to enjoy the push order notification effects purely without giving the negative impression that the lottery for a transition is restricted in the carryover state.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, the configuration of the special replay that can be won during the special RT state is different. Fig. 101 is a winning/losing lottery table for the special RT state that transitions based on the first BB or second BB winning in this modified example, and Fig. 102 is a winning/losing lottery table for the special RT that transitions not based on the first BB or second BB winning.

In this modified example, special replays are set as follows: special replay 3 consisting of the first replay and the ninth replay to the thirteenth replay with index value IV = 53; special replay 4 consisting of the first replay, the ninth replay to the twelfth replay and the fourteenth replay with index value IV = 54; and special replay 5 consisting of the first replay, the ninth replay to the twelfth replay and the fifteenth replay with index value IV = 55.

The winning patterns for the first replay and the ninth to fifteenth replays are as described above. In the first replay, winning is achieved mainly with a stop roll that is a downward right replay, in the ninth to twelfth replays, winning is achieved with a stop roll that is a black BAR tenpai miss, in the thirteenth replay, winning is achieved with a stop roll that is a black BAR double tenpai miss, in the fourteenth replay, winning is achieved with a stop roll that is a black BAR single line, and in the fifteenth replay, winning is achieved with a stop roll that is a black BAR double line. Also, the winning probability for special replays 3 to 5 is approximately 1 in 65.5 each.

As shown in FIG. 103, special replays 3 to 5 can win the corresponding replay regardless of the operation order of stop switches 42 to 44. In other words, for example, if special replay 5 is won, regardless of the stopping order, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the 15th replay win is achieved with the stop result of a double black BAR. Also, even if special replay 5 is won, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped without aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the 1st replay win is achieved with the stop result of a downward right replay, regardless of the stopping order.

By the way, since the 14th replay and the 15th replay are not associated with the special replay 3, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped to aim for the "black BAR" pattern when the replay is won, the 14th replay and the 15th replay will not win, regardless of the stopping order, and the stop results of the black BAR single match and the black BAR double match will not appear. Also, since the 13th replay and the 15th replay are not associated with the special replay 4, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped to aim for the "black BAR" pattern when the replay is won, the 13th replay and the 15th replay will not win, and the stop results of the black BAR double tenpai miss and the black BAR double match will not appear, regardless of the stopping order. Similarly, since special replay 5 is not associated with a 13th replay or a 14th replay, even if you stop reels 32L, 32M, and 32R aiming for the "black BAR" symbol when you win, the 13th replay or the 14th replay will not win, regardless of the stopping order, and the stop results that result in a black BAR double tenpai miss or a black BAR single match will not appear.

Here, we will explain the recommended game modes for achieving each minor winning combination, including the special combination, in this slot machine 10.

Of the possible winning combinations in each game, the minor combinations that cannot be won due to the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 and that result in so-called missed wins are set to strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon. More specifically, as already explained, strong cherry and strong cherry overlap 1 and 2 are combinations that can be won by any of the 28th minor combination, 32nd minor combination to 35th minor combination, and the 28th minor combination symbol and the 32nd minor combination symbol to 35th minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L are the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol. In this case, in a 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped when the 7th "Red Bell" symbol through the 20th "White Bell" symbol reach the top of the left reel 32L, none of the 28th minor win symbol, the 32nd minor win symbol through the 35th minor win symbol, the "Cherry" symbol and the "2nd Replay" symbol, can be stopped on an active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these times, the strong cherry symbol will be missed.

In addition, the weak cherry is a combination that can be won by any of the 27th, 32nd, 33rd, 34th, 35th minor symbols on the left reel 32L, and the 27th, 32nd, 33rd, 34th, 35th, 36th, 37th, 38th, 39th, 40th, 41st, 42nd, 43rd, 44th, 45th, 46th, 47th, 48th, 49th, 50th, 51st, 52nd, 53rd, 54th, 55th, 60th, 61st, 62nd, 63rd, 64th, 65th, 66th, 67th, 70th, 71st, 72nd, 73rd, 74th, 75th, 76th, 77th, 78th, 80th, 81st, 82nd, 83rd, 84th, 85th, 86th, 87th, 88th, 90th, 91st, 92th, 93rd, 94th, 95th, 96th, 97th, 98th, 99th, 100th, 101st, 102nd, 103rd, 104th, 105th, 106th, 107th, 108th, 109th, 110th, 120th, 130th, 140th, 150th, 160th, 170th, 180th, 190th, 20th, 21st, 22nd, 23rd, 24th, 25th, 26th

Strong watermelon and strong watermelon overlap 1 and 2 are combinations in which either the 30th or 41st minor combination can win, and the 30th and 41st minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are "watermelon" symbols. In this case, in a 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped when the 9th "red 7" symbol to the 3rd "white bell" symbol reach the top of the left reel 32L, the 30th and 41st minor combination symbols, the "watermelon" symbols, cannot be stopped on an active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these times, the strong watermelon combination will be missed.

For the weak watermelon, either the 29th or 41st minor win symbol can win, and the 29th and 41st minor win symbols on the left reel 32L are the "watermelon" symbols. Even in this case, if the left reel 32L is stopped when the 9th "red 7" symbol through the 3rd "white bell" symbol reach the top of the left reel 32L in a 3-bet game, the 29th and 41st minor win symbols, the "watermelon" symbols, cannot be stopped on an active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these times, the weak watermelon symbol will be missed.

In that case, when stopping the left reel 32L while still retaining the possibility of winning for any of these combinations that may result in misses, it is necessary to stop the left reel 32L when the fourth "cherry" symbol through the sixth "second replay" symbol reach the top of the left reel 32L. In the following explanation, this operation mode of the left reel 32L is also referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode) as an operation mode that does not result in misses, and the operation modes that result in misses are also referred to as non-specific operation modes (second operation modes).

Furthermore, in each game, in a game where there is a high possibility of winning a specific combination, a chance notification effect may be generated as part of the effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104(a), for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Chance!!" and displays characters with exclamation marks corresponding to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, in the chance notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, the electronic sound "Cui").

In the chance notification effect, although it is suggested that the current winning role is one of the specific roles, it is set so that it is impossible or difficult to determine which specific role it is. In other words, when the chance notification effect is performed, the winning role for the current game is likely to be one of strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, etc., but it is not possible to determine whether it is a strong cherry or a weak cherry, whether it is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon, or whether it is a strong cherry or a strong watermelon. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 104(b), the player will operate the left reel 32L in the above-mentioned specific operation mode so as not to miss out on any prizes, regardless of which of the specific roles has been won.

Here, the occurrence rate of the chance notification effect differs depending on whether or not the special RT state is in progress. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104(c), in states other than the special RT state, the chance notification effect occurs 80% of the time when a specific role is won, whereas in the special RT state, the chance notification effect occurs 5% of the time when a specific role is won. This is for the following reason. That is, in this embodiment, the special RT state is provided mainly for the purpose of extending the expectation of winning the first BB or the second BB, and while the first BB or the second BB win is carried over, the first BB or the second BB will not be won twice, and furthermore, the execution of the transition lottery to a new advantageous zone is also restricted. In other words, in a game played when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, even if a new specific role is won, there will be no overlap with the first BB or the second BB winning flag, and there will be no winning in the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone, so the specific role win is basically undesirable for the player from the viewpoint of the timing of the win. Therefore, in the special RT state, which creates a sense of expectation for the carryover, the occurrence rate of the chance notification effect is lower than the occurrence rate outside the special RT state even if a specific role is won, making it difficult to notice the specific role win, and deliberately not generating flashy effects, so as not to upset the player's feelings that they may feel they have lost out.

However, even if a special role is won during the carryover state, and there is no hope of winning a new bonus or transitioning to a favorable zone, missing out on the special role is not desirable for the player in terms of losing medals. Therefore, it is considered that the player will operate the left reel 32L in the above-mentioned specific operation mode to avoid missing out, especially during the special RT state, regardless of whether it is a special role or not.

As already explained, even if you win special replays 3 to 5 during the special RT state, unless you perform the stopping operation aiming for the "black BAR" symbol, the 13th to 15th replays will not be won, and the stop results of black BAR double tenpai miss, black BAR single line, and black BAR double line will not appear. In other words, if the left reel 32L is operated in a specific operation mode, these stop results will not appear.

The special RT notification process in this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 105. The special RT notification process is a process (FIG. 99) performed in step S4515 in the push order notification process (FIG. 98) by the display control device 81.

In this modified example, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not Special Replay 5 has been won. If it has been won, in step S4702, it is determined whether or not a special RT command with super attack mode has been received by referring to the command storage area. If such a command has been received, in step S4703, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled so that a black BAR press notification effect is performed.

In the black BAR push notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 106(a), an image of a snake character and a mongoose character fighting while entangled is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition to the image of the snake and the mongoose fighting, a push instruction image for aiming for the "black BAR" is also displayed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, in the black BAR push notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a man's voice saying "Aim for it"). In this case, for example, if the player stops the left reel 32L aiming for the "black BAR" symbol, as shown in FIG. 106(b), the "black BAR" symbol stops on the top row of the left reel 32L, the "white BAR" symbol stops on the middle row, and the "black BAR" symbol stops on the bottom row, so that the player is excited about the appearance of the stop results that result in a black BAR double match or a black BAR single match.

Based on the black BAR press notification effect in step S4703, if the player performs a stop operation on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R aiming for the "black BAR" symbol, in this case, the 15th replay win is achieved with a stop result that is a double black BAR. On the other hand, if the special RT command with super attack mode is not received in step S4702, the black BAR press notification effect is not generated and the special RT notification process ends as it is. In this case, it is considered that the player performs a stop operation in a specific operation mode as described above to prevent missing out on a specific role. As a result, even if special replay 5 is won, it is difficult for a stop result that is a double black BAR to appear, and it is easy to achieve the first replay and the 9th to 12th replay wins.

If it is determined in step S4701 that the special replay 5 has not been won, it is determined in step S4704 whether or not the special replay 4 has been won. If the special replay 4 has been won, it is determined in step S4705 whether or not the special RT command with attack mode has been received. If it has been received, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled in step S4706 so that the black BAR eye-pressing notification effect occurs. In this case, if the player performs a stop operation on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R aiming for the "black BAR" pattern, the 14th replay win is established with the stop result of the black BAR single alignment. On the other hand, if the special RT command with attack mode has not been received in step S4705, the black BAR eye-pressing notification effect is not generated and the notification process for the special RT is terminated as it is. In this case, it is considered that the player performs the stop operation in a specific operation mode as described above. As a result, even if you win Special Replay 4, it is difficult for the numbers to stop at a single black BAR to appear, and it is easy to win the first replay or the 9th to 12th replays.

If it is determined in step S4704 that Special Replay 4 has not been won, it is determined in step S4707 whether Special Replay 3 has been won. If Special Replay 3 has been won, it is determined in step S4708 whether a special RT command with challenge mode has been received. If it has been received, in step S4709, notification lottery process 1 is executed. This notification lottery process 1 is generally the same as step S4608 above, and a lottery is executed to win the notification with the first probability (80%). If a special RT command with challenge mode has not been received, it is determined in step S4710 whether a special RT command has been received. If a special RT command has been received, notification lottery process 2 is executed in step S4711, and if a special RT command has not been received, notification lottery process 3 is executed in step S4712. These notification lottery processes 2 and 3 are generally similar to the processes in steps S4608 and S4609, with notification lottery process 2 being a lottery in which the notification is won with a second probability (20%) lower than the first probability, and notification lottery process 3 being a lottery in which the notification is won with a third probability (5%) lower than the second probability.

After executing the processing of step S4709, step S4711, or step S4712, in step S4713, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery process has won. If it has won, in step S4714, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to execute the black BAR eye-pressing notification effect. In this case, if the player performs a stop operation on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R aiming for the "black BAR" pattern, the 13th re-play win is established with a stop result that is a black BAR double tenpai miss. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4713 that the notification lottery process has not won, the notification process for the special RT is terminated without generating the black BAR eye-pressing notification effect. In this case, it is considered that the player performs a stop operation in a specific operation mode as described above. As a result, even if you win Special Replay 3, it is unlikely that you will get a winning combination that will result in a miss in the Black BAR Double Tenpai, and it is easier to win the 1st replay or the 9th to 12th replays.

If it is determined in step S4707 that the special replay 3 has not been won, the special RT notification process ends. In other words, the black BAR eye-press notification effect does not occur when a normal replay or other small win is won.

By doing the above, it is possible to vary the winning numbers when a special replay is won, without using the push order notification effect. Therefore, with regard to advantageous zones where the degree of advantage changes due to push order notifications such as push order bells, it is possible to more strictly ensure the significance of restricting the lottery for transition to advantageous zones during a carryover state, while realizing a gameplay that notifies players about advantageous zones during a carryover state.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, when a specific combination is won in the special RT state, a predetermined notification cancellation lottery is performed, and when the notification cancellation lottery is won and a special replay is won, a push order notification effect for lining up the "black BAR" symbols is generated. Note that in this modified example, a special RT state that can win the special replay 1 and special replay 2 in the second embodiment is set, and the stop results can differ depending on the stop order.

Figure 107 is a flowchart showing the specific role notification process in this modified example. As already explained, the specific role notification process is a process (Figure 52) that is performed in step S1905 of the start-time performance setting process (Figure 44) in the display control device 81, and is a process that is performed when a specific role is won.

In the specific role notification process in this modified example, similar to the processes in steps S2501 to S2509, notification cancellation processing is performed in step S4801 before the process for setting the pseudo premonition mode (steps S4802 to S4810) is performed.

In the notification cancellation process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 108(a), first in step S4901 it is determined whether or not the special RT state is in effect. If the special RT state is not in effect, the notification cancellation process is terminated. If the special RT state is in effect, in step S4902 it is determined whether or not the player has won the lottery to move to the advantageous zone. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. If neither winning flag is set, the notification cancellation process is terminated. If either winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S4903.

In step S4903, a release lottery table in which release rates corresponding to specific roles are set is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182. In the release lottery table, as shown in FIG. 108(b), for example, a strong cherry results in a release win with a 40% probability, and a weak cherry results in a release win with a 5% probability, which is lower than that of a strong cherry. Also, a strong watermelon results in a release win with an 80% probability, which is higher than that of a strong cherry, and a weak watermelon results in a release win with a 20% probability.

In step S4904, a release lottery process is performed based on the release lottery table acquired in step S4903. Then, in step S4905, it is determined whether or not the release lottery has been won. If the release lottery has not been won, the notification release process is terminated. If the release lottery has been won, in step S4906, a release flag is set in the various flags storage area 183a of RAM 183, and then the notification release process is terminated.

Figure 109 is a flowchart showing the notification process for special RT in this modified example.

In this modified example, in step S5001, it is determined whether the release flag is set. If the release flag is not set, in step S5002, a process is performed to obtain a notification table for the non-released state from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182. If the release flag is set, in step S5003, a process is performed to obtain a notification table for the released state from the various table storage area 182a. These notification tables are tables that determine the winning probability of a notification lottery for whether or not to notify of a stopping sequence that results in a black BAR double line, a black BAR single line, or a black BAR double tenpai miss when special replay 1 or special replay 2 is won, and the notification table for the released state has a higher winning probability of the notification lottery than the notification table for the non-released state.

After performing the processing of step S5002 or step S5003, in step S5004, it is determined whether or not a special RT command with super attack mode has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S5005, and notification lottery process 1 is executed. Notification lottery process 1 is a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a push order notification performance for a stop sequence that results in a double black BAR line-up, and the lottery process is executed based on the notification table acquired in step S5002 or step S5003 above. In this modified example, in notification lottery process 1 in the non-released state, there is a 10% chance of winning the notification lottery, and in notification lottery process 1 in the released state, there is an 80% chance of winning the notification lottery, which is higher than in the non-released state.

In step S5006, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S5005 above, and if the notification lottery has not been won, the notification process for the special RT is terminated. If the notification lottery has been won, in step S5007, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled to generate a push order notification effect for the stop order that results in a double black BAR line-up, and the notification process for the special RT is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5004, it is judged in step S5008 whether or not a special RT command with attack mode has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S5009, where notification lottery process 2 is executed. Notification lottery process 2 is a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a push order notification performance for a stop sequence that results in a single black BAR line-up, and the lottery process is executed based on the notification table acquired in step S5002 or step S5003 above. In this modified example, in notification lottery process 2 in the non-released state, there is a 10% probability of winning the notification lottery, and in notification lottery process 2 in the released state, there is an 80% probability of winning the notification lottery, which is higher than in the non-released state.

In step S5010, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S5009 above, and if the notification lottery has not been won, the notification process for the special RT is terminated. If the notification lottery has been won, in step S5011, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled to generate a push order notification effect for the stop order that results in a black BAR single alignment, and the notification process for the special RT is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5008, in step S5012, it is judged whether or not a special RT command with challenge mode has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S5013, and notification lottery process 3 is executed. Notification lottery process 3 is a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a push order notification performance for a stopping order that results in a black BAR double tenpai miss, and the lottery process is executed based on the notification table acquired in step S5002 or step S5003 above. In this modified example, in notification lottery process 3 in the non-released state, there is a 30% probability of winning the notification lottery, and in notification lottery process 3 in the released state, there is an 80% probability of winning the notification lottery, which is higher than in the non-released state.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5012, it is judged in step S5014 whether or not a special RT command has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S5015, where notification lottery process 4 is executed. If it has not been received, the process proceeds to step S5016, where notification lottery process 5 is executed. Notification lottery process 4 and notification lottery process 5 are also lottery processes for determining whether or not to execute a push order notification performance for a stopping order that results in a black BAR double tenpai miss, and the lottery process is performed based on the notification table obtained in step S5002 or step S5003 above. In this modified example, in notification lottery process 4 in the non-released state, there is a 10% probability of winning the notification lottery, and in notification lottery process 4 in the released state, there is the same 10% probability of winning the notification lottery as in the non-released state. In addition, in the notification lottery process 5 in the non-released state, there is a 5% chance of winning the notification lottery, and in the notification lottery process 5 in the released state, there is the same 5% chance of winning the notification lottery as in the non-released state.

After executing the processing of step S5013, step S5015, or step S5016, the process proceeds to step S5017. In step S5017, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery has been won based on the processing results of each of the notification lottery processes 3 to 5 described above, and if the notification lottery has not been won, the notification process for the special RT ends. If the notification lottery has been won, in step S5018, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled to generate a push order notification effect for a stop order that results in a black BAR double tenpai miss, and the notification process for the special RT ends.

The following explains what happens when a special replay is won in the special RT state of this modified example, with reference to Figure 110.

For example, suppose a stop result that results in a weak watermelon winning combination appears and the special RT state is entered. The example in Figure 110 shows a transition to a special RT state with a super attack mode. As already explained, replays are frequently won in the special RT state.

If a specific role, such as a weak watermelon role, is won during the special RT state, the above-mentioned notification cancellation process (Fig. 108) is performed. If a cancellation is won in the cancellation lottery process of the notification cancellation process, the notification table obtained when Special Replay 1 or 2 is subsequently won will be different (steps S5002, S5003), and it will be easier for a player who has won the cancellation lottery to win the notification lottery. If the notification lottery (step S5005) is won when Special Replay 1 or 2 is won, a push order notification effect will be generated with a stop sequence that results in a double black BAR line-up, and if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in that stop sequence with the "black BAR" symbol targeted, the 15th replay win will be established with a stop result that results in a double black BAR line-up.

On the other hand, if you do not win a specific role such as a weak watermelon role during the special RT state, or if you win a specific role but do not win the cancellation lottery process, the probability of winning the notification lottery when special replays 1 and 2 are won is low. As a result, when special replays 1 and 2 are won, the first replay win is established with the stopping result that results in a downward-right replay.

By doing the above, the gameplay is improved when a specific role is won during the special RT state. As already explained, when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, no new bonus win occurs, and no lottery for transition to the advantageous zone is held. Therefore, even if a specific role is won, the player may receive fewer benefits than if the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is not set. In that regard, if the notification cancellation lottery is held based on the winning of a specific role as described above, there is the advantage of playing a game that predicts the contents of the advantageous zone thereafter, and it is possible to provide an alternative to the bonus lottery and advantageous zone lottery based on the winning of a specific role.

In particular, by making it possible for stop results that suggest the contents of the advantageous zone to appear based on the winning of a specific role during the special RT state, it is possible to make the player believe that they have won the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone based on the winning of a specific role during the special RT state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone will not be held when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set.

In addition, during the special RT state, even if the player does not win the release lottery based on winning a specific role, the notification lottery can still be won. This makes it easier to predict whether the player has won the advantageous zone with the specific role that triggered the transition to the special RT state, or whether the player has won the advantageous zone as a result of a specific role that was won after the transition to the special RT state, making it easier to make predictions and make the game more enjoyable.

As in the above modified example, a configuration that allows the content of the transition lottery to the advantageous zone to be announced based on the winning of a specific role during the carry-over state (special RT state) makes it possible to realize a new gameplay feature in which the content of the transition lottery to the advantageous zone that has already been executed is announced based on the winning of a specific role during the carry-over state. In other words, since the execution of the transition lottery to the advantageous zone based on the winning of a specific role is restricted during the carry-over state, it can be said that the winning of the specific role is not desirable for the player. In this regard, with the above configuration, since the content of the transition lottery that has already been executed is announced, it is possible to make it appear as if the transition lottery was held based on the winning of the specific role, and it is also possible to prevent the player from realizing that the transition lottery is restricted during the carry-over state.

As already explained, in the winning game of the game result that triggers the transition to the carryover state, the result of the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone is not necessarily notified, and the notification may be limited. Specifically, even if the attack mode or the like is won, the winning is notified through the premonition mode, and depending on the number of games set in the premonition mode, the result of the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone is notified in a game after the game in which the transition lottery was held. Therefore, as described above, when the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone is held with a combination of a bonus that triggered the carryover state, the content of the transition lottery is likely to remain unannounced in the carryover state. With such a configuration, it is less likely that the content of the unannounced content will not exist in a configuration that allows the content of the unannounced content to be announced in response to the winning of a specific role as described above.

In addition, by configuring the system so that the contents of the unannounced information are not notified in the specific role winning game during the carryover state, but rather in a game following the specific role winning game, it becomes possible to notify the contents of the unannounced information in a wider variety of games.

And by configuring the content of the unannounced event to be announced in the game in which the special replay is won, which comes after the game in which the specific role is won, there is room for the content not to be announced unless the special replay is won, and it is possible to maintain a sense of anticipation even if the transition lottery is not won.

On the other hand, the unannounced content is notified when the carryover state ends, i.e., when a bonus is won, by whether or not the section indicator is lit. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as unannounced content going unannounced for an extended period of time.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, multiple special RT states are set, and the type of special replay that is won varies depending on each special RT state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, the 5th RT state to the 8th RT state are set as the special RT state, and the type of special replay that can be won in each RT state is different. In the 5th RT state, the replays that can be won are set as a normal replay consisting of the 1st replay, and special replay 5 consisting of the 1st replay, 9th replay to 12th replay, and 15th replay. The winning probability of each replay is approximately 1 in 5.3 for normal replay and approximately 1 in 21.8 for special replay 5, making the total replay probability approximately 1 in 4.3.

In the sixth RT state, the normal replay consisting of the first replay and special replay 4 consisting of the first replay, the ninth replay to the twelfth replay, and the fourteenth replay are set as possible winning replays. The winning probability of each replay is approximately 1 in 5.3 for normal replay and approximately 1 in 21.8 for special replay 4, making the total replay probability approximately 1 in 4.3.

In the seventh RT state, the normal replay consisting of the first replay and special replay 3 consisting of the first replay and the ninth to thirteenth replays are set as possible winning replays. The winning probability of each replay is approximately 1 in 5.3 for normal replay and approximately 1 in 21.8 for special replay 3, making the total replay probability approximately 1 in 4.3.

In the 8th RT state, the normal replay consisting of the first replay is set as the replay that can be won, and special replays 3 to 5 cannot be won. And because the normal replay has a probability of about 1 in 4.3, the total replay probability is also about 1 in 4.3.

In this modified example, different RT states are set when transitioning to the special RT state. Figure 112 is a flowchart showing the special RT state processing in this modified example.

In step S5101, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If it is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it is determined in step S5102 whether the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set. If either BB winning flag is set, it is determined in step S5103 whether the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, it is determined in step S5104 whether the specialized zone winning flag is set.

If the special zone winning flag is set and the lottery for transition to the super attack mode has been won, a process is performed in step S5105 to set a special RT command with super attack mode as an output target to the display control device 81. Then, in step S5106, a process is performed to store the current RT setting flag in a specified memory area, and in step S5107, a process is performed to clear the current RT setting flag. After that, in step S5108, a process is performed to set the fifth RT setting flag, and then this special RT state process is terminated. Note that although the type of RT setting flag that is set differs, the processes in steps S5106 to S5108 are basically the same as the processes in steps S3914 to S3916, and the details of each process will be omitted in the following explanation.

By the above process, the game state will transition to the 5th RT state among the special RT states. In other words, if the current special RT state is a special RT state based on winning the 1st BB and the lottery for transition to the Super Attack Mode has been won, the game will transition to the 5th RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, the RT state will be one in which special replay 5 can be achieved, and if the player stops aiming for the "black BAR" symbol, a replay win of a double black BAR will be achieved.

If it is determined in step S5104 that the Super Attack Mode winning flag is not set, a special RT command with attack mode is set as the output target in step S5109, and then processing is performed in steps S5110 to S5112 to transition to the sixth RT state, after which the special RT state processing is terminated.

By the above process, the game state transitions to the 6th RT state among the special RT states. In other words, if the current special RT state is a special RT state based on winning the 1st BB and the lottery for transition to attack mode is won, the game state transitions to the 6th RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, the game state becomes one in which special replay 4 can be achieved, and if the player performs the stopping operation aiming for the "black BAR" symbol, a replay win of a single black BAR will be achieved.

If it is determined in step S5103 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S5113 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, in step S5114, a special RT command with challenge mode is set as the output target. Thereafter, in steps S5115 to S5117, processing is performed to transition to the seventh RT state, and then the special RT state processing is terminated.

By the above process, the game state transitions to the seventh RT state among the special RT states. In other words, if the current special RT state is a special RT state based on winning the first BB and the lottery for transition to challenge mode is won, the game state transitions to the seventh RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, the game state becomes one in which special replay 3 can be achieved, and if the player performs the stopping operation aiming for the "black BAR" symbol, a replay win without the black BAR tenpai will be achieved.

If it is determined in step S5113 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, a special RT command is set as the output target in step S5118. After that, processing is performed in steps S5119 to S5121 to transition to the eighth RT state, and then the special RT state processing is terminated.

Also, if it is determined in step S5102 that neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S5122. The processes in steps S5122 to S5125 are the same as those in steps S3910 to S3913 above. After setting the output of the fake special RT command in step S5125, the process to transition to the eighth RT state is performed in steps S5126 to S5128, and then the special RT state processing is terminated.

By the above process, the game state transitions to the 8th RT state among the special RT states. In other words, if the current special RT state is a special RT state based on winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB and the lottery for transition to the Super Attack Mode, Attack Mode, or Challenge Mode is not won, or if none of the 1st BB, 2nd BB, or Attack Mode is won, the game state transitions to the 8th RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, the RT state is one in which normal replays are frequently achieved and special replays 3 to 5 are not achieved, and even if the player performs a stop operation aiming for the "black BAR" symbol, a replay win of a black BAR double line, a black BAR single line, or a black BAR double tenpai miss will not occur.

If the determination in step S5101 is negative, the process proceeds to step S5129. The processing in steps S5129 to S5135 is the same as the processing in steps S3917 to S3923 described above, and therefore will not be described here.

Incidentally, in the special RT notification process in this embodiment, if a special replay is won, a black BAR push notification effect is generated regardless of the contents of the advantageous zone. In other words, if the RT state is the fifth RT state, by operating according to the black BAR push notification effect, a stop result that results in a black BAR double match will appear, if the RT state is the sixth RT state, by operating according to the black BAR push notification effect, a stop result that results in a black BAR single match will appear, and if the RT state is the seventh RT state, by operating according to the black BAR push notification effect, a stop result that results in a black BAR double tenpai miss will appear. In the eighth RT state, a special replay is not won, so the black BAR push notification effect does not occur.

By doing this, the probability of winning special replays 3 to 5 is different in each RT state, so there is no need to hold a lottery or other event to notify you when a special replay is won, and you can play by predicting the contents of the advantageous zone from the stop results of the various black BARs.

In addition, in the configuration in which the RT state to be transitioned to is different depending on the contents of the advantageous zone as in the above modified example, it is advisable to set the game result in correspondence with the RT state and the contents of the advantageous zone. Specifically, for example, strong cherry overlap 1 (IV = 32) can win the super attack mode, but does not win the attack mode or challenge mode, and the special RT state to which the transition is made based on the strong cherry overlap 1 is set as the 5th RT state. Also, weak cherry overlap 1 (IV = 34) can win the attack mode, but does not win the super attack mode or challenge mode, and the special RT state to which the transition is made based on the weak cherry overlap 1 is set as the 6th RT state. Strong watermelon overlap 1 (IV = 36) and weak watermelon overlap 1 (IV = 38) can win the challenge mode, but do not win the super attack mode or attack mode, and the special RT state to which the transition is made based on these strong watermelon overlap 1 and weak watermelon overlap 1 is set as the 7th RT state. For other overlapping roles (IV=40 with 1 Chance A overlap, IV=42 with 1 Chance B overlap, IV=44 with 1 middle bell overlap), none of the Super Attack Mode, Attack Mode, or Challenge Mode will be won, and the special RT state to which the player transitions based on these overlapping roles will be the 8th RT state. By doing this, the game results that trigger the transition to each RT state are associated, ensuring the transparency of the game.

Then, in each RT state, the probability of winning the notification lottery when a special replay is won is made different depending on whether or not the lottery for transitioning to Super Attack Mode, Attack Mode, or Challenge Mode has been won, ensuring the fun of predicting whether or not the lottery for transitioning to each mode has been won.

In the above-mentioned configuration in which the RT state and the game result are associated, the content of the advantageous zone in which the player can win the transition lottery may be different even with the same stop result, for example, by increasing the number of bonus types. For example, in addition to the first BB and the second BB, a third BB and a fourth BB are provided. In the case of the strong cherry overlap A, which is a double win of the first BB and a strong cherry, the transition state is set to the fifth RT state, as the player can only win the super attack mode. On the other hand, in the case of the strong cherry overlap B, which is a double win of the third BB and a strong cherry, the transition state is set to the sixth RT state, as the player can only win the attack mode. In the case of the strong cherry overlap C, which is a double win of the fourth BB and a strong cherry, the transition state is set to the seventh RT state, as the player can only win the challenge mode. By doing this, the contents of the advantageous zone to which you may enter cannot be determined from the stopping result of the specific combination that triggered the transition to the RT state (the stopping result that results in a strong cherry in the above example), making it possible to enjoy the game of predicting the contents of the advantageous zone from the stopping result when a special replay is subsequently won.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, as in modified example 3 above, the special RT state to which the player transitions is made differs depending on the contents of the advantageous zone, and the probability of winning a specified special replay in each special RT state is made different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113, in the 5th RT state, which is a special RT state in which the Super Attack Mode has been won, the normal replay consisting of the 1st replay and the special replay 5 consisting of the 1st replay, the 9th replay to the 12th replay, and the 15th replay are set as replays that can be won. The winning probability of each replay is approximately 1 in 5.3 for the normal replay and approximately 1 in 21.8 for the special replay 5, making the total replay probability approximately 1 in 4.3.

In the sixth RT state, the normal replay consisting of the first replay and the special replay 5 consisting of the first replay, the ninth replay to the twelfth replay, and the fifteenth replay are set as replays that can be won, and the types of replays that can be won are the same as in the fifth RT state. However, the winning probability of each replay is different, with the normal replay having a higher winning probability of approximately 1 in 5.0 than that of the fifth RT state, and the special replay 5 having a lower winning probability of approximately 1 in 32.8 than that of the fifth RT state.

In the seventh RT state, the normal replay consisting of the first replay, and special replay 5 consisting of the first replay, the ninth replay to the twelfth replay, and the fifteenth replay are set as possible winning replays, and the types of winning replays are the same as in the fifth RT state and the sixth RT state. However, the winning probability of each replay is different, with the normal replay having a winning probability of about 1 in 4.6, which is higher than that of the fifth RT state and the sixth RT state, and the special replay 5 having a winning probability of about 1 in 65.5, which is lower than that of the fifth RT state and the sixth RT state.

In the 8th RT state, the normal replay consisting of the first replay is set as the replay that can be won, and each special replay 5 cannot be won. And since the normal replay has a probability of about 1 in 4.3, the total replay probability is also about 1 in 4.3.

Incidentally, in the special RT notification process in this embodiment, a black BAR eye-pressing notification effect is generated when special replay 5 is won, regardless of the contents of the advantageous zone. In other words, regardless of the type of RT state, the stopping results that result in a double black BAR line-up will appear based on the winning of special replay 5.

As described above, by varying the type of special RT state to which the player transitions depending on the contents of the advantageous zone and varying the probability of winning special replay 5 depending on the type of special RT state, it is possible to play a game in which the contents of the advantageous zone are predicted based on the probability of winning special replay 5. Therefore, there is no need to vary the probability of winning the lottery process for determining whether or not to generate a black BAR push notification effect when special replay 5 is won depending on the contents of the advantageous zone, and the configuration is simplified. Also, by doing as described above, even if the "black BAR" symbol is pushed when the black BAR push notification effect is not generated, a stop result such as a black BAR double line will not appear, so it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity caused by a stop result such as a black BAR double line appearing when the effect is not generated.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, a configuration example will be described in which the transition to the special RT state is made by winning a re-play.

Figure 114 shows the relationship between the winning mode and the bonuses awarded in this modified example.

In this modified example, a replay is set as a bonus given when each of the roles (minor roles 27 to 38) that are designated as specific roles in the above embodiments and modified examples are won, and the replay is accompanied by a transition to the 4th RT state, i.e., the special RT state. In other words, for example, if a strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, etc. is won and the winning role is established, a replay is granted and the state transitions to the 4th RT state. In addition, for overlapping roles between these roles and bonuses (strong cherry overlap 1, 2, strong watermelon overlap 1, 2, etc.), when the overlapping role is won, the corresponding role is established, a replay is granted, and the state transitions to the 4th RT state.

In addition, with regard to the replay in which a winning combination is established with the stop result such as the strong cherry, it is preferable to configure it as a combination with the first replay so that no misses occur. In other words, if a stop result such as a strong cherry cannot be stopped, a winning combination is established with another stop result, a replay is awarded, and the game transitions to the fourth RT state.

In this modified example, each role that will result in these replays and the 4th RT state is a specific role (hereinafter also referred to as a specific replay), and a lottery is held to determine whether the advantageous zone will be transitioned based on the winning of the specific replay. More specifically, for example, in step S701 of the lottery result response processing (Figure 31), if the specific replay has been won, a positive judgment is made and the first specific role processing to the third specific role processing are performed.

Figure 115 is a flowchart showing RT state processing in this modified example.

In step S5201, it is determined whether the transition result has stopped, and if it has stopped, it is determined in step S5202 whether either the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag has been set. In other words, the processing in step S5202 mainly indicates a case where a transition to the 4th RT state has occurred based on a result that is a double win with the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, among the results for which the above-mentioned replay is awarded. If a positive determination is made in step S5202, the RT state processing ends as it is. In other words, in this case, even if the stopped result stops, a transition to the RT state does not occur.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5202, a judgment is made in step S5203 as to whether or not the game is in a normal game state, and if the game is in a normal game state, a process of setting the game to the first RT state is performed in step S5204. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S5205, a judgment is made in step S5205 as to whether or not a second re-play win has been achieved, and if the win has been achieved or if a negative judgment is made in step S5103, a process of clearing the RT setting flag is performed in step S5206, and then setting the game to the first RT state is performed in step S5204. The processes in steps S5204 to S5206 are the same as those in steps S503 to S505 above.

Also, if the second replay winning is not established in step S5205, the process of setting the RT state corresponding to the winning replay is performed in steps S5207 to S5212, similar to the process in steps S506 to S511.

If it is determined in step S5210 that the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S5213. In step S5213, it is determined whether or not a specific replay win has been achieved. If a win has not been achieved, the RT state processing ends. If a win has been achieved, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S5214, and the fourth RT setting flag is set in step S5215, the game state is transitioned to the fourth RT state, and this RT state processing ends. Note that in this modified example as well, the RT state prior to the transition to the fourth RT state may be configured to be stored.

Figure 116 shows the special RT state processing in this modified example.

In the special RT state processing of this modified example, the transition process to the fourth RT state is configured to be performed in the RT state processing as described above, so the transition process to the fourth RT state in the special RT state processing is not performed. Specifically, in steps S5301 to S5309, similar to steps S3901 to S3909 above, the process of setting various special RT commands based on a specific replay win that is a double win with the first BB or second BB is performed, and then the special RT state processing is terminated without performing the transition process to the fourth RT state in steps S3914 to S3916.

In addition, if it is determined in step S5302 that the first BB or second BB has not been won twice, then in step S5310, it is determined whether or not a specific replay has been won, and if it has been won, then, on the condition that the attack mode, challenge mode, etc. have not been won (step S5311: NO), a process of setting a fake special RT command is performed in step S5312, and then the special RT state process is terminated.

In addition, in this modified example, if it is determined in step S5301 that the game is not in the normal game state or the first RT state, the special RT state processing is terminated without performing the processing for terminating the fourth RT state (steps S3917 to S3923).

By configuring it as described above, the conditions for transitioning to the special RT state can be aligned with the conditions for transitioning to other RT states when various replay wins are achieved.

In addition, in the above configuration, the special RT state entered without going through the first BB or second BB winning is ended when the transition result stops, so the number of games that can continue in the special RT state is diversified, and the player can enjoy guessing the degree of advantage (whether or not the BB has been won, whether or not the player has entered the advantageous zone) during the special RT state until a bell is missed (until the transition result stops).

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, the special replay during the special RT state is used to suggest that not only the advantageous zone but also the first BB or the second BB has been won. In this embodiment, as in the modified example 5 in the second embodiment, the strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, Chance A, Chance B, middle bell, strong cherry overlap 1, 2, weak cherry overlap 1, 2, strong watermelon overlap 1, 2, weak watermelon overlap 1, 2, Chance A overlap 1, 2, Chance B overlap 1, 2, and middle bell overlap 1, 2 are all awarded a replay upon winning and the fourth RT state is awarded.

Figure 117 shows a part of the winning/losing lottery table during the special RT state in this embodiment. As described above, during the special RT state, the winning probability of small winning combinations etc. does not change, but the winning probability of a replay does. Figure 117 shows the winning combination and winning probability only for replays whose winning probability changes. Note that, even in this embodiment, during the special RT state, normal replays with index value IV = 1 are mainly won, and occasionally special replays 6 to 11 are won. Special replays 6 to 11 are overlapping combinations of any of the 16th to 24th replays.

As shown in FIG. 118, the 16th to 24th replays all award replays as a bonus, but the winning combinations are different, and in particular the number of "black BAR" symbols that stop in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R differs. Note that the following explanation assumes that the winning pattern is the downward-sloping line L4 set as the active line in all three-bet games.

The 16th replay is set to have a winning mode in which a win is achieved when the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. The 17th replay is set to have a winning mode in which a win is achieved when the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. In both the 16th and 17th replays, even if you operate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R aiming for the "black BAR" symbol, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

The 18th replay is set to have a winning mode in which a win is established when the "white BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. The 19th replay is set to have a winning mode in which a win is established when the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. The 20th replay is set to have a winning mode in which a win is established when the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. In all of these 18th replay to 20th replay, if you operate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R aiming for the "black BAR" symbol, the winning mode is that one "black BAR" symbol will stop in the middle of one of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

The 21st replay is set to a winning mode in which a win is established when the "white BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. The 22nd replay is set to a winning mode in which a win is established when the "white BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. The 23rd replay is set to a winning mode in which a win is established when the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. In all of these 21st to 23rd replays, if you operate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R aiming for the "black BAR" symbol, two "black BAR" symbols will stop in the middle of one of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, resulting in a winning combination.

The 24th replay is set to have a winning mode in which the "white BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line to win. The winning mode of the 24th replay is a winning mode in which, when the stopping operation is performed aiming for the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, the "black BAR" symbols stop lined up in the middle row of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the number of "black BAR" symbols stopped in the middle row is 3.

Special Replay 6 to Special Replay 11 are push order roles that result in different winning combinations depending on the stopping order. However, regardless of which role wins, the bonus awarded is a replay, and the degree of advantage to the player does not change. In other words, although the winning combinations for Special Replay 6 to Special Replay 11 differ depending on the stopping order, the degree of advantage does not change.

Figure 119 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations and the winning patterns that are achieved in accordance with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.

Special Replay 6 is a combination of the 16th replay and the 18th to 20th replays. When Special Replay 6 is won, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the first stopping order of "left" → "center" → "right", the 16th replay or 18th replay win is established. In this case, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped aiming for the "black BAR" symbol in the middle row, the 18th replay win of the 16th replay and 18th replay is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L. If the reels are stopped in the second stopping order of "left" → "right" → "center", the 16th replay win is established. In this case, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped aiming at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle row, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle row on any of the reels. If the reels are stopped in the third stopping order of "center" → "left" → "right", the 16th re-play or the 19th re-play winning is established. In this case, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped aiming at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle row, the 19th re-play winning is established among the 16th re-play and the 19th re-play, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row of the middle reel 32M. If the reels are stopped in the fourth stopping order of "center" → "right" → "left", the 16th re-play winning is established, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle row on any of the reels. If the reels are stopped in the fifth stopping order of "right" → "left" → "center", a 16th re-play or a 20th re-play winning combination is achieved, and in this case, if the reels are stopped aiming for the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the 20th re-play winning combination is achieved, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the right reel 32R. If the reels are stopped in the sixth stopping order of "right" → "center" → "left", a 16th re-play winning combination is achieved, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle of any of the reels. In addition, for the first, third and fifth stop sequences, even if the player performs a stop operation aiming for the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M and 32R, if the operation is performed at a timing that does not allow the "black BAR" symbol to stop in the middle, the 16th replay win will be established in all cases.

Special Replay 7 is a combination of the 17th replay to the 20th replay. As in the case of Special Replay 6, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped with the aim of getting the "black BAR" symbol in the middle, the 17th replay win is achieved if the first, third, or fifth stop order is selected, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. If the second stop order is selected, the 18th replay win is achieved, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L. If the fourth stop order is selected, the 19th replay win is achieved, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the middle reel 32M. If the sixth stop order is selected, the 20th replay win is achieved, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the right reel 32R. For the second, fourth and sixth stop sequences, even if the player performs a stop operation aiming for the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M and 32R, if the operation is performed at a timing that does not allow the "black BAR" symbol to stop in the middle, the 17th replay win will be established in all cases.

Special Replay 8 is a combination of the 16th replay and the 18th to 22nd replays. If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped with the aim of getting the "black BAR" symbol, the 16th replay win is achieved if the reels are stopped in the second, fourth, or sixth stop order, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. If the replay is stopped in the first or third stop order, the 21st replay win is achieved, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M. If the replay is stopped in the fifth stop order, the 22nd replay win is achieved, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R. For the first, third and fifth stop sequences, even if the player performs a stop operation aiming for the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M and 32R, if the operation is performed at a timing that does not allow the "black BAR" symbol to stop in the middle, the 16th replay win, 18th replay win to 20th replay win will be achieved.

Special Replay 9 is a combination of the 17th replay, 18th to 20th replays, 22nd replay, and 23rd replay. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped with the aim of getting the "black BAR" symbol, if the first, third, or fifth stop order is selected, the 17th replay win is achieved, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. If the second stop order is selected, the 22nd replay win is achieved, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R. If the fourth or sixth stop order is selected, the 23rd replay win is achieved, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. For the 12th, 4th, and 6th stop sequences, even if the player performs a stop operation aiming for the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, if the operation is performed at a timing that does not allow the "black BAR" symbol to stop in the middle, the 17th to 20th replay wins will be achieved.

Special Replay 10 is a combination of the 16th replay, the 18th to 20th replays, and the 24th replay. If the second, fourth, or sixth stop order is selected, the 16th replay win is achieved, and the "black BAR" symbols do not stop in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, or 32R. If the first, third, or fifth stop order is selected, the 24th replay win is achieved, and the "black BAR" symbols stop in the middle of each of the reels 32L, 32M, or 32R. For the first, third and fifth stop sequences, even if the player performs a stop operation aiming for the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M and 32R, if the operation is performed at a timing that does not allow the "black BAR" symbol to stop in the middle, the 16th replay win, 18th replay win to 22nd replay win will be achieved.

Special replay 11 is a combination of the 17th replay, the 18th replay to the 20th replay, and the 22nd replay to the 24th replay. If the first, third, or fifth stop order is selected, the 17th replay win is achieved, and the "black BAR" symbols do not stop in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, or 32R. If the second, fourth, or sixth stop order is selected, the 24th replay win is achieved, and the "black BAR" symbols stop in the middle of each of the reels 32L, 32M, or 32R. For the second, fourth and sixth stop sequences, even if the player performs a stop operation aiming for the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M and 32R, if the operation is performed at a timing that does not allow the "black BAR" symbol to stop in the middle, the 17th to 20th replay wins, 22nd replay win and 23rd replay win will be achieved.

As described above, various special RT commands are output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 based on the winning of a specific role (BB winning or BB non-winning). Also, as already explained, when the display control device 81 receives a command from the main control device 101, the command storage process stores the received command in a specified area, etc.

Here, the special RT command reception process that is started when the above-mentioned various special RT commands are received in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 120. In the special RT command reception process, processing is performed to set the presentation pattern during the current special RT state according to the type of command received.

Specifically, in step S5401, it is determined whether the currently received command is a special RT command with a super attack mode. If it is a special RT command with a super attack mode, in step S5402, the notification scenario table stored in the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182 is referenced, and notification scenario A is set as the performance pattern during the current special RT state, and then the special RT command reception process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 121, in the notification scenario table in this embodiment, the probability of winning the push order notification effect lottery for stopping the black BAR is set to be different depending on the type of notification scenario according to the value of the black BAR stop counter. The black BAR stop counter is a counter that the CPU 181 uses to keep track of the number of times the "black BAR" symbol has stopped in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R during the current special RT state, and is provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. In addition, the push order notification effect lottery for stopping the black BAR is executed when any of the special replays is won. For example, in notification scenario A, if the black BAR stop counter is 0, there is an 80% probability of winning the push order notification effect lottery, and if the black BAR stop counter is 5, there is a 30% probability of winning the push order notification effect lottery.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5401, in step S5403, it is judged whether or not the currently received command was a special RT command with attack mode. If it is a special RT command with attack mode, in step S5404, a process is performed to set notification scenario B as the presentation pattern during the current special RT state from the notification scenario table. After that, in step S5405, in the current presentation pattern, 5 is set as the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter, and then this special RT command reception process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 121, in each notification scenario, an upper limit is set so that if the black BAR stop counter reaches a predetermined value or more, the push order notification lottery will no longer be won. For example, in notification scenario B, which is set when the special RT command with attack mode is received, if the black BAR stop counter has a value between 0 and 4, the push order notification lottery can be won, but if the counter value reaches 5, the push order notification lottery will no longer be won.

In this embodiment, the number of "black BAR" symbols stopped in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R during the special RT state indicates the subsequent game content. For example, when the cumulative number of "black BAR" symbols stopped during the special RT state reaches three or more, it is determined that the game will then transition to the first BB or second BB bonus state. Also, when the cumulative number of "black BAR" symbols stopped during the special RT state reaches four or more, it is determined that the game will transition to the challenge mode after the first BB or second BB bonus state. And when the cumulative number of "black BAR" symbols stopped reaches five or more, it is determined that the game will transition to the attack mode after the first BB or second BB bonus state, and when the cumulative number of "black BAR" symbols stopped reaches six or more, it is determined that the game will transition to the super attack mode after the bonus state.

In other words, the more "black BAR" symbols stop in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R during the special RT state, the more likely it is that the player will transition to a more advantageous state after the special RT state. Therefore, the player can infer the subsequent state from the number of "black BAR" symbols that stop.

In addition, during the special RT state, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a state presentation corresponding to the special RT state. The state presentation is set to change depending on the number of "black BAR" symbols that have stopped. Specifically, as the cumulative number of "black BAR" symbols that have stopped increases from 0 to 1 to 2 to 3 to 4 to 5 to 6, the background color of the state presentation changes from white to blue to yellow to green to red to gold to rainbow. In other words, by stopping the "black BAR" symbols in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, the background color of the state presentation indicating the special RT state changes, and it is understood that the special RT state will transition to an advantageous state after the special RT state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player believe that the transition to an advantageous state has occurred because the "black BAR" symbols have stopped in the middle during the special RT state, and the playability during the special RT state is significantly improved.

Returning to the explanation of the special RT command reception process (FIG. 120), if a negative judgment is made in step S5403, in step S5406, it is judged whether or not the currently received command was a special RT command with a challenge mode. If it is a special RT command with a challenge mode, in step S5407, a process is performed to set notification scenario C from the notification scenario table as the presentation pattern during the current special RT state. After that, in step S5408, in the current presentation pattern, the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter is set to 4, and then this special RT command reception process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5406, in step S5409, it is judged whether or not the currently received command was a special RT command. If it was a special RT command, in step S5410, a process is performed to set notification scenario D as the presentation pattern during the current special RT state from the notification scenario table. Then, in step S5411, in the current presentation pattern, the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter is set to 3, and then this special RT command reception process is terminated.

If the determination in step S5409 is negative, it means that the command received this time is a fake special RT command. As already explained, the fake special RT command is a command output from the main control device 101 when a specific role that is not a duplicate role with the first BB or second BB is won, and when the specific role does not trigger a transition to any of the challenge mode, attack mode, or super attack mode. When the fake special RT command is output/received, the state transitions to a special RT state that continues until the transition result stops. Note that, as explained in the second embodiment above, when the transition result stops and the special RT state ends, the state returns to the normal game state or the first RT state.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5409, then in step S5412, a notification scenario lottery process is executed. In the notification scenario lottery process, it is determined by lottery from the notification scenario table which of notification scenarios E to G will be set as the presentation pattern during the current special RT state. Notification scenarios E to G are set so that the winning probability of the push order notification presentation lottery differs depending on the value of the black BAR stop counter. For example, when the value of the black BAR stop counter is 0, the winning probability of the push order notification presentation lottery is 80% for notification scenario E, 60% for notification scenario F, and 50% for notification scenario G. The winning probability of setting any of notification scenarios E to G differs depending on the type of specific role that triggered the fake special RT command. For example, notification scenario E has a high probability of winning when a fake special RT command is output/received in response to a strong cherry or strong watermelon as a specific role, notification scenario F has a high probability of winning when a fake special RT command is output/received in response to a weak cherry or weak watermelon as a specific role, and notification scenario G has a high probability of winning when a fake special RT command is output/received in response to other specific roles.

After the notification scenario lottery process is performed in step S5412, the notification scenario is set according to the lottery result in step S5413. Then, in step S5414, the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter is set to 2 for the current performance pattern, and the special RT command reception process is terminated.

Next, the special RT notification process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 122. As already explained, the special RT notification process is a process that is performed in step S4515 of the push order notification process (FIG. 97) in the display control device 81 when a special replay is won.

In step S5501, a process is performed to ascertain the notification scenario set in the special RT command reception process. Then, in step S5502, a process is performed to ascertain the current value of the black BAR stop counter. In the following step S5503, a process is performed to ascertain the type of special replay for the current game. In other words, it is determined whether it is one of special replays 6 to 11.

In step S5504, it is determined whether or not there is a vacancy in the black BAR stop counter based on the upper limit value set in the special RT command reception process and the current special replay. That is, for example, if the current black BAR stop counter value is 2 and the upper limit value is set to 3 (when the notification scenario D is set), and the current special replay is special replay 6 or special replay 7 in which only one "black BAR" symbol can stop in the middle row, more specifically, if a "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row of any of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the current game, and there is no contradiction in relation to the notification content (content of the state after the special RT state), it is determined that there is a vacancy in the value of the black BAR stop counter. On the other hand, even if the current value of the black BAR stop counter is 2 and the upper limit is set to 3 (when the notification scenario D is set), if the special replay this time is special replay 8 to special replay 11 in which two or more "black BAR" symbols can stop in the middle, more specifically, if a "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in this game, and there is a contradiction in relation to the notification content (content of the state after the special RT state), it is determined that there is no space in the black BAR stop counter. Also, even if the current value of the black BAR stop counter is 2, if the upper limit is set to 2 (when the notification scenario E to notification scenario G are set), it is determined that there is no space in the black BAR stop counter regardless of the type of special replay.

If it is determined in step S5504 that the black BAR stop counter has a vacancy, then in step S5505, a notification lottery process is executed. Specifically, the winning probability of the notification lottery is determined from the current notification scenario and the black BAR stop counter, and a push order notification performance lottery is performed using a lottery counter or the like. Then, in step S5506, the result of the lottery process in step S5505 is determined, and if it is determined to be a winning result, in step S5507, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that a push order notification performance for the black BAR stop is performed as the current push order notification performance. Specifically, for example, if the current special replay is special replay 6, then the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify any of the push orders of the first stop order, the third stop order, and the fifth stop order, as shown in FIG. 119. Also, for example, if the current special replay is special replay 11, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify the second stop order, the fourth stop order, or the sixth stop order, as shown in FIG. 119. The push order to be notified may be determined randomly by lottery or the like. Then, in step S5508, a notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a, and the special RT notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S5504 that there is no free space in the black BAR stop counter, or if it is determined in step S5506 that there is a free space but the notification lottery did not result in a win, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled in step S5509 so that the push order notification effect for the black BAR not stopping is performed as the current push order notification effect. Specifically, for example, if the current special replay is special replay 6, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify any one of the second stop order, the fourth stop order, and the sixth stop order, as shown in FIG. 119. Also, for example, if the current special replay is special replay 11, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify any one of the first stop order, the third stop order, and the fifth stop order, as shown in FIG. 119. It is preferable to randomly determine which push order to notify by lottery or the like. Thereafter, the notification process for the special RT is terminated.

Next, the special replay winning process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 when a special replay is won will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 123. Note that the special replay winning process is executed as one process of the full stop time effect setting process (step S1710) in the effect setting process (FIG. 42).

First, in step S5601, it is determined whether or not a "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the stop results of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. If it is stopped, it is determined in step S5602 whether or not the notification flag is set. If the notification flag is set and the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle, the process proceeds to step S5603, and the number of "black BAR" symbols stopped in the middle is determined. Then, in step S5604, a process is performed to add the number determined in step S5603 to the black BAR stop counter. For example, if one "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle, the black BAR stop counter is incremented by 1, and if three "black BAR" symbols are stopped in the middle, resulting in a black BAR line in the middle, the black BAR stop counter is incremented by 3.

In the next step S5605, the addition notification effect is set. Specifically, the background color of the state effect for the special RT state is changed to correspond to the value of the black BAR stop counter after the addition. Then, in the next step S5606, the notification flag is cleared, and the special replay winning process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S5601 that the "black BAR" symbol is not stopped in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, or if it is determined in step S5602 that the "black BAR" symbol is stopped but the notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S5606, where the notification flag is cleared, and the special replay winning process is terminated. Note that in step S5606, if the notification flag is not set, that state is maintained.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When the first or second BB is won, the system transitions to the special RT state, and when a special replay is won during the special RT state, the push order notification effect suggests whether or not the first or second BB has been won. In this way, the result of one win (special replay) in the special RT state can be used to vary the stop results, and the above-mentioned suggestion effect using the stop results can be realized.

Here, by providing multiple stop results for one result and configuring which stop results are to appear depending on the stop order, it is possible to realize an effect that utilizes the stop results without complicating the lottery results. On the other hand, in a special RT state in which the first BB or second BB is carried over, the execution of the transition lottery for the advantageous zone is restricted. Therefore, if a push order notification is made for a game result in which the degree of advantage may differ depending on the stop order, such as a push order bell or push order replay, during the carryover state, it may be a configuration that goes against the purpose of restricting the execution of the transition lottery for the advantageous zone. In other words, if a push order notification is made in such a carryover state, push order notifications may be made unlimitedly by intentionally delaying the bonus winning. In this regard, according to the above embodiment, a push order notification effect during a special replay is configured to be performed as a push order notification effect that does not change the degree of advantage for the player, making it possible to realize an effect that utilizes the difference in the stop results within the scope that does not go against the purpose of restricting the execution of the transition lottery during the carryover state.

The suggestive effects that utilize the numbers that stop are determined by the cumulative number of times the "black BAR" symbol stops. This makes it difficult to judge the suggestive content from a suggestion in one game; in other words, the suggestive content can be predicted from suggestions that span multiple games, allowing the suggestive effects to be enjoyed for a longer period of time.

In this case, by setting a stopping sequence that results in no "black BAR" symbols stopping in the middle row in various special replays, it becomes possible to generate the push order notification effect (generating a push order notification effect with 0 symbols stopping) even if the cumulative number of stops has already reached the upper limit of the suggested content, making it possible to eliminate the feeling of a rigged race due to no effects being performed.

By configuring the notification effect when a special replay is won in the special RT state to be executed according to the notification scenario that is set when the special RT state is entered, suggestion effects that can be executed across multiple games as described above can be easily implemented without using a configuration in which the suggestion effect is executed while being consistent with the previous suggestion content when a special replay is won.

When a special replay is won, even if the push order notification effect happens to match the stop order corresponding to the black BAR stop in a situation where the push order notification effect has not occurred, the black BAR stop counter is not counted up or the count time notification effect is not performed. Also, when a special replay is won, even if the push order notification effect occurs, if the player fails to press the "black BAR" symbol, the 16th replay or 17th replay in which the black BAR symbol does not stop will be won. In this case, the black BAR stop counter is not counted up, the count time notification effect is not performed, and the background color does not change. By doing this, during the special RT state, the player is first made to feel a sense of expectation that the push order notification effect will occur, and when the push order notification effect occurs, the player is made to feel a sense of expectation that it is a push order notification effect corresponding to the black BAR stop. Moreover, to change the background color, it is not enough to simply match the push order; the player must aim for the "black BAR" symbol and perform the stop operation, and the performance change that leads to increased anticipation after the special RT state is closely related to the player's operation. This makes it possible for the player to feel as if they have changed the anticipation after the special RT state through their own skill in performing the stop operation, making the game operation even more interesting.

Fourth Embodiment
In this embodiment, we will provide a detailed explanation of the configuration regarding the addition of the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone and the upper limit number of games (1,500) in the advantageous zone.

First, the first specific role processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 124. As already described, the first specific role processing is a process that is mainly performed when the game lottery results in a specific role when the display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode.

The change in this embodiment is that, whereas in each of the above embodiments, the challenge mode lottery process (step S813) was carried out regardless of whether the player was in challenge mode or not, and if the player won the challenge mode again while in challenge mode, the number of games in that challenge mode was increased, this embodiment differs in that the mode transition lottery or the increase lottery is carried out depending on whether the player is in challenge mode or not.

That is, the processing related to the lottery for transition to attack mode in steps S6001 to S6012 is the same as the processing in steps S801 to S812 above. If a negative judgment is made in step S6005, and it is determined that the attack mode has not been selected, the process proceeds to step S6013. In step S6013, it is determined whether or not the game is in challenge mode. If the game is not in challenge mode, challenge mode lottery processing is executed in step S6014. The processing in step S6014 is a lottery for transitioning whether or not to transition the display mode from normal mode to challenge mode, and is a lottery for transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone.

In step S6015, it is determined whether or not a winning combination has been selected in the lottery process in step S6014. If a winning combination has not been selected, the first specific combination process is terminated. If a winning combination has been selected, the process proceeds to step S6016, where the challenge mode winning flag is set. The process in steps S6016 to S6020 is the same as the process in steps S816 to S820 described above.

If it is determined in step S6013 that the player is in challenge mode, then in this embodiment, as described above, a lottery process for adding the number of games in challenge mode is executed in step S6021. In step S6022, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S6021 has been won, i.e., whether or not an addition to the number of games in challenge mode will occur. If an addition will occur, the process proceeds to step S6023, where it is determined whether or not the current special role is a role that overlaps with a bonus. The processes in steps S6023 to S6027 are the same as the processes in steps S821 to S825 above. If it is determined in step S6022 that no addition will occur, the first special role process is terminated as is.

Next, the second section display process in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 125.

The change in this embodiment is that after the addition process of the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is performed, a process is performed to grasp and manage the remaining number of games that can be added in relation to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone (remaining game number management process, step S6103).

In other words, in step S6101, it is determined whether the interval display is being displayed, similar to step S2801, and if it is being displayed, in step S6102, an addition process for the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is executed, similar to step S2802. Then, in step S6103, a remaining game number management process is executed. The processes in steps S6104 to S6111 are the same as the processes in steps S2803 to S2810 described above.

Additional explanation on the data initialization process in step S6107.

As already explained, by carrying out this initialization process, various counters and flags used during the advantageous period are cleared. For example, even if the number of continuations in challenge mode or attack mode remains, it is forcibly set to 0, and flags for switching to display modes (flags for notifying the push order), such as the attack notification flag and attack mode flag, are also cleared, so attack mode, etc. will be forcibly terminated.

In this case, since the attack mode continuation count is forcibly set to 0 as described above, in the game count management process (FIG. 40), for example, an attack mode end command is output to the display control device 81 based on the attack mode continuation count becoming 0 (positive determination in step S1414). In addition, in the case of forced termination during VB mode or specialized zone, a VB mode end command is output based on the VB mode continuation count being forcibly set to 0, or a specialized zone end command is output based on the specialized zone continuation count being forcibly set to 0. However, in the display control device 81, if these various end commands are received in duplicate, the process based on the reception of the attack mode end command (processing to perform the attack mode end presentation) is configured to be performed with priority. As a result, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 to perform the attack mode end presentation based on the reception of the attack mode end command (step S2306).

As described above, even when the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated, the display effect for normal mode is not suddenly displayed, but an attack mode end effect or the like is displayed, which makes it possible to prevent the player from mistaking that a malfunction of the gaming machine has occurred. Note that when a forced termination is performed, a different effect from the normal attack mode end effect may be set, making it possible to more clearly understand that a forced termination has occurred. Also, if the player is in VB mode or the like when a forced termination is performed, the main control device 101 may be configured to output only the attack mode end command without outputting a VB mode end command or the like.

<Remaining game number management process>
The remaining game number management process will be described with reference to Fig. 126. In the remaining game number management process, the remaining number of continuing games in various modes scheduled to be played in the advantageous zone is grasped, and the number of free games that can be added (the remaining number of games) is calculated from the total number of remaining continuing games and the number of games in the advantageous zone that have already been played.

That is, in step S6201, the premonition game number G1 is grasped. The premonition game number G1 represents the number of remaining premonition mode games, for example, when the current situation is a premonition mode in an advantageous zone, and is subtracted by one for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). In step S6202, the challenge mode continuation number G2 is grasped. The challenge mode continuation number G2 represents the number of remaining challenge mode games, for example, when the current situation is a challenge mode in an advantageous zone, and is subtracted by one for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). In step S6203, the attack mode continuation number G3 is grasped. The attack mode continuation number G3 represents the number of remaining attack mode games, for example, when the current situation is an attack mode in an advantageous zone, and is subtracted by one for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). In step S6204, the VB mode continuation number G4 is grasped. The VB mode continuation number G4 represents the number of remaining VB mode games, for example, when the current state is a VB mode in an advantageous zone, and is deducted by one for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). In step S6205, the specialized zone continuation number G5 is grasped. The specialized zone continuation number G5 represents the number of remaining specialized zone games, for example, when the current state is a specialized zone in an advantageous zone, and is deducted by one for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). In step S6206, the BB remaining game number G6 is grasped. The BB remaining game number G6 represents the number of remaining BB mode games, for example, when the current state is a BB mode (bonus state) in an advantageous zone, and is deducted by one for each time the game number management process (FIG. 40) is started, by a deducting process (not shown) on the condition that the mode is BB mode.

Here, these continuation numbers G1 to G6 may have values of 0 or more input even if the current state is not the corresponding mode or zone. Specifically, for example, if the lottery to switch to VB mode is won but the mode has not yet switched to VB mode, the current mode is attack mode and the VB mode continuation number G4 remains set to "60", which is the initial value of the number of continued games in VB mode. Also, if the lottery to switch to super attack mode is won during challenge mode but the mode has not yet switched to super attack mode, the current mode is challenge mode, the specialized zone continuation number G5 remains set to "5", which is the initial value of the number of continued games in the specialized zone, and the attack mode continuation number G3 remains set to "50", which is the initial value of the number of continued games in attack mode.

In step S6207, the remaining number of games in the advantageous zone ZG is calculated by accumulating G1 to G6 determined in each of the processes in steps S6201 to S6206. By performing this process, it is possible to determine how many more games the advantageous zone will continue. In the following step S6208, the total number of advantageous zone games SG is calculated by adding the number of games in the advantageous zone that have been played so far (number of advantageous zone games AG) and the remaining number of games ZG. Then, in step S6209, the total number of advantageous zone games SG is subtracted from 1500G, which is the upper limit number of games that the advantageous zone can continue, to calculate the number of free games (number of free games that can be added, number of remaining games) FG.

After processing step S6209, in step S6210, it is determined whether the number of available games FG is greater than 0, i.e., whether there is an available number of games and it is possible to add more. If the number of available games FG is greater than 0, the remaining game number management process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of available games FG is 0 or less, in step S6211, a process is executed to set an excess flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and then the remaining game number management process is terminated. The excess flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to understand that the number of continued games in the advantageous zone cannot be added, or more specifically, that even if the number of games is added, the added number of games will not be played due to a forced termination at 1500 games.

For example, as shown in FIG. 127(a), when the favorable zone starts in game ta1 by setting the challenge mode winning flag, the measurement of the favorable zone game number AG starts from that game. After that, even if the favorable zone continues while repeating mode transitions such as challenge mode from ta1 to ta2, attack mode from ta2 to ta3, VB mode from ta3 to ta4, and attack mode from ta4 to ta5, the number of games from ta1 to ta5 is grasped by the favorable zone game number AG. In addition, at the time of ta5, the remaining number of continuing attack modes, etc. is grasped by the favorable zone remaining game number ZG (accumulation of G1 to G6), and it is determined that the favorable zone will continue until ta6 at the time of ta5. In FIG. 127(a), ta6 is the game before ta7, which is 1500 games from ta1, and ta6 to ta7 corresponds to the number of free games FG that can be added at the time of ta5. In other words, in Figure 127 (a), the excess flag is not set.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 127(b), suppose that the favorable zone that started at tb1 continues through the challenge mode from tb1 to tb2, the attack mode from tb2 to tb3 and tb4 to tb5, the VB mode from tb3 to tb4 and tb5 to tb6, and the attack mode continues until tb7. In this case, the favorable zone game count AG is the number of games from tb1 to tb7, and when the favorable zone remaining game count ZG at the time of tb7 is added to the favorable zone game count AG, it exceeds 1500. In other words, the favorable zone is forcibly terminated at the time of tb8 without using up all of the favorable zone remaining game count ZG at the time of tb7. In this case, the excess flag is set.

In a situation where the excess flag is set as described above, that is, in a game where the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone is ZG from tb7 to tb8, even if a specific combination is won and an opportunity to add to the attack mode occurs, the game will still end at tb8, so the game from tb7 to tb8 may become a so-called wasted game, which may significantly reduce the player's interest in the game.

Also, FIG. 127(c) shows an example of a case where a large number of games is added in the specialized zone. For example, suppose that the Super Attack mode is won in the challenge mode starting from tc1, and the specialized zone is implemented from tc2 to tc3. Suppose that a large number of continued games in the attack mode is added in the specialized zone, and even when the attack mode starting from tc3 is consumed up to tc4, a large number of games ZG still remain in the advantageous zone. If the number of games ZG remaining in the advantageous zone at the time of tc4 exceeds 1500 when added to the number of games AG in the advantageous zone from tc1 to tc4, all of the large number of games ZG remaining in the advantageous zone at the time of tc4 becomes consumed games as described above. In that case, not only will interest in the game be greatly reduced, but even though a large amount of added-on has been generated, it may be a factor that leads to a decrease in attention, so there may be a concern that interest in the occurrence of the added-on will also decrease. Furthermore, the more advantageous zones that can result in such games being played, the higher the chances that an additional bonus opportunity will occur in that game, and the more frequently additional bonus opportunities may occur, increasing the likelihood that players will be disappointed by the occurrence of meaningless additional bonus opportunities.

Therefore, in this embodiment, measures have been taken to prevent players from being disappointed in situations where the number of available games FG is 0 or less and adding more games would be meaningless. Below, we will first explain the processing when the number of available games FG is greater than 0, i.e., when the opportunity to add more games is not meaningless, and then explain the processing when the number of available games FG is 0 or less.

<When the number of available games FG is greater than 0>
FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing the game number addition lottery process in the challenge mode or the attack mode. For example, the game number addition lottery process in the challenge mode is carried out in step S6021 of the first specific combination process (FIG. 124). Also, the game number addition lottery process in the attack mode is carried out in step S914 (FIG. 33) in the second specific combination process or in step S1001 (FIG. 34) in the third specific combination process. Since the process configuration of the game number addition lottery process in either case is basically the same, the following will collectively explain the case where it is carried out during the challenge mode or the case where it is carried out during the attack mode.

In step S6301, it is determined whether the above-mentioned excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set and the number of available games FG is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S6302, where a process is performed to determine the type of the current specific role. Then, in step S6303, a process is performed to obtain an additional lottery table, and then in step S6304, an additional lottery is executed, and the number of games additional lottery process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 129, the add-on lottery table is set so that the rate of winning the add-on varies depending on the type of special role and the mode when the special role is won (the mode in which the add-on is applicable).

In the challenge mode game number addition lottery, for example, there is a 15% chance of winning the addition with a strong cherry and a 5% chance of winning with a weak watermelon. It is also possible to win an addition with a combination of 1st BB, with 1 strong cherry overlap giving a 5% chance of winning an addition, and 1 weak watermelon overlap giving a 15% chance. In other words, even with the same strong cherry or weak watermelon, the chance of winning an addition differs depending on whether or not it overlaps with the 1st BB, and there is a mixture of combinations where the chance of winning an addition is higher or lower when there is an overlap.

In the Attack Mode game number addition lottery that takes place during Attack Mode or VB Mode, for example, a strong cherry has a 15% chance of winning the addition, and a weak watermelon has a 5% chance of winning the addition. On the other hand, a strong cherry overlap of 1 or a weak watermelon overlap of 1 has a 100% chance of winning the addition, and if there is an overlap with the 1st BB, there is a high chance (100% chance for both) of the attack mode game number being added.

The attack mode game number addition lottery held during the specialized zone is set to have a high probability (100% probability) of winning the addition regardless of the type of specific role, and is also set to have the addition win by various push order replays and various push order bells other than the specific role. Therefore, the flowchart for the specialized zone processing (Figure 42) shows a processing configuration that omits the game number addition lottery processing.

If an additional win is obtained through the game number addition lottery process of FIG. 128, a positive judgment is made in the judgment process (step S6022, step S915, step S1002) performed after the game number addition lottery process, and the additional game number lottery process (step S6024, step S917, step S1004) is performed. The additional game number lottery process may also be performed at the end of the bonus (FIG. 41, step S1512, step S1516) or during a specialized zone (FIG. 42, step S1602), and the process in this case has the same processing configuration. Therefore, the additional game number lottery process will be explained together with reference to FIG. 130.

In step S6401, it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set. In this case (when an additional win is made), the excess flag is not set, so a negative determination is made and the process proceeds to step S6402. In step S6402, a process is performed to determine the type of specific role. Then, in step S6403, a process is performed to obtain the additional game number lottery table, and then in step S6404, a game number lottery is executed, and the additional game number lottery process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 131, the additional game number lottery table is set so that the number of additional games varies depending on the type of special role and the mode when the special role is won (the mode that is eligible for the additional role).

In the challenge mode, for example, a strong cherry will add anywhere between 2 and 20 games, with the average being 15 games. A weak watermelon will add anywhere between 5 and 15 games, with the average being 6 games. Depending on the type of specific combination, not only the average number of games added, but also the range of added games can vary.

In the Attack Mode or VB Mode, during the Attack Mode or VB Mode lottery, for example, a strong cherry will add anywhere between 20 and 200 games, with an average of 30 games, and a greater number of games may be added in Challenge Mode. Also, a weak watermelon will add anywhere between 50 and 150 games, with an average of 60 games, and for any specific combination, the average number of games added and its range are set to be greater than the number of games added in Challenge Mode.

In the lottery for the number of added games in attack mode that occurs during the specialized zone, for example, a strong cherry will add anywhere between 20 and 200 games, and although the range is the same as when it occurs during attack mode, the average is 50 games, and it is possible to add a greater number of games than when it occurs during attack mode. Similarly, a weak watermelon will add anywhere between 50 and 150 games, and although the range is the same as when it occurs during attack mode, the average is 70 games, and it is set so that for any specific role, a greater number of games than when it occurs during attack mode is more likely to be selected.

After the process for selecting the number of games to be added is executed, the process for adding the number of games is performed in steps S6025, S918, S1005, S1513, S1517, S1603, etc. Since the process configuration is the same for each of the processes for adding the number of games, they will be explained together below with reference to FIG. 132.

In step S6501, it is determined whether the excess flag is set. Since the excess flag is not set this time, a negative determination is made and the process proceeds to step S6502. In step S6502, a process is performed to determine the number of added games based on the processing result of the above-mentioned additional game number lottery process. After that, in step S6503, a process is performed to add the additional game number to the target number of continued games, and then this game number adding process is terminated.

As a result of the above, the number of continuing games in challenge mode or attack mode is increased. As already explained, when an increase occurs, an increase effect is generated by the auxiliary display unit 65. The player then understands that it is now possible to implement an advantageous zone by adding the number of games notified by the increase effect.

<When the number of available games FG is 0 or less>
Next, the process when the number of available games FG is 0 or less and the excess flag is set will be described.

Because the excess flag is set, in the game number addition lottery process in FIG. 128, a positive judgment is made in step S6301, and the process proceeds to step S6305 instead of the process for the addition lottery in step S6302. In other words, even if a specific role that triggers an addition is won when the excess flag is set, the execution of the process for the addition lottery is restricted, and the process for the addition lottery is not executed.

In step S6305, a process is performed to determine the type of the current special role. Then, in step S6306, a process is performed to obtain a first special notification lottery table from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and then in step S6307, a first special notification lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute the first special notification.

As shown in FIG. 133, the first special notification selection table is set so that the probability of executing the first special notification differs depending on the type of special role and the mode when the special role is won. In other words, the first special notification selection table corresponds to an additional selection table, and the process of determining whether or not an excess flag is present when a special role is won can be said to be a process of changing the selection table to be referenced between the additional selection table and the first special notification selection table.

In this embodiment, the first special notification is a notification that presents information that may be useful to the player, and more specifically, a notification that suggests the setting value that is set in the slot machine 10. In other words, when the excess flag is set, a lottery is not held to add to the number of games in the advantageous zone when a specific role is won, and instead, a lottery is held to see whether or not to execute the first special notification as a setting value suggestion effect.

Specifically, regarding the first special notification lottery table, the winning probability for each specific role is set so that the first special notification lottery during attack mode or VB mode and the first special notification lottery during the specialized zone have a higher probability of winning the first special notification lottery during the specialized zone. For example, for a strong cherry that is not a duplicate role with the first BB, there is a 15% probability of winning the first special notification lottery during attack mode or VB mode, but a 100% probability of winning the first special notification lottery during the specialized zone. Also, for a weak watermelon that is not a duplicate role with the first BB, there is a 5% probability of winning the first special notification lottery during attack mode or VB mode, but a 100% probability of winning the first special notification lottery during the specialized zone.

As already explained, it is easier to win the add-on lottery in the specialized zone than in attack mode or VB mode, and it is expected that a larger number of games will be added if you win the add-on lottery in the specialized zone than if you win the add-on lottery in attack mode or VB mode. In the first special notification lottery table, the probability of winning the first special notification lottery is set in accordance with the difference in the probability of winning the add-on lottery and the expected number of games to be added when won, and the more the first special notification lottery is executed in place of a lottery that is easier to win the add-on lottery, or the more the first special notification lottery is executed in place of an add-on lottery that is expected to add a larger number of games, the more likely it is that information that may be useful to the player as the first special notification, i.e., a suggestion of the setting value, will be presented.

In the first special notification lottery process during the challenge mode, a specific role such as a strong cherry or a weak cherry that is not overlapping with the first BB is set to win the first special notification lottery with a high probability (100% probability). Therefore, during the challenge mode, if a specific role is won when the excess flag is set, a setting value suggestion occurs with a high probability (100% probability). On the other hand, with a strong cherry overlap 1 or a weak cherry overlap 1 that is overlapping with the first BB, the first special notification lottery is set to win with a lower probability (30% probability) than in the case of non-overlapping. Therefore, during the challenge mode, if a stop result that wins a strong cherry or the like appears as a specific role when the excess flag is set, a setting value suggestion effect occurs with a high probability if it is not overlapping with the first BB, and a setting value suggestion effect occurs with a lower probability if it is overlapping with the first BB.

In the first special notification lottery process during attack mode or VB mode, a specific role such as a strong cherry or weak cherry that is not overlapped with the first BB is set to win the first special notification lottery with a high probability (100% probability). Therefore, when a specific role is won in these modes when the excess flag is set, a setting value suggestion occurs with a high probability (100% probability). On the other hand, a strong cherry overlap 1 or weak cherry overlap 1 that is an overlap with the first BB is set to win the first special notification lottery with a lower probability (30% probability) than when it is not overlapped. Therefore, when a stop result that wins a strong cherry or the like appears as a specific role in these modes when the excess flag is set, a setting value suggestion effect occurs with a high probability if it is not overlapped with the first BB, and a setting value suggestion effect occurs with a lower probability if it is overlapped with the first BB.

Here, in this slot machine 10, once the challenge mode is switched to the attack mode or the like, the slot machine 10 is configured not to return to the challenge mode even if the attack mode is terminated (FIG. 30). Therefore, during the challenge mode in a situation where the excess flag is set, it is considered that the challenge mode does not win the lottery for switching to the attack mode or the like, and as a result of endlessly repeating the addition and bonus winning, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone is reached, which is a situation that can be said to occur almost never in reality. However, if such a situation does occur, it is a case where the lottery for switching to the attack mode or the like is endlessly missed, so in order to relieve the player of the trouble, the slot machine 10 is configured to generate the first special notification with a high probability. The reason why the occurrence rate of the first special notification is lower when there is an overlap with the first BB is to ensure a balance with the fact that the player can at least receive the benefit of winning the first BB when there is an overlap with the first BB.

In comparison with the top-up lottery, if we focus on whether or not there is an overlap with the first BB, for example, in the top-up lottery, during attack mode or VB mode, a weak cherry that is not an overlap with the first BB has a 10% chance of winning, while a weak cherry overlap 1 that is an overlap with the first BB has a 100% chance of winning, and an overlap with the first BB has a 10 times higher chance of winning the top-up lottery. On the other hand, in the first special notification lottery, during attack mode or VB mode, a weak cherry that is not an overlap with the first BB has a 10% chance of winning, while a weak cherry overlap 1 that is an overlap with the first BB has a 30% chance of winning, and although the overlap with the first BB has a higher chance of winning the first special notification lottery, the ratio is lower than that of the top-up lottery.

In addition, in the additional lottery in the specialized zone, both weak cherries that are not overlapping with the 1st BB and weak cherry overlaps that are overlapping with the 1st BB have a 100% chance of winning. On the other hand, in the first special notification lottery in the specialized zone, weak cherries that are not overlapping with the 1st BB have a 100% chance of winning, while weak cherry overlap 1, which is an overlapping with the 1st BB, has a 30% chance of winning, making the overlapping with the 1st BB a lower chance of winning.

In other words, in the top-up lottery, those who overlap with the first BB have a higher chance of winning the top-up lottery, and in the first special notification lottery, the chance of those who overlap with the first BB winning the first special notification lottery is set to be lower than the chance in the case of the top-up lottery. In other words, when a stop result that results in a specific winning combination appears and a top-up lottery is held, those who overlap with the first BB can be expected to win the top-up lottery, but when a top-up lottery is not held and the first special notification lottery is held, even if there is an overlap with the first BB, there is less hope of winning the notification lottery than there is in the top-up lottery.

When the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit number of games and the forced termination process of the advantageous zone (steps S6105 to S6107) is performed, various counters and flags related to the display mode and push order notification are initialized, while information about the game state (for example, the RT setting flag and the bonus winning flag) is not initialized and is retained. In other words, if the game in which the forced termination process is performed is in a bonus state or in a carryover state in which the bonus winning flag is set, the bonus state or carryover state is not erased and is retained. As already explained, in the bonus state, regardless of whether or not there is a push order notification, there is a high probability of winning bonus small/medium role 1 to bonus small/medium role 3, and an increase in medals can be expected. In other words, if the forced termination process is performed during the bonus state, the game will not return to attack mode, etc. after the bonus ends, but there is no effect on the expected medal acquisition value during the bonus state.

In that case, if the excess flag is set and a combination that overlaps with the first BB is won, no additional draw will be held, but since it is possible to enjoy at least the benefit of winning the first BB, this is a more favorable result for the player than if the combination does not overlap with the first BB. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the combination overlaps with the first BB, the probability of winning the first special notification draw is set low to ensure a balance with the benefit of winning the first BB.

After the first special notification lottery is executed in step S6307, a determination is made in step S6308 as to whether or not the first special notification lottery has been won. If the notification lottery has been won, a process is performed in step S6309 to set a command for executing the first special notification as an output target to the display control device 81, and if the notification lottery has not been won, a process is performed in step S6310 to set a command for not executing the first special notification as an output target to the display control device 81. The command for executing the first special notification is a command for making the display control device 81 know that the first special notification lottery has been executed and that the notification lottery has been won, and the command for not executing the first special notification is a command for making the display control device 81 know that the first special notification lottery has been executed and that the notification lottery has not been won. After the process in step S6309 or step S6310 is executed, this game number addition lottery process is terminated.

Here, in the game number addition lottery process, if the excess flag is set and the various processes for the first special notification are performed, the subsequent process for determining whether or not an additional win has been made (step S6022, step S915, step S1002, etc.) is configured to make a positive judgment. More specifically, in the process for determining whether or not an additional win has been made, a positive judgment is made if the additional lottery is won and if the excess flag is set.

If the excess flag is set, step S6401 of the add-on game number lottery process in FIG. 130 will be judged as positive, and the add-on game number lottery process will be terminated without drawing a lottery for the number of added games, etc. Also, in the game number add-on process in FIG. 132, step S6501 will be judged as positive, and the game number add-on process will be terminated without performing an addition process for the number of games, etc. In other words, if the number of available games FG is 0 or less and the excess flag is set, no processing is actually performed in the add-on game number lottery process or the game number add-on process.

On the other hand, in the process of setting the add-on command (step S6026, step S919, step S1006, step S1514, step S1518, step S1604), which is performed after the process of selecting the number of games to be added and the process of adding the number of games, which do not perform any substantial processing, the process of setting the add-on command is performed regardless of whether the excess flag is set or not. By doing this, even if the excess flag is set, a positive judgment is made in step S1906 of the start-time performance setting process (Figure 45) on the display control device 81 side, and the process of setting the add-on performance is started.

<Setting process for added effects>
Next, the processing of the display control device 81 when the first special notification execution command or the first special notification non-execution command is received will be described with reference to Fig. 134. As already described, the setting processing of the added performance is a processing performed in step S1907 of the start-time performance setting processing (Fig. 45).

In step S6601, it is determined whether or not a command for executing the first special notification or a command for not executing the first special notification has been received. If neither command has been received, it means that the excess flag has not been set in the main control device 101 and only an add-on command has been received. In this case, the process proceeds to step S6602, and a process is performed to determine the number of added games based on the received add-on command. The processes in steps S6602 to S6608 are the same as those in steps S2101 to S2107 above.

In this case, for example, when a specific combination is won during attack mode, a chance notification effect occurs as shown in FIG. 136(a), informing the player that the current game is a game result that will trigger an additional bonus, and encouraging the player to achieve this game result win by pressing the buttons with the right hand. Then, as shown in FIG. 136(b), an additional bonus notification effect corresponding to the current number of additional games occurs, making it possible to grasp that an additional bonus has been added to the number of continuing games in attack mode, etc.

If it is determined in step S6601 that any of the first special notification commands has been received, the process proceeds to step S6609. In step S6609, the first special notification setting process is performed. After the first special notification setting process is performed, the setting process for the additional performance is terminated.

In the first special notification setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 135, in step S6701, it is determined whether the first special notification command received this time is a command to execute the first special notification. If it is not a command to execute the first special notification but a command to not execute the first special notification, the first special notification setting process is terminated as is. In other words, in this embodiment, the command to not execute the first special notification can be said to be a command to make the display control device 81 understand that an opportunity for an additional addition has occurred, and that although the opportunity for an additional addition has occurred, neither an additional performance nor the first special notification will be performed.

If it is determined in step S6701 that the command is for executing the first special notification, the process proceeds to step S6702, where a process is executed to grasp the current setting value. Note that when a process for setting the winning probability is executed in the main process of the main control device 101, a setting value command including information on the corresponding setting value is output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 stores the setting value command in a specified area, making it possible to grasp the current setting value.

In step S6703, a first special notification type selection process is executed. The first special notification type selection process is a process for selecting a type of the first special notification, and is a process for determining by lottery which of the first special notifications, the first special notification A shown in FIG. 137(a) and the first special notification B shown in FIG. 137(b), will be executed. In the first special notification A, for example, an image of a soldier who is the main character is displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65, and more specifically, an image of the soldier holding a weapon is displayed. In addition, in the first special notification A, an image of a winning role corresponding to the type of the current game result is displayed. When the first special notification A is performed, for example, a line such as "I will win and survive!!" is issued from the speaker 64 in a man's rough voice as a sound effect. In the first special notification B, for example, an image of the main character roaring with a weapon in one hand is displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the first special notification B, an image of a winning role corresponding character is displayed. When the first special notification B is made, the sound effect is, for example, a man's roar of "Woohoo!" emitted from the speaker 64. In other words, the player can clearly understand the difference between the first special notification A and the first special notification B by the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect from the speaker 64.

The probability of whether the first special notification A or the first special notification B is selected varies depending on the setting value. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 137(c), if the setting value is "1", the first special notification A is selected with a 100% probability and the first special notification B is not selected. Also, if the setting value is "2", the first special notification A is selected with a 75% probability and the first special notification B is selected with a 25% probability. If the setting value is "3", both the first special notification A and the first special notification B are selected with a 50% probability. If the setting value is "4", the first special notification A is selected with a 25% probability and the first special notification B is selected with a 75% probability. If the setting value is "5" or "6", the first special notification B is selected with a 100% probability and the first special notification A is not selected.

That is, in the first special notification type table of the above example, when the first special notification A is made, the set value is more likely to be low, and when the first special notification B is made, the set value is more likely to be high. More specifically, when the first special notification B is made, it is determined that the set value is "2" or greater, and when the first special notification A is made, it is determined that the set value is "4" or less.

In this way, it is possible to predict the current setting value from the type of first special notification that can be executed when a specific role is won. Also, if the setting value is between "2" and "4", it is possible to narrow down the setting value to one of "2" to "4" from the ratio of first special notifications A and B when the first special notification is generated multiple times.

After the first special notification type lottery process is performed in step S6703, in step S6704, it is determined whether the result of the lottery process is first special notification A or not. If it is first special notification A, in step S6705, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled to execute first special notification A, and the first special notification setting process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in step S6704 that it is not first special notification A, in step S6706, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled to execute first special notification B, and the first special notification setting process is terminated.

Figure 138 shows the difference in the notification content when a specific role is won during the remaining number of games ZG in the advantageous zone in the example of Figure 127.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 138(a), if the number of available games FG is greater than 0, and a specific role is won while the remaining number of games ZG is being played, an add-on lottery is executed. If the add-on lottery is won, a lottery is held for the number of added games, and the corresponding number of games is added, and an add-on notification for the corresponding number of games is generated.

Here, when the number of free games FG is greater than 0, the lottery table for the additional lottery and the lottery table for the number of additional games are configured to use a common table regardless of the value of the number of free games FG. In other words, when the number of free games FG is greater than 0, for example, if you win a strong cherry overlap 1 as a specific role, you will win the additional lottery with a 100% probability (Figure 129). Then, regardless of the value of the number of free games FG, a lottery is held for the number of additional games to be added, from 10G to 200G (average 30G), and an additional game occurs according to the lottery result (Figure 131). Therefore, an additional number of games greater than the number of free games FG can occur; for example, even if the number of free games FG is 5, an additional effect of 200 games can occur for presentation purposes.

In this way, not only is the configuration for the additional lottery simplified, but the following effects can also be expected. That is, assuming that the upper limit of the advantageous zone is stipulated, as the number of free games FG decreases, even if a specific role that triggers the additional lottery is won, there is a high possibility that interest in the number of additional games will decrease. On the other hand, assuming that information useful to the player can be presented by the occurrence of an additional lottery that exceeds the upper limit of the advantageous zone, that is, by the number of free games FG becoming 0 or less, it can be said that the number of free games FG becoming 0 or less is rather preferable in a situation where the number of free games FG is close to 0. Moreover, if the impression that exceeding the upper limit of the advantageous zone is preferable for the player as described above, it is thought that it is easier to expect that an advantageous event will occur if an additional lottery that greatly exceeds the upper limit of the advantageous zone occurs, rather than when the upper limit is just exceeded. Therefore, as described above, by configuring the number of added games to be determined regardless of the value of the number of available games FG if it is greater than 0, it is possible to realize gameplay that makes it seem as if there is an effect on the advantage or disadvantage, using the impression that the player may have, without actually changing the advantage or disadvantage depending on the number of added games when the upper limit is exceeded.

As shown in FIG. 138(b), in a situation where the number of available games FG is 0 or less, if a specific role is won during the remaining number of games ZG, a first special notification may be executed. In this case, since the setting value can be narrowed down depending on the type of first special notification, the winning of the specific role during the game can be viewed as favorable without giving the impression of a loss, and can be used as a motivation to continue playing after the end of the advantageous zone or as a factor in deciding whether or not to continue.

As shown in FIG. 138(c), if the number of available games FG falls to 0 or less early in the advantageous zone due to a large amount of added value occurring in a specialized zone, etc., it may take a long time to consume the remaining number of games ZG. In this regard, the first special notification type table makes it possible to narrow down the setting value by the occurrence of multiple first special notifications, thereby suppressing the occurrence of an event in which the game itself in which the setting value is narrowed down ends early. Therefore, even if it takes a long time to consume the remaining number of games ZG as shown in FIG. 138(c), it is possible to prevent the game from becoming boring.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When the number of free games FG in the advantageous zone is 0 or less and a specific role is won as a role that triggers an addition, instead of adding to the number of games in the advantageous zone, a first special notification can be executed as a setting value suggestion effect. This can provide relief from the possibility that an addition based on a specific role winning will be meaningless, and can prevent a decline in interest in games that can be used up when the number of free games FG is 0 or less.

In particular, when the number of available games FG is 0 or less and a specific role is won, the first special notification can be executed each time the specific role is won during the advantageous zone, without waiting for the forced end of the advantageous zone. This ensures the significance of the lottery results of each game that may be a so-called "consumed game," especially the specific role, and makes it possible to favorably increase attention to the game.

In a configuration in which a set value suggestive performance is performed when a specific role as an additional trigger role is won in a situation in which the number of free games FG in the advantageous zone is 0 or less, as already explained, the probability of winning the specific role as the additional trigger role is the same regardless of the setting value, and the winning probability of the additional lottery when the specific role is won and the number of additional games are also the same regardless of the setting value. In other words, the winning probability of the specific role that triggers the setting value suggestive performance is the same regardless of the setting value, and the chance of the suggestive performance occurring occurs equally regardless of the setting value. Therefore, for example, compared to a configuration in which the occurrence probability of the setting value suggestive performance itself differs depending on the setting value and the occurrence probability is low at a low setting, it is less likely that an event will occur in which even the suggestive performance cannot be enjoyed because of the low setting, and it is possible to provide an equal chance to enjoy the setting value suggestive performance, i.e., the first special notification, regardless of the setting value.

In this case, the higher the probability of winning the additional draw for a specific role, the higher the probability of the set value suggestive effect occurring. This makes it easier for players to understand that suggestive effects will occur in place of adding to the number of games, and makes it easy to predict how likely a suggestive effect is to occur based on the probability of the additional draw. By preparing players mentally for the suggestive effect to occur, it becomes possible to favorably increase attention to the suggestive effect.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, a mode transition lottery in an advantageous zone that occurs when the number of free games FG is 0 or less will be described. Examples of the mode transition lottery in an advantageous zone include an attack mode (super attack mode) transition lottery in a challenge mode, a VB mode transition lottery in an attack mode, and a specialized zone transition lottery in a VB mode. Since winning the transition lottery to the attack mode transition causes a transition to the attack mode with an initial number of games of 50, winning the transition lottery to the attack mode can be said to add 50 games to the advantageous zone. Furthermore, winning the transition lottery to the VB mode causes a transition to the VB mode with an initial number of games of 60, so winning the transition lottery to the VB mode can be said to add 60 games to the advantageous zone. Furthermore, winning the transition lottery to the specialized zone causes a transition to a specialized zone with 5 games, so winning the transition lottery to the specialized zone can be said to add 5 games to the advantageous zone.

In other words, even if each of these mode transition lotteries is won, the number of remaining games ZG in the advantageous zone will be added, and even if the mode transition lottery is won when the number of available games FG is 0 or less, it may be meaningless to the player. Therefore, in this modified example, a special notification can be executed even when such a mode transition lottery is won.

Figure 139 is a flowchart showing the lottery processing for the challenge mode, attack mode, and VB mode in this modified example. The challenge mode lottery processing is processing carried out in step S6014 in the first specific role processing (Figure 124), the attack mode lottery processing is processing carried out in step S6004 in the first specific role processing (Figure 124), and the VB mode lottery processing is processing carried out in step S903 in the second specific role processing (Figure 33). Since all of these processes have roughly the same processing configuration, they will be explained together below.

That is, in these mode selection processes, in step S6801, the type of specific role is identified, and in step S6802, a process is executed to obtain a mode selection table from the various table storage area 105a. Then, in step S6803, a mode transition selection is performed.

As shown in FIG. 141, the mode selection table is set so that the probability of winning each mode transition selection varies depending on the current display mode and the type of specific role that triggers the selection. For example, the probability of winning the transition selection to attack mode during challenge mode is 90% for strong cherries and 30% for weak cherries, with strong cherries being more likely to win the transition selection than weak cherries. On the other hand, the probability of winning the transition selection to attack mode during a similar challenge mode is 30% for strong cherry overlap 1, which is a role that overlaps with the first BB, and 40% for weak cherry overlap 1, with weak cherry overlap 1 being more likely to win the transition selection than strong cherry overlap 1.

The probability of winning the lottery to switch to the VB mode during the attack mode varies depending on the rank of the attack mode. For example, in the lottery to switch to the VB mode based on a strong cherry, if the rank of the attack mode is 1, there is a 15% probability of winning, and if the rank of the attack mode is 4, there is a 60% probability of winning; the higher the rank, the higher the probability of winning the lottery to switch to the VB mode. On the other hand, in the lottery to switch to the VB mode, the probability of winning is set so that each specific role that overlaps with the first BB is unlikely to win (will not win) the lottery. However, the lottery for the additional bonus is set so that it is easier to win in the case of overlap than in the case of non-overlap (Figure 129), so that when a stop result corresponding to a specific role appears, it is possible to play while looking forward to whether you will receive the benefit of the first BB plus additional bonus or the benefit of the VB mode.

In the various mode selection process of FIG. 139, after the mode transition selection is performed in step S6803, it is determined in step S6804 whether or not the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set, the mode selection process ends. On the other hand, if the excess flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6805.

In step S6805, a process is executed to ascertain the type of specific role. Then, in step S6806, a process is executed to obtain a second special notification lottery table, and in step S6807, a second special notification lottery process is executed.

As shown in FIG. 142, the second special notification lottery table is set so that there is a high probability (100% probability) of winning the execution lottery for the second special notification in the second special notification lottery held in place of the lottery for transitioning to attack mode during challenge mode. As already explained, a challenge mode in a situation where the number of available games FG is 0 or less means that the challenge mode continues indefinitely without winning attack mode or the like during the challenge mode, which is a situation that is unlikely to occur in reality. Therefore, if such a situation does arise, the second special notification is generated with a high probability as compensation for the troubles that have been caused up until that point, i.e., as a reward for the troubles.

On the other hand, in the second special notification lottery, which is performed instead of the VB mode transition lottery during the attack mode, the winning probability of the execution lottery for the second special notification is set to be different depending on the type of specific role. As already explained, when a specific role is won in the attack mode situation where the excess flag is set, the execution lottery for the first special notification is performed instead of the additional lottery. In other words, when a specific role is won in the attack mode situation where the excess flag is set, the execution lottery for the second special notification is performed together with the execution lottery for the first special notification. Each mode transition lottery and the additional lottery are processed in a processing system in which the mode transition lottery is performed first, and then the additional lottery is performed, and the execution lottery for the second special notification is performed before the execution lottery for the first special notification. In this modified example, although detailed explanation using figures is omitted, if the execution lottery for the second special notification is won, the execution lottery for the first special notification is not won. In other words, the first special notification and the second special notification are not executed in the same game.

The second special notification lottery, which is executed in place of the transition lottery from attack mode to VB mode, is set to have the same probability of winning as the first special notification lottery (Figure 133). In other words, in this modified example, when a specific role is won during attack mode, a second special notification execution lottery is held, and a first special notification execution lottery is held, and the winning probability is the same for both execution lotteries. Therefore, it is possible to share the lottery table for both execution lotteries, simplifying the configuration.

In this case, the probability of winning is set not to exceed 50% for any of the special roles, and each is set to a winning probability of 30% or less. Therefore, an event in which neither the second special notification execution lottery nor the first special notification execution lottery is won occurs in approximately half (49%) of the cases in which a special role is won. By suppressing the probability of special notifications in this way, it is possible to ensure the rarity of special notifications in a configuration in which both special notifications can be made, and it is possible to appropriately increase the attention that a special notification will attract when it occurs.

After the second special notification lottery is executed in step S6807 in the various mode lottery processing, a determination is made in step S6808 as to whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If the notification lottery has been won, a process is performed in step S6809 to set the second special notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the mode lottery processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6808 that the notification lottery has not been won, the mode lottery processing is terminated as is. The process of the display control device 81 when the second special notification command is received will be described later.

Next, the specialized zone lottery during VB mode will be explained with reference to Figure 140. Figure 140 shows a part of the winning result response process.

As already explained, the VB mode is basically executed in the third RT state, and the lottery process for each game is performed by referring to the lottery table for the third RT state (Figure 25). Then, transition to the specialized zone is based on winning the seventh replay, which has a 5% probability of being won when BAR Replay 1 (IV = 11) is won. In other words, if winning BAR Replay 1 is considered the trigger role for the lottery for transition to the specialized zone, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the specialized zone triggered by BAR Replay 1 is 5%, and the lottery for transition to the specialized zone will not be won as a result of other game results (other specific roles) (Figure 142).

If a negative judgment is made in step S1310 during the winning result response process, a judgment is made in step S6901 as to whether or not a seventh re-play winning has occurred. If a seventh re-play winning has occurred, a judgment is made in step S6902 as to whether or not the VB notification flag is set. In other words, a judgment is made as to whether or not this seventh re-play winning has occurred during VB mode. If the seventh re-play winning has occurred during VB mode, the transition condition to the specialized zone is deemed to have been met, and the process proceeds to step S6903. If a negative judgment is made in step S6901 or step S6902, the transition condition to the specialized zone is deemed not to have been met, and the winning result response process is terminated.

In step S6903, a process is executed to set the specialized zone flag, in step S6904, a process is executed to set the specialized zone start command as an output target to the display control device 81, and in step S6905, counting the number of consecutive specialized zones is started. The processes in steps S6903 to S6905 are the same as those in steps S1318 to S1320.

In the following step S6906, it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set, the winning result response process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the excess flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6907. In step S6907, a process is executed to obtain a second special notification lottery table, and in the following step S6908, a second special notification lottery is executed.

In the second special notification lottery executed in place of the lottery for transition to the specialized zone during VB mode, the winning probability is set in the second special notification lottery table as shown in FIG. 142 so that the second special notification is executed with a 100% probability when the seventh replay is won. Also, in the second special notification lottery executed in place of the specialized zone, the winning probability is set so that the second special notification is not executed for other game results (other specific roles). In other words, the execution conditions for the second special notification are set to be equivalent to the transition conditions for the specialized zone.

After executing the second special notification lottery in step S6908, a determination is made in step S6909 as to whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If the notification lottery has been won, a process is performed in step S6910 to set the second special notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the winning result response process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the notification lottery has not been won, the winning result response process is terminated.

The second special notification setting process of the display control device 81 when the second special notification command is received will be described with reference to FIG. 143. The second special notification setting process is executed as one of the other processes (step S1711) of the performance setting process (FIG. 43) in the display control device 81.

First, in step S7001, it is determined whether or not a second special notification command has been received. If not, the second special notification setting process is terminated. If received, the process proceeds to step S7002, where a process is performed to add 1 to the second special notification counter TH. The second special notification counter TH is a counter for determining the number of times the second special notification has been issued. In the following step S7003, a process is performed to determine the set value. Then, in step S7004, a process is performed to obtain a second special notification type table, and then in step S7005, a process is performed to select a second special notification type.

In the second special notification type table, the type of the second special notification is set to differ depending on the value of the second special notification counter TH and the set value. Specifically, the second special notification includes a second special notification A shown in FIG. 144(a) and a second special notification B shown in FIG. 144(b). For the second special notification A, for example, a snake Habu character is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the sound of a snake sticking out its tongue, "Shaa!", is emitted from the speaker 64 as a sound effect. For the second special notification B, for example, a mongoose character is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the sound effect of a mongoose, "Ukyaa," is emitted from the speaker 64. In other words, the player can clearly understand the difference between the second special notification A and the second special notification B by the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect from the speaker 64.

As shown in FIG. 144(c), the second special notification type table is set so that the second special notification selected differs between setting values 1, 3, 5 and setting values 2, 4, 6. Specifically, if the second special notification counter TH is 1, then for setting values 1, 3, 5, the second special notification A is selected at 60% and the second special notification B is selected at 40%. On the other hand, even if the second special notification counter TH is 1, for setting values 2, 4, 6, the second separate notification A is selected at 40% and the second special notification B is selected at 60%. If the second special notification counter TH is 2 to 5, then for setting values 1, 3, 5, the second special notification A is selected at 80% and the second special notification B is selected at 20%. On the other hand, even if the second special notification counter TH is 2 to 5, for setting values 2, 4, 6, the second separate notification A is selected at 20% and the second special notification B is selected at 80%. If the second special notification counter TH is 6 or more, then for setting values 1, 3, and 5, the second special notification A is selected 100% and the second special notification B is not selected. On the other hand, if the second special notification counter TH is 6 or more, for setting values 2, 4, and 6, the second special notification B is selected 100% and the second special notification A cannot be selected.

In other words, the second special notification allows the setting value to be narrowed down to even/odd depending on the type of notification, and the larger the value of the second special notification counter TH, i.e., the more times the second special notification is executed, the easier it becomes to narrow down the even/odd number.

As already explained, in a configuration in which the execution lottery for the second special notification and the execution lottery for the first special notification may be held in overlapping fashion, if the execution lottery for the second special notification is won, the execution lottery for the first special notification will not be won. In other words, the second special notification is more likely to be executed than the first special notification.

This is due to the differences that the second special notification is a setting value suggestion that can narrow down the setting value to an even/odd number, while the first special notification is a setting value suggestion that can narrow down the high/low setting value, and that the second special notification is a setting value suggestion that can narrow down the setting value by executing it multiple times, while the first special notification is a setting value suggestion that can narrow down the setting value by executing it once. In other words, due to the above differences, the second special notification makes it possible to gradually narrow down the setting value, making it possible to enjoy a game in which the setting value is narrowed down for a long time, and if the second special notification is configured to be executed with priority, it becomes possible to preferably realize the game in which the narrowing down is performed.

After executing the second special notification type lottery process in step S7005, the process proceeds to step S7006, where it is determined whether the result of the type lottery process was second special notification A. If it is second special notification A, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled to perform second special notification A in step S7007, and the second special notification setting process is terminated. If it is not second special notification A, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled to perform second special notification B in step S7008, and the second special notification setting process is terminated.

As described above, even if the number of games is not increased, if the mode transition lottery result is one that does not affect the number of games continued in the advantageous zone, a second special notification can be made as a setting value suggestion, making it possible to compensate for the mode transition lottery being held when the excess flag is set.

When a mode transition lottery is held, the second special notification is executed together with the mode transition lottery, rather than being executed instead of the second special notification in place of the mode transition lottery. This allows for a transition to the VB mode and a transition to the specialized zone when the excess flag is set, for example. In particular, the specialized zone is a zone where it is easy to win the additional lottery, and when the excess flag is set, it can also be said to be a zone where the first special notification is likely to be executed. In other words, by configuring the setting value suggestion to be performed together with the transition lottery, rather than performing the first setting value suggestion in place of the transition lottery, it is possible to allow a transition to a zone where it is easy to perform a setting value suggestion, while providing a setting value suggestion as compensation for the additional number of games (an additional 5 games) that accompanies the transition to the specialized zone.

By making the second special notification a setting value suggestion in which the ease of narrowing down the setting value varies depending on the number of times it is executed, it becomes easier to narrow down the setting value if the excess flag is set early. This provides the enjoyment of a relatively early situation in which the number of available games FG falls to 0 or less.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, a value corresponding to the number of games to be added is stored in a predetermined area based on an addition trigger that occurs when the excess flag is set. First, the changes to the game number addition lottery process and the number of games to be added lottery process will be described with reference to FIG.

In the game number addition lottery process in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 145(a), a process for determining the type of specific role is executed in step S7101, an addition lottery table is obtained in step S7102, an addition lottery is executed in step S7103, and then the game number addition lottery process is terminated. In other words, in this modified example, the addition lottery is executed regardless of the presence or absence of the excess flag.

In addition, in the additional game number lottery process in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 145(b), a process is executed to determine the type of specific role in step S7111, an additional game number lottery table is obtained in step S7112, a game number lottery is executed in step S7113, and then this additional game number lottery process is terminated. In other words, in this modified example, the lottery for the additional game number is executed regardless of whether the excess flag is set or not.

The game number addition process in this modified example will be explained with reference to Figure 146.

First, in step S7201, it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is set, the process of adding the number of added games is performed in steps S7202 and S7203, and then the process of adding the number of games is terminated. These steps S7202 and S7203 are the same processes as steps S6502 and S6503.

If it is determined in step S7201 that the excess flag is set, the process proceeds to step S7204. In step S7204, a process is performed to ascertain the processing result of the lottery process for the number of added games, i.e., a process to ascertain the number of added games. Then, in step S7205, a process is performed to add the number of added games ascertained in step S7204 to the number of eliminated games EG set in the various counter areas 106e. After the process of step S7205 is executed, this process for adding the number of games is terminated.

In other words, in this modified example, even if an opportunity to add on occurs when the number of available games FG in the advantageous zone is 0 or less and the excess flag is set, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to add on, and a lottery is held to determine the number of games to add on if an addition is to be performed.The result of the lottery for the number of games is then added to the separately set number of games to be lost EG, rather than being added to the corresponding number of continuations in the advantageous zone.

Next, the setting process of the add-on command in this modified example will be explained with reference to FIG. 147. The setting process of the add-on command is a process performed in step S6026 of the first specific role processing (FIG. 124), step S919 of the second specific role processing (FIG. 33), step S1006 of the third specific role processing (FIG. 34), step S1514 and step S1518 of the end determination processing (FIG. 41), step S1604 of the specialized zone processing (FIG. 42), etc.

In step S7301, it is determined whether the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set, in step S7302, the target add-on command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the process of setting the add-on command is terminated. In this case, the display control device 81 performs an add-on notification performance.

If it is determined in step S7301 that the excess flag is set, the process proceeds to step S7303, where a process is executed to ascertain the number of games that have disappeared EG. Then, in step S7304, a process is executed to obtain a third special notification lottery table, and in step S7305, a third special notification lottery is executed.

As shown in FIG. 148(a), the third special notification lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the third special notification lottery varies depending on the value of the number of games eliminated EG, and the larger the value of the number of games eliminated EG, the easier it is to win. More specifically, if the number of games eliminated EG is 0, i.e., if there is no additional win in the current number of games additional lottery, the third special notification lottery will not be won. If the number of games eliminated EG is 1 to 50, i.e., if a number of games between 1 and 50 is selected as the current number of additional games, there is a 10% probability of winning the third special notification lottery. If the number of games eliminated EG is 51 to 100, and a number of games between 51 and 100 is selected as the current number of additional games, there is a 30% probability of winning the third special notification lottery. If the number of games eliminated EG is between 101 and 200, and a number between 101 and 200 games is selected as the number of games added this time, there is a 50% chance of winning the third special notification lottery. If the number of games eliminated EG is 201 or more, and a number of games equal to or greater than 201 games is selected as the number of games added this time, there is an 80% chance of winning the third special notification lottery. In other words, the more games that are supposed to be added, the easier it is to win the third special notification lottery.

After executing the third special notification lottery in step S7305, a determination is made in step S7306 as to whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If a win has been obtained, a third special notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S7307. If a negative determination is made in step S7306, or after the processing of step S7307 has been executed, a process is performed in step S7308 to clear the number of games lost EG to the initial value (0), and then the process of setting the additional command is terminated.

The display control device 81 performs processing to execute the third special notification based on receiving the third special notification command. The processing configuration of this processing is generally similar to the first special notification setting processing and the second special notification setting processing described above, so a diagram is omitted, but it grasps the setting value, obtains a third special notification type table, draws a third special notification type, and controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 to execute the corresponding type of third special notification.

The types of third special notifications are, for example, third special notification A, third special notification B, third special notification C, third special notification D, third special notification E, and third special notification F, and at least either the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 or the sound effect of the speaker 64 are set to be different from each other, so that the player can know which type of third special notification it is.

In the third special notification type table, as shown in FIG. 148(b), the type of third special notification selected is set to differ depending on the setting value. For example, if the setting value is 1, the third special notification A is selected with a probability of 100%, and the other third special notifications B to F are not selected. If the setting value is 2, the third special notification B is selected with a probability of 60%, the third special notification C is selected with a probability of 40%, and the other third special notifications are not selected. If the setting value is 3, the third special notification A is selected with a probability of 55%, the third special notification C is selected with a probability of 45%, and the other third special notifications are not selected. If the setting value is 4, the third special notification B is selected with a probability of 50%, the third special notification C is selected with a probability of 45%, the third special notification D is selected with a probability of 5%, and the other third special notifications are not selected. If the setting value is 5, the third special notification A is selected with a probability of 45%, the third special notification C is selected with a probability of 45%, the third special notification D is selected with a probability of 8%, the third special notification E is selected with a probability of 2%, and the other third special notifications are not selected. If the setting value is 6, the third special notification B is selected with a probability of 40%, the third special notification C is selected with a probability of 45%, the third special notification D is selected with a probability of 11%, the third special notification E is selected with a probability of 1%, the third special notification F is selected with a probability of 3%, and the third special notification A is not selected.

That is, when third special notification A is selected, the set value is determined to be either 1, 3, or 5, and when third special notification B is selected, the set value is determined to be either 2, 4, or 6. Furthermore, when third special notification C is selected, the set value is determined to be 2 or greater, and when third special notification D is selected, the set value is determined to be 4 or greater. Similarly, for third special notification E, the set value is determined to be 5 or greater, and for third special notification F, the set value is determined to be 6. Therefore, it is possible to narrow down the set values by combining the types of third special notifications.

As described above, the number of games that would have been added is temporarily stored in the number of games lost EG, and then a lottery is held to determine whether the third special notification will be executed depending on the value of the number of games lost EG. This makes it possible to adjust the profit or loss in relation to the bonus (number of games) that the player would have received depending on how easily the third special notification is executed.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, a third special notification lottery is performed based on a set value together with the value of the number of games lost EG in modified example 2. Fig. 149 is a flowchart showing a process for setting an add-on command in this modified example.

In this modified example, if it is determined in step S7401 that the excess flag is set, the number of games to be eliminated EG is determined in step S7403, and then the set value is determined in step S7404. Then, in step S7405, a process is executed to obtain a third special notification lottery table, and then in step S7406, a third special notification lottery is executed.

As shown in FIG. 150, the third special notification lottery table in this modified example is set so that the winning probability of the third special notification lottery is different for each of the parameters, the value of the number of games eliminated EG and the set value. For example, if the number of games eliminated EG is 50 or less, a set value of 1 results in a 1 in 256 probability of winning, and a set value of 6 results in a 6 in 256 probability of winning. In this way, even if the number of games eliminated EG is the same, the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of the third special notification lottery. Also, as in modified example 2 above, even if the set value is the same, the higher the value of the number of games eliminated EG, the higher the winning probability of the third special notification lottery.

In the process of setting the add-on command, the processes in steps S7402 and S7407 to S7409 are similar to those in steps S7302 and S7306 to S7308 described above, and therefore will not be described here.

As described above, by using a set value as well as the value of the number of games lost EG as a parameter for the third special notification lottery itself, the number of prediction branches for the set value when various third special notifications are made increases, making it possible to enhance the game of predicting the set value from the third special notification.

More specifically, if any of the third special notifications is made, it means that the third special notification lottery has been won regardless of the setting value. In other words, if the number of free games FG is 0 or less and a specific role has been won, but the third special notification is not made, this can be due to the fact that the additional lottery was not won, or the additional lottery was won but the number of additional games was small, as well as the setting value being low. In other words, regardless of the type of third special notification, the fact that the third special notification is made can be a weighting factor in predicting that the setting value is high. If this is the case, and it is assumed that players want a high setting value, even if the type of third special notification suggests a low setting that is not desirable for the player, the fact that the third special notification has been made will dull the player's judgment and make the player think that the setting is high rather than low, which increases the fun of predicting the setting value.

<Modification 4>
In the above modified examples 2 and 3, the third special notification is performed each time a specific role is won (when an additional bonus occurs), but in this modified example, the third special notification is performed when the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated. Figure 151 is a flowchart showing the zone display second process in this modified example.

In step S7501, it is determined whether the interval indicator is being displayed. If it is not being displayed, the second interval display process is terminated. If it is being displayed, in step S7502, an addition process is performed on the number of games in the advantageous interval AG, and in step S7503, a remaining game management process is executed. Then, in step S7504, it is determined whether the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has reached an upper limit (1500). If the upper limit has been reached, in step S7505, a process is performed to grasp the total number of games lost TEG provided in the various counter areas 106e of RAM 106. The total number of games lost TEG corresponds to the number of games lost EG in the above-mentioned variant 3, and is a counter to which a value equivalent to the number of games corresponding to the additional win is added.

In other words, although detailed explanation using figures will be omitted, in this modified example, in the process (step S7205) of adding the number of added games to the number of games lost EG in the game number addition process (FIG. 146), the process adds the number of added games to the total number of games lost TEG, not the number of games lost EG. Also, in this modified example, if it is determined that the excess flag is set in the process of setting the addition command (steps S7301, S7401), the output setting of the target addition command is not performed, and each process related to the third special notification (steps S7303 to S7308, steps S7403 to S7409) is not performed.

After determining the total number of games to be eliminated TEG in step S7505, a third special notification lottery table is obtained in step S7506, and a third special notification lottery is performed in step S7507. The third special notification lottery table is, for example, a table in FIG. 148(a) in which the parameter referenced is replaced from the number of games to be eliminated EG to the total number of games to be eliminated TEG. In other words, the larger the value of the total number of games to be eliminated TEG, the easier it is to win the third special notification lottery.

After executing the third special notification lottery in step S7507, a determination is made in step S7508 as to whether or not the notification lottery has been won, and if so, a process is performed in step S7509 to set and output the third special notification command. If it is determined in step S7508 that the player has not won, or after executing the process in step S7509, a process is performed in step S7510 to clear the total number of games lost TEG to the initial value (0).

The processes for terminating the advantageous zone in steps S7511 to S7513 are the same as those in steps S6105 to S6107 above. Furthermore, in this modified example, even if both steps S7514 and S7515 make a positive judgment and the advantageous zone is terminated before the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous zone is reached, the process proceeds to steps S7511 to S7513. In other words, even if the advantageous zone is terminated before the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous zone is reached, the data initialization process (step S7513) is performed. This makes it possible to more clearly distinguish between the advantageous zone and the normal zone.

When the third special notification is executed when the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated as described above, for example, the third special notification may be executed as an end effector of the attack mode, or the third special notification may be executed before or after the end effector of the attack mode, i.e., separately from the end effector.

By doing the above, even if the number of single added games is small, if multiple added games occur, the third special notification is more likely to be executed. Therefore, even if a specific role such as a weak cherry wins a small average number of added games, the win can still have a meaningful meaning, and the playability can be improved after the number of free games FG falls to 0 or less.

Moreover, the longer the number of games after the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less, the more likely it is that the opportunity to add to the total will occur multiple times, so in the above configuration, the third special notification is more likely to be executed. Therefore, even if the number of games after the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less quickly after the transition to the advantageous zone, the player can fully enjoy the games after the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less.

In the above configuration, the third special notification lottery table is basically configured to reuse the values of a table using the number of games eliminated EG, but a separate table using the total number of games eliminated TEG as a parameter may also be provided. The total number of games eliminated TEG corresponds to the cumulative value of the number of games added after the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less, and therefore is likely to be larger than the number of games eliminated EG. For example, if the probability of winning the third special notification lottery is different depending on whether the value of the total number of games eliminated TEG exceeds the upper limit of the number of games added in one time (300 games in the above example) or not, the significance of it being the cumulative value of multiple additions can be better guaranteed.

In addition, the third special notification may be made based on the total number of games lost TEG when the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated, and may also be made based on the number of games lost EG when an additional bonus opportunity occurs during the advantageous zone. In this case, the third special notification based on the total number of games lost TEG and the third special notification based on the number of games lost EG may have different presentation contents, different lottery tables, or different type tables.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, in a configuration in which information that may be beneficial to the player is presented by suggesting a set value as compensation for setting an upper limit on the number of games in the advantageous zone, the beneficial information is presented by taking into account the game situation on the day when the upper limit on the number of games is reached. Figure 152 is a flowchart showing the second process of displaying the zone in this modified example.

In step S7601, it is determined whether the interval display is currently being displayed, and if it is not currently being displayed, the second interval display process is terminated. If it is currently being displayed, in step S7602, an addition process for the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is performed, and in step S7603, a remaining number of games management process is performed. Then, in step S7604, it is determined whether the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has reached the upper limit (1500).

If the upper limit is reached, in step S7605, a process is executed to determine the set value. Then, in step S7606, a process is executed to determine the total number of games played on that day by checking the total number of games TG provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The total number of games TG is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to determine the number of games played on that day (total number of games). This counter is cleared to an initial value (0), for example, when the winning probability setting process is performed, i.e., when the RAM clear process is performed, and is incremented by 1 by an increment process (not shown) each time the game number management process (Figure 40) is started, regardless of the number of bets, game status, etc.

In the next step S7607, the fourth special notification lottery table is obtained, and in step S7608, the fourth special notification lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 153, the fourth special notification lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the fourth special notification varies depending on the value of the total number of games TG and the setting value. Specifically, the larger the value of the total number of games TG, the easier it is to win the fourth special notification lottery, and the higher the setting value, the easier it is to win the fourth special notification lottery. For example, if the value of the total number of games TG is 2000 or less, if the setting value is 1, the probability of winning is 1 in 256, and if the setting value is 6, the probability of winning is 6 in 256. Also, if the value of the total number of games TG is 4001 to 6000, if the setting value is 1, the probability of winning is 4 in 256, and if the setting value is 6, the probability of winning is 256 in 256.

After the fourth special notification lottery is executed in step S7608, a determination is made in step S7609 as to whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If the notification lottery has been won, a process is executed in step S7610 to set the fourth special notification command as an output target to the display control device 81. If it is determined in step S7609 that the notification lottery has not been won, or after the process of step S7610 has been executed, the process for ending the favorable zone is executed in steps S7611 to S7613, and then the second zone display process is terminated. Also, if a negative determination is made in step S7604, a determination is made as to whether the end conditions are met in steps S7614 and S7615, and if the favorable zone is to be ended, the process of steps S7611 to S7613 is executed. The process of steps S7611 to S7615 is the same as the process of steps S7510 to S7514.

Next, the process for setting the attack mode end effect will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 154. The process for setting the attack mode end effect is performed in step S2306 of the full stop effect setting process (FIG. 51), and is performed based on the reception of an attack mode end command. As already explained, the attack mode end command is output in the game count management process based on the initialization process such as step S7614, and the attack mode end effect is performed.

In step S7701, the total number of medals paid out during the favorable zone is determined. The total number of medals paid out can be determined by referring to the total number of medals paid out counter in the various counter area 183b. The total number of medals paid out counter is incremented according to the number of medals paid out as a result of playing during the favorable zone, and is initialized when the favorable zone ends. The counter may be decremented according to the number of medals betted at the start of each game, and the number of medals obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted from the number of medals paid out may be determined.

Then, in step S7702, a process is performed to ascertain the number of games to be continued in the advantageous zone. Then, in step S7703, it is determined whether or not the fourth special notification command has been received. If it has not been received, in step S7704, a process is performed to set the normal end effect, and then the process of setting the attack mode end effect is terminated. As the normal end effect, as shown in FIG. 155(a) and FIG. 57(b), a message is displayed indicating that the attack mode has ended, and the number of games to be continued and the total number of coins paid out are displayed.

If it is determined in step S7703 that the fourth special notification command has been received, a process for acquiring a fourth special notification type table is executed in step S7705, and a process for selecting a fourth special notification type is executed in step S7706. Although detailed explanation of the fourth special notification type table using figures is omitted, for example, it may indicate the even/odd setting value, as in the second special notification type table in FIG. 144(c). As the fourth special notification, for example, a fourth special notification A illustrated in FIG. 155(b) and a fourth special notification B illustrated in FIG. 155(c) are provided. The fourth special notification A and the fourth special notification B may be configured to display, for example, the number of continued games and the total number of payouts instead of the winning corresponding character in the display content of the first special notification A and the first special notification B.

After executing the fourth special notification type lottery process in step S7706, it is determined in step S7707 whether or not it was the fourth special notification A, and if it is the fourth special notification A, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to execute the fourth special notification A in step S7708. Also, if it is the fourth special notification B, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to execute the fourth special notification B in step S7709. After executing the process of step S7708 or step S7709, the process of setting the attack mode end effect is terminated.

By doing the above, when the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit of games and is forced to end, it is possible to suggest a setting value according to the game situation on that day.

Here, if the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated, the player who thinks that he or she could have continued playing longer may lose motivation to play due to the forcible termination, and may end up quitting the game. In this respect, as shown in this embodiment, if the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less and a setting value is suggested when a forcible termination occurs, it is possible to support the decision to continue playing even in situations where motivation to play may be lost as described above, such as predicting that the setting is high. In particular, when a forcible termination occurs, it is assumed that a large number of medals have been won, and a player who sees such a large number of medals is likely to make a guess that is biased towards the high setting, even if he or she guesses the setting value. In other words, by giving a trigger to guess the setting value in conjunction with the forcible termination, it can be said that it is possible to stimulate the desire to continue playing more than a configuration that simply performs a forcible termination.

On the other hand, for example, if a forced termination occurs shortly after an amusement hall has opened, and a suggestive effect occurs that suggests or confirms a high setting on that machine, this will encourage the player playing that machine to continue playing, but others who see the suggestive effect out of the corner of their eye may predict that the settings of other machines are low in relation to that machine. In other words, if a suggestive effect suggesting a high setting occurs shortly after an amusement hall has opened, or in a situation where this is the case, it is undesirable for the amusement hall as a whole. Conversely, it is considered preferable for the amusement hall's business strategy to have a suggestive effect suggesting as high a setting as possible, such as near the end of business hours.

Therefore, by configuring the setting value suggestion based on forced termination to take into account the gaming situation on that day, it is possible to minimize the disadvantages of suggesting the setting value (a high setting suggestion reduces the operating rate of other gaming machines, a low setting suggestion reduces the operating rate of the gaming machine in question, etc.).

In particular, in this modified example, the total number of games played TG is used to take into account the gaming situation on that day, so that information can be reflected in the suggestion of the setting value using a conventional gaming machine configuration. Furthermore, the total number of games played TG is not only managed by the gaming machine, but can also be ascertained by the player from a data display or the like installed in the gaming hall, and after weighting the information obtained from the data display or the like, it becomes possible to play a game in which the setting value is predicted from the suggested notification of the setting value, which increases the enjoyment of the game of predicting the setting value.

Furthermore, the total number of games played TG is cleared to an initial value when the winning probability setting process has been performed, and is not cleared to an initial value simply by turning the gaming machine on and off. Therefore, if the setting value is not changed or updated when the gaming hall opens or closes, and the winning probability setting process is not performed, the total number of games played TG from the previous day will be carried over. In this way, it is possible to make predictions about the setting value while also taking into account whether or not the setting value has been changed, making the prediction gameplay even more enjoyable.

<Modification 6>
The fourth special notification lottery table may be modified as follows.

Figure 156 (a) shows a fourth special notification lottery table in which the parameters are not only the total number of games TG at the time of forced termination, but also the time of forced termination. Specifically, not only when the total number of games TG is 2000 or less, but also when the time is before 13:00, if the setting value is 1, the probability of winning is 1 in 256, and if the setting value is 6, the probability of winning is 6 in 256. Also, not only when the total number of games TG is between 4001 and 6000, but also when the time is before 19:00, if the setting value is 1, the probability of winning is 4 in 256, and if the setting value is 6, the probability of winning is 256 in 256.

By doing the above, even if the forced termination condition is met with a small total number of games, such as when the gaming machine does not start operating at the opening time in the morning but after midday or in the evening, if the forced termination condition is met at a later time, the fourth special notification as a setting value suggestion is more likely to be executed. This makes it possible to suggest setting values that are more suited to the business style and operating conditions of the hall.

When referring to the fourth special notification lottery table, the time of the forced termination may be determined from a specified built-in clock or the like provided in the gaming machine.

<Modification 7>
156(b) shows a fourth special notification lottery table in which the lower the setting, the more likely the fourth special notification is to be executed as a setting value suggestion when the forced termination condition is met with a small number of games or an early time. That is, when the total number of games TG is 2000 or less or the time is before 13:00, if the setting value is 1, the probability of winning is 128 out of 256, and if the setting value is 6, the probability of winning is 4 out of 256. On the other hand, when the total number of games TG is 2001 or more and 4000 or less, or the time is before 16:00, if the setting value is 1, the probability of winning is 2 out of 256, and if the setting value is 6, the probability of winning is 12 out of 256.

By doing as described above, it is possible to adjust the occurrence rate of low setting suggestion notifications by taking advantage of the tendency for a high setting to be judged when a forced termination occurs relatively early. In other words, as described above, even if a setting value suggestion for a low setting occurs in a situation where a high setting is likely to be judged based on the number of games played and the number of medals won, a player who is already under the impression that the setting is high is likely to continue playing without blindly accepting the setting value suggestion. Therefore, by generating a setting value suggestion for a low setting in such a situation, it is possible to make it less likely that an event will occur in which only the probability of occurrence of a low setting value suggestion is low out of the total probability of occurrence of setting value suggestions.

<Modification 8>
In this modified example, the fourth special notification selection type table is changed according to the total number of games played at the time when the forced termination condition is satisfied. Specifically, when acquiring the fourth special notification type table in step S7705, the total number of games is acquired by acquiring a counter corresponding to the total number of games played TG on the main control device 101 side, and the acquired fourth special notification type table is changed depending on whether the total number of games is 2000 or less or 2001 or more.

Figure 157 (a) shows a fourth special notification type table acquired when the total number of games is 2000 or less, and Figure 157 (b) shows a fourth special notification type table acquired when the total number of games is 2001 or more. In this modified example, the fourth special notification is set as a fourth special notification, which is a fourth special notification A, a fourth special notification B, a fourth special notification C, a fourth special notification D, a fourth special notification E, and a fourth special notification F, and the performance contents are set so that they can be distinguished from each other. The fourth special notification A to the fourth special notification F correspond to the third special notification A to the third special notification F in Figure 148 (b). In other words, the fourth special notification A suggests an odd number setting, and the fourth special notification B suggests an even number setting. Additionally, the fourth special notification C indicates a set value of 2 or more, the fourth special notification D indicates a set value of 4 or more, the fourth special notification E indicates a set value of 5 or more, and the fourth special notification F indicates a set value of 6.

In the type table in FIG. 157(a), the fourth special notification A to fourth special notification C are likely to be selected, and fourth special notification D to fourth special notification F are not likely to be selected. In other words, when the total number of games is low and the conditions for the forced termination of the advantageous zone are met, the even/odd setting value suggestion is likely to be selected.

On the other hand, in the type table of FIG. 157(b), not only the fourth special notification A and the fourth special notification B, but also the fourth special notification C to the fourth special notification F can be selected. In other words, unless the total number of games is low, it is easier to narrow down the setting value based on the fact that the condition for the forced termination of the advantageous zone has been met than when the total number of games is low.

By doing this, as the game progresses (the total number of games increases), it becomes easier to gradually narrow down the setting value, providing the player with the fun of guessing the setting value while progressing through the game and aiming to win medals.

In particular, by configuring the type table to differ depending on the game situation, it is possible to realize completely different suggestive effects depending on the game situation, for example by using different type tables in the morning and afternoon, which prevents players from getting bored throughout the day and motivates them to continue playing.

<Modification 9>
In this modified example, when the advantageous period is forcibly ended, the total number of games lost TEG is used to set a special period in the normal period after the advantageous period ends. First, the second process of displaying the period in this modified example will be described with reference to FIG.

The processing in steps S7801 to S7807 is the same as the processing in steps S6101 to S6107 described above, and when the conditions for forcibly terminating the favorable zone are met, the display of the zone indicator is terminated and data initialization is performed.

The data initialization process of step S7807 will be explained in detail with reference to Figures 159 and 160.

As already explained, the data initialization process executed when the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated is a process for initializing various counters and various flags related to the gameplay that changes the advantageous degree by the push order notification. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 159, the RAM 106 of the main control device 101 is provided with a winning flag storage area 106a, a stop information storage area 106b, a status information storage area 106c, various flag storage areas 106d, and various counter areas 106e. Each of these areas 106a to 106e is provided with a separate area for storing various information (advantageous information, specific information) used in the advantageous zone and an area for storing various information (normal information) also used in the normal zone. More specifically, the area for storing various information used in the advantageous zone and the area for storing various information used in the normal zone are provided separately as areas that do not overlap with each other.

Specifically, the winning flag storage area 106a is provided with a winning flag storage area 201 corresponding to the advantageous zone and a winning flag storage area 202 corresponding to the normal zone. The stop information storage area 106b is provided with a stop information storage area 203 corresponding to the advantageous zone and a stop information storage area 204 corresponding to the normal zone. The status information storage area 106c is provided with a status information storage area 205 corresponding to the advantageous zone and a status information storage area 206 corresponding to the normal zone. The various flag storage area 106d is provided with a various flag storage area 207 corresponding to the advantageous zone and a various flag storage area 208 corresponding to the normal zone. The various counter area 106e is provided with a various counter area 209 corresponding to the advantageous zone and a various counter area 210 corresponding to the normal zone.

Among these, the area for storing flags for identifying various display modes such as the challenge mode flag and the attack mode flag, the area for storing flags for identifying that an add-on condition has been met such as the challenge mode add-on flag and the attack mode add-on flag, and the area for storing the excess flag are provided in the various flags storage area 207 corresponding to advantageous zones. On the other hand, the area for storing bet number flags for identifying the number of bets on each game, the area for storing freeze effect flags for identifying that a freeze effect occurrence condition has been met, and the area for storing a payout in progress flag for identifying that a payout process is being performed are provided in the various flags storage area 208 corresponding to normal zones.

In addition, an area for storing the premonition game count G1, an area for storing the challenge mode continuation count G2, an area for storing the attack mode continuation count G3, an area for storing the advantageous zone game count AG, an area for storing the free game count FG, etc. are provided in the various counter areas 209 corresponding to advantageous zones. On the other hand, an area for storing the total game count TG, an area for storing the BB game count counter for counting the number of games between bonuses, an area for storing the medal payout counter for counting the number of medals paid out, etc. are provided in the various counter areas 210 corresponding to normal zones.

In the data initialization process of this modified example, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 160, in step S7901, a process is performed to initialize the advantageous zone corresponding win flag storage area 201. In the following step S7902, a process is performed to initialize the advantageous zone corresponding stop information storage area 203. In the following step S7903, a process is performed to initialize the advantageous zone corresponding state information storage area 205. In the following step S7904, a process is performed to initialize the advantageous zone corresponding various flag storage area 207. In the following step S7905, a process is performed to initialize the advantageous zone corresponding various counter area 209. Then, in step S7906, a process is performed to initialize information or parameters related to other advantageous zones, and then this data initialization process is terminated.

In other words, in the data initialization process that is executed based on the establishment of the favorable zone end condition, the various areas 201, 203, 205, 207, and 209 related to the favorable zone are initialized, but the various areas 202, 204, 206, 208, and 210 that are not related to the favorable zone or that are used without distinguishing between normal zones and favorable zones are not initialized. As described above, the various areas related to the favorable zone and the various areas not related to the favorable zone or that are used without distinguishing between normal zones and favorable zones are provided as separate areas so as not to overlap, so that when the above-mentioned initialization process is performed, the occurrence of errors in which areas that should be initialized are not initialized or areas that should not be initialized are suitably suppressed.

Returning to the explanation of the second section display process, after the data initialization process is performed in step S7807, the special section setting process is performed in step S7808, and then the second section display process is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S7804, a judgment is made in steps S7809 and S7810 as to whether or not the termination conditions for the favorable section are met, and if the termination conditions are met, the processes of steps S7805 to S7808 are performed, and then the second section display process is terminated. If the termination conditions are not met, the second section display process is terminated without performing the processes of steps S7805 to S7808. Note that the processes of steps S7809 and S7810 are the same as the processes of steps S6108 and S6109 described above.

The special section setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 161.

In step S8001, a process is performed to determine the total number of games lost TEG. Here, the total number of games lost TEG is stored in the normal interval counter area 210 of the RAM 106, as shown in FIG. 159. Therefore, even if the above data initialization process is performed, the total number of games lost TEG is not initialized. In other words, when the game number addition process is performed in a situation where the above free game number FG is 0 or less, the counters for various continuation numbers in the various counter areas 209 corresponding to advantageous intervals, such as the attack mode continuation number G3, are not added with an added number, but rather a value corresponding to the total number of games lost TEG in the various counter areas 210 corresponding to normal intervals is added.

In other words, in this modified example, when an opportunity for an addition occurs, a process is executed to store the number of added games as information to be used during the advantageous period in various areas for the advantageous period, and a process is executed to store the number of added games as the total number of games lost TEG as information to be used during the normal period in various areas for the normal period, and the process of determining whether the number of free games FG is 0 or less, i.e., whether the excess flag is set, can be said to be a process of selecting which area to perform the storage process for. In this way, in this modified example, it is possible to change the area that stores information about events that occur during the advantageous period depending on whether the excess flag is set. In this way, it is possible to carry over information about events that occur during the advantageous period to the normal period, while assuming that an initialization process is performed at the end of the advantageous period.

In the next step S8002, a process is performed to obtain a special section table from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. Here, the special section is provided as a section in which a setting value suggestion effect is likely to occur in the normal section after the end of the advantageous section. As shown in FIG. 162(a), the special section table is set so that the number of games in the special section varies depending on the value of the total number of games lost TEG. Specifically, if the total number of games lost TEG is 0, no special section is set, if the total number of games lost TEG is 1 to 50, a special section of 10 games is selected, if the total number of games lost TEG is 51 to 100, a special section of 30 games is selected, and so on. The larger the value of the total number of games lost TEG, the longer the special section is selected.

After the number of games in the special section is identified in steps S8001 and S8002, a process is performed in step S8003 to input a value corresponding to the identified number of games into the special section game count PG. Then, in step S8004, it is determined whether the input special section game count PG is greater than 0, and if it is greater than 0, a process is performed in step S8005 to set a special section flag, and in step S8006, a process is performed to set a special section command as an output target to the display control device 81. These special section game count PGs are counters that allow the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the special section, and the special section flags are flags that allow the CPU 102 to grasp that a special section exists. Furthermore, the special section command is a command that causes the display control device 81 to grasp that a special section exists.

If it is determined in step S8003 that the special zone game count PG is 0, or after the processing of step S8006 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S8007. In step S8007, a process is performed to clear the total number of games lost TEG to the initial value (0). The special zone setting process is then terminated. In other words, if the total number of games lost TEG is 0 at the end of the favorable zone, the special zone flag is not set and the zone is not set.

In the special section of this modified example, a push order notification effect is generated when a specified special replay is won. As described in the second embodiment above, a special replay is a result in which, although the type of replay result that is won differs depending on the stop order, the bonus awarded is a replay no matter which replay result is won, and no transition to a game state such as an RT state occurs.

Figure 163 shows the lottery table for the normal game state in this modified example. In this modified example, special replay 1 and special replay 2 can be won as special replays in the normal game state. Special replay 1 and special replay 2 are as described in Figures 95 and 96, and special replay 1 is a combination of the first replay, the ninth replay, and the eleventh to fifteenth replays, and special replay 2 is a combination of the first replay, the tenth replay, and the fifteenth replay. The winning replay differs depending on the stopping order, and the corresponding replay winning is established for each stopping result of the right downward replay, black BAR tenpai miss, black BAR double tenpai miss, black BAR single match, and black BAR double match. The total probability of winning each of special replay 1, special replay 2, and normal replay is set to be the same probability as the winning probability of normal replay in the lottery table for the normal game state in each of the above embodiments.

The processing during the special section is explained below.

Figure 164 (a) is a flowchart showing the game count management process in this modified example.

In this modified example, if it is determined in step S1401 that the number of bets is 3, it is determined in step S8101 whether the above-mentioned specific section flag is set. If it is set, it is determined in step S8102 whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If it is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, a process is performed in step S8103 to subtract 1 from the special section game count PG. Thereafter, it is determined in step S8104 whether the special section game count PG has become 0, and if it has become 0, a process is performed in step S8105 to clear the specific section flag. If a negative determination is made in step S8101, step S8102, or step S8104, or after the process of step S8105 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S1402.

Figure 164 (b) is a flowchart showing the push order role processing in this modified example.

In this modified example, if a negative judgment is made in step S4419, the process proceeds to step S8111. In step S8111, it is judged whether or not the game result of this game is a win for Special Replay 1 or Special Replay 2. If either Special Replay 1 or Special Replay 2 is a win, the process proceeds to step S8112, and it is judged whether or not the specific section flag is set. If the specific section flag is set, in step S8113, the push order notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the push order role processing is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S8111 or step S8112, the push order role processing is terminated without setting the push order notification command to be output.

Figure 165 is a flowchart showing the special replay notification process in this modified example. The special replay notification process corresponds to the special RT notification process in the second embodiment and the like. In other words, this is the process that is performed in step S4515 when it is determined in step S4514 of the push order notification process (Figure 98) that a special replay has been won.

In step S8201, a process is executed to grasp the set value. In the following step S8202, a process is executed to obtain the push order notification lottery table when a special replay is won from the various table storage area 182a. As shown in FIG. 162(b), the push order notification lottery table when a special replay is won is set so that the occurrence rate of the push order notification effect differs depending on the set value, and the winning form when the push order notification effect occurs differs.

Specifically, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability that the push order notification effect will occur, and the higher the setting value, the higher the rate at which the push order notification effect of the winning pattern of black BAR single or black BAR double alignment is selected when the push order notification effect occurs. For example, if the setting value is 1, the push order notification effect will occur with a 25% probability, and the winning pattern at the time of its occurrence will be the push order notification effect of black BAR double tenpai miss. Also, if the setting value is 2, the push order notification effect will occur with a 25% probability, just like when the setting value is 1, but some of them will be the push order notification effect of black BAR single alignment. The push order notification effect of black BAR single alignment corresponds to a suggestion effect that suggests a setting value of 2 or more. If the setting value is 4 or more, the push order notification effect of black BAR double alignment will also be selected when the push order notification effect occurs, and the push order notification effect of black BAR double alignment corresponds to a suggestion effect that suggests a setting value of 4 or more.

In step S8203, a push order notification lottery is executed based on the push order notification lottery table acquired in step S8202. In this lottery process, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a push order notification, and if so, the type of push order notification effect (corresponding winning mode). Then, based on the lottery result, in step S8204, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled so that the corresponding push order notification effect is performed.

As described above, depending on whether the excess flag is present or not, the number of games drawn based on the addition trigger is stored as the number of added games or as the total number of games lost TEG, and the number of added games is subject to initialization processing at the end of the favorable zone, while the total number of games lost TEG is not subject to said initialization processing. This makes it possible to carry over information about events that occur during the favorable zone after the favorable zone, as long as it is not contrary to the purpose of clearly indicating the favorable zone with a zone indicator or the like and not increasing consecutive win performance too much, as a configuration that performs initialization processing at the end of the favorable zone. This makes it possible to fill the gap between the favorable zone and the normal zone that can occur by forcibly ending the favorable zone, and to improve the linkage in presentation between the two zones.

Then, based on the value of the total number of games lost TEG, a special zone is set after the end of the favorable zone in which a setting value suggestion effect is likely to occur. This makes it possible to make a guess at the setting value after an unfavorable event occurs for the player, such as an opportunity to add on when the excess flag is set during the favorable zone, and can compensate for the unfavorable event.

In particular, even if an opportunity to add more occurs when the excess flag is set, the game will still be forcibly terminated at the upper limit number of games. Normally, the more such an opportunity to add more occurs, the less willing the player is to continue playing, and it is thought that the more likely it is that the player will simply end the game when the game is forcibly terminated. On the other hand, because it is possible to set a special section that is longer the more such an opportunity to add more occurs, it is possible to encourage the player to at least end the game after the special section has been used up, rather than immediately ending the game when the game is forcibly terminated. Furthermore, if a setting value suggestion that is favorable to the player occurs during the special section, the player is more likely to continue playing, which can lead to improved utilization rates.

In this modified version, the setting value suggestion is based on the special replay's stopping results (stopping sequence), which makes it easier for the player to feel as if the suggestion of a preferred setting value has been made by the player's own operation, and the attention to the presentation that suggests such a setting value is ideally increased.

Since the special replay has different stop outcomes depending on the stopping order, if the player does not want the setting value suggestion to occur, he or she can operate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in a stopping order different from the notified stopping order. By doing this, it is possible to avoid the setting value suggestion occurring against the player's will. That is, for example, a player who already knows that the machine is set to high may not want other players around him or her to know that the machine is set to high. Therefore, by doing the above, the player can choose for himself or herself whether or not to generate the setting value suggestion, making it possible to create the presentation content that the player desires.

<Modification 10>
In this modified example, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which the push order notification effect is generated during the special section, the premonition game number table during the special section is made different. Fig. 166(a) shows the bonus premonition game number table during the normal mode in a situation other than the special section, and Fig. 166(b) shows the bonus premonition game number table during the normal mode during the special section.

Figure 166 (a) is as explained in Figure 35, and the number of premonition games is set to be selected from 1 to 32 games. The number of premonition games that is likely to be selected is set to differ depending on the contents of the advantageous zone in which the bonus is won in combination with the bonus. Specifically, a longer number of premonition games is more likely to be selected in the case of a double win with Attack Mode than in the case of a double win with Challenge Mode, and an even longer number of premonition games is more likely to be selected in the case of a double win with Super Attack Mode than in the case of a double win with Attack Mode.

As shown in FIG. 166(b), during the special section, the number of premonition games is set to be selected from 0 to 4 games, and is more likely to be a shorter number of premonition games than in FIG. 166(a). Also, during the special section, the larger the value of the total number of games lost TEG that triggered the setting of the special section, the more likely it is that a shorter number of premonition games will be selected, and further, the more advantageous the mode with multiple wins is, the more likely it is that a shorter number of premonition games will be selected.

More specifically, in the case of a double win in Challenge Mode, if the total number of games to be eliminated TEG that triggered the setting of this special section is between 1 and 50, a premonition game number of 4 games is selected, whereas if the total number of games to be eliminated TEG is 201 or more, a premonition game number of 0 games is selected. Also, in the case of a double win in Attack Mode, if the total number of games to be eliminated TEG that triggered the setting of this special section is between 1 and 50, a premonition game number of 2 or 4 games is selected, whereas if the total number of games to be eliminated TEG is 201 or more, a premonition game number of 0 games is selected.

In this case, for example, the special section flag can be set according to the value of the total number of games to be eliminated TEG, such that if the total number of games to be eliminated TEG is between 1 and 50, special section flag 1 is set, if the total number of games to be eliminated TEG is between 51 and 100, special section flag 2 is set, if the total number of games to be eliminated TEG is between 101 and 200, special section flag 3 is set, if the total number of games to be eliminated TEG is 201 or more, special section flag 4 is set, etc., so that the total number of games to be eliminated TEG when set to a special section can be determined after the fact.

As mentioned above, the advantage of the special zone is not limited to the setting value suggestion, but can also be guaranteed by the number of premonition games of the bonus. In particular, when a bonus such as the first BB is won, since the configuration is such that bonus wins do not occur twice, the player will incur less loss if the bonus is won quickly. From this point of view, by making the number of premonition games during the special zone as described above easier to shorten, it is possible to compensate for the additional bonus that was invalidated during the advantageous zone.

<Modification 11>
In this modified example, a special notification is executed based on the occurrence of an addition that causes the number of available games FG to become equal to or less than 0. Fig. 167 is a flowchart showing the number of games addition process in this modified example.

In step S8301, it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is set, the game number addition process is terminated. If the excess flag is not set and the number of available games FG is still 0 or more, the process proceeds to the addition process from step S8302 onwards. In step S8302, a process is executed to determine the number of games to be added this time. Then, in step S8303, the number of available games FG is determined to determine whether the number of games to be added this time is equal to or greater than the number of available games FG, that is, whether the number of available games FG will be 0 or less as a result of the current addition. If it is not 0 or less, a process is executed in step S8304 to add the number of added games to the target number of continued games, and then the game number addition process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the current addition causes the number of available games FG to become 0 or less, in step S8305, the process of adding the added number of games to the target number of continued games is performed, and then in step S8306, the command for executing the first special notification is set as the output target to the display control device 81, and the process of adding the number of games is terminated.

In this case, when an add-on occurs, an add-on command may be output, or an add-on command and a command for executing the first special notification may be output. When an add-on command and a command for executing the first special notification are received, for example, as shown in Figures 168(a) and 168(b), an add-on game number character may be displayed along with the first special effect A and the first special effect B, allowing the player to simultaneously understand that an add-on has occurred and the setting value suggestion.

The benefit of the surplus that triggers the setting of the excess flag cannot be fully realized, at least for the amount exceeding the upper limit of the number of games. According to this modified example, such losses can be compensated for by presenting information that can be beneficial to the player, namely, a setting value suggestion. In addition, even in situations where there is little hope of a special effect occurring in the subsequent game (situations where the number of games is small), such as when the number of free games FG falls to 0 or less when a surplus occurs close to the upper limit of the number of games, a special notification can be generated appropriately.

Moreover, by making it possible to simultaneously grasp the information that an add-on has occurred (the character corresponding to the number of games added) and the setting value suggestion information (first special notification A and first special notification B) as described above, it becomes possible to present the setting value suggestion information in close association with an event that is favorable to the player, such as an add-on, and it becomes possible to further strengthen the impression that the setting value suggestion information is beneficial to the player. In other words, for example, for a player who believes that luck is the key to the outcome of the game and who does not value high or low setting values, presenting the setting value suggestion information may not be of any benefit. In this regard, by presenting the setting value suggestion information in association with the add-on performance, which has a strong element of luck, as described above, it becomes possible to make the player understand that the element of luck is strongly reflected in the setting value suggestion as well, and to give the impression that the setting value suggestion is beneficial.

The setting value suggestion information and the information that an add-on has occurred do not have to be presented at exactly the same time. It is sufficient that there is at least a period during which the two are presented overlapping, such as the information that an add-on has occurred being presented first, and then the setting value suggestion information being presented together with the information that an add-on has occurred.

<Modification 12>
The value of the number of games EG or the total number of games TEG may be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the third special notification setting process in this modified example. The third special notification setting process is a process executed in place of or in addition to the first special notification setting process, and is a process executed as one process of the setting process for the additional performance.

As already explained, the third special notification is a special notification that is executed based on the number of games that have disappeared EG and the total number of games that have disappeared TEG. In this modified example, in the setting process of the addition command in FIG. 147, information on the number of games that have disappeared EG is set for the third special notification command, and then output to the display control device 81. Therefore, by receiving the third special notification command, the display control device 81 is able to ascertain the number of added games for the added performance that was supposed to occur this time. Note that information on the total number of games that have disappeared TEG may also be set in the third special notification command.

In step S8401, a process is performed to grasp information corresponding to the number of games that have disappeared EG based on the received third special notification command. Then, in step S8402, the number of added games that were supposed to occur this time is grasped. In step S8403, an added effect is generated with the corresponding number of added games. In this case, the effect may be the same as the added effect during normal times (for example, FIG. 136 (b)), or the background may be different, for example, so that the player can grasp that it is different from the added effect during normal times. Then, in step S8404, an update process is performed on the special game count display unit TGH, and then the third special notification setting process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 170(a), the special game count display section TGH is set in a different area in the auxiliary display section 65 from the normal game count display section GH, which displays the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone (attack mode, etc.) taking into account the upper limit of 1500 games. More specifically, the special game count display section TGH is provided in an area adjacent to the normal game count display section GH. Therefore, when trying to visually check the normal game count display section GH, the special game count display section TGH is naturally easily noticeable, and is provided in an area where it is unlikely for the player to overlook it. Note that both display sections GH and TGH are set in areas that do not overlap with the push order notification effects.

The counter that displays the number of games in the special game number display section TGH is set to be different in color, size, shape, etc. from the counter that displays the number of games in the normal game number display section GH, making it easier to give the impression that the counters in both display sections GT and TGH mean different things. Moreover, the counter that displays the number of games in the special game number display section TGH is displayed larger than that in the normal game number display section GH, making the counter in the special game number display section TGH not only more noticeable, but also easier to give the player the impression that it has a meaningful content.

Here, the normal game number display section GH is updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the favorable zone. That is, the counter of the normal game number display section GH is updated to be a counter that is decremented by one each time one game is played. On the other hand, the counter of the special game number display section TGH is updated based on the occurrence of an additional trigger, and is not decremented when a game is played. In particular, when the special game number display section TGH is updated, as shown in FIG. 170(b), the counter is updated to be incremented, not decremented, based on the occurrence of an additional trigger. Therefore, compared to the counter of the normal game number display section GH being decremented, the counter of the special game number display section TGH is a counter that increases as the end of the favorable zone approaches, and the increase in the counter is easily associated with the occurrence of some beneficial event, and is expected to have the effect of mitigating the sense of loss caused by the forced termination of the favorable zone.

In this modified example, the setting value is suggested according to the value of the total number of games lost TEG when the advantageous zone is forcibly ended (the setting value is suggested as an ending presentation, or the setting value is suggested by setting a special zone). In other words, the larger the value of the special game count display section TGH, the easier it becomes for useful information to be presented to the player, making it possible to create a game presentation that matches the player's expectations.

As mentioned above, in a configuration where an upper limit on the number of games played in an advantageous zone is set, if an addition that exceeds the upper limit occurs, normally the player would not want to know that an addition has occurred or the number of games played, since an addition that exceeds the upper limit becomes meaningless. Based on this premise, the usual idea in such a situation is to conceal the occurrence of an addition and the number of games played, in other words, not to notify the player, so as to avoid the player realizing as much as possible.

On the other hand, as described above, this embodiment is configured to make the occurrence of such an addition and the number of added games meaningful, and allows the player to play in the hope that the value displayed by the special game number display unit TGH will suggest a setting value, etc. In this way, by deliberately displaying the number of games that would not normally be displayed, it is possible to ideally realize a game that suggests a setting value, etc., based on the number of games.

Moreover, because they are displayed in this way, even if the game were configured not to suggest a set value, players will likely play the game while predicting that the displayed value has some meaning. In other words, because they are displayed on purpose, players can predict the significance or benefit of what is displayed, and the prediction itself can be entertaining.

The special game count display unit TGH may be configured to be displayed even when the advantageous zone ends, such as when the attack mode ends. By doing so, the player can use the special game count display unit TGH to calculate the total number of games that would have continued or the total number of medals that would have been won if the advantageous zone had not been forcibly ended. This can provide a topic of conversation with friends, for example, about how many more medals they could have won.

<Modification 13>
In this modified example, notification is made using the relationship between the actual number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG and the number of games remaining on the display. Figure 171 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the actual number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG and the number of games remaining on the display.

In this modified example, as a predetermined addition effect, a later-add effect is set in which a part or all of the number of games to be added is notified in a game after the game in which the addition trigger occurs. In other words, a part of the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG is notified first as the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone, and the remaining number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG is notified later. If the number of games notified first is the display remaining number counter HG and the number of games notified later is the later-add counter BG, the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG is equal to the sum of the display remaining number counter HG and the later-add counter BG. The display remaining number counter HG is decremented by one each time a game is played, and the later-add counter BG is not decremented unless a later-add effect occurs even if a game is played. Note that both the display remaining number counter HG and the later-add counter BG are counters managed by the various counter areas 183b of the display control device 81, but may be counters managed by the main control device 101.

For example, when the attack mode is being played and the number of remaining games displayed reaches a predetermined number (1 in this modified example), i.e., when the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number (1), a later-addition effect occurs. In the later-addition effect, as in the case of an add-on effect, a notification is given that a number of games corresponding to the later-addition counter BG (150) (150 in the figure) has been added. As a result, the later-addition counter BG is decremented by the notification amount (becoming 0 in the figure), and the display remaining number counter HG is updated by adding the notification amount due to the later-addition effect, and the display also becomes a value corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG (150 after one game has been played in the figure).

The process for performing the rear-loading performance will be described with reference to Figs. 172 and 173. Fig. 172 shows the rear-loading performance setting process in this modified example, and Fig. 173 is a flowchart showing the rear-loading performance setting process. The rear-loading performance setting process is performed as part of the other processing in the performance setting process (Fig. 43) in the display control device 81.

In the process of setting the additional effects, if it is determined in step S8501 that the first special notification command has not been received, a process of determining the number of additional games is performed in step S8502. Then, in step S8503, a process of determining whether or not to perform a later-addition lottery is executed. The process of determining whether or not to perform a later-addition lottery is a lottery process for determining whether or not to perform a later-addition number of games this time. For example, the ratio of later-addition is set to be different depending on the type of specific role.

In the following step S8504, it is determined whether or not the subsequent addition lottery has been won. If it has not been won, that is, if it has been determined that the current number of added games will be announced in that game, the process proceeds to step S8505, where the current number of added games is added to the display remaining number counter HG. Thereafter, in steps S8506 to S8511, a lottery is performed to determine the timing of the execution of the additional announcement effect, and the additional announcement effect is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current number of added games will be announced in a later game, a process is performed in step S8512 to set a later-addition flag in the various flag storage area 183a. If the later-addition flag has already been set in step S8512, this state is maintained. Then, in step S8513, a process is performed to add the current number of added games to the later-addition counter BG, and the process of setting the added-on effect is terminated.

If a first special notification command is received in step S8501, the first special notification setting process is performed in step S8514. The first special notification setting process in this modified example will be described later.

In the later-addition performance setting process, in step S8601, it is determined whether the display remaining number counter HG is a predetermined value of 1. As described above, the display remaining number counter HG is decremented by 1 by a subtraction process (not shown) each time one game is played during the advantageous period, and the display on the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated in accordance with the subtraction process. If the display remaining number counter HG is 1, it is determined in step S8602 whether the later-addition flag is set. If the display remaining number counter HG is not 1 or if the later-addition flag is not set, the later-addition performance setting process is terminated.

If the display remaining number counter HG is 1 and the later-addition flag is set, a process is executed in step S8603 to grasp the value of the later-addition counter BG. Then, in step S8604, the number of games for this later-addition effect is determined by lottery. Specifically, for example, it is determined whether the entire later-addition counter BG is to be announced as a later-addition effect, or whether only a portion of the later-addition counter BG is to be announced as a later-addition effect. This lottery may vary depending on the value of the later-addition counter BG, whether the entire or a portion is to be announced as a later-addition effect, and if a portion is to be announced, the proportion may be varied. Note that in this modified example, the configuration is such that in either case, the entirety is announced as a later-addition effect.

In the following step S8605, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that an additional effect of the number of games that has been notified is performed. In the following step S8606, a process is performed in which the value of the add-on counter BG for the notified amount is added to the display remaining number counter HG. Then, in step S8607, a process is performed in which the value added to the notification and display remaining number counter HG is subtracted from the add-on counter BG, and in step S8608, on the condition that the add-on counter BG is 0, a process is performed in step S8609 in which the add-on flag is cleared. If the add-on counter BG is not 0 in step S8608 or after the process of step S8609 has been performed, the add-on effect setting process is terminated.

In a configuration that performs the above-mentioned post-addition performance, for example, when a large amount of added value has been added to the post-addition counter BG, a specific event may occur in which it is not possible to know from the displayed remaining number of games that the remaining number of games has reached the upper limit, even if the number of available games FG is below 0 and the excess flag is set. This modified example is configured to utilize this specific event to eliminate the sense of loss when a specific role is won.

The first special notification setting process in this modified example will be explained with reference to FIG. 174.

In step S8701, it is determined whether the rear-loading flag is set. If the rear-loading flag is not set, processing for the first special notification is performed in steps S8702 to S8707. The processing in steps S8702 to S8707 is the same as the processing in steps S6701 to S6706.

If the later-addition flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8708, where a process is performed to determine the later-addition counter BG. Then, in step S8709, the number of games to be pseudo-added is determined by lottery. In this case, the number of pseudo-addition games is set to the later-addition counter BG as an upper limit, and for example, if the later-addition counter BG is 100, the number of games to be selected is determined by lottery so that a number of games less than 100 is selected.

Specifically, for example, a lottery table similar to the lottery table for the number of added games during normal times (when an add-on actually occurs) in FIG. 131 is also stored in the display control device 81. Then, based on the lottery table and the current game result, a pseudo number of added games is selected by lottery. If the number of games selected by lottery is equal to or less than the later-addition counter BG, that number of games is determined as the number of pseudo-addition games this time. On the other hand, if the number of games selected by lottery is greater than the later-addition counter BG, the value of the later-addition counter BG is determined as the number of pseudo-addition games this time. In this way, it is possible to prevent a pseudo-addition that exceeds the later-addition counter BG from occurring while making it appear as if an add-on is actually occurring in relation to the specific role that triggered the add-on.

In the next step S8710, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to perform an add-on effect with the number of pseudo-add-on games determined in step S8709. In this case, if the effect is the same as the add-on effect that occurs during normal play, it is possible to give a strong impression that an add-on has occurred as a result of the current game result.

In the next step S8711, the notification amount is added to the display remaining number counter HG, and in step S8712, the notification amount is subtracted from the later-addition counter BG. Then, in step S8713, it is determined whether the later-addition counter BG has reached 0, and if so, in step S8714, the later-addition flag is cleared. If it is determined in step S8713 that the later-addition counter BG is not 0, or after the processing of step S8714 has been executed, the first special notification setting process is terminated.

As described above, by utilizing the remaining number of games in the advantageous zone ZG (later addition counter BG) that have not yet been reported, a pseudo-addition effect is performed even when the number of available games FG falls below 0, which makes it possible to eliminate the sense of loss that occurs when an opportunity to add to the game arises when the number of available games FG falls below 0 and the excess flag is set.

In particular, because the pseudo-addition of the unreported amount is configured to be performed within the range of the post-addition counter BG and through an actual add-on lottery and add-on game number lottery, the impression that the pseudo-addition is not merely for presentation but is an actual add-on based on winning a specific role can be strengthened, making it possible to give a genuine sense of joy at the pseudo-addition being performed.

<Modification 14>
In this modification, the setting value is suggested by utilizing the pseudo-addition in the above modification 13. Fig. 175 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-addition game number lottery process in this modification. The pseudo-addition game number lottery process is a process performed in the above step S8709.

In step S8801, a process for grasping the set value is performed. In the following step S8802, a set value suggestion lottery process is performed. In the set value suggestion lottery process, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a set value suggestion will be performed at the time of the current pseudo-addition. Specifically, a pseudo-addition game number table for setting value suggestion is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of ROM 182, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a pseudo-addition will be performed with the number of games including the contents of the set value suggestion.

As shown in FIG. 176(a), the pseudo-addition game number table for suggesting the setting value is set so that the number of pseudo-addition games selected varies depending on the setting value. For example, a pseudo-addition effect with the same number of games as the later-addition counter BG as the number of pseudo-addition games can be selected for all setting values, but is set so that it is more likely to be selected at higher settings. Also, a pseudo-addition effect with the number of games added to the later-addition counter BG as the first number, for example 10, is selected for settings 1 to 3, and is set so that it is more likely to be selected at lower settings. A pseudo-addition effect with the number of games added to the later-addition counter BG as the second number, for example 56, is set to be selected for settings 5 and 6. A pseudo-addition effect with the number of games added to the later-addition counter BG as the third number, for example 77, is set to be selected only at setting 6.

After the lottery process for the setting value suggestion is performed in step S8802, it is determined in step S8803 whether or not the pseudo-additional effect for each number of games including the content of the setting value suggestion has been won. If a win has been won, in step S8804, a process is performed to set the number of games corresponding to the winning content as the current pseudo-additional game number, and then this pseudo-additional game number lottery process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 176(a), the pseudo-addition game number table for setting value suggestions is set up so that, regardless of the setting value, a setting suggestion error can be selected in which the number of games including the content of the setting value suggestion is not selected. If the setting suggestion error is selected, the number of games for the pseudo-addition effect is determined by lottery through the following process.

In other words, if the result of the lottery process in step S8802 is not the set value suggestion, a negative judgment is made in step S8803, and in this case, the process proceeds to step S8805. In step S8805, a lottery process for the pseudo-added game number for normal use is performed. The lottery process for the pseudo-added game number for normal use is the same as that described in the above variant example 13, and a pseudo-added game number is selected by lottery based on a lottery table similar to the lottery table for the number of added games during normal times in FIG. 131 and the current game result.

In the following step S8806, it is determined whether the number of games selected in step S8805 is equal to or less than the later-addition counter BG. If it exceeds the later-addition counter BG, then in step S8807, the value of the later-addition counter BG is set as the number of pseudo-addition games for this time, and then the pseudo-addition game number lottery process is terminated. If the number of games selected in step S8805 is equal to or less than the later-addition counter BG, then in step S8808, the selected number of games is set as the number of pseudo-addition games for this time, and then the pseudo-addition game number lottery process is terminated.

In this case, for example, if the number of games announced in the add-on effect (pseudo add-on effect) is added to the total number of games and the number of remaining games to reach the upper limit of 1,500, it is possible that the same number of games as the later add-on counter BG was selected in the pseudo add-on game number lottery for suggesting the setting value. As described above, the number of games equal to the later add-on counter BG is more likely to be selected the higher the setting, so it is possible to predict a high setting. However, an add-on effect of the same number of games as the later add-on counter BG may also occur when a number of games equal to or greater than the later add-on counter BG is selected in the normal pseudo add-on game number lottery process. In this case, not only is it sufficient to simply have an add-on effect of the same number of games as the later add-on counter BG occur, but the difficulty of predicting the setting value is increased, adding to the fun of the game.

For example, in the table for the number of added games based on the winning of a strong cherry during attack mode, the maximum number of games to be selected is set to 200 games (Fig. 131). Therefore, for example, if an added effect of 250 games occurs when a strong cherry is won, which is a number of games that exceeds 200, this is likely to be a pseudo added effect, and if this number of games is the same as the later added counter BG (if the total number of games and the number of remaining games are added to the upper limit), this will result in an increased expectation of a high setting.

On the other hand, even if the same 250-game add-on effect occurs, if it is triggered by a weak cherry win, the number of games will be within the range that can be selected when a weak cherry wins (Figure 131), and even if the number is the same as the later add-on counter BG, it cannot be denied that the normal pseudo-add-on game number lottery process may have selected a number of games greater than the later add-on counter BG.

In the above example, even if an additional performance of more than 200 games occurs when a strong cherry is won, if the number of games (260) is the number of games added to the later additional counter BG by the first number (10), the possibility of a low setting increases. On the other hand, if the additional performance is triggered by a weak cherry win, it cannot be said with certainty that the setting is low.

Here, when the number of free games displayed as understood from the total number of games and the number of remaining games displayed as described above is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the number of games to be added at one time, when an additional performance of the same number of games as the later addition counter BG occurs, it is clearly understood that it includes the contents of the setting value suggestion. On the other hand, when the number of free games displayed as described above is less than the upper limit of the number of games to be added at one time, when an additional performance of the same number of games as the later addition counter BG occurs, it cannot be determined that it includes the contents of the setting value suggestion. In other words, a situation in which the number of free games displayed as described above is large is a configuration in which an additional performance including the contents of the setting value suggestion is more likely to occur, and even if the excess flag is set early, it is possible to enjoy the setting value suggestion to that extent, which is an advantage that can be obtained. In addition, when the number of free games displayed as described above becomes less than the upper limit of the number of games to be added at one time, players who want an additional performance including the contents of the setting value suggestion will want an additional performance based on a specific role with a small upper limit of the number of games (for example, an additional performance based on Chance A or Chance B with a maximum of 50 games). In other words, players will expect the number of games to be increased in a completely opposite way to the usual expectation of a large number of games being added, making it possible to realize a completely new and innovative gameplay that has never been seen before.

For example, if the generated additional effect is the number of games obtained by adding the second number (56) or the third number (77) to the additional counter BG, it is possible to expect a high setting as described above. However, the number of games that appears and the suggested content will differ depending on the progress of the game, such as the number of remaining games displayed.

For example, Figure 176 (b1) shows the relationship between the number of added games that appears and the suggested setting value when the total number of games is 1045, the number of remaining games displayed is 102, and the add-on counter BG is 353. In this case, if the number of added games is 353, it suggests a high setting, and if the number of added games is 363, it suggests a low setting. Also, if the number of added games is 409, it suggests setting 5 or setting 6, and if it is 430, setting 6 is confirmed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 176(b2), even if the total number of games is the same 1045, when the number of remaining games displayed is 56 and the add-on counter BG is 399, if the number of added games is 409 games, this suggests a low setting. In other words, the number of games that suggests setting 5 or setting 6 in the case of FIG. 176(b1) above suggests a low setting in the situation of FIG. 176(b2), and so even if the same number of games is added, the suggested content is completely different.

Also, as shown in FIG. 176(b3), even if the total number of games is the same 1045, when the number of remaining games displayed is 35 and the add-on counter BG is 420, if the number of added games is 430, this suggests a low setting. In other words, the number of games that would confirm a setting of 6 in the case of FIG. 176(b1) above suggests a low setting in the situation of FIG. 176(b3), and even if the same number of games are added, the suggested content is completely different.

Fifth embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration of the specialized zone is different from each of the above embodiments. In each of the above embodiments, a pattern of transition to the specialized zone based on the occurrence of the seventh replay winning during the VB mode and a pattern of transition to the specialized zone based on winning the lottery for transition to the super attack mode were explained, but in this embodiment, a pattern of transition based on the winning of a specific role during the attack mode or VB mode will be explained.

Figure 177 is a flowchart showing the second special role processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the second special role processing is a process that is performed when a special role is won, and is mainly performed when the display mode is the attack mode.

In the second specific role processing in this embodiment, the processing is different when the attack mode game number addition lottery processing is not won. That is, the processing of steps S10001 to S10020 is the same as the processing of steps S901 to S920 described above, and based on the winning of the specific role, a lottery for transition to VB mode according to the rank of the attack mode, a lottery for rank promotion in the attack mode, and a lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode are held, and if each of these lotteries is won, processing is performed to grant the corresponding benefit (transition to VB mode, rank promotion, or additional number of games).

In this embodiment, if it is determined in step S10015 that the attack mode game number addition lottery process executed in the immediately preceding step S10014 was not a winning entry, the process proceeds to step S10021. In step S10021, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. That is, in this embodiment, if a specific role is won during the attack mode, but the lottery for transition to the VB mode or the lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode is not won, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. In the specialized zone lottery process, a table for the specialized zone transition lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery is executed as to whether or not to transition the display mode to the specialized zone using a lottery counter or the like.

As shown in Figure 179, the table for the specialized zone transition lottery is set so that the probability of winning the transition lottery varies depending on the type of specific role.

Here, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a specific role in the lottery process (FIG. 16) is different from that of each of the above embodiments, and in particular, the probability of winning a strong cherry (IV=13), a weak cherry (IV=14), a strong watermelon (IV=15), and a weak watermelon (IV=16) is different. Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a strong cherry is about 1 in 600, and the probability of winning a weak cherry is about 1 in 200. Also, the probability of winning a strong watermelon is about 1 in 300, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon is about 1 in 60. That is, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a strong cherry or a weak cherry (collectively, also simply referred to as "cherry") is about 1 in 150, and the probability of winning a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon (collectively, also simply referred to as "watermelon") is about 1 in 50, making watermelon overwhelmingly easier to win than cherries. The settings for cherries and watermelons are such that there is no difference in the winning probability regardless of the setting value; for example, the probability of winning cherries in setting 1 is the same as the probability of winning cherries in setting 6, and the probability of winning watermelon in setting 3 is the same as the probability of winning watermelon in setting 5. The winning probabilities for other specific roles are the same as in the above embodiments. In addition, the probabilities for game results other than specific roles (normal replay, push order replay or push order bell, 1st BB, 2nd BB, CB, miss, etc.) are also the same as in the above embodiments.

In the table for the specialized zone transition lottery, for example, the specialized zone transition lottery based on a strong cherry has a 5% chance of winning, and the specialized zone transition lottery based on a weak cherry has a 0.5% chance of winning. On the other hand, the specialized zone transition lottery based on a strong watermelon has a 15% chance of winning, and the specialized zone transition lottery based on a weak watermelon has a 5% chance of winning. In other words, not only is the watermelon more likely to be a winning game result than a cherry, but it is also set up so that the chance of winning the specialized zone transition lottery is higher.

The probability of winning for each specific role in these specialized zone transition lotteries is set as a common probability of winning regardless of the setting value, and is set so that it does not differ depending on the setting value.

In step S10022, it is determined whether or not the lottery for moving to the specialized zone has been won based on the processing result of step S10021. If the lottery has not been won, the second specific role processing is terminated. If the lottery has been won, the specialized zone winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d in step S10023. Then, in step S10024, a premonition game number table is obtained, in step S10025, a lottery for the premonition game number is performed, in step S10026, the premonition game number is set, in step S10027, the premonition command is set, and then the second specific role processing is terminated. The processing of steps S10024 to S10027 is the same as, for example, the processing of steps S906 to S909, and is processing for setting the premonition mode.

Next, the third special role processing in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 178. As already explained, the third special role processing is a process that is performed when a special role is won, and is a process that is performed when the display mode is mainly VB mode.

In the third specific role processing in this embodiment, similar to the changes in the second specific role processing described above, the processing in the case where the attack mode game number addition lottery processing is not won is different. That is, the processing in steps S10101 to S10107 is the same as the above steps S1001 to S1007, and a lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode based on the winning of a specific role is held, and if the addition lottery is won, the game number addition processing etc. is performed.

In this embodiment, if it is determined in step S10102 that the attack mode game number addition lottery process performed in the immediately preceding step S10101 was not a winning entry, the process proceeds to step S10108. In step S10108, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. That is, in this embodiment, if a specific role is won during VB mode, but the attack mode game number addition lottery is not won, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is also executed. The specialized zone lottery process is the same as the process in step S10021 above, and is executed based on a table for the specialized zone transition lottery.

As with the table for the specialized zone transition lottery in attack mode, the table for the specialized zone transition lottery in VB mode is set so that the winning probability of the transition lottery differs depending on the type of special role, as shown in FIG. 179. For example, the special zone transition lottery based on a strong cherry has a 10% winning probability, and the special zone transition lottery based on a weak cherry has a 1% winning probability. On the other hand, the special zone transition lottery based on a strong watermelon has a 30% winning probability, and the special zone transition lottery based on a weak watermelon has a 10% winning probability. In other words, even in VB mode, the winning probability of the specialized zone transition lottery is set to be higher for watermelon than for cherry. Also, the winning probability of the specialized zone transition lottery, including other special roles, is set to be higher in VB mode than in attack mode.

The probability of winning a specific role in the specialized zone transition lottery during VB mode is set to the same winning probability regardless of the setting value, just like the winning probability during attack mode described above, and is set so that it does not differ depending on the setting value.

In step S10109, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S10108. The processing of steps S10109 to S10114 is generally similar to the processing of steps S10022 to S10027 described above, and is processing for setting the premonition mode when the transition lottery to the specialized zone has been won. However, in step S10113, the number of games obtained by adding the number of remaining games in VB mode to the number of premonition games determined by the lottery processing of the number of premonition games is set as the current number of premonition games. In other words, although the premonition performance suggesting the win of the specialized zone is implemented during VB mode, the transition to the specialized zone is made after the end of VB mode. Note that the number of remaining games in VB mode may be set as the number of premonition games, in which case the lottery processing of the number of premonition games can be omitted.

As described above, in this embodiment, the lottery for transition to the specialized zone is conducted based on the fact that a specific role-based additional win has not been won in attack mode or VB mode. With this configuration, the profit that can be obtained when a specific role is won in attack mode or VB mode is not limited to a direct increase in the number of games played, further increasing the sense of expectation. In addition, the transition paths to the specialized zone are diversified, making it possible to significantly improve playability.

As a process for shifting the display mode to the specialized zone, the mode shift notification process and the push order role process in this embodiment will be explained in more detail with reference to Figs. 180 and 181. The specialized zone in this embodiment shifts based on the establishment of the seventh replay win, as in each of the above embodiments. However, in this embodiment, the shift lottery to the specialized zone is not held by the lottery when the BAR replay is won (the lottery to decide whether the seventh replay will be won or not), but the shift lottery is held when the specific role is won as described above. Then, when the shift lottery when the specific role is won is won, the specialized zone win flag is set and shifting is possible, and then, when the BAR replay 1 is won, a push order notification is issued to establish the seventh replay win, and the zone is shifted to the specialized zone.

In other words, in the mode transition notification process in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 180, in steps S10201 to S10216, similar to the processes in steps S1101 to S1116 described above, processing is performed to transition to the corresponding display mode based on the number of premonition games becoming 0, and processing is performed to generate a push order notification when a push order role that transitions to the corresponding game state is won.

In this embodiment, if it is determined in step S10213 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S10217. In step S10217, it is determined whether or not the specialized zone winning flag is set. If it is not set, the mode transition notification process is terminated. If it is set, the specialized zone winning flag is cleared in step S10218. Then, in step S10219, a process is performed to set a specialized zone notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d. The specialized zone notification flag is a flag for executing a push order notification corresponding to the seventh replay winning. After executing the process of step S10219, the specialized zone winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S10220, and then the mode transition notification process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone winning notification command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to notify the player that the specialized zone has been won. This process may be configured to be executed on the condition that a specialized zone winning notification command has been received during the other bet presentation setting process (step S1809) of the bet presentation setting process (FIG. 44), for example.

In the push order role processing in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 181, in steps S10301 to S10313, push order notifications (push order notifications for the third replay to the fifth replay) for promoting to the second RT state or the third RT state, and push order notifications (push order notifications for the first replay) for preventing the state from falling back to the first RT state are performed in the same manner as in the processing of steps S1201 to S1213 described above.

If a negative judgment is made in step S10309, in this embodiment, in step S10314, it is judged whether or not the current game result is BAR Replay 1 among the BAR Replays. If it is BAR Replay 1, in step S10315, it is judged whether or not the attack notification flag is set, and in step S10316, it is judged whether or not the specialized zone notification flag is set. If a negative judgment is made in step S10315, the push order notification is not executed in the current BAR Replay 1 winning game, and the push order role processing ends as it is. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S10316, the process proceeds to step S10307, and the push order notification processing is performed to establish the first replay winning.

If both the attack notification flag and the specialized zone notification flag are set, step S10317 executes a push order notification corresponding to the seventh replay win, and step S10318 executes a process to set a push order notification command including the stop sequence corresponding to the seventh replay win as an output target to the display control device 81, and then ends the push order role processing.

In this embodiment, the relationship between the stop order and the winning mode when the BAR replay 1 is won may be set so that the seventh replay winning, the first replay winning, and the sixth replay winning have different stop orders (Fig. 23(c)). This makes it possible to more reliably establish the seventh replay winning when the stop operation is performed according to the push order notification corresponding to the seventh replay winning as described above. In addition, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the seventh replay winning has been established in step S1316 of the winning result response process (Fig. 39), the presence or absence of the notification flag for the VB is checked in step S1317 instead of the presence or absence of the notification flag for the VB. In other words, when the seventh replay winning is established and the notification flag for the specialized zone is set, the start process of the specialized zone (steps S1318 onwards) is performed. In this way, it is possible to avoid transitioning to the specialized zone when the stop order happens to match the stop order corresponding to the seventh replay winning.

In addition, in the push order role processing of this embodiment, if a negative judgment is made in step S10314, processing for the push order bell is performed in steps S10319 to S10322, which is similar to the processing in steps S1219 to S1222 described above.

Next, the setting process for the added effect in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182. As already explained, the setting process for the added effect is a process performed by the display control device 81 based on receiving an added command from the main control device 101.

In step S10401, it is determined whether or not the game is in a specialized zone. If the game is not in a specialized zone, in steps S10402 to S10413, similar to steps S8502 to S8513 above, it is determined whether or not the current addition is to be a later addition, and if it is not to be a later addition, it is determined at what point in the game the addition effect is to be generated.

In the following explanation, the added effect that occurs in the added winning game (the added effect that occurs at an earlier timing than the later added effect) is also referred to as the immediate added effect, in contrast to the later added effect.

If the command received in step S10401 is an add-on command during a specialized zone, the process for adding on the specialized zone is executed in step S10414, and then the process for setting the add-on effect is terminated.

Before explaining the top-up processing for the specialized zone, we will now explain the presentation in the top-up specialized zone in this embodiment with reference to Figures 183 to 185.

As shown in FIG. 183(a), when moving to the add-on specialized zone, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the words "Probability of adding on increasing." This allows the player to clearly understand that the probability of winning the game number add-on lottery is high. Also, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the total number of games added during the specialized zone is displayed by the number of games added during specialized zone TUG. The number of games added during specialized zone TUG is located, for example, in the upper center of the auxiliary display unit 65, in a position that is particularly likely to catch the player's eye.

In this embodiment, in the specialized zone, not only specific roles but also push order bells and push order replays can win additional bonuses (Figure 129). Therefore, the number of games is increased every game, and the corresponding additional bonus performance is performed, while the display of the number of games to be added TUG in the specialized zone is updated every game.

In this embodiment, among the specific roles in the specialized zone, particularly for watermelon and cherry, there are cases where an immediate addition effect is selected in which an addition effect is performed in the winning game, and cases where a delayed addition effect is selected in which notification of the number of added games is carried over until the end of the specialized zone.

In the following explanation, the add-on effect that occurs in a winning game during a specialized zone is also referred to as an in-zone immediate add-on effect, and the add-on effect that occurs at the end of a specialized zone (an add-on effect that occurs later than the in-zone immediate add-on effect) is also referred to as an in-zone later add-on effect, in contrast to the immediate add-on effect and later add-on effect that occur outside of a specialized zone.

As shown in FIG. 184(a), for example, when the immediate-add-in-zone performance is selected when a watermelon is won, the already-explained additional performance occurs. Such additional performance is a performance in which the winning notification of the additional win and the content of the number of games to be added are simultaneously performed. On the other hand, when the later-add-in-zone performance is selected when a watermelon is won, the first later-add-in character BUP1 is displayed as a winning notification of the additional win due to the watermelon trigger, for example, as a character imitating a green treasure chest corresponding to the watermelon, and the word "GET!!" is displayed to indicate that the first later-add-in character BUP1 (the right to add based on the watermelon trigger) has been acquired. Also, as shown in FIG. 184(b), when the immediate-add-in-zone performance is selected when a cherry is won, the already-explained additional performance occurs in the same way as when the immediate-add-in performance is selected when a watermelon is won. On the other hand, when a cherry is won and the in-zone after-addition performance is selected, the second after-addition character BUP2 is displayed as a winning notification that the cherry has been triggered to add on, for example, as a character resembling a red treasure chest, and the word "GET!!" is displayed to indicate that the second after-addition character BUP2 (the right to add on based on the cherry trigger) has been acquired. The first after-addition character BUP1 and the second after-addition character BUP2 have different display contents so that the player can distinguish them, and specifically, the characters are different colors as described above (BUP1 is green, BUP2 is red, and shown with different dot hatches in the figure).

The acquired first and second added characters BUP1 and BUP2 are displayed in the number of added games in the specialized zone TUG, as shown in FIG. 183(b). In FIG. 183(b), three first added characters BUP1 and one second added character BUP2 are displayed, indicating that the watermelon-triggered zone added performance occurs three times, and the cherry-triggered zone added performance occurs once. Note that FIG. 183(b) shows a situation in which the number of added games in the specialized zone TUG has been updated to "150", which indicates that a total of 150 games have been added by the immediate zone added performance in each game in the specialized zone. More specifically, the situation in which the display in Figure 183(b) is shown is one in which an additional 150 games will occur in the specialized zone, and furthermore, it is confirmed that a post-addition effect will occur four times (three times + one time) during the zone, meaning that there is the potential for an even greater number of games to be added than the 150 games displayed in the additional game count TUG during the specialized zone.

When the number of continued games in the specialized zone becomes 0 and the specialized zone ends, a later-addition effect corresponding to the first later-addition character BUP1 and the second later-addition character BUP2 occurs. Specifically, at the end of the final game in the specialized zone (after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, more specifically, after the medals are paid out), as shown in FIG. 185(a), the word "Later-addition Judge" is displayed, indicating that a later-addition effect during the zone will occur as a content notification of the winning notification by the first later-addition character BUP1 or the second later-addition character BUP2. In addition, a first later-addition game number BUG1 indicating the total number of games of the later-addition (later-addition) generated by the watermelon trigger and a second later-addition game number BUG2 indicating the total number of games of the later-addition (later-addition) generated by the cherry trigger are displayed. FIG. 185(a) shows the situation before the later-addition effect during the zone occurs, and both the later-addition game numbers BUG1 and BUG2 are 0 games.

In the zone after-addition performance, the zone after-addition performance as a content notification is generated for each of the multiple displayed after-addition characters BUP1, BUP2 in sequence (for example, each time the performance switch 66 is operated). For example, one of the multiple displayed first after-addition characters BUP1 is moved to approximately the center of the auxiliary display unit 65 and enlarged, and a content notification corresponding to the winning notification shown by the first after-addition character BUP1 is performed. As a content notification, for example, a treasure chest shown as the first after-addition character BUP1 is opened and the contents are displayed as if they are flying out. The contents correspond to the number of added games, and in FIG. 185 (b), it is shown that an addition (after-addition) of 10 games has occurred. In this case, the first after-addition game number BUG1 is added by 10 games and the display is updated, and the display of the number of added games in the specialized zone TUG is also added by 10 games and updated. Thereafter, the content notification is performed sequentially for the remaining first after-addition characters BUP1.

When the content notification for the first subsequent character BUP1 is completed, the content notification for the second subsequent character BUP2 is made. In this case, as shown in FIG. 186(a), the second subsequent character BUP2 moves to approximately the center of the auxiliary display section 65 and is enlarged, and a content notification corresponding to the winning notification shown in the second subsequent character BUP3 is made. For example, a display is made as if a treasure chest shown as the second subsequent character BUP2 is opened and the contents are flying out. As in the case of the first subsequent character BUP1, the contents correspond to the number of additional games, and FIG. 186(a) shows that an additional (subsequent) of 90 games has occurred. In this case, the second subsequent game number BUG2 is updated by adding 90 games, and the display of the additional game number TUG in the specialized zone is also updated by adding 90 games.

When all content notifications (later-addition during the zone) for the additions that occurred during the specialized zone have been completed, as shown in FIG. 186(b), a ratio notification is made showing the selection ratio (selection rate) between immediate addition and later addition for the addition of watermelons and cherries that occurred during the specialized zone.

Specifically, for an addition caused by a watermelon, the number of times the details of the number of games to be added were announced in the game where the watermelon was won (immediate addition count) and the number of times the details of the number of games to be added were announced at the end of the specialized zone triggered by the watermelon win (later addition count) are displayed as the first ratio display HP1. Also, for an addition caused by a cherry, the number of times the details of the number of games to be added were announced in the game where the cherry was won (immediate addition count) and the number of times the details of the number of games to be added were announced at the end of the specialized zone triggered by the cherry win (later addition count) are displayed as the second ratio display HP2.

In Figure 186 (b), the number of immediate adds triggered by a watermelon win in the current specialized zone is 1, and the number of later adds triggered by a watermelon win is 3, as shown in a stacked bar graph as the first ratio display HP1. Furthermore, the number of immediate adds triggered by a cherry win in the current specialized zone is 2, and the number of later adds triggered by a cherry win is 1, as shown in a stacked bar graph as the second ratio display HP2. In these stacked bar graphs, the areas showing the number of immediate adds and the areas showing the number of later adds are shown in different colors, allowing the player to clearly grasp the difference between these areas (they are shown with different dot hatches in the figure). More specifically, it is visually easy to understand that in this specialized zone, when the jackpot is increased due to a watermelon, one in four (25%) jackpots are chosen to be added immediately, and three in four (75%) jackpots are chosen to be added later; and that in this specialized zone, when the jackpot is increased due to a cherry, two in three (approximately 66%) jackpots are chosen to be added immediately, and one in three (approximately 33%) jackpots are chosen to be added later.

In this embodiment, the ratio at which immediate addition is selected and the ratio at which later addition is selected (probability of winning the later addition lottery) for the addition in the specialized zone are set to differ depending on the set value. In other words, by notifying the ratio between immediate addition and later addition for the specialized zone as described above, the player can predict and understand the set value. Below, the process for notifying the addition in the specialized zone, including the process for notifying the ratio, will be explained in detail.

Figure 187 is a flowchart showing the top-up process for specialized zones.

In step S10501, a process is executed to ascertain the number of games to be added this time. In the following step S10502, a lottery process for later additions in the zone is executed. In the lottery process for later additions in the zone, an add-on performance timing table for the specialized zone is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and a lottery is held to determine whether the current add-on performance will be an immediate addition or a later addition.

As shown in FIG. 188, in the timing table for added effects for the specialized zone, the execution timing of the added effects is set to differ depending on the game result (winning role) that triggered the added win and the setting value. Specifically, the execution timing of the added effects is set to differ depending on the game result that triggered the added win: watermelon (common to strong watermelon and weak watermelon), cherry (common to strong cherry and weak cherry), and others.

In Suika, at setting 1, immediate loading is selected 40% of the time, and later loading is selected 60% of the time. At setting 2, immediate loading is selected 45% of the time, and later loading is selected 55% of the time. At setting 3, immediate loading is selected 50% of the time, and later loading is selected 50% of the time. At setting 4, immediate loading is selected 55% of the time, and later loading is selected 45% of the time. At setting 5, immediate loading is selected 60% of the time, and later loading is selected 40% of the time. At setting 6, immediate loading is selected 65% of the time, and later loading is selected 35% of the time. In other words, the higher the setting value, the lower the selection rate for later loading and the higher the selection rate for immediate loading.

In the case of cherries, at setting 1, immediate addition is selected 10% of the time, and later addition is selected 90% of the time. At setting 2, immediate addition is selected 30% of the time, and later addition is selected 70% of the time. At setting 3, immediate addition is selected 50% of the time, and later addition is selected 50% of the time. At setting 4, immediate addition is selected 70% of the time, and later addition is selected 30% of the time. At setting 5, immediate addition is selected 80% of the time, and later addition is selected 20% of the time. At setting 6, immediate addition is selected 90% of the time, and later addition is selected 10% of the time. In other words, the higher the setting value, the lower the selection rate for later addition and the higher the selection rate for immediate addition, which is common to watermelons.

On the other hand, compared to when the trigger for adding cherries is watermelon, the difference due to the set value of the ratio between immediate and later addition is set to be greater when the trigger is cherries. In other words, for example, when immediate addition is selected, cherries contribute more as a predictive factor in predicting the set value than watermelon. In other words, predicting the set value from the immediate/later addition ratio of cherries has higher prediction accuracy than predicting the set value from the immediate/later addition ratio of watermelon, making it easier to predict the set value.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the winning probability is set so that watermelon is overwhelmingly easier to win than cherries (Figure 179). This winning probability is the same in the specialized zone, and watermelon is easier to win than cherries in the specialized zone. As a result, in a game in which the set value is predicted from the immediate/later add ratio in the specialized zone, watermelon, which has low prediction accuracy, is easier to win, and cherries, which have high prediction accuracy, are harder to win. By doing this, the benefit of winning a cherry, which has a low winning probability, is not only the benefit of the advantage related to the number of added games, but also the benefit of being presented with information that can be useful to the player, such as predictive material for the set value, and it is possible to prevent the proportion of the benefit related to the advantage from being too high.

After executing the in-zone later-addition lottery process in step S10502, it is determined in step S10503 whether or not the in-zone later-addition lottery process has been won. If not won, i.e., if immediate addition has been selected, it is determined in step S10504 whether or not the current addition trigger was watermelon. If it was watermelon, the process proceeds to step S10505, where a process is executed to add 1 to the watermelon immediate-addition counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The watermelon immediate-addition counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of times that an addition has occurred due to a watermelon trigger during the current specialized zone and immediate addition has been selected.

If it is determined in step S10504 that the watermelon trigger was not present, the process proceeds to step S10506. In step S10506, it is determined whether or not the current trigger for adding was a cherry. If it was a cherry, the process proceeds to step S10507, and a process of adding 1 to the cherry instant add counter provided in the various counter area 106e is executed. The cherry instant add counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of times that an add-on has occurred due to a cherry trigger during the current specialized zone and instant add has been selected.

After the processing of step S10505 or step S10507 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S10506, in step S10508, the additional effect is set so that the additional effect (instant add-on effect during the zone) can occur in the current game. Note that in this embodiment, the timing for the additional effect to occur is when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop, but the instant add-on effect during the zone may occur at other times, such as when the first reel stop ON operation is performed or when the second reel stop OFF operation is performed.

After that, in step S10509, the update effect is set so that the number of added games TUG in the specialized zone is updated to a display including the current number of added games at the timing when the immediate add effect occurs in the above-mentioned zone (or at a timing slightly delayed from the timing when the immediate add effect occurs in the zone), and then the added-on processing for the specialized zone is terminated.

As already explained, the data for the added performance in steps S10508 and S10509 is temporarily stored in a predetermined performance data setting area. At the timing when the added performance (instant add-on performance in zone) occurs, the CPU 181 reads out the performance data temporarily stored in the performance data setting area so that the added performance is performed. This also applies to the other added performances described below.

If it is determined in step S10503 that the in-zone later-addition lottery has been won, i.e., later-addition has been selected as the current addition, the process proceeds to step S10510. In step S10510, it is determined whether or not the current addition trigger was watermelon. If it was watermelon, the process proceeds to step S10511, and a process is executed to add 1 to the watermelon later-addition counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The watermelon later-addition counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of times that an addition has occurred due to a watermelon trigger during the current specialized zone and later-addition has been selected.

In the next step S10512, a process is executed to store the number of added games this time in the individual watermelon added area provided in RAM 106. In this embodiment, multiple areas are provided as individual watermelon added areas, specifically, 255 areas are provided. Each area is set to be able to store a number of games from 0 to 999, and the number of games added based on the watermelon trigger can be read out after the fact. For example, if 10 games are stored in the first area and 50 games are stored in the second area, it is possible to know after the fact that an add-on occurred as a watermelon trigger in the specialized zone and the number of added games for the first add-on was 10 games and the number of added games for the next add-on was 50 games, among the cases where an add-on occurred as a watermelon trigger in the specialized zone and a add-on was selected. In step S10512, a process is executed to store the number of added games this time as the watermelon trigger in the area with the smallest number among the areas in which the number of games is not stored in the individual watermelon added areas.

After that, in step S10513, the data is temporarily stored in the performance data setting area so that the first subsequent character BUP1 is displayed as the subsequent character for watermelon when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and then the additional processing for the specialized zone is terminated. Note that it is preferable that the display timing of the first subsequent character BUP1 is the same as the occurrence timing of the immediate addition performance in the above zone or slightly later than that.

If it is determined in step S10510 that the watermelon trigger was not present, the process proceeds to step S10514. In step S10514, it is determined whether the current trigger for adding was a cherry. If it was a cherry, the process proceeds to step S10515, and a process of adding 1 to the cherry later-addition counter provided in the various counter area 106e is executed. The cherry later-addition counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of times that an addition occurred due to a cherry trigger during the current specialized zone and later-addition was selected.

In the next step S10516, a process is executed to store the current number of added games in the individual area for added cherries provided in RAM 106. The individual area for added cherries corresponds to the individual area for added watermelon. That is, in this embodiment, multiple areas are provided for the individual area for added cherries, specifically, 255 areas are provided. Each area is set to be able to store a number of games from 0 to 999, and the number of games added based on the cherry trigger can be read out afterwards. In step S10516, a process is executed to store the current number of added games triggered by a cherry in the area with the smallest number among the areas in the individual area for added cherries in which a number of games is not stored.

After that, in step S10517, the data is temporarily stored in the performance data setting area so that the second subsequent character BUP2 is displayed as a subsequent character for cherries when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and then the specialized zone additional processing is terminated. Note that it is preferable that the display timing of the second subsequent character BUP2 is the same as or slightly later than the occurrence timing of the immediate addition performance during the above-mentioned zone. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S10514, the specialized zone additional processing is terminated as it is.

In this embodiment, in the specialized zone, for triggers other than watermelon and cherry, immediate addition is selected regardless of the set value (Figure 188), so a negative judgment is not made in step S10514. In other words, the judgment process in step S10514 is provided for expansion in cases where a later addition occurs for other triggers.

In addition, in step S10513 or step S10515, if the first subsequent character BUP1 or the second subsequent character BUP2 has already been displayed, the performance data may be set so that the current subsequent character is displayed in line with the first subsequent character BUP1 or the second subsequent character BUP2 that has already been displayed. By unifying the rules for the order of arrangement (for example, by arranging in order from the upper left to the upper right to the lower left to the lower right), it is possible to clearly understand which subsequent character corresponds to which additional winning when the subsequent character performance at the end of the specialized zone described later is performed. In addition, although the first subsequent character BUP1 and the second subsequent character BUP2 are configured to be displayed in separate areas (in FIG. 185, the first subsequent character BUP1 is displayed in the upper left of the screen and the second subsequent character BUP2 is displayed in the upper right of the screen), they may be mixed and the rules for the order of arrangement may be unified. By doing this, in the specialized zone gameplay where watermelon and cherries produce additional bonuses, it becomes easier to know which additional bonuses correspond to which bonus wins.

In addition, when the total number of characters already displayed and the current character to be added reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 5), a combined display character consisting of the current character and the previously displayed character to be added may be displayed. For example, when four first character BUP1s are displayed and a new opportunity to display a first character BUP1 occurs, a first combined display character (e.g., a treasure chest of a different color or shape) is displayed to indicate that a total of five watermelon-triggered characters have been added. In this way, when using a limited display area to display characters corresponding to multiple addition opportunities, it is possible to avoid giving the impression that there is an upper limit (limiter) to the number of addition opportunities due to the lack or small amount of available display area.

Next, the process for setting the specialized zone end effect in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 189. The process for setting the specialized zone end effect is a process that is performed based on receiving a specialized zone end command from the main control unit 101 during the full stop effect setting process (FIG. 51) (step S2316).

As already explained, in this embodiment, when the specialized zone ends, a later-add performance is performed and the ratio of immediate-add/later-add is notified. Specifically, first, in step S10601, a process is performed to grasp the immediate-add counter for watermelon and the immediate-add counter for cherry. In the following step S10602, a process is performed to grasp the later-add counter for watermelon and the later-add counter for cherry. Then, in step S10603, a process is executed to calculate the immediate-add/later-add ratio of the add-on triggered by watermelon and the immediate-add/later-add ratio of the add-on triggered by cherry based on the results of the determination in steps S10601 and S10602, respectively. Then, in step S10604, a process is executed to temporarily store the calculated results in a register or the like.

After that, in steps S10605 to S10620, a process is executed to generate a later-adding effect triggered by watermelon and cherry. That is, in step S10605, it is determined whether the watermelon later-adding counter is greater than 0, i.e., whether it is 1 or greater. If it is 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S10606, and a process is executed to grasp the number of games to be added from the area with the smallest number among the areas in which the number of games is stored in the individual watermelon later-adding area. Then, in step S10607, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that a front effect in the watermelon later-adding effect is performed. In this case, the first later-adding character BUP1 displayed first is selected from among the first later-adding characters BUP1, and the first later-adding character BUP1 is moved to approximately the center of the screen. Then, an operation instruction effect that prompts the user to operate the effect switch 66 is generated.

After executing the process of step S10607, a determination is made in step S10608 as to whether or not the effect switch 66 has been operated, and the process waits until the effect switch 66 is operated. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which a positive determination is made in step S10608 after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., 5 seconds), regardless of whether or not the effect switch 66 has been operated.

After a positive judgment is made in step S10608, in step S10609, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled so that an additional bonus effect is performed. In this case, a treasure chest character serving as the first additional bonus character BUP1 located approximately in the center of the screen is opened, and a display effect is performed in which the number of additional bonus games appears as if it were popping out as the treasure inside (Figure 185 (b)).

In the following step S10610, the display of the first add-on game number BUG1 is controlled so that the add-on game number of the add-on effect performed in step S10609 is added and updated as the watermelon add-on game number display. In step S10611, the display of the add-on game number TUG in the specialized zone is controlled so that the add-on game number of the add-on effect performed in step S10609 is added and updated. Then, in step S10612, the watermelon add-on counter is decremented by 1, and the process returns to step S10605.

When the watermelon-adding counter becomes 0, a negative judgment is made in step S10605, and the process proceeds to step S10613. The processes in steps S10613 to S10620 are for adding cherries, and are substantially the same as the processes in steps S10605 to S10612.

That is, in step S10613, it is determined whether the cherry post-addition counter is greater than 0, i.e., whether it is 1 or greater. If it is 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S10614, where a process is executed to ascertain the number of added games from the area with the smallest number among the areas in which the number of games is stored in the cherry post-addition individual area. Then, in step S10615, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that a pre-effect of the cherry post-addition effect is performed. In this case, the second post-addition character BUP2 displayed first is selected from among the second post-addition characters BUP2, and the second post-addition character BUP2 is moved to approximately the center of the screen. Then, an operation instruction effect is generated to prompt the user to operate the effect switch 66.

After executing the processing of step S10615, in step S10616, it is determined whether or not the effect switch 66 has been operated, and the process waits until the effect switch 66 is operated. Note that, similarly to step S10608 above, a configuration may be adopted in which a positive determination is made in step S10616 after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., 5 seconds), regardless of whether or not the effect switch 66 has been operated.

After a positive judgment is made in step S10616, in step S10617, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled so that an additional performance is performed. In this case, a treasure chest character serving as the second additional character BUP2 located approximately in the center of the screen is opened, and a display performance is performed in which the number of additional games is popped out as the treasure inside (Figure 186 (a)).

In the following step S10618, the display of the second number of added games BUG2 as the number of added games for cherries is controlled so that the number of added games in the added effect performed in step S10617 is added and updated. In step S10619, the display of the number of added games TUG in the specialized zone is controlled so that the number of added games in the added effect performed in step S10617 is added and updated. Then, in step S10620, the cherry added counter is decremented by 1, and the process returns to step S10613.

When the cherry later-addition counter becomes 0, a negative judgment is made in step S10613, and the process proceeds to step S10621. In step S10621, based on the information stored in step S10604, control is performed so that the first ratio display HP1 of immediate/later-addition based on a Suica win and the second ratio display HP2 of immediate/later-addition based on a Cherry win are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (Figure 186 (b)).

Then, in step S10622, initialization processing is performed for various counters for the specialized zone, such as each immediate-load counter and each post-load counter, and then the setting processing for the specialized zone end performance is terminated.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The timing of the additional bonus notification is different depending on the setting value. More specifically, the notification of the results of the additional bonus lottery, which is set so that there is no difference in the winning probability or the number of additional bonus games when won depending on the setting value, is performed at different times depending on the setting value. By doing this, it is possible to create differences depending on the setting value, especially for play during attack mode, where differences in playability due to the setting value are unlikely to occur.

As effects with different execution timings of the add-on notification, an immediate add-on effect is performed in the game where the add-on opportunity occurs, and a later add-on effect is performed in a game after the game where the add-on opportunity occurs. In either effect, the notification of the add-on win is performed in the game where the add-on opportunity occurs. More specifically, even when a later add-on effect is performed, the first later add-on character BUP1 and the second later add-on character BUP2 are displayed in the game. In this way, when a later add-on effect is selected, the player can understand that the add-on effect will occur before the add-on effect in the later add-on effect occurs, and the player who understands this can play the game while looking forward to the add-on effect in the later add-on effect. This makes it possible to extend the period during which the first add-on effect can be enjoyed.

Even if the later-addition effect is selected as described above, the fact that the additional lottery has been won is notified in advance, and the higher the setting value, the more likely the immediate-addition effect is to be selected. In this way, by notifying the player in advance that the additional lottery has been won even if the later-addition effect is selected, the additional effect occurs in a state where the player is pleased by the notification, and even if the player predicts and understands that the setting is low due to the additional effect in the later-addition effect, it is possible to compensate for the degree of disappointment the player may feel due to that prediction and understanding (that the setting is low).

The selection ratio of immediate/later addition based on a cherry trigger is made different from the selection ratio of immediate/later addition based on a watermelon trigger. By doing so, when predicting and understanding the setting value based on this selection ratio, the result of the lottery process (whether it is a cherry or a watermelon) is reflected, rather than simply setting the occurrence rate for presentation purposes. Therefore, players who want to predict and understand the setting value will play while hoping that the lottery result in each game will be the desired selection ratio (in the above embodiment, a cherry with a setting difference in the selection ratio), and it is possible to increase attention to the lottery result of each game.

The setting difference is greater for the selection ratio of immediate/later add based on the cherry trigger, which has a low probability of winning, than for the selection ratio of immediate/later add based on the watermelon trigger, which has a high probability of winning. By doing this, the advantage of winning a cherry can be guaranteed by factors other than those that directly affect the player's profits, such as the number of medals paid out based on a cherry win or the add-on performance based on a cherry win. Therefore, the benefits for each lottery result can be set to a range that does not affect the payout rate.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, the timing table of the additional performance for the specialized zone is changed depending on the transition trigger to the specialized zone. Fig. 190 is a flow chart showing the lottery process for additional performance during the zone. As already explained, the lottery process for additional performance during the zone is a process carried out in step S10502 in the additional performance process for the specialized zone (Fig. 187).

In step S10701, it is determined whether the transition to the specialized zone this time was triggered by a cherry (either a strong cherry or a weak cherry). If the transition was not triggered by a cherry, in step S10702, a process is executed to obtain a normal top-up notification timing table from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10701 that the transition to the specialized zone this time was triggered by a cherry, in step S10703, a process is executed to obtain a special top-up notification timing table from the various table storage area 182a. After obtaining any of the notification timing tables, in step S10704, a later-addition lottery is executed based on the notification timing table, and then the later-addition lottery process in this zone is terminated.

The differences between the normal top-up notification timing table and the special top-up notification timing table will be explained with reference to Figure 191. The normal top-up notification timing table is as shown in Figure 188, and Figure 191 shows the parameters (immediate top-up/later top-up selection rate) at the time top-up occurs due to a Suica win as a reference value in the normal top-up notification timing table.

In other words, in the special add-on notification timing table, the parameters (immediate add-on/later add-on selection rate) at the time of the occurrence of the add-on triggered by the winning of Suica are different from those in the normal add-on notification timing table. Specifically, in the special add-on notification timing table, in setting 1, immediate add-on is selected at 10%, and later add-on is selected at 90%. In setting 2, immediate add-on is selected at 30%, and later add-on is selected at 70%. In setting 3, immediate add-on is selected at 50%, and later add-on is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate add-on is selected at 70%, and later add-on is selected at 30%. In setting 5, immediate add-on is selected at 80%, and later add-on is selected at 20%. In setting 6, immediate add-on is selected at 90%, and later add-on is selected at 10%. In other words, the higher the setting value, the lower the selection rate of later add-on and the higher the selection rate of immediate add-on, which is the same as the parameters at the time of the winning of Suica in the normal add-on notification timing table.

On the other hand, compared to the normal top-up notification timing table, the special top-up notification timing table is set so that the difference due to the setting value of the ratio between immediate top-up and later top-up is larger. In other words, for example, when immediate top-up is selected, the specialized zone transitioned to by a cherry trigger contributes more to the prediction of the set value than the specialized zone transitioned to by other specific role triggers. In other words, predicting the set value from the immediate top-up/later top-up ratio in the specialized zone transitioned to by a cherry trigger has higher prediction accuracy than predicting the set value from the immediate top-up/later top-up ratio in the specialized zone transitioned to by other specific role triggers, making it easier to predict the set value. In other words, the specialized zone transitioned to by a cherry trigger can be said to be a zone where the set value is easier to predict.

Moreover, in the special top-up notification timing table in this modified example, the immediate/later top-up ratio based on Suica and the immediate/later top-up ratio based on Cherry are common to all set values. By doing this, each top-up trigger can be treated as common data when predicting and understanding the set values based on these ratios, and the population can be increased.

By doing this, it is possible to set up specialized zones with completely different gameplay characteristics, in which the set value can be predicted and understood, without changing the add-on performance in the specialized zone. This makes it possible to create new gameplay characteristics that move away from the conventional gameplay characteristics of simply wanting a specialized zone with a large number of add-on games, and instead, to want a specialized zone with an easier-to-predict set value.

In particular, by making the setting of the specialized zone that is entered when a cherry occurs, which has a low probability of winning, easier to predict and understand, it is possible to add the benefit of winning a result with a low probability of winning without affecting the payout rate.

Moreover, the specialized zone that is triggered by cherries and the specialized zone that is triggered by other specific roles only differ in the timing table of the added-on notification used for the selection of immediate/later added-on, and does not require changes to the probability of winning a small role or the probability of winning an added-on, making it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent playability with a very simple configuration.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, when the immediate-add-on-in-zone effect is selected, the add-on effect timing table is changed. Fig. 192(a) is a flowchart showing the process of the later-add-on-in-zone lottery in this modified example.

In step S10801, a process is performed to obtain a table counter ATK from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. The table counter ATK is a counter that the CPU 181 uses to identify the additional performance timing table to be obtained in the current subsequent additional lottery. That is, in step S10802, a process is performed to obtain an additional notification timing table corresponding to the value of the table counter ATK obtained in step S10801 from the various table memory areas 182a of the ROM 182.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 193, multiple add-on timing tables are provided as the add-on notification timing table, and four add-on notification timing tables, the first add-on notification timing table to the fourth add-on notification timing table, are provided. Note that in this modified example, there is no difference in the selection rate between immediate and later addition, such as between cherries, watermelons, and other specific roles, and immediate and later addition are selected at a common selection rate for any specific role. Therefore, when a later addition performance is selected during the zone, the character displayed is not associated with a role for which later addition was selected, such as the first later addition character BUP1 or the second later addition character BUP2, but a common character is displayed. Also, in this modified example, no ratio notification is performed at the end of the specialized zone.

The first top-up notification timing table is the table that is selected when the table counter ATK is 1. In this table, the selection rate for immediate top-up and later top-up is both set to 50%, regardless of the setting value.

The second add-on notification timing table is a table that is selected when the table counter ATK is 2. In this table, in setting 1, immediate add-on is selected at 40% and later add-on is selected at 60%. In setting 2, immediate add-on is selected at 45% and later add-on is selected at 55%. In setting 3, immediate add-on is selected at 50% and later add-on is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate add-on is selected at 55% and later add-on is selected at 45%. In setting 5, immediate add-on is selected at 60% and later add-on is selected at 40%. In setting 6, immediate add-on is selected at 65% and later add-on is selected at 35%. In other words, the higher the setting value, the lower the selection rate for later add-on and the higher the selection rate for immediate add-on.

The third add-on notification timing table is a table that is selected when the table counter ATK is 3. In this table, in setting 1, immediate addition is selected at 30%, and later addition is selected at 70%. In setting 2, immediate addition is selected at 40%, and later addition is selected at 60%. In setting 3, immediate addition is selected at 50%, and later addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate addition is selected at 60%, and later addition is selected at 40%. In setting 5, immediate addition is selected at 70%, and later addition is selected at 30%. In setting 6, immediate addition is selected at 80%, and later addition is selected at 20%. In other words, the higher the setting value, the lower the selection rate for later addition and the higher the selection rate for immediate addition, which is common to the second add-on notification timing table, but the difference in the ratio between immediate addition and later addition due to the setting value is larger in the third add-on notification timing table than in the second add-on notification timing table.

The fourth add-on notification timing table is a table that is selected when the table counter ATK is 4 or more. In this table, in setting 1, immediate add-on is selected at 10%, and later add-on is selected at 90%. In setting 2, immediate add-on is selected at 30%, and later add-on is selected at 70%. In setting 3, immediate add-on is selected at 50%, and later add-on is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate add-on is selected at 70%, and later add-on is selected at 30%. In setting 5, immediate add-on is selected at 90%, and later add-on is selected at 10%. In setting 6, immediate add-on is selected at 100%, and later add-on is selected at 0% (not selected). In other words, the higher the set value, the lower the selection rate for later loading and the higher the selection rate for immediate loading, which is common to the second and third add-on notification timing tables; however, the difference in the ratio between immediate loading and later loading due to the set value is larger in the fourth add-on notification timing table than in the second and third add-on notification timing tables.

Returning to the explanation of the in-zone later-addition lottery process, after one add-on notification timing table is obtained from each of the above-mentioned add-on notification timing tables in step S10802, later-addition lottery process is executed in step S10803. Then, in step S10804, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S10803 was immediate add-on. If it is immediate add-on, in step S10805, a process is executed to increment the table counter ATK by 1. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10804 that it is later add-on rather than immediate add-on, in step S10806, a process is executed to set the table counter ATK to its initial value of 1.

That is, in this modified example, when immediate loading is selected in the later loading lottery, the table counter ATK is incremented by one, and when later loading is selected, the table counter ATK returns to its initial value of 1. As described above, the value of the table counter ATK is associated with the type of add-on notification timing table used in the later loading lottery, and it is set so that the larger the value of the table counter ATK is when the notification timing table obtained is, the larger the difference due to the setting value of the immediate loading/later loading ratio will be.

More specifically, in all notification timing tables (except the first top-up notification timing table), the higher the setting, the more likely it is that immediate top-up is selected, and the lower the setting, the less likely it is that immediate top-up is selected. The larger the value of the table counter ATK is in the notification timing table obtained, the greater the difference between the ease of selecting immediate top-up at a high setting and the ease of selecting immediate top-up at a low setting. For example, in the second top-up notification timing table obtained when the table counter ATK is 2, immediate top-up is selected with a 65% probability in setting 6, and immediate top-up is selected with a 40% probability in setting 1, which is a difference of about 1.6 times the probability. On the other hand, in the fourth top-up notification timing table obtained when the table counter ATK is 4, immediate top-up is selected with a 100% probability in setting 6, and with a 10% probability in setting 1, which is a difference of 10 times the probability. Therefore, the larger the value of the table counter ATK is, that is, the more consecutively immediate top-up is selected, the easier it becomes to infer the setting value from the selection ratio between immediate top-up and later top-up.

Moreover, the more consecutive selections of immediate loading are made, the more likely the notification timing table is to be selected on the high setting side, so the fact that immediate loading is selected consecutively can itself be a factor supporting (predicting) that the setting is high. For example, as shown in FIG. 193, when switching between the first to fourth add-on notification timing tables is used, the probability that immediate loading is selected four times in a row is 0.6% for setting 1, while it is 2.7% for setting 2, 6.2% for setting 3, 11.6% for setting 4, 18.9% for setting 5, and 26% for setting 6, and the difference between setting 1 and setting 6 is about 43 times the probability difference. And, as described above, the higher the setting, the more likely the setting is to be selected for immediate loading, so the configuration is such that the difference in the consecutive probabilities widens exponentially when predicting the setting value based on the continuity of immediate loading.

In other words, for example, in a configuration that uses only the second top-up notification timing table (a configuration that does not switch to the third or fourth top-up notification timing table), the probability that immediate top-up is selected four times in a row is approximately 2.7% for setting 1 and approximately 17.9% for setting 6, which is approximately seven times the probability between setting 1 and setting 6, and is smaller than the difference in a configuration in which the notification timing table is switched as in this modified example. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to create a setting difference without switching the notification timing table, the difference in the immediate/later top-up ratio due to the setting value must be made larger, and it becomes possible to a certain extent to determine whether the setting is high or low with a single top-up, as with the fourth top-up notification timing table.

Therefore, by using switching of the notification timing table as in the above configuration, it is possible to gradually narrow down the setting value, thereby increasing the interest of the game of predicting the setting value.

In the lottery process for later addition during the zone (FIG. 192(a)), after the processing of step S10805 or step S10806 is performed, the display background change processing is performed in step S10807, and then the lottery process for later addition during the zone is terminated. In the display background change processing, the display background color in the performance during the specialized zone of the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed in correspondence with the value of the table counter ATK. For example, as shown in FIG. 192(b), if the table counter ATK is 1, the background color is displayed in white, if the table counter ATK is 2, the background color is displayed in yellow, if the table counter ATK is 3, the background color is displayed in green, and if the table counter ATK is 4 or more, the background color is displayed in red. In this way, the player can easily grasp the current value of the table counter ATK, that is, the number of times that immediate addition has been selected consecutively, and it is possible to liven up the game in which immediate addition is accumulated to help predict the setting value by changing the performance (changing the background color).

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the timing table for notifying the addition is switched based on the number of games in the advantageous zone in which the specialized zone is executed, etc. Fig. 194 is a flowchart showing the process of the lottery for the addition in the zone in this modified example.

In step S10901, a process is performed to determine the current number of games in the advantageous zone. As described above, the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is managed by the main control unit 101, but in this modified example, the display control unit 81 is also configured to have a similar counter, or the main control unit 101 is configured to output a command, so that the display control unit 81 can also determine the current number of games played in the advantageous zone.

In step S10902, an add-on notification timing table corresponding to the current number of games in the favorable zone is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S10903, a later-add-on lottery is executed, and the later-add-on lottery processing in this zone is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 195(a), the timing table for notifying addition of the bonus in this modified example is set so that the ratio of immediate addition/later addition varies depending on the number of games played in the advantageous zone (number of games played in the advantageous zone AG) and the setting value. Specifically, when the number of games played in the advantageous zone is 1 to 99, immediate addition and later addition are both selected with a 50% probability regardless of the setting value. When the number of games played is 100 to 499, in setting 1, immediate addition is selected with a 40% probability and later addition is selected with a 60% probability. In setting 2, immediate addition is selected with a 45% probability and later addition is selected with a 55% probability. In setting 3, immediate addition is selected with a 50% probability and later addition is selected with a 50% probability. In setting 4, immediate addition is selected with a 55% probability and later addition is selected with a 45% probability. In setting 5, immediate addition is selected with a 60% probability and later addition is selected with a 40% probability. In setting 6, immediate addition is selected with a 65% probability and later addition is selected with a 35% probability. In other words, when the number of games played is between 100 and 499, the higher the setting, the more likely it is that immediate addition will be selected.

When the number of games played in the favorable zone is between 500 and 999, in setting 1, immediate addition is selected at 30% and later addition is selected at 70%. In setting 2, immediate addition is selected at 40% and later addition is selected at 60%. In setting 3, immediate addition is selected at 50% and later addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate addition is selected at 60% and later addition is selected at 40%. In setting 5, immediate addition is selected at 70% and later addition is selected at 30%. In setting 6, immediate addition is selected at 80% and later addition is selected at 20%. Also, when the number of games played is between 1000 and 1399, in setting 1, immediate addition is selected at 10% and later addition is selected at 90%. In setting 2, immediate addition is selected at 30% and later addition is selected at 70%. In setting 3, immediate addition is selected at 50% and later addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate add-on is selected at 70% and later add-on is selected at 30%. In setting 5, immediate add-on is selected at 90% and later add-on is selected at 10%. In setting 6, immediate add-on is selected at 100% and later add-on is selected at 0% (not selected). Then, when the number of games played reaches 1400-1500, in setting 1, immediate add-on is selected at 0% (not selected) and later add-on is selected at 100%. In setting 2, immediate add-on is selected at 10% and later add-on is selected at 90%. In setting 3, immediate add-on is selected at 50% and later add-on is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate add-on is selected at 80% and later add-on is selected at 20%. In settings 5 and 6, immediate add-on is selected at 100% and later add-on is selected at 0% (not selected).

In other words, as the number of games played in the advantageous zone increases, the higher the set value, the easier it becomes to select immediate addition, and the greater the difference in the set value in the selection rate between immediate addition and delayed addition. By doing this, the more advantageous zones are played, the easier it becomes to predict the set value when adding on during the specialized zone, and it becomes possible to award bonuses other than the number of medals won as a bonus for the advantageous zone continuing for a long time.

As already explained, when the number of games played in the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit of 1,500 games, the advantageous zone is forcibly ended. Therefore, when the number of games played approaches 1,500 games, there is a possibility that the benefit (addition) of moving to the specialized zone will not be fully obtained. In this regard, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to create the benefit of moving to the specialized zone even in a situation where the number of games played is close to the upper limit and expectations for the addition in the specialized zone may be low.

<Modification 4>
In this modification, the parameters of the additional notification timing table are different from those in the modification 3. Fig. 195(b) shows the additional notification timing table in this modification.

In the timing table for notifying the addition of bonuses in this modified example, the relationship between the number of games played in the advantageous zone and the setting value is reversed from that in modified example 3 above. More specifically, when the number of games played in the advantageous zone is 1 to 99, in settings 1 and 2, immediate addition is selected at 100%, and later addition is selected at 0% (not selected). In setting 3, immediate addition is selected at 80%, and later addition is selected at 20%. In setting 4, immediate addition is selected at 50%, and later addition is selected at 50%. In setting 5, immediate addition is selected at 10%, and later addition is selected at 90%. In setting 6, immediate addition is selected at 0% (not selected), and later addition is selected at 100%. In other words, in the early stages of the advantageous zone, the lower the setting, the more likely it is that immediate addition will be selected, and the higher the setting, the more likely it is that later addition will be selected.

When the number of played games is 100-499, in setting 1, immediate add-on is selected at 100% and later add-on is selected at 0% (not selected). In setting 2, immediate add-on is selected at 90% and later add-on is selected at 10%. In setting 3, immediate add-on is selected at 70% and later add-on is selected at 30%. In setting 4, immediate add-on is selected at 50% and later add-on is selected at 50%. In setting 5, immediate add-on is selected at 30% and later add-on is selected at 70%. In setting 6, immediate add-on is selected at 10% and later add-on is selected at 90%. In other words, when comparing the number of played games of 1-99 and 100-499, the fact that immediate add-on is more likely to be selected as the setting value increases is common to the above-mentioned modified example 3, but in the first place, in a situation where the number of played games is small, the difference in the selection rate between immediate add-on and later add-on depending on the setting value is overwhelmingly large. In other words, in the early stages of the advantageous zone, it is easier to predict and understand the setting value.

When the number of games played in the favorable zone is between 500 and 999, in setting 1, immediate addition is selected 80% of the time, and later addition is selected 20% of the time. In setting 2, immediate addition is selected 70% of the time, and later addition is selected 30% of the time. In setting 3, immediate addition is selected 60% of the time, and later addition is selected 40% of the time. In setting 4, immediate addition is selected 50% of the time, and later addition is selected 50% of the time. In setting 5, immediate addition is selected 40% of the time, and later addition is selected 60% of the time. In setting 6, immediate addition is selected 30% of the time, and later addition is selected 70% of the time. Also, when the number of games played is between 1000 and 1399, in setting 1, immediate addition is selected 65% of the time, and later addition is selected 35% of the time. In setting 2, immediate addition is selected 60% of the time, and later addition is selected 40% of the time. In setting 3, immediate addition is selected 55% of the time, and later addition is selected 45% of the time. At setting 4, immediate add-on has a 50% chance of being selected, and later add-on has a 50% chance of being selected. At setting 5, immediate add-on has a 45% chance of being selected, and later add-on has a 55% chance of being selected. At setting 6, immediate add-on has a 40% chance of being selected, and later add-on has a 60% chance of being selected. And when the number of games played reaches between 1400 and 1500, immediate add-on and later add-on both have a 50% chance of being selected, regardless of the setting value.

In other words, as the advantageous zone progresses, the setting difference in the selection rate for immediate/later addition becomes smaller. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which the setting value can be predicted and understood. In other words, for example, the initial number of games in attack mode in the advantageous zone is 50 games, and if an opportunity to add occurs within these 50 games, it is possible to at least predict and understand the setting value. This makes it easier to play a game that involves predicting and understanding the setting value, making it possible to fully enjoy such a game.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, the display remaining number counter HG is used instead of the number of games played in the advantageous zone as a parameter of the additional notification timing table in the above modification 3 and modification 4. As already explained, the display remaining number counter HG indicates the number of games remaining in the attack mode displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

In this modified example, in step S10901, instead of determining the number of games in the favorable zone, a process is performed to determine the display remaining number counter HG. Then, in step S10902, a timing table for adding notification according to the display remaining number counter HG is obtained, and in step S10903, a lottery for adding is performed.

As shown in FIG. 195(c), the timing table for adding notification in this modified example is set so that the ratio of immediate addition/later addition varies depending on the display remaining number counter HG and the setting value. Specifically, when the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99, in settings 1 and 2, immediate addition is selected at 80%, and later addition is selected at 20%. In settings 3 and 4, immediate addition is selected at 85%, and later addition is selected at 15%. In settings 5 and 6, immediate addition is selected at 90%, and later addition is selected at 10%. When the display remaining number counter HG is 100 to 299, in setting 1, immediate addition is selected at 30%, and later addition is selected at 70%. In setting 2, immediate addition is selected at 40%, and later addition is selected at 60%. In setting 3, immediate addition is selected at 50%, and later addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate addition is selected at 60% and later addition is selected at 40%. In setting 5, immediate addition is selected at 70% and later addition is selected at 30%. In setting 6, immediate addition is selected at 80% and later addition is selected at 20%. And, when the display remaining number counter HG is 300 or more, in settings 1 and 2, immediate addition is selected at 20% and later addition is selected at 80%. In settings 3 and 4, immediate addition is selected at 15% and later addition is selected at 85%. In settings 5 and 6, immediate addition is selected at 10% and later addition is selected at 90%.

In other words, when the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99 and when it is 300 or more, the immediate/later-add ratios are the same for settings 1 and 2, settings 3 and 4, and settings 5 and 6. Therefore, when the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99 or 300 or more, it is indistinguishable between settings 1 and 2, settings 3 and 4, and settings 5 and 6 when narrowing down the setting values from the immediate/later-add ratio. On the other hand, when the display remaining number counter HG is 200 to 299, the immediate/later-add ratios are set to be different for each of settings 1 to 6. Therefore, from the perspective of narrowing down the setting values, it is particularly preferable for the display remaining number counter HG to be 200 to 299 rather than 300 or more. In other words, rather than being notified that there are many games remaining in attack mode and you can expect to win a large number of medals, there will be times when a situation where a notification of a smaller number of games remaining in attack mode is more preferable, making it possible to create new gameplay that breaks away from the traditional one-sided gameplay of aiming to win medals.

Furthermore, when comparing the case where the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99 with the case where it is 300 or more, the ratio of immediate addition/later addition is reversed for all set values. In detail, when the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99, immediate addition is more likely to be selected than later addition for all set values, and when the display remaining number counter HG is 300 or more, later addition is more likely to be selected than immediate addition for all set values. In other words, in a situation where a notification is given that the number of remaining games in attack mode is low, immediate addition, which increases the number of remaining games immediately, is more likely to be selected, and in a situation where a notification is given that the number of remaining games in attack mode is high, later addition, which increases the number of remaining games afterwards, is more likely to be selected. In this way, in the former case, a sense of security is provided by the increase in the number of remaining games, which is low, and in the latter case, a sense of superiority is provided by the accumulation of the right to increase the number of remaining games, making it possible to produce a performance that corresponds to the situation and the player's emotions.

<Modification 6>
The configuration regarding the immediate addition/later addition ratio is not limited to only the specialized zone in the attack mode, but may also be applied to other zones than the specialized zone. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the addition performance in this modified example.

In step S11001, it is determined whether or not the zone is a specialized zone, and if so, in step S11026, the specialized zone add-on process is executed. This add-on process is as described above. If it is determined in step S11001 that the zone is not a specialized zone, the number of games to be added this time is determined in step S11002, and a later-addition lottery is held in step S11003. In the later-addition lottery, the add-on notification timing table in this modified example is configured to use a table with different immediate-addition/later-addition ratios for watermelon and cherry as shown in Figure 188, but other tables may also be used. In step S11004, it is determined whether or not the later-addition lottery has been won, and if it is determined that the lottery has not been won and immediate-addition has been selected, the process proceeds to step S11005.

In step S11005, it is determined whether the current addition was triggered by a watermelon. If it was triggered by a watermelon, in step S11006, a process is executed to increment the total watermelon instant addition counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of RAM 183 by 1. The total watermelon instant addition counter is a counter that allows CPU 181 to grasp the number of times that an instant addition effect has occurred due to a watermelon trigger in the current attack mode. If it is determined in step S11005 that it was not triggered by a watermelon, in step S11007, it is determined whether it was triggered by a cherry. If it was triggered by a cherry, in step S11008, a process is executed to increment the total cherry instant addition counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of RAM 183 by 1. The total cherry instant addition counter is a counter that allows CPU 181 to grasp the number of times that an instant addition effect has occurred due to a cherry trigger in the current attack mode. The processes in steps S11005 to S11008 correspond to the processes in steps S10504 to S10507.

After executing either step S11006 or step S11008, or if a negative judgment is made in step S11007, proceed to step S11009. The processes in steps S11009 to S11015 are the same as those in steps S10405 to S10411 above.

If it is determined in step S11004 that a later-addition win has occurred, the process proceeds to step S11016. In step S11016, a process is executed to set a later-addition flag in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. The later-addition flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to determine that there has been at least one additional addition that will result in a later-addition performance. After executing the process of step S11016, the process for the later-addition performance is executed in steps S11017 to S11024. The process of steps S11017 to S11024 corresponds to the process of steps S10510 to S10517 above.

That is, in step S11017, it is determined whether the current addition is a watermelon trigger. If it is a watermelon trigger, in step S11018, a process is executed to increment the watermelon add-on counter by 1. In the following step S11019, a process is executed to store the current number of added games in the individual watermelon add-on area. Then, in step S11020, the display setting is executed for the first add-on character BUP1 as the watermelon add-on character.

If it is determined in step S11017 that the trigger is not a watermelon trigger, then in step S11021 it is determined whether or not the trigger is a cherry trigger. If it is a cherry trigger, then in step S11022, a process is executed to increment the cherry add-on counter by 1. In the following step S11023, a process is executed to store the current number of add-on games in the individual cherry add-on area. Then, in step S11024, the display setting is executed for the second add-on character BUP2 as the cherry add-on character.

After executing either step S11020 or step S11024, or if a negative judgment is made in step S11021, the process proceeds to step S11025. In step S11025, the process subtracts the current number of added games from the later-addition counter BG, and then ends the process of setting the added-on effect. The process of step S11023 corresponds to the process of step S8607 above.

Although detailed explanation using figures is omitted, as described above, when the remaining number of games displayed in attack mode becomes a predetermined number of games due to the later addition flag being set, a later addition effect occurs. In this case, similar to the processing of steps S10605 to S10620 in FIG. 189, if there are multiple pieces of information to be later added, for example, based on the operation of the effect switch 66, the later addition effect is generated for each additional addition trigger while performing the process of acquiring and erasing the information stored in each individual area.

In this case, when the later-adding effect is executed, a process is executed to add the value of the later-adding counter for watermelon to the later-adding counter for total watermelon provided in the various counter areas 183b of RAM 183, a process is executed to add the value of the later-adding counter for cherries to the later-adding counter for total cherries provided in the various counter areas 183b of RAM 183, and then the process corresponding to the above steps S10605 to S10620 in the later-adding effect is executed. In this case, as described above, the later-adding counter for watermelon and the later-adding counter for cherries are decremented by one each time a later-adding effect is generated, while the values of the later-adding counter for total watermelon and the later-adding counter for total cherries do not change even when a later-adding effect is executed. By doing this, it is possible to calculate the immediate-adding/later-adding ratio after the fact, as shown below.

The process for setting the attack mode end effect will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 197. As already explained, the process for setting the attack mode end effect is executed by the display control device 81 after each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stops in the attack mode end game.

First, in step S11101, a process is performed to determine the total number of medals acquired. In the following step S11102, a process is performed to determine the number of games to be continued. As already explained, the total number of medals acquired and the number of games to be continued are displayed in the attack mode end presentation, and the processes in steps S11101 and S11102 are for displaying this information.

In step S11103, a process is executed to grasp the total watermelon immediate-add counter and the total cherry immediate-add counter. In the following step S11104, a process is executed to grasp the total watermelon later-add counter and the total cherry later-add counter. As described above, the total watermelon later-add counter and the total cherry later-add counter are counters to which the values of the watermelon later-add counter and the cherry later-add counter are added when the later-add performance is performed.

Then, in step S11105, a process is performed to calculate the total watermelon immediate/later-add ratio and the total cherry immediate/later-add ratio, and in step S11106, a process is performed to display these calculated ratios on the auxiliary display unit 65. After that, in step S11107, a process for ending the display when the attack mode ends, such as an initialization process for various counters, is executed, and then the process for setting the attack mode end performance is terminated.

An example of the attack mode end effect is shown in FIG. 198. In this example, as shown in FIG. 198(a), the number of games continued and the number of medals acquired are displayed to notify the end of the attack mode. For example, as an instruction character to prompt the operation of the effect switch 66, a character resembling a button is displayed together with an arrow character indicating the operation direction of the button, and the word "PUSH" is displayed to indicate that the button should be pressed. When the effect switch 66 is operated, as shown in FIG. 198(b), a graph corresponding to the total watermelon immediate/later addition ratio in the current attack mode is displayed as the third ratio display HP3, and a graph corresponding to the total cherry immediate/later addition ratio in the current attack mode is displayed as the fourth ratio display HP4. In the example of FIG. 198(b), the third ratio display HP3 and the fourth ratio display HP4 are displayed as pie charts, but they may be stacked bar graphs like the first ratio display HP1 and the second ratio display HP2 in FIG. 196(b).

By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the gameplay based on the immediate/later-add ratio of the add-on performance not only in the specialized zone but throughout the entire attack mode. In particular, considering that the probability of winning cherries is about 1 in 150 and the probability of winning watermelons is about 1 in 50, the opportunity to win cherries or watermelons in the limited number of games in the specialized zone (5 games in each of the above embodiments) is extremely rare. In that case, even if you try to play the game of predicting and understanding the set value using the cherry or watermelon opportunity that you have prepared, it may be difficult to get such an opportunity during the specialized zone. On the other hand, if you try to solve this by increasing the probability of winning cherries or watermelons or lengthening the number of continuous games in the specialized zone, there is a concern that the ball output rate will rise. Therefore, by making cherries and watermelons in the attack mode the target of the gameplay based on the immediate/later-add ratio as in the above configuration, it is possible to preferably realize such gameplay while avoiding a rise in the ball output rate.

<Modification 7>
Information regarding the timing of execution of the top-up notification, such as the immediate/later-add ratio, is not limited to being displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this modified example, a configuration is described that allows information regarding such execution timing to be read by a mobile terminal or the like owned by a player. FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing processing for a mobile terminal executed by the display control device 81. Processing for a mobile terminal is, for example, processing performed by processing that is periodically started in the display control device 81. Note that in this modified example, processing for information regarding the immediate/later-add ratio during the advantageous zone is particularly described among the processing for a mobile terminal.

In step S11201, it is determined whether or not the favorable zone has started. If the favorable zone has started, in step S11202, measurement of each counter, the total watermelon immediate addition counter, the total watermelon later addition counter, the total cherry immediate addition counter, and the total cherry later addition counter, is started. More specifically, for example, a process is executed to set a flag that makes it possible to determine whether or not measurement is in progress.

If a negative judgment is made in step S11201, or after the processing of step S11202 is executed, in step S11203, it is judged whether or not the user has logged out. In this modified example, the information on the immediate/later-add ratio can be output only when the user information is entered on the management screen of the gaming machine and the user is logged in. In the above step S11203, a positive judgment is made when a logged-in user logs out, while a negative judgment is made without a positive judgment in a situation where the user was not originally logged in. If a positive judgment is made in step S11203 and the logged-in user logs out, in step S11204, the measurement of each counter, such as the total watermelon immediate-add counter, the total watermelon later-add counter, the total cherry immediate-add counter, and the total cherry later-add counter, is terminated, and the initialization process of each of these counters is executed. In other words, each counter is initialized by logging out. On the other hand, when the advantageous zone starts, the measurement of each counter is started regardless of whether the user is logged in or not. This prevents issues such as the counter not being measured because the user forgot to log in, and also prevents a successor user from reading the user's game data.

If a negative judgment is made in step S11203, or after the processing of step S11204 is executed, the process proceeds to step S11205. In step S11205, it is judged whether or not a request for ratio display has been made. This request is, for example, an operation according to the operation instruction character (FIG. 198(a)) during the attack mode end performance shown in the above-mentioned modified example 6, and includes the operation of the performance switch 66. If a positive judgment is made in step S11205, the process proceeds to step S11206, and it is judged whether or not it is in an advantageous period. If it is not in an advantageous period, in step S11207, a process is performed to display the total watermelon immediate/later addition ratio and the total cherry immediate/later addition ratio. Incidentally, in the game at the end of the advantageous period (the game in which the attack mode end performance is executed), it is judged that it is not in an advantageous period.

In this case, instead of displaying these ratios on the auxiliary display unit 65 as in FIG. 198(b), a code display (such as a two-dimensional code or a barcode) that can be read on a mobile terminal or the like is displayed as shown in FIG. 200(a). By reading such a code display, the player can perform subsequent data analysis, etc. on his or her own mobile terminal or the like. This also reduces the possibility that the displayed content will be read by other players, ensuring the advantage of having this information.

If a positive judgment is made in step S11206 and it is determined that the vehicle is in an advantageous zone, then in step S11208 the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled so that a restricted display is displayed. The restricted display, as shown in FIG. 200(b), means that the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Restricted" while the immediate/later loading ratio is not displayed. In other words, if a request for ratio display is made during an advantageous zone, the output of information relating to the ratio display for that request is restricted. In this way, by making it impossible to infer the setting value from the ratio display during the advantageous zone and making it clear after the advantageous zone has ended, it is possible to avoid situations where the vehicle is so distracted by the ratio display that it is unable to enjoy the advantageous zone.

After executing the processing of step S11207 or step S11208, other processing is executed in step S11209, and then the processing for the mobile terminal is terminated. Note that the other processing corresponds to processing for managing other information that can be read by the mobile terminal (total games played, number of jackpots, number of child role wins, etc.). Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S11205, the processing for the mobile terminal is terminated.

By doing the above, it becomes easier for players to grasp the timing of the additional notification after the fact. In particular, the number of occurrences and details of advantageous events such as winning an additional prize or the number of games played for an additional prize are likely to remain in the memory of players hoping for advantageous events, but the timing of the notification of the advantageous event is likely to be erased from the player's memory at the time the advantageous event occurs, making it difficult to recall the timing of the notification after the fact. In this regard, by configuring the notification timing to be readable by a mobile terminal as in the above configuration, it becomes possible to make the timing of such notification very useful when analyzing data.

<Modification 8>
In a configuration in which the immediate/later ratio is displayed (output) at the end of the attack mode, this display (output) may be configured to be performed partly at the end of the attack mode. In this modified example, when the attack mode is forcibly terminated due to the upper limit of the advantageous zone (1500 games), the above ratio is displayed (output). Figure 201 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the attack mode end presentation in this modified example.

The setting process of this modified example is generally similar to that of the flowchart in FIG. 197. The difference is that, after steps S11301 and S11302 are performed in the same manner as steps S11101 and S11102 in steps S11301 and S11302, it is determined in step S11303 whether or not a forced termination has occurred. If a forced termination has occurred, steps S11304 to S11307 are performed to display (output) the ratio in the same manner as steps S11103 to S11106. Then, in step S11308, initialization processing is performed for each counter, and the setting processing for the attack mode end presentation is terminated. On the other hand, if a forced termination has not occurred and the number of remaining games reaches 0 before the upper limit is reached, the processing of step S11308 is performed without executing steps S11304 to S11307, and then the setting processing for the attack mode end presentation is terminated.

As described above, by outputting information regarding the immediate/later loading ratio based on the forced termination of attack mode, it is possible to compensate for the forced termination of attack mode.

Sixth embodiment
In this embodiment, the player can select the execution timing of the added performance. FIG. 202 is a diagram for explaining the state in this embodiment in which the execution timing of the added performance is selected. In this embodiment, in the game in which the added performance is executed, it is configured to be executed as the performance when all stops. In other words, in this embodiment, the selection of the execution timing of the added performance means the selection of the game in which the added performance is executed.

In this embodiment, in a game in which a specific role that triggers an additional bonus is won during attack mode, it is possible to select the timing of execution of the additional bonus effect when the specific role is won as the additional bonus. In this embodiment, the selection of the execution timing is performed by determining which of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are spinning is to be stopped first. The additional bonus effects with different execution timings include the immediate additional bonus effect shown in the fifth embodiment above, in which the additional bonus effect occurs in the game in which the additional bonus is won, the later additional bonus effect in which the additional bonus effect occurs in a game after the game in which the additional bonus is won and in which the number of remaining games displayed in the attack mode, etc., reaches a predetermined number (1), and the premonition via effect in which the additional bonus effect occurs after the premonition mode is implemented for a predetermined number of games from the game in which the additional bonus is won.

For example, as shown in FIG. 202(a), when a specific combination is won during attack mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Choose your fate by stopping the reels!!" as a notification mode selection effect, informing the player that the mode of the additional performance when the additional combination is won can be selected by operating the stop switches 42-44. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the immediate addition performance is selected when the left reel 32L is stopped first, the later addition performance is selected when the middle reel 32M is stopped first, and the premonition via performance is selected when the right reel 32R is stopped first. Thus, in the notification mode selection effect, characters that imitate the stop switches 42-44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and corresponding characters that correspond to the performance that is selected when the respective stop switches 42-44 are operated are displayed. Specifically, a first corresponding character TP1 (e.g., the character "immediate") indicating an immediate addition effect is displayed in correspondence with the character of stop switch 42, a second corresponding character TP2 (e.g., the character "later") indicating a later addition effect is displayed in correspondence with the character of stop switch 43, and a third corresponding character TP3 (e.g., the character "before") indicating a premonition via effect is displayed in correspondence with the character of stop switch 44. In addition, a chance notification effect (exclamation mark) indicating that the game has won a specific role is also generated, and the chance notification effect and the displays for selecting the execution timing of the above-mentioned additional effects are displayed so as not to overlap with each other.

When the player first operates the left reel 32L in the game, the left reel 32L stops based on the operation, and then the other reels stop, and an additional effect occurs, as shown in FIG. 202 (b1).

When the player first operates to stop the center reel 32M in the game, as shown in FIG. 202(b2), the center reel 32M stops based on the stop operation, and then the other reels also stop, and then a later-addition effect occurs corresponding to the selection of the later-addition effect. In this example, as a later-addition effect, the first later-addition character BUP1 is displayed, indicating that the right to add on based on the watermelon trigger has been acquired. The later-addition effect based on the first later-addition character BUP1, etc. is as described in the fifth embodiment, etc., above.

When the player first stops the right reel 32R in the game, as shown in FIG. 202(b3), the right reel 32R stops based on the stop operation, and then the other reels also stop, and then a premonition via effect occurs corresponding to the selection of the premonition via effect. In this example, as a premonition via effect, the word "Chance" is displayed approximately in the center of the auxiliary display unit 65, and a band displaying "Chance in progress" appears on the auxiliary display unit 65, indicating that the premonition mode has been entered. The additional effect via this premonition mode will be explained later, but the premonition mode continues for the set number of games, and when the set number of games becomes 0, an additional effect occurs.

The processing configuration for achieving the above effects is explained below.

Figure 203 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the additional effects in this embodiment. As already explained, the setting process for the additional effects is a process executed by the display control device 81 when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate in a specific role winning game.

In step S12001, a process is performed to determine the number of games to be added this time. Then, in step S12002, it is determined whether the premonition via flag is set. The premonition via flag is a flag that is set when the player selects the premonition via effect based on the addition trigger. When the premonition via flag is set in step S12002, it means that an addition trigger occurred in a game prior to the game in question, a premonition via effect was selected, and the game is in the premonition mode based on this selection, that is, the premonition effect has not yet occurred. If a positive determination is made in step S12002, in step S12003, a process is performed to determine the number of games to be added this time during the premonition mode, that is, the number of games to be added during which the premonition via effect was selected and no additional effect has yet occurred, and to add the determined number of games to the number of games to be added this time. Then, in step S12004, a process is executed to clear the premonition via flag.

If a negative judgment is made in step S12002, or after the processing of step S12004 is executed, in step S12005, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the notification mode selection effect (FIG. 202(a)) is executed. Then, in step S12006, the processing of setting the notification mode selection flag is executed, and then the processing of setting the additional effect is terminated. The notification mode selection flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to know that the stopping operation of the first reel in the current game is the stopping operation that is the target of the notification mode selection effect.

Next, in a game in which the notification mode selection display is executed, the process when the first reel is operated to stop (first stop ON display setting process) will be described with reference to FIG. 204. This process is carried out in step S2204 in the display setting process for each stop operation (FIG. 49). More specifically, this process is carried out in step S2204 when it is determined in step S2203 that the first stop ON operation is set for the target reel.

In step S12101, it is determined whether the notification mode selection flag is set. If it is not set, in step S12102, other first stop ON time effects that have been set are executed, and then the first stop ON time effect setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S12101 that the notification mode selection flag is set, a process to clear the notification mode selection flag is executed in step S12103. Then, in step S12104, it is determined whether the instant-load effect was selected in this notification mode selection effect, that is, whether or not this first stop ON operation was a stop ON operation of the left reel 32L (left stop switch 42). If a positive determination is made in step S12104, a process to set the instant-load selection flag is executed in step S12105, and then this first stop ON time effect setting process is terminated. The instant-load selection flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to know that the instant-load effect has been selected.

If a negative judgment is made in step S12104, a judgment is made in step S12106 as to whether a later-loading effect was selected in this notification mode selection effect, i.e., whether or not this first stop ON operation was a stop ON operation of the middle reel 32M (middle stop switch 43). If a positive judgment is made in step S12106, a process is executed in step S12107 to set the later-loading selection flag, and then this first stop ON time effect setting process is terminated. The later-loading selection flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to know that a later-loading effect has been selected.

If a negative judgment is made in step S12106, this means that the premonition via effect was selected in the current notification mode selection effect, i.e., the current first stop ON operation was a stop ON operation of the right reel 32R (right stop switch 44). In this case, in step S12108, a process is executed to set the premonition selection flag, and then the first stop ON time effect setting process is terminated. The premonition selection flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to know that the premonition via effect has been selected.

Figure 205 is a flowchart showing the processing for the additional notification effect when all stops are performed in this embodiment. The processing for the additional notification effect when all stops are performed in steps S2309 and S2319 in the processing for setting the effect when all stops are performed (Figure 51). As described above, in this embodiment, all additional effects are performed as the effect when all stops are performed, and are not performed when the first stop is turned ON or the second stop is turned OFF, etc.

In step S12201, it is determined whether the immediate add-on selection flag is set. If the immediate add-on selection flag is set, in step S12202, a process is executed to clear the immediate add-on selection flag. Then, in step S12203, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to execute an add-on performance triggered by the current game (see FIG. 202 (b1)).

If a negative judgment is made in step S12201, it is judged in step S12204 whether or not the later-addition selection flag is set. If the later-addition selection flag is set, a process is executed in step S12205 to clear the later-addition selection flag. After that, in step S12206, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to execute a later-addition effect (see FIG. 202 (b2)). Then, in step S12207, a process is executed to store the current number of added games in the individual area, and in step S12208, a process is executed to set the later-addition flag. The processes in steps S12207 and S12208 correspond to the processes in steps S11016, S11019, S11023, etc., and are storage processes for generating the later-addition effect.

If a negative judgment is made in step S12204, then in step S12209 it is judged whether or not the premonition selection flag is set. If the premonition selection flag is set, then in step S12210 a process is executed to clear the premonition selection flag. After that, in step S12211, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to execute a premonition via effect (see FIG. 202 (b3)). Then, in step S12212, a process is executed to store the current number of added games in an individual area, and in step S12213 a process is executed to draw the number of premonition games. Then, in step S12214, a process is executed to input the number of premonition games drawn in step S12213 to the continuous effect counter, and in step S12215 a process is executed to set the continuous effect flag and the premonition via flag. The process of setting the continuous performance flag in steps S12213, S12214, and S12215 corresponds to the process of steps S2506, S2507, and S2509, and is the process when the premonition mode is set on the display control device 81 side, and the process when the continuous performance is executed based on that. Also, if the premonition via flag is set in step S12216, and the process of setting the additional performance is executed in the subsequent games (the games until the number of premonition games set in step S12212 is played), a positive judgment is made in step S12002.

After executing any of the processes in steps S12203, S12208, and S12215, or after a negative judgment is made in step S12209, the process proceeds to step S12216. The processes in steps S12216 to S12220 are performed when a selection is made to generate an additional effect in a subsequent game, rather than in a game in which an additional effect is won, i.e., when a later additional effect or a premonition via effect is selected.

That is, in step S12216, it is determined whether the later-addition flag is set and whether the current game is a game that generates a later-addition effect. More specifically, if the later-addition flag is set and the display remaining number counter HG is a predetermined value of 1, a positive determination is made in step S12216. If a positive determination is made in step S12216, a process for setting the later-addition effect is executed in step S12217.

Here, the setting process for the rear loading effect in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 206. Note that in the rear loading effect in this embodiment, basically, an effect similar to the rear loading effect in the zone (content notification) shown in the fifth embodiment occurs.

That is, in step S12301, the oldest data is stored in the individual area among the multiple individual areas, and a process is executed to obtain the data (number of added games) of the individual area. In this case, the corresponding added characters BUP1, BUP2, etc. are enlarged and displayed approximately in the center of the auxiliary display unit 65. In the following step S12302, it is determined whether the effect switch 66 has been operated as an effect operation unit, and the process waits until it is operated. If it has been operated, the process proceeds to step S12303, and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the number of added games is displayed together with the effect of opening a treasure chest as a content notification (Fig. 185 (b)). In the following step S12304, a number corresponding to the number of games of the added effect executed in step S12303 is added to the display remaining number counter HG, and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the corresponding display is updated. Then, in step S12305, the data for the current individual area is erased, and in step S12306, a determination is made as to whether or not data for unreported individual areas remains.

If data for unreported individual areas remains in step S12306, the process returns to step S12301 and repeats the processing of steps S12301 to S12305. In other words, the later-addition effects are performed in the order in which the add-on triggers occurred, allowing the player to enjoy the later-addition effects while remembering when the add-on triggers occurred.

If it is determined in step S12306 that no unannounced individual area data remains, the process proceeds to step S12307, where the process of clearing the later-addition flag is executed. Then, in step S12308, as the process of ending the later-addition effect, for example, the total number of games added in the current later-addition effect is announced, and then the process of setting the later-addition effect is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the process for notifying the addition when all reels stop, if a negative judgment is made in step S12216, or after the process of step S12217 is executed, the process proceeds to step S12218. In step S12218, it is judged whether the premonition via flag is set and the continuous performance counter is 0 or not. As already explained, the continuous performance counter is a counter for grasping the number of games in the premonition mode, and is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game. In other words, the game in which the continuous performance counter becomes 0 is the final game in the premonition mode. In this case, the process proceeds to step S12219, and a process for reading the number of added games from the individual area is executed. Then, in step S12220, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the corresponding number of games is added. If a negative judgment is made in step S12218, or after the process of step S12220 is executed, the process for notifying the addition when the reels stop is terminated.

Here we provide additional explanation on the relationship between the winning modes of various specific roles and the first reel, which is the selection operation in the notification mode selection presentation.

When the specific combination is a strong cherry, as already explained, the strong cherry winning is achieved by stopping the symbol combinations corresponding to the 28th minor combination and the 32nd to 35th minor combinations on the winning line (FIG. 17). For both the 28th minor combination and the 32nd to 35th minor combinations, the corresponding symbols on the left reel 32L are the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol (FIG. 10). In this case, the "cherry" symbol is attached to the fourth position on the left reel 32L, and the "second replay" symbol is attached to the sixth position on the left reel 32L. That is, in a 3-bet game, if the left stop switch 42 is operated (ON operation) from the timing when the 18th "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the bottom row to the timing when the fourth "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the bottom row, the corresponding symbol of the strong cherry can be stopped on the winning line. In other words, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the same time that the 5th "LUCKY" symbol to the 17th "WHITE BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L reach the bottom row, the symbols corresponding to the strong cherries will not be able to stop on the pay line, resulting in a so-called missed win.

On the other hand, in the case of a strong cherry, the corresponding symbol on the middle reel 32M is, for example, a "red bell" symbol, a "white bell" symbol, or a "cherry" symbol in the 28th minor combination (FIG. 10), and these symbols are not spaced apart by more than 5 symbols on the middle reel 32M, and any of these symbols can stop on an active line regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the middle stop switch 43. Also, in the case of a strong cherry, the corresponding symbol on the right reel 32R is, for example, a "cherry" symbol, a "first replay" symbol, or a "second replay" symbol in the 28th minor combination (FIG. 10), and any of these symbols can stop on an active line regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the right stop switch 44.

In other words, if the winning addition is a strong cherry, in the notification mode selection performance, if the left reel 32L is stopped first to select the immediate addition performance, the stopping operation may prevent the strong cherry winning, resulting in a miss. On the other hand, in the notification mode selection performance based on a strong cherry, if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped first to select the later addition performance or the premonition via performance, there is no chance of a miss due to the stopping operation. In this way, in selecting the execution timing of the addition performance based on the stopping operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the possibility of a miss is different for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, so that the presence or absence of a miss can be taken into consideration when selecting the execution timing of the addition performance.

For example, players who are concerned that the possibility of missing out due to the conflict between the selection operation and the stop operation may first stop the center reel 32M or the right reel 32R in the notification mode selection effect triggered by the winning of a strong cherry. In this case, the later addition effect or the premonition effect is selected as the added effect, and the added effect occurs in a later game than the game in question, so that the expectation is carried over. On the other hand, if the left reel 32L is stopped first, knowing the possibility of a miss, the immediate addition effect is selected, and the added effect occurs in the game. As a result, even if a miss occurs, the added effect occurs in that game, making it possible to clearly understand whether the small role was not won or whether it was a miss. In this way, a performance that takes into account the risk of missing out when the selection operation and the stop operation compete, and the playability of these selection operations is improved.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

In a game in attack mode where a specific role is won, the timing of execution of the additional effects triggered by the winning of the specific role (the game being executed) is varied based on the stopping operation mode of the game. More specifically, in a game where a specific role is won, if the left reel 32L is stopped first, an immediate addition effect occurs; if the middle reel 32M is stopped first, a later addition effect occurs; and if the right reel 32R is stopped first, a premonition via effect occurs. In this way, by determining the timing of effect execution during the additional role depending on the stopping operation mode of the game where the additional role is won, it is possible to realize additional effects according to the player's preferences.

In particular, because the timing for executing the added-on effect is selected in the added-on winning game, the timing for selecting the execution timing is more likely to be closer to the timing when the added-on trigger occurs, compared to, for example, a configuration in which the selection is made at the start of attack mode or before transitioning to attack mode. This makes it possible to select the execution timing according to the ever-changing situation of attack mode, making it possible to better reflect the player's needs.

While push order notifications occur frequently during attack mode, push order notifications do not occur in games that trigger specific role wins, which are the trigger for adding extra bonuses. In other words, the notification mode selection presentation and the push order notification presentation are set so as not to conflict with each other. This prevents situations where the notification mode selection presentation is set to a push order that will achieve the desired result, leaving no room for selection of the extra bonus. This makes it possible to optimally realize the gameplay provided by the notification mode selection presentation.

As described above, while push order notifications occur frequently during attack mode, push order notifications do not occur when a specific role is won. Therefore, while players aim to win medals through push order notifications, they are likely to progress through the game with the hope that a game will occur in which push order notifications do not occur. In other words, because the above notification mode selection presentation is generated in a game in which push order notifications do not occur, the notification mode selection presentation is performed in a situation where attention has already been heightened, making it possible to ideally realize the playability provided by such presentations.

As already explained, the attack mode is mainly executed in the second RT state, and in the second RT, the probability of winning any of the replays is high, and replay winning is frequently achieved. In addition to push order replays such as fall replays 1 to 3 and second promotion replays 1 and 2, replays that are not subject to push order notification, such as normal replays, can be won during the second RT state. In other words, in the second RT state where replay winning is frequently achieved, not only are there games in which the desired replay winning is achieved by push order notification, but there are also games in which replay winning is achieved without push order notification. Under such a premise, since the configuration is such that the notification mode selection effect is generated when a specific role is won, whether or not the notification mode selection effect occurs functions as a branching effect between a specific role win or a normal replay win. As a result, by taking advantage of the high interest in the notification mode selection effect, the attention level in the normal replay winning game is also increased, making it possible to increase the attention level throughout the attack mode.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, when the number of games in the advantageous period is close to the upper limit, the premonition via effect cannot be selected. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process when the first stop is ON in this modified example.

The processing of steps S12401 to S12407 is the same as the processing of steps S12101 to S12107 described above. If the left reel 32L is the first stop, the immediate-load selection flag is set, and if the center reel 32M is the first stop, the later-load selection flag is set. If it is determined in step S12406 that the center reel 32M is not the first stop, it is determined in step S12408 whether or not the number of games executed in the current favorable zone exceeds a predetermined number of games (1450 games). In other words, if the above-mentioned predetermined number of games is 1450 games, a positive determination is made in step S12408 when there are less than 50 games left until the upper limit of the favorable zone. In this case, even if the right reel 32R is the first stop and the premonition via performance is selected, the process proceeds to step S12405 and the immediate-load selection flag is set. In other words, if an opportunity to add on occurs near the upper limit of the favorable zone, even if the premonition via effect is selected, the immediate addition effect is forcibly selected, and the added effect is generated. In this way, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as the forcible termination of the favorable zone during the premonition mode. Note that, if it is determined in step S12408 that the number of games executed in the current favorable zone is equal to or less than the predetermined number of games, the premonition selection flag is set in step S12409, similar to step S12108, and then the first stop ON time effect setting process is terminated.

As described above, by configuring the notification mode selection presentation to be able to restrict the execution of the presentation selected in relation to the game that forces the end of the advantageous zone, it is possible to avoid an incident in which the advantageous zone (attack mode) ends without the selected presentation being executed.

In the above configuration, the third corresponding character TP3 is displayed when the right reel 32R is brought to the first stop, and the premonition via effect is selected. However, the third corresponding character TP3 may not be displayed in a situation close to a forced end game in a favorable zone. In this case, the first corresponding character TP1, which corresponds to the immediate add-on effect, may be displayed instead of the third corresponding character TP3. However, the above configuration has the advantage of simplifying the effect configuration, since it does not require any changes to the notification mode selection effect itself. Also, if the right reel 32R is brought to the first stop in the notification mode selection effect, the latter add-on effect may be forcibly displayed.

Furthermore, when the middle reel 32M is the first stop and the later-loading effect is selected, the immediate-loading effect may be forcibly configured according to the number of games played in the advantageous zone (if the number of games played is 1,450 or more). Even in this case, the second corresponding character TP2 corresponding to the later-loading effect may not be displayed, or the first corresponding character TP1 corresponding to the immediate-loading effect may be displayed instead of the second corresponding character TP2.

The correspondence between the selection operation performed in the notification mode selection presentation and the execution timing of the selected addition notification may be varied depending on the number of games added when the addition is won. Specifically, for example, when the number of games added is a predetermined number of games (100 games) or more, the addition presentation may be executed at a different execution timing from the execution timing selected by the selection operation with a predetermined probability (50%). More specifically, when the number of games added is a predetermined number of games or more, even if the premonition via presentation is selected, the immediate addition presentation may be executed with a predetermined probability instead of the selected premonition via presentation. In this way, the surprise at the number of games added is added to the surprise at the timing different from the player's will, making it possible to create a presentation that is more surprising to the player.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the notification mode selection effect is executed in a game in which the normal replay is won (a game different from the additional winning game). Fig. 208(a) is a flowchart showing the effect setting process during the normal replay. This process is executed by the display control device 81 during the start effect setting process as the start effect of the normal replay winning game during the attack mode.

In step S12501, it is determined whether the selected counter provided in the various counter area 183b of the RAM 183 is 1 or more. The selected counter indicates the number of games for which the execution timing of the additional effect selected in the notification mode selection effect is valid, and is a counter in which a predetermined value (20) is input by a selection operation and is decremented by 1 each time a game is played.

If the selected counter is 1 or more, the effect setting process for normal replay ends. On the other hand, if the selected counter is 0, the notification mode selection flag is set in step S12502, and then the effect setting process ends. In other words, in a normal replay winning game, the notification mode selection effect can be executed as the first stop ON effect.

In the first stop ON effect setting process in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 209, steps S12601 to S12608 execute the same process as steps S12101 to S12108 above. After executing any of steps S12605, S12607, and S12608, the process proceeds to step S12609, where a predetermined value, for example "20", is input to the selected counter, and the first stop ON effect setting process ends. This results in a positive judgment in step S12501 for the next 20 games. More specifically, by performing a selection operation when a normal replay is won, the notification mode selection effect will not occur even if a normal replay is won again during the next 20 games.

As described above, the process for setting the various additional effects is executed in the process for notifying the addition of the effects when all reels stop (Fig. 205). More specifically, when a normal replay is won, a notification mode selection effect is generated, and by performing a selection operation, either the immediate addition selection flag, the later addition selection flag, or the premonition selection flag is set, and if an additional effect is won within the next 20 games, the execution timing of the additional effect is set in the process for notifying the addition of the effects when all reels stop based on the above selection operation performed in the game prior to the game in which the additional effect was won (based on the immediate addition selection flag, later addition selection flag, or premonition selection flag).

That is, in the notification mode selection performance when the normal replay is won, if the left reel 32L is the first to stop and the immediate add-on performance is selected, the immediate add-on selection flag is set, and if an add-on is won in a subsequent game, an add-on performance occurs in the game in which the add-on is won (an immediate add-on performance occurs). In addition, in the notification mode selection performance when the normal replay is won, if the center reel 32M is the first to stop and the later add-on performance is selected, the later add-on selection flag is set, and if an add-on is won in a subsequent game, an add-on performance occurs when the number of remaining games displayed in the attack mode reaches a predetermined number of games (a later add-on performance occurs). In addition, in the notification mode selection performance when the normal replay is won, if the right reel 32R is the first to stop and the premonition via performance is selected, the premonition selection flag is set, and if an add-on is won in a subsequent game, an add-on performance occurs after passing through the premonition mode (a premonition via performance occurs).

In this way, by making the game in which the notification mode selection effect is executed and the game in which the additional winning is performed different games, it is possible to prevent the selection operation in the notification mode selection effect from competing with the eye-pressing operation for the specific winning combination. This makes it possible to minimize the occurrence of an incident in which the player is too focused on the selection operation in the notification mode selection effect, resulting in a missed opportunity due to a failed eye-pressing operation.

In this modified example, the process for the selected counter for managing the selected counter will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 208(b). The process for the selected counter is implemented as one process in the process for setting the effect when all the counters are stopped (FIG. 51) in the display control device 81.

In step S12511, it is determined whether the selected counter is 1 or more. If it is not 1 or more, that is, if it is 0, the selected counter processing is terminated. If it is 1 or more, in step S12512, the selected counter is decremented by 1. Then, in step S12513, it is determined whether the selected counter has become 0, and if it is not 0, the selected counter processing is terminated. If it has become 0, in step S12514, it is determined whether the later-pickup selection flag or the precursor selection flag is set. If either of these flags is set, in step S12515, the corresponding flag is cleared, and in step S12516, the immediate-pickup selection flag is set, and the selected counter processing is terminated. Also, if the determination in step S12514 is negative and the immediate-pickup selection flag is set, the selection flag is not erased even if the selected counter becomes 0, but is maintained as it is, and the selected counter processing is terminated.

As described above, the notification mode selection effect is generated in the normal replay winning game during the attack mode, and the selection operation in that game is considered to be valid for a predetermined number of games. If an opportunity for topping up occurs after a predetermined number of games has elapsed or before the normal replay is won, an immediate topping up effect is generated. In other words, the immediate topping up effect is set as the default, and the notification mode selection effect of the normal replay winning game allows the player to select the topping up effect for the subsequent predetermined number of games to be performed at a timing different from the default immediate topping up effect, such as a later topping up effect or a premonition via effect. For example, a configuration in which the selection operation at the time of the normal replay winning is considered to be valid until the end of the attack mode is also conceivable. However, if such a configuration is adopted, it will be difficult to respond to changes in the game situation (such as an increase or decrease in the number of games remaining in the attack mode or an increase in the number of medals won) after the selection operation is performed, even if the player's desired execution timing changes. In contrast, by doing as described above, a configuration in which the player himself can select the execution timing of the topping up effect according to the situation of the attack mode, which can change from moment to moment, can be realized.

Moreover, by setting the specified number of games (20 games) shorter than the initial number of games in attack mode (50 games), for example, if a notification mode selection effect occurs immediately after the start of attack mode, there is room for at least one more notification mode selection effect to occur thereafter. This makes it possible to meet the needs of players who want to vary the execution timing of the addition effect between the first and second halves of attack mode in preparation for the case that an addition does not occur, thereby creating variation in the attack mode effect. Thus, it is possible to realize game effects that meet the diverse needs of players.

Furthermore, because the notification mode selection presentation is triggered by a randomly occurring event, such as winning a normal replay, an element of luck is added to whether or not a notification mode can be selected, as described above, making the game more enjoyable.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the execution timing of the additional notification selected by the selection operation can be changed afterwards. Fig. 210 is a flowchart showing the additional notification process at the time of full stop in this modified example.

The difference between the processing for notifying of top-up when all reels stop in this modified example and the flowchart in FIG. 205 is the processing when the immediate top-up selection flag is set. That is, if it is determined in step S12701 that the immediate top-up selection flag is set, processing is executed in step S12702 to clear the immediate top-up selection flag. Then, in step S12703, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to execute the top-up performance of the current game. The processing in steps S12701 to S12703 is the same as the processing in steps S12201 to S12203 described above.

In step S12704, it is determined whether the later-addition flag is set. If it is determined in step S12704 that the later-addition flag is set, this means that in the earlier event that occurred before the current event, the later-addition effect was selected, but in the current event, the immediate-addition effect was selected. In this case, in step S12705, correction processing is executed. If the later-addition flag is not set in step S12704, or after correction processing is executed in step S12705, the process proceeds to step S12718. The processing in steps S12706 to S12722 is the same as the processing in steps S12204 to S12220 above.

The correction process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 211.

First, in step S12801, an effect that can be brought forward is set. The effect that can be brought forward is an effect that notifies the player that a later-loading effect has been selected and that an additional effect that would have occurred just before the end of the attack mode can be brought forward and executed in the current game. More specifically, this effect is an effect that notifies the player of a situation in which an additional effect can be generated in the current game based on the first later-loading character BUP1 or the second later-loading character BUP2, etc., that have been acquired as a later-loading right, and for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Would you like to open the treasure chest you have saved?" In addition, in the effect that can be brought forward, the text "YES" and "NO" are displayed, and the player can select whether or not to generate an additional effect in advance by operating the effect switch 66, etc.

After the performance that can be brought forward is generated in step S12801, it is determined in step S12802 whether or not an advance instruction operation has been performed to bring forward an additional performance. In the above example, the selection operation of the text display "YES" in the performance that can be brought forward may be regarded as an advance instruction operation.

If no advance instruction operation has been performed in step S12802, it is determined in step S12803 whether or not a later addition maintenance operation has been performed, which specifies that an additional performance will not be generated by advancing the game. In the above example, the later addition maintenance operation may be determined as a selection operation of the text display "NO" in an advance possible performance. Also, for example, the operation of any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 may be determined as a later addition maintenance operation. This is because such an operation can be considered as an indication of an intention to start the next game, and can also be considered as an indication of an intention not to generate an additional performance by advancing the game in this game.

If it is determined in step S12803 that a rear-mounted maintaining operation has been performed, the correction process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S12803, the process returns to step S12802 and loops until either a forward tilt instruction operation or a rear-mounted maintaining operation is performed.

If it is determined in step S12802 that an advance instruction operation has been performed, the number of stored individual areas is displayed in step S12804. More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 212(a), the first subsequent loading character BUP1 and the second subsequent loading character BUP2 are displayed in an order according to the order in which the subsequent loading performance was supposed to be performed. This allows the player to understand how many subsequent loading rights exist. In FIG. 212(a), three first subsequent loading characters BUP1 are displayed in an order, indicating that there are three subsequent loading rights triggered by winning the watermelon.

In the next step S12805, it is determined whether or not an individual area selection operation has been performed. For example, in FIG. 212(a), a cursor such as an arrow is displayed on the lined up rear-mounted rights (treasure chests), and one rear-mounted right (treasure chest) can be selected by moving and selecting the cursor. The selection of the rear-mounted rights can be performed using the effect switch 66, for example, by automatically moving the cursor at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every 2 seconds). When the effect switch 66 is operated while the desired rear-mounted right is being pointed to, the one rear-mounted right is selected, and an individual area selection operation has been performed. If an individual area selection operation has not been performed, the process returns to step S12805 and waits until a selection operation is performed.

When a selection operation is performed, in step S12806, a process is executed to read data on the number of added games for the selected individual area. Then, in step S12807, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that an added effect is performed for the corresponding individual area (FIG. 212 (b)). In step S12808, a process is executed to add the current number of added games to the display remaining number counter HG, and in step S12809, a process is executed to erase the data for the individual area corresponding to the added effect generated in step S12807.

In step S12810, it is determined whether or not there are any unannounced individual areas. If there are, the process returns to step S12802 and repeats steps S12802 to S12809. If there are no more unannounced individual areas, a negative determination is made in step S12810 and the process proceeds to step S12811, where the process of clearing the later-loading flag is executed. Then, in step S12812, the process of ending the later-loading performance is executed, and this correction process is terminated. The processes in steps S12811 and S12812 are the same as those in steps S12307 and S12308 above.

In the modification process of this modified example, characters corresponding to acquired subsequent add-on rights are displayed in order as shown in FIG. 212(a), and each character can be selected regardless of the order in which they were acquired. In other words, it is possible to generate a subsequent add-on effect regardless of the order in which the additional add-on trigger that triggered the subsequent add-on effect occurred. For example, if there is a first subsequent add-on right that occurred first and a second subsequent add-on right that occurred later, it is possible to select to execute the additional add-on effect based on the second subsequent add-on right before the additional add-on effect based on the first subsequent add-on right.

More specifically, in FIG. 212(a), the three additional rights are, from left to right, the left treasure box indicates the additional right based on the first additional trigger, the middle treasure box indicates the additional right based on the second additional trigger, and the right treasure box indicates the additional right based on the third additional trigger. The cursor shown in FIG. 212(a) points to the treasure box corresponding to the second additional right. In that situation, if it is determined that an individual area selection operation has been performed (step S12805: YES), in step S12806, the number of additional games is obtained from the individual area corresponding to the second additional right, and in step S12806, an additional performance based on the second additional right is generated (FIG. 212(b)). In this case, the additional performance of the additional right based on the first additional trigger has not yet occurred. In other words, it is possible to make the order of occurrence of the additional trigger and the order of occurrence of the additional performance in the additional performance different.

As described above, even if a later-addition effect is selected by a selection operation in the notification mode selection effect, by making it possible to execute an additional effect corresponding to the later-addition effect at a timing earlier than the timing at which the later-addition effect was supposed to be executed after the fact, it is possible to respond to a change of mind of the player according to the ever-changing game situation. For example, if an additional-addition trigger occurs in the early stage of the attack mode, even if the player selects an additional effect based on this additional-addition trigger as the later-addition effect in anticipation of another additional-addition trigger occurring thereafter, there is a possibility that the player will change his or her mind and want the additional effect selected as the later-addition effect to occur before the execution timing of the later-addition effect if that expectation turns out to be wrong. In this regard, by making it possible to change the selected later-addition effect to an immediate-addition effect after the fact, as described above, it is possible to flexibly respond to a change of mind of the player.

The trigger for making the above change possible is the selection of the immediate-add effect at the time of the add-on trigger. If the trigger for making the change possible, i.e., the trigger for executing the correction process, were configured to be changeable indefinitely, such as occurring every game, the effect of whether or not to make the change (the effect that can be brought forward) would occur frequently, which would be annoying, and the intention of selecting the later-add effect would not be respected. In that respect, if the immediate-add effect is selected after the later-add effect is selected, it is highly likely that the player has had a change of heart, and the above configuration is configured to make it possible to execute the correction process in response to a change of heart in the player's mind. This reduces the frequency with which the surrounding process is executed, and makes it possible to realize an effect that meets the player's needs without causing any annoying effects.

Seventh embodiment
In this embodiment, the forced termination condition of the advantageous zone is changed. As already explained, in each of the above embodiments, the advantageous zone is forced to terminate regardless of the number of remaining games in the attack mode, etc., based on the number of games executed during the advantageous zone reaching the upper limit game number (1500 games) (second zone display process). In contrast, in this embodiment, in addition to the first forced termination condition of the upper limit game number, the second forced termination condition is that the medal increase/decrease number during the advantageous zone (the difference between the number of medals paid out and the number of medals used) reaches the upper limit increase number (upper limit number, 2400 medals).

Specifically, the situation when the advantageous period ends due to the first forced termination condition of the upper limit game number and the second forced termination condition of the upper limit increase number will be explained with reference to Figures 213 and 214.

Figure 213 shows the end of the advantageous zone under the first forced end condition. For example, the advantageous zone is started by winning the challenge mode at the timing of ta1, and the transition to the challenge mode is made at the timing of ta2. As already explained, even if the transition lottery to the challenge mode is won and the transition to the challenge mode is made, the push order notification is unlikely to occur in this slot machine 10, and the number of medals held decreases as the game progresses. If the attack mode is won during the challenge mode and a transition to the attack mode occurs at the timing of ta3, the push order notification can occur and the number of medals held increases. After that, for example, a transition to the VB mode occurs at ta4, and a return to the attack mode occurs at ta5, and when the number of games played in the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit of 1500 games at the timing of ta6, the advantageous zone is forced to end. In this example, although the increase or decrease in the number of medals during the advantageous period at time ta6 has not reached the upper limit increase (2,400 medals), the first forced termination condition, which is the upper limit game number mentioned above, is met, so the advantageous period will be forced to end regardless of the number of remaining games in attack mode, etc.

Figure 214 shows how the advantageous zone ends when the second forced termination condition is met. For example, the advantageous zone starts when the player wins the challenge mode at timing tb1, and transitions to the challenge mode at timing tb2. Then, similar to ta3 above, transitions to the attack mode at timing tb3, where a push order notification may occur, can be expected to increase the number of medals held.

As already explained, the push order notification when the push order replay is won causes the RT state to transition to the second RT state or the third RT state, which has a high replay probability, and the push order notification when the push order bell is won causes the winning combination with a large payout number (first small combination) to be established, so that an increase in medals can be expected. If the second RT state or the third RT state is consumed in a state with the push order notification (consumed as a so-called ART state), an increase of about 1.90 medals per game can be expected. In addition, as a game result that can be expected to increase the number of medals held (could be expected to win medals), bonus wins such as the first BB and the second BB are provided, and in the bonus state based on the first BB or the second BB win, medals are paid out with a maximum payout number of 216 medals. In the bonus state, there is a high probability of winning one of the BB small and medium combinations 1 to 3 every game, and an increase of about 6.00 medals per game can be expected. In other words, if you compare the increase in medals per game (net increase) in the ART state described above with the net increase in medals in the bonus state, the net increase is greater in the bonus state, so fewer games are needed to get the same payout number by going through the bonus state.

In the example of Figure 214, the timings from tb4 to tb5 and from tb6 to tb7 show that the advantageous period has been consumed as a bonus state. After the bonus state ends at tb7, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period reaches the upper limit increase of 2400 at tb8, the advantageous period will be forcibly ended. In this example, although the number of games played during the advantageous period at tb8 has not reached the upper limit (1500 games, tb9), the second forced termination condition, which is the upper limit increase, is met, so the advantageous period will be forcibly ended regardless of the number of remaining games in attack mode, etc.

That is, when the upper limit increase number in the favorable zone is set as the second forced termination condition, the number of games until the second forced termination condition is reached will differ depending on the state in which each game in the favorable zone was played. FIG. 215 shows the lottery tables for the normal game state, the first RT state to the third RT state, and the BB state in this embodiment. As already explained, the normal game state and the first RT state have different types of replays that can be won, but have the same total replay probability, and are states with a relatively low replay probability compared to the second RT state and the third RT state. Also, the second RT state and the third RT state have different types of replays that can be won, but have the same total replay probability, and are states with a relatively high replay probability compared to the normal game state and the first RT state. Therefore, in FIG. 215, the normal game state and the first RT state are displayed together as the low RT state, and the second RT state and the third RT state are displayed together as the high RT state. Note that the probability of winning the push order bell and CB, and the number of medals paid out when winning (bonus) are different from those in the above embodiments, but this is a change to adjust the net increase in the number of medals.

Figure 216 shows the difference in net increase in number of coins depending on each state and whether or not push order notification is provided.

In a situation where the display mode is normal mode or challenge mode and no push order notification occurs, in the above-mentioned low RT state (normal game state and first RT state), the expected net increase in coins per game is approximately -1.60 coins, and playing the game reduces the number of medals held. On the other hand, even in a situation where no push order notification occurs, in the above-mentioned high RT state (second RT state and third RT state), the expected net increase in coins per game is approximately -0.03 coins, and the game can be played without reducing the number of medals held.

In contrast, when the display mode is attack mode or VB mode, where a push order notification occurs, in a low RT state, the expected net increase in coins per game is approximately -0.99 coins, which is more than the net increase in coins in a low RT state when the push order notification does not occur (the decrease is smaller). And in a high RT state where a push order notification occurs, the expected net increase in coins per game is approximately +1.90 coins, which is a situation in which you can expect to win a lot of medals.

Here, the above net increase does not include the number of medals that can be obtained in the bonus state to which the player transitions based on winning the bonus. That is, in the bonus state based on winning the first BB or second BB as described above, the net increase that can be expected per game is about +6.00 medals. The net increase in the bonus state is greater than the net increase in the low RT state or high RT state in a situation where the push order notification does not occur, or the net increase in the low RT state or high RT state in a situation where the push order notification can occur, and by taking the bonus state into account, the net increase that can actually be expected per game in each game is greater than that without taking the bonus state into account. Figure 216 also shows the net increase taking the bonus state into account, which is about -1.05 medals in the low RT state in a situation where the push order notification does not occur, about +0.52 medals in the high RT state, about -0.44 medals in the low RT state in a situation where the push order notification can occur, and about +2.46 medals in the high RT state.

The net increase in number of coins taking into account the bonus state is calculated by adding the increase in the bonus state converted per game based on the probability of winning the bonus per game and the number of coins won in the bonus state when won to the net increase in the number of coins per game not taking into account the bonus state. For example, if the probability of winning the bonus is approximately 1 in 254 and the number of coins won in the bonus state is 144 (216 coins - 3 coins x 24 games), the conversion value of the increase in the bonus state per game is approximately 1 in 254 x 144 coins = approximately 0.56 coins. This conversion value is then added to the net increase in the number of coins not taking into account the bonus state to calculate the net increase in the number of coins taking into account the bonus state.

The upper limit increase number (2400 coins), which is the second forced termination condition of the advantageous zone stipulated in this embodiment, is set to a number less than the expected number of coins to be won when the upper limit number of games (1500 games), which is the first forced termination condition of the advantageous zone, is played in a high RT state where the push order notification can occur (1500 games x approximately 1.90 coins = 2850 coins), or the expected number of coins to be won when the bonus state is taken into account (1500 games x approximately 2.46 coins = 3690 coins). In other words, if the advantageous zone is played in a high RT state where the push order notification can occur, the advantageous zone will be forced to end due to the second forced termination condition before the first forced termination condition (Figure 214).

Figure 217 is a flowchart showing the second section display process in this embodiment.

In step S13001, it is determined whether or not the game is in an advantageous zone. Here, in this embodiment, even after the game has moved to an advantageous zone, the eighth display segment N8 as the zone indicator may not be lit. This configuration will be explained in detail later, but as already explained, in the first zone display process, the counting of the number of games in the advantageous zone (addition of the advantageous zone game number AG) is started when the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. Therefore, in this embodiment, in step S13001, the advantageous zone game number AG is grasped rather than whether or not the zone indicator is displayed, and it is determined that the game is in an advantageous zone if the advantageous zone game number AG is 1 or more, and it is determined that the game is not in an advantageous zone if the advantageous zone game number AG is 0.

In step S13002, the number of games in the favorable zone AG is added. Then, in step S13003, the number of medals in the favorable zone ZM provided in the various counter areas 106e is updated. The number of medals in the favorable zone ZM is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of medals in the favorable zone (the difference between the number of medals bet on each game in the favorable zone and the number of medals paid out). In step S13003, the number of medals in the current game (the number of medals paid out in the current game - the number of medals bet on the current game) is grasped based on the winning result of the current game (the winning result corresponding process and the payout determination process immediately before), and the number of medals in the current game is added to the number of medals in the favorable zone ZM. For example, if the current game is a 3-bet game and 9 medals are paid out, the number of medals in the favorable zone ZM is +6, and in step S13003, the number of medals in the favorable zone ZM is added by +6. Also, if the current game is a 3-bet game and no medals are paid out, the medal increase or decrease is -3, and in step S13003, the process of adding -3 to the advantageous zone increase or decrease number ZM is performed.

After executing the processing of step S13003, in step S13004, remaining game number management processing is executed. The remaining game number management processing is as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 218, and is generally similar to that of each of the above-mentioned embodiments, but when the number of available games FG becomes 0 or less (when the total number of games in the favorable zone SG exceeds the upper limit number of games in the favorable zone, step S13110: NO), in step S13111, instead of the above-mentioned excess flag, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The first excess flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to grasp that the first forced termination condition may be satisfied thereafter, and in this embodiment, it is configured to be distinguishable from the situation in which the second forced termination condition may be satisfied thereafter (second excess flag).

After executing the remaining game number management process in step S13004, the remaining number management process is executed in step S13005. Figure 219 is a flowchart showing the remaining number management process.

In step S13201, the number of increase/decrease in the favorable zone ZM updated in step S13003 is grasped. In the following step S13202, a process is executed to calculate the expected number of increase/decrease NM that can be obtained in the remaining number of games in the favorable zone from the number of remaining games in the favorable zone ZG (step S13107) calculated in the remaining game management process in step S13004 and the net increase (expected number of increase/decrease KM) that can be expected in each game in the favorable zone stored in ROM 105. In this embodiment, the expected number of increase/decrease KM is the case when the favorable zone is consumed in a high RT state in a situation where the above-mentioned push order notification occurs, and is configured to use the net increase (approximately +2.46 coins) that takes into account the bonus state. That is, for example, if the number of remaining games in the favorable zone ZG is 500 games, the expected number of increase/decrease NM is 500 games x 2.46 coins = 1230 coins.

In step S13203, the number of coins (total expected increase/decrease number SM) that can be expected to be won during the current favorable zone is calculated based on the favorable zone increase/decrease number ZM determined in step S13201 and the remaining expected increase/decrease number NM calculated in step S13202, taking into account the current number of games remaining in the favorable zone. Then, in step S13204, the number of free coins FM that can be increased is calculated. The processing in step S13204 corresponds to the processing in step S13109 in the remaining game number management processing that calculates the number of free games FG that can be added, and the processing in step S13109 is a processing that predicts in advance that the favorable zone will be forcibly terminated in the subsequent game under the first forced termination condition, and the processing in step S13204 is a processing that predicts in advance that the favorable zone will be forcibly terminated in the subsequent game under the second forced termination condition. That is, in step S13204, the process subtracts the total expected increase/decrease number SM calculated in step S13203 above from 2,400 coins, which is the upper limit increase number for the favorable zone.

Incidentally, as shown in Figures 213 and 214 above, even during the favorable zone, the number of medals held may decrease in each game before the transition to attack mode occurs (up to ta3 in Figure 213, and up to tb3 in Figure 214), and the net increase in the number of medals held during this period is negative. In that case, it can be considered that the prediction process (step S13202) performed in each game during this period should predict the net increase in the number of medals held that will decrease. However, as described above, when predicting whether the upper limit increase will be reached based on the relationship with the current favorable zone increase/decrease number ZM, the decrease up to ta3 or tb3 can be absorbed into the current favorable zone increase/decrease number ZM. Therefore, as described above, the net increase in the number of medals held during that period is not calculated separately, simplifying the processing configuration.

In step S13205, based on the processing result of step S13204, it is determined whether the available number of sheets FM is 0 or less, and whether a forced termination will occur due to the second forced termination condition in the future. If the available number of sheets FM is 1 or more, it is assumed that the upper limit increase number has not been reached, and the remaining number management processing ends. If the available number of sheets FM is 0 or less, the process proceeds to step S13206, where a second excess flag is set in the various flags storage area 106d, and the remaining number management processing ends. The second excess flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the second forced termination condition may be met in the future.

In the second interval display process, after executing the remaining number management process in step S13005, it is determined in step S13006 whether the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has reached the upper limit game number of 1500, or whether the number of increases or decreases in the advantageous interval ZM has reached the upper limit increase number of 2400 or more. If any of these forced termination conditions is met, the process proceeds to step S13007, and processing for terminating the advantageous interval is executed.

That is, in step S13007, the number of games in the advantageous zone AG and the number of increase/decrease in the advantageous zone ZM are cleared to 0. In the following step S13008, a process is performed to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator. Then, in step S13009, a process is performed to initialize parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous zone, and then the second zone display process is terminated. The display end process and data initialization process for the zone indicator are as already explained.

In addition, even if it is determined in step S13006 that none of the forced termination conditions are met, if it is determined in step S13010 or step S13011 that the normal termination conditions are met (if the challenge mode win flag, attack mode win flag, challenge mode flag, or attack mode flag are not set), the process proceeds to step S13007 and processing for terminating the advantageous zone is performed. The processing when the normal termination conditions are met is the same as the processing described above.

As described above, this embodiment has a first forced termination condition that specifies the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous zone, and a second forced termination condition that specifies the upper limit of the increase in the advantageous zone, and by predicting in advance that the first or second forced termination condition will be met in the future (in a subsequent game), if it is predicted that the first or second forced termination condition will be met, the first or second excess flag is set, respectively, thereby enabling the CPU 102 to identify that a forced termination will occur in the future.

In this embodiment, when the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, if an additional bonus is awarded by winning an additional bonus lottery such as an attack mode, a setting value is suggested to present information that may be beneficial to the player as compensation for not being able to receive the benefit of the additional bonus due to the forced termination.

Figure 220 is a flowchart showing the process of adding the number of games in the challenge mode and attack mode in this embodiment. As already explained, this process is carried out in step S6025, step S918, step S1005, step S1513, step S1517, step S1603, etc. of the first specific role process, etc.

In step S13301, it is determined whether or not either the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set. If neither excess flag is set, the process proceeds to step S13302, where the current number of added games is determined, and in step S13303, the process adds the current number of added games to the target number of continued games, and then ends this process of adding the number of games.

If it is determined in step S13301 that any of the excess flags is set, the process proceeds to step S13304. In step S13304, similar to step S13302, a process is executed to determine the current number of added games. Then, in step S13305, a process is executed to add the current number of added games to the total number of games lost TEG in the various counter area 106e. As already explained, the total number of games lost TEG is a counter for determining the excess number of games that will be lost due to the forced termination of the advantageous zone.

After executing the processing of step S13305, processing for setting value suggestion (special notification) is performed in steps S13306 to S13311. That is, in step S13306, processing is performed to determine the specific role that triggered the current addition. Then, in step S13307, processing is performed to obtain the fifth specific notification lottery table from the various table storage area 105a, and then in step S13308, the fifth special notification lottery is performed.

As shown in FIG. 221, the 5th special notification lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the 5th special notification lottery varies depending on the specific role that triggers the top-up (triggering the 5th special notification), the current display mode and the display mode that is the target of the top-up, and the type of excess flag that is set.

Specifically, similar to the lottery table for the first special notification described above, when the display mode is challenge mode, it is easier to win the fifth special notification lottery than when it is attack mode, and when it is a specialized zone, it is easier to win the fifth special notification lottery than when it is attack mode. Also, it is set so that the lower the appearance rate (winning rate) of each game, the easier it is to win the fifth special notification lottery, such as strong cherries having a higher winning probability than weak cherries.

Furthermore, when comparing the case where only the first excess flag is set with the case where only the second excess flag is set, it is set so that it is easier to win the fifth special notification lottery when only the first excess flag is set than when only the second excess flag is set. This is due to the fact that a forced termination always occurs when the first excess flag is set, whereas a forced termination may not occur when the second excess flag is set depending on the lottery results of each subsequent game, etc.

The probability of winning the fifth special notification lottery is set differently when either the first or second excess flag is set than when both excess flags are set. In this embodiment, it is set so that it is easier to win the fifth special notification lottery when both excess flags are set. This is because the prediction of a forced termination is more certain when both excess flags (as well as the first excess flag) are set than when only the second excess flag is set, and because even if a game is forced to terminate due to the upper limit on the number of games, a sufficient increase in medals is likely to occur at the time of the forced termination when both excess flags (as well as the second excess flag) are set than when only the first excess flag is set.

After the fifth special notification lottery is performed in step S13308, in step S13309, it is determined whether or not the result of the fifth special notification lottery is a winning result. If the notification is a winning result, in step S13310, a process is executed to set a command for executing the fifth special notification as an output target to the display control device 81, and if the notification is not a winning result, in step S13311, a process is executed to set a command for not executing the fifth special notification as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the game number addition process is terminated.

The fifth special notification execution command and the fifth special notification non-execution command correspond to the first special notification execution command and the first special notification non-execution command, and the display control device 81 that receives the fifth special notification execution command performs a lottery for the type of the fifth special notification and controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to execute the corresponding fifth special notification. Specifically, the first special notification setting process of FIG. 135 may be applied as the fifth special notification setting process, and for example, as the fifth special notification type lottery process (step S6703), a fifth special notification lottery table (FIG. 222(a)) in which multiple types of fifth special notifications are set so that the winning probability differs depending on the setting value may be used to execute the corresponding type of fifth special notification.

More specifically, regarding the 5th special notification lottery table, the types of 5th special notifications are 5th special notification A, 5th special notification B, and 5th special notification C, and each of these has different presentation content that is distinguishable to the player by the display content on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effects from the speaker 64, etc.

Which of the various fifth special notifications is more likely to be selected, depending on the setting status of the first exceedance flag and the second exceedance flag. Specifically, fifth special notification A is more likely to be selected when only the first exceedance flag is set (when the second exceedance flag is not set), fifth special notification B is more likely to be selected when only the second exceedance flag is set (when the first exceedance flag is not set), and fifth special notification C is more likely to be selected when both exceedance flags are set.

By the way, by including information regarding whether the first exceedance flag or the second exceedance flag is set in the command for executing the fifth special notification, it is possible for the display control device 81 to select the above type based on each exceedance flag. Note that when the first exceedance flag or the second exceedance flag is set, information (command) to that effect may be output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81, and the type of the fifth special notification may be selected based on that information.

In the fifth special notification type lottery, after a lottery based on the type table in FIG. 222(a) is performed, the details of the fifth special notification to be actually performed are determined based on the details table in FIG. 222(b). Specifically, the fifth special notification A includes the fifth special notification a1 and the fifth special notification a2, the fifth special notification B includes the fifth special notification b1 and the fifth special notification b2, and the fifth special notification C includes the fifth special notification c1 and the fifth special notification c2, and each of these is set to have different presentation contents that are distinguishable by the player based on the display contents by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effects from the speaker 64, etc.

The detailed presentation content of the various fifth special notifications varies depending on the setting value, with respect to which one is more likely to be selected. Specifically, of the fifth special notifications A, the fifth special notification a1 is more likely to be selected with odd-number settings of 1, 3, and 5, and the fifth special notification a2 is more likely to be selected with even-number settings of 2, 4, and 6. Also, of the fifth special notifications B, the fifth special notification b1 is more likely to be selected with settings 3 or higher, and the fifth special notification b2 is more likely to be selected with settings 2 or lower, and in particular, the fifth special notification b2 is set not to be selected with settings 5 and 6. Of the fifth special notifications C, the fifth special notification c1 can be selected with settings 5 and 6, but is not selected with settings 1 to 4, and the fifth special notification c2 can be selected with settings 1 to 4, but is not selected with settings 5 and 6.

In other words, when only the first excess flag is set, an additional trigger occurs and the fifth special notification A is made, making it possible to predict whether the set value is even or odd, and when only the second excess flag is set, an additional trigger occurs and the fifth special notification B is made, making it possible to predict whether the set value is high or low. Then, when both excess flags are set, an additional trigger occurs and the fifth special notification C is made, making it possible to determine whether the setting is 5 or higher, or 4 or lower.

In this way, by varying the setting value suggestion that occurs depending on the excess flag that has been set, i.e., depending on which forced termination condition is predicted to result in a forced termination in the future, not only is the fun of predicting the setting value added, but the fun of aiming for which forced termination condition will end the advantageous zone is also added, greatly improving the playability of the advantageous zone.

More specifically, on the premise that the aim is to win many medals, it is thought that it would be preferable for the player to end the advantageous zone with the second forced termination condition as the upper limit increase in the number of medals, but in response to a desire to see the setting value suggestion that occurs when the first forced termination condition is predicted to be met in the future, the objective of aiming for the first forced termination condition to be met is also added.

The fifth special notification is configured so that the set value is difficult to determine with a single occurrence, and the set value can be narrowed down by multiple occurrences. In that regard, since the fifth special notification is configured to occur when the add-on conditions are met after each excess flag is set, it can be said that the longer the add-on conditions are met after each excess flag is set, the easier it is to narrow down the set value, and the longer the add-on conditions are met after each excess flag is set, the more advantageous information will be presented to the player.

Furthermore, since the sooner each excess flag is set and the sooner the additional conditions are met, it may be more advantageous for the player to set each excess flag as early as possible.

In other words, when each excess flag is set, the number of games in the advantageous zone and the increase or decrease in the number of medals cannot change any more. However, depending on whether or not the conditions for adding on are met after the excess flag is set and the timing at which the excess flag is set, the degree of advantage of the game narrowing down the set value differs, improving gameplay.

The manner in which the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set will be explained with reference to the timing charts in Figures 223 and 224.

Figure 223 shows a case where the advantageous period starts at tc1, challenge mode starts at tc2, attack mode starts at tc3 and tc5, and VB mode starts at tc4, with tc6 during attack mode being used as the reference. In this example, no bonus is won during the advantageous period, and in the games from tc3 to tc6, although the display mode is different between attack mode and VB mode, the net increase in coins remains at about +1.90 coins in both cases.

At the timing of tc6, the number of games in the advantageous zone AG has not reached 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous zone, and the number of increases or decreases in the advantageous zone ZM has not reached the upper limit of the increase, which is 2400. However, if the remaining number of games in the advantageous zone ZG is added to the current number of games in the advantageous zone AG, it will exceed the upper limit of the number of games, in which case the first excess flag is set. On the other hand, if the remaining expected increase or decrease number NM is added to the number of increases or decreases in the advantageous zone ZM, it will not exceed the upper limit of the increase, in which case the second excess flag is not set.

In this example, the advantageous zone game count AG reaches 1500 games at the timing of tc7, and the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated. As a result, the advantageous zone ends without winning the upper limit increase of 2400 medals.

Figure 224 shows a case where the advantageous period starts at td1, the challenge mode starts at td2, the attack mode starts at td3, td5 and td7, and the bonus state starts at td4 and td6, with td8 during the attack mode being used as the reference. In this case, the games from td3 to td4, td5 to td6, and td7 to td8 all have a net increase of about +1.90 coins. On the other hand, the bonus states from td4 to td5 and td6 to td7 all have a net increase of about +6.00 coins, and the increase per game during the advantageous period effectively increases by the amount of this bonus state.

At the timing of td8, the number of games in the advantageous zone AG has not reached 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous zone, and the number of increases/decreases in the advantageous zone ZM has not reached 2400, which is the upper limit of the increase. However, if the remaining expected number of increases/decreases NM is added to the number of increases/decreases in the advantageous zone ZM, it will exceed the upper limit of the increase, in this case, the second excess flag is set. On the other hand, if the remaining number of games in the advantageous zone ZG is added to the current number of games in the advantageous zone AG, it will not exceed the upper limit of the number of games, in this case, the first excess flag is not set.

In this example, the number of coins ZM that increase or decrease in the advantageous zone reaches 2,400 at td9, which is before td10, when the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG is consumed, and the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated. As a result, the advantageous zone ends without consuming the upper limit of 1,500 games.

The relationship between the two excess flags and the occurrence rate of the fifth special notification will be explained with reference to the timing chart in Figure 225.

If an opportunity for an addition occurs at time te2 during the favorable period that started at time te1, for example by winning a specific role such as a strong cherry, then at time te2, neither the first excess flag nor the second excess flag has yet been set, so an addition lottery based on the opportunity for an addition is held. If the addition lottery is won, the corresponding number of games is added.

If the first excess flag corresponding to the upper limit game count is set at the timing of te3 and the second excess flag corresponding to the upper limit increase number is not set, and an opportunity to add to the total occurs at the timing of te4, the first excess flag is set as described above, so no addition occurs, and instead a fifth special notification may occur. As described above, the fifth special notification is made through a fifth special notification lottery, and the probability of winning (occurrence rate) is displayed here as A%.

If the second excess flag corresponding to the upper limit increase is set at the timing of te5, and the first excess flag corresponding to the upper limit game count is not set, and an opportunity to add to the total occurs at the timing of te6, the second excess flag is set as described above, so no addition will occur, and instead a fifth special announcement may occur. The winning probability (occurrence rate) of the fifth special announcement lottery in this case is shown here as B%.

If the first excess flag corresponding to the upper limit game count is set at the timing of te7, and the second excess flag corresponding to the upper limit increase is also set, and then an opportunity to add to the total occurs at the timing of te8, since the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set as described above, no addition will occur, and instead a fifth special notification may occur. The winning probability (occurrence rate) of the fifth special notification lottery in this case is shown here as C%.

As already explained, in the fifth special notification lottery table, the fifth special notification is set to be executed with a higher probability when only the first excess flag is set than when only the second excess flag is set, and the fifth special notification is executed with a higher probability when both excess flags are set than when only one excess flag is set. That is, in the above example, when comparing the occurrence rates of the fifth special notification at each of the timings te4, te6, and te8, in the same display mode and with the same specific role, the occurrence rate of the fifth special notification at the timing te6 (B%) is the lowest, the occurrence rate of the fifth special notification at the timing te8 (C%) is the highest, and the occurrence rates increase in the order of B%, A%, and C%. In other words, the probability of presenting information that may be useful to the player, such as a suggestion of the setting value, is lowest in a situation where only the second excess flag is set, and highest in a situation where both excess flags are set.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

As the conditions for the forced termination of the advantageous zone, a first forced termination condition, which is the upper limit number of games, and a second forced termination condition, which is the upper limit number of medals, are set, and the future fulfillment of these forced termination conditions can be grasped in advance from the remaining number of games ZG in the advantageous zone, and when the advantageous zone is further added in a situation where it is understood that the forced termination condition will be fulfilled, a setting value suggestion according to the grasped forced termination condition is generated. In this way, by providing multiple forced termination conditions, a large increase in medals that is not intended by the designer, etc. does not occur when the advantageous zone is consumed, and it is possible to avoid a rise in the advantageous degree of the advantageous zone, and thereby the transparency and soundness of the game are guaranteed. On the other hand, by setting the upper limit number of medals as the second forced termination condition, the maximum value of the benefit that the player can obtain during the advantageous zone is stipulated, and it is possible that interest in the advantageous zone will decrease due to the designer's reason for avoiding a rise in the advantageous degree of the advantageous zone. In particular, from the viewpoint of the purpose of playing, such as aiming to increase medals, once it is determined that the upper limit increase will be reached in the future, it is highly likely that the game will become a so-called waste game, since it is impossible to obtain any more medals in the advantageous zone. In this regard, as in the above configuration, even after it is determined that the upper limit increase will be reached in the future, by presenting information of high interest to players, such as setting value suggestions based on the addition trigger, it is possible to avoid a decrease in motivation to play and to appropriately increase attention to the game.

The type and occurrence rate of the setting value suggestion in the situation where it is specified that the upper limit number of games is reached, which is the first forced termination condition, is different from that in the situation where it is specified that the upper limit increase number of medals is reached, which is the second forced termination condition. This makes it possible to make the player interested in which forced termination condition will end the advantageous zone. In other words, from the perspective of aiming to increase medals, it seems preferable for the player to end the advantageous zone with the second forced termination condition, but from the perspective of hoping for the occurrence of a setting value suggestion in a situation where it is specified that the first forced termination condition will be established in the future, the player will probably want the first forced termination condition to be established, and vice versa. In this way, in a configuration having multiple forced termination conditions that all forcibly end the advantageous zone, by making different not only the degree of advantage when the forced termination condition is established, but also the type of benefit (setting value suggestion) that is granted when it is specified that the condition will be established, the fun of the game is significantly improved and the playability is greatly improved.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, the contents of the setting value suggestion (advantage degree) are made different depending on whether the first forced termination condition is established or the second forced termination condition is established first. Fig. 226(a) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining game management process in this modification, and Fig. 226(b) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining number management process in this modification.

That is, as shown in FIG. 226(a), in the remaining game number management process in this modified example, if a negative judgment is made in step S13110 and it is judged that the number of free games FG that can be added is 0 or less, the process proceeds to step S13401. In step S13401, a process of setting the first excess flag is executed as in step S13111 above. In the following step S13402, it is judged whether or not the second excess flag has already been set. That is, the process of step S13402 is a process of judging whether or not it has already been specified that the second forced termination condition will be satisfied ex post facto at the stage where it has been specified that the first forced termination condition will be satisfied ex post facto. Then, if the second excess flag is set, in step S13403, a process of setting the second first flag is executed in the various flag storage area 106d, and then this game number management process is terminated. The second prior flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the second forced termination condition has been determined to be met before the first forced termination condition has been determined to be met. If the second excess flag is not set in step S13402, the remaining game number management process ends.

In the remaining number management process, as shown in FIG. 226(b), if the negative judgment is made in step S13205 and it is judged that the number of free pieces that can be increased FM is 0 or less, the process proceeds to step S13451. In step S13451, the process of setting the second excess flag is executed as in step S13206. In the following step S13452, it is judged whether or not the first excess flag has already been set. That is, the process of step S13452 is a process of judging whether or not the first forced termination condition has already been specified to be satisfied after the fact at the stage where it is specified that the second forced termination condition is satisfied after the fact. Then, if the first excess flag is set, the process of setting the first advance flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S13453, and then this game number management process is terminated. The first advance flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the specification of the first forced termination condition being satisfied was performed before the specification of the second forced termination condition being satisfied. If the first excess flag is not set in step S13452, the remaining game count management process ends.

Incidentally, as already explained, if an addition occurs that exceeds the upper limit game number as the first forced termination condition, the added number of games is not added to the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG, but is added to the total number of games lost TEG. In addition, whether or not the upper limit increase in the number of medals as the second forced termination condition is exceeded is basically determined using the total expected increase or decrease SM predicted from the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG. In that case, when the first excess flag is set and the second excess flag is set, the game that is identified as likely to exceed the upper limit increase in the number of medals is basically the number of games before the upper limit game number. In other words, in a situation where the first forced termination condition is identified as being met and the second forced termination condition is identified as being met, the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG has reached the upper limit game number, and it is identified as exceeding the upper limit increase in the number of medals before the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG is consumed.

Figures 226 (c) and 226 (d) show the fifth special notification type table in this modified example. In the fifth special notification type table of Figure 226 (c), the allocation destination (type of fifth special notification) when only the first excess flag is set or when only the second excess flag is set is generally the same as that in the seventh embodiment (Figure 222 (a)). In addition, among the details of the fifth special notification type table of Figure 226 (d), the detailed tables of the fifth special notification A and the fifth special notification B are also the same as those in the seventh embodiment (Figure 222 (b)).

In this modified example, in addition to the fifth special notification A, the fifth special notification B, and the fifth special notification C, the fifth special notification D is set as the allocation destination of the type of the fifth special notification, and the fifth special notification D is the special notification that is mainly selected when both excess flags are set. As shown in FIG. 226 (c), when the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, the first first flag is set and the second first flag is not set, that is, when the specified one that the first forced termination condition will be established in the future is performed first, the fifth special notification type is allocated to the fifth special notification A and the fifth special notification B with a probability of 10%, the fifth special notification C with a probability of 80%, and the fifth special notification D is not allocated. On the other hand, when the first first flag is not set and the second first flag is set, that is, when the specific one that the second forced termination condition will be established in the future is performed first, the fifth special notification type is allocated to the fifth special notification A and the fifth special notification B with a probability of 10%, the fifth special notification C is not allocated, and the fifth special notification D is allocated with a probability of 80%. As with the relationship between the fifth special notification A, the fifth special notification B, and the fifth special notification C, the fifth special notification D is also set with different performance contents to the extent that the player can recognize that it is a different notification from the fifth special notification A, the fifth special notification B, and the fifth special notification C, and for example, the display contents by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effects from the speaker 64 are different. In this modified example, when only the first excess flag is set and when only the second excess flag is set, the fifth special notification C and the fifth special notification D are allocated with a probability of 5% each.

As shown in FIG. 226(d), in the detailed table, the fifth special notification C is a setting value suggestion that indicates whether the setting value is 5 or more, as described above. If the setting value is 4 or less, the fifth special notification c1 is selected, and if the setting value is 5 or more, the fifth special notification c2 is selected. In contrast, the fifth special notification D is a setting value suggestion that indicates whether the setting value is 4 or 5 or other (1 to 3, 6). If the setting value is 4 or 5, the fifth special notification d1 is selected, and if the setting value is 1 to 3 or 6, the fifth special notification d2 is selected. Note that for the fifth special notification d1 and the fifth special notification d2, different presentation contents are set to a degree that the player can distinguish them from each other by the display contents by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effects from the speaker 64, etc.

In other words, according to this modified example, the content of the setting value suggestion when the fifth special notification occurs differs between a case where the specification that the first forced termination condition will be met in the future occurs before the specification that the second forced termination condition will be met in the future, and a case where the specification that the second forced termination condition will be met in the future occurs before the specification that the first forced termination condition will be met in the future; in the former case, a setting value suggestion (fifth special notification C) is generated, which is mainly about whether the setting value is 5 or more, and in the latter case, a setting value suggestion (fifth special notification D) is generated, which is mainly about whether the setting value is 4 or 5.

To explain the relationship between identifying the first forced termination condition and identifying the second forced termination condition, the first forced termination condition is identified first when the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG is the same, but the number of coins increased or decreased in the advantageous zone ZM is relatively small, and the second forced termination condition is identified first when the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG is the same, but the number of coins increased or decreased in the advantageous zone ZM is relatively large. In other words, if a player has not earned enough medals in the advantageous zone up to that point, the first forced termination condition is more likely to be identified first, and the fifth special notification C is more likely to occur. If a player has earned enough medals in the advantageous zone up to that point, the second forced termination condition is more likely to be identified first, and the fifth special notification D is more likely to occur.

In this way, the specific sequence of the forced termination condition strongly reflects the gameplay content in the advantageous zone up to that point, and by using this information to vary the content of the setting value suggestions as special notifications (the type of information the player can obtain, information that differs in the degree to which it may be useful), it is possible to correlate the gameplay content in the advantageous zone with the special notification. This makes it possible to provide special notifications that are in line with the gameplay content.

Comparing the fifth special notification C and the fifth special notification D, the fifth special notification is a setting value suggestion as to whether the setting value is 5 or more, and the fifth special notification D is a setting value suggestion as to whether the setting value is 4 or 5. By combining the fifth special notification C and the fifth special notification D, it is possible to narrow down the setting value. That is, when the fifth special notification c1 occurs and the fifth special notification d1 occurs, the setting value is determined to be 6, when the fifth special notification c1 occurs and the fifth special notification d2 occurs, the setting value is determined to be 5, when the fifth special notification c2 occurs and the fifth special notification d2 occurs, the setting value is determined to be 4, and when the fifth special notification c2 occurs and the fifth special notification d1 occurs, the setting value is determined to be 3 or less. However, since the fifth special notification C and the fifth special notification D are unlikely to occur in the same favorable zone, it is necessary to go through the favorable zone multiple times in order to narrow down the setting value in this way. By doing this, even after the favorable zone has been forcibly terminated, it is possible to encourage enthusiasm for moving to a new favorable zone or achieving the forced termination conditions in that favorable zone.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, when it is specified that both the first and second forced termination conditions are satisfied, the contents of the setting value suggestion (advantage degree) are changed based on the game difference of each game in which the forced termination conditions are likely to be satisfied. Fig. 227(a) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining game management process in this modification, and Fig. 227(b) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining number management process in this modification.

That is, as shown in FIG. 227(a), in the remaining game number management process in this modified example, if a negative judgment is made in step S13110 and it is judged that the number of free games that can be added FG is 0 or less, the process proceeds to step S13501. In step S13501, a process of setting a first excess flag is executed, similar to step S13111 described above. In the following step S13502, it is judged whether or not the second excess flag has already been set. That is, the process of step S13502, similar to the process of step S13402 described above, is a process of judging whether or not it has already been specified that the second forced termination condition will be satisfied ex post facto at the stage where it has been specified that the first forced termination condition will be satisfied ex post facto. Then, if the second excess flag is set, a process of setting a second first flag is executed in step S13503.

After executing the process of step S13503, in step S13504, a process is executed to determine the difference between the upper limit game number, which is the first forced termination condition, and the number of games that will exceed the upper limit increase number. The number of games that will exceed the upper limit increase number is stored in a temporary storage area of RAM 106 when it is determined that the second forced termination condition will be met in the future, that is, when the second exceedance flag is set. This process will be described later. After executing the process of step S13504, or if a negative judgment is made in step S13502, the remaining game number management process is terminated.

In the remaining number management process, as shown in FIG. 227(b), if a negative judgment is made in step S13205 and it is judged that the free number of coins that can be increased FM is 0 or less, the process proceeds to step S13551. In step S13551, the process of setting the second excess flag is executed, similar to step S13206 described above. In the following step S13552, the process of storing the number of games that will exceed the upper limit increase in a temporary storage area of RAM 106 is executed. Incidentally, the number of games that will exceed the upper limit increase is calculated by adding the current number of games in the advantageous zone AG to the number of games until the upper limit increase is exceeded, which is obtained by dividing the difference between the current advantageous zone increase/decrease coin number ZM and the upper limit increase (2400) by the expected increase/decrease coin number KM.

In the next step S13553, it is determined whether the first excess flag has already been set. That is, like the process of step S13452, the process of step S13553 is a process for determining whether the first forced termination condition has already been identified as being satisfied ex post facto at the stage where it has been identified that the second forced termination condition will be satisfied ex post facto. Then, if the first excess flag has been set, the process of setting the first prior flag is executed in step S13554.

After executing the process of step S13554, in step S13555, a process is executed to determine the difference between the upper limit game number, which is the first forced termination condition, and the number of games that will exceed the upper limit increase number. After executing the process of step S13555, or if a negative judgment is made in step S13553, the remaining game number management process is terminated.

An example of the fifth special notification type table in this modified example is shown in FIG. 227(c). Note that the table when only the first excess flag is set or when only the second excess flag is set is similar to that shown in FIG. 226(c) above, and is omitted in FIG. 227(c).

In the fifth special notification type table when both the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, the type of fifth special notification that is assigned differs depending on whether the first first flag or the second first flag is set, as in the first variant example above. Furthermore, in this variant example, the difference in the number of games determined in steps S13504 and S13555 above also affects the type of fifth special notification that is assigned.

More specifically, when the first first flag is set, i.e., when the upper limit game number is reached first, and generally, when there has been no sufficient medal increase in the favorable zone up to that point, the type of allocation differs depending on whether the difference game number is less than the specified number, i.e., 99 games or less, or whether the difference game number is the specified number or more, i.e., 100 games or more. When the difference game number is 99 games or less, the fifth special notification A and the fifth special notification B are both allocated at 20%, the fifth special notification C is allocated at 60%, and the fifth special notification D is not allocated. On the other hand, when the difference game number is 100 games or more, the fifth special notification C is allocated at 100%, and no other fifth special notifications are allocated.

Also, when the second first flag is set, that is, when the medal upper limit increase is reached first and generally, sufficient medals have been increased in the favorable zone up to that point, the type of allocation differs depending on whether the difference in the number of games is less than the specified number, i.e., 99 games or less, or whether the difference in the number of games is greater than the specified number, i.e., 100 games or more. When the difference in the number of games is 99 games or less, the fifth special notification A and the fifth special notification B are both allocated at 20%, the fifth special notification C is not allocated, and the fifth special notification D is allocated at 60%. On the other hand, when the difference in the number of games is 100 games or more, the fifth special notification D is allocated at 100%, and no other fifth special notifications are allocated.

That is, in the above modified example, the type of setting value suggestion selected differs based on the difference in the number of games between the game in which the first forced termination condition is met (the upper limit number of games) and the game in which the second forced termination condition is met (the game in which the upper limit increase number is reached), and the setting value suggestion that is more likely to narrow down the setting value is selected as the difference in the number of games is greater. As described above, when it is specified that both the first forced termination condition and the second forced termination condition are met, the second forced termination condition is basically met first, and the difference in the number of games can be said to be the number of games that indicates how much earlier the upper limit increase number of medals will be reached than the upper limit number of games. In other words, by reaching the upper limit increase number with fewer games, a suggestion of a setting value that is more likely to be beneficial to the player is made. In this way, it is possible to compensate for the case in which the upper limit increase number is reached with fewer games, that is, for the forced termination without playing the remaining games up to the upper limit number of games.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, a configuration will be described in which information according to the excess is presented at the time of forced termination. Fig. 228 is a flowchart showing the second section display process in this modified example.

The change from the second section display process in the above embodiment is that when the number of games in the favorable section AG reaches the upper limit number of games or the number of increases or decreases in the favorable section ZM reaches the upper limit number of increases and is forcibly terminated, a process for presenting information according to the above excess is performed. That is, the process of steps S13601 to S13606 is the same as the process of steps S13001 to S13006 described above, and an update process of the number of games in the favorable section AG and the number of increases or decreases in the favorable section ZM and a process for determining whether or not there is an empty number of games FG and an empty number of sheets FM are performed, and if the number of games in the favorable section AG reaches the upper limit number of games or the number of increases or decreases in the favorable section ZM reaches the upper limit number of increases, a positive judgment is made in step S13606 and the process proceeds to step S13607. In step S13607, a sixth special notification process is executed. This process is a process for presenting information according to the excess. The processing in steps S13608 to S13612 is similar to the processing in steps S13007 to S13011 above.

The sixth special notification process of step S13607 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 229.

In step S13701, the number of coins ZM that have increased or decreased in the favorable zone is 2400 or more, and it is determined whether the current forced termination of the favorable zone (step S13606: YES) was performed under the second forced termination condition. If the number of coins ZM that have increased or decreased in the favorable zone is 2400 or more, the process proceeds to step S13702, where the process of determining the total number of games lost TEG is performed. As already explained, the total number of games lost TEG is a counter to which the number of added games is added when an addition occurs in a situation where any of the excess flags are set. In the following step S13703, the process of obtaining the 6th special notification A lottery table from the various table memory area 105a is performed.

In this modified example, when the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated, a sixth special notification is generated as information that may be useful to the player depending on the value of the total number of games lost TEG. The occurrence rate of the sixth special notification differs depending on the value of the total number of games lost TEG, and further, the occurrence rate of the sixth special notification differs depending on whether the current forced termination was performed under the first forced termination condition or the second forced termination condition. The sixth special notification A lottery table is a table that is obtained when the advantageous zone ends in a situation where at least the second forced termination condition is met. In contrast, when the advantageous zone ends without the second forced termination condition being met (due to the first forced termination condition), the sixth special notification B lottery table is obtained (step S13709).

As shown in FIG. 230(a), the 6th special notification A lottery table and the 6th special notification B lottery table are both set so that the occurrence rate of the 6th special notification increases as the value of the total number of games eliminated TEG increases, but the 6th special notification B lottery table is set so that the 6th special notification is more likely to occur (the winning rate of the 6th special notification B is higher) than the 6th special notification A lottery table (the winning rate of the 6th special notification A is higher) when compared with the same value of the total number of games eliminated TEG. Note that, like the 5th special notification described above, the 6th special notification A and the 6th special notification B are set to have different presentation contents that are distinguishable by the player, such as the display contents by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effects from the speaker 64.

After obtaining the 6th special notification A lottery table in step S13703, the 6th special notification A lottery process is executed in step S13704, and it is determined in step S13705 whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If the notification lottery has been won, in step S13706, a command for executing the 6th special notification A is set as the output target to the display control device 81, and then the 6th special notification process is terminated. On the other hand, if the notification lottery has not been won, in step S13707, a command for not executing the 6th special notification A is set as the output target to the display control device 81, and then the 6th special notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S13701 that the number of increase/decrease coins in the favorable zone ZM has not reached 2,400, i.e., if the current forced termination of the favorable zone is performed without satisfying the second forced termination condition, the process proceeds to step S13708. The processing of steps S13708 to S13713 is generally similar to the processing of steps S13702 to S13707 above, and in step S13708, a process is executed to determine the total number of games lost TEG, and in step S13709, the 6th special notification B lottery table is obtained. Then, in step S13710, the 6th special notification B lottery process is executed, and in step S13711, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If the notification lottery has been won, in step S13712, a command for executing the 6th special notification B is set as the output target to the display control device 81. If the notification lottery has not been won, in step S13713, a command for not executing the 6th special notification B is set as the output target to the display control device 81. Then, the 6th special notification process is terminated.

When the display control device 81 receives these commands related to the sixth special notification, it performs processing to execute the sixth special notification during the attack mode end presentation, for example, as in the processing related to the fourth special notification in the setting processing of the attack mode end presentation in FIG. 154. Specifically, in FIG. 154 above, instead of or in addition to the processing of determining whether or not the fourth special notification command has been received in step S7703, it performs processing to determine whether or not a command for executing the sixth special notification A or a command for executing the sixth special notification B has been received. If no command related to the sixth special notification has been received, or if a command has been received but it is a command for not executing the sixth special notification A or a command for not executing the sixth special notification B, it proceeds to step S7704, sets the normal end presentation, and then terminates this setting processing.

If it is determined in step S7703 that a command for executing the sixth special notification A or a command for executing the sixth special notification B has been received, the process proceeds to step S7705, where a sixth special notification detail table is obtained. As shown in FIG. 230(b), the sixth special notification detail table is set so that the detailed presentation content of the sixth special notification differs depending on the type of sixth special notification (sixth special notification A and sixth special notification B) and the setting value. Specifically, the sixth special notification A is provided with sixth special notifications a1 and a2, and the sixth special notification B is provided with sixth special notifications b1, b2, and b3, and each of these is set to have different presentation content that is distinguishable by the player based on the display content by the auxiliary display unit 65 and sound effects from the speaker 64, etc.

The detailed presentation content of the various sixth special notifications varies depending on the setting value, with regard to which one is more likely to be selected. Specifically, of the sixth special notifications A, sixth special notification a1 is more likely to be selected with odd-number settings of 1, 3, and 5, and sixth special notification a2 is more likely to be selected with even-number settings of 2, 4, and 6. Also, of the sixth special notifications B, sixth special notification b1 is more likely to be selected with settings 1 and 2, but not with settings 3 to 6; sixth special notification b2 is more likely to be selected with settings 3 and 4, but not with settings 1, 2, 5, and 6; and sixth special notification b3 is more likely to be selected with settings 5 and 6, but not with settings 1 to 4.

In other words, if the upper limit of the increase in the favorable zone is reached and the favorable zone is forcibly terminated, a sixth special notification A will be issued, making it possible to predict whether the set value is even or odd, and if the favorable zone is forcibly terminated without reaching the upper limit of the increase in the favorable zone, a sixth special notification B will be issued, making it possible to narrow down the set value to a predetermined number of types (two types or less).

As described above, by making it possible for different setting value suggestions to occur depending on the type of forced termination condition that results in the forced termination of the advantageous zone, it is possible to enjoy the advantageous zone until the final stage in terms of which forced termination condition will cause the advantageous zone to be forced to terminate. In other words, from the perspective of the purpose of the game, which is to hope for an increase in medals by playing the game, it can be said that it is preferable for the player to be forced to terminate the advantageous zone when the medal upper limit increase number is reached, rather than being forced to terminate when the upper limit number of games is reached. On the other hand, the setting value suggestions that occur when the advantageous zone is forced to terminate without reaching the upper limit increase number can make it easier to narrow down the setting value, and in the first place, the occurrence rate of setting value suggestions is set to be higher than when the upper limit increase number is reached. In that case, it is thought that players who want to see through the setting value will want the advantageous zone to be forced to terminate without reaching the upper limit increase number.

On the other hand, players who want to enjoy the advantageous zone for a long time will likely want to play up to the maximum number of games without reaching the maximum medal increase, but in this case the setting value suggestions are set to odd/even numbers, which is not desirable in terms of making it easier to narrow down the setting values.

In this way, by varying the type of forced termination condition and the setting value suggestion that occurs at that time, it is possible to create new excitement in the game while responding to the diverse needs of players, and optimally enhance the playability of the advantageous zone.

As described above, the sixth special notification A lottery table and the sixth special notification B lottery table both have different occurrence rates of setting value suggestions depending on the value of the total number of games lost TEG, but the sixth special notification A lottery table is a table obtained when the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated due to the establishment of the second forced termination condition, and the sixth special notification B lottery table is a table obtained when the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated due to the establishment of the first forced termination condition. In other words, depending on which forced termination condition the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated by, the total number of games lost TEG is configured to use a value for the first forced termination condition and a value for the second forced termination, and the weighting of the value of the total number of games lost TEG is different. In this way, the storage capacity is reduced compared to a configuration in which a common counter such as the total number of games lost TEG is used while separately storing the number of games that will exceed each forced termination condition. In addition, if it is determined that the game will be forcibly terminated due to the first forced termination condition, the number of games to be added thereafter may be stored separately from the number of games to be added thereafter if it is determined that the game will be forcibly terminated due to the second forced termination condition. In this case, the corresponding number of games may be determined in step S13702 or step S13708.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, which is based on the above modified example 3, a special benefit is given when a forced termination is performed, taking into account information on the other forced termination condition.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 231, in the sixth special notification process in this modified example, if it is determined in step S13801 that the second forced termination condition has been met, the total number of games lost TEG is determined in step S13802, and then a process is executed in step S13803 to determine the number of games up to the upper limit number of games. In other words, unless both forced termination conditions are met simultaneously and the advantageous zone is terminated, if the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated by reaching the upper limit increase number of medals as the second forced termination condition, the first forced termination condition of reaching the upper limit number of games is not met. The process of step S13803 is a process to determine the number of games remaining until the upper limit number of games is reached, and specifically, a process to determine the value obtained by dividing the advantageous zone game number AG by 1500.

In the next step S13804, a process is executed to obtain the 6th special notification A lottery table. As shown in FIG. 232(a), the 6th special notification A lottery table in this modified example has a different occurrence rate of the 6th special notification depending on the number of games up to 1500 games and the number of games equivalent to the excess number of coins (total number of games lost TEG), and is set so that the occurrence rate of the 6th special notification is higher the more games up to 1500 games, and the occurrence rate of the 6th special notification is higher the more the added amount that exceeds the upper limit increase number.

In other words, in this modified example, when the number of medal increases or decreases in the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit increase number and is forcibly terminated, the more games in the advantageous zone that were not played, the more likely it is that a setting value suggestion will occur as the sixth special notification, and the more medals that were not obtained due to the upper limit increase number being exceeded even though an additional addition has occurred, the more likely the setting value suggestion will occur.

The processing of steps S13805 to S13808 is the same as the processing of steps S13704 to S13707 described above. After executing the 6th special notification A lottery processing, if the notification lottery is won, a command for executing the 6th special notification A is set to be output, and if the notification lottery is not won, a command for not executing the 6th special notification A is set to be output.

If it is determined in step S13801 that the upper limit increase number has not been reached, i.e., if this forced termination was due to the first forced termination condition rather than the second forced termination condition, then in step S13809, a process is executed to determine the total number of games lost TEG, which corresponds to the excess number of games. Then, in step S13810, a process is executed to determine the number of medals remaining up to the upper limit increase number. In other words, if the advantageous zone was forced to terminate due to the upper limit number of games being reached as the first forced termination condition, the second forced termination condition of reaching the upper limit increase number is not met, and the process in step S13810 is a process to determine the remaining increase number up to the upper limit increase number, specifically, a process to determine the value obtained by dividing the advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM from 2400.

In the next step S13811, a process is executed to obtain the 6th special notification B lottery table. As shown in FIG. 232(b), the 6th special notification B lottery table in this modified example has a different occurrence rate of the 6th special notification depending on the number of coins up to 2400 and the number of games equivalent to the exceeding number of games (total number of games lost TEG), and is set so that the occurrence rate of the 6th special notification is higher as the number of coins up to 2400 increases, and the occurrence rate of the 6th special notification is higher as the amount of added money that exceeds the upper limit number of games increases.

In other words, similar to the 6th special notification A lottery table, when the number of games in the advantageous zone is forced to end because the upper limit number of games is reached, the more medals there are that do not increase during the advantageous zone, the more likely it is that a setting value suggestion will occur as the 6th special notification, and the more games that are added but cannot be played because they exceed the upper limit number of games, the more likely it is that the above setting value suggestion will occur.

In particular, when comparing the 6th Special Notification A lottery table with the 6th Special Notification B lottery table, even if the total number of games lost TEG is the same, the 6th Special Notification B lottery table is set to have a higher occurrence rate of the 6th Special Notification. This is because, from the perspective of the original purpose of the game, which is to receive medals as a result of each game and aim to increase the number of medals, if the game is forcibly terminated before the upper limit of medal increase in the advantageous zone is reached, it can be said that the purpose has not been achieved, and the player's sense of loss due to this will be greater than if the number of games did not reach the upper limit.

The processing of steps S13812 to S13815 is the same as the processing of steps S13710 to S13713 described above. After executing the 6th special notification B lottery processing, if the notification lottery is won, a command for executing the 6th special notification B is set to be output, and if the notification lottery is not won, a command for not executing the 6th special notification B is set to be output.

As described above, in this modified example, in a configuration in which multiple forced termination conditions are set, a bonus such as a set value suggestion is given to compensate for the player's sense of loss by anticipating the establishment of the other forced termination condition. In addition, it is possible to compensate for the loss due to the enforced termination condition that has been established by the set value suggestion. In other words, in this modified example, in a configuration in which multiple forced termination conditions are set, when one forced termination condition is established, compensation is provided from both the enforced termination condition that has been established and the other forced termination condition. In this way, it is possible to provide greater compensation to the player and preferably avoid a decrease in motivation to play due to forced termination.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, which is based on modified examples 3 and 4 above, even though a prediction was made that the maximum increase in the number of medals would be reached, if the maximum number of games is reached and the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated, the sixth special notification is more likely to occur.

Figure 233 (a) shows a part of the flowchart for the sixth special notification process in this modified example. That is, it shows the process after the sixth special notification B lottery process is executed in step S13710 in the case where the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated without the medal increase/decrease reaching the upper limit increase (step S13701: NO).

In step S13901, it is determined whether or not the sixth special notification B lottery has been won. If the sixth special notification B lottery has been won, the sixth special notification B execution command is output and set in step S13902 in the same manner as described above, and then the sixth special notification processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13901 that the sixth special notification B lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S13903, where it is determined whether or not the second excess flag is set. A case in which it is determined in step S13903 that the second excess flag is set is when the game is forcibly terminated due to the upper limit game number without reaching the upper limit increase number even though the second excess flag is set (step S13701: NO). In this case, the sixth special notification B execution command is output and set in step S13901, and then the sixth special notification processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the second excess flag is not set, the sixth special notification B non-execution command is output and set in step S13904 in the same manner as described above, and then the sixth special notification processing is terminated. In other words, if the second excess flag is set, even if the player does not win the sixth special notification B lottery, the sixth special notification B is executed as if the player had won, and processing advantageous to the player is carried out.

As shown in the seventh embodiment above, based on the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG, there are cases where a prediction is made that the first forced termination condition of the advantageous zone will be met (when only the first excess flag is set), cases where a prediction is made that the second forced termination condition of the advantageous zone will be met (when only the second excess flag is set), and cases where a prediction is made that both forced termination conditions of the advantageous zone will be met (when both excess flags are set). On the other hand, even if a prediction is made that both forced termination conditions will be met, unless both forced termination conditions are met simultaneously (in the same game), if one forced termination condition is met, the advantageous zone will end without the other forced termination condition being met.

In this modified example, if it is predicted that both forced termination conditions will be met, and the game is forced to terminate due to the first forced termination condition without the second forced termination condition being met, it is advantageous for the player. In this way, it is possible to satisfactorily alleviate the sense of loss felt by players who had hopes that the second forced termination condition would be met.

<Modification 6>
In this variant, if a prediction is made in variant 5 above that the second forced termination condition will be met in the future, and despite a notification that this prediction has been made, the game ends without the second forced termination condition being met, it is arranged to be advantageous for the player.

Figure 233 (b) shows a part of the flowchart for the processing for the 6th special notification in this modified example. The difference from modified example 5 is that if it is determined that the 6th special notification B lottery has not been won (step S13951: NO), then in step S13953 it is determined whether or not a special notification that the second excess flag has been set has been executed.

Although detailed explanation using figures will be omitted, in this modified example, when the second excess flag is set, a notification (special notification) to that effect can be executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. The notification to that effect is executed when a predetermined lottery is won, and when the predetermined lottery is not won, no notification to that effect is executed even if the second excess flag is set.

For example, as shown in Figures 233(c) and 233(d), even if the total expected increase/decrease number SM is 2410 and the second exceedance flag is set, the limit exceedance information image GTP (in the figure, an image saying "Limit Break!!") may be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as a notification that the second exceedance flag has been set (Figure 233(d)), or it may not be displayed (Figure 233(c)). In this case, in Figure 233(c), it is not possible to directly know that the increase/decrease in the number of medals will reach the upper limit increase number, whereas in Figure 233(d), it is clearly possible to know that the upper limit increase number will be reached.

Then, in step S13953, if a special notification in which the limit exceeding information image GTP is displayed occurs but the upper limit increase number is not reached and the process is forcibly terminated, a sixth special notification B execution command is set to be output in step S13952, and if the special notification does not occur, a sixth special notification B non-execution command is set to be output in step S13954.

In this way, even if a prediction is made that the upper limit increase will be reached, by determining whether or not a player is given an advantage depending on whether or not the player knew in advance that the upper limit increase would be reached, it is possible to prevent the player's advantage from becoming unduly high.

<Modification 7>
In this modified example, in a configuration in which a setting value suggestion is made based on the excess or unachieved amount at the time of the forced termination of the favorable zone, if a setting value suggestion based on the excess amount has occurred before the forced termination of the favorable zone, the favorable degree of that amount is subtracted and a setting value suggestion at the time of the forced termination is generated.

Figures 234(a) and 234(b) show a portion of the flowchart for the sixth special notification process when the idea of subtracting the setting value suggestion before the forced termination is applied to the above-mentioned variants 5 and 6.

That is, after the sixth special notification B lottery is executed in step S13704, it is determined in steps S13961 and S13971 whether or not the notification lottery has been won, and if it is determined that the winner has not won, it is determined in step S13963 whether or not the second excess flag has been set, and it is determined in step S13973 whether or not a special notification that the second excess flag has been set has been executed. If a positive determination is made in these steps S13963 and S13973, in this modified example, it is determined in steps S13964 and S13974 whether or not a fifth special notification has been generated as a setting value suggestion based on the excess amount before the forced end of the advantageous zone. Note that this process may be performed by temporarily storing the information in RAM 106 or the like when a determination is made to execute the fifth special notification.

If the fifth special notification is not being executed, a sixth special notification B execution command is set to be output in step S13962 or step S13972, and if the fifth special notification is being executed, a sixth special notification B non-execution command is set to be output in step S13965 or step S13975. Note that the sixth special notification B non-execution command is also set to be output if the second excess flag is not set in step S13963 or if a special notification to that effect is not being executed in step S13973.

In this way, if a bonus based on the excess amount, etc., is granted before the forced termination of the advantageous zone, this is taken into account (subtracted) at the time of the forced termination to set the bonus at the time of the forced termination (determines whether or not to execute the 6th special notification), thereby preventing the player's advantage from being too high due to the bonus based on the excess amount, etc.

<Modification 8>
In this modified example, an application example in which a special zone is set when the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated will be described. As described in the modified example 9 of the fourth embodiment, the special zone is a zone set based on the total number of games that have disappeared TEG when the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated, and more specifically, in the normal zone after the end of the advantageous zone, a setting value suggestive performance is likely to occur. In the special zone, for example, when the special replay 1 or 2 is won, a push order notification occurs with a probability according to the set value, which results in a predetermined stop result (a stop result that results in a "black BAR" pattern alignment), and the set value can be predicted (see FIG. 162). In this modified example, the special zone is set based on the difference in the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG and the number of pieces up to the upper limit increase number in addition to the total number of games that have disappeared TEG. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the special zone setting process in this modified example. The special zone setting process is, for example, a process performed in step S7808 in the zone display second process of FIG. 158, and is performed at the end of the advantageous zone.

In step S14001, a process is performed to determine the total number of games lost TEG. Then, in step S14002, a process is performed to determine the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG. Incidentally, when the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG is 1 or more, this means that the termination process of the current advantageous zone is terminated due to the second forced termination condition.

In the next step S14003, a process is performed to determine the difference in number of sheets to the upper limit increase number of the favorable zone. This process is the same as the process in step S13803 above, and the difference in number of sheets can be determined by subtracting the favorable zone increase/decrease number of sheets ZM from the upper limit increase number (2400 sheets). Note that in step S14003, the difference in number of sheets is determined if the current special zone setting process is performed based on any of the forced termination conditions. In other words, in step S14003, if the current favorable zone ends without any of the forced termination conditions being met, such as the number of continuations of attack mode becoming 0, the difference in number of sheets from the upper limit increase number is not determined (or is determined as 0).

In the next step S14004, a process is performed to obtain the special section table from the various table storage area 105a. In the special section table in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 236, the special section game number PG and the special section coin number PM are set to be different depending on the total number of games lost TEG, the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG, and the difference in number of coins up to the upper limit increase number. As already explained, the special section game number PG is a counter for determining the number of games in the special section, and is a counter that is decremented by one each time a game in the special section is played. On the other hand, the special section coin number PM is a counter for determining the number of games in the special section, but is also a counter for grasping the number of medals paid out in each game, and is a counter that is decremented by a value equivalent to the number of medals paid out for each game each time a payout process is performed.

In step S14005, a process is executed to input the special section game number PG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 236, when the difference in number of sheets to the upper limit increase number is 0 and the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is 1 or more, that is, when the upper limit increase number is reached and the game is forcibly terminated without reaching the upper limit game number (difference in number of sheets = 0 and ZG > 0), the value obtained by adding the remaining game number ZG to a value corresponding to the value of the total number of games lost TEG (0 to 80 in the figure) is input to the special section game number PG. In this case, the number of games corresponding to the number of games up to the upper limit game number may be input to the special section game number PG, or a value corresponding to the value of the total number of games lost TEG may be input to the number of games up to the upper limit game number. On the other hand, when the game is forcibly terminated without reaching the upper limit increase number and the upper limit game number is reached (difference in number of sheets > 0 and ZG = 0), 0 is input to the special section game number PG (no value is input). Then, when the upper limit increase number is reached and the upper limit game number is reached and forced termination is performed (difference in number of coins = 0 and ZG = 0), a value corresponding to the total number of games lost TEG is input to the special section game number PG. Note that the value input to the special section game number PG when both forced termination conditions are met is set to be larger than the value input to the special section game number PG when only one of the forced termination conditions is met.

In the next step S14006, a process of inputting the number of special section sheets PM is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 236, if the upper limit increase number is reached and the game is forcibly terminated without reaching the upper limit game number (difference number of sheets = 0 and ZG > 0), 0 is input to the number of special section sheets PM (no value is input). On the other hand, if the game is forcibly terminated because the upper limit game number is reached without reaching the upper limit increase number (difference number of sheets > 0 and ZG = 0), a value corresponding to the difference number of sheets up to the upper limit increase number is input to the number of special section sheets PM. Then, if the game is forcibly terminated because the upper limit increase number is reached and the upper limit game number is reached (difference number of sheets = 0 and ZG = 0), a value corresponding to the value of the total number of games lost TEG is input to the number of special section sheets PM. Note that the value input to the number of special section sheets PM when both forced termination conditions are met is set to be larger than the value input to the number of special section sheets PM when only one forced termination condition is met.

In step S14007, it is determined whether a value of 1 or greater has been input into the special section game count PG or the special section number of coins PM. If a positive determination is made in step S14007, a special section flag is set in step S14008, and a special section command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S14009. Incidentally, the special section command includes information on the values of the special section game count PG and the special section number of coins PM. If a negative determination is made in step S14007, or after the processing of step S14009 has been executed, a process of clearing the total number of games lost TEG is executed in step S14010, and then the special section setting process is terminated.

The game count management process in this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 237. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing part of the game count management process in this modified example.

In step S14101, it is determined whether the special zone flag is set. If the special zone flag is set, it is determined in step S14102 whether the game state is the normal game state or the first RT state. If it is in these low RT states, the process proceeds to step S14103, and the process of subtracting the special zone game number PG is executed. These processes are the same as the processes in steps S8101 to S8103 above. In step S14104, the process of subtracting the special zone number PM is executed based on the winning result of the current game. Specifically, the process of subtracting the number of medals paid out in the current game from the special zone number PM is executed. In this case, if the result of the current game is a losing result, or if the result is not the stopping result corresponding to the winning and is a so-called miss, the number of medals paid out is 0, and 0 is subtracted from the special zone number PM (no subtraction is performed in the current game).

Then, in step S14105, it is determined whether both the special section game count PG and the special section coin count PM have become 0. If both are 0, in step S14106, a process is executed to clear the special section flag. Then, in step S14107, a special section end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 to make the display control device 81 aware that the special section is ending. These processes result in the end of the special section. On the other hand, if either is not 0 in step S14105, that is, for example, if the special section game count PG is 0 but the special section coin count PM is not 0, a negative determination is made in step S14105.

In this way, in this modified example, when the advantageous period ends, a special period is set according to the excess amount, and also according to the difference in number of coins to the upper limit increase number, the number of games up to the upper limit game number, and the number of remaining games ZG. In this way, by configuring the special period to cover not only the extra addition that occurs in the advantageous period, but also the number of medals obtained and the number of games that can be played that are lost due to other forced termination conditions, it is possible to suitably reduce the decline in the player's motivation to play.

The contents of the effects in this modified example will be explained. Figure 238 is a flowchart of the process for setting the attack mode end effect, and Figure 239 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the effects by the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. The process for setting the attack mode end effect is a process executed by the display control device 81 to set the effects that occur when the attack mode ends or when the advantageous zone is forcibly ended.

In step S14201, a process is executed to ascertain the total number of medals acquired in the current favorable zone (favorable zone increase/decrease number ZM). Then, in step S14202, a process is executed to ascertain the total number of continuing games in the current favorable zone (favorable zone game number AG). Then, in step S14203, a process is executed to set an ending effect including the total number of medals acquired and the total number of continuing games. This process is the same as the process in steps S7701, S7702, and S7704 above.

In the next step S14204, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned special zone command has been received. If the special zone command has not been received, this setting process is terminated. If the special zone command has been received, in step S14205, processing is executed to perform a continuation effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, which indicates that the special zone, which is an advantageous zone for the player, will continue after the advantageous zone ends.

In the next step S14206, it is determined whether the value of the special zone game count PG included in the received special zone command is 1 or more. If it is 1 or more, in step S14207, processing is performed to continue displaying the remaining number of games in the previously executed advantageous zone after the currently set end performance. If a negative judgment is made in step S14206, or after the processing of step S14207 is executed, in step S14208, it is determined whether the value of the special zone number PM included in the currently received special zone command is 1 or more. If it is 1 or more, in step S14209, processing is performed to continue displaying the remaining increased number of coins in the previously executed advantageous zone after the currently set end performance. If a negative judgment is made in step S14208, or after the processing of step S14209 is executed, this setting processing is terminated.

The presentation contents performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. will be explained with reference to FIG. 239. FIG. 239(a1), (b1), (c1), (d1) show the presentation contents when the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit of the number of games and is forcibly terminated, and FIG. 239(a2), (b2), (c2), (d2) show the presentation contents when the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit of the number of medals to be increased and is forcibly terminated.

As shown in FIG. 239(a1), when the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is close to the upper limit number of games, the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG has reached the upper limit number of games, and the first exceedance flag is set, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays, for example, the limit exceedance information image GTP described above. After that, as shown in FIG. 239(b1), the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated when the upper limit number of games of the advantageous zone is reached, and the end of the attack mode is performed. In this case, as described above, a special zone is set according to the excess amount and the difference in number of coins up to the upper limit increase number.

When the attack mode end effect is being performed, for example, a predetermined operation is triggered (based on the operation of any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58, etc.), and the continuation effect shown in FIG. 239 (c1) occurs. More specifically, in the continuation effect, the face of a soldier as a predetermined character is displayed in close-up on the auxiliary display unit 65, and a man's rough voice is generated from the speaker 64 saying "Not yet!". Note that such a continuation effect is also used, for example, in the post-attack mode notification, and is executed as part of a pseudo-end effect as if the advantageous state had ended. More specifically, in the pseudo-end effect, a continuation notification is generated as a continuation effect after a termination notification such as the attack mode termination effect is generated. In other words, assuming a series of effects in which a termination notification is issued without any of the forced termination conditions being satisfied, a continuation notification is generated thereafter and the advantageous zone continues, it is possible to give a strong impression that the special zone is a zone in which the advantageous zone continues by generating a continuation notification even at the forced termination and transitioning to the special zone.

As described above, after the continuation notification is made, the game moves to the special zone. As shown in FIG. 239(a1) and FIG. 239(b1), this time the advantageous zone has been forcibly ended by reaching the upper limit of the number of games, so a value of 1 or more is entered into the special zone number PM. Then, in step S14209, processing is performed to continue displaying the remaining increase in the advantageous zone. In this case, as shown in FIG. 239(d1), along with displaying the total number of medals acquired in the advantageous zone, the difference in the number of medals up to the upper limit of the increase (remaining number of payouts) continues to be displayed. This makes it possible to further strengthen the impression that the special zone as a normal zone is a continuation of the advantageous zone that was previously in progress.

As shown in FIG. 239(a2), when the advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM is close to the upper limit increase number, the total expected increase/decrease number SM has reached the upper limit increase number, and the second excess flag is set, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays, for example, the limit excess information image GTP described above. After that, as shown in FIG. 239(b2), when the advantageous zone reaches its upper limit increase number, the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated, and the attack mode end effect is performed. In this case, as described above, a special zone is set according to the excess amount, the number of games up to the upper limit game number, and the remaining number of games ZG.

As in FIG. 239 (c1), after the end effect (end notification), a continuation effect (continuation notification) occurs in the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., in response to a specified operation.

After the continuation notification is made, the game moves to the special zone. As shown in FIG. 239(a2) and FIG. 239(b2), this time the advantageous zone has been forcibly terminated by reaching the upper limit increase number, so a value of 1 or more is also entered into the special zone game count PG. Then, in the above step S14207, processing is performed to continue displaying the remaining increased number of games in the advantageous zone. In this case, as shown in FIG. 239(d2), along with displaying the total number of continuing games in the advantageous zone, the number of remaining games up to the upper limit game number is also displayed. This makes it possible to further strengthen the impression that the special zone as a normal zone is a continuation of the advantageous zone that was previously in progress.

<Modification 9>
In this modified example, the processing when the actual advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM is less than the predicted number (total expected increase/decrease number SM) by the remaining number management processing will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 240, the event that occurs when the advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM is less than the prediction will be described.

Figure 240(a) shows the timing of tf1 during the favorable zone as the reference point, and when the number of games remaining in the favorable zone, ZG, is consumed at that point, the increase or decrease in the number of coins will exceed the upper limit increase at the timing of tf2, and the second excess flag is set.

When an opportunity to add to the total number of games occurs in this situation, adding the number of added games to the number of remaining games in the favorable zone ZG does not reach the upper limit number of games (1,500 games). However, since the second excess flag is set as described above, this added amount is added to the total number of games lost TEG, as already explained (Figure 240 (b)).

Figure 240(c) shows a later timing than Figure 240(a) and Figure 240(b), and is based on the timing of tf2 when the remaining number of games in the advantageous zone ZG has been used up. This example shows a case where the net increase in number of coins from tf1 to tf2 is lower than predicted at the time of tf1. In other words, even though it was predicted at the time of tf1 that the increase or decrease would reach the upper limit increase at the subsequent timing of tf2, it shows a case where the upper limit increase has not actually been reached even at the time of tf2.

Although the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG is 0 at the time tf2, as mentioned above, the additional number of games at tf1 has been added to the total number of games lost TEG. In other words, if the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone is 0 and the player were to simply end the advantageous zone, the player would suffer a significant loss. Therefore, in such a case, the number of games that will reach the upper limit increase (at the time of tf4) is predicted again, and the number of games up to that point (the number of games up to the upper limit increase) is moved from the total number of games lost TEG to the remaining number of games ZG (Fig. 240 (d)).

The following describes the reallocation process that is performed when the actual increase or decrease is less than predicted. Figure 241 is a flowchart showing the reallocation process. The reallocation process is performed after a positive judgment is made in step S1408, step S1414, step S1421, or step S1426 in the game count management process, and is performed when the continuation count of the current display mode (challenge mode, attack mode, etc.) becomes 0.

In step S14301, it is determined whether the challenge mode continuation count, attack mode continuation count, VB mode continuation count, and specialized zone continuation count are all 0. In other words, in step S14301, it is determined that the previous process has determined that the attack mode continuation count is 0, and that the game will not transition to challenge mode without transitioning to normal mode. If all continuation counts are 0, it is determined in step S14302 whether the total number of games lost TEG is 1 or more, and if it is 1 or more, it is determined in step S14303 whether the upper limit game number or upper limit increase number of the advantageous zone has been reached and the forced termination condition has been established. The case in which a positive determination is made in steps S14301 and S14302 and a negative determination is made in step S14303 is the situation in FIG. 240(c).

That is, if the number of games remaining in the favorable zone ZG becomes 0 even though the number of games added is stored in the total number of games lost TEG, proceed to step S14304. In step S14304, a process is executed to grasp the total number of games lost TEG. Then, in step S14305, the remaining expected number of increases or decreases NM is calculated when the total number of games lost TEG is consumed as the favorable zone. More specifically, the remaining expected number of increases or decreases NM is calculated by multiplying the total number of games lost TEG by the expected number of increases or decreases KM. In the following step S14306, a process is executed to calculate the total expected number of increases or decreases SM from the remaining expected number of increases or decreases NM and the current number of increases or decreases in the favorable zone ZM. Then, in step S14307, a process is executed to calculate the number of free coins FM that can be increased. In other words, steps S14304 to S14307 are performed to determine whether the upper limit increase number is exceeded when the total number of games lost TEG has been consumed as an advantageous period.

In step S14308, it is determined whether the free number of coins FM is 0 or less, which would exceed the upper limit increase. If it is not 0 or less and it is predicted that the upper limit increase will not be exceeded even if all the total number of games lost TEG is played, the process proceeds to step S14309, and the value of the total number of games lost TEG is entered into the attack mode continuation number.

If the number of free coins FM is 0 or less in step S14308, the process proceeds to step S14310. In step S14310, a process is executed to calculate the number of games YG required to reach the upper limit increase. More specifically, the difference between the current advantageous zone increase/decrease coin number ZM and the upper limit increase is divided by the expected increase/decrease coin number KM to calculate the number of games YG required to reach the upper limit increase. Then, in step S14311, it is determined whether the number of games YG required to reach the upper limit increase is greater than the number of free games FG calculated from the advantageous zone game number AG and the upper limit game number of 1500 games. If the number of free games FG is greater, the advantageous zone can be consumed up to the upper limit increase. In this case, in step S14312, a process is executed to divide the number of games YG required for the upper limit increase from the total number of games lost TEG, and in step S14313, a process is executed to add the number of games YG required to reach the upper limit increase to the number of continuations of the attack mode.

If it is determined in step S14311 that the number of games YG required to reach the upper limit increase is greater than the number of available games FG, then in step S14314, the number of games equivalent to the number of available games FG is subtracted from the total number of games lost TEG, and in step S14315, the number of games equivalent to the number of available games FG is added to the number of continuations in attack mode.

After executing any one of the processes of steps S14309, S14313, and S14315, in step S14316, a process is executed to set a reallocation flag in the various flag storage area 106d. The reallocation flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the attack mode continuation number has been re-input by each of the above processes. Then, in step S14317, an add-on command equivalent to the number of games added to the attack mode continuation number in the above process is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and this reallocation process is terminated. In this case, the displayed number of games and the attack mode continuation number are adjusted by a post-addition notification, etc.

As described above, in a configuration in which the number of increased coins in the advantageous zone is predicted and the second excess flag is set, after the second excess flag is set, even if an opportunity for an addition occurs, the number of added games is added to the total number of games lost TEG and the number of remaining games ZM is not added. However, if the actual number of increased coins is lower than predicted, the number of remaining games ZM may become 0 before the increased number of coins reaches the upper limit of the increase. Therefore, when such an event occurs, the above-mentioned reallocation process is used to re-predict the number of games up to the upper limit of the increase based on the value of the number of games lost TEG, and only the number of games required to reach the upper limit of the increase is extracted from the number of games lost TEG. Therefore, the addition after the second excess flag is set is not completely invalidated, and it is possible to preferably avoid the player suffering a disadvantage.

In addition, the redistribution process is configured to redistribute the remaining number of games ZM within the range of the number of lost games TEG, so that redistribution that exceeds the addition that occurs after the second excess flag is set can be prevented, and the payout rate can be prevented from becoming too high.

<Modification 10>
In this modified example, when an additional trigger occurs after the second excess flag is set in the configuration of the above modified example 9, the entire number of games is not added to the number of games lost TEG, but is temporarily stored in another counter. Figure 242 is a flowchart showing the number of games added in this modified example.

That is, in step S14401, it is determined whether or not either the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set. If neither is set, in steps S14402 and S14403, the current additional game number is added to the corresponding number of continued games, and then this game number addition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S14401 that any excess flag is set, the number of added games is ascertained in step S14404, and in this modified example, it is determined in step S14405 whether the first excess flag is set or not. If the first excess flag is set, the process of adding the current number of added games to the total number of games lost TEG is executed in step S14406, as in the seventh embodiment above.

On the other hand, if the first excess flag is not set in step S14405, that is, if only the second excess flag is set among the first excess flag and the second excess flag, the process proceeds to step S14407. In step S14407, a process is executed to add the current number of added games to the number of games prepared for elimination EJG provided in the various counter area 106e. The number of games prepared for elimination EJG is a counter for temporarily storing the number of added games when an addition occurs in a situation where the second forced termination condition of the favorable zone is predicted to be established in the future.

After executing the processing of step S14406 or step S14407, the processing for the fifth special notification is executed in steps S14408 to S14413, and then this game number addition processing is terminated. The processing of steps S14408 to S14413 is the same as the processing of steps S13306 to S13311 described above.

In this case, in the above reallocation process (FIG. 241), in step S14302, instead of the total number of games to be eliminated TEG, it is determined whether the number of games to be eliminated EJG is 1 or more. Also, in step S14304, instead of the total number of games to be eliminated TEG, the number of games to be eliminated EJG is grasped, and in step S14305, instead of the total number of games to be eliminated TEG, the number of games to be eliminated EJG is used to calculate the remaining expected increase/decrease number NM. Then, in step S14312, the number of games up to the upper limit number of games CG is subtracted from the number of games to be eliminated EJG, and in step S14314, the number of free games FG is subtracted from the number of games to be eliminated EJG.

Figure 243 (a) is a flowchart showing the process of moving the number of games to be eliminated to move the number of games to be eliminated EJG to the total number of games to be eliminated TEG. The process of moving the number of games to be eliminated is, for example, a process that is performed after step S13111 in the remaining number of games management process, a process that is performed when the first excess flag is set, and a process that is performed when the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less.

In step S14501, it is determined whether the second excess flag is set. If the second excess flag is set, in step S14502, the number of games prepared for elimination EJG is grasped, and a process is executed to add the value of the number of games prepared for elimination EJG to the total number of games prepared for elimination TEG. In this case, the value of the number of games prepared for elimination EJG is cleared. If the second excess flag is not set in step S14501, or after the process of step S14502 has been executed, the number of games prepared for elimination movement process is terminated.

That is, in this modified example, when an addition occurs in a situation where only the second excess flag is set, a value corresponding to the number of added games is temporarily stored in the number of games prepared for elimination EJG. Then, when the first excess flag is set, the number of games stored in the number of games prepared for elimination EJG is moved to the total number of games to be eliminated TEG. Then, if the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG becomes 0 before the first excess flag is set, a reallocation process to the remaining number of games ZG is performed using the value of the number of games prepared for elimination EJG. That is, in this modified example, an event in which the number of games once stored in the total number of games to be eliminated TEG is subtracted before elimination does not occur. In this way, by managing the number of games prepared for elimination EJG, which may decrease, and the total number of games to be eliminated TEG, which does not decrease, separately, the ease of management of the total number of games to be eliminated TEG is improved, and when presenting useful information to a player based on the total number of games to be eliminated TEG, the frequency of rewriting and accessing the total number of games to be eliminated TEG, which is the basis for this, is reduced, and the storage stability of the total number of games to be eliminated TEG can be ensured. This makes it less likely that an error will occur, such as accidentally erasing the total number of games lost TEG, and it is possible to effectively avoid an error resulting in the loss of benefits that the player should have gained (presentation of potentially beneficial information, occurrence of setting value suggestions).

As mentioned above, if an additional game is added when the second excess flag is set, the number of games prepared for elimination EJG is stored. In this case, the second excess flag can be considered as a factor for determining whether or not the total number of games prepared for elimination TEG that would occur if the forced termination condition were ultimately met may have been temporarily stored in the number of games prepared for elimination EJG.

In this case, in the sixth special notification process at the time of the forced termination, the sixth special notification selection table may be different depending on whether the second excess flag is set or not. More specifically, for example, if the second excess flag is set, processing is performed using the sixth special notification A selection table, and if the second excess flag is not set, processing is performed using the sixth special notification B selection table. In either sixth special notification selection table, information on the total number of games to be eliminated TEG is used. By adopting the above configuration, it is possible to separately perform processing for the sixth special notification based on the total number of games to be eliminated TEG that has passed the number of games to be eliminated EJG and processing for the sixth special notification based on the total number of games to be eliminated TEG that has not passed the number of games to be eliminated EJG, and it is also possible to create differences in the degree of advantage due to the setting value suggestion depending on whether the number of games to be eliminated EJG has been passed or not.

In the RAM 106, the total number of games to be eliminated TEG and the number of games to be prepared for elimination EJG may be configured as shown in FIG. 243(b), such that the total number of games to be eliminated TEG is stored in the total number of games to be eliminated TEG area provided in the normal section corresponding counter area 210 of the various counter areas 106e, and the number of games to be prepared for elimination EJG is stored in the number of games to be prepared for elimination EJG area provided in the advantageous section corresponding counter area 209 of the various counter areas 106e. In this way, in a configuration in which the number of games in excess of the forced termination condition is used to present information that is useful to the player, even in the seventh embodiment in which the excess may no longer be exceeded, by separately storing information used in connection with the push order notification during the advantageous section (the number of games to be prepared for elimination EJG) and information used in sections other than the advantageous section (the total number of games to be eliminated TEG) it is possible to carry over the information generated during the advantageous section even after the end of the advantageous section.

The area in which the total number of games to be eliminated TEG is stored and the area in which the number of games to be eliminated EJG is stored may have different access restrictions set by the CPU 102. More specifically, if the area in which the total number of games to be eliminated TEG is stored is configured to allow access during the process of adding the number of games in step S14406 or step S14502 in the favorable zone, and to restrict access during the process of subtracting the number of games, for example, the stability of the information on the number of games to be eliminated TEG is guaranteed, and it is possible to more safely implement special notifications based on the number of games to be eliminated TEG. On the other hand, if the number of games to be eliminated EJG is configured to allow access during both the addition process and the subtraction process in the favorable zone, the convenience of the number of games to be eliminated EJG is greatly improved. In this way, by setting different access restrictions for both game numbers TEG and EJG, the significance of storing common information such as the number of games in the favorable zone separately in multiple storage areas is enhanced.

<Modification 11>
In this modified example, the subsequent advantageous degree is made different based on the reallocation process shown in the modified example 10. Fig. 244 is a diagram for explaining an example of applying the difference in advantageous degree based on the reallocation process to the sixth special notification at the time of forced termination, and is a flowchart showing the sixth special notification process in this modified example.

That is, in step S14601, it is determined whether the above-mentioned reallocation flag is set. If the reallocation flag is not set, processing is executed (steps S14602 to S14607) to generate a special notification using the 6th special notification A lottery table as the current 6th special notification. Note that the processing of steps S14602 to S14607 is the same as the processing of steps S13702 to S13707 above.

On the other hand, if the reallocation flag is set and the total number of games to be eliminated TEG and the number of games to be prepared for elimination EJG have been reallocated before this forced termination, processing is executed (steps S14608 to S14613) to generate a special notification using the 6th special notification B lottery table as this 6th special notification. Note that the processing of steps S14608 to S14613 is the same as the processing of steps S13708 to S13713 described above.

As already explained, the setting value suggestion using the 6th special notification A lottery table and the setting value suggestion using the 6th special notification B lottery table are easier to narrow down the setting value using the B lottery table than using the A lottery table (Figure 230). The reallocation process is performed when the upper limit increase number is not reached in the game in which it was predicted that the upper limit increase number would be reached, even though it was predicted that it would be reached, and when fewer medals are paid out in each game than predicted. In other words, this is the case when the player does not enjoy the profits that were initially predicted. Therefore, by making the ease of narrowing down the setting value different when the 6th special notification is performed as described above, it is possible to compensate for the profits that have not been enjoyed by information such as the setting value suggestion.

<Modification 12>
In this modified example, when the actual number of increase or decrease in the advantageous zone ZM is less than the predicted number (total expected increase or decrease number SM) by the remaining number management process, the net increase in the number of increase or decrease in the advantageous zone is adjusted to increase. Figure 245 shows the CB push order notification process in this modified example. The CB push order notification process is a process that is performed when it is determined that a CB (not shown) has been won in the push order role process (Figure 38). For example, after a negative determination is made in step S1219, it is determined whether or not the current game has been won by the CB, and is a process that is performed when the determination is affirmative.

In step S14701, the remaining payout number in the CB state (see step S605 of the bonus state processing in FIG. 26) is referred to to determine whether the remaining payout number is 15. Here, as winning roles in the CB state, CB small/medium roles 1 to CB small/medium roles 4 with index values IV = 49 to 52 are set (see FIG. 17, etc.), and in the CB state, one of these CB small/medium roles 1 to CB small/medium roles 4 is won with a high probability (one of them is always won). The CB state is played in a 2-bet game, and when CB small/medium roles 1 to CB small/medium roles 4 are won, one of the first small roles to the 41st small roles is won, and 15 medals or 14 medals are paid out as a bonus (see FIG. 9 and FIG. 10). And, which small role win is won in CB small/medium roles 1 to CB small/medium roles 4 is managed by the stop order of the stop switches 42 to 44 (see FIG. 27 (a)). More specifically, for CB small/medium role 1 and CB small/medium role 2, regardless of the stopping order, a small role with 15 medals will be won, and for CB small/medium role 3 and CB small/medium role 4, the stopping order differs between a small role with 15 medals or 14 medals.

In step S14701, the remaining payout number is 15, which means that it is the first game in CB state. If the remaining payout number is 15, proceed to step S14702, where it is determined whether the above-mentioned reallocation flag is set. If the reallocation flag is set, it is determined in step S14703 whether the lottery result of this game is CB small/medium combination 3 or CB small/medium combination 4. In other words, the processing of step S14703 is a processing of determining whether the lottery result of this game is a result in which the payout number differs depending on the stopping order.

If a positive judgment is made in step S14703, a push order notification of the stop order resulting in the payout of 14 medals is generated in step S14704. After that, in step S14705, a push order command is output to the display control device 81, and the push order notification process for this CB is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in any of steps S14701 to S14703, this process is terminated without performing processing for the push order notification. In this case, the result resulting in the payout of 14 medals or the result resulting in the payout of 15 medals may be the winning result.

By doing so, the net increase in the number of medals after the reallocation process is performed increases. More specifically, if a CB win occurs after the reallocation flag is set, 14 medals and 15 medals can be paid out in the CB state, and the increase in the number of medals in the CB state is 14 medals + 15 medals - 2 medals x 2 = 25 medals. In contrast, before the increase notification flag is set, for example, if 15 medals are paid out in the first game, the CB state ends in that game, and the increase in the number of medals in the CB state is 15 medals - 2 medals = 13 medals, which is nearly twice the increase in the number of medals after the reallocation flag is set. By doing so, it is possible to approach the expected number in a situation where the reallocation process is performed, that is, when the actual increase in the number of medals is less than the expected number.

<Modification 13>
In this modified example, the processing when the actual advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM is greater than the predicted number (total expected increase/decrease number SM) by the remaining number management processing will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 246, the event that occurs when the advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM is greater than the prediction will be described.

Figure 246 (a) shows the timing of tg1 during the favorable zone as the reference point, and at the timing of tg2 when the remaining number of games ZG in the favorable zone at that time is consumed, the upper limit number of games has not been reached, and the increase or decrease in the number of medals does not exceed the upper limit increase, so neither the first excess flag nor the second excess flag is set.

In this case, the auxiliary display unit 65 can display the number of remaining games equal to the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG, and in the figure, the number of games (200 games) equal to the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG is displayed as the number of remaining games.

Figure 246 (b) shows the timing tg3, which is later than the timing tg1, as the reference point. In this example, an increase in the number of coins occurs that is greater than the increase or decrease predicted at the timing tg1, and the upper limit of the increase in the advantageous zone is exceeded at the timing tg3. In other words, the timing tg3 is before the timing tg2, which was supposed to consume the number of remaining games ZG (200 games) in the advantageous zone at the timing tg1. In this case, the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated based on the fact that the upper limit of the increase in the advantageous zone has been exceeded as described above, and the auxiliary display unit 65 displays, for example, an attack mode end effect.

In this case, at the timing tg1, the auxiliary display unit 65 notifies the player of the number of remaining games corresponding to the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone ZG, and at the timing tg3, the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated without playing the entire number of remaining games notified at the time of tg1, which may give the player the impression that the profit that should have been earned from the games notified at tg1 (100 games remaining in Figure 246) has been unfairly exploited.

Figure 247 is a flowchart showing the seventh special notification process in this modified example. The seventh special notification process is, for example, a process that is performed when a favorable zone is forcibly terminated in the second zone display process (for example, between step S13606 and step S13607 in Figure 228).

In step S14801, it is determined whether the number of increase or decrease in the favorable zone ZM is 2400 or more. If the result of the negative determination in step S14801 is that the favorable zone ends without satisfying the second forced termination condition, the seventh special notification process is terminated. If the second forced termination condition is satisfied, in step S14802, it is determined whether the number of games remaining in the favorable zone ZG is greater than 0. If the number of games remaining in the favorable zone ZG is greater than 0, it is a case where the game is forcibly terminated due to the second forced termination condition even though there is a number of games remaining in the favorable zone ZG. If the number of games remaining in the favorable zone ZG is 0, the seventh special notification process is terminated, and if it is 1 or more, it proceeds to step S14803. In step S14803, it is determined whether the value of the number of games remaining in the favorable zone ZG grasped in the above step S14802 includes a number that has already been notified. More specifically, the number of games for the later-add notification (the number of games corresponding to the later-add counter BG on the display control device 81 side, described as the later-add counter BG in the figures and below) is grasped, and if the later-add counter BG is equal to the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG, it is determined that the number of games in the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG does not include games that have already been notified, and if the later-add counter BG is smaller than the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG, it is determined that the number of games that have already been notified is included. If it is determined that the number of games that have already been notified is not included, the seventh special notification process is terminated as is. In other words, even if there is a number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG, if the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG has not been notified due to the second forced termination condition, the seventh special notification process is not performed.

If some of the games have already been notified, the process proceeds to step S14804. In step S14804, a process is executed to determine the amount of the notification. In this case, the amount of the notification can be determined by subtracting the later-addition counter BG from the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG. In the following step S14805, the seventh special notification lottery table is obtained from the various table memory area 105a. As shown in FIG. 248(a), the seventh special notification lottery table is set so that the occurrence rate of the seventh special notification (winning rate of the notification lottery) differs depending on the number of games that have already been notified determined in step S14804, and is set so that the occurrence rate increases as the number of games that have already been notified increases.

In the following step S14806, a lottery is performed to execute the seventh special announcement based on the number of games to be announced determined in step S14804 and the seventh special announcement lottery table obtained in step S14805. Then, in step S14807, it is determined whether the announcement lottery has been won, and if the announcement lottery has been won, in step S14808, a command for executing the seventh special announcement is set as the output target to the display control device 81, and if the announcement lottery has not been won, in step S14809, a command for not executing the seventh special announcement is set as the output target to the display control device 81. After the processing of step S14808 or step S14809 has been executed, the processing for the seventh special announcement is terminated.

The processing on the display control device 81 side when it receives the command for executing the 7th special notification or the command for not executing the 7th special notification is generally similar to the processing when it receives other commands for executing/not executing special notifications, so a detailed description of the processing will be omitted. However, since the command for executing the 7th special notification or the command for not executing the 7th special notification are output at the end of the advantageous zone, it is preferable to perform the 7th special notification (whether or not a specific character appears, the type of character that appears, the background, etc.) in the attack mode end performance, etc. In addition, when the display control device 81 executes the 7th special notification (when it receives the command for executing the 7th special notification), it determines the type of the 7th special notification by a type lottery, etc. As shown in FIG. 248(b), the type table of the 7th special notification is set so that the type of the 7th special notification (a1 to a4) that occurs varies depending on the setting value, and the player can predict the setting value from the type of the 7th special notification that occurs.

However, the seventh special notification is set so that, regardless of the type, it is not possible or difficult to narrow down the setting value by itself. That is, the seventh special notification a1 and the seventh special notification a2 occur with any setting value. Furthermore, when the seventh special notification a3 occurs, it is confirmed that the setting is 3 or higher, and when the seventh special notification a4 occurs, it is confirmed that the setting is 5 or higher. However, regardless of the setting value, more than half of the types of seventh special notifications selected are the seventh special notification a1 and the seventh special notification a2, and it is more difficult to narrow down the setting value compared to other special notifications. This is because, in the situation shown in FIG. 246(b) above, at least the upper limit increase number of the advantageous zone has been reached, and the actual profit of the player is more favorable to the player than what was predicted in FIG. 246(a) (the upper limit increase number is not reached). In other words, in the situation in FIG. 246(b), the player is not suffering any substantial disadvantage, and is instead enjoying greater benefits than expected, and the idea is that if information that could be beneficial to the player is presented in such a situation, the degree of that potential benefit may be reduced. This makes it possible to maintain a balance between the player's losses or disadvantages and the presentation (compensation) of information.

As described above, in a configuration in which the conditions for forcing the advantageous zone to terminate include a first forced termination condition for the upper limit number of games and a second forced termination condition for the upper limit increase number, if the second forced termination condition is met earlier than expected (in an earlier game than predicted), a discrepancy may occur in relation to the notification of the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone. Therefore, in order to eliminate the dissatisfaction that the player may feel due to this discrepancy, a configuration is provided in which information that may be beneficial to the player (setting value suggestion) is presented. In this way, the player can enjoy the game in a favorable manner without losing their motivation to play.

<Modification 14>
In this modified example, based on the above modified example 13, if the actual advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM is greater than the predicted number (total expected increase/decrease number SM) by the remaining number management process, and the upper limit increase number is reached without consuming the remaining number of games notified, the remaining number of games not consumed is used to set the special zone. Figure 249 is a flowchart showing the special zone setting process in this modified example.

The processing of steps S14901 to S14905 is the same as the processing of steps S14001 to S14005 described above, and the special section game number PG is set based on the total number of games lost TEG, the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG, and the difference in number of coins up to the upper limit increase number. In addition to the special section game number PG based on these parameters, this modified example is configured to set the number of games for the special section based on the above-mentioned unplayed notification amount for the special section, so the special section game number PG based on the total number of games lost TEG, the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG, and the difference in number of coins up to the upper limit increase number is referred to as the first special section game number PG1.

In step S14906, a process is executed to determine the number of games that have been notified. The process of step S14906 is the same as the process of step S14804 above, and the number of games that have been notified can be determined by subtracting the later-addition counter BG from the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG. In the following step S14907, a process is executed to input a value corresponding to the number of games determined in step S14906 above into the second special zone game number PG2 provided in the various counter areas 106e. Note that the value input in step S14907 does not have to be exactly the same as the value determined in step S14906. For example, one of the second special zone game numbers PG2 set in multiple stages may be input by lottery or the like, and the value determined in step S14906 above may be used as a parameter for the lottery.

Then, in step S14908, it is determined whether either the first special zone game count PG1 or the second special zone game count PG2 is 1 or greater, and if either is 1 or greater, processing is performed in steps S14909 and S14910 to set the special zone. If a negative determination is made in step S14908, or after the processing of step S14910 has been executed, the total number of games lost TEG is cleared in step S14911, and the special zone setting processing is then terminated.

In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 250(a), in the subtraction process (15003) of the special section game number, the first special section game number PG1 and the second special section game number PG2 are each subtracted by 1. Then, in step S15004, it is determined whether the first special section game number PG1 of the first special section game number PG1 and the second special section game number PG2 has become 0, and if it has become 0, the special section flag is cleared in step S15005 to end the special section. In other words, although the first special section game number PG1 and the second special section game number PG2 are set as parameters for the number of games in the special section, the number of games in the special section itself is determined by the first special section game number PG1.

In contrast, in the push order role processing of this modified example, the occurrence rate of push order notification when special replays 1 and 2 are won differs between a situation where the first special section game number PG1 and the second special section game number PG2 are 1 or more and a situation after the second special section game number PG2 becomes 0 (a situation where only the first special section PG1 is 1 or more). Specifically, if it is determined in step S15051 that special replays 1 and 2 have been won, it is determined in step S15052 whether or not it is a special section. If it is a special section, the setting value is grasped in step S15053, and the push order notification lottery table when special replays are won is obtained in step S15054. As shown in Figures 251(a) and 251(b), the push order notification table when a special replay is won differs between the situation after the second special section game number PG2 becomes 0 (the situation where only the first special section game number PG1 is 1 or more, Figure 251(a)) and the situation where the first special section game number PG1 and the second special section game number PG2 are 1 or more (Figure 251(b)). Figure 251(a) is the same as the table shown in Figure 162(b) above, and is set so that the occurrence rate of push order notification and the type of push order notification when a push order notification is generated differ depending on the setting value. Like FIG. 251(a), FIG. 251(b) is set so that the occurrence rate of push order notifications and the type of push order notifications that are generated vary depending on the setting value, but the difference in the occurrence rate of push order notifications depending on the setting value and the variation in the type of push order notifications that are generated differ from those in FIG. 251(a) above, and the table in FIG. 251(b) is set so that it is easier to narrow down the setting values based on the occurrence rate and type than the table in FIG. 251(a).

In step S15055, a push order notification lottery process is executed, and in step S15056, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If the lottery has been won, in step S15057, a process is executed to set a push order notification command.

In other words, when a special section is set based on a forced termination, a section is set in which the set value is more likely to be narrowed down by the number of games already notified. In this way, the inability to play the notified number of games is made up for by a section in which the set value is more likely to be narrowed down, and the player's sense of absurdity can be suitably eliminated.

In particular, in the case of special zones, the setting of a special zone does not necessarily mean that useful information is presented to the player, and even if it is set, special replays 1 and 2 must be won in order for the player to win, so events that are too advantageous for the player can be avoided and an appropriate balance can be maintained between the player's losses and disadvantages and their follow-up.

<Modification 15>
In this modified example, when the second excess flag is set in the remaining number management process, a new game feature is provided by utilizing the relationship between the number of games that will reach the upper limit increase number and the number of games that have already been notified. Figure 252 (a) shows a part of the flowchart of the remaining number management process in this modified example.

In this modified example, if it is determined in step S13205 that the available number of coins FM that can be increased is 0 or less, a second excess flag is set in step S15101. Then, in step S15102, a process is executed to determine the number of games required to reach the upper limit increase, and in step S15103, a process is executed to determine the number of remaining games that has been notified.

In step S15104, it is determined whether the number of remaining games that has been notified in step S15103 is greater than the number of games required to reach the upper limit increase number determined in step S15102. If the number of remaining games that has been notified is greater, that is, if it is determined that the upper limit increase number will be reached before all of the remaining games that have already been notified are played at the time the second excess flag is set, the eighth special notification command is set as the output target to the display control device 81 in step S15105, and the remaining number management process is terminated. If the number of games required to reach the upper limit increase number is greater than the remaining number of games that has been notified, the remaining number management process is terminated without setting the eighth special notification command.

An example of the presentation of the 8th special announcement is shown in Figure 252 (b).

In this example, the number of remaining games that has been notified is 300 games, and the number of games required to reach the upper limit increase is 250 games. The auxiliary display unit 65 displays the number of remaining games (300 games) and the total number of medals won (1,900 medals), as well as the limit exceedance information image GTP based on the second exceedance flag being set.

The eighth special notification is set so that the auxiliary display unit 65 notifies the user that it will be advantageous to forcibly end the game when the maximum increase limit is reached while leaving as many remaining games as possible. In this example, a girl character displays the explanation "You'll be super lucky if you have a lot left" in response to the remaining number of games, explaining that the more remaining games that are notified are left before the game is forcibly ended, the more advantageous the subsequent special section will be.

By doing this, rather than treating an event such as a forced end before the remaining number of games that has already been notified as being a disadvantage to the player, it is possible to give the impression that such an occurrence is an advantageous event, and it is possible to create new gameplay characteristics that take advantage of this.

In particular, in this modified example, since it is more advantageous for the player to forcibly end the advantageous zone earlier, it is possible to further increase the sense of anticipation for the bonus state with a larger expected increase or decrease per game. In other words, in a situation in which it is known that the upper limit increase will be reached, whether the medal increase occurs due to the push order notification in attack mode or due to the bonus state, the final medal increase will not change, so an event may occur in which the player is not happy about winning a bonus, which would normally be something to be happy about. In contrast, by configuring in such a way that it is advantageous to reach the upper limit increase earlier, as in the above configuration, it is possible to expect earlier achievement through winning a bonus, thereby strengthening the impression that winning the bonus is something to be happy about.

In the above variant, the more the number of remaining games notified at the time of forced termination, the more advantageous it is for the player. However, it may also be configured so that the fewer the number of remaining games notified, the more advantageous it is for the player, or it may be configured so that it is advantageous for the player if the number of remaining games notified is a predetermined specific number, such as a nice round number.

For example, Figure 253 (a) shows a seventh special notification lottery table for the seventh special notification shown in variant example 13 above, in which the occurrence rate of the seventh special notification increases the fewer the number of games that have been notified at the time of forced termination. By doing this, it becomes more advantageous to play as many games that have been notified as possible before forcibly terminating the game, allowing players to enjoy the advantageous zone until the very end.

Figure 253 (b) shows a seventh special notification lottery table for the seventh special notification shown in variant example 13 above, in which the occurrence rate of the seventh special notification is higher when the number of games notified at the time of the forced termination is a predetermined specific number such as 10, 50, 100, or 200 than when this is not the case. By doing this, it is less likely that the number of games notified will run out early or vice versa, causing anticipation for the seventh special notification to fade, and it is possible to keep players interested in the results of each game until the end, based on the relationship between the increase or decrease in the number of games notified and the remaining number of games notified.

In the above configuration, for example, in the setting process for the top-up effect (FIG. 172, etc.), the top-up notification may be an immediate top-up notification or a later top-up notification depending on whether the second excess flag is set. In this case, for example, in a configuration in which the more the number of games that have been reported is large and the more advantageous it is to be forced to end the game at the upper limit increase (the more likely the seventh special notification is to occur), it is preferable for the player to select the immediate top-up notification, and in a configuration in which the more advantageous it is to be forced to end the game at the upper limit increase number and the fewer the number of games that have been reported, it is preferable for the player to select the later top-up notification. In this way, even an event that may no longer be of interest in a situation in which the excess flag is set, such as the number of games for the top-up notification, can be incorporated into the game by utilizing the relationship with the number of games that have been reported, which can improve the entertainment value of the game.

<Modification 16>
In this modified example, the configuration for predicting whether the second forced termination condition will be met in the future is changed. Fig. 254 is a flow chart showing the remaining number management process in this modified example.

In step S15201, the number of coins ZM that have increased or decreased in the favorable zone is determined. In the following step S15202, a process is performed to calculate the average number of times that a bonus can be expected to be won (expected number of bonus wins KB) from the number of games remaining in the favorable zone ZG. For example, if the number of games remaining in the favorable zone ZG is 500 games and the probability of winning a bonus is approximately 1 in 254, the expected number of bonus wins KB is calculated as 500 games x approximately 1 in 254 = approximately 1.97 times.

In step S15203, the increase that can be expected from the bonus (expected bonus increase KBM) is calculated based on the expected number of bonus wins KB calculated in step S15202. For example, if the number of coins won from the bonus is 144, the expected bonus increase KBM is calculated as approximately 1.97 times (KB) x 144 coins = approximately 283.68 coins.

In the next step S15204, the number of games (number of games to be notified HG) is calculated excluding the number of games to be played in the bonus state in the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZM when a bonus is won according to the expected number of bonus wins KB. For example, if the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG is 500, the expected number of bonus wins KB is approximately 1.97 times, and the number of games required to play through the bonus state is 24 games, then the number of games to be notified HG is calculated as 500 games - approximately 1.97 times (KB) x 24 games = approximately 452.72 games.

In step S15205, the expected remaining number of coins NM to increase or decrease when the advantageous zone of the above-mentioned number of announced games HG is executed is calculated. In this case, the expected remaining number of coins NM to increase or decrease is calculated by multiplying the number of announced games HG by the expected number of coins KM, which is the net increase in coins (approximately +1.90 coins) without taking into account the bonus state. In an example where the above-mentioned number of announced games HG is approximately 452.72 games, the expected remaining number of coins NM to increase or decrease is calculated as approximately 452.72 games x 1.90 coins (KM) = approximately 860.17 coins.

Then, in step S15206, the total expected increase/decrease number SM in the remaining number of games in the favorable zone ZG, taking into account the number of games consumed in the bonus state, is calculated by adding the remaining expected increase/decrease number NM and the expected bonus increase number KBM to the number of increase/decrease number in the favorable zone ZM. In the above example, the total expected increase/decrease number SM is approximately 860.17 pieces (NM) + approximately 283.68 pieces (KBM) = 1143.85 pieces plus the current number of increase/decrease number ZM in the favorable zone. This value is less than the total expected increase/decrease number SM (1230 pieces + ZM) calculated for the same number of games remaining in the favorable zone ZG in the seventh embodiment. Thereafter, in step S15207, the number of free pieces FM that can be increased is calculated, and if the number of free pieces FM is 0 or less (step S15208), the process of setting the second excess flag is performed (step S15209).

As described above, when predicting (calculating) the expected increase or decrease in medals in the remaining advantageous zone, it is possible to more accurately predict the increase or decrease in medals by taking into account not only the increase in medals in the bonus state, but also the remaining number of games in the advantageous zone that will be consumed in the bonus state.

In particular, since the count of the number of games in the advantageous zone AG continues even if the advantageous zone is consumed in the bonus state, by transitioning to the bonus state, more medals can be expected to be won than if there was no transition, but the number of games implemented in attack mode, etc. will be reduced by the amount of the bonus state. In other words, for example, if the expected increase in the number of coins when a predetermined number of games of so-called ART, which is attack mode and a high RT state, is executed is calculated taking into account the transition to the bonus state, since the count of the number of remaining games in the ART is stopped when transitioning to the bonus state, the increase in the number of coins expected during the ART for the predetermined number of games can be calculated by simply adding the increase in the number of coins expected in the ART state to the transition rate to the bonus state and the increase in the number of coins expected in the bonus state. More specifically, for example, if a 100-game ART is played with a net increase of approximately +1.90 coins, during which a bonus lottery is also held in which the player can expect to win 144 medals at a rate of approximately 1 in 254, then by playing the 100-game ART, the player can expect to win 100 games x approximately 1.90 coins + 100 games x approximately 1 in 254 x 144 coins = approximately 246 medals, which converts to a net increase in coins per game of approximately 2.46 coins. In contrast, if the ART count is not stopped when the bonus state is entered, then the reduction in the number of ART games for the bonus state must be taken into account. In the above example, by playing 100 ART games, the player can expect to win (100 games - 100 games x 1/254 x 24 games (number of games required in bonus state)) x 1.90 + 100 games x 1/254 x 144 = 227 medals, which translates to a net increase in medals per game of approximately 2.27 medals. In this way, by taking into account the fact that the count in the favorable zone is not stopped when a bonus is won during the favorable zone, a more accurate prediction can be made by using a configuration that predicts the expected increase in medals.

<Modification 17>
In this modified example, we will explain how to reduce the fluctuation range of the net increase in the number of coins in the advantageous zone depending on whether or not the BB is won. Figure 255 (a) shows a part of the lottery table for the first RT state in this modified example.

In this modified example, the winning probability of various replays during the first RT state in the seventh embodiment is different, with a normal replay with index value IV=1 having a higher winning probability than in the seventh embodiment, and first promotion replays 1-4 with index values IV=2-5 having a lower winning probability than in the seventh embodiment. On the other hand, the total replay probability combining various replays with index values IV=1-5 is set to be the same as in the seventh embodiment. Note that index values IV=6 and above are the same as in the seventh embodiment.

By doing as described above, in the first RT state in this modified example, the probability of winning the first promotion replay is lower than that of the seventh embodiment, and even in a situation where a push order notification may occur, the average number of games until the transition to the second RT state is longer than in the seventh embodiment. The net increase in the number of coins in the first RT state in a situation where a push order notification may occur is as shown in Figure 216 above, and is approximately -0.99 coins per game, not including bonus wins, and the number of medals held may decrease.

Figure 255 (b) is a diagram for comparing the increase or decrease in medals when a bonus is won during ART between the seventh embodiment and this modified example.

In the seventh embodiment, if a bonus is won at th1 during ART, the bonus will be carried over until th2 when the bonus is won, and the game state will be the normal game state. In addition, from th3 when the bonus ends until th4 when the game returns to the second RT state, the game state will be the normal game state and the first RT state. The net increase in the number of coins in each of these states is as described above, with th1-th2 and th3-th4 being approximately -0.99 coins per game, th2-th3 being approximately +6.00 coins, and before th1 and after th4 being approximately +1.90 coins.

The diagram shows that in this modified example, a bonus is won at th5, a bonus is awarded at th6, the bonus ends at th7, and the player returns to the second RT state at tf8. The net increase in coins in each state is approximately -0.99 coins per game from th5 to th6 and th7 to th8, approximately +6.00 coins from th6 to th7, and approximately +1.90 coins before th5 and after th8.

The seventh embodiment and this modified example differ in the average number of games from the end of the bonus to returning to the second RT state, with the average number of games in the seventh embodiment being th3 to th4 in the figure, and the average number of games in this modified example being th7 to th8, meaning that this modified example is likely to be longer. By doing this, the net increase in number of coins when a bonus is won during ART can be suppressed from the increase in the net increase in number of coins when a bonus is won during ART (the net increase in number of coins from th1 to th4 and the net increase in number of coins from th5 to th8). This reduces the fluctuation range of the net increase in number of coins when a bonus is won during ART, making it possible to reduce the difference between the predicted value and the actual value of the net increase in number of coins.

Incidentally, in this modified example, the probability of winning the first promotion replay during the first RT state is about 1 in 50, and the transition to the second RT state can occur in an average of 50 games. Also, in the normal game state, the transition to the first RT state occurs when the bell is missed (1 in 3), which is about 1 in 5.5, and the transition can occur in an average of 16.5 games. In other words, it takes an average of 66.5 games to return to the second RT state after the bonus. In this case, the average medal increase or decrease is about -64.8 medals (-0.99 x 66.5). If the bonus increase of 214 medals is added to this, and the net increase in the number of medals from the bonus win to the return to ART is calculated for 70.5 games, including the 24 games in the bonus state, the result is about 2.12, which is more than the net increase in the number of medals during ART. If we assume that it takes about 8 games to win the bonus, the net increase will be about +1.90 coins, which is roughly equal to the net increase during ART (almost the same, so that there is no difference in the predicted number of games, so that the player cannot tell the difference).

<Modification 18>
In this modified example, the total expected increase/decrease number of coins SM calculated in the remaining number management process is appropriately corrected. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the add-on command in this modified example. The setting process of the add-on command is a process that is started when outputting and setting the add-on command to the display control device 81 after the process of adding the number of games such as the attack mode. Note that in this modified example, the setting process of the add-on command is started even when the add-on is not won, and further, the main control device 101 is configured to determine the timing of the execution of the add-on notification, such as the immediate add-on notification, the later add-on notification, the timing of the stop ON operation, and the stop OFF operation.

In step S15301, it is determined whether or not an additional win has been made in the current additional lottery. As already explained, in this modified example, the setting process for the additional command is started even when an additional win has not been made, and the process of step S15301 can be said to be a process for determining whether or not a setting process was started when the additional win has not been made. Also, even in a situation where the above-mentioned first excess flag or second excess flag is set, it is determined in step S15301 that the additional lottery was not won. If it was not started when a non-win was made but when an additional win was made, the process proceeds to step S15302, and a process is performed to determine the number of games to be added this time. Then, in step S15303, the first adjustment process is executed. The first adjustment process is a process for correcting the total expected increase/decrease number of coins SM, etc., calculated in the second section display process of the previous game, when adding the current coin.

The first adjustment process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 257. In addition, FIG. 260 will also be referenced as appropriate during the explanation.

In step S15401, a process is executed to grasp the display remaining number counter HG provided in the various counter areas 106e. This display remaining number counter HG corresponds to the display remaining number counter HG on the display control device 81 side, and is the remaining number of games in the currently notified advantageous zone, and corresponds to the notified remaining number of games in the advantageous zone ZG. Note that in the figures and the following explanation, it is referred to as the display remaining number counter HG. In step S15402, this counter executes a process to temporarily input the value of the display remaining number counter HG to the calculation counter SC provided in the various counter areas 106e. The calculation counter SC is a counter used in the calculation process of the total expected increase/decrease number SM, etc.

In step S15403, the processing is performed to add the current number of added games to the calculation counter SC to which the display remaining number counter HG (the number of games remaining in the favorable zone that has already been notified ZG) has been input. Then, in step S15404, the processing is performed to calculate the remaining maximum expected increase number NMM from the calculation counter SC after the addition and the maximum increase/decrease number MM. The maximum increase/decrease number MM is the maximum number of coins that can be expected per game, and in this modified example, the maximum increase/decrease number MM is set to 12, which is the maximum payout number per game of 15 coins minus the number of bets of 3. Note that the increase in the number of coins (9 coins - 3 coins = 6 coins) of the payout role (the so-called main role, or the push order bell in attack mode) with the highest probability of winning in the state at the time of calculation or in the state thereafter may be set as the maximum increase/decrease number MM. Then, in step S15405, the above calculated maximum expected increase number NMM is added to the current favorable zone increase/decrease number ZM to calculate the total maximum expected increase/decrease number SMM.

Figure 260(a) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the game numbers, counters, etc., when the first adjustment process is performed. The figure shows the situation when an addition occurs at the timing of ti1, where the number of games up to ti2 corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG has already been notified for the advantageous zone game number AG at the timing of ti1, and shows the case where an addition of the game numbers from ti2 to ti4 has occurred as the current addition. At the timing of ti1, the expected increase is calculated as the total expected increase/decrease number SM in the immediately preceding second zone display process, and in this example, it is predicted that the upper limit increase of 2,400 coins will not be reached.

Then, in step S15405, as described above, the number of games added this time is added to the number of remaining games ZG, and the total maximum expected increase/decrease number SMM is calculated. In the following step S15406, it is determined whether the calculated total maximum expected increase/decrease number SMM exceeds the upper limit increase number. If it is determined that the upper limit increase number is exceeded, in step S15407, the upper limit increase number is subtracted from the total maximum expected increase number SMM to calculate the excess amount CM, and in step S15408, a process is performed to calculate the excess number of games CG corresponding to the excess amount CM from the excess amount CM and the maximum increase/decrease number MM. Then, in step S15409, a process is performed to calculate the notification upper limit HJ, which is the upper limit at which the event of forced termination without playing the notified number of games does not occur during this addition. More specifically, the notification upper limit HJ is calculated by subtracting the display remaining number counter HG and the excess number of games CG from the calculation counter SC.

In Figure 260(a), an excess game count CG equivalent to the excess amount CM is calculated from the calculated total maximum expected increase/decrease coin count SMM. Using the timing of ti1 as a reference, if the maximum increase is expected in each game, including the current addition, the upper limit increase will be exceeded at ti4, and more specifically, if the maximum increase is expected, the upper limit increase will be exceeded at game ti3. In this case, the games from ti3 to ti4 are calculated as the excess game count CG, and the number of games from ti2 to ti3 is calculated as the notification upper limit HJ.

After calculating the notification upper limit HJ in step S15409, a process is executed in step S15410 to set an adjustment flag in the various flag storage area 106d. The adjustment flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to understand that the total maximum expected increase/decrease number SMM exceeds the upper limit increase number due to the current addition, and that the excess game count CG and notification upper limit HJ have been calculated.

In the following step S15411, a process is performed in which the number of added games exceeding the above-mentioned upper limit HJ for notification, i.e., the excess number of games CG, is added to the first adjustment counter CC1 provided in the various counter area 106e. After that, in step S15412, the calculation counter SC is cleared and the first adjustment process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in step S15406 that the total maximum expected increase/decrease number of coins SMM does not exceed the upper limit increase number, the calculation counter SC is cleared in step S15412 and the first adjustment process is terminated without calculating the excess number of games CG, etc.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process of the add-on command, after the first adjustment process is executed in step S15303, a lottery process is executed in step S15304 to determine whether the current add-on notification is to be a later add-on notification. This process corresponds to the process of step S8503 on the display control device 81 side. Then, in step S15305, it is determined whether the later add-on notification is selected, and if the immediate add-on notification is selected instead of the later add-on notification, in step S15306, a process is executed to add the current number of added games or the notification upper limit HJ set in the first adjustment process to the display remaining number counter HG. In this case, if the notification upper limit HJ is not set, a notification of the current number of added games occurs in the game, and if the notification upper limit HJ is set, a notification of the current number of added games occurs in the game. The processes of steps S15307 to S15312 correspond to the processes of steps S8506 to S8511, and are processes for setting at what timing in the current game the add-on notification will occur. After executing any one of steps S15309, S15311, and S15312, step S15313 executes a process to output and set an additional command including the information set in each of the above processes, and then ends the setting process of this additional command.

If it is determined in step S15305 that the later addition notification has been selected, a process is executed in step S15314 to set a later addition flag in the various flag storage area 106d. Then, in step S15315, a process is executed to add the current number of added games or notification upper limit HJ to the later addition counter BG provided in the various counter area 106e. The later addition counter is also a counter equivalent to the later addition counter BG on the display control device 81 side, and in the figures and the following description, both are referred to as the later addition counter BG. Then, in step S15316, the add-on command in which various information has been set is set as the output target to the display control device 81, and the setting process of this add-on command is terminated.

If it is determined in step S15301 that the additional prize was not won, the third adjustment process is executed in step S15317, and the additional prize command is output and set in step S15318, after which the setting process for the additional prize command is terminated. The third adjustment process will be described in detail later.

Next, the second adjustment process that is started in the second section display process in this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 258. The second adjustment process is a process for readjusting the first adjustment counter CC1 that was set in the first adjustment process based on the result of the current game, and is started, for example, after the remaining number management process is executed in step S13005.

In step S15501, the number of games corresponding to the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG that has already been notified is determined as the display remaining number counter HG. In the following step S15502, the number of games corresponding to the above-mentioned notification upper limit HJ is determined. Then, in step S15503, a process is executed to input the display remaining number counter HG and the notification upper limit HJ into the calculation counter SC. After that, in step S15504, a process is executed to calculate the remaining maximum expected increase/decrease number NMM from the calculation counter SC and the maximum increase/decrease number MM, and in step S15505, a process is executed to calculate the total maximum expected increase/decrease number SMM. The processes in steps S15504 and S15505 correspond to the processes in steps S15404 and S15405 above.

In the following step S15506, it is determined whether the total maximum expected increase/decrease number SMM exceeds the upper limit increase number, and if it is determined that it does, the excess amount CM is grasped in step S15507, and then the excess number of games CG is calculated in step S15508. The processing in these steps S15506 to S15508 corresponds to the processing in the above steps S15406 to S15408.

In the following step S15509, the difference between the first adjustment counter CC1 and the excess game count CG is input to the second adjustment counter CC2 provided in the various counter area 106e. If a negative judgment is made in step S15506, or after the processing of step S15509 has been executed, the calculation counter SC is cleared and then the second adjustment process is terminated.

Figure 260(b) shows the situation when the second adjustment process is performed after the first adjustment process in Figure 260(a) above. The first adjustment process is performed at the start of the game, whereas the second adjustment process is performed at the end of the game, and Figure 260(b) is shown based on timing ti5, which is the end of the game that started at timing ti1 in Figure 260(a).

As described above, the upper limit HJ to be notified when an additional win is made is calculated from the maximum increase number, and if the result of the current game does not reach the maximum increase number, the game that exceeds the upper limit increase number derived from the maximum increase number will be a game that differs from the previous prediction. More specifically, at the time of ti1 in FIG. 260(a), the game that exceeds the upper limit increase number was predicted as ti3, but if the result of the current game is not the maximum increase number, it is predicted that the upper limit increase number will be exceeded in the game ti6 that comes after ti3. The second adjustment process described above is a process for correcting the discrepancy between ti3 and ti6, and is a process for inputting the discrepancy amount from the games from ti3 to ti4 that were input to the first adjustment counter CC1 into the second adjustment counter CC2.

As described above, the first adjustment process is executed in the game in which the bonus trigger occurs, while the second adjustment process is executed at the end of each game. Therefore, the above deviation is cumulatively added to the second adjustment counter CC2 in each game.

Figure 259 is a flowchart showing the third adjustment process that is activated by the setting process of the above-mentioned add-on command.

In step S15601, it is determined whether the second adjustment counter CC2 is 1 or more, and if it is 0, this process is terminated. If it is 1 or more, in step S15602, a pseudo-add-on lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a. A pseudo-add-on is an effect that notifies the number of games that are not won in the current add-on lottery but are allowed to be added based on the second adjustment counter CC2, that is, out of the first adjustment counter CC1 for which the add-on notification restriction has been applied, depending on the subsequent game situation, and the same effect as the add-on notification is set. A detailed explanation of the pseudo-add-on lottery table using figures is omitted, but like the add-on lottery table, whether or not the pseudo-add-on will be won is set depending on the game result and the display mode, etc.

In step S15603, a pseudo-addition lottery process is executed, and in step S15604, it is determined whether or not the lottery process has been won. If the result is not a win, the third adjustment process is terminated, and if the result is a win, the process proceeds to step S15605. In step S15605, the number of pseudo-addition notification games is determined by lottery or the like as the number of games to be notified from the second adjustment counter CC2. Then, in step S15606, a process for setting the addition notification effect is executed. More specifically, an addition command for notifying the addition of the pseudo-addition notification game number is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Then, in step S15607, the current number of pseudo-addition games is subtracted from the second adjustment counter CC2, and the third adjustment process is terminated.

As described above, even if the remaining number of games is notified, the upper limit for not being forced to end without playing the notified number of games is calculated from the maximum increase depending on the subsequent gameplay situation, and an additional notification up to that limit is made. This makes it possible to avoid incidents where contradictions in the notifications arise after the fact, and to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable or lost due to being forced to end without playing the notified number of games.

In addition, by configuring the system to calculate the notification upper limit as described above and perform an additional notification based on that upper limit, and then readjusting the notification upper limit through a second adjustment process according to the actual game situation, it is possible to avoid situations in which the additional notification is unnecessarily restricted, and to prevent the occurrence of inconsistencies in the notification while not hindering the effect of increasing attention to the additional notification.

By configuring the number of games that can be reported in the second adjustment process to be reported as a pseudo-addition in the third adjustment process when the addition is not won, it is possible to give the impression that an addition lottery has been held, even in situations where the addition lottery is restricted, for example, and this makes it possible to appropriately increase attention to the game.

<Modification 19>
In this modified example, a remaining game number management process and a remaining coin number management process that are started in a game after the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set will be described.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the remaining number of games is increased in the favorable zone, such as by adding the number of games in attack mode, the number of games remaining in the favorable zone ZG is not subtracted due to factors other than the consumption of games. In this way, once the first excess flag is set in the remaining number of games management process, that is, once it is determined that the upper limit number of games has been reached, this determination cannot be overturned. In this way, with regard to the remaining number of games management process, once the first excess flag is set, the remaining number of games management process may not be started, or even if it is started, the remaining number of games management process may be terminated without executing the processes of steps S13101 to S13111, provided that the first excess flag is set.

In contrast, with regard to the second excess flag, that is, after it has been determined that the upper limit of medal increments has been reached, as described above, depending on the game situation thereafter, it may happen that the upper limit of medal increments is not reached. The remaining number management process in this case will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 261.

In this modified example, in step S15701, it is determined whether the second excess flag has already been set. If it has not been set, the process proceeds to step S15702, and processing is executed to determine whether the second forced termination condition of steps S15702 to S15707 will be satisfied in the future. The processing of steps S15702 to S15707 is the same as the processing of steps S13201 to S13206 described above.

If it is determined in step S15701 that the second excess flag is set, the process proceeds to step S15708, where it is determined whether or not a predetermined correction condition has been met. If the correction condition has been met, the process of steps S15302 to S15307 is executed again to determine whether the second forced termination condition will be met in the future, and if the correction condition has not been met, the remaining number management process is terminated without performing the process for determining the condition.

The above-mentioned correction conditions include, for example, when a bonus is won or awarded, when the RT state transitions to a low RT state (when the RT state transitions from the second RT state or the third RT state to the first RT state or the normal game state), when the RT state transitions from a high RT state to a low RT state and then returns to a high RT state, when the difference between the number of coins increased or decreased in the advantageous zone ZM and the number of coins previously predicted (total expected number of coins increased or decreased SM) exceeds a specified number, etc.

If the correction process is performed based on a bonus win, a bonus prize, or the RT state transitioning to a low RT state, the correction is performed based on a transition to a state in which the expected increase or decrease in number of coins KM is different from that used in the prediction, and there is no need to take into account the bonus or RT state transition rate in the advance prediction, which simplifies the processing configuration of the prediction process (remaining number management process). In addition, if the RT state transitions from a high RT state to a low RT state, and the correction process is performed based on a return to the high RT state, the process of predicting the number of games played in the low RT state in advance is omitted, and it is only necessary to correct the actual decrease in the low RT state, which further simplifies the processing configuration. In addition, if the correction is performed when the difference between the actual increase or decrease in number and the predicted number of coins exceeds a predetermined number, the correction is performed after the difference with the predicted number has occurred, which makes it possible to reduce the number of times and the possibility of correction processing being performed, which further simplifies the processing.

<Modification 20>
In this modified example, a situation in which a bonus is won near the end of an advantageous zone will be described. First, a situation near the end of an advantageous zone will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 262 (a) shows a case where the first or second BB bonus winning flag is set in the game at tj1, which is a situation where a push order notification such as an attack mode occurs, and a bonus win occurs at tj2, which is after tj1. In this case, by winning the bonus, the game state from tj1 to tj2, during which the bonus win is carried over, becomes a normal game state, and the net increase in the number of coins during the normal game state becomes smaller than the net increase in the number of coins during the attack mode. More specifically, in the game from tj1 to tj2, an increase of about -0.99 coins per game is expected, and the number of medals held may decrease (see Figure 216). Also, even in the return state from tj3, when the bonus state ends, to tj4, when the game state returns to the second RT state, the game state is a normal game state, so the number of medals held may decrease. When the transition to the second RT state occurs at tj4, the number of medals held increases, and an increase in medals is expected until tj5, when the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone becomes 0.

In contrast, Figure 262(b) shows a case where the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone is reached at tj6, between tj3, when the bonus state ends, and tj4, when the second RT state is restored. As described above, in the games from tj3 to tj4, the net increase in number of medals per game is negative, and the game is forcibly ended at tj6 while the number of medals held is decreasing. In this case, even though the number of medals held has increased significantly and the number of games has reached the upper limit, the advantageous zone will ultimately be forcibly ended with the number of medals held reduced below the maximum number (at the time of tj3 in the figure), resulting in a tapering off of the game. When such an event occurs, the player's satisfaction cannot be fully satisfied, which is undesirable.

So in this modified version, we've devised a way to set the premonition mode when a bonus is won near the end of the favorable zone.

263 is a flowchart showing the premonition setting process when a bonus is won in this embodiment. The premonition setting process when a bonus is won is, for example, a process performed under a situation where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set in the lottery result corresponding process, and is a process for setting the premonition mode based on the bonus win. In the first embodiment, the premonition mode is set through a transition lottery or an additional lottery such as a challenge mode or an attack mode in the first specific role process to the third specific role process, and the premonition mode setting process may be performed overlappingly. In this case, the premonition mode set in the premonition setting process when a bonus is won below is configured to take precedence. As already explained, the premonition mode is a mode in which a suggestive performance suggesting the winning content occurs with a relatively high probability, and when the number of premonition games set as the premonition mode approaches 0, a continuous performance occurs, and when it reaches 0, the winning content is notified. In other words, in the premonition mode based on the bonus win, a suggestive performance suggesting the bonus win occurs, and a bonus win is notified through a continuous performance.

In step S15801, it is determined whether the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag that has been set is set in the current game, i.e., whether the game is a bonus winning game. If it is not a winning game and the bonus is being carried over, the premonition setting process ends. If it is a winning game, the process of acquiring the premonition table is executed in step S15802. An example of the premonition table is shown in FIG. 35 above. More specifically, the premonition table has the number of premonition games set from 0 to 32, and the number of premonition games selected differs depending on the presence or absence of simultaneous wins of the display mode and attack mode when a win is won. The premonition table is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 35, and may be set so that the number of premonition games selected varies depending on the game result that triggered the bonus win (for example, even if the same 1st BB was won, whether the trigger was strong cherry overlap 1 or weak cherry overlap 1, etc.) or the type of bonus that was won (for example, even if the same strong cherry is overlapped, whether strong cherry overlap 1 that overlaps with the 1st BB or strong cherry overlap 2 that overlaps with the 2nd BB, etc.). Also, the number of premonition games selected may be set so that the number of premonition games selected varies depending on whether there is overlap with other results (for example, whether the 1st BB is won alone or strong cherry overlap 1, etc.). Furthermore, the number of premonition games is not limited to 0 to 32 games, and may be configured so that a greater number of games can be selected, or may be configured so that 0 games are always selected (so-called one-shot announcement).

In the following step S15803, the number of premonition games in the premonition mode based on the current bonus win is determined by lottery based on the premonition table obtained in step S15802, and the determined number of premonition games is input into the premonition counter.

In step S15804, it is determined whether the current bonus win occurred during a favorable zone. If it is during a favorable zone, in step S15805, it is determined whether the first excess flag, of the first excess flag and the second excess flag, is set. If the first excess flag is set and it has been determined that the upper limit number of games will be reached in the future, in steps S15806 to S15810, it is determined whether the upper limit number of games will be reached during the return state after the bonus state, that is, whether the situation in FIG. 262(b) occurs.

More specifically, in step S15806, a process is performed to determine the number of games (A) required to reach the upper limit game number from the current number of games in the favorable zone AG and the upper limit game number (1500). In the following step S15807, a process is performed to determine the current premonition game number (B) based on the lottery result in step S15803. In step S15808, a process is performed to determine the number of games to be played in the currently won bonus state (24 games for both the first BB state and the second BB state). Then, in step S15809, a process is performed to determine the average number of return games (D) until a transition to the second RT state occurs after the bonus state ends and a push order notification is made. In this slot machine 10, the average number of games played in the normal game state until the push order bell is missed and a transition to the first RT state occurs is about 11 games, the average number of games played in the first RT state until the first promotion replay is won and a transition to the second RT state occurs is about 8 games, and the average number of return games (D) is about 19 games. Then, in step S15810, it is determined whether the upper limit number of games is reached during the return state after the bonus state by determining whether the number of games (A) required to reach the upper limit number of games is greater than the product of the number of premonition games (B) and the number of games in the bonus state (C) and is less than the product of the number of premonition games (B), the number of games in the bonus state (C), and the average number of return games (D).

As shown in FIG. 262(b), when the number of games (A) required to reach the maximum number of games is less than the product of the number of premonition games (B) and the number of games in the bonus state (C), the maximum number of games is reached during the premonition mode or bonus state, and when the number of games (A) required to reach the maximum number of games is more than the product of the number of premonition games (B), the number of games in the bonus state (C), and the average number of return games (D), the maximum number of games is reached after the bonus state ends and the return to the second RT state.

If a positive judgment is made in step S15810, a process is executed in step S15811 to determine the number of games (E) from the end of the bonus state until the upper limit of the number of games is reached. This process is calculated by subtracting the number of premonition games (B) and the number of games in the bonus state (C) from the number of games (A) required to reach the upper limit of the number of games. Then, in step S15812, the number of games (E) calculated in step S15811 is set as the adjustment number of games, and this adjustment number is added to the number of premonition games determined in step S15803 to determine the current number of premonition games. More specifically, a process is executed to add the calculated adjustment number of games (E) to the premonition counter.

After executing the process of step S15812, in step S15813, a premonition command including information on the current premonition game number is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this premonition setting process is terminated. In this case, the premonition mode is performed for the number of games to which the above-mentioned adjustment game number (E) has been added, and after the adjustment game number (E) has been consumed, a bonus winning notification is made. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S15804 and a bonus is not won during an advantageous zone, or if the first excess flag is not set in step S15805, and further if it is judged in step S15810 that the upper limit game number during the return has not been reached, the process proceeds directly to step S15813, and a premonition command including information on the premonition game number (the premonition game number drawn in step S15803) in a state in which the adjustment game number in step S15812 has not been added is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this premonition setting process is terminated.

As a result of the above processing, as shown in FIG. 264, when a bonus is won in the game at tk1 during the favorable zone, the number of premonition games is set to the original number of games up to tk2 (B) plus the number of games up to tk3 (E). As a result, if the notification during the premonition mode is followed, the bonus state will be consumed from tk3 to tk5, and the game will be forcibly terminated at tk5. In other words, before the adjustment, the number of medals held reaches its maximum value at tk4, and then the number of medals held is reduced to tk5 before the game is forcibly terminated, but after the adjustment, the game will be forcibly terminated when the number of medals held is at its maximum value, and the game will be forcibly terminated when the player's satisfaction has reached its peak.

In particular, adding the adjusted number of games as described above does not change the number of games in premonition mode or recovery state, so the maximum number of medals held at the time of forced termination does not change. By doing this, it is possible to greatly change the impression given to the player at the time of forced termination without greatly changing the degree of advantage for the player.

By the way, by setting the bonus winning flag, the game state transitions from the previous high RT state (second RT state or third RT state) to a low RT state (here, the normal game state), the replay probability is significantly lowered, and a reach eye based on a bonus winning may also appear. In other words, the player can sense the bonus winning at a timing before the bonus winning notification is made, and since the configuration is such that the number of medals held can be reduced in the low RT state as described above, it is better to win the bonus as soon as possible after sensing the bonus winning, in order to prevent the loss of medals held. For example, in FIG. 264, if the bonus is won promptly after the bonus is won at tk1, it is possible that the upper limit number of games will be reached after the bonus state is returned to the high RT state. More specifically, by winning the bonus at tk1 and playing the games that are the average number of return games (D) minus the adjusted number of games (E), the upper limit number of games will be reached after the return to the high RT state. The fluctuation in the total number of medals when the upper limit of games is reached during this period is such that the later the bonus is won, the smaller the increase after returning to the high RT state and the larger the decrease until the bonus is won, so the total number of medals is the largest when the bonus is won and the total number of medals is the smallest when the player wins after playing the average number of games returned to (D) minus the adjusted number of games (E). In other words, depending on the player's skill (how many games it takes from detecting the bonus to winning the bonus), the maximum number of medals held at the time of forced termination may be greater than that of tk5 in FIG. 264 above. In this way, by leaving room for technical intervention, it is possible to stimulate the player's desire to play and encourage active participation in the game.

On the other hand, after playing the game that is the average number of return games (D) minus the adjusted number of games (E), the later the bonus win, the greater the number of medals lost until the bonus win, and since returning to the high RT state is not expected, the fluctuation in the total number of medals when reaching the upper limit game becomes smaller the later the bonus win, and the amount of reduction is greater than the amount of reduction from the bonus win to the game that is the average number of return games (D) minus the adjusted number of games (E). In other words, if a bonus win is made between the bonus win and the game that is the average number of return games (D) minus the adjusted number of games (E), the reduction effect of the amount of medals lost is greater than if a bonus win is made after the game that is the average number of return games (D) minus the adjusted number of games (E). The point in time when the game that is the average number of return games (D) minus the adjusted number of games (E) is played after the bonus win is also called the first turning point.

As mentioned above, once the premonition game number (B) before the adjustment game number (E) is added has been played since the bonus was won, the total number of medals when the upper limit is reached is unlikely to change until the adjustment game number (E) is played. In other words, once the premonition game number (B) has been played since the bonus was won, winning a bonus early will not have any effect on reducing the loss of medals. The point in time when the premonition game number (B) before the adjustment game number (E) is added since the bonus was won is also referred to as the second turning point.

In this case, the presentation mode of the premonition effects, such as the effects suggesting whether or not a bonus has been won in the premonition mode, may be changed based on each of the branching points. For example, from the time of winning the bonus, at the first branching point, a presentation suggesting that a consecutive presentation (FIG. 60) may occur is generated (premonition effect is the first mode), and from the first branching point to the second branching point, a notification that a consecutive presentation will occur is given and the conditions for the winning content in the consecutive presentation (such as an explanation of the number of stages in the Daruma Drop game) are explained (premonition effect is the second mode), and from the second branching point onwards, a consecutive presentation is generated (premonition effect is the third mode). In this way, a player who senses that a continuous performance may occur due to the performance up to the first branch point will perform a stop operation aiming at a desired symbol to check whether or not a bonus has been won, for example, before the first branch point, and a player who clearly recognizes that a continuous performance will occur due to the performance after the first branch point will perform a stop operation aiming at a bonus-corresponding symbol to establish a bonus win, for example, before the second branch point, and it is considered that after the second branch point, the player will enjoy the direction of the performance (continuous performance) rather than early bonus win. In other words, a gameplay that aims to win a bonus from the bonus win to the first or second branch point, and a gameplay that allows the player to enjoy the performance rather than early bonus win after the second branch point are realized. In this way, by setting the performance mode of the premonition mode in relation to the player's skill and the final number of medals won, a gameplay that has never been seen before can be provided that is interesting.

<Modification 21>
In this modified example, the relationship between the winning of a bonus just before the end of the advantageous zone, especially the winning of a bonus just before the end of the challenge mode, and the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator will be described. FIG. 265 is a diagram showing the winning of a specific role during the challenge mode, and FIG. 265(a) shows a case where the winning specific role is a role overlapping with a bonus such as strong cherry overlap 1, and FIG. 265(b) shows a case where the winning specific role is not a role overlapping with a bonus such as strong cherry. As already explained, the challenge mode is a mode in which the probability of winning the attack mode etc. is higher than that of the normal mode, and is also called a so-called chance zone (CZ). And, if the lottery for transition to the attack mode is not won during the predetermined number of games, the challenge mode ends.

Figure 265 (a) shows a case where the challenge mode is started at tm1, and a specific role is won in a game at tm2, which is before the end of the challenge mode at tm3. As already explained, the challenge mode is included in the advantageous zone, and when a specific role is won (tm1), which triggers the transition to the challenge mode, the eighth display segment N8 starts to be displayed as a zone indicator.

As described above, the specific combination won at tm2 is, for example, a combination with a bonus such as Strong Cherry Duplicate 1, and here, it is assumed that the attack mode transition lottery based on the Strong Cherry Duplicate 1 win has been won. In this case, the premonition mode is set based on the bonus or attack mode win. For example, if the premonition mode or continuous performance set at tm2 starts at tm2 and continues until tm4, which is after tm3, the end game of the challenge mode, a bonus or attack mode win notification is made in the game at tm4. Then, at tm4, the game transitions to the bonus state, and from tm5 onwards, when the bonus state ends, the attack mode begins.

In this case, as described above, the challenge mode ends at tm3, but because the attack mode winning flag is set, the display end process of the interval display is not performed in the second interval display process. In other words, the display of the interval display that started at tm1 does not end at tm3, and continues after tm5.

In contrast, in FIG. 265(b), a specific role is won at tm2 during challenge mode, but the specific role is not a bonus overlap role, and the lottery for transition to attack mode is not won. However, even if the specific role at tm2 in FIG. 265(b) is the trigger, a pseudo premonition mode may be set (FIG. 53). For example, if the premonition mode or continuous performance set at tm2 starts from tm2 and continues until tm4, which is after tm3, the end game of the challenge mode, a non-win notification is made in the game at tm4 that the bonus or attack mode has not been won (a win notification is not made).

In this case, even in FIG. 265(b), the challenge mode ends at tm3, but since the attack mode winning flag is not set, the display end process of the section indicator is performed at tm3 in the second section display process. In other words, in the continuous performance starting from tm2, the section indicator is displayed up to tm3, but is not displayed from tm3 to tm4. In other words, compared to FIG. 265(a), in FIG. 265(b), since the display of the section indicator ends when the challenge mode ends at tm3, it is obvious that the lottery at tm2 was a loss, even before the end of the continuous performance (tm4). In that case, not only is it clear that it was a loss, but the ridiculousness of the continuous performance being performed stands out, and there is a possibility that the level of attention to the performance, including other performances, will be greatly reduced.

Figure 266 is a flowchart showing the premonition setting process when a duplicate target role is won during the challenge mode in this modified example. Here, the duplicate target role is a result including a duplicate result such as strong cherry duplicate 1, 2 or weak cherry duplicate 1, 2, which is a duplicate win with the first BB or the second BB, and a non-duplicate result in which the duplicate result is a duplicate win with the first BB or the second BB (if strong cherry 1, 2 are duplicate results, strong cherry is a non-duplicate result, and if weak cherry 1, 2 are duplicate results, weak cherry is a non-duplicate result). The premonition setting process when a duplicate target role is won during the challenge mode is, for example, a process that is performed when the above-mentioned duplicate target role is won in the lottery result corresponding process during the challenge mode, and is a process for setting a premonition mode regardless of whether or not a bonus is won. In other words, it is a process for setting both a premonition mode based on the above-mentioned bonus win and a pseudo premonition mode based on a bonus non-win. As in the case of variant example 20 above, the processing for setting the various premonition modes in the first specific role processing to the third specific role processing may overlap with the premonition setting processing when an overlapping target role is won during the challenge mode, but the premonition mode set in the premonition setting processing when an overlapping target role is won during the challenge mode is configured to take priority.

In step S15901, it is determined whether the lottery result of the current game is the above-mentioned overlapping target role. If it is not an overlapping target role, this premonition setting process is terminated. If it is an overlapping target role, a process to obtain a premonition table is executed in step S15902, and a lottery process for the number of premonition games is executed in step S15903. This process is the same as the process in steps S15802 and S15803 above. Note that the number of premonition games set in the premonition table is also as described above, and the number of premonition games selected varies depending on the game result, etc.

In the following step S15904, it is determined whether the current overlapping target role is an overlapping result with the first BB or the second BB. If it is an overlapping result with the first BB or the second BB, in step S15905, a premonition command including the information on the number of premonition games determined in step S15903 and information on the bonus being won (information on the fact that the current premonition mode is a premonition mode for notifying of a bonus win) is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this premonition setting process is terminated.

In step S15904, if the overlapping target role this time is not an overlapping result with the first BB or the second BB, but a non-overlapping result, the process proceeds to step S15906. In step S15906, the number of remaining games in the current challenge mode is compared with the number of premonition games determined in step S15903, and it is determined whether the number of premonition games is greater than the number of remaining games in the challenge mode. In other words, the process of step S15906 is a process of determining whether the game in which the result of the premonition mode this time is announced (the game in which the premonition counter becomes 0 and a winning or non-winning announcement is made) is in the challenge mode. If the result announcement is in the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S15905, and a premonition command including the information on the number of premonition games determined in step S15903 and the information on the non-winning of the bonus (information on the fact that the premonition mode this time is a premonition mode for making a non-winning of the bonus) is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this premonition setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S15906 that the result of the premonition mode will be notified after the challenge mode, then in step S15907, the number of remaining games in the challenge mode is subtracted from the number of premonition games to calculate the difference in the number of games. Then, in step S15908, the difference in the number of games calculated in step S15907 is added to the number of continuations of the challenge mode. This process extends the challenge mode by the difference in the number of games.

In the next step S15909, a process is executed to set the pseudo-end-of-addition-amount-CM command as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the pseudo-end-of-addition-amount-CM command, controls so as not to perform the presentation during the challenge mode for the amount added in step S15908. In other words, the pseudo-end-of-addition-amount-CM command is a command that, although the number of games in the challenge mode is actually extended, makes it impossible or difficult to visually grasp that the challenge mode has been extended.

In this modified example, when a continuous performance is performed during challenge mode, it is assumed that whether or not the game is in challenge mode can be known from the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 (for example, a display on the auxiliary display unit 65 indicating that the game is in challenge mode, along with the display content of the continuous performance), and the pseudo-end-of-addition-CM command described above is a command for not displaying during the continuous performance that would allow the player to know whether or not the game is in challenge mode. On the other hand, when a continuous performance is performed during challenge mode, if it is not possible to know whether or not the game is in challenge mode from the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 (in the above example, a display on the auxiliary display unit 65 indicating that the game is in challenge mode is not displayed during the continuous performance), it is also possible to omit the pseudo-end-of-addition-CM command described above.

Furthermore, the information regarding the pseudo-end of the additional commercial command may be transmitted to the display control device 81, and may be configured, for example, so that the information is set in the precursor command.

In the following step S15910, a process for preventing an additional bonus notification from occurring is executed to prevent an additional bonus notification from occurring when the difference game number is extended. In step S15910, for example, a process for setting a non-addition flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed. The non-addition flag is a process for preventing the process for the additional bonus notification in the challenge mode from being performed for the extension of step S15908 in the first specific role process, for example. In more detail, an additional bonus notification based on the extension of step S15908 is not generated, but an additional bonus notification based on other triggers (such as winning a specific role in another game) is permitted.

After executing the processing of step S15910, the process proceeds to step S15905, where an indication command including information on the premonition game number obtained by adding the difference game number in step S15908 to the premonition game number determined in step S15903, and information that the bonus was not won (information that the current premonition mode is a premonition mode for notifying the player that a bonus has not been won) is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this premonition setting process is terminated.

As a result of the above processing, as shown in FIG. 267, in the challenge mode that started at tn1, if a non-overlapping result of an overlapping target role is won at tn2, the challenge mode that would have ended at tn3 is extended to tn4, which is later. In this case, the premonition mode and continuous performance set at tn2 are executed until tn4, and the interval indicator that started displaying at tn1 also continues to be displayed until tn4. This makes it possible to avoid a situation where the result of the continuous performance becomes obvious depending on whether or not the interval indicator is displayed, and to appropriately enhance the performance effect during the challenge mode.

To avoid the situation where the result of the continuous performance is obvious depending on whether the display on the interval indicator continues or not, in addition to the configuration described above where the challenge mode (advantageous zone) is extended, it is also possible to consider a configuration where the challenge mode (advantageous zone) ends but the display on the interval indicator continues. However, if such a configuration is adopted, the significance of the advantageous zone being clearly indicated by the interval indicator will be overlooked, and the credibility of the display on the interval indicator itself may decrease. In contrast, by adopting a configuration in which the challenge mode itself is extended, as in the above configuration, it is possible to achieve a configuration in which the relationship between the advantageous zone and the interval indicator is guaranteed, while still allowing for the desired effect of the continuous performance.

As described above, because the additional CM pseudo end command is output, of the consecutive performances tn2 to tn4, for tn2 to tn3, the auxiliary display unit 65 will display that the consecutive performances are in challenge mode along with the consecutive performances, and for tn3 to tn4, the display will not display that the consecutive performances are in challenge mode. By doing this, if the overlapping result is a win as an overlapping target role, the performance mode up to tm4 and the performance mode up to tn4 will be the same in terms of displaying whether or not the player is in challenge mode, and it will be impossible to determine the result of this premonition mode (consecutive performances) from that display. This further enhances the performance effect of the consecutive performances.

By preventing the occurrence of an additional bonus notification when the challenge mode is extended, it is possible to avoid an incident in which the player is made aware of the secret extension that was made to coincide with the continuous performance, thereby ruining the experience.

In the above configuration, whether or not to perform the extension process of the challenge mode is different depending on whether the overlap target role is an overlap result with the first BB, an overlap result with the second BB, or a non-overlapping result. However, even if there is an overlap result, the winning of the attack mode, etc. is not confirmed. For example, if there is an overlap result with the first BB, the attack mode is won at the same time, while if there is an overlap result with the second BB, the attack mode is not won at the same time. In that case, even if the step S15904 judges that there is an overlap result with the bonus positively and the challenge mode extension process is not performed, the display of the section indicator may end when the challenge mode ends. In other words, even if the display of the section indicator ends during the continuous performance, a winning notification may be made as a result of the premonition mode or the continuous performance. In this way, it is possible to eliminate the situation where you have no hope at all just because the display of the section indicator has ended, and to make the continuous performance more enjoyable.

<Modification 22>
In this modification, the advantage of the challenge mode to be extended when the premonition mode is set based on the non-overlapping result winning is changed in the above modification 21. Figure 268 is a flowchart showing the premonition setting process when the overlapping target role is won during the challenge mode in this modification.

This modified example is generally similar to the premonition setting process of modified example 21 above, with the difference being that in step S16007, the number of remaining games in challenge mode is subtracted from the number of premonition games to calculate the difference in the number of games, and then in step S16008, rather than adding the difference in the number of games to the number of continuations of the challenge mode, the difference in the number of games is added to the number of continuations of a second challenge mode that is different from the current challenge mode.

The second challenge mode is a challenge mode that is set to give the player a lower advantage than the normal challenge mode (which will be referred to as the "first challenge mode" in the following explanation for comparison). More specifically, the probability of winning the attack mode is set to be lower in the second challenge mode than in the first challenge mode (see Figure 269 (b)).

In this case, as shown in FIG. 269(a), if an overlapping target role is won at t02 during the first challenge mode that was started at t01, and the overlapping target role does not result in a bonus win, the second challenge mode will be extended in step S16008 as described above.

As a result, when the first challenge mode ends at t03, it transitions to the second challenge mode, which continues until t04, when the continuous performance that began at t02 ends. In this case, although the second challenge mode from t03 to t04 is an advantageous period, the degree of advantage for the player is set lower than that of the first challenge mode, making it possible to prevent the player's advantage from becoming unduly high due to the convenience of the performance, while also avoiding an incident in which the result of the continuous performance becomes obvious depending on whether or not the display on the period indicator continues.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 269(b), the second challenge mode is set so that the probability of winning the lottery to transition to attack mode is higher than that of the daytime mode, and the probability of winning the lottery to transition to attack mode is lower than that of the first challenge mode, but in reality, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to attack mode in the second challenge mode is set to be almost the same or approximately the same as that of the normal mode. By doing this, it is possible to treat the second challenge mode as an advantageous zone, while also making it possible to add the second challenge mode for presentation reasons with almost no change in the degree of advantage compared to when it is not added.

<Modification 23>
In this modified example, the lighting start condition of the eighth display segment N8 as the zone indicator is changed. That is, in each of the above embodiments and modified examples, the game in which the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone is won is basically the starting game, and the lighting process is performed at the timing until the game next to the starting game can be played. In other words, it is possible to clearly know whether the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone is won or not depending on whether the eighth display segment N8 is lit or not. However, in such a configuration, as shown in the above modified example 21, etc., the result of the performance being performed is obvious depending on whether the display of the zone indicator continues even in the lottery during the advantageous zone, and a similar inconvenience may occur regarding the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone depending on whether the display of the zone indicator starts or not.

Therefore, in this modified example, the timing to start displaying the section indicator is set to a game in which a push order notification may occur in the advantageous section and the start condition is met in which the net increase in number of coins is positive (the SIM payout rate is greater than 1). In this case, in the above configuration, the above start condition is basically met in a game in which an attack mode start performance is performed (a game in which attack mode is started) (see FIG. 51). More specifically, the attack mode winning notification sets the attack notification flag and various push order notifications are generated (FIGS. 36 and 38), and the transition to the second RT state makes the net increase in number of coins positive (FIG. 216), the attack mode is started, and the above-mentioned display start condition for the section indicator is met. In other words, even if the advantageous section is started by winning the challenge mode, the display of the section indicator is not started.

In addition, for example, if a bonus such as the first BB is won and attack mode is won at the same time, the net increase in coins will be positive due to the bonus win, but since the slot machine 10 is configured so that push order notifications do not occur during the bonus state, the display start condition for the section indicator is met only when the push order notification occurs at the end of the bonus (after the attack mode winning notification is made). Also, even if the lottery for transitioning to attack mode is won during the bonus state, although the net increase in coins will be positive during the bonus state, the situation is not such that a push order notification can occur, so the display start condition for the section indicator is met at the end of the bonus when a push order notification can occur.

In other words, the first start condition is a situation in which a push order notification may occur, the second start condition is a situation in which the net increase in number of coins is positive, and after a transition to a favorable zone, the display of the zone indicator starts based on the first and second start conditions being met. In this modified example, the first and second start conditions do not have to be met at the same time (in the same game), and the display of the zone indicator may start when the second start condition is met after the first start condition is met, or the display of the zone indicator may start when the first start condition is met after the second start condition is met. In this way, the freedom of the zone indicator display start game is greatly improved, and this can be a configuration that is very useful for eliminating the above-mentioned inconveniences in presentation.

When a bonus is won during challenge mode, the interval display does not start to display during challenge mode as described above, and the interval display does not start to display when a bonus is won, so the inconvenience in presentation as shown in variant example 21 above does not occur.

However, if the timing at which the interval indicator starts displaying (start game) is different from the timing at which the advantageous interval starts (start game), the following inconveniences may occur.

For example, as shown in FIG. 270(a), if an advantageous zone is started at tp1 by winning the challenge mode, and then the zone indicator starts displaying when the attack mode starts at tp2, it is possible to continue the advantageous zone up to tp3, where one of the forced termination conditions is met. In this case, in the advantageous zone from tp1 to tp3, the zone where an actual medal increase can be expected due to the push order notification (actual increase zone) is from tp2 to tp3.

In contrast, in FIG. 270(b), even though the transition to the advantageous zone occurs at tp1, which is the same as in FIG. 270(a), tp2, at which the attack mode starts after the transition to the advantageous zone, is later than in FIG. 270(a). In this case, in the advantageous zone from tp1 to tp3, the actual increase zone from tp2 to tb3, which is the zone where an actual increase in medals can be expected due to the push order notification, is shorter than in the case of FIG. 270(a) above. In other words, the length of the actual increase zone differs depending on the length of the zone from tp1 to tp2, and even if the attack mode starts at tp2, the player's degree of advantage will potentially differ between FIG. 270(a) and FIG. 270(b).

Figure 271 is a flowchart showing the first process of section display in this modified example.

That is, in step S16101, it is determined whether the interval indicator is displaying or not. If it is not displaying, the process proceeds to step S16102, where processing is performed to determine whether or not it is in a favorable interval. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the upper limit for transition to the favorable interval has been met, or whether or not transition has already occurred. If it is not in a favorable interval, the first interval display processing is terminated as is. If it is in a favorable interval, the process proceeds to step S16103.

In step S16103, it is determined whether the advantageous zone game count AG is being measured, thereby determining whether the advantageous zone start process has already been performed. If the advantageous zone game count AG has not yet been measured, the advantageous zone start process is performed in steps S16104 to S16106.

That is, in step S16104, a process is performed to start measuring the number of games in the favorable zone AG. Then, in step S16105, a process is performed to start measuring the number of games before the start of the game MG provided in the various counter areas 106e. The number of games before the start of the game MG is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games after the favorable zone transition and before the zone display starts, and corresponds to the number of games from tp1 to tp2 in FIG. 270 above. Then, in step S16106, a process is performed to start outputting a winning signal. A winning signal is a type of output signal that is output from an external terminal connected to the main control device 101 to a hall computer, a data device of the hall, etc. The winning signal has a LOW state and a HI state set as its output state, and the hall computer or data device can identify the switching or state of the winning signal. In step S16106, the winning signal is switched from the LOW state to the HI state, thereby allowing the hall computer or data device to identify that the favorable zone has started.

If it is determined in step S16103 that the start processing of the advantageous zone has already been performed, or after the start processing has been performed in step S16106, the process proceeds to step S16107. In step S16107, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned display start condition of the zone indicator is satisfied. More specifically, it is determined that the above-mentioned display start condition is satisfied when the attack notification flag is set as the first start condition, indicating that a push order notification may occur, and further, when the second start condition is a situation in which the net increase in number of coins is positive, that is, a transition to the second RT state or a transition to the bonus state occurs. If the display start condition is not satisfied, the first zone display process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the display start condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S16108, and processing for starting the display of the zone indicator is performed in steps S16108 to S16110.

That is, in step S16108, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on as the display start process of the interval display. In the following step S16109, a process for changing the prediction conditions of the remaining number management process is performed. More specifically, in the calculation process of the total expected increase SM (prediction process, steps S13202 and S13203), the expected increase/decrease KM, which is the basis for the calculation, is changed to a value different from the previous value. In this case, the expected increase/decrease KM before the start of the display of the interval display is set to the net increase in the low RT state (approximately -1.05 or -0.44, see FIG. 216), and the expected increase/decrease KM is set to the net increase in the high RT state based on the start of the display of the interval display. In this way, by reflecting the subtraction amount of the previous interval in the predicted number (total expected increase SM), it is possible to calculate the predicted number more accurately.

In the next step S16110, the output of the winning signal is stopped. More specifically, the output state of the winning signal is switched from a HI signal to a LOW signal, which allows the hall computer or data device to determine that the display of the zone indicator has started after the start of the advantageous zone. Then, in step S16111, the display signal output process is performed, and the first zone display process is terminated. The display signal, like the winning signal, is a type of output signal that is output from an external terminal connected to the main control device 101 to the hall computer or data device of the hall. The display signal has a LOW state and a HI state set as its output state, and the hall computer or data device can identify the switching and state of the display signal. In step S16111, the display signal is switched from a LOW state to a HI state, which allows the hall computer or data device to identify that the above-mentioned actual increase zone has started.

If it is determined in step S16101 that the section display is being displayed, display continuation processing is performed in step S16112, and then the first section display processing is terminated.

Next, the second section display process in this modified example will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 272.

In step S16201, it is determined whether or not the game is in an advantageous zone. If the game is not in an advantageous zone, the second zone display process is terminated. If the game is in an advantageous zone, in step S16202, an addition process for the advantageous zone game number AG is executed. In the following step S16203, an update process for the advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM is executed. These processes have already been explained.

In step S16204, it is determined whether the interval display is being displayed. If the determination is negative in step S16204, it means that even if the advantageous interval is being reached, the interval display has not yet started to be displayed. In this case, in step S16205, an increment process for the pre-start game count MG is executed. Specifically, a process is executed to increment the pre-start game count MG by 1 in accordance with the completion of the current game. In the following step S16206, a process is executed to set the pre-start game count command as an output target to the display control device 81. The pre-start game count command is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp the information on the pre-start game count MG. The display control device 81 that has received the pre-start game count command executes a pre-start game count notification corresponding to the value of the pre-start game count MG in a specified area of the auxiliary display unit 65 (for example, the upper right corner) or in a display unit other than the auxiliary display unit 65.

If it is determined in step S16204 that the interval indicator is being displayed, or after the pre-start game count command setting process is performed in step S16206, the remaining game count management process is performed in step S16207, and the remaining coins management process is performed in step S16208. The remaining game count management process and remaining coins management process are also as described above.

In step S16209, it is determined whether any of the forced termination conditions is satisfied. If any of the forced termination conditions is satisfied, in step S16210, initialization processing is performed for the number of games before the start MG, the number of games in the favorable zone AG, and the number of increase/decrease in the favorable zone ZM, and in step S16211, it is determined whether the zone display is being displayed. If it is being displayed, in step S16212, display end processing is performed for the zone display. Specifically, processing is performed to turn off the eighth display segment N8. If a negative judgment is made in step S16211, or after the processing of step S16212 is executed, data initialization processing is executed in step S16213. Thereafter, in step S16214, the above-mentioned display signal output stop processing is executed, and then the second zone display processing is terminated. For more information on step S16214, a process is executed to switch the output state of the display signal from a HI signal to a LOW signal.

If it is determined in step S16209 that the forced termination condition is not met, the presence or absence of a winning flag for each mode corresponding to the favorable zone is determined in step S16215, and if the flag is not set, the presence or absence of each mode flag corresponding to the favorable zone is determined in step S16216, and if the corresponding mode flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S16210 and processing for terminating the favorable zone is executed. These processes have been described above.

The manner in which the winning signal and start signal are output and examples of the display on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be explained with reference to Figure 273.

As shown in FIG. 273(a), when the advantageous zone starts at tq1, the output mode of the winning signal switches from a LOW signal to a HI signal. This allows the hall computer and data devices to know that the zone has been entered. When the attack mode starts at tq2, the zone indicator display start condition is met, and the zone indicator display start process is performed. In this case, the player can know that the zone has been entered into a net increase zone based on the eighth display segment N8. In this case, the output mode of the winning signal and the output mode of the display signal are switched. More specifically, at tq2, the winning signal is switched from a HI signal to a LOW signal. Also, at tq2, the display signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal.

The display of the interval indicator and the output of the display signal as a HI signal continue until tq3, when the favorable interval ends, at which point the display of the interval indicator ends and the display signal switches from a HI signal to a LOW signal.

In the preliminary interval after the start of the favorable interval from tq1 to tq2 and before the interval indicator starts displaying, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the preliminary interval game number (notification of the pre-start game number corresponding to the value of the pre-start game number MG) as well as the favorable interval game number corresponding to the favorable interval game number AG, as shown in FIG. 273(b). Also, in the target interval as the actual increase interval after the interval indicator starts displaying from tq2 to tq3, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the preliminary interval game number, the favorable interval game number, and the target interval game number (display of the attack mode continuation number), as shown in FIG. 273(c).

In this way, by shifting the timing when the interval indicator starts displaying from the timing when the advantageous interval starts, the presentation effect of the lottery for transitioning to the advantageous interval and the lottery for transitioning to the actual increase interval can be enhanced, while allowing the player to grasp the number of games in the advantageous interval before the interval indicator starts displaying, and allowing the player to play after understanding the degree of advantage in the actual increase interval when transitioning to the actual increase interval. This makes it possible to ensure the fairness of the game while enhancing the presentation effect of the game presentation.

Here, the display of the pre-interval game number, the target interval game number, and the advantageous interval game number are managed by the display control device 81 on the sub side. For example, for the convenience of the presentation, it is possible to hide these game number displays or display them differently from the corresponding interval. That is, for example, in the challenge mode, if a continuous presentation occurs while the pre-interval game number is being displayed, it is possible to hide the display of the pre-interval game number, or to continue displaying the pre-interval game number during the continuous presentation, and even if the challenge mode ends (the pre-interval ends), it is also possible to continue displaying the pre-interval game number until the end of the continuous presentation. This makes it possible to grasp the potential advantage of the advantageous interval by displaying the pre-interval game number, etc., while ensuring the authenticity of the advantageous interval by the interval display device, and furthermore, it is possible to greatly improve the degree of freedom in display in relation to other presentations.

In addition, by configuring the system so that a winning signal is output externally in the preliminary zone and a display signal is output externally in the target zone, even if the zone indicator has not started to display, the manager of the gaming hall can clearly distinguish between gaming machines that have moved into advantageous zones and those that have not, and can also grasp the remaining degree of advantageous degree in the zone where the actual increase has occurred after the zone indicator starts to display. This makes it possible to use this information, for example, as a basis for determining whether or not a reset process has been performed when the hall opens/closes, and even during business hours, when a large number of medals are being paid out at a specific gaming machine, as a basis for determining whether or not fraud is occurring.

<Modification 24>
In this modified example, in the above modified example 23, the difference in the advantageous degree of the actual increase section (target section) depending on the game playing situation in the preliminary section will be explained.

Figure 274 (a) shows a case where the advantageous zone starts at tr1, and the zone indicator starts displaying at tr2. As already explained, in this embodiment, a first forced termination condition in which the upper limit number of games is reached, and a second forced termination condition in which the upper limit number of medals is reached are set as the conditions for forced termination of the advantageous zone. In this case, the first forced termination condition is determined by the advantageous zone game count AG counted from tr1, and the first forced termination condition is established at tr4 when the advantageous zone game count AG reaches the upper limit number of games. On the other hand, the second forced termination condition is determined by the advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM counted from tr1, and until the actual increase zone of tr2 starts, the advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM is basically negative.

In other words, the advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM is not the increase from tr2 when the actual increase zone starts, but the increase from tr1 reaches the upper limit increase number, which is the second forced termination condition, and the increase from the start of the actual increase zone at tr2 until it reaches the upper limit increase number is the increase amount (α pieces) from r1 to tr2 added to the upper limit increase number.

For example, in FIG. 274(b), the start game (tr1) of the advantageous zone is the same as in FIG. 274(a), but the start game (tr2) of the actual increase zone is later in FIG. 274(b), and the decrease in medals from tr1 to tr2 is greater in FIG. 274(b) (β medals) than in FIG. 274(a). In other words, in FIG. 274(b), the number of games from the start of the advantageous zone to the start of the actual increase zone is greater, but the increase in medals from the start of the actual increase zone to the upper limit increase is greater in FIG. 274(b) than in FIG. 274(a), and the degree of advantage at the time the actual increase zone is revealed is more favorable for the player in FIG. 274(b) (2400+α<2400+β).

However, as already explained, even in the actual increase section, if the upper limit game number, which is the first forced termination condition, is reached, the advantageous section will be forced to terminate before the upper limit increase is reached. In this way, the later the actual increase section starts, the greater the medal increase in number until the upper limit increase is reached, and there is a branching point (third branching point) at which the upper limit increase can be reached.

The turning point of the limit is the number of games in the preliminary section when the sum of the upper limit number of games in the actual increase section calculated from the number of games in the preliminary section, the net increase in the preliminary section (approximately -1.05), and the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section (1500), and the net increase in the actual increase section (approximately +2.46) is the upper limit increase (2400), which is 367 games in this embodiment. In this case, the number of medals lost when 367 games have been played in the preliminary section is approximately 385 medals, and the maximum number of medals that can be increased when moving to the actual increase section is approximately 2785 medals, which is the above approximately 385 medals plus the upper limit increase of 2400 medals.

In other words, until the number of games in the preliminary section that marks the turning point of the reachable limit is played, the maximum number of medals that can be gained when moving to the actual increase section will gradually increase. On the other hand, after the number of games that marks the turning point of the reachable limit is played, the maximum number of medals that can be gained when moving to the actual increase section will gradually decrease.

Figure 275 (a) shows a part of the flowchart for the second section display process in this modified example.

Steps S16301 to S16303 are the same as the above steps S16201 to S16203, and, on the condition that the game count in the advantageous zone AG and the increase/decrease in the advantageous zone ZM are updated, the step S16304 determines whether the zone indicator is being displayed, and determines whether the game is in the above preliminary zone. If the game is in the preliminary zone, the step S16305 updates the pre-start game count MG. The step S16306 determines whether the pre-start game count MG has reached the branch point of the above-mentioned limit.

If the branch point of the reach limit has not been reached, in step S16307, a process is performed to set the first pre-start game count command as the output target to the display control device 81. In this case, similar to the pre-start game count command described above, the display control device 81 displays the number of games in the preliminary section, and displays, for example, "Expected number increasing!" on the auxiliary display unit 65 as an indication that the maximum number of medals that can be increased when moving to the actual increase section is gradually increasing, as shown in FIG. 274(b).

If the branch point of the reach limit is reached, in step S16308, the second pre-start game number command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Then, in step S16309, a transition process to the second challenge mode is performed. As shown in FIG. 275(b), the second challenge mode in this modified example is set as a mode in which the winning probability of the transition lottery to the attack mode is improved compared to the first challenge mode (challenge mode before the transition process of step S16309). In other words, when the branch point of the reach limit is exceeded, the maximum number of medals that can be increased when transitioning to the actual increase zone decreases, but the transition rate to the actual increase zone (attack mode) is configured to be higher than before. The display control device 81 that has received the second pre-start game number command displays the number of games in the preliminary zone, and displays, for example, "Winning probability increasing!" on the auxiliary display unit 65 as a notice that the maximum number of medals that can be increased when transitioning to the actual increase zone is gradually decreasing, but the transition rate to the actual increase zone is improving, as shown in FIG. 274(b).

As described above, if the preliminary interval is longer, the advantage of the entire advantageous interval may be lower because the number of medals decreases before the transition to the actual increase interval. However, as described above, the maximum number of medals that can be increased after the transition to the actual increase interval can be higher the longer the preliminary interval. Therefore, it is possible to encourage players to continue playing without giving up just because they are having difficulty winning the lottery to transition to the actual increase interval (the transition to the actual increase interval is difficult).

On the other hand, if the preliminary period is too long, it will be impossible to reach the upper limit of the increase in the actual increase period due to the relationship with the upper limit of the number of games. In this case, as described above, by increasing the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to the actual increase period, it is possible to transition to the actual increase period relatively easily, and it is possible to complete the actual increase period without giving up just because the upper limit of the increase has not been reached.

In this way, by taking into account the fact that the game situation in the preliminary section after the start of the advantageous section but before the section indicator starts to display affects the degree of advantage in the actual increase section after the section indicator starts to display, and incorporating this into the gameplay, it is possible to create innovative gameplay that has never been seen before.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples is not limited to the contents described therein, and all or part of the various configurations shown in each of the embodiments and each of the modified examples or other embodiments and each of the modified examples may be arbitrarily combined. In addition, each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples may be implemented, for example, as follows, without being limited to the contents described therein. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples, or may be applied to each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples in a combined form or in a combined form or in a combined form or in a combined form. In addition, all or part of the various configurations shown in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples may be arbitrarily combined. In these cases, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of each of the embodiments and each of the modified examples, or may be applied in a combined form or in a combined form.

(1) The advantageous zones include attack mode, in which push order notifications are made more frequently than in normal mode, challenge mode, in which the probability of winning the lottery to transition to attack mode is higher than in normal mode, super attack mode including an added-on specialization zone, VB mode, and a mode in which each of these modes has been won and is yet to transition; however, they are not limited to the above as long as they include at least a mode in which the functionality relating to push order notifications is improved compared to normal mode. For example, challenge mode may not be set.

(2) Although the VB mode as a pseudo bonus can only be entered during attack mode, it may also be possible to enter it from normal mode. In this case, if the lottery for entering VB mode is won, the winning game is set as the starting game, and the display of the interval indicator is started at a timing before operation of the game following the starting game is permitted. Also, in this case, if the first BB or second BB is won simultaneously with the VB mode, the game in which the first BB or second BB is won may be set as the starting game.

(3) As specific roles that trigger the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone or the lottery for adding on, minor roles such as strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, and weak watermelons that pay out medals, specific replays that have the same winning mode as strong cherries, and overlapping roles of these minor roles or specific replays with bonuses have been described as examples of the specific roles that trigger the lottery, but the results that trigger the lottery are not limited to these results. For example, a single role of a specified bonus or a normal replay may be used to draw the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone. Also, a lottery for moving to the advantageous zone may be based on the number of games played or the accumulated number of points that are awarded separately based on each result. In any case, it is sufficient that the trigger for the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone does not cause a difference in the winning probability or occurrence frequency due to the set value.

(4) The winning patterns of game results that involve a lottery for transition to a favorable zone, etc., are not limited to those described above. For example, all specific roles may be configured to have a common winning pattern for winning, or the winning patterns may be common to some specific roles. Also, the winning patterns of game results that do not involve a lottery for transition (e.g., a normal replay) may be configured to have some or all of the winning patterns of specific roles common to each other.

(5) Although the eighth display segment N8 and the ninth display unit N9 have been described as examples of the interval indicator, the configuration of the interval indicator is not limited to the above. As the interval indicator, it is sufficient that at least the display mode can be switched to explicitly display whether or not the interval is advantageous. For example, the position and size of the eighth display segment N8 and the ninth display unit N9, and the display mode (lighting mode) during the advantageous interval may be different from those described above. For example, the operation unit of the start lever 41 and some or all of the specified credit insertion switches 56 to 58 may be configured to be light-emitting controllable, and the operation unit and the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 may be made to light up when the advantageous interval is reached, and the function as an interval indicator may be guaranteed by the specified operation unit. As described above, the configuration starts the display of the interval indicator at a timing before the operation of the game next to the start game is permitted, and by making the specified operation unit the operation target that is the end of the start timing and displaying the advantageous interval at or near the specified operation unit as described above, it becomes easier to grasp the transition to the advantageous interval.

The auxiliary display unit 65 may also be configured to include a display unit having the function of a section display in its display screen. In this case, it is preferable that at least the display unit having the function of the section display is controlled by the main control unit 101, and the auxiliary display unit 65 itself may be controlled by the main control unit 101, and the main control unit 101 may also control the auxiliary display unit 65 together with the display unit having the function of the section display.

Furthermore, as the zone indicator, a device that can be displaced between a predetermined first position and a second position different from the first position may be provided in a position visible to the player (for example, the front part of the gaming machine), and whether or not the zone is advantageous may be notified by a display mode including the device when the device is placed at the first position and a display mode including the device when the device is placed at the second position.

(6) The section indicator may be configured to have multiple sections other than the eighth display segment N8 and the ninth display section N9. That is, the section indicator may be configured to have one section indicator, or multiple sections (two or more). When multiple sections are included, they may be combined with section indicators having other configurations such as those described in (5) above.

(7) The interval indicator may be configured to change the notification mode of a predetermined notification means associated with or adjacent to the interval indicator in accordance with the display mode of the interval indicator. Examples of predetermined notification means associated with the interval indicator include the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 associated with the eighth display segment N8 as the interval indicator in the indication monitor 68. Examples of predetermined notification means adjacent to the interval indicator include the auxiliary display unit 65 and the payout number display unit 62.

For example, the section indicator is configured to start displaying at a predetermined timing, and the predetermined notification means is in a first notification mode at the predetermined timing, and in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode at a specific timing different from the predetermined timing. In this case, if it can be understood that the visibility and display content of the section indicator display are different when the predetermined notification means is in the first notification mode and when it is in the second notification mode, it becomes possible to change the appearance of the section indicator without changing the display mode of the section indicator.

Furthermore, by combining a configuration that changes the display mode of the section indicator with a configuration that changes the notification mode of a specified notification means, it is possible to make the appearance of the section indicator more diverse.

For example, a predetermined notification means is configured with light-emitting elements such as LEDs, and the light-emitting elements are arranged in a matrix (for example, a grid of x columns by y rows). One element of the matrix (for example, the element in column a and row b) is replaced with a section indicator. When the section indicator in column a and row b is turned on, the light-emitting elements in columns a+n to a-n and row b around it, or in columns a and b+n to b-n around it, are turned on, and the light-emitting elements on the periphery are turned off. When the section indicator in column a and row b is turned off, the light-emitting elements in columns a+n to a-n and row b around it, or in columns a and b+n to b-n around it, are turned off, and the light-emitting elements on the periphery are turned on (x, y, a, b, and n are all natural numbers). In this way, the section indicator that is one element in the matrix can be easily recognized in relation to the light-emitting elements of the other elements. In addition, when the section indicator in column a and row b is turned on, the adjacent light-emitting unit in column a+1 and row b is turned off, and the other light-emitting units are turned on. In addition, when the section indicator in column a and row b is turned off, the adjacent light-emitting unit in column a and row b+1 is turned on, and the other light-emitting units are turned off. In this way, the lighting/extinguishing of the section indicator in column a and row b is difficult to distinguish from the lighting/extinguishing of the light-emitting unit in column a+1 and row b or the light-emitting unit in column a and row b+1, and the section indicator as one element in the matrix can be difficult to recognize in relation to the light-emitting units of other elements. In this case, the light-emitting units that are turned on/off instead of the section indicator are not limited to the light-emitting units adjacent to the section indicator, and for example, which light-emitting units are turned on/off may be randomly determined by lottery or the like.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned other specified notification means may be configured to have different notification modes at the start of the game and during the advantageous period.

(8) The brightness of the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator and the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine are increased to improve the visibility of the section indicator compared to other display parts (surrounding display parts, other specified notification means). However, when displaying the section indicator, the brightness or illuminance of the other display parts (surrounding display parts, other specified notification means) may be lowered to improve visibility. Furthermore, the difference in brightness or illuminance with respect to the other display parts is not limited to the above, and may be, for example, 10 times the brightness or illuminance.

Furthermore, the configuration may be such that visibility is improved in relation to the display color of the other display units. In other words, the luminous color of the section indicator and the display color (luminous color) of the other display units may be, for example, complementary (opposite) colors, thereby improving the visibility of the section indicator and the other display units (making them easier to distinguish).

Conversely, the brightness and illuminance may be in the opposite relationship to the above, reducing the visibility of the section indicator. In this case, it is possible to make the section indicator less visible, making it difficult to notice that a display is being made, and improve the presentation effect of the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., and it is also possible to increase the visibility of the other display units compared to the section indicator, thereby increasing the attention to the other display units. In addition, with regard to the display color, by making the emission color of the section indicator and the display color (emission color) of the other display units similar, for example, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the section indicator and the other display units, and the impression that the section indicator and the other display units are an integrated presentation device related to each other can be strengthened.

(9) The display start mode table of the zone indicator is not limited to the above. For example, it may be a table that includes parameters such as the number of bonus wins on the day or over multiple days, the number of transitions to the advantageous zone or the number of wins, etc., in addition to the game result that triggered the display start, and the display start mode may be made different based on these parameters. In this case, for example, if the display start mode table is configured so that the more bonuses or advantageous zone wins on the day or over multiple days, the easier it is to predict the contents and setting values of the advantageous zone, the easier it becomes to predict the game contents and setting values gradually according to the progress of the game, and it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the player is developing the presentation content of the gaming machine.

(10) In a configuration in which the display start mode of the interval display is set according to the contents and degree of advantage of the advantageous interval, etc., the display start mode may be one-to-one associated with the contents and degree of advantage of the advantageous interval, etc., without going through a lottery for selecting the display start mode.

(11) The display end mode table of the interval display is not limited to the above. For example, it may be configured to include not only the contents of the advantageous interval at the time of the end, but also the number of games played at the time of the end (the value of the advantageous interval game number AG) as a parameter, or the time at the end as a parameter, or the time at the start of the advantageous interval as a parameter, or the length of time required to play the advantageous interval as a parameter, and the display end mode may be different based on these parameters. For example, in the case of a configuration including the number of games played at the end as a parameter, the display end mode table may be such that the more games played (the more benefits would have been obtained during the advantageous interval) the more useful information is provided to the player, or the less the number of games played (the fewer benefits would have been obtained during the advantageous interval) the more useful information is provided to the player.

(12) The display end mode table of the interval display is configured to present information that is useful to the player, but a configuration related to the display start mode table may also be applied. In other words, the display start mode of the interval display may be configured to present setting values, etc., as information that is useful to the player.

(13) Information related to the setting value has been described as an example of information useful to the player that is presented when the display of the interval display has ended, but for example, advertisements or promotions for game halls or other stores may be presented, or product discount coupons or coupons may be presented. Also, in a configuration in which the display start mode table is changed in a specific state, when an advantageous display start mode table is selected according to the cumulative number of wins or cumulative number of non-wins for bonuses, advantageous intervals, etc., the cumulative number may be presented or suggested.

(14) A freeze state is set in the starting game to restrict the game following the starting game from being started, but the freeze state may also be set to restrict the operation of the game following the starting game itself, restricting the starting of the game following the starting game.

(15) A configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined effect is generated during a freeze state in the starting game. For example, a specific rotation control may be performed during the freeze state to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in the reverse direction or at a slow speed, or a configuration may be adopted in which a specific pattern combination (e.g., a line of "red 7" symbols) stops or temporarily stops on a specific line (e.g., the middle line L2) at the end of the freeze state after the specific rotation control is performed. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the manner of the specific rotation control is changed, such as by changing the rotation direction or rotation speed, depending on the length of the freeze state, that is, depending on the contents and advantageous degree of the advantageous zone when the zone indicator starts to be displayed, or a configuration may be adopted in which the type of the predetermined pattern combination to be stopped or temporarily stopped (e.g., a line of "red 7" symbols and a line of "black BAR") or the type of the predetermined line to be stopped or temporarily stopped (e.g., the upper line L1 and the middle line L2) is changed.

(16) In a configuration in which the length of the freeze state period is set according to the contents or degree of advantage of the advantageous zone or the display start mode of the zone indicator, the freeze state may be generated multiple times, and the total length of the multiple freeze states may be associated with the contents or degree of advantage of the advantageous zone or the display start mode of the zone indicator, or the number of times the multiple freeze states occur may be associated with the contents or degree of advantage of the advantageous zone or the display start mode of the zone indicator.

(17) In a configuration in which the interval indicator can be lit in multiple colors like the ninth display unit N9, the start display mode is changed to a different color, but the end display mode may be changed to a different color. In this case, the white light in the advantageous interval at the end game may be switched to a light in the corresponding color, and then turned off.

(18) When a lottery for moving to an advantageous zone is won based on a combination of a bonus and a specific role (for example, a strong cherry combination of 1, a strong watermelon combination of 1, etc.), a freeze state may be generated in the game in which the combination is won, the length of the freeze state may be set according to the contents and advantageous degree of the advantageous zone, and the display of the zone indicator may be started before the bonus winning game is set as the starting game and the operation of the next game is permitted after the carryover state. Furthermore, when a lottery for moving to an advantageous zone is won based on a combination of a bonus and a specific role, a freeze state may be generated in a game that is later than the game in which the combination is won and that is earlier than the bonus winning game, and the length of the freeze state may be set according to the contents and advantageous degree of the advantageous zone, and the display of the zone indicator may be started before the bonus winning game is set as the starting game and the operation of the next game is permitted. Furthermore, when a player wins a lottery for moving to an advantageous zone due to a combination of the bonus and a specific role, a freeze state may be generated in a game subsequent to the game in which the combination was won, in which the bonus is won, and the length of the freeze state may be set according to the contents and degree of advantage of the advantageous zone, and the bonus winning game may be the starting game, and the zone indicator may start displaying before the next game is allowed to be operated. In a configuration in which a freeze state is generated during a carryover state, the freeze state may be generated multiple times in multiple games, and in this case, the total length of the multiple freeze state periods may be associated with the contents or degree of advantage of the advantageous zone or the display start mode of the zone indicator, or the number of times the freeze state occurs multiple times may be associated with the contents or degree of advantage of the advantageous zone or the display start mode of the zone indicator.

(19) When a lottery for moving to a favorable zone is won based on a winning replay, the winning game of the winning replay is set as the start game, and in the game following the start game, the start operation of the start lever 41, rather than the betting operation, is set as the end of the start timing of the zone display. However, whether the end of the start timing is the betting operation or the start operation during the winning replay may be determined by lottery. Also, multiple winning replays may be provided, and depending on the type of winning replay, the end of the betting operation or the start operation may be different. In this case, it is preferable that the stop results are different for each winning replay, and if the end of the start operation is set to a line different from the effective line, the effect of surprise when the display of the zone display starts based on the start operation can be further enhanced. Even in this case, it is more preferable to have a configuration in which the start operation is allowed based on the betting operation.

(20) Although the first BB and second BB are used as a transition to the bonus state, a configuration in which a transition to the bonus state occurs and a replay is awarded based on the first BB or second BB winning may also be used. In this case, since a replay is awarded when the first BB winning is used as the starting game, it is also possible to set the start operation of the start lever 41, rather than the betting operation for the next game, as the end of the display start timing of the interval indicator.

(21) In a configuration in which the display start mode of the section indicator is determined based on the display start mode table for a specific state when the game state becomes a specific state, the parameters of the transition condition to the specific state and the continuation condition (end condition) of the specific state are not limited to those described above. For example, the parameters of the transition condition to the specific state may be a configuration in which the transition setting or transition lottery is performed to the specific state depending on the number of games since the RAM is cleared or the power is turned on, a configuration in which the transition setting or transition lottery is performed depending on the number of games in the normal section from the end of the previous advantageous section, a configuration in which the transition setting or transition lottery is performed to the specific state depending on the number of games between bonuses, a configuration in which the transition setting or transition lottery is performed depending on the number of wins, the number of wins or the number of transitions of a specific role, a replay, a small role, a miss, a bonus, an advantageous section, etc., etc. In addition, when determining whether or not these transition conditions are satisfied, the number of continued games may be determined by lottery, etc., and the length of the determined number of continued games may also change depending on each of the above parameters. Possible parameters for the continuation condition (termination condition) of a specific state include a configuration in which continuation to a specific state is set or a continuation lottery is performed depending on the number of games played since transitioning to the specific state, or a configuration in which continuation is set or a continuation lottery is performed depending on the number of wins of a specific role, replay, small role, loss, bonus, etc. during the specific state, the number of wins, the number of transitions, etc. Also, a configuration in which the probability of winning the transition lottery or the continuation lottery differs depending on the number of transitions to a specific state or the number of transition triggers that occur may be used.

(22) When the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is started at the start of the advantageous section, the display start timing, the display start color, and other display modes are changed according to the type of advantageous section that has been won (either challenge mode, attack mode, or super attack mode). However, the display mode may be changed according to the number of games that continue in the advantageous section that has been won. For example, the initial number of games in the challenge mode, attack mode, and specialized zone may be made variable, and the initial number of games may be determined by lottery or the like when the transition lottery for these modes is drawn (when the win is won). The display start mode of the section indicator may then be determined according to the determined initial number of games. When the display end mode at the end of the advantageous section is changed, the display end mode may be changed according to the length of the continued advantageous section. In addition to the initial number of games, the display start and end modes may be changed according to a parameter that changes the advantageous degree (for example, the ease of transition to VB mode in attack mode). The display start and end modes may be changed according to a combination of these parameters and the type of advantageous section.

(23) The transition trigger and termination conditions to the special RT state are not limited to those mentioned above. For example, the transition may be made by a specific combination that includes a medal payout (strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc.), a combination of the specific combination and a bonus (1 strong cherry combination, 1 strong watermelon combination, etc.), or a specific combination that replaces a specific combination with a specific replay, or any combination of these. In addition, the termination conditions are such that the special RT state is terminated based on winning a bonus when a bonus is overlapped, but the special RT state may also be terminated by playing a specified number of games or stopping the transition result even when a bonus is overlapped.

(24) In a configuration in which a lottery for transitioning to an advantageous zone is won based on a bonus overlap role and a transition is made to a special RT state, the stop results of the special replay during the special RT state may be different depending on the stop results of the game that resulted in the bonus overlap role. For example, if the overlap role is a strong watermelon overlap 1, the stop results of the special replay may be different in the game in which the strong watermelon overlap 1 is won, depending on whether the stop results are a strong watermelon win (win of the 30th small role) or if the strong watermelon is missed (no win of the 30th small role). For example, the stop results of the special replay may be different in the case of a strong watermelon win so that it is easier to predict the contents and degree of advantage of the advantageous zone that has been won.

(25) In a configuration in which a transition to a special RT state is made, the display control device 81 may be configured not to set the pseudo-premonition mode. Also, a configuration in which a continuous performance is not generated may be used.

(26) In regard to the push order notification performance for winning a special replay during a special RT state, the push order notification may be configured to be performed not only for the stop results that do not result in a black BAR tenpai, but also for the stop results that result in a black BAR double line or a black BAR single line, if the push order notification is selected through a lottery.

(27) With regard to the push order notification effect when a special replay is won during a special RT state, an upper limit may be set on the number of times the push order notification effect occurs. For example, the upper limit may be set to one time per special RT state, and if a push order notification effect resulting in a double black BAR or a single black BAR is performed and the corresponding stop result appears once, a similar push order notification effect may not be performed when a special replay is won thereafter. In this case, if a stop result different from the push order notification effect that was executed appears due to a failed push operation or an incorrect operation of the stop order, the push order notification effect may be made to occur again.

(28) In a configuration in which a push order notification effect when a special replay is won during a special RT state causes a predetermined stop result (such as a double black BAR or a single black BAR) to appear to suggest the contents and degree of advantage of the advantageous zone, the contents and degree of advantage of the advantageous zone may be suggested by the number of occurrences of the predetermined stop result. For example, when a first number (one time) of single black BARs appear as the predetermined stop result, it is determined that the lottery for transition to the challenge mode has been won, and when a second number (two times) of single black BARs appear as the predetermined stop result, which is greater than the first number, it is determined that the lottery for transition to the attack mode, which is more advantageous than the challenge mode, has been won. In this case, it is preferable to configure the push order notification effect when a special replay is won to be different so that the corresponding number of occurrences is obtained.

(29) In a configuration in which a notification release lottery is held in response to a specific combination during a special RT state, the release lottery is held if the transition lottery to an advantageous zone has already been won, but the release lottery may be held even if the transition lottery has not been won. In this case, if the transition lottery has not been won but the release lottery has been won, a push order notification effect may be generated, but the push order notification effect may not produce a stop result that determines an advantageous zone, such as a stop result of a double black BAR.

(30) In a configuration in which a notification release lottery is performed in response to a specific role during the special RT state, the winning probability of the release lottery table is not limited to the above. For example, it may be a uniform winning probability regardless of the type of specific role. Also, the number of times a specific role is won during the special RT state may be stored, and the winning probability may vary depending on the number of times it is won. In this case, it is preferable that the more times it is won, the higher the probability of winning the release lottery. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the winning probability of the notification release lottery to be different depending on the relationship between the specific role that triggered the transition to the special RT state and the specific role won during the special RT state. For example, if the specific role that triggered the transition and the specific role won during the special RT state are the same specific role (same index value IV), it may be easier to win the notification release lottery than if they are not.

(31) In a configuration in which a notification release lottery is held in response to a specific combination during the special RT state, the content of the notification after release may be different from that described above. Specifically, it may be the content of a lottery for transition to an advantageous zone that has already been executed, and may be, for example, the content of a lottery for transition to an advantageous zone that was executed based on a game result prior to the result that triggered the transition to the special RT state, or a notification that the transition lottery was not won for the result that triggered the transition to the special RT state, or a notification that a transition lottery was executed.

(32) In a configuration in which a notification cancellation lottery is conducted in response to a specific role during a special RT state, the setting of a premonition mode has been described as an example of a configuration in which the contents of the transition lottery to a favorable zone conducted based on the game result (a role overlapping with a bonus) that triggered the transition to the special RT state are less likely to be notified in the game that resulted in that game result. However, any configuration may be used that restricts notification in the game that resulted in that game result, and for example, a configuration in which notification is not performed in that game may be used. In this case, the premonition mode may not be set.

(33) In a configuration having multiple special RT states and different types of special replays that can be won in each special RT state, the probability of winning a special replay may be made higher than the probability of winning a normal replay. Also, a configuration may be made in which only a special replay can be won, with no normal replay being won. In this way, the frequency (probability) of a special replay occurring can be increased, and if the "black BAR" symbol is aimed for in each game, the desired stop result can be made to appear relatively smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent players from getting bored of playing the game of aiming for the "black BAR" symbol in each game.

(34) In a configuration having multiple special RT states and different winning probabilities for special replays that can be won in each special RT state, the types of special replays are not limited to those described above. For example, the winning probability of special replay 3 may be different. Also, the number of special replays that can be won may be multiple types instead of one type. In this case, the type of RT state may be predicted based on the difference in the winning probability of each special replay (based on the balance of winning probabilities), and the content of the advantageous zone may be predicted. More specifically, for example, in the sixth RT state, special replay 3 is likely to be won and special replay 4 is unlikely to be won, and in the seventh RT state, special replay 3 is unlikely to be won and special replay 4 is likely to be won. Also, a configuration may be made in which a specified special replay can be won only in a specified RT state. For example, special replay 5 may be won only in the fifth RT state.

(35) In a configuration in which the number of black BAR symbols that stop during a special RT state indicates whether or not a bonus has been won and the contents of a favorable zone, if a bonus is won during a special RT state that is not based on a bonus win, the count of the "black BAR" symbols (black BAR stop counter), the notification scenario, and the upper limit may be reset.

(36) In a configuration in which the stop result during a special RT state indicates whether or not a bonus has been won or the contents of a favorable zone, the stopped symbol is not limited to a "black BAR" symbol, and the stop position is not limited to the middle row. For example, if the stop positions are the upper, middle, and lower rows, multiple corresponding symbols may stop on one reel.

(37) In a configuration in which the number of corresponding symbols stopped during a special RT state suggests whether or not a bonus has been won and the contents of an advantageous zone, a notification scenario is set according to the suggested content, but the notification scenario is not limited to the above. For example, a configuration in which multiple types of notification scenarios are set for one suggested content, and one notification scenario is selected from these multiple types by lottery or the like, may be used. In this case, the multiple types of notification scenarios may include notification scenarios that do not match the suggested content, such as a notification scenario that suggests a bonus has been won but has an upper limit of 2 for the black BAR stop counter.

(38) In a configuration in which the number of corresponding symbols stopped during a special RT state indicates whether a bonus has been won or the contents of a favorable zone, the count of the corresponding symbols (black BAR stop counter) may be decremented by a predetermined trigger. For example, if the corresponding symbols do not stop despite notification of a stop sequence that allows the corresponding symbols to be stopped (if the eye-pressing operation fails), the count of the corresponding symbols may be decremented. Also, if notification of a stop sequence that prevents the corresponding symbols from being stopped is made, the count of the corresponding symbols may be decremented.

(39) In a configuration in which the stop result during a special RT state suggests whether a bonus has been won or the contents of a favorable zone, the configuration may also suggest the type of bonus. For example, the content of the suggestion may be different depending on whether the special RT state is based on the first BB or the second BB (for example, the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter or the notification scenario may be different).

(40) The game state is shifted to the special RT state, and the stop results during the special RT state suggest whether or not a bonus has been won and the contents of the advantageous zone. However, the game state may remain in the normal game state or the first RT state, and the stop results may suggest whether or not a bonus has been won and the contents of the advantageous zone. In this case, the special replay may be winnable not only in the carryover state but also in the normal game state or the first RT state, and in a state equivalent to the carryover state or the fake special RT state (a game after a specific role win in which BB has not been won and the advantageous zone has not been won), a push order notification effect of a corresponding stop order may be generated based on the special replay win. In other words, when the game result (specific role or overlapping role, etc.) that triggers the transition to the special RT state occurs, the push order notification effect when the special replay is won may be changed to a different mode (a mode in which a push order notification effect with a predetermined stop result is more likely to occur).

(41) In a configuration in which the number of corresponding symbols stopped during a special RT state suggests whether or not a bonus has been won or the contents of an advantageous zone, the cumulative number of corresponding symbols stopped over multiple games and the number of corresponding symbols stopped in a single game may suggest differently whether or not a bonus has been won or the contents of an advantageous zone, or the cumulative number of stops and the number of stops in a single game may be weighted differently. Specifically, for example, in a configuration in which a bonus win is confirmed when the cumulative number of stops is 3 or more, a bonus win and attack mode win are confirmed when the number of stops in a single game is 3, i.e., when the cumulative number of stops corresponding to a bonus win is cleared in one game, or a bonus win is confirmed when the number of stops in a single game is 2 or more.

(42) In a configuration in which the number of corresponding symbols stopped is varied by varying the stop results of a special replay during a special RT state using a push order notification effect, the stop sequence of a single special replay may not include a stop sequence in which the corresponding symbols are zero.

(43) In a configuration in which the number of corresponding symbols stopped is varied by varying the stop results of a special replay during a special RT state using a push order notification effect, the stop sequence of one special replay may include a first number (1) in which there is one or more corresponding symbols, and a second number (2) in which there is one or more corresponding symbols and is different from the first number.

(44) In a configuration in which the number of times a corresponding symbol stops during a special RT state suggests whether a bonus has been won or the contents of a favorable zone, when the suggested contents are determined by the cumulative number of stops or the number of stops in a single game, a configuration may be adopted in which, in addition to changing the background color, a confirmation effect for the corresponding contents is performed. For example, in a configuration in which a bonus has been won when the cumulative number of stops of a "black BAR" symbol reaches 3 or more, a configuration may be adopted in which a bonus win notification effect is generated in a game in which the cumulative number of stops (black BAR stop counter) reaches 3.

(45) As a configuration in which the total replay probability is higher in all special RT states than in the normal game state, the total replay probability may be lower in any special RT state or in all special RT states than in the normal game state.

(46) In a configuration having multiple special RT states, the total replay probability in each special RT state is set to be the same, but it may not be exactly the same probability, and may be similar enough that the player can sense that there is a slight difference and still perceive it as the same. More specifically, for example, if the difference in replay probability between special RT states is less than one-tenth of the replay probability, it is considered that they will be recognized as being the same probability. The same applies to the relationship with the total replay probability with other RT states (second RT state and third RT state), and they may not be exactly the same probability, but may be similar.

(47) The advantageous zone may be defined as follows: A zone in which a push order notification corresponding to a winning combination related to the maximum number of medals to be paid out occurs at least once. More specifically, a zone in which a push order notification resulting in the payout of nine medals occurs at least once in a push order bell in which nine, three or zero medals may be paid out depending on the stopping order.

(48) The system may be configured to perform initialization processing even if the advantageous period ends before reaching the upper limit of continuation.

(49) Even when the first BB or the second BB is won alone, a lottery for transition to the advantageous zone or an additional lottery may be conducted. In each of the above-described embodiments, when the first BB or the second BB is won alone, the winning probability is not affected by the set value, so that no inconvenience is expected to occur even if a lottery for the advantageous zone is conducted when such a single win occurs.

(50) Although the first BB and second BB bonuses are configured such that the winning probability differs depending on the setting value, including the winning probability of overlapping roles, a bonus whose winning probability does not differ depending on the setting value may be provided. In this case, a configuration may be provided in which a lottery for transition to attack mode, etc. is possible during the carryover state of a bonus whose winning probability does not differ depending on the setting value. In other words, there may be cases in which a lottery for transition to attack mode, etc. is conducted when a specific role is carried over, and cases in which it is not conducted. Also, although the winning probability for a single win of the first BB or second BB is the same depending on the setting value, a different configuration may be possible.

(51) In addition to the first BB and second BB, CB (first CB to fourth CB) have been provided as transition roles in which the probability of a small win can change depending on the transition of the game state. However, other transition roles may be provided in addition to or instead of these transition roles. Other transition roles may include MB (middle bonus), which has no limit on the number of slipping pieces, REG (regular bonus), which has a lower upper limit on the number of winnings than the first BB and second BB, and SB (single bonus), which allows one JAC game to be played. In addition, the upper limit on the number of winnings for each bonus is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit on the number of winnings during the CB state may be 3, which is less than 15, or 0.

(52) Although the configuration is such that no medals are paid out when a transition role (first BB, second BB, or CB) is won, the configuration may be such that medals are paid out.

(53) A configuration may be adopted in which a lottery for transition to attack mode or an additional lottery is held during a bonus. In this case, the configuration may be such that these lotteries are held when a bonus is won or during a bonus where there is no set difference in the probability of winning, the number of coins won, and the probability or advantage of the lottery for transition to attack mode or an additional lottery during a bonus, and that these lotteries are not held when a bonus is won with a set difference.

(54) In order to prevent differences in the probability or advantage of the transition lottery to attack mode, etc., or the additional lottery, depending on the setting value, these lotteries are configured to be performed based on lottery results with no particular setting differences. However, while the lottery is performed based on lottery results with setting differences, the benefit at the time of winning (benefits, probability of winning the transition lottery, number of additional games) may be adjusted to prevent setting differences. For example, a specific role is set with a 1 in 100 probability of winning in setting 1 and a 1 in 10 probability of winning in setting 6, and the winning probability of the attack mode additional lottery when the specific role is won is set to 1 in 2 for setting 1 and 1 in 20 for setting 6. In this way, the total probability of winning the additional lottery is 1 in 200 for any setting value, eliminating setting differences.

(55) Although the contents of the effects produced by the auxiliary display unit 65 have been mainly described as effects produced by other notification means of the section display unit, a separate display unit may be provided as other notification means, and the effects may be generated by the separate display unit.

(56) Basically, by winning the lottery for transitioning to attack mode or the like or the lottery for adding on, an advantageous event occurs for the player. However, for example, it may be configured to hold a lottery for ending attack mode or the like, or to hold a lottery for subtracting the number of games to be played.

(57) Although the above description has been focused on games in which the number of bets is three, the above invention may also be applied to a one-bet game in which the number of bets is one or a two-bet game in which the number of bets is two. For example, the display start mode table of the zone indicator may be different between winning the lottery to move to an advantageous zone in a one-bet game or two-bet game and winning the lottery to move to an advantageous zone in a three-bet game, so that the display start mode of the zone indicator may be different.

(58) In the above embodiment, when an opportunity to add-on occurs while the excess flag is set, a setting value is suggested. However, for example, a specific zone may be provided as a zone to which a transition may occur during attack mode, in which a setting value is more likely to be suggested than during normal attack mode, and a transition to that specific zone may be more likely when an opportunity to add-on occurs while the excess flag is set.

(59) Although the configuration is such that a setting value is suggested when an additional trigger occurs, such as a win of a specific role, while the excess flag is set, the additional trigger is not limited to the above. For example, an additional trigger may occur based on the number of games played during the favorable zone, or based on the number of wins or prizes of minor roles during the favorable zone, the number of medals paid out, etc., and it is preferable that the configuration is such that a setting value is suggested when such an additional trigger occurs while the excess flag is set.

(60) When an opportunity for an addition occurs, a setting value is suggested instead of adding to the number of games. However, the setting value may be suggested after the number of games is added.

(61) When the excess flag is set and a mode transition lottery is won, such as from challenge mode to attack mode or from attack mode to a specialized zone, the mode transition is performed and then a setting value suggestion is made. However, the mode transition may not be performed.

(62) In the above embodiment, when an opportunity to add-on occurs while the excess flag is set, a setting value is suggested. However, even if an opportunity to add-on occurs while the excess flag is not set, if the player does not win the lottery to add-on, a setting value suggestion may be made. In addition, if the player does not win the lottery to add-on, the player may be assumed to win the lottery to add the number of added games to the total number of games lost (TEG), etc.

(63) In a configuration in which a setting value suggestion is made by referring to the total number of games lost TEG at the time of forced termination, a configuration may be adopted in which the display mode at the time of forced termination is taken into consideration. For example, a table of setting value suggestions (such as a third special notification lottery table or a third special notification type table) may be prepared depending on the display mode at the time of forced termination. In addition, when forced termination occurs during a specialized zone, a configuration may be adopted in which a setting value suggestion is more likely to occur with a smaller total number of games lost TEG than when forced termination occurs during an attack mode.

(64) When a game that is forcibly terminated occurs during a bonus, the process of setting value suggestion, etc. may be different from the process when the game occurs outside of a bonus. For example, when a game is forcibly terminated outside of a bonus, the process may be configured to suggest a setting value in the game that is forcibly terminated, whereas when a game is forcibly terminated during a bonus, the process may be configured to wait until the bonus ends before suggesting a setting value. In addition, the process of setting value suggestion, etc. may be different depending on the type of bonus. For example, when a game that is forcibly terminated occurs during the first BB, in which the winning probability is the same regardless of the setting value, the process may be configured to suggest a setting value, whereas when a game that is forcibly terminated occurs during the second BB, in which the winning probability differs depending on the setting value, the process may be configured to not suggest a setting value, or vice versa. In addition, during the first BB, the process may be configured to suggest a setting value in the forcibly terminated game, and during the second BB, the process may be configured to wait until the bonus ends before suggesting a setting value, or vice versa. When the process of setting value suggestion, etc. is different, the process to be performed may be determined by lottery, and the winning probability may be different.

(65) The number of games that are forced to end in the advantageous zone is not limited to the above number (1,500) and may be more or less than that.

(66) The add-on lottery table and the add-on game number lottery table are not limited to those described above, and may be configured to draw an add-on lottery based on other triggers (minor winnings or replays), and the winning probability and the range and average number of add-on games when won are also arbitrary. For example, the number of add-on games may be selected to be a number of games that exceeds the upper limit of the advantageous zone (2000 games, etc.).

(67) When an opportunity to add to the total occurs while the excess flag is set, a setting value suggestion is made as compensation to present useful information to the player. However, any information useful to the player is acceptable and is not limited to setting value suggestions. For example, the information may be the above-mentioned advertisements or coupons, or a bonus such as a rare image may be provided.

In addition, when an opportunity for topping up occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, the manner of the push order bell or the push order notification when the push order replay is won may be different, so that useful information for the player is presented or a bonus is given. For example, the push order bell is a combination of a first role in which one or zero medals are paid out, a second role in which nine medals are paid out, which is more than the first role, and a role in which fifteen medals are paid out, which is more than the second role. In addition, in a normal zone other than the favorable zone, if the push order notification is not performed, the first role is likely to win, and in the favorable zone, if the push order notification is performed, the second role or the third role is likely to win. In addition, until the excess flag is set, the push order notification for the second role is likely to be performed, and after the excess flag is set, the push order notification for the third role is likely to be performed based on the occurrence of an opportunity for topping up. In this way, it is also possible to provide a bonus when an opportunity for topping up occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set.

In this case, when three coins are bet, an increase of six medals can be expected for the second role winning, and an increase of 12 medals can be expected for the third role winning, so it can be said that the third role winning is expected to increase the number of medals by twice that of the second role winning. Therefore, when a push order notification that establishes the third role winning is generated as described above, the number of games equivalent to two push order bell wins can be subtracted from the upper limit number of games, and a forced end can be caused at the upper limit number of games thus subtracted. In this way, it is possible to enjoy the benefit of ending the advantageous period early without substantially changing the total number of medals won.

(68) The forced termination condition may be specified not by the number of games, but by the total number of medals paid out or the total number of medals acquired (total number of medals paid out minus total number of bets). In this case, the attack mode, etc. may be managed not by the number of games, but by a specified number of the total number of medals paid out or the total number of medals acquired (a configuration in which the attack mode, etc., ends when the specified number is reached), and even if an addition occurs, it is preferable to perform an increase process of the specified number rather than the number of games. For example, the advantageous zone may be forced to end when the total number of medals acquired reaches 3,000. Then, as a result of the addition of the specified number of the attack mode, etc., the excess flag may be set when the specified number reaches 3,000. With such a configuration, even if a push order notification that results in a role with a large number of payouts is performed in a situation where the excess flag is set as in (67) above, the total number of medals acquired by the player does not change, and it is possible to enjoy the advantage of being able to end the advantageous zone in a small number of games while preventing the degree of advantage from changing.

(69) The number of times each type of additional opportunity that occurs when the excess flag is set may be stored, and the lottery table and type table for the setting value suggestion may differ depending on the number of times. For example, the probability of winning or the ease of narrowing down the setting value when the setting value suggestion is made may be different between a setting value suggestion for when a weak cherry is won in a situation where a strong cherry has been won once and a weak cherry has been won four times since the excess flag was set, and a setting value suggestion for when a weak cherry is won in a situation where a strong cherry has been won four times and a weak cherry has been won once since the excess flag was set. Given that it is difficult to win a strong cherry, the latter setting value suggestion may be more advantageous to the player (a setting value suggestion that makes it easier to narrow down the setting value).

(70) In a configuration in which a setting value is suggested taking into account the game conditions on the day, the total number of games TG is initialized by changing the winning probability, i.e., by clearing the RAM, but it may also be initialized by turning the power on/off.

(71) In a configuration in which a setting value is suggested taking into account the game play situation on the day, information other than the total number of games TG and the time may also be taken into account as the game play situation on the day. For example, instead of or in addition to the time, the time elapsed since the power was turned on may be taken into account. Also, for example, a configuration may be used in which a bonus, the number of times a specific minor role has been won, the number of times a prize has been won, etc. may be taken into account. A configuration may be used in which the number of medals inserted and the number of medals paid out are taken into account. A configuration may be used in which the number of forced terminations are taken into account.

(72) In the configuration in which setting value suggestions are made taking into account the game conditions on the day, a configuration is adopted in which setting value suggestions are unlikely to occur or setting value suggestions for low settings are likely to occur when the game is forcibly terminated at a relatively early stage. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which setting value suggestions for high settings are likely to occur or setting value suggestions for low settings are unlikely to occur or setting value suggestions for high settings are unlikely to occur when the game is forcibly terminated at a relatively early stage.

Also, assuming that operation rates are high in the morning and evening, if the machine is configured so that a setting value suggestion is more likely to occur when the machine is forcibly terminated at other times such as during the day, it is possible to expect an increase in operation rates due to players anticipating the setting value suggestion. In this case, for example, the operation rate of the previous day or over several days up to the previous day can be ascertained from a built-in clock or game number counter, and the setting value suggestion table (special notification lottery table, special notification type table, etc.) can be changed based on the operation rate.

(73) In a configuration in which a setting value is suggested taking into account the gaming situation on the day, the data to be referenced, such as the total number of games played TG, may be data that can be managed over multiple days, and the gaming situation over multiple days when a forced termination occurs may be taken into account. For example, the total number of games played TG may be configured not to be initialized even if a process for changing the winning probability is performed, and setting value suggestions may be made taking into account the total number of games played since the gaming machine was installed in the gaming hall. In this case, a configuration in which setting value suggestions are unlikely/easier to occur at the time of introduction (initial installation) may be used.

(74) Although the configuration is such that when the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated, the setting value is suggested taking into account the game conditions of the day, it may also be configured to suggest a setting value taking into account the game conditions of the day when another advantageous state is forcibly terminated. As another advantageous state, for example, the bonus state may be configured to end not only based on the payout number but also when other forced termination conditions are met (for example, when a specific ending role is won, when the specific ending role is won, or when a so-called "break" occurs), and when the bonus state ends based on the fulfillment of the forced termination condition before the upper limit of the payout number is reached, the setting value is suggested taking into account the game conditions of the day.

(75) The memory area for the advantageous zone and the memory area for the normal zone are configured to be in separate areas so that they do not overlap, but as long as the CPU 102 can distinguish between them, some overlap is acceptable.

As a configuration in which they are provided in separate areas, instead of providing separate areas in one RAM, a configuration in which a RAM for the advantageous zone and a RAM for the normal zone are provided may be used. In this case, the CPU can access both RAMs, but the information in both RAMs should not be communicated directly with each other (without going through the CPU).

(76) Depending on the presence or absence of the excess flag, the information when an additional trigger occurs is stored in either the memory area for the advantageous zone or the memory area for the normal zone. However, when an additional trigger occurs when the excess flag is set, a process is performed to store information based on the additional trigger (number of games added) in a specified area provided in the memory area for the advantageous zone, and the information stored in the specified area may be re-stored in the memory area for the normal zone (total number of games lost TEG and number of games lost EG) at least at a timing before the initialization process is performed.

(77) Although the information when an additional trigger occurs is stored in either the memory area for the advantageous zone or the memory area for the normal zone depending on the presence or absence of the excess flag, it is also possible to store the corresponding information in either memory area when an additional trigger occurs. Specifically, for example, when an additional trigger occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, a process is performed to add the number of additional games to the number of continuations of the attack mode, etc., and a process is also performed to add the number of additional games to the total number of games that have disappeared (TEG) and the number of games that have disappeared (EG). Even in this case, the initialization process at the time of forced termination initializes the number of additional games in the attack mode, etc., that has been added since the excess flag was set, while the total number of games that have disappeared (TEG) and the number of games that have disappeared (EG) are not initialized, so that the total number of games that have disappeared (TEG) and the like can be used in the normal zone.

(78) Information corresponding to an event that occurred during a favorable zone is stored in a memory area for a normal zone, and a special zone is set in the normal zone after a forcibly terminated favorable zone based on the stored information. However, the situation in which the information corresponding to an event that occurred during the favorable zone is used is not limited to the normal zone after a forcibly terminated zone. For example, the information may be used when a favorable zone is entered again after a forcibly terminated zone (e.g., a configuration in which a setting value suggestion is more likely to occur in the favorable zone to which the player has entered again), or when the power is turned on/off after a forcibly terminated zone (e.g., a configuration in which a setting value suggestion is more likely to occur first thing in the morning the following day), or when a bonus is won after a forcibly terminated zone, the information may be used during the bonus (e.g., a configuration in which a setting value suggestion is more likely to occur during a bonus).

(79) During the special section, the push order notification effect of special replays 1 and 2 is generated as a special notification, and a short premonition game number is selected when a bonus is won. However, these push order notification effects of special replays 1 and 2 and special notifications as a short premonition game number do not only occur during the special section, but may also occur during other normal sections or advantageous sections. In this case, it is preferable that the probability of a special notification occurring during the special section is higher than that during other normal sections or advantageous sections, or that the notification is more likely to be beneficial to the player (a push order notification whose setting value is easy to narrow down or a short premonition game number).

(80) The number of games elimination EG and the total number of games elimination TEG are configured to be displayed as the special game number display section TGH in the auxiliary display section 65, but they may also be configured to be displayed in another display section.

(81) The special game number display unit TGH is configured to display the total number of games to be eliminated TEG, which corresponds to the number of added games. However, for example, if a setting value suggestion is generated based on the value of the total number of games to be eliminated TEG, the total number of games to be eliminated TEG, which is the threshold for whether or not a setting value suggestion is generated, may be set to 100%, and the special game number display unit TGH may display the percentage up to that total number of games to be eliminated TEG. In this case, each time the total number of games to be eliminated TEG is added, the percentage of the special game number display unit TGH approaches 100%, and by reaching 100%, it is possible to give a strong impression that some kind of benefit will be obtained.

The special game count display section TGH may also be configured as a light-emitting section that can emit light in multiple colors, with the light color suggesting that some kind of benefit will be obtained (providing hope that a setting value suggestion will occur). In this case, the multiple colors may be emitted in colors that correspond to the expectation levels of the light colors of other general expected effects, such as white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow, so that the change in light color can give a strong impression that some kind of benefit will be obtained.

(82) In a configuration in which the special game number display unit TGH displays the number of games elimination EG or the total number of games elimination TEG, the configuration may be such that the display is simply performed without suggesting a setting value based on the total number of games elimination TEG, etc.

(83) The configuration of displaying the number of games lost EG or the total number of games lost TEG on the special game number display unit TGH to make the player expect compensation for the nullification of the added bonus due to the forced termination is not limited to the forced termination of the advantageous zone, and may be applied to the forced termination of other advantageous states. For example, a high probability state and a low probability state are set in which the probability of winning the bonus (first BB, second BB, etc.) or VB mode is relatively high and low, and an upper limit is set on the number of times the bonus or VB mode is won during the high probability state. Then, for example, if a configuration is made in which a single win allows the player to win the bonus or VB mode multiple times, or a configuration in which the bonus or VB mode can be won even during the bonus or VB mode, the player can win the bonus or VB mode even after the number of wins has reached the upper limit. In such a configuration, by displaying the number of wins of the bonus or VB mode after the upper limit is reached, it is possible to make the player expect that some kind of benefit will be obtained even when the game ends at the upper limit, that is, when the bonus or VB mode is nullified after the upper limit is reached, because the number of wins after the upper limit is deliberately displayed.

(84) Assuming a later-addition performance, when an opportunity for an addition occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, if there is an unannounced amount (if the later-addition flag is set), an addition announcement is made within the range of the unannounced amount. In this case, the number of pseudo-additional games is determined by referring to a lottery table for the number of games to be added during normal times, but the number of pseudo-additional games may also be determined by using a lottery table for the number of games to be added for pseudo-addition. In this case, the configuration may be such that a large number of pseudo-additional games are more likely to occur when there are many unannounced amounts, and a small number of pseudo-additional games are more likely to occur when there are few unannounced amounts.

(85) Assuming a later-addition effect, when an opportunity for an addition occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, if there is an unannounced amount, a pseudo-addition is performed within the range of the unannounced amount, and a pseudo-addition is performed beyond the unannounced amount. In the case where a pseudo-addition is performed beyond the unannounced amount, a setting value is suggested, but a setting value suggestion within a range not exceeding the unannounced amount may also be used.

For example, when a pseudo-addition occurs by subtracting 10 as the first number from the later-addition counter BG, settings 1 to 3 are suggested; when a pseudo-addition occurs by subtracting 56 as the second number from the later-addition counter BG, settings 5 or 6 are suggested; and when a pseudo-addition occurs by subtracting 77 as the third number from the later-addition counter BG, setting 6 is suggested. In this case, the pseudo-additions of the number of times each of the first to third numbers is subtracted from the later-addition counter BG not only occur as setting value suggestions, but can also be selected based on the normal number of games to be added. Therefore, when these pseudo-additions occur, the setting value is predicted taking into consideration whether they occurred as a setting value suggestion, which improves the enjoyment of the prediction game.

Furthermore, with the above configuration, the situation in which a setting value suggestion occurs requires that the back-loading counter BG is equal to or greater than the first to third numbers. From this perspective, it becomes difficult to determine whether a setting value suggestion is being made, which increases the enjoyment of predicting the setting value.

It goes without saying that the values of the first number to the third number are not limited to the above values.

(86) In the case where an opportunity for top-up occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set on the premise of a later top-up performance, even in the case where a pseudo top-up occurs if there is an unannounced portion, the target zone is not limited to the favorable zone, and may be applied to other favorable states or zones. For example, a high probability state and a low probability state are set in which the probability of winning a bonus (first BB, second BB, etc.) or VB mode is relatively high and low, and an upper limit is set on the number of times that a bonus or VB mode is won during the high probability state. Then, for example, if a configuration is made in which a single win allows multiple wins in the bonus or VB mode, or a configuration in which a bonus or VB mode can be won even during a bonus or VB mode, it is possible to win the bonus or VB mode even after the number of wins has reached the upper limit. In such a configuration, it may be further configured to later notify that the upper limit has been reached, and a pseudo win notification may be made when a bonus or VB mode is won in a situation in which the upper limit has been reached but there is an unannounced portion.

(87) In the process for drawing the number of games to be added (FIG. 130) and the process for adding the number of games (FIG. 132), whether or not the excess flag is set is determined to determine whether or not to execute the subsequent process. However, if the excess flag is set at least in the previous process for drawing the number of games to be added (FIG. 128), the lottery for drawing the number of games to be added is not performed, and it is determined in the subsequent determination process that the additional win has not been made. Therefore, in a situation where the excess flag is set, the process for drawing the number of games to be added (FIG. 130) and the process for adding the number of games (FIG. 132) will not actually be performed, and for this reason, the process for determining the excess flag may be omitted in these processes.

(88) Although a setting value is suggested as compensation for forced termination due to the upper limit of the number of games in the favorable zone, a setting value may be suggested as compensation for the forced termination of the favorable zone due to other factors that can be known in advance. For example, a setting value may be suggested when a game is forced to terminate due to the closing time of an amusement hall (when the remaining number of games ZG in the favorable zone cannot be played within business hours).

(89) The above explanation is based on the premise that the gameplay may be such that the number of games may be increased if a specific role is won during the favorable zone, but the gameplay may be such that the number of games may be either decreased or increased based on a predetermined trigger, such as the winning of a specific role, or may be such that only a decrease may occur. Assuming that a decrease in the number of games may occur, even if the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less, it is not necessarily the case that the upper limit number of games has been reached, making it possible to make subsequent games more enjoyable. In this case, after the transition to the favorable zone, the remaining number of games may be displayed as being more than the upper limit number of games, and when the upper limit number of games is reached or the game has progressed close to the upper limit number of games, the displayed number of remaining games may be decreased to the upper limit number of games.

(90) When the push order bell or push order replay is won, the winning combination and the bonus awarded differ depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the degree of advantage given to the player differs depending on whether or not the stopping order is notified. However, it is acceptable to use combinations that differ in the degree of advantage given to the player by notifying the player of the stopping operation.

For example, on the left reel 32L as a specified reel, the first symbol (e.g., the "black BAR" symbol) and the second symbol (e.g., the "red 7" symbol) are placed in a location where they cannot be aimed at simultaneously (at positions five symbols or more apart). The winning patterns of the first and second results are set so that a first winning result is achieved when a first pattern on the left reel 32L, a predetermined pattern on the middle reel 32M (e.g., a "first replay" pattern or a "second replay" pattern), and a predetermined pattern on the right reel 32R (e.g., a "first replay" pattern or a "second replay" pattern) all stop on a winning line, and a second winning result is achieved when a second pattern on the left reel 32L, a predetermined pattern on the middle reel 32M (e.g., a "first replay" pattern or a "second replay" pattern), and a predetermined pattern on the right reel 32R (e.g., a "first replay" pattern or a "second replay" pattern) all stop on a winning line. In this case, if the first result is won and the first symbol is targeted for a stop operation, the first result can be won, but if the second symbol is targeted for a stop operation instead of the first symbol, the first result cannot be won and the corresponding benefit is not awarded. Similarly, if the second result is won and the second symbol is targeted for a stop operation, the second result can be won, but if the first symbol is targeted for a stop operation instead of the second symbol, the second result cannot be won and the corresponding benefit is not awarded. In addition, a specific combination is provided in which either the first result or the second result is won, and when the specific combination is won, it is possible to notify which of the first result or the second result has been won (whether the left reel 32L should be stopped for the first symbol or the second symbol). Even in this configuration, the winning result (either the first result or the second result) can be won by the notification, and the degree of advantage for the player changes depending on whether the notification is given or not. The advantageous zone may include at least one of the following modes: a mode where such notifications are more likely to be issued, a mode where the probability of transitioning to a mode where such notifications are more likely to be issued is high, and a mode where a transition lottery has been won but the player has not yet transitioned to these modes. The advantageous zone may also include at least one of the above modes, including the above modes and modes based on the push order.

In addition, a configuration in which a black BAR push notification (Fig. 106) is issued when a special replay is won, resulting in a 15th replay win instead of a 1st replay, etc., may be applied to a configuration in which push order notifications are issued when each special replay is won, resulting in different stop results.

In other words, the stopping operation for changing the stopping outcome even for the same winning combination is not limited to the stopping order, but may be any stopping operation mode including the timing of the stopping operation, and the notification for performing such stopping operation mode is not limited to a push order notification, but may be any mode notification related to the operation mode.

(91) In a configuration in which the display start mode of the interval indicator is changed depending on the result that triggers the lottery when the transition lottery to the advantageous zone is won, and the stop result is associated with the display start mode of the interval indicator, the display start mode of the interval indicator may be changed depending on the winning mode of the result that triggers the lottery or whether or not there is a win. For example, the strong cherry with IV=13 is set as a combination of the 28th small role and the 32nd to 35th small roles, and the display start mode of the interval indicator may be changed depending on which of these combinations results in the strong cherry winning. More specifically, the display start mode of the interval indicator may be different between the case where the "cherry" symbols are aligned and stopped on the effective line, the 28th small role is established, and the strong cherry winning is achieved, and the case where the "cherry" symbols are not aligned on the effective line, and any of the 32nd to 35th small roles is established, and the strong cherry winning is achieved. In addition, for a specific role that may be missed, the display start mode of the interval indicator may be configured to be different depending on whether the specific role is won and the specific role is not won due to a miss.

In these cases, the section indicator may not start to light up until the rotating body stops, which is where the winning mode, the stop results, and the presence or absence of misses branch off, and the section indicator may start to light up at a timing after the timing when the rotating body stops, which is where the branching occurs, and the timing and mode (color, etc.) of the lighting start may be different depending on the branching. Specifically, for example, assuming that the left reel 32L → middle reel 32M → right reel 32R are stopped in this order, and the winning mode branches when the middle reel 32M stops (for strong cherries, the branching occurs between the 28th small win and the 32nd to 35th small wins), the third stop ON, which is the timing after the second stop OFF, is set as the default lighting start timing so that the section indicator starts to light up after the middle reel 32M stops. Then, when the stop operation is performed and the winning mode branches to the first mode (the 28th small win side for strong cherries), the light starts to light up when the third stop is ON as specified above, whereas when the winning mode branches to the second mode (the 32nd to 35th small wins for strong cherries), the light starts to light up when the third stop is OFF as a change lighting start timing, rather than the lighting start timing specified above (when the third stop is ON). In this way, it is possible to provide fun by utilizing the relationship between the success or failure of the eye-pressing operation and the timing at which it becomes possible to recognize the winning of the advantageous zone by the start of lighting of the zone indicator.

(92) Regarding the advantageous zone, the probability of winning the transition lottery and the bonuses when winning (transition mode, number of added games, etc.) are configured to be the same regardless of the set value, but the probability of winning, etc. may be configured to differ depending on the set value. In this case, depending on the type of result that triggers the transition lottery, etc., there may be a configuration in which the probability and bonuses when winning differ depending on the set value, and a configuration in which the probability and bonuses when winning do not differ depending on the set value.

(93) In the indication monitor 68, the display mode of the push order information ("1" to "6") using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is not limited to the above. For example, when the push order role includes three options in which the winning role differs depending on the stop switch 42 to 44 that is stopped first and the stopping order of the second and third reels does not affect the winning role, the push order information displayed by lighting the first display segment N1, the sixth display segment N6, and the seventh display segment N7 (displaying "7"), the push order information displayed by lighting the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 (displaying "8"), and the push order information displayed by lighting the first display segment N1 to the third display segment N3, the sixth display segment N6, and the seventh display segment N7 (displaying "9") may be configured to notify the push order of these three options.

(94) In the instruction monitor 68, the timing for turning off the push order information using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is not limited to the time when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, and the push order notification may be performed at least until the stop switches 42 to 44 to be operated are identified by the push order notification (the push order information may be displayed). For example, it may be when the second reel stop ON operation is performed, or when the second reel stop OFF operation is performed. In addition, when a push order notification for a three-option push order role is performed, it may be when the first reel stop ON operation is performed, or when the first reel stop OFF operation is performed. Furthermore, it may be configured to turn off the lights a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed since these operations.

Furthermore, the light may be turned off at a timing later than when the third reel is stopped and turned ON, or when the third reel is stopped and turned OFF, or after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 sec) has elapsed since the third reel is stopped and turned OFF, or when the medal payout is completed.

(95) The instruction monitor 68 may also be used as the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, and the payout number display unit 62. In these cases, when the push order notification is made, the push order notification is made on each of the display units 60 to 62, while when the push order notification is not made, each of the display units 60 to 62 may display the original information.

When used in combination with the credit display unit 60, the credit display unit 60 may display credits at least until a bet operation is performed, and then (based on the operation of the start lever 41) may notify the push order. The push order notification may end (the push order information may be turned off) at least before the number of medals acquired (paid out) in the game increases and is updated (the timing when medal payout begins). For example, the notification may end by the time the third reel is stopped and ON is performed, and when medal payout begins, the notification may switch to the credit display.

The remaining payout number display unit 61 is a display unit that displays the remaining payout number during a bonus. For example, the bonus state may be configured as a game in which the probability of winning a small prize is increased to increase medals, and push order notifications are not made (a game in which medals are increased by push order notifications), so that games in which the remaining payout number is displayed by the remaining payout number display unit 61 and games in which push order notifications are made do not overlap. Note that in this case, during a bonus, a push order notification effect may be generated by the auxiliary display unit 65.

When used in combination with the payout number display unit 62, it is preferable to configure the push order notification to end at least before the payout number display unit 62 starts displaying the number of medals paid out for the game. For example, when the third reel is stopped ON, the push order notification ends (the push order information is turned off), and when a payout role is won, the number of medals paid out is displayed when the third reel is stopped OFF. Such a configuration may be applied to the remaining payout number display unit 61.

Furthermore, these display units 60-62 may be used to notify the order in which buttons should be pressed. In the game panel 25, the credit display unit 60 is arranged on the left, the remaining payout number display unit 61 is arranged in the middle, and the payout number display unit 62 is arranged on the right (FIG. 1), and the order in which buttons should be pressed may be notified by associating them with each stop switch 42-44, such that when the left stop switch 42 is to be operated, the credit display unit 60 is displayed, when the middle stop switch 43 is to be operated, the remaining payout number display unit 61 is displayed, and when the right stop switch 44 is to be operated, the payout number display unit 62 is displayed. In this case, as described above, even if the push order notification is performed by the display units 60 to 62 from after the bet operation is performed until the third reel is stopped and turned on, the original display function is guaranteed for each of the display units 60 to 62. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the period from after the bet operation is performed until the third reel is stopped and turned on as the period during which the push order notification is performed by the display units 60 to 62, and to configure each display unit 60 to 62 to perform its original display during the other periods.

(96) The number of games continued during the favorable zone is managed by the favorable zone game number AG, etc., but it may be managed by the number of sets, for example, until a predetermined number of games is played (for example, 50 games) or until a predetermined ending condition is met (for example, until three consecutive replays are won). Specifically, the attack mode is set to a predetermined number of games (50 games) as one set, and the number of sets is determined by lottery when the attack mode starts or when the attack mode transition lottery is drawn. Then, the attack mode is ended when the determined number of sets is played. In this case, if a measurement condition is met during the attack mode, such as a specific role being won, a lottery for adding the number of sets may be drawn as an attack mode addition lottery, and if the lottery is won, the number of sets may be added according to the winning content.

In this configuration, in relation to the upper limit game number (1500 games) of the advantageous zone, for example, if a predetermined number of games (e.g., 50 games) is set as one set, or if a predetermined end condition is met (e.g., until three consecutive replay wins) or a specific number of games (e.g., 50 games) is consumed, the upper limit set number may be set as the number of sets (30 sets) obtained by dividing the upper limit game number by the predetermined number or specific number of games, and the advantageous zone may be forcibly terminated by consuming the upper limit set number. In this case, it is preferable to grasp the number of sets in the advantageous zone with a predetermined counter, and to forcibly terminate the zone when the counter reaches its upper limit (30). If the challenge mode or premonition mode is taken into account, the challenge mode or premonition mode is also taken into account in the number of sets (for example, the number of games is determined so that the total number of games in the premonition mode and the challenge mode is one set), when the counter reaches its upper limit, including these modes, the upper limit game number of the advantageous zone will be reached. In addition, in a configuration in which the number of games per set can vary (a set is defined as when a specific end condition is met or a specific number of games is played), the counter for the number of sets can reach its upper limit at a number of games that is less than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone.

In relation to the excess flag, it is advisable to configure the counter for the number of sets to set when the sum of the number of completed sets and the number of uncompleted sets reaches the upper limit for the number of sets.

(97) The push order notification may also be performed in the challenge mode or premonition mode. More specifically, when a specific game state is entered as an advantageous zone, including the attack mode, challenge mode, premonition mode, etc., the advantageous zone may not end until the push order notification is generated at least a predetermined number of times (once).

(98) As a result of the lottery during the favorable zone, the timing of the result of the add-on lottery is different between the immediate add-on effect and the later add-on effect depending on the setting value. However, the lottery that changes the timing of the lottery result depending on the setting value is not limited to the add-on lottery, and may be any other lottery as long as it is a lottery during the favorable zone. For example, the timing of the result of the add-on game number lottery may be different depending on the setting value. In this case, the timing of the notification of the immediate add-on/later add-on may be different depending on the setting value according to the number of add-on games, and the setting difference of the immediate add-on/later add-on ratio may be different. In addition, it is not limited to the lottery regarding the instruction function, and for example, the timing of the result of the BB lottery during the favorable zone may be different depending on the setting value. In this case, the number of premonition games when the BB is won may be different depending on the setting value. Furthermore, the timing of the notification of the winning result of a small role such as a cherry may be different depending on the setting value. In this case, it is preferable to configure the notification timing in the winning game to be different depending on the setting value.

(99) When a later-addition performance is performed, the first later-addition character BUP1 and the second later-addition character BUP2, etc. are configured to notify the winning result, but it is also possible to configure the display of these characters BUP1, BUP2, etc. not to be displayed. In this case, assuming that the later-addition performance includes a result notification (winning notification) and a content notification (number of winning games notification), the later-addition performance may be configured to notify the result at the same timing as or slightly earlier than the content notification of the later-addition performance, and it is also possible to configure the display not to notify the result in the game in which the later-addition lottery was performed.

In addition, in the post-addition performance, the first post-addition character BUP1 and the second post-addition character BUP2, etc. are displayed if the add-on lottery is won, but these characters BUP1, BUP2 may also be displayed if the add-on lottery is not won. In this case, the above characters BUP1, BUP2, etc. are characters that indicate that the add-on lottery has been held. If these characters BUP1, BUP2, etc. are displayed if the add-on lottery is not won, the result may be announced when the content is announced, for example by an announcement that the treasure chest is empty or that the number of add-on games is 0.

(100) As a lottery without a setting difference, the timing of the notification of the add-on lottery is different between the immediate add-on effect and the later add-on effect depending on the setting value, but as long as the lottery has no setting difference, it is not limited to the add-on lottery and may be another lottery. For example, it may be a lottery for the number of added games, and the timing of the notification of the result of the lottery for the number of added games may be different depending on the setting value, in which case the timing of the notification of the immediate add-on/later add-on may be different depending on the setting value according to the number of added games, and the setting difference of the immediate add-on/later add-on ratio may be different. In addition, it is not limited to the lottery regarding the instruction function, and for example, the timing of the notification of the result of the BB lottery during the normal zone or advantageous zone may be different depending on the setting value, and in this case, the number of premonition games at the time of the BB win may be different depending on the setting value. Furthermore, the timing of the notification of the winning result of a small role such as a cherry may be different depending on the setting value, and in this case, it is preferable to configure the timing of the notification in the winning game to be different depending on the setting value.

(101) The table counter ATK is incremented and the timing table for the added-on notification is switched based on the occurrence of consecutive immediate-add effects as added-on effects in the specialized zone. However, the timing table for the added-on notification may be switched based on the occurrence of consecutive later-add effects. In this case, the table counter ATK may be initialized (1) based on the occurrence of an immediate-add effect.

In addition, the continuity of the immediate-loading effects and the later-loading effects is not limited to only during the specialized zone, and the timing table for the additional loading notification may be switched when the immediate-loading effects or later-loading effects occur consecutively as additional loading effects during the attack mode.

In addition, the trigger for switching the timing table for the additional bonus notification is not limited to the continuity of the selected performance, and the timing table for the additional bonus notification may be switched when the same type of small win is added consecutively (for example, when cherry-triggered additional wins are added consecutively), and the table counter ATK may be initialized when other types of small wins are added consecutively.

(102) Although the configuration is such that the add-on notification timing table is switched by successive instant-add effects, it is also possible to simply switch the add-on notification timing table depending on the number of times the instant-add effects are selected, even if they are not consecutive. In this case, for example, the first add-on notification timing table is selected when the instant-add effect is selected 1 to 3 times (table counter ATK), the fourth add-on notification timing table is selected when the instant-add effect is selected 4 to 5 times (table counter ATK), and the first add-on notification timing table is selected when the instant-add effect is selected 6 times or more (table counter ATK). In this case, the difficulty of guessing the setting value based on the selected add-on notification timing table does not change uniformly depending on the number of times (the more times the difficulty increases, or the more times the difficulty decreases), but may not change uniformly.

(103) Although the configuration is such that the difficulty of guessing the setting value based on the selected timing of the added-on notification increases as the number of consecutive instant-on effects increases, the configuration may also be such that the difficulty of guessing the setting value based on the selected timing of the added-on notification increases as the number of consecutive instant-on effects increases.

(104) In a configuration for switching the timing table for additional notification, the initial value of the table counter ATK may be different depending on the trigger for transition to the specialized zone. Specifically, for example, if the trigger for transition to the specialized zone is a watermelon, the initial value of the table counter ATK may be set to 1, whereas if the trigger for transition to the specialized zone is a cherry, the initial value of the table counter ATK may be set to 3. In this way, the difficulty of guessing the set value can be varied based on the trigger for transition to the specialized zone.

(105) The specialized zone to which a player transitions when a cherry is triggered is a specialized zone that utilizes a special add-on notification timing table with a large difference in the immediate/later add-on ratio setting, but the specialized zone may be configured to transition when a watermelon is triggered, or when another specific role is triggered.

(106) The specialized zones that transition when triggered by cherries and the specialized zones that transition when triggered by other specific roles have different timing tables for notifying the player of additional bonuses. However, the number of specialized zones with different timing tables for notifying the player of additional bonuses is not limited to two, and may be three or more.

(107) In a game in which a set value is predicted based on the immediate/later-add ratio, a configuration may be adopted in which an additional effect may occur at a different timing from the immediate-add effect and the later-add effect. For example, a game in which a set value is predicted based on a selection rate that includes a premonition-via effect may be adopted.

(108) Information regarding the immediate/later add ratio is output at the end of the specialized zone or the end of the attack mode. However, if no add-on that is the subject of the ratio occurs during the specialized zone or the attack mode, i.e., if watermelon or cherry is not won, information regarding the immediate/later add ratio may not be output.

(109) Information regarding the notification timing, such as the immediate/later loading ratio, may be output by lottery. For example, an output lottery may be held with a predetermined probability at the end of the attack mode, and information regarding the notification timing may be output if the output lottery is won. The winning probability of the output lottery is arbitrary, but the winning probability may be varied depending on a set value, in which case the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability, or vice versa. Also, the winning probability may be varied depending on the number of games played in the attack mode (advantageous zone), in which case the more games played, the higher the winning probability, or vice versa.

(110) The output timing of information regarding notification timing, such as the immediate/later add ratio, is not limited to the end of the specialized zone or the end of the attack mode, and may be configured to be output at other times. For example, it may be configured to be output based on the number of games played in the advantageous zone reaching a predetermined number of games (e.g., 1,000 games) before the upper limit. Also, it may be configured to be output at the start or end of a bonus state won during the attack mode, or during the bonus state. Furthermore, it may be configured to be output when a specific role is won during the attack mode (e.g., a cherry win).

(111) In a configuration for outputting information regarding notification timing, such as the immediate/later add ratio, a configuration may be adopted in which information regarding a non-winning add-on lottery that was held even though the add-on lottery was held is also included in the output. In addition, when outputting information regarding the notification timing of an add-on performance triggered by a winning combination that causes a miss, such as a cherry, a configuration may be adopted in which information including the presence or absence of a miss is output.

(112) In a configuration for outputting information regarding the immediate/later-add ratio, it is also possible to output only the ratio, and not output information regarding the number of immediate-add effects or later-add effects. By doing so, it is possible to avoid, for example, suppressing a bad impression on players due to a small number of additional wins.

(113) In the notification mode selection display, the immediate-load display is selected when a reel that will cause a miss is selected, but the later-load display or the premonition display may be selected when a reel that will cause a miss is selected. In addition, the selection operation is associated with the timing of the selected additional notification in relation to the reel that will cause a miss and the reel that will not cause a miss, but it is also possible to set reels with different possibilities of misses and then associate the selection operation with the timing of the selected additional notification depending on the likelihood of the miss. More specifically, for example, the immediate-load display may be selected when a reel that will cause the most miss (a reel with the fewest winning symbols) is selected.

(114) In the notification mode selection performance, the timing of execution of the added performance is selected by stopping the first reel, but the timing of execution may be selected by stopping the second reel or the third reel. Also, a first specific symbol, a second specific symbol, and a third specific symbol that cannot be stopped at the same time may be provided on a specific reel, and the timing of execution may be selected depending on which specific symbol is stopped.

(115) Although the correction process is configured to change the data of each post-loading effect individually to an immediate-loading effect when a post-loading effect is selected, it may also be configured to be able to change each data to an immediate-loading effect uniformly. Also, it may be configured to be able to select whether or not to change to an immediate-loading effect depending on the type of trigger for adding data to be post-loaded. Also, it may be configured to be able to select whether or not to change to an immediate-loading effect depending on the number of games to be added.

(116) The correction process is configured to change data for which a later-loading effect has been selected to an immediate-loading effect, but it may also be configured to change the effect via a premonition, or it may be configured to change data for which a premonition-based effect has been selected to an immediate-loading effect or a later-loading effect.

(117) The configuration of the individual area to be stored when a post-loading effect or a premonition via effect is selected/determined is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit of the number of games that can be stored may be less or more than the above. In addition, the number of individual data items may be changed.

(118) With respect to individual areas that store added-on data, if a memory trigger (selection of a later-added effect, etc.) occurs that is greater than the number of individual areas provided, the current number of added games may be added to the data of one or more of the individual areas. When the number of added games is added to the data of multiple areas, the current number of added games may be added in equal installments or in weighted installments.

(119) When the later-addition performance is selected, the first later-addition character BUP1, the second later-addition character BUP2, etc. are displayed according to the trigger for winning the later-addition, but these later-addition characters are not limited to those mentioned above. For example, a different character may be displayed according to the number of games to be played.

(120) The configuration of varying the timing of execution of the additional performance is not limited to the performance when the additional performance lottery is won, but may also be applied when the additional performance lottery is not won.

(121) In a configuration in which the timing of execution of an additional effect is determined based on a selection operation by a player, the additional effect may be executed at an execution timing different from the execution timing selected by the player through the selection operation, depending on the relationship between the number of games to be added and the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone. More specifically, for example, in a situation where there are 50 games left until the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone (the number of games executed is 1,450 games), if an additional 100 games, which is more than 50 games, occurs, an additional effect is generated as a later addition effect, even if an immediate addition effect is selected. In this way, it becomes possible to understand that an additional effect greater than the upper limit number of games will occur and the advantageous zone will be forcibly ended, by having the additional effect executed at a timing different from the player's selection operation.

This configuration may also be used to suggest a setting value. More specifically, the configuration is such that an added effect occurs at a timing different from the execution timing of the player's selection operation with a predetermined probability. When the setting value is a first setting value (e.g. setting 1), the added effect is executed at a timing different from the selection operation with a first probability (e.g. 10%) as the predetermined probability, and when the setting value is a second setting value (e.g. setting 6) different from the first setting value, the added effect is executed at a timing different from the selection operation with a second probability (e.g. 80%) different from the first probability as the predetermined probability. In this way, a new gameplay feature can be realized, such as predicting the setting value, by having the added effect occur at an execution timing different from the player's own selection operation.

Furthermore, if an additional number of games occurs that is greater than the number of free games up to the upper limit of the advantageous zone, the additional effect may occur at a different execution timing than the above selection operation, and the probability of the additional effect occurring at the different execution timing may vary depending on the setting value. In this way, it is possible to obtain the advantage that it becomes possible to predict the setting value when an additional number of games occurs that exceeds the upper limit, and it is possible to ensure that the upper limit is not exceeded by the additional number of games.

(122) In a configuration in which multiple forced termination conditions such as the upper limit number of games and the upper limit number of increments are set as the forced termination conditions of the favorable zone, these forced termination conditions are not limited to the upper limit number of games and the upper limit number of increments, and may be other conditions or may be configured to include other conditions. As other conditions, for example, a forced termination condition may be when the number of wins of a predetermined result (which may be a bell, a replay, multiple types of payout results, multiple types of replays, etc.) during the favorable zone reaches the upper limit number or when the number of consecutive wins reaches the upper limit number, or when the number of miss results during the favorable zone reaches the upper limit number or when the number of consecutive wins reaches the upper limit number, or when the number of bonus wins during the favorable zone reaches the upper limit number or when the number of consecutive wins reaches the upper limit number, or when the time consumed after the transition to the favorable zone reaches a predetermined time, or when the number of occurrences of a predetermined performance during the favorable zone reaches the upper limit number or when the number of consecutive occurrences reaches the upper limit number, may be a forced termination condition.

In these cases, it is advisable to make it possible to predict in advance from the current game content (number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG) whether the above-mentioned forced termination condition will be met, and to execute a specific process based on the prediction result to present information that may be beneficial to the player, such as setting value suggestions, or to grant bonuses, etc.

(123) In a configuration in which multiple forced termination conditions, such as the upper limit game number and the upper limit increase number, are set, if it is determined in advance that each forced termination condition will be satisfied, a first excess flag and a second excess flag are set, and if the additional condition is satisfied thereafter, the additional game number is added to the total number of games lost TEG. However, a counter that stores the excess amount for each forced termination condition may be provided and each may be stored separately. For example, if the first excess flag is set, the subsequent additional game number may be added to the first total number of games lost TEG1 provided in the various counter areas 106e, and if the second excess flag is set, the subsequent additional game number may be added to the second total number of games lost TEG2 provided in the various counter areas 106e. In this case, if both the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, the number of additional games may be added to the first total number of games TEG1 corresponding to the first excess flag out of the first total number of games TEG1 and the second total number of games TEG2. This simplifies the correction process when the situation in which the second excess flag was set is subsequently resolved.

(124) The values and relationship between the upper limit number of games and the upper limit number of increases are not limited to those described above, and the upper limit number of games may be less than or more than 1500 games, and the upper limit number of increases may be less than or more than 2400 coins. However, in a gameplay in which the aim is to increase the upper limit number of increases in an advantageous zone, it is preferable that the net increase in the advantageous zone is specified so that the upper limit number of increases is reached when the advantageous zone of the upper limit number of games is exhausted, and more specifically, it is preferable that the net increase is specified so that the upper limit number of increases is reached in a number of games less than the upper limit number of games.

(125) In the advantageous zone, the attack mode, etc., is configured to manage whether to continue based on the number of remaining games, but it may be configured to manage whether to continue based on the number of payouts. More specifically, for example, in the above configuration, 50 games are set as the initial games when switching to the attack mode, and the attack mode ends when the 50 games are played. However, for example, the initial payout number may be set to 100 coins when switching to the attack mode, and the attack mode may end when the 100 coins or more are paid out. In this case, if an additional bonus occurs, it is preferable to configure the payout number to be added instead of the number of games. Also, instead of the number of coins paid out, the increase or decrease may be specified by subtracting the number of coins used from the number of coins paid out.

(126) When calculating the advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM, the calculation is performed by subtracting the number of gaming media used in each game from the number of gaming media paid out in each game. However, the calculation may include games during the advantageous zone that are reflected in the calculation and games that are not reflected. For example, when a replay is won, the subtraction is zero, so the advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM may not be calculated. By doing this, it is possible to expect a significant reduction in processing load compared to a configuration in which calculation is performed every game. In particular, since the calculation is mainly performed in a high RT state where the probability of winning a replay is high, the reduction effect can be significant.

In addition, during the favorable zone, the payout number and the number of coins used for a specified number of bets may not be reflected. For example, the payout number and the number of coins used in games played in 3 bet mode may be reflected, but the payout number and the number of coins used in games played in 2 bet mode or 1 bet mode may not be reflected. In this case, for example, in a CB state where 2 bet mode is the specified number, the calculation of the favorable zone increase/decrease number ZM may be reflected as a game resulting from a CB win in 3 bet mode. Also, for example, when a bonus win flag is set, the payout number and the number of coins used may be reflected regardless of the number of bets. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult to play a number of games that actually exceeds the upper limit by continuing the carryover state in which the bonus win flag is set.

(127) The type of special notification (content of the setting value suggestion) and the occurrence rate of the special notification are different between the case where the first exceedance flag is set, which indicates that the upper limit number of games has been exceeded, and the case where the second exceedance flag is set, which indicates that the upper limit increase number has been exceeded, thereby differentiating the degree of advantage for the player. However, the configuration for differentiating the degree of advantage is not limited to this, and the contents may be different for each, such as one suggesting a setting value and the other displaying a rare image. Furthermore, the degree of advantage is not limited to that of the above embodiment or modified example, and may be reversed, or the degree of advantage may be the same or approximately the same, or the same special notification (setting value suggestion) may be generated.

In addition to the excess flag that is set, the type of special notification that is generated (contents of the setting value suggestion) and the occurrence rate of the special notification are varied depending on the total number of games lost TEG, thereby varying the degree of advantage for the player. However, the degree of advantage and the type and content of the special notification that reflect the value of the total number of games lost TEG are not limited to those in the above embodiment and modified example, and may be configured to reflect something different. For example, the smaller the total number of games lost TEG (the less added after it is determined that the upper limit has been reached), the more advantageous the special notification that is generated for the player may be.

(128) The degree of advantage for the player is varied by varying the type of special notification (content of setting value suggestion) and the occurrence rate of the special notification depending on whether the determination of exceeding the upper limit game count or the determination of exceeding the upper limit increase number is performed first, but the configuration for varying the degree of advantage is not limited to this, and each may have different contents, such as one suggesting a setting value and the other displaying a rare image. Furthermore, the degree of advantage is not limited to that of the above embodiment and modified example, and may be reversed, the degree of advantage may be the same or approximately the same, or the same special notification (setting value suggestion) may be generated.

(129) The net increase in number of coins for each state is not limited to the above. For example, the net increase in number of coins when the attack mode is consumed in a high RT state (approximately +1.90 coins in the seventh embodiment) is not limited to that of the above embodiment or modified example, and may be less than or more than two coins per game. For example, the net increase in number of coins per game may be set to 3 coins, 5 coins, 10 coins, or 14 coins.

(130) Although the configuration is such that no selection is made for transition to attack mode or additional selection based on winning roles whose winning probability differs depending on the set value (for example, overlap with 2nd BB, strong cherry overlap 2, weak cherry overlap 2, etc.), it may be configured to do so. In this case, the configuration may be such that selection is made for transition to attack mode or additional selection even in a bonus state based on a winning role whose winning probability differs depending on the set value (for example, 2nd BB state based on strong cherry overlap 2).

(131) When it is determined in advance that multiple forced termination conditions, such as the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number, will be met, the type of special notification that is generated may be varied depending on the advantageous zone game number AG when the determination is made, thereby varying the degree of advantage for the player. For example, the degree of advantage or type of special notification that is generated may be different depending on whether the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number will be reached before a predetermined number of games (1000 games) or later, and a special notification that is advantageous to the player may be generated if it is before the predetermined number of games.

(132) Multiple forced termination conditions, such as the upper limit number of games and the upper limit increase number, are set, and if any of the forced termination conditions is met, the advantageous zone is forced to terminate even if the other forced termination condition is not met. However, it is also possible to wait for both forced termination conditions to be met before forcing termination.

(133) Depending on the game situation after the upper limit increase number is determined to be reached, if the upper limit increase number is not reached, the second excess flag may be cleared in the remaining number management process. In this case, the information that the upper limit increase number has been determined to be reached may be temporarily stored, and the process may be different between a situation where the upper limit increase number has not been determined to be reached and a situation where the upper limit increase number has been determined, for example, the degree of advantage or type of special notification when the upper limit increase number is subsequently reached may be different. Also, when the advantageous period ends without being forcibly terminated (without reaching the upper limit increase number), a setting value suggestion may be made if the information that the above-mentioned determination has been made is temporarily stored, but if the above-mentioned determination has not been made, no setting value suggestion may be made, or vice versa.

(134) The explanation of the upper limit increase number has been given on the assumption that the upper limit increase number may not be reached depending on the game situation after it has been specified that the upper limit increase number will be reached. However, the upper limit game number may also be configured to not be reached depending on the game situation after it has been specified that the upper limit game number will be reached. For example, if a subtraction process of the remaining game number ZG is performed depending on the game results during the advantageous zone, even if it has been specified that the upper limit game number will be reached, an event may occur in which the upper limit game number is not reached depending on the winning situation of the game result in which the subtraction process is performed. In this case, each invention in the case where the upper limit increase number is not reached depending on the game situation after it has been specified that the upper limit increase number will be reached may be applied to the case where the upper limit game number is not reached depending on the game situation after it has been specified that the upper limit game number will be reached.

(135) After a notification that the second excess flag has been set, if the advantageous period ends without reaching the upper limit increase number, the situation is more advantageous than if this were not the case. However, a configuration in which such a notification is made is also possible in which the situation is less advantageous than if no notification is made.

(136) In the case where the game is forcibly terminated due to reaching the upper limit increase number before the remaining number of games in the advantageous zone is consumed, the amount of the notification is compensated for by a special notification, but it may be configured not to compensate, or conversely, a special notification may be generated in which it is advantageous to have no notification. The number of remaining games that is notified varies greatly depending on whether the additional notification is an immediate addition notification or a later addition notification, and a case in which there are many notification amounts is a case in which many immediate addition notifications are selected, and a case in which there are few notification amounts is a case in which many later addition notifications are selected. In that case, at least a case in which there are many notification amounts is considered to be a case in which many effects have been performed (flashy effects have been performed), and the amount of effects generated and the degree of liveliness may be deducted from the advantageous degree of the special notification (if many effects have been generated, it may be assumed that the player has enjoyed the game sufficiently, and compensation is not performed or the amount of compensation is reduced accordingly).

(137) In the case where the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated due to reaching the upper limit number of games, when the sixth special notification based on the excess is executed, if the second excess flag is set, even if the sixth special notification lottery result is not a win, it is treated as a win, which is advantageous for the player. However, for example, advantageous processing may be performed by using the sixth special notification A lottery table instead of the sixth special notification B lottery table. Also, if the second excess flag is set but the fifth special notification is executed, the advantage is not increased too much by not treating a non-win as a win. However, for example, processing for the sixth special notification may be performed by using a lottery table in which it is more difficult to narrow down the setting value than the sixth special notification B lottery table. Furthermore, the sixth special notification may be set not only based on whether or not the fifth special notification has been executed, but also based on the number of times and the manner in which the fifth special notification has been executed. For example, if the fifth special notification has been executed a predetermined number of times or more, the sixth special notification may not be executed, and if the number of times is less than the predetermined number, the sixth special notification may be executed.

(138) In a configuration in which multiple forced termination conditions, such as the upper limit number of games and the upper limit increase number, are set, the degree of advantage is varied by, for example, varying the content of the special notification depending on which forced termination condition is used to terminate, and the difference in the number of coins up to the upper limit increase number is taken into account when the game is forced to terminate at the upper limit number of games, and the number of games up to the upper limit number is taken into account when the game is forced to terminate at the upper limit increase number. However, for example, the number of games up to the upper limit number of games is taken into account when the game is forced to terminate at the upper limit increase number, but the difference in coins up to the upper limit increase number is not taken into account when the game is forced to terminate at the upper limit number of games, or vice versa, and so on. In other words, the situation up until the establishment of one forced termination condition may be taken into account only when the other forced termination condition is met.

(139) When the game is forcibly terminated at the upper limit of the number of games, the special section continues to display the remaining number of payouts, taking into account the difference in the number of coins up to the upper limit of the increase, but if the remaining increase is not displayed during the advantageous section (at least at the time of the forced termination), the payout number does not need to be displayed in the special section. When the game is forcibly terminated at the upper limit of the number of games, the special section continues to display the remaining number of games, taking into account the number of games up to the upper limit of the number of games, but if the remaining number of games is not displayed during the advantageous section (at least at the time of the forced termination), the payout number does not need to be displayed in the special section. Also, whether or not the display continues may differ depending on whether or not the number was displayed at the time of the forced termination.

(140) When the game is forcibly terminated at the upper limit of the number of games, the continuity of the special section is managed by the difference in the number of coins up to the upper limit of the increase, and the remaining number of payouts is displayed. However, the continuity of the special section may be managed by the remaining increase, and the remaining increase may be displayed. In this case, the special section is more likely to continue until the game transitions to a state where an increase in gaming media is expected.

(141) The number of games to be prepared for elimination EJG and the total number of games to be eliminated TEG are managed separately in the counter area 209 corresponding to the advantageous zone and the counter area 210 corresponding to the normal zone, respectively, but both may be managed in the counter area 209 corresponding to the advantageous zone, or in the counter area 210 corresponding to the normal zone, or in other areas. The information on the excess may be used only for special notifications, etc., and not erased at the time of forced termination, or may be erased after transition to the normal zone, or may be maintained in the normal zone until transition to the next advantageous zone (erased when transitioning to the next advantageous zone), or may be maintained (erased based on the specified reset process) until a specified reset process (reset button operation, RAM clear operation, power ON/OFF, etc.) is performed.

(142) The number of games in the number of games prepared for elimination EJG is moved to the total number of games to be eliminated TEG when the first excess flag is set, but it is sufficient that the number of games is moved to the total number of games to be eliminated TEG at least before the forced termination. In the case of a configuration in which the number of games is moved at the time of the forced termination, it is preferable that special notifications during the advantageous zone are made based on the number of games prepared for elimination EJG, and special notifications at the time of the forced termination and thereafter are made based on the total number of games to be eliminated TEG.

(143) The number of games in the number of games prepared for elimination EJG is moved to the total number of games prepared for elimination TEG when the first excess flag is set, but it may be managed separately without being moved. In this case, it is possible to manage the excess amount when only the second excess flag is set as the number of games prepared for elimination EJG, and to manage the excess amount when the first excess flag is set (when only the first excess flag is set and when the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set) as the total number of games prepared for elimination TEG. Furthermore, it is possible to grasp the difference in the number of excess games that occurs after the second excess flag is set and before the first excess flag is set as the number of games prepared for elimination EJG.

(144) The excess information stored in the total number of games to be eliminated TEG via the number of games to be eliminated EJG and the excess information stored in the total number of games to be eliminated TEG without via the number of games to be eliminated EJG may be managed separately (for example, in separate counters or separate memory areas). Even if they are managed using the same counter (total number of games to be eliminated TEG), it is sufficient that a boundary value between the amount that has been eliminated and the amount that has not been eliminated is stored, so that at least when processing for special notifications based on the total number of games to be eliminated TEG is performed, it is possible to determine whether or not the amount has been eliminated via the number of games to be eliminated EJG.

(145) The special notification may be more advantageous when the game is forcibly terminated at the upper limit increase number when there is a large number of games remaining that have been notified, or the special notification may be more advantageous when the number of games remaining that have been notified at the time of the forcible termination is fewer, or the special notification may be more advantageous when the number of games remaining that have been notified at the time of the forcible termination is a nice round number. However, it is sufficient that some processing is performed when the game is forcibly terminated at the upper limit increase number when there is a number of games remaining that have been notified, and the game may be forcibly terminated at the upper limit increase number or the upper limit number of games when there is no number of games remaining that have been notified, which is more advantageous.

(146) In a configuration in which the more the number of remaining games that have been notified is and the game is forcibly terminated at the upper limit increase number, the fewer the number of remaining games that have been notified at the time of the forcible termination is, the more advantageous the special notification is, or the more advantageous the more round the number of remaining games that have been notified at the time of the forcible termination is, the advantageous number of remaining games may be indicated clearly on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., or the number of remaining games may be indicated clearly and the display of the number of remaining games may be updated as each game is played toward the indicated number of games (for example, updated by counting down).

(147) In a configuration in which the more the number of remaining games that have been notified is left and the game is forcibly terminated at the upper limit increase number, the more advantageous the special notification is, the fewer the number of remaining games that have been notified at the time of the forcible termination is, or the more advantageous the special notification is, the more round the number of remaining games that has been notified at the time of the forcible termination is, the special notification processing may be performed using the number of remaining games at the time when a specific condition is met that determines that the upper limit increase number will be reached before the upper limit increase number is reached, such as a transition to a bonus state.

(148) In the configuration for performing the first adjustment process to the third adjustment process, the configuration for predicting the subsequent increase or decrease based on the maximum increase or decrease in number of coins MM can be used for other processes. For example, if the total expected increase or decrease in number of coins SM is predicted based on the maximum increase or decrease in number of coins MM in the remaining number management process, it is preferable to configure the remaining expected increase or decrease in number of coins NM to be calculated from the number of games remaining in the favorable zone ZG and the maximum increase or decrease in number of coins MM.

(149) The second adjustment process is configured to be started each time the second process for displaying the interval is performed, but it may also be configured to be started when a correction condition is met. Examples of the correction condition include when the deviation from the maximum expected total increase/decrease coin number SMM predicted in the first adjustment process exceeds a predetermined value, or when the game state (RT state) transitions to another state, etc.

(150) When a bonus is won at the end of the favorable period, if it is determined that the upper limit number of games will be reached after the end of the bonus while in a state of returning to the high RT state, the number of games from the end of the bonus until the upper limit number of games is reached is added to the premonition game number, but it may also be configured to add the average number of games in the return state to the premonition game number. In this case, it is also possible to omit the process of calculating the number of games until the upper limit number of games is reached.

(151) When a bonus is won at the end of the advantageous zone, if it is determined that the upper limit number of games will be reached after the end of the bonus and during the return to the high RT state, instead of or in addition to adding the number of games from the end of the bonus to the upper limit number of games to the premonition game number, a special notification such as a setting value suggestion may be generated to follow up on the tapering and forced termination. Also, in this case, the advantageous zone may be forced to terminate without waiting for the upper limit number of games to be reached (specifically, a forced termination based on the end of the bonus). Furthermore, if the upper limit number of games is reached during the return state, the advantageous zone may be extended until the return to the high RT state.

(152) The challenge mode can be extended based on winning a duplicate target role that triggers a bonus lottery at the end of the challenge mode, but the mode that can be extended is not limited to the challenge mode, and may be another mode in a favorable period, such as the attack mode or the VB mode.

(153) When extending an attack mode or a VB mode based on winning a duplicate target role at the end of that mode, the extension process may be performed by taking into account not only the number of continuations of the premonition mode and consecutive performances, but also the average number of games until the transition to the RT state and the actual transition. In other words, for example, if the actual transition to the RT state is taken into account, the games until the win of the fall replay (the games before the win of the fall replay) may be subject to the extension process.

(154) The extension process of the challenge mode has been described on the assumption that a premonition mode is set and a continuous performance is ultimately generated based on the winning of a duplicate target role, but it can also be applied to a configuration in which the premonition mode ends without a continuous performance being generated in the premonition mode.

(155) When a duplicate target role is won at the end of the challenge mode, the challenge mode is extended on the assumption that the premonition mode is set. However, the extension process may be performed when a duplicate target role is won even if the premonition mode is not set.

(156) The challenge mode can be extended based on winning a duplicate target role at the end of the challenge mode, but it may be configured to extend only the display continuation game of the interval display without extending the challenge mode.

(157) When a duplicate target role is won at the end of the challenge mode, a configuration for extending the second challenge mode, which is less favorable than the previous mode, may be applied to the case of extending the attack mode, VB mode, etc. In this case, for example, the attack mode, etc. in which the push order notification is likely to occur during normal times may be called the first attack mode, etc., and the portion extended by the extension process may be called the second attack mode, in which the probability of the push order notification occurring is lower than that of the first attack mode. Instead of or in addition to a configuration that lowers the degree of favorability depending on the probability of the push order notification occurring, the degree of favorability of the target role to be notified when the push order notification occurs may be made different (for example, in the first attack mode, the push order corresponding to the first result resulting in a first number of payouts is notified, and in the second attack mode, the push order corresponding to the second result resulting in a second number of payouts less than the first number is notified).

(158) The advantageous zone is configured to be initialized by a forced termination in the second zone display process, as well as by a RAM clear process (reset process) performed by the manager of the gaming hall, etc., but other initialization processes may also be performed. For example, the initialization process may be performed when a predetermined role (forced termination role) is won during the advantageous zone, or when the predetermined role is won, or the initialization process may be performed when the game is forced to terminate.

(159) In a configuration in which the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator is performed after the start condition following the transition to the favorable zone is met, the start condition is not limited to the above, and it is sufficient that at least the first start condition of a situation in which a push order notification can occur and the second start condition of a situation in which an increase in gaming media can be expected are met, and the start condition may be met when the first start condition and the second start condition are met simultaneously (in the same game).

In addition, if a bonus and attack mode are simultaneously won, the start condition may be met when the bonus is won (when attack mode is won) in addition to when the bonus is won, or when the bonus ends (when the attack mode win is announced), or when a transition to attack mode occurs after the bonus ends.

(160) The display of the number of games in the preliminary section (display based on the pre-start game count MG) is not limited to the above, and for example, instead of or in addition to the above configuration, a configuration in which the background color changes depending on the value of the pre-start game count MG (for example, 0-99 is a blue background, 100-199 is a yellow background, 200 and over is a red background, etc.) may be used.

(161) In the above explanation, it is assumed that the number of medals held in each game may decrease during the preliminary period, but the preliminary period may also include a period during which the number of medals held increases. For example, if a bonus is won during the preliminary period, but the attack mode is not won (if the situation does not allow the push order notification to occur), the start condition is not met, but an increase in the number of medals held during the preliminary period is expected.

(162) The ball output rate is configured to change depending on each setting value, with setting 1 having the lowest ball output rate and setting 6 having the highest ball output rate, but any other configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of ball output (game media) changes depending on the setting value. For example, the ball output rates of some setting values may be the same, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball output rate, and the ball output rates of other setting values may be different. Also, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high rate of increase or decrease in ball output, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low rate of increase or decrease in ball output. Also, settings 1 and 5 may increase the ball output by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the ball output by a predetermined amount in a long time, settings 2, 3, and 4 take a longer time to increase the predetermined amount than settings 1 and 5 and take a shorter time to decrease the predetermined amount than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may hardly increase or decrease the ball output. In these cases, the ball output rate of each setting value may be the same.

(163) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the present invention is not limited to this configuration and may be, for example, a slot machine having five reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel. From the viewpoint of preventing erroneous operations when stopping the reels, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, although a slot machine in which the number of active lines is set to one when the number of bets is three has been described, the present invention is not limited to this configuration and may be, for example, five active lines.

(164) Although a specific example of a slot machine 10 has been shown, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine. In other words, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions of a slot machine, the present invention may be a gaming machine that has a ball insertion and ball payout function like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel gaming machine). If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only balls as gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as gaming value, and restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

For example, in a pachinko machine or a reel-type game machine using balls, the setting values that change the payout rate and the like may be configured to have multiple stages, and the above-mentioned inventions may be applied as suggestions or instructional effects for these setting values. In this case, in a pachinko machine that has a high probability state and a low probability state where the probability of a jackpot is high and low, the advantageous zone in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high probability state, and in a pachinko machine that has a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state where the rate of balls entering a predetermined ball entry section is high and low, the advantageous zone in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high ball entry state, and the above-mentioned inventions may be applied.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, while indicating effects, etc., as necessary. Note that in the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-mentioned embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but are not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses, etc.

The inventions shown in the following feature groups have been made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

<Characteristics AA Group>
Feature AA1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that is executed based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result and that executes a lottery for transition to the specific game state;
a specific game state notification means (a function of executing a first section display process to a fourth section display process by the main control device 101) which starts notification by turning on a specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) when the game state transitions to the specific game state, and ends notification by turning off the specific notification means when the specific game state ends;
Equipped with
The specific game state notifying means includes:
A first means for starting or ending a notification by the specific notification means in a predetermined first mode (for example, a function for executing a process for starting the display of a section indicator when a first stop OFF operation is performed in the main control device 101);
A second means for starting or ending the notification by the specific notification means in a second mode different from the first mode (for example, a function for executing a process for starting the display of the section indicator when a third stop OFF operation is performed in the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is held by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the stop operation mode of the stop operation means that stops the rotating body is set to result in a first result win or a second result win, and a mode notification may be issued regarding these stop operation modes, creating a gameplay that changes whether or not a win occurs depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification, thereby varying the degree of advantage.

In this case, when the game transitions to a specific game state where a mode notification is more likely to be made, notification by the specific notification means begins, and when the specific game state ends, notification by the specific notification means also ends. In other words, by checking whether or not a notification has been made by the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game is in a specific game state, and this can eliminate the sense of inequality between, for example, a player who has transitioned to a specific game state but quits playing without realizing it, and a player who sits down at the same gaming machine after the previous player has finished playing. This makes it possible for all players to enjoy playing with mode notifications to the fullest on an equal basis.

Moreover, in this gaming machine, the start and end of the notification by the specific notification means may be performed in the first mode or in the second mode. In this way, it is possible to fully expect the presentation effect in the game by using the specific notification means, such as simply starting the notification when the specific game state is transitioned to and ending the notification when the specific game state is ended. In addition, by using the above configuration, for example, it is possible to give information such as the content of the game and the content of the specific game state to a player who has played a game in which the notification by the specific notification means is ended by winning the lottery for transition to the specific game state and starting the notification by the specific notification means, by the start/end mode of the notification by the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to ensure equality between players depending on the presence or absence of a notification by the specific notification means, while also ensuring an advantage over a player who has played a game that triggers the notification. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

The "specific game state notification means" is configured to "start notification by turning on the specific notification means when the game state transitions to the specific game state, and end notification by turning off the specific notification means when the specific game state ends," but it may simply be configured to "start notification by the specific notification means when the game state transitions to the specific game state, and end notification by the specific notification means when the specific game state ends." This also applies to the "specific game state notification means" in the other features described below.

Feature AA2. The gaming machine described in Feature AA1, characterized in that the specific game state notification means is capable of differentiating between when the first means starts or ends notification by the specific notification means and when the second means starts or ends notification by the specific notification means, depending on the degree of advantage of the specific game state.

According to the above configuration, the start and end of the notification by the specific notification means will differ depending on the advantageous degree of the specific game state, whether it is performed in the first mode or the second mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase interest in the specific notification means when the notification by the specific notification means starts/ends.

Feature AA3. The specific game state has a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, premonition mode, etc.) with different advantageous degrees for the player,
The specific game state notifying means includes:
When the specific game state is a first predetermined state, the first means starts or ends the notification by the specific notification means;
A gaming machine described in feature AA1 or feature AA2, characterized in that when the specific game state is a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state, the second means starts or ends notification by the specific notification means.

According to the above configuration, the degree of advantage of the specific game state differs between the first and second modes depending on the type of specific game state. Since it is important to know what state to transition to in terms of playability due to the stop operation mode and mode notification of the first and second results, by doing as described above, it is possible to preferably increase interest in the start of the notification by the specific notification means. Furthermore, when the notification ends, if the notification by the specific notification means ends in a mode associated with information on which state it is, it is possible to enjoy the afterglow of these states through the end mode of the notification by the specific notification means.

Feature AA4: The specific game state has a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, premonition mode, etc.) with different advantageous degrees for the player,
The specific game state notifying means includes:
When the specific game state is the first predetermined state, the first means starts a notification by the specific notification means;
A gaming machine described in feature AA3, characterized in that when the specific game state is the second predetermined state, the second means starts an alert by the specific alert means.

The above configuration allows the effect of feature AA3 at the start of notification to be optimally achieved.

Feature AA5. The gaming machine according to any one of Features AA1 to AA4, characterized in that the specific game state notification means notifies the user of the specific game state in the same manner when the notification is started or ended by the first means and when the notification is started or ended by the second means.

According to the above configuration, the notification mode is the same during the specific game state, so the notification from the specific notification means can fulfill the function of ensuring equality between players, and by consolidating the points where the notification mode of the specific notification means is different at the start and end, it becomes easier to understand the timing to pay attention to, and it is also possible to appropriately increase the attention to the specific notification means.

Feature AA6. The gaming machine described in any one of Features AA1 to AA5, characterized in that the specific game state notification means includes a start time setting means (a function of executing a first section display process by the main control device 101) that sets whether the notification by the specific notification means will start in the first mode or the second mode depending on the content of the specific game state when the notification by the specific notification means will start.

According to the above configuration, the content of the specific game state differs depending on whether the notification is started in the first mode or the second mode. This increases interest in which mode it is, and thus makes it possible to effectively increase the level of attention.

The above phrase "depending on the content of the specific game state" may be expressed using the specific type of state in the specific game state, for example, "the specific game state has a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, premonition mode, etc.) with different degrees of advantage for the player, and depending on whether the specific game state is a first predetermined state or a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state." Also, it may be associated with the number of games to be played, for example, "depending on the length of the specific game state."

Feature AA7. The gaming machine described in any one of Features AA1 to AA6, characterized in that the specific game state notification means includes a start time setting means (a function of executing a first section display process by the main control device 101) that sets whether the notification by the specific notification means will start in the first mode or the second mode depending on the degree of advantage of the specific game state when the notification by the specific notification means is started.

According to the above configuration, the degree of advantage of a particular game state differs depending on whether the notification is started in the first mode or the second mode. This increases interest in which mode it is, and thus makes it possible to effectively increase the level of attention.

Furthermore, when this configuration is applied to the above feature AA6, the "start-time setting means" of feature AA6 may be read as the "start-time setting means" of this configuration, or the "start-time setting means" of feature AA6 may be read as the "first start-time setting means" and the "start-time setting means" of this configuration as the "second start-time setting means." In other words, when "start-time setting means" overlap when applying each feature, one "start-time setting means" may be limited by the configuration of the other "start-time setting means," or both "start-time setting means" may coexist. The same limiting or overlapping relationships of each means apply to the following features.

Feature AA8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features AA1 to AA7, characterized in that when the notification of the specific notification means is started or ended by the first means, the notification is started or ended at a first timing as the first mode, and when the notification of the specific notification means is started or ended by the second means, the notification is started or ended at a second timing different from the first timing as the second mode.

In addition to differences in timing, the modes for starting/ending the notification by the specific notification means can also include differences in the display content (different colors, different images, etc.) and differences in sound, and in the above configuration, the first and second modes have different timings for starting/ending the notification by the specific notification means. This makes it possible to make other differences (differences in display content, sound, etc.) the same, and the first and second means can share performance data for the start/end of the notification by the specific notification means. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects of each of the above features with a simple configuration.

Feature AA9. The gaming machine described in Feature AA8, in which the second timing is later than the first timing, and the specific game state that is the subject of notification by the specific notification means is more likely to be advantageous to the player when the notification by the specific notification means starts at the second timing than when the notification by the specific notification means starts at the first timing.

According to the above configuration, if a later notification start timing is more advantageous for the player, the later the notification start timing, the better, and the player can enjoy the excitement of whether or not the notification will start for a longer period of time.

Feature AA10. A game in which, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specific result and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won, a specific symbol combination corresponding to the specific result stops at the valid position, and a benefit corresponding to the specific result can be awarded by the benefit awarding means is set as the starting game;
the specific game state notifying means starts notifying by the specific notifying means at least at a timing before an operation of a game subsequent to the starting game is permitted;
A gaming machine described in feature AA9, characterized in that the first timing and the second timing are included in the start game.

According to the above configuration, the timing at which the specific notification means starts to notify is more limited, so that the presentation is less likely to drag on in the game, such as whether the notification will be made or not. In addition, by setting an end date for the timing at which the specific notification means starts to notify, the points to pay attention to are concentrated on whether the specific notification means will not notify (whether the transition lottery has been won or not), which contributes to increasing attention, and if the later timing is more advantageous for the player, as in feature AA9, it is possible to realize gameplay in which the player can choose between feeling relieved that the notification starts at the earlier timing, or feeling excited that the notification does not start until the later timing.

Feature AA11. The first means starts or ends the notification by the specific notification means based on the operation of a first stop operation means among the plurality of stop operation means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features AA1 to AA10, characterized in that the second means starts or ends notification by the specific notification means based on the operation of a second stop operation means among the multiple stop operation means, which is operated after the first stop operation means.

According to the above configuration, notifications by the specific notification means start or end in accordance with the operation of the multiple stop operation means. In this way, it is possible to operate the stop operation means with the hope that notifications by the specific notification means will start or will not end, that is, that a specific game state will be entered or will continue. This makes the operation of the stop operation means more interesting as each game progresses.

If the above configuration is applied to feature AA6, the following effects are particularly achieved.

Since the content of the specific game state to be notified by the specific notification means may differ depending on the order of the stop operation means operated, in a game in which notification by the specific notification means may be started, each stop operation means can be operated while gradually changing the degree of expectation. In addition, based on the operation of each stop operation means, the corresponding rotating body stops, and when all the rotating bodies stop, the picture combination corresponding to the game result stops, so that the operation of the rear stop operation means is more likely to bring the picture combination corresponding to the game result closer to completion. In this way, it is possible to link the degree of completion of the picture combination corresponding to the game result at the timing when the notification by the specific notification means starts with the content of the specific game state to be notified by the specific notification means. Therefore, with the above configuration, it is possible to make a notification by the specific notification means utilizing the relationship with the pictures stopped on each rotating body, and it is possible to suitably increase the attention to the notification.

In addition, if the above configuration is applied to feature AA7, the following effects are particularly achieved.

Since the degree of advantage of the specific game state that is the target of notification by the specific notification means may differ depending on the order of the stop operation means operated, in a game in which notification by the specific notification means may be started, each stop operation means can be operated while gradually changing the degree of expectation. In addition, based on the operation of each stop operation means, the corresponding rotating body stops, and when all the rotating bodies stop, the picture combination corresponding to the game result stops, so that the operation of the rear stop operation means is more likely to bring the picture combination corresponding to the game result closer to completion. In this way, it is possible to link the degree of completion of the picture combination corresponding to the game result at the timing when the notification by the specific notification means starts with the degree of advantage of the specific game state that is the target of notification by the specific notification means. Therefore, with the above configuration, notification by the specific notification means can be made by utilizing the relationship with the pictures that stop on each rotating body, and it is possible to appropriately increase the attention to the notification.

Feature AA12. The stop operation means is displaceable from an initial position to an operation position,
the drive control means drives and controls the corresponding rotating body to stop based on the operation of the stop operation means from the initial position to the operation position,
A gaming machine described in any one of features AA1 to AA11, characterized in that it is equipped with a start time setting means (a function of executing a first interval display process by the main control unit 101) that sets whether to start the notification by the specific notification means based on the specific stop operation means being operated from the initial position to the operation position as the first mode, or to start the notification by the specific notification means based on the specific stop operation means returning from the operation position to the initial position as the second mode, depending on the advantageous degree of the specific game state when the notification by the specific notification means is started.

According to the above configuration, there are cases where the specific notification means starts to notify based on the stop operation means being operated from the initial position to the operation position to stop the revolving body, and cases where the specific notification means starts to notify based on the stop operation means being operated to the operation position (after the revolving body has stopped) and then returning to the initial position, and the degree of advantage of the specific game state that is the target of notification by the specific notification means differs in each case. In this way, it becomes possible to start a notification by the specific notification means in relation to the act of stopping each revolving body and the lingering feeling after stopping it, and attention to the start of the notification by the specific notification means is more appropriately increased.

Feature AA13. The gaming machine described in any one of Features AA1 to AA12, characterized in that the specific game state notification means includes an end time setting means (a function of executing a process to end the advantageous zone display in the zone display first process by the main control device 101) that sets whether the notification by the specific notification means will end in the first mode or the second mode depending on the content of the specific game state that was the subject of notification when the notification by the specific notification means is to be ended.

According to the above configuration, depending on the content of the specific game state that has been implemented, the notification is terminated in either the first mode or the second mode. In this way, it is possible to expect a special effect at the end of the game by, for example, differentiating the notification termination mode by the specific notification means between cases where the content of the specific game state would not have been what the player wanted (such as when it ended after a short number of games) and cases where the content of the specific game state would have been what the player wanted (such as when it continued for a long number of games).

Feature AA14. The display control device 81 includes a content notification means (a function for executing an additional notification effect in the display control device 81) for executing a content notification (an additional notification effect) regarding the specific game state being executed during the specific game state;
The content notification by the content notification means is more likely to be advantageous to the player the longer the period from when the execution trigger for the notification occurs until the notification is made,
A gaming machine described in any one of features AA1 to AA13, characterized in that the more advantageous the content of the specific game state being notified by the specific notification means is to the player, the more likely it is that the means that starts or ends the notification from the specific notification means, which is the rear of the first means and the second means, will start or end the notification.

According to the above configuration, the later the start and end of the notification by the specific game state notification means, the more advantageous the content of the specific game state that is the subject of the notification is for the player. This configuration is associated with the relationship of the execution timing of the content notification during the specific game state, resulting in a notification that is familiar or easy to understand for the player. Therefore, it is possible to ideally realize an enjoyable game by associating the start and end of the notification by the specific game state notification means with the content.

Feature AA15. The specific game state notification means is
A gaming machine described in any one of features AA1 to AA14, characterized in that it is possible to differentiate between whether the first means starts a notification by the specific notification means or whether the second means starts a notification by the specific notification means depending on the game situation when the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is won.

According to the above configuration, the manner in which the specific notification means starts not only to win the lottery for transition to a specific game state, but also to the game situation in which the lottery for transition is won. In this way, the notification manner can be diversified.

Feature AA16. A situation setting means (a function of executing a specific state process in the main control device 101) is provided for setting the game situation to a specific situation under one condition that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is not won;
The gaming machine described in feature AA15 is characterized in that the specific game state notification means is capable of differentiating between the first means and the second means at which the notification by the specific notification means is started, so that information that may be beneficial to the player is more likely to be suggested from the start manner of the notification by the specific notification means in the specific game state more easily in the specific situation than in a situation that is not the specific situation.

According to the above configuration, even if the lottery result is a specific result, the game status can be set to a specific status even if the player does not win the lottery to transition to a specific game state. If the lottery to transition to a specific game state is won during the specific status, information that may be useful to the player is suggested by the start mode of notification by the specific game state notification means. In this way, the key to the game is not simply whether or not the lottery to transition to a specific game state is won, but also whether or not the specific status is set, so that the player will not be too disappointed even if he or she does not win the lottery to transition to a specific game state.

Incidentally, "information that may be useful to the player" could be, for example, "information about the setting values set by the setting means."

Feature AA17. The first result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order;
The second result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
A gaming machine described in any one of features AA1 to AA16, characterized in that a sequence notification (push order notification) regarding a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed as the mode notification by the specified notification means based on the lottery result by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, a sequence notification regarding the stopping sequence of multiple rotating bodies can be executed as a status notification. In this way, for example, even players who are not good at the eye-pressing operation to aim for a specific pattern on the rotating body can fully enjoy the benefits of the status notification.

The above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first bonus (for example, nine medals awarded based on the first small win in a three-bet game) is awarded, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode and the second result winning is established, the second bonus (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a three-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means may be characterized in that it is capable of executing a mode notification, by the specified notification means, a sequence notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the benefit to be awarded.

Feature AA18. A setting means (a function for executing a process for setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided with a plurality of setting values that can cause a change in the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of the gaming media, and one of the plurality of setting values is set;
A gaming machine described in any one of features AA1 to AA17, characterized in that the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is the same regardless of the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, since there is no difference in the probability of winning due to the setting value for a specific gaming state, equality is guaranteed for play in that specific gaming state regardless of which gaming machine is selected from among the multiple gaming machines installed in the gaming hall. By applying this configuration to a configuration in which a uniform notification is started when a state transition occurs due to a specific notification means, it is possible to further enhance the effect of ensuring equality.

Feature AA19. A gaming machine according to any one of Features AA1 to AA18, characterized in that the specific gaming state is set to at least one of a high frequency state in which the mode notification is executed more frequently than in the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which the transition to the high frequency state is easier than in the normal gaming state, and a pre-transition state (premonition mode) in which a transition lottery to the high frequency state or the high probability state has been won and the transition has not yet occurred.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the gameability is improved. Moreover, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are both at a stage before the advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as that of the normal game state. By configuring the specific notification means to start notifying the player when the specific game state is transitioned to, including such a state, it is possible to preferably avoid an event where the player ends the game without noticing that the specific game state has been transitioned to. In other words, if the state transition is to the high frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by the mode notification, and by configuring the transition to such a state before the high frequency state to be notified by the start of notification by the specific notification means, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to expect the presentation effect and interest improvement described in feature AA1.

Feature AA20. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stops the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that is executed based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result and that executes a lottery for transition to the specific game state;
a specific game state notification means (a function of executing a first section display process to a fourth section display process by the main control device 101) which starts notification by turning on a specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) when the game state transitions to the specific game state, and ends notification by turning off the specific notification means when the specific game state ends;
Equipped with
The specific game state notifying means includes:
A first means for starting or ending a notification by the specific notification means at a first predetermined timing (for example, a function for executing a process for starting the display of the section indicator when a first stop OFF operation is performed in the main control device 101);
A second means for starting or ending the notification by the specific notification means at a second timing different from the first timing (for example, a function for executing a process for starting the display of the section indicator when a third stop OFF operation is performed in the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is held by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the stop operation mode of the stop operation means that stops the rotating body is set to result in a first result win or a second result win, and a mode notification may be issued regarding these stop operation modes, creating a gameplay that changes whether or not a win occurs depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification, thereby varying the degree of advantage.

In this case, when the game transitions to a specific game state where a mode notification is more likely to be made, notification by the specific notification means begins, and when the specific game state ends, notification by the specific notification means also ends. In other words, by checking whether or not a notification has been made by the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game is in a specific game state, and this can eliminate the sense of inequality between, for example, a player who has transitioned to a specific game state but quits playing without realizing it, and a player who sits down at the same gaming machine after the previous player has finished playing. This makes it possible for all players to enjoy playing with mode notifications to the fullest on an equal basis.

Moreover, in this gaming machine, the start and end of the notification by the specific notification means may be performed at a first timing or at a second timing. In this way, it is possible to fully expect the presentation effect in the game by using a specific notification means that simply starts the notification when the specific game state is transitioned to and ends the notification when the specific game state ends. In addition, by using the above configuration, it is possible to provide information such as the content of the game and the content of the specific game state to a player who has played a game in which the notification by the specific notification means has ended by winning the lottery for transition to the specific game state and starting the notification by the specific notification means, or by playing the specific game state, at the start/end timing of the notification by the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to ensure equality between players depending on whether or not there is a notification by the specific notification means, while ensuring an advantage over a player who has played a game that triggers the notification. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

Feature AA21. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that is executed based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result and that executes a lottery for transition to the specific game state;
a specific game state notification means (a function of executing a first section display process to a fourth section display process by the main control device 101) which starts notification by turning on a specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) when the game state transitions to the specific game state, and ends notification by turning off the specific notification means when the specific game state ends;
Equipped with
The specific game state notifying means includes:
a first means for starting or ending a notification by the specific notification means by turning on or off the specific notification means in a predetermined first color (for example, a function for executing a process for starting the display of the section indicator in red in the main control device 101);
a second means for starting or ending a notification by the specific notification means by turning on or off the second color different from the first color (for example, a function for executing a process to start displaying the section indicator in green in the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is held by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the stop operation mode of the stop operation means that stops the rotating body is set to result in a first result win or a second result win, and a mode notification may be issued regarding these stop operation modes, creating a gameplay that changes whether or not a win occurs depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification, thereby varying the degree of advantage.

In this case, when the game transitions to a specific game state where a mode notification is more likely to be made, notification by the specific notification means begins, and when the specific game state ends, notification by the specific notification means also ends. In other words, by checking whether or not a notification has been made by the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game is in a specific game state, and this can eliminate the sense of inequality between, for example, a player who has transitioned to a specific game state but quits playing without realizing it, and a player who sits down at the same gaming machine after the previous player has finished playing. This makes it possible for all players to enjoy playing with mode notifications to the fullest on an equal basis.

Moreover, in this gaming machine, the start and end of the notification by the specific notification means may be performed in the first color or in the second color. In this way, it is possible to fully expect the presentation effect in the game by using the specific notification means, such as simply starting the notification when the specific game state is transitioned to and ending the notification when the specific game state is ended. In addition, by using the above configuration, it is possible to provide information such as the content of the game and the content of the specific game state to a player who has won the lottery for transition to the specific game state, which starts the notification by the specific notification means, or who has played a game in which the notification by the specific notification means is ended by playing the specific game state, by the difference in color at the start/end of the notification by the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to ensure equality between players depending on whether or not there is a notification by the specific notification means, while ensuring an advantage over players who have played a game that triggers the notification. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

Note that the configurations of features AA1 to AA19 may be applied individually to feature AA20 or feature AA21, or may be applied in combination with each other.

<Characteristics Group AB>
Feature AB1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result;
a specific game state notification means (a function of executing a first section display process to a fourth section display process by the main control device 101) which starts notification during the state by turning on a specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) when the game state transitions to the specific game state, and ends notification during the state by turning off the specific notification means when the specific game state ends;
Equipped with
The specific game state notifying means sets a game as a starting game in which, in a situation where the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specific result and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won, a specific picture combination corresponding to the specific result stops at the valid position, and a benefit corresponding to the specific result can be awarded by the benefit awarding means, and starts an announcement of the state by the specific announcement means at least at a timing before allowing an operation of a game following the starting game,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a special notification means (a function of executing the first section display process and special RT state process by the main control unit 101, and a function of executing a special RT state notification means by the display control unit 81) that can execute a special notification corresponding to the content of the specific game state that is the subject of the state notification by a predetermined specific notification means (the 8th display segment N8, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc.) at a timing before the state notification by the specific game state notification means is started.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is held by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the stop operation mode of the stop operation means that stops the rotating body is set to result in a first result win or a second result win, and a mode notification may be issued regarding these stop operation modes, creating a gameplay that changes whether or not a win occurs depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification, thereby varying the degree of advantage.

In this case, when the game transitions to a specific game state where a mode notification is more likely to be made, the mode notification by the specific notification means begins, and when the specific game state ends, the mode notification by the specific notification means also ends. In other words, by checking whether or not a notification has been made by the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game is in a specific game state, and this can eliminate a sense of inequality between, for example, a player who has transitioned to a specific game state but quits playing without realizing it, and a player who sits down at the same gaming machine after the previous player has finished playing. This makes it possible for all players to enjoy playing with mode notifications to the fullest on an equal basis.

On the other hand, if the in-state notification is timed as described above, the player's attention may be focused only on whether the in-state notification will eventually start (before the operation of the next game is permitted). In this case, the player only needs to determine whether the in-state notification has started when the operation of the game following the starting game is permitted, which may reduce the attention paid to the starting game itself. Therefore, in addition to the in-state notification, this gaming machine is made capable of executing a special notification corresponding to the content of a specific game state by a specific notification means during the starting game, which is a timing before the in-state notification starts, or when a transition lottery is won (mainly at the start timing of the starting game). In this way, it is possible to shift the attention of a player who is paying attention to whether the in-state notification will start by the specific notification means and is interested in the game following the starting game to the starting game.

Feature AB2. The gaming machine described in Feature AB1, characterized in that the degree of advantage of the specific game state for which the specific notification means starts the notification during the state differs between when the special notification is made by the special notification means at a first timing and when the special notification is made by the special notification means at a second timing that is later than the first timing.

According to the above configuration, the degree of advantage of the specific game state that is the target of the state notification that is started afterwards differs depending on the timing of the special notification by the special notification means. In this way, interest in the special notifications by the special notification means can be increased with a simple configuration.

Feature AB3. The gaming machine described in Feature AB2, characterized in that the more advantageous the content of the specific game state is for the player, the more likely it is that the special notification means will issue the special notification at the second timing rather than the first timing.

According to the above configuration, the later the timing of the special notification is, the more likely it is that the player will enter a specific game state that is advantageous to him/her. Therefore, in the starting game, the player can operate the starting game while hoping that the special notification will not be executed too early, and while hoping that the notification during the state will start before operations for the game following the starting game are permitted. Therefore, by relating the game progress in the starting game to the expectation level, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the expectation level differs in stages.

In addition, since the in-state notification is based on a timed notification that begins before the operation of the game following the starting game is permitted, if the later the execution timing of the special notification that occurs before the in-state notification is configured to be more advantageous, the closer the execution/start timing of the special notification and the in-state notification are to the player, the more advantageous it will be for the player. In this way, it is possible to make the player aware that the in-state notification will begin by utilizing the difference in the degree of advantage of a particular game state and the execution timing of the special notification, and it is possible to greatly change the impression of the notification even for in-state notifications, which have a relatively limited degree of freedom in the notification format.

Feature AB4. The specific game state includes a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, premonition mode, etc.) each having a different degree of advantage for the player;
A gaming machine described in any one of features AB1 to AB3, characterized in that the special notification means is configured to make the special notification at a first timing when the specific game state that is the subject of the in-state notification to be started is a predetermined first specified state, and to make the special notification at a second timing different from the first timing when the specific game state that is the subject of the in-state notification to be started is a second specified state different from the first specified state.

According to the above configuration, by varying the notification timing at which a special notification is likely to be executed depending on the type of specific game state, a game can be added in which the player predicts the type of specific game state to which the player will subsequently transition (the notification during the state) based on the notification timing, thereby diversifying the game.

Feature AB5. The gaming machine described in any one of Features AB1 to AB4, characterized in that the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification based on the operation of a predetermined stop operation means.

With the above configuration, it is possible to associate the operation of each stop operation means until the in-state notification is made with the special notification, and in a situation where the player thinks that they have won the lottery for transitioning to a specific game state, the stop operation means can be operated in the hope of receiving the special notification.

In particular, in gaming machines that have gameplay that utilizes the fact that the bonuses granted may differ depending on the order in which the stop operations are performed, players tend to focus only on the order in which the stop operation means are operated, and there is a possibility that the original gameplay of the slot machine, such as operating each stop operation means to stop the image, may be neglected. In this regard, if a configuration is adopted in which a special notification is issued based on the operation of the stop operation means as described above, in addition to the passive gameplay of operating the stop operation means in the instructed order to stop the revolving body, active gameplay of operating the stop operation means to generate a special notification can be realized, and by increasing the attention paid to the operation of each stop operation means, it is possible to rekindle or ensure the original gameplay of the slot machine, such as operating each stop operation means to stop the image.

Feature AB6. The stop operation means is displaceable from an initial position to an operation position,
the drive control means drives and controls the corresponding rotating body to stop based on the operation of the stop operation means from the initial position to the operation position,
A gaming machine as described in feature AB5, characterized in that the content of the specific game state is more likely to be advantageous to the player when the special notification means issues a special notification based on a specified stop operation means returning from the operation position to the initial position, rather than when the special notification is issued based on the specified stop operation means being operated from the initial position to the operation position.

According to the above configuration, assuming that the stop operation means is displaced to the operation position to stop the corresponding rotating body, it is more advantageous for the player to receive a special notification after the rotating body has stopped, rather than receiving the special notification while the rotating body is being stopped. In other words, it is more advantageous for the player to see the stop result in conjunction with the special notification when the rotating body stops, than to see only the special notification before the stopping, and this strengthens the impression that the player has gained an advantage by stopping the rotating body with the stop operation (by making the specified result appear).

Feature AB7. The gaming machine according to any one of Features AB1 to AB6, characterized in that the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification by the specific notification means as the specific notification means.

The above configuration not only consolidates the configuration, but also makes it possible to take advantage of the high level of interest in state notifications to increase attention to special notifications, or to take advantage of the high level of interest in special notifications to increase attention to state notifications, thereby making it possible to optimally increase attention to both notifications.

Feature AB8. The specific notification means is configured to be switchable between an off state and an on state,
the specific game state notification means starts notifying the state by switching the specific notification means from the off state to the on state, and ends notifying the state by switching the specific notification means from the on state to the off state;
The gaming machine described in feature AB7 is characterized in that when the notification during the state is started, the special notification means makes the special notification by utilizing the timing of switching the specific notification means from the off state to the on state.

The above configuration allows the specific notification means to be realized with a simple configuration of switching between an off state and a on state, and even with this simple configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect by providing special notifications by the special notification means, such as differences in the timing of switching to the on state. Therefore, it is possible to achieve two potentially contradictory effects at the same time, namely, a simplified configuration and improved presentation effect.

Feature AB9. In a situation where the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (first BB) including the specific result, and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won, if the picture combination for transition corresponding to the transition result does not stop at the valid position and the benefit corresponding to the transition result is not awarded by the benefit awarding means, the game in which the transition result is won is designated as a winning game, and the winning of the transition result is reserved (a function of executing the process of step S609 by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine described in any one of features AB1 to AB8, characterized in that in a situation where the reserve means reserves the winning transition result, a game is set as the starting game in which the bonus awarding means awards a bonus corresponding to the transition result when the transition pattern combination stops at the valid position.

According to the above configuration, by reserving a winning transition result, the number of games in which a special notification can be executed increases accordingly, and the timing of the execution of the special notification becomes more diverse. This increases the interest of the game, as the special notification allows the player to predict/understand the content of the specific game state that is the target of the in-state notification.

Regarding the "transition result," by limiting the configuration to "when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and a transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result stops at the valid position, a transition to an advantageous state (bonus state) that is advantageous to the player is made," it is made clearer that it is a so-called jackpot result (bonus) that can be reserved by the reservation means.

Feature AB10. The gaming machine described in Feature AB9, wherein the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification in a game between the winning game and the start game when the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means.

According to the above configuration, the special notification is made in the game between the winning game and the start game, so that the dragging of the game while the specific result winning is reserved is suppressed. In other words, by reserving the transition result winning, it is possible to realize a game feature that prolongs the game in which it is determined whether or not the result is a transition result, thereby maintaining the sense of anticipation. The longer the reserved game is, the more the effect of maintaining the sense of anticipation can be expected, but if the reserved game is long, dragging is likely to occur and the level of attention may decrease. In this regard, if the configuration is such that the special notification is made during such reservation, it is possible to prevent the dragging feeling from occurring and to preferably achieve the effect of maintaining the sense of anticipation by reservation.

Feature AB11. The gaming machine described in Feature AB10, characterized in that the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined notification-compatible result in a situation in which the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means.

The above configuration can draw interest in the lottery results of each reserved game. In other words, if a special notification is made based on the lottery results of the lottery means while the game is on hold, rather than simply being made as a special notification while the game is on hold, it becomes possible to give meaning to the lottery for each game, rather than making each reserved game a time-consuming game while waiting for a special notification or a transition result win.

Feature AB12. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a first specific result (for example, a single role of strong watermelon) that does not include the transition result among the specific results, the game for which the lottery result is the first specific result is set as the starting game;
A gaming machine described in any one of features AB9 to AB11, characterized in that when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a second specific result (for example, a combination of strong watermelon + 1st BB) which includes the transition result among the specific results, the game in which the transition result is won is set as the starting game.

According to the above configuration, whether or not a specific result is reserved depends on the type of specific result. In this way, there are cases where the execution of a special notification and the start of a notification during a state are reserved, and cases where the execution of a special notification and the start of a notification during a state are not reserved, which greatly diversifies the manner in which a special notification is executed and a notification during a state is started.

Feature AB13. The gaming machine described in Feature AB12, characterized in that a common symbol combination can be stopped at the pay position in the game in which the first specific result is won and the game in which the second specific result is won.

With the above configuration, it is not possible to determine from the winning combination whether the execution of the special notification and the start of the in-state notification are also reserved. This allows the player to maintain a sense of anticipation for the subsequent game, even if the special notification or in-state notification is not performed when a common pattern combination is stopped.

Feature AB14. The gaming machine described in Feature AB13, characterized in that the common pattern combination can be stopped even if the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first specific result and the transition lottery is not won.

According to the above configuration, if the first specific result is a win, a common pattern combination stops regardless of whether the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won, and the stop result is a common one. Therefore, even if the stop result is the same, in addition to a pattern in which the special notification and in-state notification are made without being reserved by the reservation means and a pattern in which the notification is reserved by the reservation means and then a special notification and in-state notification are made, a pattern in which neither a special notification nor in-state notification is made at all is added. In this way, it is possible to play with a sense of anticipation that a special notification or in-state notification will be made not only in the game in which the common pattern combination stops, but also in subsequent games.

Feature AB15. The first result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order;
The second result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
A gaming machine described in any one of features AB1 to AB14, characterized in that an order notification (push order notification) regarding a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed as the mode notification by the specified notification means based on the lottery result by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, a sequence notification regarding the stopping sequence of multiple rotating bodies can be executed as a status notification. In this way, for example, even players who are not good at the eye-pressing operation to aim for a specific pattern on the rotating body can fully enjoy the benefits of the status notification.

The above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first benefit (for example, nine medals awarded based on the first small win in a three-bet game) is awarded, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode and the second result winning is established, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a three-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means may be characterized in that it is capable of executing a mode notification, by the specified notification means, a sequence notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the benefit to be awarded.

Feature AB16. A gaming machine according to any one of Features AB1 to AB15, characterized in that the specific gaming state is set to at least one of a high frequency state in which the mode notification is executed more frequently than in the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which a transition to the high frequency state is easier than in the normal gaming state, and a pre-transition state (premonition mode) in which a transition lottery to the high frequency state or the high probability state has been won and the transition has not yet occurred.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the gameability is improved. Moreover, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are both at a stage before the advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as that of the normal game state. By configuring the specific notification means to start notifying the player when the specific game state is transitioned to, including such a state, it is possible to preferably avoid an event where the player ends the game without noticing that the specific game state has been transitioned to. In other words, if the state transition is to the high frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by the mode notification, and by configuring the transition to such a state before the high frequency state to be notified by the start of notification by the specific notification means, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to expect the presentation effect and the improvement of interest described in feature AB1.

<Characteristic AC group>
Feature AC1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result;
a specific game state notification means (a function of executing a first section display process to a fourth section display process by the main control device 101) which starts notification during the state by turning on a specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) when the game state transitions to the specific game state, and ends notification during the state by turning off the specific notification means when the specific game state ends;
Equipped with
The specific game state notifying means sets a game as a starting game in which, in a situation where the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specific result and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won, a specific picture combination corresponding to the specific result stops at the valid position, and a benefit corresponding to the specific result can be awarded by the benefit awarding means, and starts an announcement of the state by the specific announcement means at least at a timing before allowing an operation of a game following the starting game,
A gaming machine characterized by having a restriction means (a function of executing a third interval display process by the main control unit 101) that can restrict the operation of the game following the starting game from being permitted.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is held by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the stop operation mode of the stop operation means that stops the rotating body is set to result in a first result win or a second result win, and a mode notification may be issued regarding these stop operation modes, creating a gameplay that changes whether or not a win occurs depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification, thereby varying the degree of advantage.

In this case, when the game transitions to a specific game state where a mode notification is more likely to be made, the mode notification by the specific notification means begins, and when the specific game state ends, the mode notification by the specific notification means also ends. In other words, by checking whether or not a notification has been made by the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game is in a specific game state, and this can eliminate a sense of inequality between, for example, a player who has transitioned to a specific game state but quits playing without realizing it, and a player who sits down at the same gaming machine after the previous player has finished playing. This makes it possible for all players to enjoy playing with mode notifications to the fullest on an equal basis.

On the other hand, doing so as described above shortens the timing at which the in-state notification can begin, resulting in a monotonous start presentation that does not provide any effective presentation at the start, or there is a concern that the start itself may be overlooked due to the shortened timing. In this regard, the present gaming machine is provided with a restriction means that can restrict the allowance of operations for the game following the start game, so that the restriction on the allowance of operations for the next game makes it possible to notice that the in-state notification is occurring, and further, by restricting the allowance of operations for the next game in this manner, the period during which the in-state notification can begin is extended, thereby diversifying the start modes of the in-state notification.

Feature AC2. Equipped with a progress processing execution means for performing game progress processing (a function for executing normal processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine described in feature AC1, characterized in that the execution of a specific process (a function of executing a payout control process by the main control device 101) among the progress processes in the starting game is restricted by the restriction imposed by the restriction means.

According to the above configuration, by restricting the execution of a specific process among the progress processes of the starting game, it is possible to restrict the progress of the starting game, thereby restricting the permission of operations for the game following the starting game. In this way, it is possible to reflect the event of transitioning to a specific game state that occurred in the starting game in the game following the starting game, while ensuring the independence of each game.

Feature AC3. A gaming machine according to Feature AC1 or Feature AC2, characterized in that during the restricted period in which the restriction by the restricting means is imposed, operations in the starting game are also restricted.

According to the above configuration, by restricting the operation of the starting game, it is possible to restrict the progress of the starting game, thereby restricting the operation of the game following the starting game from being permitted. In this way, the event of transitioning to a specific game state that occurs in the starting game can be reflected in the game following the starting game while ensuring the independence of each game.

Feature AC4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features AC1 to AC3, characterized in that the specific game state notification means is capable of initiating notification of the state during a period restricted by the restriction means.

With the above configuration, the operation is restricted, which makes the user aware that a notification during a state is about to begin, and allows the user to conveniently confirm the start of the notification during the state.

Feature AC5. A limit period setting means for setting the length of the limit period during which the limiting means applies the limit (a function for executing a freeze setting process in the section display third process by the main control device 101) is provided;
The gaming machine described in feature AC4, characterized in that the restriction period setting means is capable of setting the length of the restriction period so that the period from when the restriction by the restriction means is started to when the state notification is started corresponds to the content of the specific gaming state that is the target of the state notification.

With the above configuration, the period from when the permission to operate the game following the started game is restricted to when the notification during the state begins is associated with the content of the specific game state, so that it is possible to generate strong interest in the length of the period from when the restriction occurred, and by increasing attention to the length of that period, it is possible to preferably increase attention to the start of the notification during the state.

Feature AC6. A gaming machine according to Feature AC5, characterized in that the restriction imposed by the restricting means restricts control corresponding to a predetermined operation performed by a player.

According to the above configuration, by restricting the control corresponding to the operation performed by the player, the player notices that he is being restricted by the operation, and it becomes difficult to know when the restriction will start, compared to a configuration in which the progress of unilateral processing on the gaming machine side is restricted. Therefore, in a configuration in which the length of the restricted period is important, such as feature AC5, the length is made difficult to clearly grasp, and even if the start timing of the notification during the state (length of the period) is not favorable to the player, it is possible to maintain a sense of anticipation until the transition to a specific gaming state.

Feature AC7: A limit period setting means (a function of executing a freeze setting process in the section display third process by the main control device 101) is provided to set the length of the limit period during which the limiting means applies the limiting function;
A gaming machine described in any one of features AC4 to AC6, characterized in that the limit period setting means is capable of setting the length of the limit period so that the period from the start of the state notification to the end of the limitation by the limiting means corresponds to the content of the specific game state corresponding to the state notification by the specific game state notification means.

With the above configuration, the period from when the in-state notification starts until operations in the next game are permitted corresponds to the content of the specific game state, so the player first pays attention to the start of the in-state notification, and when the in-state notification starts, pays attention to the timing at which operations are permitted, making it possible to create a gradual or gradual presentation.

Feature AC8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features AC1 to AC7, characterized in that the specific game state notification means is capable of initiating notification during the state during a period different from the period limited by the limiting means.

According to the above configuration, the period during which operations are restricted can be considered a period during which attention is being drawn to the game in terms of presentation, and if the configuration allows notifications during the state to be started outside of that period, it is possible to increase attention to the game evenly.

Feature AC9. A limit period setting means (a function of executing a freeze setting process in the section display third process by the main control device 101) is provided to set the length of the limit period during which the limiting means applies the limiting function;
A gaming machine described in any one of features AC1 to AC8, characterized in that the limit period setting means is capable of setting the length of the limit period according to the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state corresponding to the state notification by the specific gaming state notification means.

According to the above configuration, the period during which the operation of the next game can be restricted and the notification during the state can be started is secured, and the length of the secured period (restricted period) corresponds to the advantageous degree of the specific game state. In this way, it is possible to further increase the sense of excitement by changing the length of the period during which the excitement of whether or not the notification during the state will be started increases. For example, if the specific game state is more advantageous as the period during which the notification during the state can be started is longer, it is thought that the player will not only enjoy whether or not the notification during the state will be started, but will also hope that the period will continue even if it has not been started, and the longer the period during which it has not been started, the more the player will look forward to the notification during the state being started, which is a synergistic effect of increasing attention. Also, if the specific game state is more advantageous as the period during which the notification during the state can be started is shorter, the period during which the player can enjoy whether or not the notification during the state will be started is condensed, making it possible to provide a strong sense of excitement.

Feature AC10. The gaming machine described in Feature AC9, characterized in that the limit period setting means is more likely to set the limit period longer the more advantageous the content of the specific game state corresponding to the state notification by the specific game state notification means.

Based on the premise that, in general, the longer the presentation time of a presentation trigger, the more likely it is to be advantageous to the player, a configuration such as the above, in which the content of a specific game state becomes more advantageous to the player the longer the limited period, is easier for players to understand and can achieve a good presentation balance with other presentations.

Feature AC11. The first result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
A gaming machine described in any one of features AC1 to AC10, characterized in that an order notification (push order notification) regarding a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed as the mode notification by the specified notification means based on the lottery result by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, a sequence notification regarding the stopping sequence of multiple rotating bodies can be executed as a status notification. In this way, for example, even players who are not good at the eye-pressing operation to aim for a specific pattern on the rotating body can fully enjoy the benefits of the status notification.

The above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first benefit (for example, nine medals awarded based on the first small win in a three-bet game) is awarded, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode and the second result winning is established, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a three-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means may be characterized in that it is capable of executing a mode notification, by the specified notification means, a sequence notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the benefit to be awarded.

Feature AC12. A gaming machine according to any one of Features AC1 to AC11, characterized in that the specific gaming state is set to at least one of a high frequency state in which the mode notification is executed more frequently than in the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which the transition to the high frequency state is easier than in the normal gaming state, and a pre-transition state (premonition mode) in which a transition lottery to the high frequency state or the high probability state has been won and the transition has not yet occurred.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the gameability is improved. Moreover, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are both at a stage before the advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as that of the normal game state. By configuring the specific notification means to start notifying the player when the specific game state is transitioned to, including such a state, it is possible to preferably avoid an event where the player ends the game without noticing that the specific game state has been transitioned to. In other words, if the state transition is to the high frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by the mode notification, and by configuring the transition to such a state before the high frequency state to be notified by the start of notification by the specific notification means, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to expect the presentation effect and the improvement of interest described in feature AC1.

<Characteristic AD group>
Feature AD1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result;
a specific game state notification means (a function of executing a first section display process to a fourth section display process by the main control device 101) which starts notification during the state by turning on a specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) when the game state transitions to the specific game state, and ends notification during the state by turning off the specific notification means when the specific game state ends;
Equipped with
The specific game state notifying means includes:
a game in which a specific picture combination corresponding to the specific result stops at the valid position and a bonus corresponding to the specific result is awarded by the bonus awarding means when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specific result and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won, is set as a starting game, and the specific notification means starts to notify the player of the state at least at a timing prior to allowing the player to operate the game following the starting game;
a first means for starting the notification during the state by the specific notification means in a first manner when a first specific pattern combination stops at the valid position in the starting game (for example, a function for executing a process for starting the display of a section indicator when a first stop OFF operation is performed in the main control device 101 in a game in which a stop number corresponding to a strong cherry is displayed when a Super Attack mode is won);
a second means for starting the notification by the specific notification means in a second manner different from the first manner when a second specific symbol combination different from the first specific symbol combination stops at the valid position in the starting game (for example, a function for executing a process for starting the display of a section indicator when a third stop OFF operation is performed in the main control device 101 in a game where a stop number corresponding to a weak cherry is displayed when a Super Attack mode is won);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is held by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the stop operation mode of the stop operation means that stops the rotating body is set to result in a first result win or a second result win, and a mode notification may be issued regarding these stop operation modes, creating a gameplay that changes whether or not a win occurs depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification, thereby varying the degree of advantage.

In this case, when the game transitions to a specific game state where a mode notification is more likely to be made, the mode notification by the specific notification means begins, and when the specific game state ends, the mode notification by the specific notification means also ends. In other words, by checking whether or not a notification has been made by the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game is in a specific game state, and this can eliminate a sense of inequality between, for example, a player who has transitioned to a specific game state but quits playing without realizing it, and a player who sits down at the same gaming machine after the previous player has finished playing. This makes it possible for all players to enjoy playing with mode notifications to the fullest on an equal basis.

On the other hand, if the start of the in-state notification is limited as described above, there is a possibility that the start mode of the in-state notification will be simplified. That said, there is a limit to how much diversity there can be in the start mode of the in-state notification. In this regard, the present gaming machine is configured to vary the start mode of the in-state notification depending on the stop result in the starting game, i.e., the type of specific result and the winning mode in the event of a winning specific result. This makes it possible to start the in-state notification in relation to the stop result of each orbiting body, and the presentation effect of the in-state notification can be significantly improved without the need to change the configuration of the specific notification means.

Feature AD2. The identification result includes a first identification result (e.g., strong cherry) and a second identification result (e.g., weak cherry),
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result, the first specific symbol combination (three cherries) stops at the active position, thereby awarding a bonus corresponding to the first specific result;
A gaming machine as described in feature AD1, characterized in that when the lottery result of the lottery means is the second specific result, a bonus corresponding to the second specific result is awarded by the second specific pattern combination (single cherry) stopping at the valid position.

According to the above configuration, the winning combinations that will end up on the screen will differ depending on the type of specific result, so in a gaming machine with feature AD1, the start manner of the in-state notification will differ depending on the type of specific result. This adds to the fun of predicting what will happen next while understanding what triggered the lottery to transition to the specific gaming state, thereby increasing interest.

Feature AD3. The identification result includes a third identification result (e.g., strong cherry),
A gaming machine as described in feature AD1 or feature AD2, characterized in that if the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the third specific result, a bonus corresponding to the third specific result is awarded when the first specific pattern combination stops at the valid position, and a bonus corresponding to the third specific result is awarded when the second specific pattern combination stops at the valid position.

According to the above configuration, even if the third specific result is the same, the mode of in-state notification is different when the first specific pattern combination stops and a winning combination is achieved and when the second specific pattern combination stops and a winning combination is achieved. In this way, interest in the winning combination can be particularly increased.

Feature AD4. The identification result includes a fourth identification result (e.g., strong watermelon);
A gaming machine described in any one of features AD1 to AD3, characterized in that when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fourth specific result, a bonus corresponding to the fourth specific result is awarded when the first specific pattern combination stops at the valid position, and a bonus corresponding to the fourth specific result is not awarded when the second specific pattern combination stops at the valid position.

According to the above configuration, in the case of the fourth specific result, the mode of in-state notification is different between when the first specific pattern combination stops and a winning combination is established, and when the second specific pattern combination stops and a winning combination is not established, resulting in a so-called missed opportunity. By doing so, it is possible to particularly increase interest in the winning combination.

Feature AD5. The first means can start the in-state notification by the first aspect before the stop of a specific rotating body that stops in a specific order (second order for strong cherries and weak cherries) among the rotating bodies (for example, when the first stop OFF operation is performed in the case where the Super Attack mode is won with a strong cherry),
The second means is a gaming machine described in any one of features AD2 to AD4, characterized in that it is capable of starting the state notification by the second aspect after the specific revolving body stops (for example, when the 3 stop OFF operation is performed if a weak cherry is used to win the Super Attack mode).

According to the above configuration, the game result that triggers the in-state notification differs depending on whether the timing of the start of the in-state notification is before or after the stop of the predetermined rotating body. In other words, in a game in which the rotating body is stopped by operating each stop operation means, if the in-state notification is started based on the first specific result, the in-state notification is started before the specific operation, and if the in-state notification is started based on the second specific result, the in-state notification is started after the specific operation. By doing so, for example, if it is not possible to determine whether the result of the current game is the first specific result win or the second specific result win before the specific operation, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of hoping that the in-state notification will be won in the lottery to transition to the specific game state even if the in-state notification has not been started at that time. Also, if it is possible to determine that the result of the current game is the first specific result win, it is considered that the game will proceed while hoping that the in-state notification will be started by the specific operation, and if it is possible to determine that the result of the current game is the second specific result win, it is considered that the game will proceed while hoping that the in-state notification will be started by the transition to the specific operation. Furthermore, even in a situation where it is possible to determine that the third or fourth specific result has been won, whether the notification during the state begins before the specific operation or later will depend on the stop results, and it is thought that the game will progress while predicting the start timing of the notification during the state from the relationship (commonality, difference) of the stop results between the first specific picture combination and the second specific picture combination. In either case, the period during which interest is generated as to whether the notification during the state will begin is concentrated, making it possible to add spice to the game.

Feature AD6. The gaming machine described in Feature AD5, characterized in that the first specific symbol combination and the second specific symbol combination may have the same symbols that stop at the pay position up to the specific number (e.g., a strong cherry and a weak cherry on the left reel).

With the above configuration, it is not possible to tell from the stop results whether the first or second specific result has been won until the specific number, and there are no missed wins in the fourth specific result until the specific number. Therefore, even if the notification of the state has not started by the time the specific circulating body is stopped, the player can play while holding out hope that they have won the lottery to transition to the specific game state when performing the stopping operation of the circulating body from the specific number onwards.

Feature AD7. The gaming machine described in Feature AD5 or Feature AD6, characterized in that the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination have different patterns that stop at the valid position on the specific rotating body.

According to the above configuration, by stopping the specific circulating body, it becomes possible to determine whether the first or second specific result has been won, the winning mode of the third specific result, or whether the fourth specific result has been won. Therefore, particularly in a situation where a notification during the state has not been started before, stopping the specific circulating body is a turning point that determines whether or not the possibility of winning the lottery for transitioning to a specific game state, triggered by winning the first or fourth specific result, is eliminated. This makes the operation of stopping the specific circulating body more interesting, and increases interest.

Feature AD8. The identification result includes a first identification result (e.g., strong cherry) and a second identification result (e.g., weak cherry),
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result, the first specific symbol combination (three cherries) stops at the active position, thereby awarding a bonus corresponding to the first specific result;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second specific result, the second specific symbol combination (single cherry) stops at the active position, thereby awarding a bonus corresponding to the second specific result;
A gaming machine described in any one of features AD1 to AD7, characterized in that in the transition lottery by the transition lottery means, if the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result, the transition lottery to the specific game state is won with a first probability, and if the lottery result of the lottery means is the second specific result, the transition lottery to the specific game state is won with a second probability.

According to the above configuration, since the probability of winning the transition lottery differs depending on the type of specific result, the possibility of a state notification being initiated in the starting game differs between a case where a stop result that is likely to win the transition lottery is stopped and a case where a stop result that is unlikely to win the transition lottery is stopped. In this way, it is possible to determine whether a state notification is initiated in the first mode or in the second mode from the stop result, including the likelihood of it being initiated, and it is possible to further increase interest in the stop result.

Feature AD9. The identification result includes a first identification result (e.g., strong cherry) and a second identification result (e.g., weak cherry),
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result, the first specific symbol combination (three cherries) stops at the active position, and a bonus corresponding to the first specific result is awarded;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second specific result, the second specific symbol combination (single cherry) stops at the active position, thereby awarding a bonus corresponding to the second specific result;
A gaming machine described in any one of features AD1 to AD8, characterized in that the content of the specific gaming state may differ between a transition lottery by the transition lottery means based on the first specific result and a transition lottery by the transition lottery means based on the second specific result.

According to the above configuration, the content of the specific game state when it is started is different between when the first specific pattern combination stops and the notification during the state starts in the first mode and when the second specific pattern combination stops and the notification during the state starts in the second mode. Therefore, the joy when the first specific pattern combination stops is different from the joy when the second specific pattern combination stops, and it is possible to further increase interest in the stop result.

Feature AD10. The specified result includes a payout result in which a predetermined number of game media is paid out and a replay result in which the next game can be replayed without needing new game media;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the payout result, the first specific symbol combination stops at the pay position, and the predetermined number of game media is paid out as a benefit corresponding to the first specific result.
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the replay result, the second specific pattern combination stops at the active position, so that the replay becomes possible as a benefit corresponding to the replay result;
the first means, when the specific result is the payout result, starts the notification of the state until a reception operation (betting operation) for receiving game media in a game next to the starting game is permitted as the first mode;
The second means is a gaming machine described in any one of features AD1 to AD9, characterized in that, when the specific result is the re-play result, the second aspect is to start the state notification before allowing the start operation of the start operation means in the game next to the start game.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a first specific pattern combination stops if the payout result is a payout result and a second specific pattern combination stops if the replay result is a replay result, the end of the start timing of the in-state notification differs depending on which pattern combination stops. More specifically, when a specific game state is transitioned to based on a payout result, the first specific pattern combination stops in the starting game, and the in-state notification starts before the reception operation of the game medium for the next game is permitted, and when a specific game state is transitioned to based on a replay result, the second specific pattern combination stops in the starting game, and the in-state notification starts before the start operation of the start operation means for the next game is permitted. In this way, the variation in the end period until the in-state notification starts can be diversified. Furthermore, by associating the end variation with the stop result, when an arcade manager or the like tries to confirm which result initiated the in-state notification, for example, if the first specific pattern combination is stopped and the in-state notification is initiated after the reception operation, it is determined that the starting game is not the previous game but the current game, and the timing when the in-state notification started and the starting game can be confirmed from the stop result.

Feature AD11. The start operation means is configured to allow the start operation by performing the reception operation on a predetermined reception means (e.g., a first credit insertion switch 56),
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the replay result and the second specific pattern combination stops at the valid position, the first specific pattern combination is attached to each of the rotating bodies so as to stop at a specific position that is visible through the display unit and different from the valid position;
The gaming machine described in feature AD10 is characterized in that, if the lottery result by the lottery means is the re-play result, it is equipped with a means for making the re-play possible by performing the reception operation on the reception means in the next game (a function for executing a process to set a bet flag at the time of operation in the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, when the second specific pattern combination stops at a valid position and a replay result win is achieved, the first specific pattern combination stops at a specific position different from the valid position. Therefore, it is visually difficult to determine whether a replay result win or a payout result win has been achieved. Furthermore, in the next game after a replay win is achieved, the next game can be replayed by performing a reception operation on a specified reception means, so although there is a difference in whether a new game medium is required, the operation performed by the player in the next game is the same for the payout result and the replay result. In this way, in a configuration in which the end times of the start timing of the state notification are different for the payout result and the replay result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which result will start the state notification or has started. Therefore, the player can enjoy the excitement of when the state notification will start.

Feature AD12. A gaming machine according to any one of Features AD1 to AD11, characterized in that it is provided with a first stop means for stopping the first specific pattern combination when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specific result winning (e.g., a function for executing a process for stopping the stop results that result in a bonus prize in the main control device 101 when a combination of a strong watermelon and a bonus is won) and a second stop means for stopping the second specific pattern combination (e.g., a function for stopping the stop results that result in a watermelon prize in the main control device 101 when a combination of a strong watermelon and a bonus is won).

According to the above configuration, even if the specific result is the same, there are cases where the first specific pattern combination stops and cases where the second specific pattern combination stops. Therefore, even if the specific result is the same, there are cases where the notification during the state starts in the first mode and cases where the notification during the state starts in the second mode, and even if the lottery result is the same, it is possible to expect the effect of increasing attention by having different stop results or different notification modes, as long as the lottery result is not complicated, etc.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature AD5.

Feature AD13. The first result is a winning combination when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order;
The second result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
A gaming machine described in any one of features AD1 to AD12, characterized in that a sequence notification (push order notification) regarding a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed as the mode notification by the specified notification means based on the lottery result by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, a sequence notification regarding the stopping sequence of multiple rotating bodies can be executed as a status notification. In this way, for example, even players who are not good at the eye-pressing operation to aim for a specific pattern on the rotating body can fully enjoy the benefits of the status notification.

The above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first benefit (for example, nine medals awarded based on the first small win in a three-bet game) is awarded, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode and the second result winning is established, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a three-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means may be characterized in that it is capable of executing a mode notification, by the specified notification means, a sequence notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the benefit to be awarded.

Feature AD14. A gaming machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD13, characterized in that the specific gaming state is set to at least one of a high frequency state in which the mode notification is executed more frequently than in the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which the transition to the high frequency state is easier than in the normal gaming state, and a pre-transition state (premonition mode) in which a transition lottery to the high frequency state or the high probability state has been won and the transition has not yet occurred.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the gameability is improved. Moreover, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are both at a stage before the advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as that of the normal game state. By configuring the specific notification means to start notifying the player when the specific game state is transitioned to, including such a state, it is possible to preferably avoid an event where the player ends the game without noticing that the specific game state has been transitioned to. In other words, if the state transition is to the high frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by the mode notification, and by configuring the transition to such a state before the high frequency state to be notified by the start of notification by the specific notification means, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to expect the presentation effect and the improvement of interest described in feature AD1.

<Characteristic AE group>
Feature AE1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that executes a lottery to transition to the specific game state, the lottery being executed based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result, and the winning probability is the same regardless of the setting value set by the setting means;
a specific game state notification means (a function of executing a first interval display process to a fourth interval display process by the main control device 101) which starts notification during the state by turning on a specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) at least until a specific timing determined in advance in the specific game in which the game state transitions to the specific game state, and ends the notification during the state by turning off the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state;
Equipped with
The specific game state notifying means includes:
When a first specific result (e.g., a strong watermelon) among the specific results is triggered to win a lottery for transition to the specific gaming state, a notification of the state is started by a first specific timing (a timing at which a betting operation is permitted) as the specific timing;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a lottery for transition to the specific game state is won as a result of a second specific result (e.g., a winning replay) different from the first specific result among the specific results, notification of the state begins by a second specific timing that is later than the first specific timing as the specific timing.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is held by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the stop operation mode of the stop operation means that stops the rotating body is set to result in a first result win or a second result win, and a mode notification may be issued regarding these stop operation modes, creating a gameplay that changes whether or not a win occurs depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification, thereby varying the degree of advantage.

In this case, when the game transitions to a specific game state where a mode notification is more likely to be made, the mode notification by the specific notification means begins, and when the specific game state ends, the mode notification by the specific notification means also ends. In other words, by checking whether or not a notification has been made by the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game is in a specific game state, and this can eliminate a sense of inequality between, for example, a player who has transitioned to a specific game state but quits playing without realizing it, and a player who sits down at the same gaming machine after the previous player has finished playing. This makes it possible for all players to enjoy playing with mode notifications to the fullest on an equal basis.

Here, the in-state notification starts at least by a specific timing in the specific game state that transitions to the specific game state, and the end of the notification start is set, but once that end is exceeded, the anticipation for the in-state notification suddenly fades, and there is a risk of the level of attention decreasing in the game that can enter the specific game state. In this regard, in the above configuration, by making the end of the in-state notification different depending on the game result that triggered the winning of the lottery for transitioning to the specific game state, it is possible to continue playing while maintaining anticipation for the in-state notification even if one of the end periods is exceeded. This makes it possible to appropriately increase the level of attention to the game.

Feature AE2. The lottery results by the lottery means include a payout result in which a predetermined number of game media is paid out and a replay result in which the next game can be replayed without needing new game media;
The first identification result is the payout result,
A gaming machine described in feature AE1, characterized in that the second identified result is the re-play result.

According to the above configuration, the start and end times of the notification during the state by the specific game state notification means will differ depending on whether it is a payout result or a replay result. In this way, by using the conventional payout result or replay result to vary the start and end times of the notification during the state, there is no need to set a special game result, and it is possible to achieve the effect of feature AE1 with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature AE3. The specific game state notification means is
When the specific result is the payout result, a timing at which a receiving operation (a betting operation) for receiving game media in the specific game is permitted is set as the first specific timing, and a notification during the state is started;
A gaming machine described in feature AE2, characterized in that when the specific result is the re-play result, the timing at which the start operation of the start operation means is permitted in the specific game is set as the second specific timing, and the notification during the state is started.

According to the above configuration, the timing at which the player's operation is permitted is set as each end time, and in the case of a payout result, it is the timing at which the acceptance operation is permitted, and in the case of a replay result, it is the timing at which the start operation is permitted. In this way, by setting the timing at which the player's operation is permitted as the end time, it is possible to actively progress the game rather than waiting until the notification begins. Furthermore, while the start operation is generally permitted for a replay result without the need for an acceptance operation, the end time is set in accordance with the operation mode corresponding to each game result, and therefore it is possible to achieve the above excellent effects without complicating the configuration.

Feature AE4. The start operation means is configured to allow the start operation by performing the reception operation on a predetermined reception means (e.g., a first credit insertion switch 56),
the bonus awarding means is configured to pay out the predetermined number of game media as the bonus when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first specific result and a first specific pattern combination corresponding to the first specific result stops at the pay position;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the replay result and a second specific combination of patterns different from the first specific combination of patterns stops at the valid position, the first specific combination of patterns is stopped at a specific position that is visible through the display unit and different from the valid position, and the pictures of each of the rotating bodies are attached to the rotating bodies.
The gaming machine described in feature AE3 is characterized in that, if the lottery result by the lottery means is the re-play result, it is equipped with a means (a function of executing a process to set a bet flag at the time of operation in the main control unit 101) that makes it possible to re-play the specific game by performing the reception operation on the reception means.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific pattern combination stops at a valid position and a replay result win is achieved, the first specific pattern combination stops at a specific position different from the valid position. Therefore, it is visually difficult to determine whether a replay result win or a payout result win has been achieved. Furthermore, in the next game after a replay win is achieved, the next game can be replayed by performing a reception operation on a specified reception means, so although there is a difference in whether a new game medium is required, the operation performed by the player in the next game is the same for the payout result and the replay result. In this way, in a configuration in which the end times of the start timing of the state notification are different for the payout result and the replay result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which result will start the state notification or has started. Therefore, the player can enjoy the excitement of when the state notification will start.

Feature AE5. A transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) that transitions the game state to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result and a transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the effective position;
A first reservation means (a function of executing the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) for reserving the winning of the transition result until the picture combination for the transition stops at the valid position when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result;
Equipped with
The specific result includes a third specific result of the replay result and the transfer result,
The gaming machine described in any one of features AE2 to AE4, characterized in that the specific game state notification means is equipped with a second reservation means (a function of executing a first interval display process and a fourth interval display process by the main control unit 101) that reserves the start of the notification during the state when a transition to the specific game state is made based on the overlap result, until the transition pattern combination stops at the valid position.

According to the above configuration, the lottery results include a transition result (a so-called jackpot result) that will trigger a transition to an advantageous state, and also includes overlapping results between the replay result and the transition result. In the case of an overlapping result, the transition result win is reserved until a transition result win is achieved between the replay result and the transition result. In this configuration, when a transition to a specific gaming state is made based on an overlapping result, the specific game that transitions to the specific gaming state is reserved until a game in which a transition result win is achieved. In this way, it is possible to strengthen the impression that the transition lottery to the specific game has been won based on a transition result win from the overlapping results, and it is possible to ensure consistency with the withholding of the transition result win.

Feature AE6. The gaming machine described in Feature AE5, wherein the specific game state notification means starts notifying the player in the state by the first specific timing as the specific timing when a lottery for transitioning to the specific game state is won in response to a third specific result among the specific results.

According to the above configuration, if the specific game itself is reserved as a result of the reserved transition result win, the start and end times of the state notification in the specific game will match that of the payout result. In this way, in a configuration (feature AE2) in which the start and end times of the state notification are different for the payout result and the replay result, by determining the start and end times for the third specific result in which the replay result and the transition result are overlapping wins, it is possible to prevent discrepancies from occurring between the start and end times of the game operation, which differs depending on the game result, even if a replay is not awarded based on the transition result win.

Feature AE7. The first result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order;
The second result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
A gaming machine described in any one of features AE1 to AE6, characterized in that an order notification (push order notification) regarding a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed as the mode notification by the specified notification means based on the lottery result by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, a sequence notification regarding the stopping sequence of multiple rotating bodies can be executed as a status notification. In this way, for example, even players who are not good at the eye-pressing operation to aim for a specific pattern on the rotating body can fully enjoy the benefits of the status notification.

The above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first benefit (for example, nine medals awarded based on the first small win in a three-bet game) is awarded, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode and the second result winning is established, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a three-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means may be characterized in that it is capable of executing a mode notification, by the specified notification means, a sequence notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the benefit to be awarded.

Feature AE8. A setting means (a function for executing a process for setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided with a plurality of setting values that can cause a change in the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of the game media, and one of the plurality of setting values is set;
A gaming machine described in any one of features AE1 to AE7, characterized in that the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is the same regardless of the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, since there is no difference in the probability of winning due to the setting value for a specific gaming state, equality is guaranteed for play in that specific gaming state regardless of which gaming machine is selected from among the multiple gaming machines installed in the gaming hall. By applying this configuration to a configuration in which a uniform notification is started when a state transition occurs due to a specific notification means, it is possible to further enhance the effect of ensuring equality.

Feature AE9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features AE1 to AE8, characterized in that the specific gaming state is set to at least one of a high frequency state in which the mode notification is executed more frequently than in the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which the transition to the high frequency state is easier than in the normal gaming state, and a pre-transition state (premonition mode) in which a transition lottery to the high frequency state or the high probability state has been won and the transition has not yet occurred.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the gameability is improved. Moreover, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are both at a stage before the advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as that of the normal game state. By configuring the specific notification means to start notifying the player when the specific game state is transitioned to, including such a state, it is possible to preferably avoid an event where the player ends the game without noticing that the specific game state has been transitioned to. In other words, if the state transition is to the high frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by the mode notification, and by configuring the transition to such a state before the high frequency state to be notified by the start of notification by the specific notification means, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to expect the presentation effect and the improvement of interest described in feature AE1.

<Characteristic BA group>
Feature BA1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result;
A transition means (a function of executing a bonus state process by the main control device 101) for transitioning the gaming state to an advantageous state for the player based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result and a transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the effective position;
A reserve means (a function for executing the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) reserves the winning of the transition result until the picture combination for the transition stops at the valid position when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result;
In a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carry-over state), when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a restriction means (a function of executing the process of step S702 by the main control device 101) restricts the execution of the lottery by the transfer lottery means;
a first control means for executing stop control of each of the revolving bodies so that a first specific pattern combination can be stopped at the valid position when the game state is the specific game state and the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means; and
a second control means for executing stop control of each of the revolving bodies so that a second specific pattern combination different from the first specific pattern combination can be stopped at the valid position when the game state is the normal game state and the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means; and
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and when the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result stops, the player transitions to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and if the transition pattern combination does not stop, the winning of the transition result is withheld. In this configuration, further, a specific game state is provided in which the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the rotating body, and the degree of advantage is varied depending on the presence or absence of a mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between an advantageous state and a specific game state can occur in each game, and the playability is significantly improved.

On the other hand, if a lottery for transition to a specific game state is held when a transition to an advantageous state has been confirmed, a player may perform a stop operation that does not stop the picture combination for the transition, thereby preventing the transition to the advantageous state from occurring, and an unlimited number of lotteries for transition to the specific game state may be held. This would result in a significant difference in the degree of advantage between a player who can perform a stop operation that does not stop the picture combination for the transition and a player who cannot perform such a stop operation, which is undesirable from the perspective of fairness in the game, and is undesirable from the perspective of fairness in the first place, since the payout rate may differ from the payout rate intended by the design. Therefore, by restricting the execution of the lottery for transition to the specific game state when a transition to an advantageous state has been confirmed, the intended payout rate can be achieved and the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

Also, by making it possible to reserve the winning transition result, there is the advantage that anticipation of a transition to an advantageous state can be maintained by having the player play the game while the transition to the advantageous state is internally confirmed and this is suggested through effects, etc. However, since a lottery for a transition to a specific gaming state is not held in a situation where the winning transition result is reserved by the reservation means, anticipation of a transition to an advantageous state can be increased, but from the perspective of anticipation of a specific gaming state, a situation where the winning transition result is reserved by the reservation means is not desirable for the player.

In the above configuration, in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the stop results when the special result is won are different depending on whether or not the transition lottery to the specific game state is won. Specifically, if the game is in a specific game state and the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the stop results when the special result is won are a first specific pattern combination, and if the game is in a normal game state and the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the stop results when the special result is won are a second specific pattern combination. In this way, even if the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the transition lottery to the specific game state is restricted, if the first specific pattern combination appears, it is understood that the transition lottery to the specific game state has been won, and it is possible to play while maintaining a sense of expectation for the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Feature BA2. The gaming machine described in Feature BA1 is characterized in that it is equipped with a special means (e.g., a function for executing notification lottery process 1 in the display control device 81, a lottery table for a special RT state with a different probability of winning a special replay) for varying the frequency with which the first specific pattern combination stops at the valid position when the gaming state is the specific gaming state and the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means.

According to the above configuration, since the frequency at which the first specific pattern combination stops in the specific game state can be changed by the special means, for example, even if a special result is won and the first specific pattern combination does not stop, the specific game state is not completely denied, and the anticipation for the specific game state can be continued. In other words, in a situation where a transition result win is reserved by the reservation means, a game is added in which whether or not the specific game state is entered is predicted from the frequency at which the first specific pattern combination stops, and the interest in the game during the reservation can be suitably increased.

Specific examples of the above configuration include, for example, "means for determining whether or not to execute specific control by the first control means to stop the first specific pattern combination when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result (a function for executing notification lottery process 1 in the display control device 81), or means for changing the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the special result (a lottery table for a special RT state with a different probability of winning a special replay)."

Feature BA3. The gaming machine described in feature BA2, wherein the special means is capable of varying the frequency at which the first specific symbol combination stops depending on the content of the specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where a transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, a game is added in which the content of the specific game state is predicted based on the stopping frequency of the first specific pattern combination. In this way, if it is possible to predict not only whether or not a specific game state is in progress, but also its content from the stopping results, the playability during the reservation is significantly improved.

Feature BA4. As the first specific symbol combination, a first specific symbol combination (e.g., black BAR single line) and a second specific symbol combination (e.g., black BAR tenpai miss) different from the first specific symbol combination are set;
The gaming machine described in feature BA3, wherein the special means is capable of varying the stopping frequency of the first type specific pattern combination and the second type specific pattern combination depending on the content of the specific game state.

With the above configuration, the content of the specific game state differs depending on whether the first type specific pattern combination or the second type specific pattern combination of the first specific pattern combination stops, which makes it possible to further increase interest in the stop results.

Feature BA5. The specific game state includes a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, premonition mode, etc.) each having a different degree of advantage for the player;
The gaming machine described in feature BA4, wherein the special means performs the special notification so that the first type of specific pattern combination becomes easier to stop when the specific game state is a first predetermined state, and performs the special notification so that the second type of specific pattern combination becomes easier to stop when the specific game state is a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state.

With the above configuration, it is possible to achieve the effect of feature BA4 through a specific configuration.

Feature BA6. The gaming machine according to any one of features BA2 to BA5, wherein the special means changes the frequency of stopping the first specific symbol combination by changing the frequency of execution of a special notification (black BAR eye-press notification effect) that allows the first specific symbol combination to be stopped when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result.

The above configuration adjusts the frequency of the first specific pattern combination being stopped depending on whether or not a notification is given, so the configuration is such that a suggestion or instruction that the mode is before the transition is given is provided as a performance, and the gameplay provided by such suggestions or instructions can be realized with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature BA7: When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when each of the rotating bodies is stopped in a first specific stopping order, the first control means controls the first specific pattern combination to be stopped, and when each of the rotating bodies is stopped in a second specific stopping order different from the first specific stopping order, the second control means controls the second specific pattern combination to be stopped;
The gaming machine described in feature BA6, wherein the special means provides a notification regarding the first specific stopping sequence as the special notification.

According to the above configuration, whether the first specific pattern combination or the second specific pattern combination stops depends on the stopping order when the special result is won, and the special means is configured to make a difference in the stopping frequency of the first specific pattern combination by making a notification regarding the first specific stopping order corresponding to the first specific pattern combination as a special notification. This increases the affinity with a specific game state in which the degree of advantage changes based on the stopping operation mode, including the stopping order, and makes it easier for the player to understand that the special notification is an indication of a specific game state (pre-transition mode).

Feature BA8. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when a specific circulating body in each of the circulating bodies is stopped at a first timing, the specific patterns constituting the first specific pattern combination can be stopped at the valid position, and when the specific circulating body is stopped at a second timing different from the first timing, the specific patterns cannot be stopped at the valid position;
The gaming machine described in feature BA6 or feature BA7, wherein the special means is capable of notifying the player that the specific rotating body will be stopped at the first timing as the special notification.

According to the above configuration, the first specific pattern combination can be stopped by pressing the specific rotating body, so the original gameplay of the slot machine, in which the player can obtain a bonus by stopping the machine to aim for the pattern, is incorporated into the presentation of the specific game state, such as suggesting and instructing. In this way, the player can feel as if they have won the specific game state by their own stopping operation, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game (stopping operation).

Feature BA9. The bonus granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the first specific pattern combination stops at the active position, a special benefit (replay) is awarded as a benefit corresponding to the special result;
A gaming machine described in any one of features BA6 to BA8, characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the second specific pattern combination stops at the active position, the special privilege is awarded.

According to the above configuration, when a special result is won, the stopping results may differ depending on the stopping order and timing, but the benefits obtained regardless of the stopping results (stopping order, stopping timing) are the same. This ensures consistency with the restriction on the execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means. In other words, since the degree of advantage when a specific result is won does not change due to the special notification, intentionally delaying the transition result winning in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means will not result in unfairly enjoying the benefits based on the specific result.

Feature BA10. A first control means (main control device 101) having at least the lottery means and the status notification means;
A second control means (display control device 81) having at least the special means;
having
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result or the second result, the mode notifying means in the first control means notifies the mode.
A gaming machine described in any one of features BA6 to BA9, characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special notification is made by the special means in the second control means, while the mode notification is not made by the mode notification means in the first control means.

According to the above configuration, in particular in feature BA9 which references feature BA7, when announcing the stopping order of the special result, it is possible to clarify the difference between the first result and the second result, which have different winning results. In other words, the lottery means and the mode notification means related to the player's profit are concentrated in the first control means, making it easier to take measures to avoid fraudulent acts, and the functions that are not related to profit, mainly performing performances, are concentrated in the second control means, and functions are decentralized. In such a configuration, if the special notification by the special means is a function on the second control means side, it is made clear that the change in the stopping number based on the special result is not directly related to profit, and for example, when the design of the special means is changed, it can be done without the need to calculate a new ball payout rate. Therefore, it is possible to realize excellent playability by the special means with a relatively easy configuration.

Feature BA11. A specific game state notification means (a function of executing the first to fourth section display processes by the main control device 101) is provided, which starts notification by turning on a specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) based on the transition of the game state to the specific game state, and ends notification by turning off the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state;
As the specified result, a duplicate result including the transition result (for example, 1 strong cherry duplicate, 1 strong watermelon duplicate, 1 chance A duplicate) is set,
The gaming machine described in any one of features BA1 to BA10, characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means is the overlap result and the transition lottery to the specific game state is won, the specific game state notification means sets the game in which the transition to the advantageous state is transitioned to by the stopping of the transition pattern combination as the starting game, does not start notification by the specific notification means at a timing prior to the start game, and starts notification by the specific notification means at a timing prior to allowing operation of the game following the starting game.

According to the above configuration, when a specific game state is entered, a notification is started by the specific game state notification means, and the notification ends when the specific game state ends. In other words, by checking whether or not a notification is given by the specific game state notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not a specific game state is entered, and this can eliminate the sense of inequality between, for example, a player who has entered a specific game state but does not realize that he or she has finished playing, and a player who sits down at the same gaming machine after the previous player has finished playing. This makes it possible for all players to enjoy playing to their heart's content with equal sequential notification.

Moreover, if the transition to the specific game state is based on a double result win that includes a transition result, the start of notification by the specific game state notification means is restricted until the start game in which the transition pattern combination stops and the game transitions to the advantageous state. In other words, as described above, while eliminating the sense of inequality between players regarding the specific game state, in a situation in which the transition result win is reserved by the reservation means, it is possible to also restrict notification regarding the specific game state so as not to reduce the joy of the first specific pattern combination appearing when a special result is won (the joy of knowing that one has won the lottery for transition to the specific game state). Thus, it is possible to appropriately improve playability in a situation in which the transition result win by the reservation means is reserved while ensuring equality between players by the specific game state notification means.

Feature BA12. The specified result is set to a non-overlapping result that does not include the transition result (e.g., strong cherry, strong watermelon, chance A),
The gaming machine described in feature BA11 is characterized in that, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the non-duplicate result and the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is won, the game that won the specific result is the starting game, and the specific notification means starts notification at a timing before allowing operation of the game next to the starting game.

According to the above configuration, the start of notification by the specific game state notification means is restricted only when a double win occurs with the transition result, making it possible to minimize the occurrence of an event in which the game ends despite transitioning to a specific game state. Therefore, the function of ensuring equality between players by providing a specific game state notification means can be further improved.

Feature BA13. As the overlap result, a first overlap result (e.g., strong cherry overlap 1) that is an overlap result with a first specific result (e.g., strong cherry) among the specific results is set;
As the non-overlapping result, a first non-overlapping result (e.g., strong cherry) that is a non-overlapping result of the first specific result (e.g., strong cherry) among the specific results is set,
The reward granting means includes:
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first overlap result, a bonus corresponding to the first specific result is awarded based on the fact that a picture combination for the first specific result has stopped at the valid position;
The gaming machine described in feature BA12 is characterized in that when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first non-duplicate result, a bonus corresponding to the first specific result is awarded based on the picture combination for the first specific result stopping at the valid position.

According to the above configuration, in both the game in which the first overlapping result, which is a overlapping win of the first specific result and the game in which the first non-overlapping result, which is a single win of the first specific result, is won, the picture combination for the first specific result stops and the first specific result is won, so it is difficult to determine from the stopped numbers which result the first overlapping result or the first non-overlapping result has been won. On the other hand, the notification by the specific game state notification means starts the game in which the transition result win is made in the case of the first overlapping result, and starts the game in which the first specific result win is made in the case of the first non-overlapping result. Therefore, even if the transition lottery to the specific game state is won by either result, an event may occur in which the start timing of the notification by the specific game state notification means is different. In other words, even if the picture combination for the first specific result stops and the specific game state notification means does not start notifying the player before the operation of the next game of that game is permitted, the possibility remains that the picture combination for the first specific result is based on the first specific result in the first overlapping result, making it possible to maintain a sense of anticipation even if the lottery for transition to the specific game state is not won.

In addition, in this case, the winning numbers at the time of the special result winning will make it possible to determine whether or not the lottery for transition to that specific game state has been won, making it possible to attract great interest in the winning numbers that will be displayed thereafter.

Feature BA14. As the overlap result, a second overlap result (e.g., strong watermelon overlap 1) that is an overlap result with a second identification result (e.g., strong watermelon) among the identification results is set;
As the non-overlapping result, a second non-overlapping result (e.g., strong watermelon) that is a non-overlapping result of the second identification result (e.g., strong watermelon) among the identification results is set,
The reward granting means includes:
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second overlap result, a bonus corresponding to the second specific result is awarded based on the fact that a picture combination for the second specific result has stopped at the valid position;
When the result of the drawing by the drawing means is the second non-overlapping result, a bonus corresponding to the second specific result is awarded based on the fact that the picture combination for the second specific result has stopped at the valid position;
The gaming machine described in feature BA13, wherein the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is different between the lottery based on the first specific result and the lottery based on the second specific result.

According to the above configuration, the playability of feature BA13 also takes into account the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means. That is, for example, if the first specific result is more likely to win the transition lottery than the second specific result, when the pattern combination for the first specific result stops and the notification by the specific game state notification means has not started, the possibility of winning the specific game state is higher than when the pattern combination for the second specific result stops and the notification by the specific game state notification means has not started, and the expectation of the first specific pattern combination appearing is further increased. On the other hand, when the pattern combination for the second specific result stops and the notification by the specific game state notification means has not started, the surprise effect when the first specific pattern combination appears thereafter is enhanced. As described above, by enjoying the stop results while taking into account the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means, the playability of predicting whether or not the specific game state will be won from the stop results during reservation is significantly improved.

Feature BA15. As the overlap result, a third overlap result (e.g., Chance A overlap 1) that is an overlap result with a third specific result (e.g., Chance A) among the specific results is set;
As the non-overlapping result, a third non-overlapping result (e.g., Chance A) that is a non-overlapping result of the third specific result (e.g., Chance A) among the specific results is set,
The reward granting means includes:
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the third overlap result, a bonus corresponding to the third specific result is awarded based on the fact that a picture combination for the third specific result has stopped at the valid position;
When the result of the drawing by the drawing means is the third non-overlapping result, a bonus corresponding to the third specific result is awarded based on the fact that the picture combination for the third specific result has stopped at the valid position;
A gaming machine described in feature BA13 or feature BA14, characterized in that the ratio of the overlap result to the non-overlapping result in the lottery by the lottery means is different between the ratio of the first overlap result to the first non-overlapping result and the ratio of the third overlap result to the third non-overlapping result.

According to the above configuration, the gameplay of feature BA13 and feature BA14 also takes into account the probability of winning the transition result. That is, for example, if the ratio of the first overlap result and the first non-overlapping result is higher than the ratio of the third overlap result and the third non-overlapping result (the same stop result is more likely to be a winning transition result), if the pattern combination for the first specific result stops and the notification by the specific game state notification means has not started, the possibility of the transition result winning being reserved by the reservation means is higher than the case where the pattern combination for the third specific result stops and the notification by the specific game state notification means has not started. In other words, in the configuration of feature BA14, if it is a non-overlapping result and a specific game state, the notification by the specific game state notification means starts in that game, so if the pattern combination for the first specific result stops and the notification by the specific game state notification means has not started as described above, the possibility of winning the specific game state is higher than the case of the pattern combination for the third specific result. As described above, by making the player enjoy the stop results while taking into account the probability of a winning transition result, the gameplay of predicting whether or not a specific game state will be won from the stop results during the reserved state is significantly improved.

Feature BA16. A gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA15, characterized in that the special result is a result that does not trigger a lottery for transition to the specific gaming state by the transition lottery means.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the winning transition result is reserved by the reservation means and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is restricted, the stop result notifies whether or not the lottery for transition to the specific game state has been won (whether or not the player is in the pre-transition mode) with a result other than the result that is subject to the restriction in the lottery for transition to the specific game state. This allows the player to enjoy the stop result purely without feeling a sense of loss due to the result being subject to the restriction.

Feature BA17. A gaming machine according to any one of Features BA1 to BA16, characterized in that in a situation in which the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the lottery result drawn by the lottery means is more likely to be the special result winning than in a situation in which the transition result winning is not reserved by the reservation means.

With the above configuration, the probability of a special result increases during a reserved reel, making it easier to enjoy a game in which the first or second specific pattern combination stops.

Feature BA18. The gaming machine described in Feature BA17, wherein the bonus awarding means, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result and a symbol combination corresponding to the special result has stopped at the active position, awards a replay as a bonus corresponding to the special result, or pays out gaming media in an amount equal to or less than the number of bets on the game that resulted in the special result.

The above configuration makes it possible to realize a game in which a specific game state can be inferred from the stop results without increasing the advantage too much during the reserved period. In other words, for example, if a configuration is adopted in which an increase in gaming media can be expected as a result of a special result win, it becomes possible to enjoy benefits from winning the special result, and players will hope for a special result win in the hope of an increase in gaming media, which can become a barrier to gameplay that is purely enjoyable.

Feature BA19. The first result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order;
The second result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
A gaming machine described in any one of features BA1 to BA18, characterized in that an order notification (push order notification) regarding a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed as the mode notification by the specified notification means based on the lottery result by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, a sequence notification regarding the stopping sequence of multiple rotating bodies can be executed as a status notification. In this way, for example, even players who are not good at the eye-pressing operation to aim for a specific pattern on the rotating body can fully enjoy the benefits of the status notification.

The above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first benefit (for example, nine medals awarded based on the first small win in a three-bet game) is awarded, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode and the second result winning is established, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a three-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means may be characterized in that it is capable of executing a mode notification, by the specified notification means, a sequence notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the benefit to be awarded.

Feature BA20. A gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA19, characterized in that the specific gaming state is set to at least one of a high frequency state in which the mode notification is executed more frequently than in the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which the transition to the high frequency state is easier than in the normal gaming state, and a pre-transition state (premonition mode) in which a transition lottery to the high frequency state or the high probability state has been won and the transition has not yet occurred.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the gameability is improved. Moreover, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are both at a stage before the advantage level is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage level of each game is almost the same as that of the normal game state. By configuring the specific notification means to start notifying the player when the specific game state is transitioned to, including such a state, it is possible to preferably avoid an event in which the player ends the game without noticing that the specific game state has been transitioned to. In other words, if the state transition is to the high frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by the mode notification, and by configuring the transition to such a state before the high frequency state to be notified by the start of notification by the specific notification means, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means and to improve the effect of increasing the expectation for the specific game state described in feature BA1.

<Characteristics BB group>
Feature BB1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, a first mode picture combination corresponding to a first result can be stopped, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode, a first operation mode result (e.g., push order bell) in which a picture combination of a second mode corresponding to a second result different from the first result and different from the picture combination of the first mode can be stopped;
When each of the stop operation means is operated in a third stop operation mode, a picture combination of the third mode corresponding to the third result can be stopped, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in a fourth stop operation mode different from the third stop operation mode, a second operation mode result (e.g., a special replay) is set in which a picture combination of a fourth mode, which is a picture combination corresponding to the third result and different from the picture combination of the third mode, can be stopped.
a first mode notification means (a function of executing a process for notification of a push order by a display control device 81) capable of executing a first mode notification (a push order notification effect) regarding an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode, or the third stop operation mode and the fourth stop operation mode, on a first notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result;
A transition means (a function of executing a bonus state process by the main control device 101) for transitioning the gaming state to an advantageous state for the player based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result and a transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the effective position;
A reserve means (a function for executing the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) reserves the winning of the transition result until the picture combination for the transition stops at the valid position when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result;
In a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carry-over state), when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a restriction means (a function of executing the process of step S702 by the main control device 101) restricts the execution of the lottery by the transfer lottery means;
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, a special notification means (a function of executing a notification process for special RT by the display control device 81) capable of executing the first mode notification by the first mode notification means based on the lottery result by the lottery means being the second operation mode result;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and when the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result stops, the player transitions to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and if the transition pattern combination does not stop, the winning of the transition result is withheld. In this configuration, a specific game state is provided in which the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the rotating body, and the degree of advantage is varied depending on whether or not there is a first mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between an advantageous state and a specific game state can occur in each game, and the playability is significantly improved.

On the other hand, if a lottery for transition to a specific game state is held when a transition to an advantageous state has been confirmed, a player may perform a stop operation that does not stop the picture combination for the transition, thereby preventing the transition to the advantageous state from occurring, and an unlimited number of lotteries for transition to the specific game state may be held. This would result in a significant difference in the degree of advantage between a player who can perform a stop operation that does not stop the picture combination for the transition and a player who cannot perform such a stop operation, which is undesirable from the perspective of fairness in the game, and is undesirable from the perspective of fairness in the first place, since the payout rate may differ from the payout rate intended by the design. Therefore, by configuring the system to limit the execution of the lottery for transition to the specific game state when a transition to an advantageous state has been confirmed, the intended payout rate can be achieved and the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

Also, by making it possible to reserve the winning transition result, if the player is allowed to play in a situation where a transition to an advantageous state has been confirmed internally, and this is hinted at through effects or the like, there is an advantage in that it maintains the anticipation of the transition to an advantageous state. However, since a lottery for transition to a specific game state is not held when the winning transition result is reserved by the reservation means, it is not desirable for players if the configuration makes it obvious that the lottery for transition will not be held.

In this respect, in the above configuration, even in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the transition lottery to the specific game state is restricted, the first mode notification based on the second operation mode result is executed. The second operation mode result, like the first operation mode result, has different stop results depending on the stop operation mode, but the winning result depending on the stop result is set to be the same. In other words, if the second operation mode result is a first mode notification, the player's advantage does not change. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the first mode notification is executed based on the second operation mode result in a situation where the transition lottery to the specific game state is restricted as described above, it becomes possible to execute the first mode notification within a range that does not go against the purpose of restricting the transition lottery to the specific game state in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, and the execution of the first mode notification makes it difficult to understand the situation in which such transition lottery is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability during the reservation while ensuring the fairness of the game.

Feature BB2. The gaming machine described in Feature BB1, wherein the first mode notification means does not execute the first mode notification even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result when the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means.

According to the above configuration, when a winning transition result is reserved by the reservation means, the first mode notification is executed only when the second operation mode result is obtained from the first and second operation mode results. As described above, the first operation mode result and the second operation mode result are different depending on the stop operation mode, while the second operation mode result is the same regardless of the stop operation mode. In this way, it is possible to execute the first mode notification in a reserved situation while ensuring the significance of restricting the execution of the lottery for transition to a specific game state in a situation where a winning transition result is reserved.

Feature BB3. A gaming machine according to Feature BB1 or Feature BB2, characterized in that it is equipped with a second mode notification means (a function of executing push order role processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing a second mode notification regarding the stop operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode by a second notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) different from the first notification means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result.

According to the above configuration, the first mode notification means executes the first mode notification for both the first operation mode result and the second operation mode result, while the second mode notification means executes the second mode notification for the first operation mode result. As described above, the first operation mode result may result in a different winning result depending on the stop operation mode, while the second operation mode result wins the same result regardless of the stop operation mode. In other words, the first mode notification and the second mode notification include notifications in which the second mode notification changes the player's profit, and the first mode notification does not change the profit. In this case, for example, a manager of a game hall, etc., can monitor the relationship between the stop operation mode and the winning result by monitoring the second mode notification by the second notification means. In this way, by leaving the notification associated with the player's profit to the second mode notification, it is also possible to use the first mode notification as a notification for presentation purposes, and the degree of freedom in notifications is greatly increased, such as notifications related to profits or notifications not related to profits.

Feature BB4. A first control device (main control device 101) having at least the lottery means and the second mode notification means;
A second control device (display control device 81) having at least the first mode notifying means;
The gaming machine described in feature BB3 is characterized by having:

With the above configuration, the lottery means and second mode notification means that are directly linked to the player's profits and the first mode notification means for the presentation are mounted on separate control devices, making it possible to take concentrated anti-fraud measures against the profit-related components, and by distributing the functions, it is possible to prevent localized increases in processing load.

In addition, by limiting the "second control device" to "provided separately from the first control device," the effect of having separate control devices is more clearly achieved.

Feature BB5. A specific game state notification means (a function of executing the first to fourth section display processes by the main control device 101) is provided, which starts notification by turning on a specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) based on a transition to the specific game state, and ends notification by turning off the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state,
A gaming machine described in feature BB3 or feature BB4, characterized in that the first mode notification means is capable of executing the first mode notification regardless of whether notification by the specific game state notification means has been started, while the second mode notification means is capable of executing the second mode notification under one condition that notification by the specific game state notification means has been started.

According to the above configuration, when a specific game state is entered, a notification is started by the specific game state notification means, and the notification ends when the specific game state ends. In other words, by checking whether or not a notification is issued by a specific notification means of the specific game state notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not a specific game state is entered, and this can eliminate the sense of inequality between, for example, a player who has entered a specific game state but does not realize that he or she has finished playing, and a player who sits down at the same gaming machine after the player who finished playing. This makes it possible for all players to enjoy playing with special notifications equally to their heart's content.

In addition, by configuring the first and second mode notifications so that the second mode notification can be executed under the condition that notification by the specific game state notification means has begun, the significance of the second mode notification being directly linked to profits is further strengthened, and the importance of monitoring the second mode notification, along with notifications by the specific game state notification means, is increased. In addition, because the first mode notification can be executed regardless of whether or not notification by the specific game state notification means has begun, the degree of freedom in issuing the first mode notification is increased, making it possible to further enhance its function as a presentation.

Feature BB6. The transition lottery means is capable of executing a lottery for transition to the specific game state based on the transition result win;
The gaming machine described in feature BB5 is characterized in that it is equipped with a means (for example, a function of executing steps S4204, S4208, and the fourth section display process in the main control unit 101) that can limit the start of notification by the specific game state notification means corresponding to the result of the transition lottery to the specific game state executed based on the transition result winning in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, at least until the transition result winning is established.

The above configuration makes it possible to ensure consistency between restricting the lottery for transition to the specific game state when the winning transition result is reserved by the reservation means and not issuing a second mode notification in that situation, and also makes it possible to maintain a sense of anticipation for winning the lottery for transition to the specific game state in a situation where the winning transition result is reserved.

Feature BB7. The gaming machine described in Feature BB6, characterized in that the first mode notification by the special notification means suggests specific content corresponding to the result of the transition lottery executed by the transition lottery means in response to the transition result reserved by the reservation means.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where a winning transition result is reserved, the first mode notification based on the second operation mode result is performed, suggesting the content of the transition lottery to a specific game state triggered by the reserved transition result, so that even if the execution of the transition lottery to a specific game state is restricted in such a situation, interest in the transition lottery can be maintained.

Feature BB8. The specific game state includes a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, premonition mode, etc.) each having a different degree of advantage for the player;
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reserving means, when the result by the transition lottery means executed based on the transition result winning is a transition winning to a first predetermined state, the special notification means executes the first mode notification for the third stop operation mode in which the third sequence of the picture combination in the second operation mode result can be stopped;
The gaming machine described in feature BB7 is characterized in that in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, if the result by the transition lottery means executed based on the transition result winning is a transition winning to a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state, the special notification means executes the first mode notification for the fourth stop operation mode in which the fourth sequence of pattern combination in the second operation mode result can be stopped.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the winning details of the lottery for transition to a specific game state by using the second operation mode result in which the stop result changes depending on the stop operation mode. In this way, it is possible to realize new gameplay using mode notification in a situation where mode notification that directly leads to profits may be restricted.

Feature BB9. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a plurality of types of replay results are provided, for which a replay can be awarded as a bonus by the bonus awarding means;
The plurality of types of replay results include a transition replay result (e.g., promotion replay) in which the replay is granted by the bonus granting means and which triggers a transition of the game state, and a non-transition replay result (e.g., special replay) in which the replay is granted by the bonus granting means and which does not trigger a transition of the game state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features BB1 to BB8, characterized in that the second operation mode result is the non-transition re-play result.

According to the above configuration, even if the second operation mode result is a win in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved, the game state will not change, and a replay will simply be granted. By using such a game result to notify the mode, it is possible to achieve the effect of feature BB1 within the scope that does not go against the purpose of restricting the lottery for transition to a specific game state in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved.

Feature BB10. The first operation mode result is such that, when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the picture combination of the first mode corresponding to the first result can be stopped, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the picture combination of the second mode corresponding to the second result can be stopped;
The second operation mode result is such that, when each of the stop operation means is operated in a third stop order as the third stop operation mode, a picture combination of the third mode corresponding to the third result can be stopped, and, when each of the stop operation means is operated in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode, a picture combination of the fourth mode corresponding to the third result can be stopped;
A gaming machine described in any one of features BB1 to BB9, characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result or the second operation mode result, the first mode notification means is capable of executing a first sequence notification (push order notification presentation) regarding a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order, or the third stop order and the fourth stop order, as the first mode notification.

According to the above configuration, a sequence notification regarding the stopping sequence of multiple rotating bodies can be executed as a status notification. In this way, for example, even players who are not good at the eye-pressing operation to aim for a specific pattern on the rotating body can fully enjoy the benefits of the status notification.

The above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the picture combination of the first mode is stopped, the first result is established, and the first benefit (for example, nine medals awarded based on the first small win in a three-bet game) is awarded by the benefit awarding means; when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the picture combination of the second mode is stopped, the second result is established, and the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a three-bet game) different from the first benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means;
The second operation mode result is such that, when each of the stop operation means is operated in a third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third mode stops, the third winning result is established, and a third bonus (replay) is awarded by the bonus awarding means, and, when each of the stop operation means is operated in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the fourth mode stops, the third winning result is established, and the third bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means.
The first mode notification means may be characterized in that, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result or the second operation mode result, the first sequence notification (push order notification presentation) regarding a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order, or the third stop order and the fourth stop order, can be executed by the first notification means as the first mode notification, in which case it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the benefit to be awarded.

Feature BB11. A gaming machine according to any one of Features BB1 to BB10, characterized in that the specific gaming state is set to at least one of a high frequency state in which the mode notification is executed more frequently than in the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which the transition to the high frequency state is easier than in the normal gaming state, and a pre-transition state (premonition mode) in which a transition lottery to the high frequency state or the high probability state has been won and the transition has not yet occurred.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the gameability is improved. Moreover, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are both at a stage before the advantage level is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage level of each game is almost the same as that of the normal game state. By configuring the specific notification means to start notifying the player when the specific game state is transitioned to, including such a state, it is possible to preferably avoid an event in which the player ends the game without noticing that the specific game state has been transitioned to. In other words, if the state transition is to the high frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by the mode notification, and by configuring the transition to such a state before the high frequency state to be notified by the start of notification by the specific notification means, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means and to improve the effect of increasing the expectation for the specific game state described in feature BB1.

<Characteristics BC group>
Feature BC1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result;
A transition means (a function of executing a bonus state process by the main control device 101) for transitioning the gaming state to an advantageous state for the player based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result and a transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the effective position;
A reserve means (a function for executing the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) reserves the winning of the transition result until the picture combination for the transition stops at the valid position when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result;
In a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carry-over state), when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a restriction means (a function of executing the process of step S702 by the main control device 101) restricts the execution of the lottery by the transfer lottery means;
When the limiting means limits the execution of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means, a special notification means (a function for executing a notification cancellation process by the display control device 81 and a notification process for special RT) capable of executing a special notification regarding the transition lottery by the transition lottery means that has been executed based on the specific result winning that is the subject of the limiting means;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and when the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result stops, the player transitions to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and if the transition pattern combination does not stop, the winning of the transition result is withheld. In this configuration, further, a specific game state is provided in which the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the rotating body, and the degree of advantage is varied depending on the presence or absence of a mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between an advantageous state and a specific game state can occur in each game, and the playability is significantly improved.

On the other hand, if a lottery for transition to a specific game state is held when a transition to an advantageous state has been confirmed, a player may perform a stop operation that does not stop the picture combination for the transition, thereby preventing the transition to the advantageous state from occurring, and an unlimited number of lotteries for transition to the specific game state may be held. This would result in a significant difference in the degree of advantage between a player who can perform a stop operation that does not stop the picture combination for the transition and a player who cannot perform such a stop operation, which is undesirable from the perspective of fairness in the game, and is undesirable from the perspective of fairness in the first place, since the payout rate may differ from the payout rate intended by the design. Therefore, by restricting the execution of the lottery for transition to the specific game state when a transition to an advantageous state has been confirmed, the intended payout rate can be achieved and the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

Also, by making it possible to reserve the winning transition result, there is the advantage that anticipation of a transition to an advantageous state can be maintained by having the player play the game while the transition to the advantageous state is internally confirmed and this is suggested through effects, etc. However, since a lottery for a transition to a specific gaming state is not held in a situation where the winning transition result is reserved by the reservation means, anticipation of a transition to an advantageous state can be increased, but from the perspective of anticipation of a specific gaming state, a situation where the winning transition result is reserved by the reservation means is not desirable for the player.

In particular, if the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, the player cannot enjoy the benefit of a transition lottery that would normally be held, and may feel as if he or she has lost out; the greater the number of games in which the transition result win is reserved, the higher the possibility of such an event occurring. Therefore, as in the above configuration, if a notification is given regarding a transition lottery held prior to a specific game state in a case in which the transition lottery to the specific game state is restricted when a specific result is won, it is possible to make the player believe that a transition lottery to the specific game state was held when the specific result was won, and it becomes difficult for the player to realize that the transition lottery was restricted. Thus, it is possible to optimally realize playability by combining advantageous states and specific game states.

Feature BC2. The gaming machine described in Feature BC1, characterized in that the special notification means is related to the transition lottery performed by the transition lottery means and is capable of notifying contents that have not yet been notified.

According to the above configuration, the content of the notification by the special notification means becomes more limited. More specifically, the content of the notification by the special notification means does not include anything related to a transition lottery that has already been notified, but is related to an unnotified lottery, so the notification is related to a transition lottery that was performed in a game that resulted in a specific result but is close to a game in which the transition lottery was restricted, and since the content is for a close game, the effect of making it seem as if the transition lottery was performed based on the specific result is further enhanced.

Feature BC3. The transition lottery means is capable of executing a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being the transition result;
A gaming machine as described in feature BC1 or feature BC2, characterized in that in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, the gaming machine is equipped with a means for restricting the execution of a notification regarding a lottery by the transition lottery means triggered by the transition result (a function for executing a process to set a premonition mode when an attack mode, etc. is won in the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when a transition lottery is performed by the transition lottery means based on the transition result, the execution of notification regarding the transition lottery is restricted, so that it is possible to minimize an event where a transition lottery has not been performed prior to a specific result being won in a situation where a transition result win is carried over by the reservation means.

Feature BC4. A gaming machine according to any one of features BC1 to BC3, characterized in that the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific result that is the subject of restriction by the restriction means is obtained.

According to the above configuration, in a game after the game that results in a specific result in which the transition lottery is restricted, a notification is made regarding a transition lottery that was executed before the game that resulted in the specific result. In this way, the game in which the special notification is made is not limited to the game that resulted in the specific result, and the special notifications are diversified. Even if the result of the transition lottery is not favorable to the player, the player can enjoy the game after the specific result while hoping for a change in the content of the special notification.

Feature BC5. The gaming machine described in Feature BC4, wherein the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification when the lottery result drawn by the lottery means is a predetermined special result in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific result restricted by the restriction means is obtained.

According to the above configuration, when a special notification is made, the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result is taken into consideration, so even if the transition result is won without the special result being obtained, the player can have high expectations for the content of the special notification that was supposed to be notified. In other words, in a configuration in which the result of the transition lottery is favorable to the player by the special notification, even if the special notification is not made, the reason for the special notification not being made may not only be that the result of the transition lottery is not favorable to the player, but also that the special result was not won, so the expectation can be maintained. In particular, since the timing of the special notification is time-limited, that is, the situation in which the transition result win is reserved by the reservation means, there are many cases in which the special result is not obtained by the time the transition result is won, and this is likely to be the reason for the special notification not being made. Therefore, it is possible to preferably achieve the effect of maintaining the expectation as described above.

Feature BC6. A first control means for controlling each of the rotating bodies so that a first special pattern combination can be stopped at the valid position when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result (a function of controlling the main control device 101 so that a replay win is established with, for example, a black BAR double stop result);
A second control means (a function of controlling the main control device 101 so that a replay win is established with a stop result that does not stop a black BAR, for example) controls each of the rotating bodies so that a second special pattern combination different from the first special pattern combination can be stopped at the valid position when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature BC5, wherein the special notification means executes, as the special notification, a notification that makes it possible to stop the first special pattern combination.

According to the above configuration, a special notification is made based on the winning combination when a special result is won. In this way, in a configuration where a special notification is made based on a winning special result, there is no need for a configuration that changes the probability of winning a special result before and after the winning of a specific result, and the effect of feature BC5 can be achieved with a simple configuration.

Feature BC7. The gaming machine described in any one of Features BC1 to BC6, characterized in that the special notification means, in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, sets the game resulting in the specific result winning, in which the execution of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is restricted by the restriction means, as a trigger game, and makes it easier to notify the transition lottery by the transition lottery means that has already been executed in a game after the trigger game than in a game before the trigger game.

According to the above configuration, when a specific result is won while the transition result winning is reserved, the game in which the specific result is won becomes the trigger game, and a notification regarding the executed transition lottery is more likely to be made in a game after the trigger game than in a game before the trigger game. In this way, even if a transition lottery has already been executed, it is possible to make it seem as if the transition lottery was held based on the specific result of the trigger game.

Feature BC8. The specific result is set to a plurality of types,
The gaming machine described in feature BC7 is characterized in that the special notification means is capable of varying the probability that a notification regarding the transition lottery already executed by the transition lottery means will be made more likely in a game after the trigger game than in a game before the trigger game, depending on the type of specific result for which the transition lottery by the transition lottery means will be restricted by the restriction means.

According to the above configuration, the probability that a notification regarding the transition lottery will be made in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific result was won varies depending on the type of reserved specific result, so that the notification by the special notification means can be made to better suit the actual circumstances of the transition lottery. Specifically, for example, it is common for there to be specific results that are easier to win the transition lottery and results that are harder to win, and by adjusting the change in the reserved notification rate depending on the winning probability, it is possible to further strengthen the impression that the transition lottery was held based on the specific result of the trigger game.

Feature BC9. A gaming machine according to any one of features BC1 to BC8, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing a fourth section display process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a notification regarding the lottery by the executed transition lottery means when the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and then the transition result winning is realized.

The above configuration can minimize the occurrence of events such as not winning the specific result during the reservation, or, even if the specific result is won, in a configuration in which a special notification is made based on the winning special result, such as feature BC5, where a winning transition result is achieved without a special notification being made, and the player transitions to an advantageous state without being notified of the lottery by the transition lottery means that has already been executed. This allows the notification of the lottery by the transition lottery means to be executed in an optimal manner.

Feature BC10. The first result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order;
The second result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
A gaming machine described in any one of features BC1 to BC9, characterized in that an order notification (push order notification) regarding a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed as the mode notification by the specified notification means based on the lottery result by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, a sequence notification regarding the stopping sequence of multiple rotating bodies can be executed as a status notification. In this way, for example, even players who are not good at the eye-pressing operation to aim for a specific pattern on the rotating body can fully enjoy the benefits of the status notification.

The above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first benefit (for example, nine medals awarded based on the first small win in a three-bet game) is awarded, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode and the second result winning is established, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a three-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means may be characterized in that it is capable of executing a mode notification, by the specified notification means, a sequence notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the benefit to be awarded.

Feature BC11. A gaming machine according to any one of features BC1 to BC10, characterized in that the specific gaming state is set to at least one of a high frequency state in which the mode notification is executed more frequently than in the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which the transition to the high frequency state is easier than in the normal gaming state, and a pre-transition state (premonition mode) in which a transition lottery to the high frequency state or the high probability state has been won and the transition has not yet occurred.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the gameability is improved. Moreover, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are both at a stage before the advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as that of the normal game state. By configuring the specific notification means to start notifying the player when the specific game state is transitioned to, including such a state, it is possible to preferably avoid an event where the player ends the game without noticing that the specific game state has been transitioned to. In other words, if the state transition is to the high frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by the mode notification, and by configuring the transition to such a state before the high frequency state to be notified by the start of notification by the specific notification means, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means and to improve the effect of increasing the expectation for the specific game state described in feature BC1.

<Characteristic BD group>
Feature BD1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result;
A transition means (a function of executing a bonus state process by the main control device 101) for transitioning the gaming state to an advantageous state for the player based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result and a transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the effective position;
A reserve means (a function for executing the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) reserves the winning of the transition result until the picture combination for the transition stops at the valid position when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result;
In a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carry-over state), when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a restriction means (a function of executing the process of step S702 by the main control device 101) restricts the execution of the lottery by the transfer lottery means;
Equipped with
A plurality of replay states (particularly, a fifth RT state to an eighth RT state) are set as game states, in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined replay result is different from the normal game state;
A replay state transition means capable of transitioning the game state to one of the plurality of replay states when a specific condition including a winning condition for which the transition result winning is reserved by the reserve means is established (a function of executing a process to transition to one of the fifth RT state to the eighth RT state in the special RT state process of the main control device 101);
A selection means for selecting the re-play state to be transitioned to based on a specific event related to the specific game state when the game state is transitioned to the re-play state by the re-play state transition means (a function for executing a process for setting the RT state depending on the presence or absence of a challenge mode win flag, an attack mode win flag, and a specialized zone win flag in the special RT state process of the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and when the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result stops, the player transitions to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and if the transition pattern combination does not stop, the winning of the transition result is withheld. In this configuration, further, a specific game state is provided in which the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the rotating body, and the degree of advantage is varied depending on the presence or absence of a mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between an advantageous state and a specific game state can occur in each game, and the playability is significantly improved.

On the other hand, if a lottery for transition to a specific game state is held when a transition to an advantageous state has been confirmed, a player may perform a stop operation that does not stop the picture combination for the transition, thereby preventing the transition to the advantageous state from occurring, and an unlimited number of lotteries for transition to the specific game state may be held. This would result in a significant difference in the degree of advantage between a player who can perform a stop operation that does not stop the picture combination for the transition and a player who cannot perform such a stop operation, which is undesirable from the perspective of fairness in the game, and is undesirable from the perspective of fairness in the first place, since the payout rate may differ from the payout rate intended by the design. Therefore, by restricting the execution of the lottery for transition to the specific game state when a transition to an advantageous state has been confirmed, the intended payout rate can be achieved and the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

Also, by making it possible to reserve the winning transition result, there is an advantage in that if the player plays the game while the transition to the advantageous state is internally confirmed and this is suggested by the performance, etc., the expectation of the transition to the advantageous state is maintained. On the other hand, if the picture combination for the transition itself cannot be stopped easily, there are many cases where the specific result is reached and the execution of the lottery for the specific state is restricted, and the player may feel that he has lost out. Therefore, based on the situation in which such a situation may occur, that is, the situation in which the winning transition result is reserved in the reservation means, the game is transitioned to a re-play state in which the probability of a predetermined re-play result changes, that is, a so-called RT state, and the type of the re-play state is selected based on a specific event related to the specific game state. In this way, a game of predicting a specific event related to the specific game state from the type of re-play state is added, and it becomes possible to enjoy the game related to the specific game state even in a situation in which the execution of the lottery for the specific game state is restricted due to the specific result. As a result of the above, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

Feature BD2. The transition lottery means is capable of executing the transition lottery based on the transition result win;
The gaming machine described in feature BD1, wherein the specific event is the content of the transition lottery conducted based on the winning transition result.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a transition to a replay state is made based on a winning transition result, the replay state to which the player transitions differs depending on the content of the transition lottery held based on the winning transition result. In this way, it is possible to ideally realize a game in which the content of the transition lottery can be predicted from the transitioned replay state.

Feature BD3. A means for controlling each of the revolving bodies so that a specific replay pattern combination can be stopped at the valid position when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific replay result (special replay) is provided (a function for executing a reel control process in the main control device 101);
A gaming machine according to feature BD1 or BD2, characterized in that the frequency at which the specific re-play pattern combination stops varies depending on the type of re-play state selected by the selection means.

According to the above configuration, the frequency with which the specific re-play pattern combination that may appear when the specific re-play result is won varies depending on the type of re-play state. In this way, it is possible to predict the type of re-play state from the frequency with which the specific re-play pattern combination appears, and thereby to predict a specific event related to the specific play state.

Feature BD4. The gaming machine described in feature BD3, characterized in that the probability of the specific replay result varies depending on the type of the replay state.

According to the above configuration, since the probability of winning the specific replay result itself differs, the occurrence rate of the specific replay pattern combination may also differ depending on the type of replay state. In this way, for example, when a specific replay result is won, there is no need to control whether or not to stop the specific replay pattern combination based on the stop order or stop timing. Therefore, with a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to realize a game in which a specific event for a specific game state is predicted from the occurrence rate of the specific replay pattern combination.

Feature BD5. A gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD4, characterized in that the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be one of the replay results is the same or approximately the same, regardless of the type of the replay state.

According to the above configuration, when a winning transition result is reserved, in order to realize a game of predicting a specific event in a specific game state, there is no need to change the degree of advantage of the replay state to which the game transitions during the reservation. Therefore, it is possible to realize the playability of the specific game state without considering the payout rate, etc.

Note that "the same probability or nearly the same probability" does not only mean that the probability is exactly the same, but also includes a difference in probability that is so small that the player has difficulty perceiving the difference in probability.

Feature BD7. The specific condition includes a non-winning condition that is satisfied without the transition result winning being reserved by the reservation means (for example, a double role that does not result in a BB win),
A gaming machine described in any one of features BD1 to BD6, characterized in that the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be one of the re-play results is the same or approximately the same for the re-play state selected by the selection means based on the non-winning condition being fulfilled and the re-play state selected by the selection means based on the winning condition being fulfilled.

According to the above configuration, the probability of a replay result is the same or nearly the same for a replay state to which a transition is made based on the reservation of a transition result winning result by the reservation means and a replay state in which this is not the case. By doing this, when playing a game in which a player predicts whether a transition result winning result is reserved when transitioning to a replay state, it is possible to make this prediction impossible from the winning probability of the replay result, thereby enhancing the depth of the predictive game.

Feature BD8. A normal replay result (normal replay) is set as the replay result that can be won in the normal gaming state;
A specific replay result (special replay) is set as the replay result that can be won in the replay state,
A means for controlling each of the revolving bodies so that a picture combination for normal replay can be stopped at the valid position when the lottery result by the lottery means is the normal replay result (a function for executing a process for winning a replay with the stop result of the normal replay in the reel control process of the main control device 101);
A means for controlling each of the revolving bodies so that a specific replay pattern combination can be stopped at the valid position when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific replay result (special replay) (a function for executing a process for winning a replay with a stop result of, for example, a black BAR stop in a reel control process of the main control device 101);
A means for controlling each of the revolving bodies so that the picture combination for the normal replay can be stopped at the valid position when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific replay result (special replay) (a function for executing a process for winning a replay with the stop result of the normal replay in the reel control process of the main control device 101);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features BD1 to BD7, characterized in that the frequency at which the specific re-play pattern combination stops varies depending on the type of re-play state selected by the selection means.

According to the above configuration, in a game in which the type of replay state is predicted from the occurrence rate of a specific replay pattern combination, even when a specific replay result is won, there may be cases in which the same stop result as the normal replay result is obtained. In this way, it is possible to change the occurrence rate of a specific replay pattern combination without changing the winning probability of the specific replay result, simply by changing whether a specific replay pattern combination or a normal replay pattern combination is stopped when a specific replay result is won. Thus, with a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to realize a game in which the type of replay state is predicted from the occurrence rate of a specific replay pattern combination, and thereby a specific event related to a specific game state is predicted.

Feature BD9. The transition lottery means is capable of executing the transition lottery based on the transition result win;
The transition result includes a first transition result and a second transition result,
The specific game states include a plurality of predetermined states (such as an attack mode, a challenge mode, a super attack mode, and a premonition mode) each having a different degree of advantage for a player,
the transition lottery means, when executing the transition lottery based on the winning of the first transition result, performs a lottery for a transition to a first predetermined state among the specific game states, and, when executing the transition lottery based on the winning of the second transition result, performs a lottery for a transition to a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state among the specific game states;
The gaming machine described in any one of features BD1 to BD8, characterized in that the re-play state transition means transitions to a first re-play state among the multiple re-play states on condition that the winning of the first transition result is reserved by the reservation means, and transitions to a second re-play state different from the first re-play state among the multiple re-play states on condition that the winning of the first transition result is reserved by the reservation means.

According to the above configuration, the type of transition result, the type of replay state, and the content of the specific game state in which the transition lottery is performed are each linked. In other words, there will be no events in which the game transitions to the first replay state despite the second transition result being a win, or the game transitions to the second replay state despite the first transition result being a win. This ensures game transparency, and makes it possible to ideally realize a game in which a specific game state is predicted from the type of replay state.

Feature BD10: A specific game state notification means (a function of executing the first to fourth section display processes by the main control device 101) that starts notification by turning on a specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) based on the transition of the game state to the specific game state, and ends notification by turning off the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state;
When the game state is transitioned to the re-play state by the re-play state transition means, a means capable of restricting the start of notification by the specific game state notification means (a function of executing a process of setting a premonition mode when an attack mode or the like is won in the display control device 81);
A gaming machine described in any one of features BD1 to BD9, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to the above configuration, when a specific game state is entered, a notification is started by the specific game state notification means, and the notification ends when the specific game state ends. In other words, by checking whether or not a notification is issued by a specific notification means of the specific game state notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not a specific game state is entered, and this can eliminate the sense of inequality between, for example, a player who has entered a specific game state but does not realize that he or she has finished playing, and a player who sits down at the same gaming machine after the player who finished playing. This makes it possible for all players to enjoy playing with special notifications equally to their heart's content.

In addition, when transitioning to a re-play state by the re-play state transition means, the start of notification by the specific game state notification means may be restricted. In this way, when transitioning to a re-play state based on the reservation means reserving a transition result win, a game can be preferably executed in which a specific event related to the specific game state is predicted from the type of re-play state. In other words, if notification has been started by the specific game state notification means, in a configuration in which the presence or absence of transition to a specific game state is treated as a specific event, the specific event will be known from the notification by the specific game state notification means without the need to predict it.

Feature BD11. The first result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order;
The second result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
A gaming machine described in any one of features BD1 to BD10, characterized in that an order notification (push order notification) regarding a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed as the mode notification by the specified notification means based on the lottery result by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, a sequence notification regarding the stopping sequence of multiple rotating bodies can be executed as a status notification. In this way, for example, even players who are not good at the eye-pressing operation to aim for a specific pattern on the rotating body can fully enjoy the benefits of the status notification.

The above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first benefit (for example, nine medals awarded based on the first small win in a three-bet game) is awarded, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode and the second result winning is established, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a three-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means may be characterized in that it is capable of executing a mode notification, by the specified notification means, a sequence notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the benefit to be awarded.

Feature BD12. A gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD11, characterized in that the specific gaming state is set to at least one of a high frequency state in which the mode notification is executed more frequently than in the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which the transition to the high frequency state is easier than in the normal gaming state, and a pre-transition state (premonition mode) in which a transition lottery to the high frequency state or the high probability state has been won and the transition has not yet occurred.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the gameability is improved. Moreover, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are both at a stage before the advantage level is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage level of each game is almost the same as that of the normal game state. By configuring the specific notification means to start notifying the player when the specific game state is transitioned to, including such a state, it is possible to preferably avoid an event in which the player ends the game without noticing that the specific game state has been transitioned to. In other words, if the state transition is to the high frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by the mode notification, and by configuring the transition to such a state before the high frequency state to be notified by the start of notification by the specific notification means, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means and to improve the effect of increasing the expectation for the specific game state described in feature BD1.

Feature BD13. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result;
A transition means (a function of executing a bonus state process by the main control device 101) for transitioning the gaming state to an advantageous state for the player based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result and a transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the effective position;
A reserve means (a function for executing the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) reserves the winning of the transition result until the picture combination for the transition stops at the valid position when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result;
In a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carry-over state), when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a restriction means (a function of executing the process of step S702 by the main control device 101) restricts the execution of the lottery by the transfer lottery means;
Equipped with
A plurality of replay states (particularly, a fifth RT state to an eighth RT state) are set as game states, in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined replay result is different from the normal game state;
The plurality of re-play states are set so as to have different probabilities of a specific re-play result among the re-play results,
The transition lottery means is capable of executing a lottery for transition to the specific gaming state based on the winning of the transition result,
A replay state transition means capable of transitioning the game state to one of the plurality of replay states when a specific condition including a winning condition for which the transition result winning is reserved by the reserve means is established (a function of executing a process to transition to one of the fifth RT state to the eighth RT state in the special RT state process of the main control device 101);
A selection means for selecting the re-play state to be transitioned to according to the winning expectation of the transition lottery to the specific play state when the game state is transitioned to the re-play state by the re-play state transition means (a function for executing a process for setting the RT state according to the presence or absence of a challenge mode winning flag, an attack mode winning flag, and a specialized zone winning flag in the special RT state process of the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and when the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result stops, the player transitions to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and if the transition pattern combination does not stop, the winning of the transition result is withheld. In this configuration, further, a specific game state is provided in which the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the rotating body, and the degree of advantage is varied depending on the presence or absence of a mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between an advantageous state and a specific game state can occur in each game, and the playability is significantly improved.

On the other hand, if a lottery for transition to a specific game state is held when a transition to an advantageous state has been confirmed, a player may perform a stop operation that does not stop the picture combination for the transition, thereby preventing the transition to the advantageous state from occurring, and an unlimited number of lotteries for transition to the specific game state may be held. This would result in a significant difference in the degree of advantage between a player who can perform a stop operation that does not stop the picture combination for the transition and a player who cannot perform such a stop operation, which is undesirable from the perspective of fairness in the game, and is undesirable from the perspective of fairness in the first place, since the payout rate may differ from the payout rate intended by the design. Therefore, by restricting the execution of the lottery for transition to the specific game state when a transition to an advantageous state has been confirmed, the intended payout rate can be achieved and the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

In addition, by making it possible to reserve the winning transition result, there is also the advantage that if the player plays the game while the transition to the advantageous state is internally confirmed and this is suggested by the performance, etc., the expectation of the transition to the advantageous state is maintained. On the other hand, if the picture combination for the transition itself cannot be stopped easily, there are many cases where the specific result is reached and the execution of the lottery for the specific state is restricted, and the player may feel that he has lost. Therefore, based on the situation in which such a situation may occur, that is, the situation in which the winning transition result is reserved in the reservation means, the game is configured to transition to one of multiple re-play states with different probabilities of the specific re-play result, and the type of the re-play state is selected according to the expected probability of winning the lottery for the transition to the specific game state. In this way, a game is added in which the type of re-play state is predicted and understood from the winning probability of the specific re-play result, and the expected probability of winning the lottery for the transition to the specific game state is predicted, making it possible to enjoy the game related to the specific game state even in a situation in which the execution of the lottery for the specific game state is restricted due to the specific result. As a result of the above, it is possible to effectively increase interest in the game.

Note that the configurations of features BD1 to BD12 above may be applied individually to feature BD13, or may be applied in combination with each other.

<Feature BE group>
Feature BE1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result;
A specific game state notification means (a function of executing the first to fourth section display processes by the main control device 101) starts notification by the specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) based on the transition of the game state to the specific game state, and ends the notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state;
A transition means (a function of executing a bonus state process by the main control device 101) for transitioning the gaming state to an advantageous state for the player based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result and a transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the effective position;
A reserve means (a function for executing the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) reserves the winning of the transition result until the picture combination for the transition stops at the valid position when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result;
Equipped with
As the specified result, a duplicate result including the transition result (e.g., 1 strong cherry duplicate, 1 strong watermelon duplicate, 1 chance A duplicate) and a non-duplicate result not including the transition result (e.g., strong cherry, strong watermelon, chance A) are set,
The specific game state notifying means includes:
a means for starting a notification by the specific notification means at a timing before allowing the operation of the game following the starting game, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the non-overlapping result and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won (a function for executing a first section display process in the main control device 101);
a means (function for executing a fourth interval display process in the main control device 101) for setting a game in which a transition to the advantageous state is made by stopping the picture combination for the transition as a starting game when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the overlap result or the transition result and the lottery for the transition to the specific game state is won, not starting notification by the specific notification means at a timing prior to the starting game, and starting notification by the specific notification means at a timing prior to allowing the operation of the game following the starting game;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is held by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the stop operation mode of the stop operation means that stops the rotating body is set to result in a first result win or a second result win, and a mode notification may be issued regarding these stop operation modes, creating a gameplay that changes whether or not a win occurs depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification, thereby varying the degree of advantage.

In this case, when the game transitions to a specific game state where a mode notification is more likely to be made, notification by the specific notification means begins, and when the specific game state ends, notification by the specific notification means also ends. In other words, by checking whether or not a notification has been made by the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game is in a specific game state, and this can eliminate the sense of inequality between, for example, a player who has transitioned to a specific game state but quits playing without realizing it, and a player who sits down at the same gaming machine after the previous player has finished playing. This makes it possible for all players to enjoy playing with mode notifications to the fullest on an equal basis.

Moreover, the notification by the specific game state notification means starts with the game in which the lottery result that triggered the transition lottery to the specific game state is likely to be a winning game, and starts before the operation of the game following the starting game is permitted, and the timing of the start of the notification is a time-limited notification. With this configuration, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of ending the game despite winning the lottery to transition to the specific game state.

On the other hand, if the notification of the transition lottery is made time-limited as described above, the result of the transition lottery can be clearly determined depending on whether or not the specific game state notification means starts to notify, which could be seen as making the presentation less interesting.

In the above configuration, the lottery for transition to the specific game state is set up so that it can be performed based on overlapping results with a transition result (a so-called jackpot) that is a trigger for transition to an advantageous state and whose winning may be withheld until a prize is won, and non-overlapping results that are not overlapping with the transition result, and the specific game state notification means starts to notify differently for overlapping results and non-overlapping results.

More specifically, if a non-overlapping result triggers a win in the lottery for transitioning to a specific game state, the game for which the non-overlapping result was won is set as the starting game, and notification by the specific game state notification means is started before operations for the next game are permitted, and if a result including a transition result (mainly a duplicate result) triggers a win in the lottery for transitioning to a specific game state, the game in which the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result stops and a transition to an advantageous state is made as the starting game, and notification by the specific game state notification means is started before operations for the next game are permitted.

By doing this, even if a stop result appears that triggers a lottery to transition to a specific game state, and the specific game state notification means does not start announcing the game, the possibility of the above-mentioned overlapping result remains, so it is possible to make the notification by the specific game state notification means a time-limited notification that has a high presentation effect. This makes it possible to ideally increase interest.

Feature BE2. As the overlap result, a first overlap result (e.g., strong cherry overlap 1) that is an overlap result with a first specific result (e.g., strong cherry) among the specific results is set;
As the non-overlapping result, a first non-overlapping result (e.g., strong cherry) that is a non-overlapping result of the first specific result (e.g., strong cherry) among the specific results is set,
The reward granting means includes:
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first overlap result, a bonus corresponding to the first specific result is awarded based on the fact that a picture combination for the first specific result has stopped at the valid position;
The gaming machine described in feature BE1 is characterized in that when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first non-duplicate result, a bonus corresponding to the first specific result is awarded based on the picture combination for the first specific result stopping at the valid position.

According to the above configuration, in both the game in which the first overlapping result, which is a overlapping win of the first specific result and the game in which the first non-overlapping result, which is a single win of the first specific result, is won, the picture combination for the first specific result stops and the first specific result is won, so it is difficult to determine from the stopped numbers which result the first overlapping result or the first non-overlapping result has been won. On the other hand, the notification by the specific game state notification means starts the game in which the transition result win is made in the case of the first overlapping result, and starts the game in which the first specific result win is made in the case of the first non-overlapping result. Therefore, even if the transition lottery to the specific game state is won by either result, an event may occur in which the start timing of the notification by the specific game state notification means is different. In other words, even if the picture combination for the first specific result stops and the specific game state notification means does not start notifying the player before the operation of the next game of that game is permitted, the possibility remains that the picture combination for the first specific result is based on the first specific result in the first overlapping result, and it is possible to maintain a sense of anticipation even if the lottery for transition to the specific game state is not won.

Feature BE3. As the overlap result, a second overlap result (e.g., strong watermelon overlap 1) that is an overlap result with a second identification result (e.g., strong watermelon) among the identification results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a second non-overlapping result (e.g., strong watermelon) that is a non-overlapping result of the second identification result (e.g., strong watermelon) among the identification results is set,
The reward granting means includes:
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second overlap result, a bonus corresponding to the second specific result is awarded based on the fact that a picture combination for the second specific result has stopped at the valid position;
When the result of the drawing by the drawing means is the second non-overlapping result, a bonus corresponding to the second specific result is awarded based on the fact that the picture combination for the second specific result has stopped at the valid position;
The gaming machine described in feature BE2, characterized in that the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is different between the lottery based on the first specific result and the lottery based on the second specific result.

According to the above configuration, the playability of feature BE2 also takes into account the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means. That is, for example, if the first specific result is more likely to win the transition lottery than the second specific result, when the pattern combination for the first specific result stops and the notification by the specific game state notification means has not started, the possibility of winning the transition is higher than when the pattern combination for the second specific result stops and the notification by the specific game state notification means has not started, and the expectation of the first specific pattern combination appearing is further increased. On the other hand, when the pattern combination for the second specific result stops and the notification by the specific game state notification means has not started, the surprise effect is enhanced when the first specific pattern combination appears thereafter. As described above, by enjoying the stop results while taking into account the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means, the playability of predicting the result of the transition lottery from the stop results during reservation is significantly improved.

Feature BE4. As the overlap result, a third overlap result (e.g., Chance A overlap 1) that is an overlap result with a third specific result (e.g., Chance A) among the specific results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a third non-overlapping result (e.g., Chance A) that is a non-overlapping result of the third specific result (e.g., Chance A) among the specific results is set,
The reward granting means includes:
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the third overlap result, a bonus corresponding to the third specific result is awarded based on the fact that a picture combination for the third specific result has stopped at the valid position;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the third non-overlapping result, a bonus corresponding to the third specific result is awarded based on the fact that the picture combination for the third specific result has stopped at the valid position;
A gaming machine described in feature BE2 or feature BE3, characterized in that the ratio of the overlap result to the non-overlapping result in the lottery by the lottery means is different between the ratio of the first overlap result to the first non-overlapping result and the ratio of the third overlap result to the third non-overlapping result.

According to the above configuration, the gameplay of feature BE2 and feature BE3 also takes into account the probability of winning the transition result. That is, for example, if the ratio of the first overlap result and the first non-overlapping result is higher than the ratio of the third overlap result and the third non-overlapping result (the same stop result is more likely to be a winning transition result), if the pattern combination for the first specific result stops and the notification by the specific game state notification means has not started, the possibility of the transition result winning being reserved by the reservation means is higher than the case where the pattern combination for the third specific result stops and the notification by the specific game state notification means has not started. In other words, in the configuration of feature BE3, if it is a non-overlapping result and a specific game state, the notification by the specific game state notification means starts in that game, so if the pattern combination for the first specific result stops and the notification by the specific game state notification means has not started as described above, the possibility of winning the specific game state is higher than the case of the pattern combination for the third specific result. As described above, by making the stop numbers fun by taking into account the probability of winning the transfer result, the gameplay of predicting the result of the transfer lottery from the stop numbers while it is reserved is greatly improved.

Feature BE5. As the overlap result, a fourth overlap result (e.g., middle bell overlap 1) that is an overlap result with a fourth identification result (e.g., middle bell) among the identification results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a fourth non-overlapping result (e.g., a middle bell) that is a non-overlapping result of the fourth identification result (e.g., a middle bell) among the identification results is set,
The reward granting means includes:
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fourth overlap result, a bonus corresponding to the fourth specific result is awarded based on the fact that a picture combination for the fourth specific result has stopped at the valid position;
When the result of the drawing by the drawing means is the fourth non-overlapping result, a bonus corresponding to the fourth specific result is awarded based on the fact that the picture combination for the fourth specific result has stopped at the valid position;
The specific game state includes a plurality of predetermined states (such as an attack mode, a challenge mode, a super attack mode, and a premonition mode) each having a different degree of advantage for a player,
A first transition lottery which is a lottery for transition to a first predetermined state (challenge mode) and a second transition lottery which is a lottery for transition to a second predetermined state (attack mode) different from the first predetermined state are set as the transition lottery by the transition lottery means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features BE2 to BE4, characterized in that while the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery executed based on the first specific result can be won in either transition lottery, the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery executed based on the fourth specific result are set so that neither of the transition lotteries can be won.

According to the above configuration, among the specific game states, the first and second predetermined states include those that do not transition depending on the type of specific result. In other words, in the case of the first specific result, a transition can be made to either the first or second predetermined state, but in the case of the fourth specific result, a transition cannot be made to either one. In this way, when a picture combination for the first specific result corresponding to the first overlapping result or the first non-overlapping result stops, and when a picture combination for the fourth specific result corresponding to the fourth overlapping result or the fourth non-overlapping result stops, in addition to whether or not a notification is started by the specific game state notification means, a game can be played in which the subsequent trends can be enjoyed from the perspective of whether or not a transition lottery to a specific state was made.

Feature BE6. As the overlap result, a fifth overlap result (e.g., middle bell overlap 1) that is an overlap result with a fifth identification result (e.g., middle bell) among the identification results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a fifth non-overlapping result (e.g., a middle bell) that is a non-overlapping result of the fifth identification result (e.g., a middle bell) among the identification results is set,
The reward granting means includes:
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fifth overlap result, a bonus corresponding to the fifth specific result is awarded based on the fact that a picture combination for the fifth specific result has stopped at the valid position;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fifth non-duplicate result, a bonus corresponding to the fifth specific result is awarded based on the fact that the picture combination for the fifth specific result has stopped at the valid position;
The specific game state includes a plurality of predetermined states (such as an attack mode, a challenge mode, a super attack mode, and a premonition mode) each having a different degree of advantage for a player,
A first transition lottery which is a lottery for transition to a first predetermined state (challenge mode) and a second transition lottery which is a lottery for transition to a second predetermined state (super attack mode) different from the first predetermined state are set as the transition lottery by the transition lottery means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features BE2 to BE5, characterized in that while there is a possibility that neither of the first transition lotteries and the second transition lotteries executed based on the first specific result will be won, the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery executed based on the fifth specific result are set to be won in at least one of the transition lotteries.

According to the above configuration, the specific game states include the first and second predetermined states that always transition to one of the predetermined states depending on the type of specific result. In other words, in the case of the first specific result, there is a possibility that the game will not transition to either the first or second predetermined state, and in the case of the fifth specific result, the game will always transition to one of the two. In this way, when the picture combination for the first specific result corresponding to the first overlapping result or the first non-overlapping result stops, and when the picture combination for the fifth specific result corresponding to the fifth overlapping result or the fifth non-overlapping result stops, in addition to whether or not the combination is reserved and whether or not a notification is started by the specific game state notification means, a game can be played that enjoys the subsequent developments from the perspective of which predetermined state the game will transition to.

Feature BE7. The first result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order;
The second result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
A gaming machine described in any one of features BE1 to BE7, characterized in that an order notification (push order notification) regarding a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed as the mode notification by the specified notification means based on the lottery result by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, a sequence notification regarding the stopping sequence of multiple rotating bodies can be executed as a status notification. In this way, for example, even players who are not good at the eye-pressing operation to aim for a specific pattern on the rotating body can fully enjoy the benefits of the status notification.

The above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first benefit (for example, nine medals awarded based on the first small win in a three-bet game) is awarded, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode and the second result winning is established, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a three-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means may be characterized in that it is capable of executing a mode notification, by the specified notification means, a sequence notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the benefit to be awarded.

Feature BE8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features BE1 to BE7, characterized in that the specific gaming state is set to at least one of a high frequency state in which the mode notification is executed more frequently than in the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which the transition to the high frequency state is easier than in the normal gaming state, and a pre-transition state (premonition mode) in which a transition lottery to the high frequency state or the high probability state has been won and the transition has not yet occurred.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the gameability is improved. Moreover, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are both at a stage before the advantage level is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage level of each game is almost the same as that of the normal game state. By configuring the specific notification means to start notifying the player when the specific game state is transitioned to, including such a state, it is possible to preferably avoid an event where the player ends the game without noticing that the specific game state has been transitioned to. In other words, if the state transition is to the high frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by the mode notification, and by configuring the transition to such a state before the high frequency state to be notified by the start of notification by the specific notification means, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means and to improve the effect of increasing the expectation for the specific game state described in feature BE1.

<Characteristic CA group>
Feature CA1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, a picture combination for a first mode can be stopped, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode, a picture combination for a second mode different from the picture combination for the first mode can be stopped. An operation mode result (for example, a push order bell) is set.
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
A transition means (a function of executing a bonus state process by the main control device 101) for transitioning the gaming state to an advantageous state for the player based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result and a transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the effective position;
A reserve means (a function for executing the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) reserves the winning of the transition result until the picture combination for the transition stops at the valid position when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result;
Equipped with
a replay state is set as a gaming state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a replay result is higher than that in a normal gaming state;
The game machine is provided with a re-play state transition means (a function of executing a special RT state process by the main control device 101) capable of transitioning the game state to the re-play state when specific conditions are met, including a winning condition that is met when the winning of the transition result is reserved by the reservation means, and a non-winning condition that is met without the reservation of the winning of the transition result by the reservation means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the mode notification means is equipped with a special mode notification means (a function of executing notification processing for special RT by a display control device 81) which, when the lottery result by the lottery means in the re-play state becomes the operation mode result, is likely to execute the mode notification regarding the first stop operation mode if the re-play state has been entered based on the winning condition being satisfied as the specific condition, and which is likely to execute the mode notification regarding the second stop operation mode if the re-play state has been entered based on the non-winning condition being satisfied as the specific condition.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is conducted by the lottery means and the rotation of the circling body is started, when the stop operation means is operated, the circling body stops during rotation, and if the stopped number corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and when a transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result stops, the player transitions to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and if the transition pattern combination does not stop, the winning transition result is reserved.

Furthermore, a re-play state (so-called RT state) is set in which the probability of a re-play result is higher than in the normal play state, and there are cases where a transition to the re-play state occurs on the condition that a winning transition result is reserved, and cases where a transition to the re-play state occurs on the condition that a winning transition result is not reserved. Therefore, when a transition to the re-play state occurs, the player's subsequent advantage will vary greatly depending on whether or not a winning transition result is reserved, and it is thought that the player's main concern will be whether or not such a reservation is made.

The replay result here is one that does not result in so-called missed wins. For this reason, for example, if the presence or absence of the above-mentioned reservation is determined by a presentation or the like, the frequency with which eye-pressing during the replay state is required becomes relatively low, which is preferable from the viewpoint of preventing the presentation of the presence or absence of the reservation from being overlooked. On the other hand, while the stopping numbers for winning replay results are generally uniform, there is a possibility that the stopping numbers may become monotonous.

In this regard, in the above configuration, by changing the mode notification when the operation mode results in a win during the replay state, a game is added in which the presence or absence of the above-mentioned reservation is predicted depending on whether the picture combination for the first mode or the picture combination for the second mode stops. In other words, by suggesting the presence or absence of a reservation that the player is interested in during the replay state by the stopped number, and allowing the player to understand this, it is possible to not only avoid the stop number in the replay state becoming monotonous, but also to expect a dramatic effect of dramatically increasing the attention to the stop number. As a result of the above, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

Feature CA2. At least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of the execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided as game states;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result;
In a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carry-over state), when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a restriction means (a function of executing the process of step S702 by the main control device 101) restricts the execution of the lottery by the transfer lottery means;
A gaming machine as described in feature CA1, characterized by having:

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved, the execution of the transition lottery to the specific game state related to the mode notification is restricted. In other words, if the execution of the transition lottery to the specific game state related to the mode notification is restricted in the re-play state, the reservation of the transition result winning is confirmed, and if the execution of the transition lottery to the specific game state related to the mode notification is not restricted, it is confirmed that the transition result winning is not reserved. In other words, if the execution of the transition lottery is restricted, which is an unfavorable situation for the player, it will be a favorable situation for the player, where the transition result winning is reserved, and conversely, if the execution of the transition lottery is not restricted, which is a favorable situation for the player, it will be an unfavorable situation for the player, where the transition result winning is not reserved. In either case, it will be a favorable situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to achieve a well-balanced gameplay.

Feature CA3. The pattern combination for the first mode is established when a first number of predetermined specific patterns stop at a specific position (middle line L2) visible through the display unit on each of the rotating bodies,
A gaming machine described in feature CA1 or feature CA2, characterized in that the pattern combination for the second mode is formed when the specific patterns stop at the specific position on each of the rotating bodies a second number less than the first number.

According to the above configuration, the difference between the symbol combination for the first mode and the symbol combination for the second mode can be understood by the number of symbols that stop. In this way, it is possible to make it easier to understand, for example, a game in which the presence or absence of a reserve is predicted based on the difference in the symbol combination, by making the judgment based on the number of symbols that stop.

Feature CA4. The gaming machine described in Feature CA3, wherein the second number is 0.

With the above configuration, the difference in the winning combination when the first pattern combination stops and when the second pattern combination stops becomes clearer, such as whether or not a specific pattern stops at a specific position. This makes it easier to predict whether or not there is a reserve.

Furthermore, for example, in the above-mentioned prediction game, in cases where it is not desired to stop a specific pattern at a specific position any more, the above-mentioned configuration makes it possible to adjust whether or not a specific pattern stops depending on the difference in the stopping operation mode, without using a complex configuration such as preventing any more winning operation mode results, and the above-mentioned prediction game can be realized with a simpler configuration.

Feature CA5. A specifying means (black BAR stop counter) is provided to count the number of times the specific symbol stops at the specific position over a plurality of games in the replay state;
The gaming machine described in feature CA4 is characterized in that the special mode notification means is equipped with a means for disabling the execution of the mode notification for the first stop operation mode if the re-play state has been transitioned to based on the fulfillment of the non-winning condition as the specific condition when the number counted by the identification means reaches a specific number (a function for executing a process in the display control device 81 to set a push order notification presentation for non-stopping of the black BAR from a notification scenario and the value of the black BAR stop counter).

According to the above configuration, in a replay state in which a transition result win is not reserved, when the number of times a specific pattern has stopped reaches a specific number, a mode notification for the first stop operation mode corresponding to the pattern combination for the first mode is no longer executed. As a result, the specific pattern will no longer stop the first number of times as a pattern combination for the first mode, and therefore the specific pattern will not stop at a specific position as a pattern combination for the second mode. This allows the player to predict that a transition result win is not reserved when the number of times a specific pattern has stopped at a specific position does not exceed the specific number, and conversely, allows the player to understand that a transition result win is reserved when the number of times a specific pattern has stopped at a specific position exceeds the specific number.

Feature CA6. The gaming machine described in Feature CA5, wherein the special mode notification means includes a means for disabling the execution of the mode notification for the first stop operation mode when the replay state is transitioned to based on the fulfillment of the non-winning condition as the specific condition even if the number counted by the specifying means is less than the specific number, and when the number counted by the specifying means is added to the first number and exceeds the specific number (a function for executing a process in the display control device 81 to set a push order notification effect for a black BAR non-stop from the type of special replay and the value of the black BAR stop counter).

The above configuration makes it possible to prevent an event from occurring in which the number of specific symbols stopping at specific positions exceeds a specific number even when a transition result winning has not been reserved by the reservation means. Therefore, in a game in which the presence or absence of a reservation is predicted from the number of stops, a contradiction between the number of stops and the presence or absence of a reservation is unlikely to occur.

Feature CA7. As the operation mode result, a plurality of operation mode results are provided in which the number of the specific patterns stopped at the specific positions when the pattern combination for the first mode is stopped is different;
A gaming machine described in any one of features CA3 to CA6, characterized in that for any of the multiple operation mode results, when a pattern combination for the second mode stops, the number of the specific patterns that stop at the specific position is 0.

According to the above configuration, in a game where the presence or absence of a reserved symbol is predicted based on the number of stops of a specific symbol, the increase in the number of stops is varied depending on the type of operation mode result, and the rate of increase is diversified. However, if it is not desired to increase the number of stops further due to the relationship between the number of stops and the presence or absence of a reserved symbol, as in feature CA5, it is sufficient to simply notify the second stop operation mode, and the game where the presence or absence of the reserved symbol is predicted can be preferably realized.

Feature CA8. A gaming machine according to any one of features CA3 to CA7, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for executing a process for setting the addition time effect by the display control device 81) capable of changing the content (background color) of the specific effect in the specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) according to the number counted by the specific means.

According to the above configuration, the number of specific symbols that have stopped at specific positions can be ascertained from the content of the predetermined presentation by the specific notification means, and the player does not have to count the number himself. This makes it easier to play a game in which the player predicts whether or not there is a reserve based on the number of symbols that have stopped.

Feature CA9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features CA3 to CA8, characterized in that when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the operation mode result, and when each of the rotating bodies is stopped in the first stop operation mode, if the stop timing of a predetermined one of the rotating bodies is a first timing, a pattern combination for the first mode is stopped, whereas if the stop timing of the predetermined one is a second timing different from the first timing, a pattern combination different from the pattern combination for the first mode is stopped, and a pattern combination for a low number in which the number of the specific patterns stopped at the specific positions is less than the first number is stopped.

According to the above configuration, even if the stop operation mode matches the first stop operation mode (for example, even if the stop operation mode is a stop order that matches the first stop order), the first number of specific patterns will not necessarily stop at a specific position, and the timing of the stop operation, i.e., whether a pattern combination for the first mode in which the first number of specific patterns is stopped by the eye-pressing operation is stopped, or a pattern combination for a low number in which a number of specific patterns less than the first number is stopped, will be stopped, will differ. In this way, it is possible to stop specific patterns by one's own stop operation, making it seem as if the transition result has been won, and it is possible to improve playability during the replay state.

Feature CA10. A gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA9, characterized in that the stop results that stop on each of the orbiting bodies in a game that transitions to the replay state when the winning condition is met are the same as the stop results that stop on each of the orbiting bodies in a game that transitions to the replay state when the non-winning condition is met.

With the above configuration, it is no longer possible to determine whether or not a winning result is reserved from the winning number that triggers the transition to the replay state. Therefore, the gameplay of predicting and understanding whether or not a winning result is reserved from the winning number that is stopped during the replay state is not compromised.

Feature CA11. A counting means (special RT counter) for counting the number of games in the replay state to which the transition is made due to the establishment of the non-winning condition;
A means for returning the game state from the re-play state to the game state before the transition to the re-play state based on the number of games grasped by the grasping means reaching a predetermined number (a function of executing a process for returning to the original game state based on the special RT counter becoming 0 in the main control device 101);
A gaming machine described in any one of features CA1 to CA10, characterized by having:

The above configuration makes it possible to limit the replay state to which the player is transitioned without the transition result winning being reserved. This makes it possible to eliminate the inconvenience of the replay state, which has a high probability of winning the replay result, continuing indefinitely even though the transition result winning is not reserved.

With regard to the "predetermined number," if it is configured to be "a number greater than the denominator of the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be the operation mode result," it is expected that the operation mode result will be won at least once on average during the replay state, which has the advantage of making it possible to preferably realize gameplay that utilizes the stop results. Conversely, with regard to the "predetermined number," if it is configured to be "a number smaller than the denominator of the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be the operation mode result," it becomes more difficult to win the operation mode result during the replay state, which has the advantage of increasing the rarity of the stop results based on the operation mode result and increasing the attention paid to the stop results.

Feature CA12. A setting means (a function for executing a process for setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided with a plurality of setting values that can cause a change in the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of the game media, and one of the plurality of setting values is set;
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided;
A lottery is executed based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result, and the winning probability is the same regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, and the lottery is provided with a transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that executes a lottery for transition to the specific game state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features CA1 to CA11, characterized in that as the transition result, a first transition result (2nd BB) is provided in which the probability of winning by the lottery means differs depending on the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, the result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and when the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result stops, the player transitions to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and if the transition pattern combination does not stop, the transition result win is reserved. In addition, when the operation mode result is won, a specific game state is provided in which the stop result is different depending on whether or not there is a mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be held, so that a chain of advantageous states and specific game states can occur in each game, and the playability is greatly improved. Moreover, the specific game state is set so that the winning rate of the transition lottery does not differ depending on the set value that causes a change in the increase/decrease rate of the game medium, etc., so that the element of luck is increased in whether or not there is a win, and the fairness of the game is guaranteed. On the other hand, if no difference is made due to the setting value, the fun of selecting one of the multiple gaming machines installed in the gaming hall, that is, the fun of playing while predicting which setting value is set, may be lost. Therefore, in the above configuration, by providing a first transition result in which the probability of winning differs depending on the setting value as a transition result, it is possible to enjoy the game of predicting the setting value while predicting the presence or absence of a reserve based on the stop result during the replay state, while also enjoying gameplay that is linked to a specific gaming state.

In addition, the "specific game state" may be set to at least one of a high frequency state in which the mode notification is executed more frequently than in the normal game state, a high probability state in which the transition to the high frequency state is easier than in the normal game state, and a pre-transition state (premonition mode) in which the transition lottery to the high frequency state or the high probability state has been won and the transition has not yet occurred. In this case, "According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific game state is diversified, and the playability is improved. Moreover, with regard to the high probability state and the pre-transition state, both are at a stage before the advantage level is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage level of each game is approximately the same as in the normal game state. By configuring the specific notification means to start a notification when a specific gaming state is entered, including states such as the above, it is possible to preferably avoid an event in which a player ends play without noticing that a specific gaming state has been entered. In other words, if a transition to a high frequency state has occurred, the player is considered to be able to grasp the state transition by the mode notification, and by configuring the specific notification means to start a notification to notify the player of a transition to a state preceding such a high frequency state, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means. "The same applies to the following features regarding the variations of the "specific gaming state".

Feature CA13. As the transition result, a second transition result (first BB) in which the winning probability by the lottery means is common regardless of the set value set by the setting means is provided;
The gaming machine described in feature CA12 is characterized in that the re-play state transition means transitions to a common re-play state regardless of whether the first transition result win or the second transition result win is reserved in the reservation means.

The above configuration makes it possible to complicate the game of predicting the setting value while predicting whether or not a value is reserved in the replay state. In other words, even if it is determined whether or not a value is reserved in the replay state, the number of branches in the prediction of the setting value increases, such as whether the reserved value is the first transition result in which the probability of winning differs depending on the setting value, or the second transition result in which the probability of winning does not differ depending on the setting value, making the game of predicting the setting value more diverse and improving playability.

Feature CA14. At least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of the execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided as game states;
The transition lottery means is capable of executing a lottery for transition to the specific gaming state based on the winning of the transition result,
a specific game state notifying means (a function of executing a first section display process to a fourth section display process by the main control device 101) which starts notifying by turning on a specific notifying means (an eighth display segment N8) when the game state transitions to the specific game state, and ends notifying by turning off the specific notifying means when the specific game state ends,
The specific game state notifying means includes:
a first means (a function of executing a first section display process by the main control device 101) for starting a notification by the specific notification means at a timing before allowing an operation of a game following the starting game, when the game result that triggered the transition lottery by the transition lottery means does not include the transition result, and
a second means (a function of executing a fourth section display process by the main control device 101) for starting a notification by the specific notification means at a timing before allowing the operation of the game following the starting game, when the game result that triggered the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is a result including the transition result, and
A gaming machine described in any one of features CA1 to CA13, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to the above configuration, the result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and when the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result stops, the player transitions to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and if the transition pattern combination does not stop, the transition result win is reserved. In addition, when the operation mode result is won, a specific game state is provided in which the stop result varies depending on the presence or absence of a mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be held, so that a chain between an advantageous state and a specific game state can occur in each game, significantly improving the gameability.

In this configuration, when a special game state is entered, a notification is initiated by the special notification means, and the notification ends when the special game state ends. In other words, by checking whether or not a notification is issued by the special notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not a special game state is entered, and this can eliminate the sense of inequality between, for example, a player who has entered a special game state but quits playing without realizing it, and a player who sits down at the same gaming machine after the previous player has finished playing. This makes it possible for all players to enjoy playing with special notifications equally to their heart's content.

Moreover, the notification by the specific notification means is started at least before the operation of the game following the starting game in which the lottery result that triggered the start of the specific gaming state is won is permitted, and the start timing of the notification is a time-limited notification. More specifically, if the lottery result that triggered the start is a result that does not include a transition result and the transition result winning is not reserved, the notification is started before the operation of the game following the game in which the lottery result winning is established is permitted, and if the lottery result that triggered the start is a result that includes a transition result and the transition result winning can be reserved, the notification is started before the operation of the game following the game in which the transition result winning is established is permitted. In other words, basically, the notification is started in the game in which the lottery result winning that triggered the start of the specific gaming state is won, but if the transition result winning is reserved, the start of the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is restricted until the transition result winning is established. In this case, for example, in a game in which the game result may be a trigger for starting a specific game state, if the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started, it is either (1) a case where the transition lottery to the specific game state is won and the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, (2) a case where the transition lottery to the specific game state is not won and the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, or (3) a case where neither the transition lottery to the specific game state nor the transition result is won. In this respect, as in the above feature CA1, since it is possible to play a game in which the presence or absence of a transition result winning is guessed from the stop result of the operation mode result, in relation to the presence or absence of the start of the notification by the specific game state notification means, if the notification is not started, it is possible to narrow down the above case to (1) or (2) or case (3) from the stop result of the operation mode result. In this way, the gameplay of guessing the presence or absence of a reservation based on the stop result can be made more advanced, and interest is improved.

In particular, in a configuration having a first transition result in which the winning probability differs depending on the setting value and a second transition result in which there is no difference as a transition result, such as feature CA12 or feature CA13, if it is assumed that the winning probability of the transition lottery to a specific game state does not differ depending on the setting value, the first transition result is a configuration in which a transition lottery to a specific game state cannot be held, and the second transition result is a configuration in which a transition lottery to a specific game state can be held. In this case, in the above cases (1) and (2), if the first transition result is reserved, it is case (2), and if the second transition result is reserved, it is case (1), and it is possible to narrow down which case it is in relation to the type of transition result.

Feature CA15. As a result of the operation mode,
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, a first operation mode result (e.g., push order bell) in which a picture combination of a first mode corresponding to a first result can be stopped as a picture combination for the first mode, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in the second stop operation mode, a picture combination of a second mode corresponding to a second result different from the first result can be stopped as a picture combination for the second mode (e.g., push order bell);
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, a picture combination of a third mode corresponding to a third result can be stopped as a picture combination for the first mode, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in the second stop operation mode, a first operation mode result (e.g., a special replay) is set in which a picture combination of a fourth mode, which is a picture combination for the second mode and corresponds to the third result and is different from the picture combination of the third mode, can be stopped as a picture combination for the second mode,
A gaming machine described in any one of features CA1 to CA14, characterized in that the special mode notification means executes the mode notification if the operation mode result is the second operation mode result, but does not execute the mode notification if the operation mode result is the first operation mode result.

According to the above configuration, in a game in which the presence or absence of reserve is predicted from the stop results when the operation mode result is a winning operation, if the operation mode result is the second operation mode result, the stop results are adjusted by the mode notification, whereas if the operation mode result is the first operation mode result, no mode notification is made and no adjustment of the stop results is made. The first operation mode result and the second operation mode result are such that the winning result of the first operation mode result may differ depending on the stopping operation mode, whereas the winning result of the second operation mode result is the same regardless of the stopping operation mode. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game in which the presence or absence of reserve is predicted from the stopping results when the operation mode result is a winning operation, within a range that does not cause a change in the player's profit. Therefore, when setting the game to be predicted, it is not necessary to consider the payout rate, etc., and it can be set in anticipation of pure performance effects.

Feature CA16. As the operation mode result, when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the picture combination for the first mode can be stopped, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, a sequence corresponding result (e.g., a push order bell) is set such that the picture combination for the second mode can be stopped;
The gaming machine described in any one of features CA1 to CA15, characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means is the order-corresponding result, the mode notification means can execute an order notification (push order notification) regarding a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order as the mode notification.

According to the above configuration, a sequence notification regarding the stopping sequence of multiple rotating bodies can be executed as a status notification. In this way, for example, even players who are not good at the eye-pressing operation to aim for a specific pattern on the rotating body can fully enjoy the benefits of the status notification.

The above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first benefit (for example, nine medals awarded based on the first small win in a three-bet game) is awarded, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode and the second result winning is established, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a three-bet game) is awarded,
The mode notification means may be characterized in that it is capable of executing a mode notification, by the specified notification means, a sequence notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the benefit to be awarded.

<Feature CB group>
Feature CB1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, a first mode pattern combination corresponding to a first result can be stopped, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode, a first operation mode result (e.g., push order bell) in which a pattern combination corresponding to a second result different from the first result and a pattern combination of a second mode different from the pattern combination of the first mode can be stopped;
When each of the stop operation means is operated in a third stop operation mode, a third pattern combination corresponding to a third result can be stopped, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in a fourth stop operation mode different from the third stop operation mode, a second operation mode result (e.g., a special replay) is set in which a fourth pattern combination corresponding to the third result and different from the third pattern can be stopped.
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first operation mode result, a first mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a first mode notification (push order notification) regarding the stop operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode by a first notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68);
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the second operation mode result, a second mode notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) is capable of executing a second mode notification (push order notification performance) regarding the stop operation mode including the third stop operation mode and the fourth stop operation mode (a function of executing a push order notification process by the display control device 81);
Equipped with
a first specific state (advantageous zone) in which the first mode notification by the first mode notification means and the second mode notification by the second mode notification means are both permitted;
a second specific state (normal section) in which the execution of the first mode notification by the first mode notification means is restricted, while the execution of the second mode notification by the second mode notification means is permitted;
is set,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second specific state, it is provided with a suggestion means (a function of executing a special RT notification process by a display control device 81) that suggests the degree of advantage after the second specific state based on the second mode notification by the second mode notification means.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, a first operation mode result is set in which the winning result differs depending on the stopping operation mode of the rotating body, and a gameplay that changes the degree of advantage depending on whether or not a first mode notification is given when the first operation mode result is won is realized. In addition, a second operation mode result is set in which the winning result is common depending on the stopping operation mode of the rotating body, so that a gameplay that suppresses gambling can be realized without excessively changing the degree of advantage by, for example, generating a second mode notification when the second operation mode result is won by interweaving it with the first mode notification as the first specific state.

In this configuration, a second specific state is set in which the execution of the first mode notification is restricted while the execution of the second mode notification is permitted. By setting such a second specific state, it is possible to realize a game in which the mode notification is performed but the mode notification does not cause a change in the advantageous degree, and this can contribute to the creation of a new game that breaks away from the one-sided game of simply aiming to acquire game media through the mode notification. However, it can be said that the reality is that while players would like to enjoy such a new game, they do not not want to acquire game media, etc., and are still very interested in the advantageous degree. Therefore, if the second specific state is configured to suggest the advantageous degree after the second specific state using the mode notification, a game of predicting the subsequent development by the mode notification is added, and the game in the second specific state in which the advantageous degree does not change due to the mode notification itself can be improved. As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Feature CB2. The first specific state is a state in which at least the frequency of the first mode notification by the first mode notification means can be higher than that in a normal gaming state;
A first transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) for executing a first transition lottery as to whether or not to transition the game state to the first specific state;
a specific notification execution means (a function of executing a first section display process to a fourth section display process by the main control device 101) that starts a notification by a specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) based on a win in the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means, and ends the notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the first specific state;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature CB1 is characterized in that the specific notification execution means does not perform a notification by the specific notification means in the second specific state even if the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is won.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration having a first specific state in which the execution of the first mode notification and the second mode notification is permitted, and a second specific state in which only the execution of the second mode notification is permitted, the first specific state is set so that the execution frequency of the first mode notification can be higher than that of the normal game state, so it is considered that the player plays the game while hoping to transition to the first specific state. In this regard, when the first transition lottery to the first specific state is won, notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the first specific state ends, notification by the specific notification means ends, so it is possible to confirm whether or not the first specific state is in place based on the presence or absence of notification by the specific notification means. In this way, for example, it is possible to prevent a player from quitting the game without realizing that he or she has won the first transition lottery to the first specific state, and it is possible to eliminate the bias in the interests of the player who quits the game and the successor player who plays after him.

In this way, by providing a specific notification means that clearly indicates whether or not the first specific state is reached, it is possible to expect the effect of ensuring the fairness of the game as described above, but on the other hand, the player may only focus on the specific notification means regardless of the game result, the stop results, the occurrence of effects, etc., and this may reduce the effect of the effects. Therefore, in the above configuration, since the specific notification means is not notified in the first place in the second specific state, it is possible to encourage the player, who has been paying the utmost attention to the result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means, i.e., the start of the notification by the specific notification means, to shift his/her attention to the second mode notification that occurs in the second specific state, and it is possible to preferably realize the gameplay of predicting the future advantage based on the second mode notification.

Feature CB3. The gaming machine described in Feature CB1 or Feature CB2, wherein the suggestion means makes the degree of advantage after the second specific state different when the second mode notification is made for the third stop operation mode and when the second mode notification is made for the fourth stop operation mode.

According to the above configuration, the suggestion means causes the degree of advantage after the second specific state to differ between when a stop operation is performed in the third stop operation mode and the picture combination of the third mode stops, and when a stop operation is performed in the fourth stop operation mode and the picture combination of the fourth mode stops. In this way, if the configuration uses the stop results to give suggestions, even if the common third result is a winning result, it is possible to increase interest in the stop operation and favorably improve the gameplay of predicting the degree of advantage thereafter.

Feature CB4. The suggestion means is capable of executing a specific effect (background color change) when the second mode notification is performed for the third stop operation mode and the picture combination of the third mode is stopped, and is capable of executing the specific effect when the second mode notification is performed for the fourth stop operation mode and the picture combination of the fourth mode is stopped, while not executing the specific effect when the second mode notification is performed for the third stop operation mode and the picture combination of the fourth mode is stopped, and not executing the specific effect when the second mode notification is performed for the fourth stop operation mode and the picture combination of the third mode is stopped, thereby suggesting the degree of advantage after the second specific state, as described in feature CB3.

According to the above configuration, the suggestion means executes a specific presentation as a type of suggestion if the stop operation is performed in accordance with the second mode notification, but does not execute the specific presentation if the stop operation is performed without following the second mode notification. In other words, the second mode notification and the set of stop results match, and the suggestion is established. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game that does not follow the second mode notification, even if all winning results are the third result, and it is possible to preferably implement gameplay that uses the suggestion means.

Feature CB5. A second transition lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) is provided to execute a second transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition the gaming state to the second specific state;
A gaming machine described in any one of features CB1 to CB4, characterized in that the lottery results by the second transition lottery means include a first result that does not transition to the first specific state after the second specific state (e.g., a second BB win, or a specific role that does not win a bonus or attack mode, etc.), and a second result that may transition to the first specific state after the second specific state (e.g., a first BB win).

According to the above configuration, in the second specific state, there are two patterns: one in which the second specific state does not transition to the first specific state after the second specific state, and another in which the second specific state transitions to the first specific state after the second specific state. Therefore, it is possible to use the suggestion by the second mode notification made in the second specific state to suggest whether or not to transition to the first specific state after that. In particular, since the first specific state is a state in which both mode notifications are permitted and the degree of advantage changes depending on the mode notification, it has a high affinity with the suggestion made by the mode notification (second mode notification), and it is possible to easily associate the first specific state with the suggestion by the second mode notification.

Feature CB6. The gaming machine described in feature CB5, wherein the suggestion means is capable of suggesting whether or not to transition to the first specific state after the second specific state as the degree of advantage after the second specific state.

With the above configuration, the effect of feature CB5 can be achieved through a specific configuration.

Feature CB7. A payout result is set as a result of the lottery by the lottery means, in which a predetermined number of game media is awarded as the bonus by the bonus awarding means;
a third specific state (bonus state) is set as a gaming state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the predetermined payout result is higher than that in a normal gaming state;
When the lottery result by the second transition lottery means is the first result, the game transitions to the third specific state after the second specific state;
A gaming machine described in feature CB5 or feature CB6, characterized in that when the lottery result by the second transition lottery means is the second result, the game transitions to the third specific state after the second specific state, and then to the first specific state.

According to the above configuration, if a winning payout result is achieved, a predetermined number of gaming media is paid out, so a large increase in gaming media is expected when the third specific state is reached. Such a third specific state occurs after the second specific state for both the first and second results, and whether or not the first specific state transitions after the third specific state differs depending on the first and second results. In this way, regardless of which result results in a transition to the second specific state, at least the third specific state will occur after the second specific state, making it possible to further increase anticipation for the second specific state.

Feature CB8. A setting means (a function for executing a process for setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided with a plurality of setting values that can cause a change in the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of the game media, and one of the plurality of setting values is set;
A gaming machine described in any one of features CB5 to CB7, characterized in that the probability that the lottery result by the second transition lottery means will be the first result may vary depending on the setting value set by the setting means, and the probability that the lottery result by the second transition lottery means will be the second result is common regardless of the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, the probability of the first result of not transitioning to the first specific state after the second specific state differs depending on the setting value that changes the rate of increase or decrease of the gaming medium, and the probability of the second result of transitioning to the first specific state after the second specific state is common regardless of the setting value. In other words, for the first specific state in which the advantage level changes due to the first mode notification (and also the second mode notification), the probability of transition can be common regardless of the setting value. In this way, whether or not to transition to the first specific state can be made to depend more on luck, and the fairness of the game based on the first specific state is guaranteed. On the other hand, if there is no difference due to the setting value in this way, the fun of selecting one game machine from multiple game machines installed in the game hall, that is, the fun of playing while predicting which setting value is set, may be eliminated. Therefore, in the above configuration, in cases where there is no transition to the first specific state after the second specific state, differences can occur depending on the setting value, thereby ensuring the fairness of play based on the first specific state without eliminating the fun of playing while predicting the setting value.

Feature CB9. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a payout result is set in which a predetermined number of game media is awarded as the bonus by the bonus awarding means;
a third specific state (bonus state) is set as a gaming state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the predetermined payout result is higher than that in a normal gaming state;
a second transition lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for executing a second transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition the gaming state to the second specific state;
A gaming machine described in any one of features CB1 to CB8, characterized in that the lottery results by the second transition lottery means include a third result (a specific role that does not win a bonus or attack mode, etc.) that does not transition to the third specific state after the second specific state, and a fourth result (e.g., winning the first BB) that may transition to the third specific state after the second specific state.

According to the above configuration, if a winning payout result is achieved, a predetermined number of gaming media is paid out, so a large number of gaming media can be expected to increase when the third specific state is reached. By setting such a third specific state and using the above configuration, in the second specific state, there are patterns in which the second specific state does not transition to the third specific state after the second specific state, and patterns in which the second specific state transitions to the third specific state after the second specific state. Therefore, it is also possible to use the suggestion by the second mode notification made in the second specific state to suggest whether or not to transition to the third specific state afterwards.

Feature CB10. The gaming machine described in Feature CB9, wherein the suggestion means is capable of suggesting whether or not to transition to the third specific state after the second specific state as the degree of advantage after the second specific state.

With the above configuration, the effect of feature CB9 can be achieved through a specific configuration.

Feature CB11. The lottery result by the lottery means is set to be a replay result in which the bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means;
The second operation mode result is a specific re-play result among the re-play results,
a plurality of replay states are set as game states in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a predetermined replay result winning is higher than that in a normal game state;
A gaming machine described in any one of features CB1 to CB10, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing special RT state processing by the main control unit 101) for transitioning to a specific re-play state among the multiple re-play states in which the probability of winning the specific re-play result is higher than in the normal game state based on transition to the second specific state.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which multiple replay states are set, one of the specific replay states is set as the second specific state. In the specific replay state, the probability of a specific replay result winning as a result of the second operation mode increases. By using the replay state in this way, it is possible to change the winning probability of the game result without using a so-called jackpot state such as the third specific state described above, and it is possible to increase the possibility of a winning result of the second operation mode when transitioning to the second specific state.

Feature CB12. The first operation mode result is such that, when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the picture combination of the first mode corresponding to the first result can be stopped, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the picture combination of the second mode corresponding to the second result can be stopped;
The second operation mode result is such that, when each of the stop operation means is operated in a third stop order as the third stop operation mode, a picture combination of the third mode corresponding to the third result can be stopped, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode, a picture combination of the fourth mode corresponding to the third result can be stopped.
A gaming machine described in any one of features CB1 to CB11, characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result or the second operation mode result, the first mode notification means is capable of executing a first sequence notification (push order notification presentation) regarding a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order, or the third stop order and the fourth stop order, as the first mode notification.

According to the above configuration, a sequence notification regarding the stopping sequence of multiple rotating bodies can be executed as a status notification. In this way, for example, even players who are not good at the eye-pressing operation to aim for a specific pattern on the rotating body can fully enjoy the benefits of the status notification.

The above configuration is such that "when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the picture combination of the first mode is stopped, the first result is established, and the first benefit (for example, nine medals awarded based on the first small win in a three-bet game) is awarded by the benefit awarding means; when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the picture combination of the second mode is stopped, the second result is established, and the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a three-bet game) different from the first benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means;
The second operation mode result is such that, when each of the stop operation means is operated in a third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third mode stops, the third winning result is established, and a third bonus (replay) is awarded by the bonus awarding means, and, when each of the stop operation means is operated in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the fourth mode stops, the third winning result is established, and the third bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means.
The first mode notification means may be characterized in that, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result or the second operation mode result, the first sequence notification (push order notification presentation) regarding a stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order, or the third stop order and the fourth stop order, can be executed by the first notification means as the first mode notification, in which case it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the benefit to be awarded.

<Characteristic DA group>
Feature DA1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning combination when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order, and a second result which results in a winning combination when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
The apparatus is provided with a sequence notification means (a function of executing a sequence notification process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a sequence notification (a push sequence notification) regarding the stop sequence including the first stop sequence and the second stop sequence on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the sequence notification by the sequence notification means is higher than that in the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state being a predetermined specific result;
A specific transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the specific game state;
A first determination means (a number of games in an advantageous zone AG) for determining the number of times a game has been executed in the specific gaming state;
A second grasping means (a number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG) for grasping the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state;
A first termination means for transitioning the specific game state to the normal game state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the specific game state (a function for executing a termination process of the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a normal termination condition in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
A second termination means (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous zone in a second process of zone display by the main control device 101) for transitioning the specific game state to the normal game state based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means in the specific game state has reached a predetermined upper limit number, regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means;
An increase means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
a specific event executing means (a function of executing each process for special notification in a situation where the excess flag is set by the main control device 101) capable of causing a specific event that can be beneficial to a player when the specific condition is satisfied or when the specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on the satisfaction of the specific condition in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means and the remaining number of executions grasped by the second grasping means has reached the upper limit number;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the rotation of the circling body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circling body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In such a so-called slot machine, the winning result may differ depending on the stopping order of the circling body, and a specific game state is provided in which the degree of advantage differs depending on whether or not there is a sequence notification regarding the stopping order. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be performed, and when a specific condition is established during the specific game state, a process of increasing the remaining number of times in the specific game state, a so-called addition, can occur, thereby significantly improving the playability of each game.

However, the original playability of a slot machine is to aim for the images on the rotating body to stop them and obtain a bonus. If there are too many bonuses that can be obtained by playing using the sequence notification, this original playability may be neglected, and if the specific play state using the sequence notification can be played unlimitedly, there is a possibility that balls may be paid out that exceed the ball payout rate intended by the designer. Therefore, in the above configuration, the game ends when the upper limit is reached regardless of the number of times the specific play state remains. In this way, the playability using the sequence notification becomes a playability that accompanies the original playability, making it possible to fully enjoy both playability.

However, if an upper limit is set as described above, in certain situations where the sum of the number of plays and the remaining number of plays has already reached the upper limit, no additional bonus will be added even if a specific condition is met, and the game in such a situation will become a so-called wasted game, which can make the game extremely less interesting.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions and the remaining number of times has already reached the upper limit number, or when a specific situation occurs when an increase process is performed based on the establishment of a specific condition, a specific event that is different from the increase process (addition) and can be beneficial to the player occurs. In this way, the specific event can be used as a substitute for no addition or for an addition being meaningless, making it possible to increase the fun of each game even in the above specific situation. This can ideally increase interest.

The "first result" and "second result" may be expressed as "a first result in which a winning is achieved when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result in which a winning is achieved when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode." In this case, "stop sequence" may be read as "stop operation mode," "sequence notification" as "mode notification," and "sequence notification means" as "mode notification means."

Feature DA2. The gaming machine described in Feature DA1, wherein the specific event is an event that is not related to the occurrence probability, occurrence frequency, or number of occurrences of the sequence notification.

The above configuration makes it possible to better ensure consistency by setting an upper limit on the number of times and not performing the increase process.

The above configuration can also be expressed as "the probability, frequency, and number of occurrences of the sequence notification do not change depending on whether the specific event occurs or not."

Feature DA3. A setting means (a function for executing a process for setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided with a plurality of setting values that can cause a change in the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of the game media, and one of the plurality of setting values is set;
A gaming machine described in feature DA1 or feature DA2, characterized in that the specific event execution means performs a suggestive notification as the specific event, suggesting information about the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, the setting value suggestion information is presented as a specific event, so the player can use it as a basis for deciding whether to continue playing after the specific game state has reached the upper limit number of times and ended. In other words, if the suggestion notification indicates a low setting, the player can decide that he should end the game after the specific game state has ended, and if the suggestion notification indicates a high setting, the player can decide that he should continue playing even after the specific game state has ended. For players who want to increase their gaming media and not decrease their gaming media, such suggestion notifications of setting values can be said to be beneficial.

Feature DA4. The gaming machine described in Feature DA3, characterized in that the probability of the specific condition being fulfilled is the same regardless of the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, the probability of the increase process is the same regardless of the set value. In other words, when the upper limit has been reached, the specific condition that triggers the increase process occurs with the same probability regardless of the set value, and when it occurs, a suggestive notification of the set value is made. In this way, the element of luck can play a strong role in whether or not a suggestive notification of the set value is made. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as, for example, the higher the setting, the more likely it is that a suggestive notification of the set value will occur, so that a suggestive notification will not actually occur at a low setting.

Moreover, since the probability of a specific condition occurring is the same regardless of the set value as described above, the possibility of a specific game state reaching the upper limit of times can be the same regardless of the set value. In other words, the probability of a specific situation occurring in which a suggestive notification of a set value can be made is the same regardless of the set value, making it possible to further increase the independence of the setting value with regard to the occurrence rate of a suggestive notification of a set value.

Feature DA5. The specific condition when the increase process is performed can be satisfied based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined special result;
The probability of the specific condition being established when the increase process is performed varies depending on the type of the special result,
A gaming machine described in any one of features DA1 to DA4, characterized in that the higher the type of specific result for which the probability of the specific condition being fulfilled when the increase process is performed, the higher the probability of the specific condition being fulfilled when the specific event occurs.

According to the above configuration, the probability of a special result resulting in an increase process and the probability of a special result resulting in a specific event are linked. In this way, it is easy to understand that a specific event occurs in place of the increase process being performed based on the special result. Therefore, for example, in a specific situation, when a special result is won that results in an increase process with a high probability, it is possible to increase the anticipation of the specific event occurring in advance, and by preparing the player mentally, it is possible to increase the attention to the specific event.

Feature DA6. As the specific game state, a plurality of types of predetermined states are set, including a first predetermined state (attack mode) and a second predetermined state (specialized zone) different from the first predetermined state;
the specific condition when the increase process is performed is such that even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the same type of special result, the probability of the first predetermined state being realized is different from the probability of the second predetermined state being realized,
A gaming machine described in feature DA5, characterized in that in the specific gaming state, the higher the probability of the specific condition being fulfilled when the increase processing is performed, the higher the probability of the specific condition being fulfilled when the specific event occurs.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the probability of an increase process being performed changes depending on the type of specific game state (predetermined state) even for the same type of special result, the probability of a specific event occurring also changes depending on the type of specific game state (predetermined state) and is linked to the case of an increase process. In this way, it is possible to further enhance the effect of making it easier for players to understand that a specific event occurs instead of an increase process being performed based on a special result.

Feature DA7. As the specific gaming state, a special state (VB mode, specialized zone) in which a minimum number of continuous games is set is set,
A special transition means (for example, a function of executing a process of setting a VB notification flag by the main control device 101) for transitioning the specific game state to the special state based on the establishment of a predetermined special condition during the specific game state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features DA1 to DA6, characterized in that the specific event execution means is capable of causing the specific event when the special condition is met in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by transitioning to the special state based on the fulfillment of the special condition.

When a special state is entered during a specific game state, that special state continues for a minimum number of continuing games. Therefore, the transition to the special state can be considered equivalent to the process of increasing the minimum number of continuing games in terms of the number of games played in the specific game state. As such, a transition to a special state in a specific situation, or a transition to a special state resulting in a specific situation, can be meaningless to the player. Therefore, in the above configuration, by treating such special states as the subject of a specific event, it is possible to avoid making the player feel that they are meaningless.

Feature DA8. The specific condition when the increase process is performed can be satisfied based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined special result;
The specific condition when the increase process is performed is configured such that even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the same type of special result, the special state has a higher probability of being established than other states in the specific game state,
The probability of the specific condition being established when the specific event occurs is also higher in the special state than in other states in the specific game state.
The gaming machine described in feature DA7 is characterized in that the specific event execution means causes the specific event when the special condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by transitioning to the special state based on the satisfaction of the special condition, and allows a transition to the special state based on the satisfaction of the special condition.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a transition to a special state makes it easier for an increase process to be performed, when transitioning to a special state in a specific situation, or when a specific event occurs when a transition to a special state results in a specific situation, transitioning to a special state itself is permitted. Therefore, a specific event occurs when transitioning to the special state, and further, a specific event is permitted to occur even during the special state. In this way, by making the special state a state in which an increase process is easier to perform and a specific event is easier to occur, it is possible to make transitioning to a special state during a specific game state something to look forward to, even in a specific situation or when that specific situation is approaching.

Feature DA9. When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by the increase process being performed based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, the number of times information corresponding to the number of times increased when the increase process is performed based on the satisfaction of the specific condition is stored in the number of times information storage means (the number of games eliminated EG) (a function of executing a process of adding the number of added games to the number of games eliminated EG by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine described in any one of features DA1 to DA8, characterized in that the specific event execution means is capable of causing the specific event based on the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means.

According to the above configuration, when a specific condition is met in a specific situation, a specific event may occur based on the number of times the increase process is performed. In this way, it is possible to cause a specific event to occur as compensation for the benefit that would have been obtained by the increase process, for example, by making the specific event more likely to occur the more the number of times information is.

Feature DA10. The number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means is stored at least until the specific game state in which the specific event occurs transitions to the normal game state, and when the specific condition is newly established in the specific state in the state in which the stored information is stored, or when the specific state is entered by the increase process being performed based on the establishment of the specific condition, the number of times information corresponding to the increase in the number of times when the increase process is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition can be added to the stored number of times information to update it;
The gaming machine described in feature DA9 is characterized in that, when transitioning from the specific game state to the normal game state, the specific event execution means is capable of causing the specific event based on the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means.

According to the above configuration, when a specific condition is met multiple times in a specific situation, the count information when the increment process is performed is accumulated, and a specific event occurs at the end of the specific game state based on the total count information. In this way, in the configuration of feature DA9, even if the count information based on the fulfillment of each specific condition is small, it is possible to cause a specific event by fulfilling the specific condition multiple times, and the anticipation for the specific event can be sustained.

In particular, if a specific situation occurs relatively soon after entering a specific gaming state, a game in which the number of times that specific gaming state is executed reaches the upper limit, i.e., a game that may become a so-called "dead end game," will be played for a long period of time. In this regard, by configuring a specific event to occur by accumulating multiple increment processes as in the above configuration, the more games that may become the dead end game, the more likely the specific event will occur, and it is possible to suppress the feeling that the game is a dead end game.

Feature DA11. The gaming machine described in Feature DA10, characterized in that the specific event execution means is capable of causing the specific event each time the specific condition is satisfied, and is capable of causing the specific event based on the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means, based on the second ending means transitioning the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state.

According to the above configuration, a specific event occurs each time a specific condition is met, and at the end of the specific game state, a specific event can occur according to the accumulated value when the increase process is performed. In this way, it is possible to enjoy both the effect of preventing the specific game state from becoming boring by having a specific event occur each time, and the effect of making the specific game state enjoyable for a long period of time by having the specific condition be met multiple times.

Feature DA12. A gaming machine according to any one of Features DA1 to DA11, characterized in that the specific event execution means is capable of causing the specific event based on the fulfillment of the specific condition during the normal gaming state following the end of the specific gaming state in which the specific condition is fulfilled.

According to the above configuration, it is also possible to carry over as a specific event the establishment of a specific condition during a specific game state to the normal game state after the end of the specific game state. And since the specific event is an event different from the increase process, the configuration is such that the event during the specific game state is carried over to the normal game state to the extent that it does not contradict the significance of forcibly ending the specific game state due to the upper limit number of plays. In this way, the link between the specific game state and the normal game state is improved, and the interest of the game is increased.

Feature DA13. When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is caused by the increase process being performed based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, a means for storing information corresponding to the number of times increased when the increase process is performed based on the satisfaction of the specific condition in a predetermined information storage means (number of games eliminated EG) (a function for executing a process of adding the number of games added to the number of games eliminated EG by the main control device 101);
When the specific game state is transitioned to the normal game state by at least the second ending means, an initialization means (a function of executing the initialization process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an initialization process for initializing specific information related to the sequence notification used during the specific game state;
A means for restricting the initialization of the information stored in the information storage means when the initialization process is performed by the initialization means (a function for executing a process for storing the number of games lost in an area provided in a normal section area in the main control device 101);
A gaming machine as described in feature DA12, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to the above configuration, when the number of executions during a specific game state reaches the upper limit number and the specific game state is terminated, the specific information involved in the sequence notification is initialized. This makes it possible to expect the effect of feature DA11 while preventing the occurrence of a so-called consecutive win in which the specific game state is transitioned to again based on information during the specific game state that was forcibly terminated, even though the specific game state was forcibly terminated.

Feature DA14. A gaming machine according to any one of features DA1 to DA13, characterized in that the increase process can be executed when the specific condition is met in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on the satisfaction of the specific condition.

In the above configuration, even if a specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation, or a specific situation is reached by an increase process based on the satisfaction of a specific condition, it is made clear that the increase process itself is not restricted. In other words, for example, in a configuration in which the execution of processes related to a predetermined sequence notification, including the increase process, is restricted in a normal game state that is not a specific game state, it is made clear that the increase process related to the specific situation is not subject to that restriction. However, as mentioned above, even if an increase process is performed in such a situation, it may become meaningless due to the upper limit number of times, and by causing a specific event to occur in such a situation, the excellent effect of feature DA1 can be expected.

Feature DA15: A specific game state notification means (a function of executing the first to fourth section display processes by the main control device 101) is provided, which starts notification by turning on the specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) based on the transition of the game state from the normal game state to the specific game state, and ends notification by turning off the specific notification means based on the transition of the specific game state to the normal game state;
A gaming machine described in any one of features DA1 to DA14, characterized in that the specific game state notification means terminates the notification by turning the specific notification means off even when the specific game state is transitioned to the normal game state by the second termination means.

According to the above configuration, when the normal game state transitions to the special game state, a notification is started by the special notification means, and when the special game state ends and the normal game state transitions, the notification also ends. In other words, by checking whether or not a notification is given by the special notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game is in a special game state, and this can eliminate a sense of inequality between, for example, a player who has transitioned to a special game state but quits playing without realizing it, and a player who sits down at the same gaming machine after the previous player has finished playing. This makes it possible for all players to enjoy playing with special notifications equally to their heart's content.

In particular, even when the specific game state reaches the upper limit number of times and transitions to the normal game state, the notification by the specific notification means ends, so the player can clearly understand that the specific game state has ended, that is, that the increase process was not performed even if the specific condition was met in the specific situation. In that case, with a configuration in which the notification by the specific notification means strictly ends, it is difficult to enjoy the afterglow of the specific game state having ended, even if the specific condition is met in the specific situation. In that regard, if a configuration is used in which a specific event can be generated, as in feature DA1, it is possible to enjoy the afterglow based on the fulfillment of the specific condition through the specific event, even in a configuration in which it is clearly understood that the specific game state has been forcibly ended by the specific notification means.

Feature DA16. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning combination when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order, and a second result which results in a winning combination when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
The apparatus is provided with a sequence notification means (a function of executing a sequence notification process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a sequence notification (a push sequence notification) regarding the stop sequence including the first stop sequence and the second stop sequence on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the sequence notification by the sequence notification means is higher than that in the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state being a predetermined specific result;
A specific transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the specific game state;
A first determination means (a number of games in an advantageous zone AG) for determining the number of times a game has been executed in the specific gaming state;
A second grasping means (a number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG) for grasping the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state;
A first termination means for transitioning the specific game state to the normal game state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the specific game state (a function for executing a termination process of the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a normal termination condition in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
A second termination means (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous zone in a second process of zone display by the main control device 101) for transitioning the specific game state to the normal game state based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means in the specific game state has reached a predetermined upper limit number, regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means;
An increase means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
a specific event executing means (a function of executing each process for special notification in a situation where the sum of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means and the remaining number of executions grasped by the second grasping means has reached the upper limit number) capable of causing a specific event, which is an event different from the event based on the increase process, when the specific condition is satisfied or when the specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on the satisfaction of the specific condition; and
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the rotation of the circling body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circling body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In such a so-called slot machine, the winning result may differ depending on the stopping order of the circling body, and a specific game state is provided in which the degree of advantage differs depending on whether or not there is a sequence notification regarding the stopping order. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific game state can be performed, and when a specific condition is established during the specific game state, a process of increasing the remaining number of times in the specific game state, a so-called addition, can occur, thereby significantly improving the playability of each game.

However, the original playability of a slot machine is to aim for the images on the rotating body to stop them and obtain a bonus. If there are too many bonuses that can be obtained by playing using the sequence notification, this original playability may be neglected, and if the specific play state using the sequence notification can be played unlimitedly, there is a possibility that balls may be paid out that exceed the ball payout rate intended by the designer. Therefore, in the above configuration, the game ends when the upper limit is reached regardless of the number of times the specific play state remains. In this way, the playability using the sequence notification becomes a playability that accompanies the original playability, making it possible to fully enjoy both playability.

However, if an upper limit is set as described above, in certain situations where the sum of the number of plays and the remaining number of plays has already reached the upper limit, no additional bonus will be added even if a specific condition is met, and the game in such a situation will become a so-called wasted game, which can make the game extremely less interesting.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions and the remaining number of times has already reached the upper limit number, or when an increase process is performed based on the establishment of a specific condition, a specific event that is different from the increase process (addition) occurs. In this way, the specific event can be used as a substitute for no addition or for an addition being meaningless, making it possible to increase the fun of each game even in the above specific situation. This makes it possible to ideally increase interest.

The "first result" and "second result" may be expressed as "a first result in which a winning is achieved when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result in which a winning is achieved when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode." In this case, "stop sequence" may be read as "stop operation mode," "sequence notification" as "mode notification," and "sequence notification means" as "mode notification means."

<Feature DB group>
Feature DB1. As a game state, a low advantageous state (normal zone) and a high advantageous state (advantageous zone) are set in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low,
A first determination means (advantageous zone game number AG) for determining the number of times the game has been executed in the highly advantageous state;
A second grasping means (a number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG) for grasping the number of remaining games in the highly advantageous state;
A first termination means for transitioning the highly advantageous state to the low advantageous state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the highly advantageous state (a function for executing a termination process of the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a normal termination condition in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
a second termination means (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous zone in a second process of zone display by the main control device 101) for transitioning the highly advantageous zone to the low advantageous zone based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means in the highly advantageous zone has reached a predetermined upper limit number, regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of executions grasped by the second grasping means;
A setting means (a function for executing a process for setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided with a plurality of setting values that can cause a change in the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of the gaming media, and one of the plurality of setting values is set;
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific information grasping means for grasping specific information (total number of games) corresponding to the game situation of the day (a function for executing a process for grasping the total number of games in the second section display process by the main control device 101);
A suggestion notification execution means (a function of executing a process for performing a fourth special notification by the display control device 81) that executes a suggestion notification that suggests information on the setting value set by the setting means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the suggestion notification execution means is capable of executing the suggestion notification based on the specific information grasped by the specific information grasping means when the second termination means transitions from the highly advantageous state to the less advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantage state may end based on the remaining number of times in the high advantage state or when the upper limit number of times is reached, so the advantage of the high advantage state is prevented from becoming extremely high. However, it is considered that players want the high advantage state to continue for a long time, and it is not preferable for the high advantage state to be forcibly ended based on the upper limit number being reached even if there are remaining times, and it is considered that the intention to continue playing may be extremely reduced if the high advantage state is forcibly ended. Therefore, when such a high advantage state is forcibly ended, a suggestion notification of a setting value that causes a change in the increase/decrease rate or increase/decrease mode of the gaming medium is made, which can motivate the player to continue playing by, for example, making a suggestion notification of a high setting.

On the other hand, depending on the situation where the highly advantageous state has reached its upper limit, the above-mentioned suggestion of the setting value may not motivate players to continue playing, but may instead motivate players to end playing. That is, for example, if the situation where the highly advantageous state has reached its upper limit is a situation where the game hall has just opened, the above-mentioned suggestion of a high setting may motivate the player playing the game machine to continue playing, but with regard to other game machines, the other game machines may be judged to have low settings in relation to the high setting of the game machine, and may be motivated to end playing. Also, for example, if the situation where the highly advantageous state has reached its upper limit is a situation where the game hall is about to close, it may be better to simply make a suggestion of the setting value rather than taking into account the motivation to continue playing or the motivation to end playing. Therefore, by configuring the system to provide a suggested notification of the set value after taking into account specific information corresponding to the game situation on that day when the highly advantageous state has reached the upper limit, it is possible to effectively suppress a decline in the player's will to continue playing when the highly advantageous state is forcibly ended.

Feature DB 2. Equipped with a specific execution means for executing a specific process related to the continuation rate or number of continuations of the highly advantageous state (for example, a function for executing a process for adding the number of games by the main control device 101),
The gaming machine described in feature DB1, wherein the specific execution means executes the specific process regardless of the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, the specific process related to the continuation rate and the number of continuations is executed regardless of the set value, while when the highly advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times as a result of the specific process and ends, a set value suggestion may occur. In this case, the fact that the highly advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times is largely a matter of luck and is not related to the high or low set value, but it is considered that a large amount of game media is often acquired when the highly advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times, and under such circumstances, it is considered that the player tends to easily predict a set value higher than the actual set value. However, even if the highly advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times, the total ball payout rate is not necessarily high depending on the game situation on the day, even if a large amount of game media is acquired at the time the upper limit number of times is reached, such as when a large amount of game media is required up to that point. Therefore, by performing a suggestion of the set value taking into account the game situation at the time of forced termination for the above-mentioned highly advantageous state, the impression that the player has of the acquired game media can be used for the suggestion of the set value, and can be used to encourage the player to continue playing at the time of the forced termination.

More specifically, the "specific execution means" may be, for example, "a transition lottery means (a function of executing a mode lottery process by the main control unit 101) capable of executing a transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition from the low-advantage state to the high-advantage state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition"; or, for example, "an increase means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control unit 101) capable of executing an increase process to increase the remaining number of times based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition"; or, for example, "a means capable of executing a lottery to end the high-advantage state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition."

Furthermore, the "specific execution means" may be expressed as "executing the specific processing with a uniform probability regardless of whether the set value set by the setting means is high or low", or "executing the specific processing with a common probability regardless of whether the set value set by the setting means is high or low", or "the result of the specific processing is common regardless of whether the set value set by the setting means is high or low".

Feature DB 3. The specific information grasping means is capable of grasping the total number of games played of the gaming situation of the day as the specific information,
The gaming machine described in feature DB1 or feature DB2, characterized in that when the second termination means transitions from the highly advantageous state to the low advantageous state, the suggestion notification execution means executes the suggestion notification so that when the total number of executions grasped by the specific information grasping means is less than a predetermined specific number (2,000 times), the probability of the suggestion notification being executed is lower than when the total number of executions exceeds the specific number, or so that the suggestion notification executed when the total number of executions is less than the specific number makes it more difficult for a player to predict the setting value than the suggestion notification executed when the total number of executions exceeds the specific number.

According to the above configuration, when comparing the case where the total number of executions is below a specific number with the case where it exceeds a specific number, in the former case, the setting value suggestion notification is less likely to be executed, or even if it is executed, it is difficult to predict the setting value. Therefore, even if the high advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times when the total number of executions is below a specific number, it is difficult to narrow down the setting value. In this way, it is possible to avoid an incident in which the setting value is determined shortly after the opening of the gaming hall, causing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine in question or other gaming machines.

Feature DB 4. The specific information grasping means is capable of grasping time information as the specific information among the gaming situation of the day,
The gaming machine described in any one of features DB1 to DB3, characterized in that when the second termination means transitions from the highly advantageous state to the low advantageous state, the suggestion notification execution means executes the suggestion notification so that when the time information grasped by the specific information grasping means is before a predetermined specific time (1:00 p.m.), the probability of the suggestion notification being executed is lower than when the time information is after the specific time, or so that the suggestion notification executed before the specific time makes it more difficult for the player to predict the setting value than the suggestion notification executed after the specific time.

According to the above configuration, when comparing the time of the forced termination before the specific time with the time after the specific time, in the former case, the setting value suggestion notification is less likely to be executed, or even if it is executed, it is difficult to predict the setting value. Therefore, even if the high advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times before the specific time, it is difficult to narrow down the setting value. In this way, it is possible to avoid an incident in which the setting value is determined shortly after the opening of the gaming hall, resulting in a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine in question or other gaming machines.

In particular, by adding the above configuration to feature DB3, it is possible to suggest setting values according to the start time of operation on that day. Specifically, for example, in feature DB3, if the start of operation on that day is late, it may be determined that the specific number of times has been exceeded at a later stage than if the specific number of times had been exceeded by operating from the very start of the morning. In this case, the setting value suggestion may not be as intended by the designer. Therefore, by combining the configuration of feature DB4 with the configuration of feature DB3, it is possible to generate a setting value suggestion notification as intended by the designer.

Feature DB 5. The specific information grasping means is capable of grasping at least one of the total number of executions since power-on or time information as the specific information of the game situation of the day,
The gaming machine described in any one of features DB1 to DB4, characterized in that, when the second termination means transitions from the highly advantageous state to the low advantageous state, if the total number of executions grasped by the specific information grasping means is less than a predetermined specific number (2000 times) or the time information is a first specific situation before a predetermined specific time (13:00), the probability of the suggestion notification suggesting a low setting being executed is higher than when the total number of executions exceeds the specific number or the time information is a second specific situation after the specific time, or the suggestion notification executed in the first specific situation makes it easier for a player to predict the setting value to be a low setting than the suggestion notification executed in the second specific situation.

According to the above configuration, if the high-advantage state reaches the upper limit of times and is forced to end relatively early after the opening of the gaming hall, a suggestive notification that makes it easier to narrow down to a low setting is executed. A situation in which the high-advantage state reaches the upper limit of times at a relatively early stage is considered to be a situation in which a large amount of gaming media is acquired and the total ball payout rate is high. In such a situation, it is considered that there is a tendency to easily predict a setting value higher than the actual setting value, and it is considered that there is a high possibility that the game will continue even if a suggestive notification that makes it easier to narrow down to a low setting is executed as a suggestive notification of the setting value as described above. Therefore, if a configuration is used in which a suggestive notification of the setting value on the low setting side is executed when such a situation is anticipated, it is possible to maintain a balance in the appearance rate with the suggestive notification of the setting value on the high setting side without causing a decrease in the operating rate.

Feature DB 6. The suggestion notification execution means is
A suggestion notification information group in which information corresponding to a plurality of types of suggestion notifications is stored is used as the suggestion notification of the setting value, information corresponding to one suggestion notification is selected from the suggestion notification information group, and the suggestion notification is executed based on the information corresponding to the selected suggestion notification.
A gaming machine described in feature DB5, characterized in that when the second termination means transitions from the highly advantageous state to the low advantageous state, the group of suggestive notification information used in the first specific situation and the group of suggestive notification information used in the second specific situation are made different, so that the suggestive notification suggesting the low setting is executed with a higher probability or in a manner that makes it easier to predict the setting value of the low setting.

According to the above configuration, the configuration of the feature DB5 can be realized with a simple configuration such as switching the suggestion notification information group, i.e., the table used for suggestion notification.

Feature DB7. The game state is transitioned to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined transition result (second BB), and the game state is transitioned to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined transition result (second BB), and
an increase rate of the game media in each game is likely to be higher during the special game state than during the highly advantageous state;
The special game state is set to be transitionable even during the highly advantageous state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features DB1 to DB6, wherein the first grasping means grasps the number of times the game is executed, including the number of games executed during the special gaming state.

According to the above configuration, a special game state is set as a so-called jackpot state in which the rate of increase of game media is high, and the number of games during the special game state is also taken into account in the number of times played, so the final number of game media acquired may be greater if a special game state is present during a highly advantageous state until the upper limit is reached than if the special game state is not present. In other words, in a highly advantageous state in which a maximum number of times is set, the final number of game media acquired when the highly advantageous state ends due to the maximum number of times is diversified. In this way, when the highly advantageous state ends due to the maximum number of times, the fun of predicting the setting value at the end is added, for example, if a large number of game media is acquired, a high setting is predicted, and if a small number of game media is acquired, a low setting is predicted.

Feature DB8. A gaming machine described in feature DB7, characterized in that the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be the winning transition result can vary depending on the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature DB7, the number of points obtained when a highly advantageous state is forcibly terminated can actually differ depending on the setting value. This makes it possible to enhance the significance of providing a suggestion of the setting value when a forced termination occurs.

Feature DB 9. The specific information grasping means is capable of grasping the total number of games played of the gaming situation of the day as the specific information,
A gaming machine described in any one of features DB1 to DB8, characterized in that the total number of executions is initialized when a change process is performed on the setting value set by the setting means, but is not initialized when the power to the gaming machine is turned on or off.

According to the above configuration, the total number of executions as the game status reflected in the suggestion notification at the time of forced termination is not initialized by powering on or off, but is initialized by the setting value change process, so if the power is turned on/off at the time of closing or opening an amusement hall without changing the setting value, the total number of executions from the previous day will be carried over. This makes it possible to play a game in which the setting value is predicted not only from the suggestion notification of the setting value, but also from factors such as whether the setting value has been changed, greatly improving playability.

Feature DB10. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning combination when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order, and a second result which results in a winning combination when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
The apparatus is provided with a sequence notification means (a function of executing a sequence notification process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a sequence notification (a push sequence notification) regarding the stop sequence including the first stop sequence and the second stop sequence on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the sequence notification by the sequence notification means is higher than that in the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state being a predetermined specific result;
A specific transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the specific game state;
Equipped with
The low-advantage state is the normal gaming state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features DB1 to DB9, characterized in that the highly advantageous state is the specific gaming state.

In a gaming machine with the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is held by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the winning result may differ depending on the stopping order of the rotating body, and a specific gaming state is provided as a highly advantageous state in which the degree of advantage differs depending on whether or not there is a sequence notification regarding the stopping order. By applying a configuration related to setting value suggestions according to the gaming situation of feature DB1 to a gaming machine with such a configuration, the subsequent operation rate when the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number of times can be appropriately adjusted.

In particular, compared to a special game state that involves a transition of game states, i.e., a jackpot state, the degree of advantage of the specific game state to the player changes depending on the presence or absence of a notification when the sequence-corresponding result is won, the frequency of the notification, the manner of the notification, etc. In this configuration, compared to a one-to-one correspondence with a game result such as a transition of game states, it is easy to realize a game in which the continuation conditions are set with a high degree of freedom and the number of times that the specific game state continues is not strictly determined, that is, a game in which the player enjoys how long the specific game state continues. On the other hand, in such a game, when the upper limit number of times is reached and the specific game state ends, it is thought that the intention to continue playing thereafter may decrease, and there is a concern about a decrease in the operating rate. In this regard, by applying the configuration of the above feature DB1 to such a gaming machine, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing even after the upper limit number of times has been reached while enjoying the continuation of the specific game state.

<Characteristic DC group>
Feature DC1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning combination when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order, and a second result which results in a winning combination when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
The apparatus is provided with a sequence notification means (a function of executing a sequence notification process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a sequence notification (a push sequence notification) regarding the stop sequence including the first stop sequence and the second stop sequence on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the sequence notification by the sequence notification means is higher than that in the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state being a predetermined specific result;
A specific transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the specific game state;
A specific end means for transitioning the specific game state to the normal game state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition (a function for executing an end process of the advantageous zone in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
A specific storage means (a function of executing a process of storing information corresponding to various areas for advantageous zones in the RAM 106 by the main control device 101) capable of storing specific information used in the specific game state and related to the sequence notification;
A normal storage means (a function of executing a process of storing information corresponding to various areas for a normal section in the RAM 106 by the main control device 101) capable of storing normal information that can be used in other than the specific game state and is not involved in the sequence notification;
An initialization means for executing an initialization process of the specific information stored in the specific storage means when the specific game state is transitioned from the specific game state to the normal game state by the specific end means (a function for executing an initialization process during the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101);
A first means for executing a storage process for storing information (the number of added games) corresponding to a specific event occurring during the specific game state (for example, an opportunity to add the number of games when the excess flag is not set) in the specific storage means as the specific information (a function for executing a process for adding the number of added games to the corresponding number of continuations in the game number adding process by the main control device 101);
A second means for executing a storage process for storing information (the number of games lost) corresponding to a specific event (e.g., an opportunity to add the number of games to the number of games lost when the excess flag is set) occurring during the specific gaming state as the normal information in the normal storage means (a function for executing a process for adding the number of added games to the number of games lost in the game number addition process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is conducted by the lottery means and the rotation of the circling body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circling body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the winning result may differ depending on the stopping order of the circling body, and a specific game state is provided in which the degree of advantage differs depending on whether or not there is a notification of the stopping order, improving the playability of each game.

However, the original playability of a slot machine is to aim for the image on the rotating object and stop it to obtain a bonus. If the bonuses that can be obtained by playing using the sequence notification are increased too much, the original playability may be neglected. Also, if the special game state using the sequence notification is made playable indefinitely by increasing the consecutive win performance, it may be possible to produce a number of balls that exceeds the payout rate intended by the designer. Furthermore, if the consecutive win performance of the special game state is increased, it becomes easier for cases to occur where a player thinks that the special game state has ended and ends the game, but in fact the special game state is still continuing, and fairness between the player who ends the game and the successor player who sits at the game machine where the game ended may not be guaranteed.

The above configuration is therefore configured to perform an initialization process for the specific storage means that stores specific events during the specific game state as specific information related to sequence notification at the end of the specific game state, so that the consecutive win performance of the specific game state is not increased too much and it is possible to eliminate any sense of unfairness between players.

However, with the above configuration, the impression that the playability of the specific game state and the playability of the normal game state are separate will be stronger, and the linkage between these two game states will be reduced, which may result in a decrease in playability overall. Therefore, the above configuration is provided with a second means for storing information about a specific event in the specific game state as normal information that is not involved in the sequence notification, rather than storing that information as specific information, making it possible to carry over information about a specific event in the specific game state to the normal game state as information different from the sequence notification. This makes it possible to increase the linkage between the specific game state and the normal game state while preventing the consecutive win performance of the specific game state from being too high and ensuring equality between players. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature DC2. A specific storage area (various areas for advantageous zones in RAM 106) corresponding to the specific storage means;
A normal storage area (various areas for normal sections in the RAM 106) corresponding to the normal storage means;
There is a system in place,
A gaming machine described in feature DC1, characterized in that the specific memory area and the normal memory area are set as non-overlapping memory areas.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of feature DC1, the locations where each piece of information is stored are physically different, so for example, errors such as the normal information in the normal storage means being initialized during the initialization process are less likely to occur, and events such as specific information remaining uninitialized even after the end of the specific game state are also less likely to occur.

Feature DC3. A gaming machine according to feature DC1 or DC2, characterized in that it is equipped with a special notification means (a function of executing notification processing for special replay by the display control device 81) capable of executing a special notification by a specific notification means after the end of the specific game state in which the specific event has occurred, by utilizing the normal information corresponding to the specific event stored in the normal storage means by the second means.

According to the above configuration, a special notification for a specific event that occurs during a specific game state is executed after the specific game state ends, so it is possible to link the specific game state and the normal game state through the game presentation of the special notification.

Feature DC4. A gaming machine described in any one of features DC1 to DC3, characterized in that it is equipped with a selection means (a function for executing a process to determine whether an excess flag is set in the main control device 101) that selects whether the first means or the second means is to execute the storage process when the specific event occurs.

According to the above configuration, information related to a specific event is stored as either specific information or normal information. In this way, both types of information are not stored in duplicate, so the storage capacity can be reduced, and when normal information based on a specific event is carried over at the end of a specific game state, the possibility that the specific information will be carried over in association with it (the possibility that it will not be initialized due to some inconvenience) can be reduced.

Feature DC5. An increase determination means (a function of executing a game number addition lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase determination as to whether or not to execute an increase process for increasing the remaining number of times of the specific game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (specific role);
An increase processing means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increase processing of the remaining number of times based on the result of the determination by the increase determination means being a result of executing the increase processing;
Equipped with
The selection means is
When the determination result by the increase determination means is a result that the increase process is to be executed as the specific event, selecting to execute the storage process by the first means;
A gaming machine as described in feature DC4, characterized in that when the specific event is a result of the judgment by the increase judgment means that the increase processing is not to be executed, the memory processing by the second means is selected to be executed.

According to the above configuration, when a determination is made as to whether or not to increase the number of games to be continued in the specific game state as a specific event, if it is determined that the number of games to be continued is to be increased, the first means performs storage processing as specific information involved in the sequence notification, and if it is determined that the number of games to be continued is not to be increased, the second means performs storage processing as normal information not involved in the sequence notification. On the premise that it is more advantageous for the player to increase the number of games to be continued in the specific game state and that the player desires the increase processing to be performed, information that the determination has resulted in an unfavorable result for the player can be stored as normal information and carried over to after the specific game state. In this way, information corresponding to the profit that could not be fully enjoyed in the specific game state can be carried over to the normal game state without carrying over the profit during the specific game state to the normal game state, and it is possible to enhance the linkage between the specific game state and the normal game state by making it appear as if the profit is available in the normal game state.

Feature DC6: When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the increase determination means determines that the increase process is to be executed, or the increase determination means is provided with a limiting means (a function of executing a process of setting an excess flag by the main control device 101) capable of executing a limiting process for limiting the execution of the increase process;
The gaming machine described in feature DC5, wherein the selection means selects that the storage process be performed by the second means based on the restriction process being performed by the restriction means.

When a predetermined condition is met, the result of the determination by the increase determination means may result in the execution of the increase process, or the execution of the increase process itself may be restricted. Therefore, if the predetermined condition is met during a specific game state, even if the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, there is no benefit to the player during the specific game state, and the player may end up feeling disappointed that the specific result would not have been achieved if the predetermined condition had not been met. In this regard, in the above configuration, the information about the disappointing result is stored so that it is carried over to the normal game state, so that even if the disappointing result occurs, the player can have the expectation that some benefit will be obtained after the specific game state ends.

Feature DC7: A first grasping means (number of games in an advantageous zone AG) for grasping the number of times the game has been executed in the specific gaming state;
A second grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times (a number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG);
Equipped with
The specific termination means includes:
A first termination means for transitioning the specific game state to the normal game state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the specific game state (a function for executing a termination process of the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a normal termination condition in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
A second termination means (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous zone in a second process of zone display by the main control device 101) for transitioning the specific game state to the normal game state based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means in the specific game state has reached a predetermined upper limit number, regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature DC6, characterized in that the specified condition is met when the sum of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means and the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means reaches the upper limit number of times.

In the above configuration, the specific game state may end based on the remaining number of times in the specific game state, or may end based on reaching the upper limit number of times, and the predetermined condition in feature DC5 is established when the sum of the execution number and the remaining number of times reaches the upper limit number. In other words, when the situation is such that the remaining number of games cannot be expected to increase even if the increase process is performed any further, the storage process by the second process is performed based on the specific result that triggers the increase process. For players who want to play as many games as possible in the specific game state, it is thought that they would like the increase process to be performed in each game in the specific game state, that is, the game result to be a specific result, but when the situation is such that the remaining number of games cannot be expected to increase even if the increase process is performed, interest in the game results in that situation will decrease, and interest in the specific game state itself will also decrease, and there is a possibility that the level of attention to the game will decrease extremely. In this regard, as in the above configuration, even in such a situation, if a special result is won, the second means performs storage processing, so that the information on the special result win, which may become meaningless, can be carried over after the special game state, making the special result in that situation meaningful. This makes it possible to improve the playability during the special game state.

Feature DC8. A gaming machine according to Feature DC6 or Feature DC7, characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in a situation where the predetermined condition is met, the second means executes a storage process to store in the normal storage means the specific number of times to increase the remaining number of times in the increase process when the determination result by the increase determination means is that the increase process is to be executed, as the normal information.

According to the above configuration, when a specific result is won when a predetermined condition is met, the specific number of times that would have been increased by the increase process is stored as normal information. By doing this, the storage process is performed by the second means instead of the first means, and no special processing such as information conversion processing is required, and the effects of feature DC6 and the like can be expected with a simple configuration.

Feature DC9. In the normal gaming state, a special state (special section) in which a predetermined special notification can be executed is set,
When the specific game state is transitioned to the normal game state by the specific end means, a means capable of transitioning to the special state (a function of executing a process of setting a special zone flag by the main control device 101);
A means for selecting the number of times the special state is executed based on the information on the specific number of times the storage process is performed by the second means (a function for executing a process for inputting a value corresponding to the special section game number PG based on the special section table by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine as described in feature DC8, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to the above configuration, when the specific game state is transitioned to the normal game state, there is a case where the state transitions to a special state in which a special notification can be executed, and the number of times that the special state is executed is determined by the information of the specific number of times that the storage process is performed by the second means. Therefore, the information that the increase process was not performed during the specific game state is carried over as information on the continuity of the special state in which a special notification is performed, and the specific game state and the normal game state can be linked via the special state.

Feature DC10. A setting means (a function for executing a process for setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided with a plurality of setting values that can cause a change in the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of the gaming medium, and one of the plurality of setting values is set;
A gaming machine described in feature DC9, characterized in that the special notification is a suggestive notification as information on the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, the suggestion notification can be executed after the specific game state as a substitute for the increase processing not being performed during the specific game state. Assuming that the player desires a high setting, the suggestion notification of the setting value becomes useful information for the player, and by presenting such useful information, it becomes possible to compensate for the increase processing not being performed.

Feature DC11. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when each of the stop operation means is operated in a third stop order, a third specific pattern combination stops and a third result winning can be established, and when each of the stop operation means is operated in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order, a fourth specific pattern combination different from the third specific pattern combination stops and the third result winning can be established. A second sequence corresponding result (for example, a special replay) is set,
A gaming machine described in feature DC9 or feature DC10, characterized in that it is equipped with a second order notification means (a function of executing a special replay notification process by the display control device 81) that can execute a second order notification (push order notification presentation) regarding a stop order including the third stop order and the fourth stop order as the special notification on a specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) based on the lottery result by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, if the second sequence response result is one in which the stopping sequence results in different stopping numbers but does not change the benefits obtained, even if it is performed during a normal gaming state, a special notification can be realized by a notification using the stopping sequence, within the scope that does not contradict the meaning of the specific gaming state in which a first sequence notification (sequence notification of feature DC1, referred to as the first sequence notification in relation to the above configuration, and the sequence response result of feature DC1 is also referred to as the first sequence response result) that causes a change in the degree of advantage is performed, as long as it does not go against the meaning of the upper limit number of times that the specific gaming state is set.

Feature DC12. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result, a winning notification means (for example, the auxiliary display unit 65) can notify the winning notification of the special result (a function of executing a bonus winning notification performance by the display control device 81);
a game number setting means for setting the number of winning notification games from the game in which the special result is won to the game in which the winning notification means notifies the winning (a function for executing a lottery process for the number of premonition games by the display control device 81);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features DC9 to DC11, characterized in that the number of winning announcement games set by the game number setting means is likely to be shorter when the special announcement is made than when the special announcement is not made.

According to the above configuration, for players who want to know about the special result win quickly, it is preferable that a short number of games for the win announcement is set by the special announcement, and from that point of view, it is possible to compensate for the fact that the increase process is not performed during the specific game state.

<Characteristic DD group>
Feature DD1. As a gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal zone) and a high advantageous state (advantageous zone) are set in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low,
A first determination means (advantageous zone game number AG) for determining the number of times the game has been executed in the highly advantageous state;
A second grasping means (a number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG) for grasping the number of remaining games in the highly advantageous state;
A first transition means for transitioning the highly advantageous state to the low advantageous state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the highly advantageous state (a function for executing an end process of the advantageous zone based on the normal end condition being satisfied in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
a second transition means (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous zone in a zone display second process by the main control device 101) for transitioning the highly advantageous state to the low advantageous state based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means in the highly advantageous state has reached a predetermined upper limit number, regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of executions grasped by the second grasping means;
A gaming machine comprising:
An increase means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
When the increase process is performed by the increase means, an increase notification execution means (a function of executing an add-on notification performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing an increase notification (add-on notification) of the increase process by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
a specific notification execution means for executing a specific notification for the excess over the upper limit number of times when the increase process is performed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means in a situation where the sum of the number of times of execution grasped by the first grasping means and the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means has reached the upper limit number of times (a function of executing an update process of the special game number display section in a third special notification setting process by the display control device 81);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are a high-advantage state and a low-advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high-advantage state may end based on the remaining number of times in the high-advantage state, or when the upper limit of the number of times has been reached, so that the degree of advantage of the high-advantage state is prevented from becoming extremely high. In this configuration, there is a so-called add-on function in which the remaining number of times in the high-advantage state is increased when a specific condition is met, and the expectation that the specific condition will be met is heightened.

On the other hand, as described above, if a game in which a specific condition is met is played before the total number of times that the game is played and the remaining number of times reaches the upper limit, it is preferable for the player. However, once the total number of times reaches the upper limit, interest in whether the specific condition is met or not decreases because the highly advantageous state ends when the upper limit is reached no matter how many times the specific condition is met. The games played up until the upper limit is reached become so-called "wasting games," and there is a possibility that interest in the game will decrease drastically.

In this respect, the above configuration is configured to provide a specific notification of the excess amount that would have been obtained if the increase process had been performed even after the total number of times has reached the upper limit, and to inform the player of the number of times that the benefit could not be fully enjoyed due to the upper limit being exceeded. In other words, even if an increase process is performed, the upper limit count makes it seem as if the increase process did not occur, so it would normally be better not to notify the player of the increase process. However, by notifying the player of the increase process, it is possible to make the player count the benefit that would have been obtained if the increase process had been performed beyond the upper limit count, or to have the expectation that some kind of compensation will be provided for not being able to enjoy the benefit. In other words, by taking the reverse approach of explicitly indicating, rather than hiding, the inability to enjoy the benefit of the increase process, it is possible to evoke emotions that are different from the sense of loss that comes from not being able to enjoy the benefit, thereby improving the playability in a situation where the upper limit count has been reached.

Feature DD2. The gaming machine described in Feature DD1, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of notifying the number of times corresponding to the excess as the specific notification, and notifies the number of times in a manner that allows the number of times to be grasped as a number separate from the remaining number of times.

It is possible to add the excess to the remaining number of times and display it on the same number of times display, but in the above configuration, by displaying these as separate numbers, not only is it easier to grasp the excess, but since the excess is displayed separately, it is possible to create a strong impression that some kind of compensation will be provided with that excess.

Feature DD3. When performing the increase process, the increase means selects one number of times using a number information group in which multiple types of number information are stored, and increases the remaining number of times by the selected number of times;
The gaming machine described in feature DD1 or feature DD2, characterized in that the specific notification execution means selects one number of times as the excess number of times using the number information group or an information group in which number information of the same type as the number information group is stored, and is capable of executing the increase notification corresponding to the selected number of times as the specific notification.

According to the above configuration, the number of times to be notified in the specific notification is determined using the same or similar information group (table) as the actual increase notification, so that the excess amount that would be generated if an increase process were to be performed can be clearly understood. Furthermore, if the number of times is determined using the same information group, there is no need to store a dedicated information group, which contributes to reducing storage capacity.

Feature DD4. The specific notification execution means is
As the notification of the number of times corresponding to the excess, a predetermined number of times information can be notified,
The gaming machine described in feature DD3 is characterized in that by making the increase notification corresponding to the selected number of times, the selected number of times is added to the specified number of times information, and the specified number of times information is updated and notified.

According to the above configuration, when an increase process is performed multiple times that exceeds the upper limit, the number of times corresponding to each increase process is accumulated and notified. In this way, even after the total of the number of times performed and the remaining number of times reaches the upper limit, the fun of adding up the notified excess is added, and as the notified number of times gradually increases, it is possible to build up a sense of expectation that the compensation that will be carried out will be more generous.

Feature DD5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features DD1 to DD4, characterized in that it is equipped with a special notification execution means (a function of executing a third special notification setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing a predetermined special notification based on the number of times the specific notification is made by the specific notification execution means.

According to the above configuration, a special notification is executed as compensation for the excess amount. For example, if the configuration is such that useful information is presented to the player when the special notification is issued, the player will be satisfied when the special notification is issued. Even if the information is not useful, for example, if the special notification is a flashy presentation, seeing the flashy presentation can at least compensate to some extent for the player's sense of loss due to the fact that the increase process was not performed.

Feature DD6. The gaming machine described in Feature DD5, wherein the special notification execution means is capable of executing the special notification as a transition notification (attack mode end effect) when the second transition means transitions from the highly advantageous state to the less advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, the transition notification when the highly advantageous state ends becomes a special notification, and the excess amount is reflected. In the transition notification when the highly advantageous state ends, the number of game media acquired during the highly advantageous state and the number of games continued are generally notified, and by reflecting the excess amount in these notifications, it becomes easier to associate with how many more games would have continued if there was no upper limit, or the number of game media acquired if there was no upper limit. In addition, when such a transition notification is photographed, the excess information is reflected in the image, which, for example, increases the enjoyment when reporting to friends based on the photograph, and also allows the player to reminisce when reviewing the photo later.

Feature DD7. The gaming machine described in Feature DD5 or Feature DD6, characterized in that the special notification execution means is capable of executing the special notification in the low-advantage state after the high-advantage state is transitioned to the low-advantage state by the second transition means.

With the above configuration, the excess of the high-advantage state can be reflected in the low-advantage state, not in the high-advantage state. Therefore, by utilizing the excess, it is possible to improve the linkage between the high-advantage state and the low-advantage state in terms of presentation.

Feature DD8. A setting means (a function for executing a process for setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided with a plurality of setting values that can cause a change in the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of the gaming media, and one of the plurality of setting values is set;
A gaming machine described in any one of features DD5 to DD7, characterized in that the special notification execution means is capable of executing, as the special notification, a suggestion notification that suggests information about the setting value set by the setting means.

On the premise that players desire a high setting, a suggested notification of the setting value can be useful information to the player. Therefore, if a suggested notification of the setting value is made based on the excess amount as described above, it is possible to realize a game feature in which a suggested setting value can be predicted from the excess amount notified by the specific notification, and when the suggested setting value is made, a prediction of the setting value can be made, thereby making it possible to increase interest in the specific notification, which is the starting point of the game.

Feature DD9. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning combination when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order, and a second result which results in a winning combination when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
The apparatus is provided with a sequence notification means (a function of executing a sequence notification process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a sequence notification (a push sequence notification) regarding the stop sequence including the first stop sequence and the second stop sequence on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the sequence notification by the sequence notification means is higher than that in the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state being a predetermined specific result;
A specific transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the specific game state;
Equipped with
The low-advantage state is the normal gaming state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features DD1 to DD8, characterized in that the highly advantageous state is the specific gaming state.

In a gaming machine with the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is held by the lottery means and the rotation of the circling body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circling body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the winning result may differ depending on the stopping order of the circling body, and a specific gaming state is provided as a highly advantageous state in which the degree of advantage differs depending on the presence or absence of a sequence notification regarding the stopping order. By applying the configuration related to the specific notification of feature DD1 to a gaming machine with such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately improve playability after the total number of times the specific gaming state has been executed and the remaining number of times has reached the upper limit.

In particular, compared to a special game state that involves a transition of game states, i.e., a jackpot state, the degree of advantage to the player of the specific game state changes depending on the presence or absence of a notification when the sequence-corresponding result is won, the frequency of the notification, the manner of the notification, and the like. In this configuration, compared to a one-to-one correspondence with a game result such as a transition of game states, there is a high degree of freedom in setting the continuation conditions, and it is easy to realize a gameplay in which the number of times the specific game state continues is not strictly defined, that is, a gameplay in which the player enjoys wondering how long the specific game state will continue. On the other hand, it can be said that the problem described in feature DD1 is likely to occur when a maximum number of times is set for such gameplay. In this regard, by applying the configuration of feature DD1 to such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the gameplay when it is confirmed that the number of times the specific game state continues reaches the maximum number of times while allowing the player to enjoy the continuation of the specific game state.

<Feature DE group>
Feature DE1. As a gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal zone) and a high advantageous state (advantageous zone) are set in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low,
A first determination means (advantageous zone game number AG) for determining the number of times the game has been executed in the highly advantageous state;
A second grasping means (a number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG) for grasping the number of remaining games in the highly advantageous state;
A first transition means for transitioning the highly advantageous state to the low advantageous state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the highly advantageous state (a function for executing an end process of the advantageous zone based on the normal end condition being satisfied in the second process of zone display by the main control device 101);
a second transition means (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous zone in a second process of zone display by the main control device 101) for transitioning the highly advantageous state to the low advantageous state based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means in the highly advantageous state has reached a predetermined upper limit number, regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of executions grasped by the second grasping means;
A gaming machine comprising:
An increase means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
When the increase process is performed by the increase means, an increase notification execution means (a function of executing an add-on notification performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing an increase notification (add-on notification) of the increase process by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
Equipped with
The increase notification execution means has a post-notification execution means (a function of executing a post-addition performance setting process by the display control device 81) that enables the increase notification of the special number of times, which is a part or all of the number of times increased by the increase process, to be executed in a game subsequent to the game in which the increase process is executed;
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a specific situation (a situation in which an excess flag is set and a later-addition flag is set) in which the sum of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means and the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means has reached the upper limit number of times and there is an unreported amount as the special number of times related to the increase processing by the later-notification execution means, when the specific condition is met, the gaming machine is equipped with a first special notification execution means (a function of executing a first special notification setting process by a display control device 81) which is capable of executing a first special notification (pseudo-addition notification) as the increase notification by the specified notification means within the range of the unreported amount.

According to the above configuration, there are a high-advantage state and a low-advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high-advantage state may end based on the remaining number of times in the high-advantage state, or when the upper limit of the number of times has been reached, so that the degree of advantage of the high-advantage state is prevented from becoming extremely high. In this configuration, there is a so-called top-up function in which the remaining number of times in the high-advantage state is increased when a specific condition is met, and the sense of anticipation for the specific condition being met is increased. Furthermore, even if the process of increasing the remaining number is performed, there are cases in which notification of some or all of the number of times is not immediately made, so it is possible to maintain the sense of anticipation for the specific condition being met for a long time.

On the other hand, as described above, if a game in which a specific condition is met is played before the total number of times that the game is played and the remaining number of times reaches the upper limit, it is preferable for the player. However, once the total number of times reaches the upper limit, interest in whether the specific condition is met or not decreases because the highly advantageous state ends when the upper limit is reached no matter how many times the specific condition is met. The games played up until the upper limit is reached become so-called "wasting games," and there is a possibility that interest in the game will decrease drastically.

Therefore, in the above configuration, even after the total has reached the upper limit, if there is an unreported portion of the increase process, the unreported portion can be used to execute an increase notification within the range of the unreported portion, so that it is possible to give the impression that the remaining number of times has increased without causing a discrepancy between the increase notification and the number of games to be continued in the highly advantageous state. This makes it possible to play the game in an optimal manner after the total has reached the upper limit.

Feature DE2. The incrementing means, when performing the incrementing process, selects one number of times using a number of times information group in which a plurality of types of number of times information are stored, and increments the remaining number of times by the selected number of times;
The gaming machine described in feature DE1 is characterized in that the first special notification execution means is capable of selecting one number of times using the number information group or an information group in which number information of the same type as the number information group is stored as the number of times not yet notified, and executing the first special notification as the increased notification corresponding to the selected number of times.

According to the above configuration, the number of times to be notified in the first special notification is determined using the same or similar information group (table) as the actual increase notification, so that the impression that the increase process is actually taking place can be strengthened even in a situation where the upper limit number has been reached. In addition, if the number of times is determined using the same information group, there is no need to store a dedicated information group, which can also contribute to reducing memory capacity.

Feature DE3. The gaming machine described in Feature DE2, wherein the first special notification execution means is capable of notifying the unannounced number of times as the first special notification when the selected number of times exceeds the unannounced number of times.

The above configuration provides the advantage of the first special notification, which is to notify an increase within the range of unnotified amounts, while also allowing for the simplification of the configuration related to the number of times selection and the effect of approximating the actual increase process.

Feature DE4. In the specific situation, when the specific condition is satisfied, a second special notification execution means (a function of executing a first special notification setting process by the display control device 81) that can execute a second special notification (pseudo-addition notification) as the increase notification by the predetermined notification means beyond the range of the unnotified amount;
A granting means (a function of suggesting a set value by a pseudo-additional notification by the display control device 81) capable of granting a special benefit different from the benefit based on the execution of the increase process by the execution of the second special notification by the second special notification execution means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features DE1 to DE3, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to the above configuration, a first special notification is made as an increase notification that falls within the range of the number of unannounced times, and a second special notification is made as an increase notification that exceeds the range of the number of unannounced times, thereby granting a special benefit different from the increase processing. Therefore, even if a mismatch occurs between the increase notification and the number of continued games in the highly advantageous state, this will lead to a pleasant event for the player, and it is possible to increase the playability after the total number of executions and the remaining number of times reaches the upper limit.

In particular, the second special notification is executed on the condition that there is an unannounced portion of the increase process, so that the second special notification is executed when there is no unannounced portion, that is, before the player realizes that the total of the number of executions and the remaining number of times has reached the upper limit, rather than after the player has realized that. In this way, for a player who wants the increase process to continue until the total reaches the upper limit, the second special notification exceeds the player's expectations, and the player's joy when the second special notification is executed can be increased. In other words, in a situation where the player knows that the total has already reached the upper limit, the player's interest is considered to have shifted from the increase process to the granting of the special bonus. In such a situation, it is considered difficult to provide a joy that is greater than the amount of the special bonus, even if a special bonus is granted. Therefore, in a situation where something different from the special bonus (an increase process) is desired, it is possible to provide a joy that is greater than the amount of the special bonus by granting a special bonus along with the increase process.

Feature DE5. The gaming machine described in Feature DE4, characterized in that the second special notification execution means is capable of executing the increased notification as the second special notification by adding a predetermined specific number of times (10 times, 56 times, 77 times) to the number of times that the notification has not been made.

The number of times that have not been notified is the upper limit number of times in the high-advantage state minus the number of times that are executed and the number of times that are notified among the remaining times. As the game in the high-advantage state progresses, i.e., as the number of times that are executed increases, the number of times that have not been notified decreases, and the special number of times also changes depending on the proportion of times that are not notified by the post-notification means. In this way, in a configuration in which a special benefit is awarded by announcing an increase in the number of times that is the addition of a specific number to the number of times that have not been notified, as in the above configuration, the number of increased notifications that will award the special benefit will change depending on the progress of the game. In this way, the increased notification that triggers the award of the special benefit can be made difficult to notice at a glance, and the ease of noticing that a special benefit will be awarded can be made different between a player who is playing the game machine and is aware of the game situation and another person who is watching the game sideways. In other words, by making it easy for the player playing on that gaming machine to notice that a special bonus is being awarded, but difficult for others to notice, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the player playing on that gaming machine.

Feature DE6. The second special notification execution means is capable of executing the increased notification by adding a first specific number (10 times) to the number of times of the unnotified portion as the specific number of times, and is capable of executing the increased notification by adding a second specific number (56 times, 77 times) different from the first specific number as the specific number of times to the number of times of the unnotified portion;
The gaming machine described in feature DE5 is characterized in that the content of the special benefit awarded by the awarding means is different when the increase notification is executed by adding the first specific number of times and when the increase notification is executed by adding the second specific number of times.

With the above configuration, in the configuration of feature DE5, the number of increased notifications that will result in the awarding of a special bonus is more diverse, and further, the type of special bonus that will be awarded is more complicated, so that the advantage of the player playing on that gaming machine can be further guaranteed.

Feature DE7. A setting means (a function for executing a process for setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) that sets one of the multiple setting values, in which a setting value that can cause a change in the rate of increase or decrease or the increase or decrease mode of the game media is set in multiple stages;
In the specific situation, when the specific condition is established, a second special notification execution means (a function of executing a first special notification setting process by the display control device 81) that can execute a second special notification (pseudo-addition notification) as the increase notification by the predetermined notification means beyond the range of the unnotified amount;
A granting means (a function of suggesting a set value by a pseudo-additional notification by the display control device 81) capable of granting a special benefit different from the benefit based on the increase process by performing the second special notification by the second special notification execution means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features DE1 to DE6, characterized in that the awarding means is capable of awarding the special benefit by executing a suggestion notification that suggests information about the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, a first special notification is made as an increase notification that falls within the range of the number of unannounced times, and a second special notification is made as an increase notification that exceeds the range of the number of unannounced times, thereby granting a special benefit different from the increase processing. Therefore, even if a mismatch occurs between the increase notification and the number of continued games in the highly advantageous state, this will lead to a pleasant event for the player, and it is possible to increase the playability after the total number of executions and the remaining number of times reaches the upper limit.

In particular, the second special notification is executed on the condition that there is an unannounced portion of the increase process, so that the second special notification is executed when there is no unannounced portion, that is, before the player realizes that the total of the number of executions and the remaining number of times has reached the upper limit, rather than after the player has realized that. In this way, for a player who wants the increase process to continue until the total reaches the upper limit, the second special notification exceeds the player's expectations, and the player's joy when the second special notification is executed can be increased. In other words, in a situation where the player knows that the total has already reached the upper limit, the player's interest is considered to have shifted from the increase process to the granting of the special bonus. In such a situation, it is considered difficult to provide a joy that is greater than the amount of the special bonus, even if a special bonus is granted. Therefore, in a situation where something different from the special bonus (an increase process) is desired, it is possible to provide a joy that is greater than the amount of the special bonus by granting a special bonus along with the increase process.

In particular, the above configuration is configured to present suggested information on the set value as a special benefit. In other words, by issuing a second special notification that exceeds the range of unnotified values, information on the set value is presented, which can be used as a useful basis for the player to decide whether or not to continue playing after the highly advantageous state ends.

Moreover, when the highly advantageous state reaches the upper limit of times and ends, it is considered to be a situation in which a large amount of gaming media has been acquired, and even if information indicating a low setting is presented, it is highly likely that it will be determined to be a high setting because a large amount of gaming media has been acquired, and it is considered that it will be easier to decide to continue playing. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which a setting value is suggested when the upper limit of times has not been reached, for example, it is expected that the effect of suggesting a setting value while also relaxing the criteria for deciding whether to continue playing can be expected.

Feature DE8. The gaming machine described in Feature DE7, characterized in that the probability of the specific condition being met is the same regardless of the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, when a specific condition that has the same probability of being realized regardless of the setting value is realized, if the second special notification is made more than the upper limit number of times, the setting value is suggested. This makes it possible to inform the player of the importance of the setting value even if the setting value has little influence on the highly advantageous state, and provides the player with the fun of selecting a gaming machine to play on from multiple gaming machines installed in the gaming hall.

Feature DE9. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning combination when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order, and a second result which results in a winning combination when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
The apparatus is provided with a sequence notification means (a function of executing a sequence notification process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a sequence notification (a push sequence notification) regarding the stop sequence including the first stop sequence and the second stop sequence on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the sequence notification by the sequence notification means is higher than that in the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state being a predetermined specific result;
A specific transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the specific game state;
Equipped with
The low-advantage state is the normal gaming state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features DE1 to DE8, wherein the highly advantageous state is the specific gaming state.

In a gaming machine with the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is held by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the winning result may differ depending on the stopping order of the rotating body, and a specific gaming state is provided as a highly advantageous state in which the degree of advantage differs depending on the presence or absence of a sequence notification regarding the stopping order. By applying the configuration related to the first special notification of feature DE1 to a gaming machine with such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately improve playability after the total number of times the specific advantageous state has been executed and the remaining number of times has reached the upper limit.

In particular, compared to a special game state that involves a transition of game states, i.e., a jackpot state, the degree of advantage to the player of the specific game state changes depending on the presence or absence of a notification when the sequence-corresponding result is won, the frequency of the notification, the manner of the notification, etc. In this configuration, compared to a one-to-one correspondence with a game result such as a transition of game states, there is a high degree of freedom in setting the continuation conditions, and it is easy to realize a gameplay in which the number of times the specific game state continues is not strictly defined, that is, a gameplay in which the player can enjoy watching how long the specific game state continues. On the other hand, it can also be said that the problem described in feature DE1 is likely to arise when a maximum number of times is set for such gameplay. In this regard, by applying the configuration of feature DE1 to such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the gameplay when it is confirmed that the number of times the specific game state continues reaches the maximum number of times while allowing the player to enjoy the continuation of the specific game state.

<Features EA group>
Feature EA1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of the game media, and a setting means (a function of executing a process of setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided for setting one of the plurality of setting values.
a first result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided;
A specific notification execution means (for example, a function of executing a setting process of an additional effect by a display control device 81) capable of notifying a specific notification corresponding to a result of a specific lottery that is determined in advance and is performed based on a lottery result by the lottery means during the specific game state, by the specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
The specific notification execution means includes:
When the setting value set by the setting means is a first setting value, the specific notification can be executed in a first manner (in the case of an added-on effect, at the timing of executing an immediate added-on effect) by a first notification means (a function of executing a process to generate an added-on notification effect in an added-on winning game by the display control device 81);
When the setting value set by the setting means is a second setting value different from the first setting value, a second notification means (a function of executing a process to generate an additional notification effect in a game after the additional winning game by the main control device 101) capable of executing the specific notification in a second mode (in the case of an additional performance, at the execution timing of a later additional performance) which is a mode different from the first mode;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is held by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the stop operation mode of the stop operation means that stops the rotating body is set to result in a first result win or a second result win, and a mode notification may be issued regarding these stop operation modes, creating a gameplay that changes whether or not a win occurs depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification, thereby varying the degree of advantage.

Here, in a configuration in which the rate of increase/decrease and the mode of increase/decrease of the gaming medium are managed by a set value set by a setting means, it is common to vary the probability of the lottery by the lottery means depending on each set value. On the other hand, if differences are provided in the presence or absence of mode notification, the probability of transition to a specific gaming state, continuity, etc., in order to create the above-mentioned playability, due to the presence of too many parameters with set differences, it is possible that the range of the above and below fluctuations in the rate of increase/decrease and the mode of increase/decrease of the gaming medium may increase due to overlapping of the above and below fluctuations in each parameter. On the other hand, if a configuration is used in which no difference due to set values is provided in the play during a specific gaming state, the enjoyment during such a specific gaming state may decrease.

In the above configuration, the manner in which the result of the specific lottery (specific notification) executed during the specific game state is notified is different depending on the setting value, which makes it possible to create differences in playability depending on the setting value within a range where the setting value is unlikely to affect the payout rate. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The "first aspect" and "second aspect" may also be expressed as "first timing" and "second timing." In this way, by realizing the above configuration with only a difference in timing, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects with a simpler configuration.

Feature EA2. The specific notification execution means can execute, as the specific notification, a first specific notification of winning the specific lottery (in the immediate-addition-in-zone performance, a display of an add-on notification performance, and in the later-addition-in-zone performance, a display of the first later-addition character BUP1 or the second later-addition character BUP2) and a second specific notification regarding the content in the case of winning the specific lottery (in the immediate-addition-in-zone performance, a display of the number of games in the add-on performance, and in the later-addition-in-zone performance, a display of the number of games added at the end of the specialized zone).
The first notification means executes the first specific notification in a specific manner and executes the second specific notification in the first manner,
The gaming machine described in feature EA1, characterized in that the second notification means executes the first specific notification in the specific manner and executes the second specific notification in the second manner.

According to the above configuration, the specific notifications include a first specific notification that a specific lottery related to a specific game state has been won, and a second specific notification related to the winning content of the specific lottery. The first specific notification is executed in a common manner (specific manner) regardless of the setting value, and the second specific notification is executed in a manner that differs depending on the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gameplay that reflects the difference in the setting value in the presentation (a gameplay that allows the player to predict and understand the setting value) depending on the execution manner of the second specific notification, while preventing the likelihood of an event such as ending the game without realizing that the specific lottery has been won from differing depending on the setting value.

Feature EA3. When the first set value is set by the setting means, the increase rate of the game media is higher than when the second set value is set,
A gaming machine described in feature EA2, characterized in that the first mode is set to a timing earlier than the second mode.

According to the above configuration, the higher the set value for the increase rate of the gaming medium, the earlier the timing of the execution of the second specific notification. Assuming that players desire a set value with a high increase rate and will preferentially select gaming machines with such a set value, it is preferable that the second specific notification as the winning content of the specific lottery is executed early. In this way, the set value can be predicted and understood by utilizing the execution timing of the second specific notification.

Now, in a game where the player is prompted to predict and understand such a set value, if the predicted and understood set value is not desirable for the player (in the above example, it is the second set value), the player's motivation to play may drop sharply. In this regard, in the above configuration, even if the second specific notification predicts and identifies that the second set value is not desirable for the player, the first specific notification has already notified the player that he or she has won the specific lottery, so the first specific notification brings some joy to the player before the second specific notification, which can alleviate the drop in motivation to play.

Feature EA4. The specific lottery is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (specific combination);
As the identification result, at least a first identification result (watermelon) and a second identification result (cherry) are provided,
A gaming machine described in any one of features EA1 to EA3, characterized in that the ratio between when the specific notification is made by the first notification means and when it is made by the second notification means is defined as a notification ratio (immediate add/later add ratio), and the notification ratio difference, which is the difference between the notification ratio when the first set value is used and the notification ratio when the second set value is used, is different between the specific notification based on the first identification result and the specific notification based on the second identification result.

According to the above configuration, with regard to the notification ratio when the specific notification is performed in the first mode and the second mode, the notification ratio difference between the notification ratio when the specific notification is the first set value and the notification ratio when the specific notification is the second set value is different for the first specific result and the second specific result. For example, if the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first specific result is larger than the notification ratio difference based on the second specific result, in a game in which the setting value is predicted and understood, the specific notification based on the first specific result may be a more effective basis for prediction and understanding than the specific notification based on the second specific result. In this way, by configuring the specific result to differ in ease of prediction and understanding depending on the type of specific result, it is possible to increase interest in the specific result that triggers the specific notification and to appropriately increase the attention to the lottery results of each game.

Feature EA5. The lottery result by the lottery means is set to have a higher probability of becoming the second specific result than the first specific result,
A gaming machine described in feature EA4, characterized in that the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first specific result is set to be greater than the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the second specific result.

Based on the premise that the larger the difference in the notification ratio, the stronger the basis for predicting and understanding the set value, if the first specific result, which has a lower probability of winning, is configured to have a larger difference in the notification ratio than the second specific result, the specific notification from the first specific result can be stronger basis for predicting and understanding the set value. Therefore, it is possible to create benefits from winning the first specific result, which has a lower probability of winning, in addition to benefits such as the specific lottery based on the first specific result and the benefits that come from winning the specific lottery. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the attention to winning the first specific result.

In addition, if the benefit from a specific lottery is a benefit related to the ball payout rate, such as a benefit related to continuity during a specific game state, by configuring the system to provide a benefit through notification as described above, it is possible to provide a benefit from a perspective other than the ball payout rate, and the benefit of achieving the first specific result can be increased without causing a sudden increase in the ball payout rate, etc.

Feature EA6. As a gaming state in the specific gaming state, a first specific gaming state (specialized zone triggered by a cherry) and a second specific gaming state (specialized zone triggered by a specific role other than a cherry) are set,
In the first specific game state, the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first specific result is set to be larger than the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the second specific result,
A gaming machine described in feature EA4 or feature EA5, characterized in that in the second specific game state, the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first specific result is set to be smaller than the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the second specific result.

According to the above configuration, the notification ratio difference based on the first specific result and the second specific result is reversed between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. In other words, in the first specific game state, the effect of feature EA5 is achieved, and in the second specific game state, if the second specific result, which has a high probability of winning, is won, it becomes easier to predict and understand the set value. Therefore, the second specific game state becomes a state in which it is easier to predict and understand the set value than the first specific game state. In this way, it is possible to enjoy the game of predicting and understanding the set value from the perspective of which specific game state will occur, and interest is increased through diversification of the game.

Feature EA7. The lottery result by the lottery means is set to have a higher probability of becoming the second specific result than the first specific result,
The gaming machine described in feature EA6 is characterized in that it is provided with a means for transitioning to the second specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being the first specific result.

According to the above configuration, when a first specific result with a low probability of winning is obtained, there is a possibility of transitioning to a second specific game state in which the set value is easier to predict and understand. In this way, it is possible to provide benefits based on winning the first specific result not only in terms of a specific notification based on the winning, but also in terms of transitioning to a specific game state, thereby making it possible to further improve the advantage of the first specific result.

Feature EA8. A gaming machine according to any one of features EA4 to EA7, characterized in that the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be the first specific result and the probability that the result will be the second specific result are the same regardless of the gaming state.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize a gameplay that utilizes the first specific result and the second specific result without changing the lottery probability by the lottery means. Therefore, for example, there is no need to change the lottery table, and the degree of freedom in realizing the above gameplay is greatly improved compared to a configuration that can be applied only in limited states such as a jackpot state where the probability of winning a small prize is different from the normal game state.

Feature EA9. In the first aspect, the first notification means executes the specific notification in a game in which the specific lottery is performed;
A gaming machine described in any one of features EA1 to EA8, characterized in that, as the second aspect, the second notification means executes the specific notification in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific lottery is performed.

According to the above configuration, the difference between the specific notification by the first notification means and the specific notification by the second notification means is the difference in the mode in different games. In this way, the difference is whether the result of the specific lottery is notified in the game or in a later game, and the difference in notification mode makes it possible to enjoy the gameplay for a long period of time.

Feature EA10. Means for grasping the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state (number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG);
A means for transitioning the specific game state to the normal game state based on the remaining number of times in the specific game state (a function for executing an end process of the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a normal end condition in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features EA1 to EA9, characterized in that the specific lottery is a lottery regarding an increase process that increases the remaining number of times.

According to the above configuration, the specific lottery is a lottery for an increase process that increases the number of times remaining in the specific game state, that is, an additional lottery. In terms of the gameplay in which the mode notification is performed in the specific game state, it is advantageous for the player to continue the specific game state for a long time, and such an increase in the number of times remaining can be said to be a desirable event for the player. In particular, after transitioning to the specific game state, the game is likely to be played while hoping that the specific game state will continue for a long time, so the specific lottery for the increase process can be said to be a lottery in which the player is very interested. Furthermore, by configuring the execution mode of the specific notification for the increase process of the remaining number of times to differ depending on the setting value, it is possible to attract the player's great interest in the difference in the execution mode, and it is possible to enjoy the game by associating the setting value with the increase process, even if there is no actual setting difference in the winning probability of the increase process, etc.

Feature EA11. The specific notification execution means can execute, as the specific notification, a first specific notification that the increase process is being performed (in the immediate-addition-in-zone performance, a display of an add-on notification performance, and in the later-addition-in-zone performance, a display of the first later-addition character BUP1 or the second later-addition character BUP2), and a second specific notification regarding the increase in the remaining number of times when the increase process is being performed (in the immediate-addition-in-zone performance, a notification of the number of games in the add-on performance, and in the later-addition-in-zone performance, a notification of the number of games added at the end of the specialized zone);
The first notification means executes the first specific notification in a specific manner and executes the second specific notification in the first manner,
The gaming machine described in feature EA10, wherein the second notification means executes the first specific notification in the specific manner and executes the second specific notification in the second manner.

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that a first specific notification of winning an additional game (increase process) in the specific game state and a second specific notification regarding the additional game number are provided, and the first specific notification is executed in a common manner (specific manner) regardless of the set value, and the second specific notification is executed in a manner that differs depending on the set value. Therefore, after pleasing the player by adding the first specific notification, the second specific notification regarding the essential additional game number is executed in a manner with a setting difference, and the second specific notification is executed in a situation where interest in the notification has been heightened in advance. In other words, it is thought that the difference in the notification manner will make a big impression on players who are waiting anxiously for the result, and it becomes possible to more effectively utilize the benefits of setting a difference in the notification manner of the second specific notification.

Feature EA12. The first notification means executes the first specific notification as the specific mode in a game in which the specific lottery is held, and executes the second specific notification as the first mode in a game in which the specific lottery is held;
The gaming machine described in feature EA10 or feature EA11, characterized in that the second notification means executes the first specific notification as the specific mode in the game in which the specific lottery was performed, and executes the first specific notification as the second mode in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific lottery was performed.

According to the above configuration, when an additional notification (specific notification) is made by the first notification means, a notification (first specific notification) is made that an additional win has been made in the game in which a specific lottery was held, and a notification (second specific notification) is made of the number of additional games to be added, which is a so-called immediate additional notification. On the other hand, when an additional notification (specific notification) is made by the second notification means, a notification (first specific notification) is made that an additional win has been made in the game in which a specific lottery was held, and a notification (second specific notification) is made of the number of additional games to be added in the subsequent game, which is a so-called delayed additional notification. In this way, by configuring the immediate and delayed additional notifications in the additional notification to differ depending on the setting value, it is possible to involve the setting value in the addition of the number of games, even if there is no difference due to the setting value in the rate of additional wins or the number of additional games when won.

Feature EA13. A means for grasping the number of times the game has been executed in the specific gaming state (number of games in the advantageous zone AG);
A means for transitioning the specific game state to the normal game state based on the fact that the number of executions in the specific game state has reached a predetermined upper limit number, regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times (a function for executing a process for forcibly terminating the advantageous zone in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features EA10 to EA12, characterized in that the ratio between when the specific notification is performed by the first notification means and when the specific notification is performed by the second notification means is defined as a notification ratio, and a notification ratio difference, which is the difference between the notification ratio when the first setting value is set and the notification ratio when the second setting value is set, varies depending on the number of executions.

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that an upper limit number of times is set for a specific game state, and with regard to the notification ratio when a specific notification is performed in the first mode and the second mode, the notification ratio difference between the notification ratio when the first setting value is used and the notification ratio when the second setting value is used varies depending on the number of times the specific game state is executed, and the difficulty of predicting and understanding the setting value changes. For example, if there is still room for the number of games up to the upper limit, the player will want more games to be added, and if there are only a few games left up to the upper limit, the player will not feel very happy even if the number of games is added, and will rather think that he has lost if the number of games is added beyond the upper limit. In this regard, by using the above configuration, the difficulty of predicting and understanding the setting value can be made different in relation to the number of games left up to the upper limit, and the joy of the addition occurring when the addition occurs can be compensated for in terms of the ease of prediction and understanding.

Feature EA14. A number display means (a function of executing a process for displaying a number display corresponding to the remaining number counter HG by the display control device 81) capable of displaying a number display corresponding to the remaining number on a predetermined display means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features EA10 to EA13, characterized in that whether the specific notification is performed by the first notification means or the second notification means differs depending on the number of times displayed by the number of times display.

According to the above configuration, whether the specific notification as the additional notification is performed in the first mode or the second mode differs depending on the relationship with the number display corresponding to the remaining number of times in the specific game state. When an additional notification is won as a specific lottery, for example, in a situation where the number display is low, the player will feel a sense of relief as the number display increases due to the additional notification. Conversely, in a situation where the number display is high, some players may feel that it is preferable to feel a sense of superiority that the potential remaining number of times is greater than the number display, rather than the number display increasing immediately. Therefore, by making the mode of the additional notification different depending on the number displayed from the number display, as in the above configuration, it is possible to create a performance that takes advantage of the difference in emotions caused by the above-mentioned additional notification. Therefore, an effective performance that attracts players can be realized.

Feature EA15. A grant determination means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that executes a grant determination as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the occurrence of a determination trigger;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that, based on the result of the award determination by the award determination means being a bonus corresponding to the awarding response result corresponding to the awarding of a bonus to the player, can award the player a bonus corresponding to the awarding response result;
A gaming machine comprising:
A setting means (a function for executing a process for setting a winning probability by the main control device 101) that sets one of a plurality of setting values that can change the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of the gaming media based on the determination result by the award determination means;
A specific judgment means (a function of executing a first specific combination process to a second specific combination process by the main control device 101) that executes a specific judgment based on the judgment result by the award judgment means, the specific judgment having a common winning probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means;
A specific notification execution means (a function of executing a setting process of the additional performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the determination result by the specific determination means by a predetermined specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
Equipped with
The specific notification execution means includes:
When the setting value set by the setting means is a first setting value, the specific notification can be executed in a first manner (in the case of an added-on effect, at the timing of executing an immediate added-on effect) by a first notification means (a function of executing a process to generate an added-on notification effect in an added-on winning game by the display control device 81);
When the setting value set by the setting means is a second setting value different from the first setting value, a second notification means (a function of executing a process to generate an additional notification effect in a game after the additional winning game by the main control device 101) capable of executing the specific notification in a second mode (in the case of an additional performance, at the execution timing of a later additional performance) which is a mode different from the first mode;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a setting value is set that changes the rate of increase or decrease or the manner in which the gaming media is increased or decreased based on the judgment result by the award judgment means, such a setting value does not affect the probability of winning by the specific judgment means, but does affect the manner in which a specific notification is executed as a result notification corresponding to the judgment result by the specific judgment means, and the execution manner differs between the first setting value and the second setting value. In this way, it becomes possible to associate the setting value with the specific judgment executed based on the judgment result by the award judgment means, without making a difference in the probability of winning due to the setting value.

Here, it is considered that a player who wants to increase the amount of game media will search for a gaming machine with a better setting value and play there. It can be said that it is possible to make the game more interesting by providing a suggestive effect that suggests the setting value set by the setting means. On the other hand, if the suggestive effect is configured so that its occurrence probability differs depending on the setting value, the suggestive effect itself may not occur or may be difficult to occur depending on the set value, and the suggestive effect that was prepared with great care may not be used effectively. For example, to provide a suggestive effect that, when it appears, confirms that the set value is a specified value, it is necessary to prepare a suggestive effect for that specified set value separately. In this respect, in the above configuration, with regard to the specific notification that functions as a suggestive effect, the winning probability of the specific judgment that triggers it is not different depending on the setting value, so the occurrence rate of the specific notification can be made common to all setting values, and since the execution mode of the specific notification is simply different, there is no need to prepare separate specific notifications for each setting value. Therefore, the suggestive effect can be implemented more simply and effectively, and it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

The "first aspect" and "second aspect" may also be expressed as "first timing" and "second timing." In this way, by realizing the above configuration with only a difference in timing, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects with a simpler configuration.

Note that the configurations of features EA1 to EA14 may be applied to feature EA15 individually, or may be applied in combination. In this case, it is advisable to apply the features after appropriately aligning the terminology between the configurations, such as by replacing the "award determination means" in feature EA15 with the "lottery means."

<Features EB group>
Feature EB1. A specific judgment means (a function for executing the first specific role processing to the third specific role processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific judgment of whether or not to execute a specific event advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition;
An event execution means (a function of executing a game number addition process or the like by the main control device 101) for executing the specific event based on the result of the determination by the specific determination means being a result corresponding to the execution of the specific event;
A specific notification execution means (a function of executing a setting process for an additional performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing a specific notification that the specific event has been executed or a specific notification corresponding to the execution of the specific event by a specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
A counting means for counting the number of times the specific event occurs (a function for executing a process for managing the Suica later-adding counter and the Suica immediate-adding counter by the display control device 81);
Equipped with
The specific notification execution means includes:
A first notification execution means (a function of executing a process for performing an immediate ride performance in the zone in the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a first timing;
A second notification execution means (a function of executing a process for performing a rear ride performance in a zone in the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a second timing that is later than the first timing;
A selection means for selecting a notification execution means for executing the specific notification from a plurality of notification execution means including the first notification execution means and the second notification execution means according to the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means (a function for executing a process for selecting an additional notification timing table according to a table counter ATK in the display control device 81);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when a specific event that is advantageous to the player occurs as a result of a specific judgment being won, the player can grasp the specific event based on the specific notification corresponding to the specific event. For example, if the specific event is a jackpot, the specific notification is a jackpot notification, and the player can enjoy the jackpot to the fullest through the jackpot notification, and can be immersed in a sense of superiority.

When a specific event occurs that is advantageous to the player, even if the degree of advantage of that specific event does not change with each occurrence, it is believed that the player's emotions when the specific event occurs will change subtly with each occurrence. In more detail, it is believed that the player will be very happy about the occurrence of that specific event the first time it occurs, but after that, as the number of times it occurs increases, the player will become "used" to the occurrence and will no longer feel as much joy as they did the first time it occurred.

In the above configuration, the timing of the specific notification for each occurrence of a specific event is made different, making it possible to realize a specific notification that responds to subtle changes in the player's behavior each time the event occurs, thereby ideally increasing attention to the game.

Feature EB2. The gaming machine described in Feature EB2, characterized in that the selection means is more likely to select the specific notification to be performed by the first notification execution means the smaller the number of times grasped by the number of times grasp means.

According to the above configuration, the fewer the number of occurrences of a specific event that is advantageous to the player, the sooner the notification of that event will be made. For players who are anxiously waiting to see if an advantageous specific event will occur, it is thought that the sooner the notification is made, and after an advantageous specific event has already occurred several times, it is thought that players will feel more joy if the advantageous specific event is notified at an unexpected time, since it is more unexpected. Thus, by using the above configuration, it is possible to preferably realize specific notifications that correspond to the player's emotions, which may change with each occurrence.

Feature EB3. The number of times grasping means is a specific number of times grasping means (for example, a function of executing a process to manage a Suica immediate loading counter in a display control device 81) that grasps either a first specific event number, which is the number of times of the specific event that the first notification execution means executes the specific notification, or a second specific event number, which is the number of times of the specific event that the second notification execution means executes the specific notification, among the number of times of the specific event;
The gaming machine described in feature EB1 or feature EB2, characterized in that the selection means selects a notification execution means that executes the specific notification from a plurality of notification execution means including the first notification execution means and the second notification execution means in accordance with the first specific event count or the second specific event count grasped by the specific number grasper.

According to the above configuration, the timing of the next specific notification is selected based on the number of times a specific event is performed at the first timing (or the second timing), not simply the number of times a specific event is performed. In this case, for example, if a large number of specific events have been performed at the first timing, the second timing may be more likely to be selected next, or the first timing may be more likely to be selected next. In this way, it is possible to determine the timing of the new specific notification by taking into account the timing of the specific notifications previously performed, and it is possible to effectively adjust the subtle differences in the impression given to the player by the timing of the specific notifications.

Feature EB4. The gaming machine described in Feature EB3 is characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function of executing the process of step S10806 by the display control device 81) capable of initializing the first specific event count or the second specific event count grasped by the specific number grasp means based on the specific notification being executed by a notification execution means different from the specific notification by the notification execution means grasped by the specific number grasp means.

According to the above configuration, for example, when the specific count grasping means grasps the first specific event count, when a specific notification is executed by the first notification execution means, the first specific event count is incremented by 1, while when a specific notification is executed by the second notification execution means, the first specific event count is initialized (reset). In other words, the count grasped by the specific count grasping means is the consecutive number of times that a specific notification is executed by the first notification execution means, or the consecutive number of times that a specific notification is executed by the second notification execution means. As a result, when determining the execution timing of a specific notification according to the grasped count, a decision can be made according to the consecutive number up to that point, for example, if specific notifications are executed consecutively at the first timing, it becomes easier to execute specific notifications at the first timing.

Feature EB5. A setting means (a function for executing a process for setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided with a plurality of setting values that can cause a change in the rate of increase or decrease or the increase or decrease mode of the game media, and one of the plurality of setting values is set;
A gaming machine described in any one of features EB1 to EB4, characterized in that the selection means is capable of selecting an alarm execution means for executing the specific alarm based on the number of times grasped by the number of times grasped by the number of times grasped by the setting means and the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, the timing of the execution of the specific notification also changes depending on the setting value that changes the rate of increase or decrease of the gaming media or the state of increase or decrease. For example, comparing the occurrence of an advantageous specific event in a situation where a large amount of gaming media is acquired due to a good setting value and a situation where no gaming media is acquired due to a bad setting value, it is thought that the player will be more pleased with the latter occurrence than with the former. Therefore, by using the above configuration, it is possible to realize a specific notification that responds to subtle changes in the player's emotions based on the advantageous specific event and the good or bad setting value.

Feature EB6. The selection means is
when the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means is a first number of times and the set value set by the setting means is a first set value, a predetermined notification execution means is selected with a first probability, when the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means is the first number of times and the set value set by the setting means is a second set value different from the first set value, a predetermined notification execution means is selected with a second probability different from the first probability,
when the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means is a second number of times which is greater than the first number of times and the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the predetermined notification execution means is selected with a third probability, and when the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means is the second number of times and the set value set by the setting means is the second set value, the predetermined notification execution means is selected with a fourth probability which is different from the third probability,
A gaming machine described in feature EB5, characterized in that the probability difference between the third probability and the fourth probability is set to be greater than the probability difference between the first probability and the second probability.

According to the above configuration, when selecting the notification execution means based on the number of times a specific event occurs and the set value, the more the number of times, the greater the influence of the set value, and conversely, the fewer the number of times, the smaller the influence of the set value. In this way, for example, in a configuration in which the setting value is suggested based on the timing of execution of a specific notification, the more the number of times a specific event occurs, the easier it is to narrow down the setting value. In other words, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being narrowed down in a situation where the number of times a specific event occurs is low, and to prevent the fun of gradually narrowing down the setting value from being eliminated.

More specifically, the "predetermined notification execution means" is the "first notification execution means" or the "second notification execution means."

Feature EB7. The gaming machine described in feature EB6, characterized in that when the first number of times is 1, the first probability and the second probability are the same probability.

According to the above configuration, when a specific event is executed for the first time, there is no difference in the timing of the specific notification due to the setting value. In this way, it is possible to avoid an event where the setting value can be determined from the first time, and it is possible to ideally realize gameplay that allows the setting value to be predicted.

Feature EB8. A notification execution means information group (additional notification timing table) is set in which information on a notification execution means that executes the specific notification from a plurality of notification execution means including the first notification execution means and the second notification execution means is stored according to the number of times grasped by ...
A gaming machine described in any one of features EB1 to EB7, characterized in that the selection means selects a notification execution means to execute the specific notification by switching the notification execution means information group to be used in accordance with the number of times grasped by the number of times grasped by the number of times grasped means.

According to the above configuration, the notification execution means selected by the selection means can be changed simply by switching the notification execution means information group (table) according to the number of times a specific event is executed. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the effect of feature EB1 with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature EB9. At least a normal gaming state (normal zone) and a specific gaming state (advantageous zone) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are set as gaming states;
The gaming machine described in any one of features EB1 to EB8, wherein the specific event is an event that can increase the remaining number of times of the specific game state.

According to the above configuration, the specific event is executed during a specific game state in which the game state is advantageous to begin with, and when the specific event occurs, the remaining number of times in the specific game state increases. In other words, the specific event is an addition to the specific game state. By configuring the execution timing of the specific notification (addition notification) when such an addition occurs to differ depending on the number of times the addition occurs, it is possible to make the addition notification take advantage of the subtle differences in the player's emotions when an addition occurs, for example, when the number of times the addition occurs is low and the remaining number of times is low, and when the number of times the addition occurs is high and the remaining number of times is high.

<Characteristic EC group>
Feature EC1. A specific judgment means (a function for executing the first specific role processing to the third specific role processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific judgment of whether or not to execute a specific event advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition;
An event execution means (a function of executing a game number addition process or the like by the main control device 101) for executing the specific event based on the result of the determination by the specific determination means being a result corresponding to the execution of the specific event;
A specific notification execution means (a function of executing a setting process for an additional performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing a specific notification that the specific event has been executed or a specific notification corresponding to the execution of the specific event by a specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
A specific storage means (a function for executing a process for managing the Suica later-loading counter and the Suica immediate-loading counter by the display control device 81) capable of storing information regarding the timing at which the specific notification is executed by the specific notification execution means;
A specific output means (a function for executing a process for displaying the watermelon immediate/later addition ratio and the cherry immediate/later addition ratio by the display control device 81) capable of outputting specific information corresponding to the information stored in the specific storage means at a timing after the timing when the specific notification is executed by the specific notification execution means;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when a specific event advantageous to the player occurs as a result of winning a specific judgment, the player can grasp the specific event based on the specific notification corresponding to the specific event. For example, if the specific event is a jackpot, the specific notification is a jackpot notification, and the player can enjoy the jackpot to the fullest and feel a sense of superiority through the jackpot notification. Specific notifications can be made at various times, and in the above configuration, the timing at which the specific notification was made is stored, and specific information related to that timing is output after the fact. Here, for example, when game data is compiled after the fact, specific events such as jackpots may be displayed on a data display in the game hall, and such events advantageous to the player are likely to be memorable and easily recalled later. On the other hand, with regard to the timing of a specific notification of the occurrence of a specific event advantageous to the player, the player's desire will be satisfied at the time of such a specific notification, and the occurrence of the specific event will likely further increase the player's sense of elation, so it is thought that specific notifications executed before that will easily fade from memory as the player's sense of elation increases. In other words, it is thought that specific notifications, especially the execution timing, are difficult for players to remember. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by storing such information that is difficult to remember on the gaming machine side and making it possible to read (output) it later, it is possible to assist in collecting player data.

Feature EC2. As the specific event, a plurality of specific events (additions with different numbers of games) having different advantages for the player are set,
The gaming machine described in feature EC1 is characterized in that the specific memory means is capable of storing each of the specific events as separate information when the specific notifications are executed at different times, even if the specific events have the same degree of advantage.

According to the above configuration, even if the specific events have the same degree of advantage, they can be tallied separately if the timing of the specific notification is different. In other words, even if the jackpots are similar, they can be tallied as separate information if the timing of the jackpot notification is different. For example, in conventional counting methods, jackpots and small jackpots are tallied separately, but it is common for the same jackpot to be tallied as the same information even if the timing of the notification is different. According to the above configuration, the difference from such conventional technology is made clearer, and it is possible to more appropriately realize the tallying of the notification timing as shown in feature EC1.

Feature EC3. The specific notification execution means is
A first specific notification execution means (a function for executing a process for performing an immediate ride performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a first timing;
A second specific notification execution means (a function of executing a process for performing a post-loading performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a second timing different from the first timing;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in feature EC1 or feature EC2, characterized in that the specific output means is capable of outputting ratio information between the specific notification executed by the first specific notification execution means and the specific notification executed by the second specific notification execution means as the specific information.

According to the above configuration, as information regarding the timing of execution of a specific notification, ratio information between the rate at which it was executed at the first timing and the rate at which it was executed at the second timing is output. This not only facilitates the compilation, but also makes it possible to avoid information that is undesirable to the player being clearly displayed, for example, by outputting only the ratio without outputting the number of times a specific event is executed if the number of times it is executed is small.

The above configuration may be expressed as follows.
"The specific notification execution means is
A first specific notification execution means (a function for executing a process for performing an immediate ride performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a first timing;
A second specific notification execution means (a function of executing a process for performing a post-loading performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a second timing different from the first timing;
Equipped with
The specific output means is capable of outputting ratio information between the specific notification executed by the first specific notification execution means and the specific notification executed by the second specific notification execution means as the specific information, but does not output number of times information between the specific notification executed by the first specific notification execution means and the specific notification executed by the second specific notification execution means.

Feature EC4. A gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC3, characterized in that it is equipped with a restriction means (a function of executing the process of step S11206 by the display control device 81) capable of restricting the output of the specific information by the output means in a specific situation (advantageous zone) in which the specific event is being executed or a game based on the specific event is being played.

According to the above configuration, the output of specific information is restricted during a specific event or in a specific situation where a game based on a specific event is being played. For example, information about the timing of the jackpot notification is not output during a jackpot. This can prevent an event from occurring where an excessive attempt to collect data during a specific situation results in the player being unable to fully enjoy a specific event, etc. Furthermore, with this configuration as a premise, the output of specific information can occur at a later time, which enhances the significance of storing such specific information.

Feature EC5: The specific notification execution means uses a predetermined information group (an additional notification timing table including information on a set value) to determine the execution timing of the specific notification and then executes the specific notification;
A gaming machine described in any one of features EC1 to EC4, characterized in that the information set in the specified information group can be useful information to a player.

According to the above configuration, the timing of execution of a specific notification is determined using information set in a predetermined information group, and by aggregating such execution timing, it is possible to predict and understand the information set in the predetermined information group. Since the information set in the predetermined information group can be useful information for the player, aggregating the execution timing can also be said to be an act of collecting information that can be useful to the player. This further enhances the significance of outputting the specific information, and makes it possible to generate benefits for the player by outputting such specific information.

Feature EC6. In the specific storage means, the specific area that stores information regarding the timing at which the specific notification is to be executed is configured to be able to store information regarding the timing at which a plurality of the specific notifications are to be executed;
The gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC5, wherein the specific output means is capable of outputting cumulative information of the plurality of stored information as the specific information.

According to the above configuration, when there is multiple pieces of information related to the timing of execution of a specific notification, such as when a specific notification is executed multiple times, the cumulative information is output as the specific information. This allows the player to more easily perform data analysis based on the specific information.

Feature EC7. A first judgment condition (cherry) and a second judgment condition (watermelon) are set as the judgment conditions,
A gaming machine described in any one of features EC1 to EC6, characterized in that the specific information storage means is capable of separately storing information corresponding to the timing of execution of the specific notification based on the satisfaction of the first judgment condition and information corresponding to the timing of execution of the specific notification based on the satisfaction of the second judgment condition.

With the above configuration, information corresponding to the timing of specific notification is stored for each type of judgment condition, making it possible to perform more useful data analysis, for example, when the information obtained differs for each type.

Feature EC8. The game machine has an operation unit (effect switch 66) that can be operated by a player.
A gaming machine described in any one of features EC1 to EC7, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S11203 and S11204 by the display control device 81) that can erase information stored in the specific storage means based on operation of the operation unit.

According to the above configuration, the player can freely choose whether or not to erase the information stored in the specific storage means. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game data that the player played from being handed over to a successor, and the advantage of collecting specific information can be guaranteed.

Feature EC9. The specific information is output by the specific output means based on an operation of the operation unit,
The gaming machine described in feature EC8, wherein the specific memory means is capable of storing information regarding the timing at which the specific notification is executed regardless of whether or not the operation unit is operated.

The above configuration is based on the premise that the operation of the operation unit erases or outputs information related to the timing of execution of the specific notification, and the storage of information related to the timing of execution of the specific notification is performed regardless of whether the operation unit is operated or not. This leaves the collection of specific information to the player's operation, ensuring its advantages, while avoiding inconveniences such as not being able to output the specific information due to forgetting to operate, etc.

Feature EC10. A normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are set as gaming states;
A first termination means (a function of executing a process for normally terminating the advantageous zone in the main control device 101) for terminating the specific game state according to the remaining number of times of the specific game state;
A second termination means (a function of executing a process to forcibly terminate the advantageous zone in the main control device 101) for terminating the specific game state regardless of the remaining number of times of the specific game state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features EC1 to EC9, characterized in that the specific output means is capable of outputting the specific information based on the specific game state being ended by the second ending means.

The specific game state that is advantageous to the player may end depending on the remaining number of times that can be executed, or it may end regardless of the remaining number of times. The former is the normal ending mode, and the latter corresponds to a forced termination, for example, when the number of times that it is executed reaches the upper limit. In such a configuration, if the game is forced to terminate by the second termination means, a player who still wants to enjoy the specific game state may get the impression that the profits that could have been obtained have been exploited. Therefore, by configuring the game to output specific information instead, as in the above configuration, it is possible to follow up on the forced termination of the specific game state.

<Characteristic ED group>
Feature ED1. As a game state, a low advantageous state (normal area) and a high advantageous state (advantageous area) are set in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low,
A first determination means (advantageous zone game number AG) for determining the number of times the game has been executed in the highly advantageous state;
A second grasping means (a number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG) for grasping the number of remaining games in the highly advantageous state;
A first termination means for transitioning the highly advantageous state to the low advantageous state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the highly advantageous state (a function for executing a termination process of the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a normal termination condition in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
a second termination means (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous zone in a second process of zone display by the main control device 101) for transitioning the highly advantageous zone to the low advantageous zone based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means in the highly advantageous zone has reached a predetermined upper limit number, regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of executions grasped by the second grasping means;
A setting means (a function for executing a process for setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided with a plurality of setting values capable of changing the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of the gaming media, and one of the plurality of setting values is set;
A gaming machine comprising:
An increase means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
When the increase process is performed by the increase means, an increase notification execution means (a function of executing a setting process for the add-on effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing an increase notification (add-on notification) of the increase process by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the increase notification execution means is equipped with a specific notification execution means (a function of executing a later-loading effect during zone and an immediate-loading effect during zone by a display control device 81) that is capable of executing a specific notification suggesting information about the setting value set by the setting means depending on the number of times the increase notification is made.

According to the above configuration, there are a high-advantage state and a low-advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high-advantage state may end based on the remaining number of times in the high-advantage state, or when the upper limit of the number of times has been reached, so that the degree of advantage of the high-advantage state is prevented from becoming extremely high. In this configuration, there is a so-called add-on function in which the remaining number of times in the high-advantage state is increased when a specific condition is met, and the expectation that the specific condition will be met is heightened.

On the other hand, even if a certain condition is met and the remaining number of times is increased, there are situations where a sufficient increase cannot be expected, such as when the number of executions is close to the upper limit, in which case increasing the remaining number of times will result in reaching the upper limit, and in a highly advantageous state where a limit has been set, the expectation of an increase in the remaining number of times varies greatly depending on the situation.

In the above configuration, when an increase notification is given in response to the execution of the increase process, a setting value can be suggested according to the number of executions. Even if the remaining number of times is not expected to increase and the benefit of the specific condition being met cannot be fully enjoyed, the benefit can be followed up by the suggestion of the setting value. This allows the player to fully enjoy the highly advantageous state, and makes it possible to appropriately increase interest.

Feature ED2. The gaming machine described in Feature ED1, characterized in that the specific notification execution means is capable of suggesting that the closer the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means is to the upper limit number of times, the easier it is to grasp information about the setting value set by the setting means in the specific notification.

According to the above configuration, the more the number of executions increases and approaches the upper limit, the easier it becomes to grasp the setting value through the specific notification, as the benefits of the increase process cannot be fully enjoyed. This makes it possible to compensate for the benefits that cannot be enjoyed through the increase process by suggesting the setting value.

Feature ED3. The specific notification execution means includes:
when the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means is a first number and the setting value set by the setting means is a first setting value, the setting value information is suggested so that the execution mode of the specific notification becomes the specific mode with a first probability, and when the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means is the first number and the setting value set by the setting means is a second setting value different from the first setting value, the setting value information is suggested so that the execution mode of the specific notification becomes the specific mode with a second probability different from the first probability.
when the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means is a second number which is greater than the first number, and the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, information on the setting value is suggested so that the execution mode of the specific notification becomes the specific mode with a third probability, and when the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means is the second number, and the setting value set by the setting means is the second setting value, information on the setting value is suggested so that the execution mode of the specific notification becomes the specific mode with a fourth probability which is different from the third probability.
A gaming machine described in feature ED2, characterized in that the probability difference between the third probability and the fourth probability is set to be greater than the probability difference between the first probability and the second probability.

According to the above configuration, the more the number of executions increases and approaches the upper limit, the greater the difference in the set value in the probability that the execution mode of the specific notification becomes a specific mode and a suggestion of the set value is made, so that the benefit of the increase process cannot be fully enjoyed. This makes it possible to achieve the effect of feature ED2 through a specific configuration.

Feature ED4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features ED1 to ED3, characterized in that the specific notification execution means is capable of suggesting information about the set value as the specific notification depending on the timing of execution of the increase notification.

According to the above configuration, if the setting value is suggested by utilizing the difference in the execution timing of the increase notification, there is no need to prepare different types of presentation for each setting value that is set in multiple stages. This makes it possible to realize specific notifications with a simple configuration without complicating the presentation configuration.

Feature ED5. The gaming machine described in Feature ED4, characterized in that the specific notification execution means executes the increase notification at a first timing when the setting value set by the setting means is a first setting value, and executes the increase notification at a second timing different from the first timing when the setting value set by the setting means is a second setting value different from the first setting value, thereby enabling the specific notification to be executed.

The above configuration allows the effect of feature ED4 to be achieved through a more specific configuration.

Feature ED6. The gaming machine described in feature ED5, wherein the second timing is a game that is played later than the first timing.

According to the above configuration, the game has different first and second timings. In this case, the remaining number of times when the specific notification is executed at the first timing is different from the remaining number of times when the specific notification is executed at the second timing. For example, it is considered that the joy of the increase in the remaining number of times is greater when the specific notification is issued when the remaining number of times is low than when the specific notification is issued when the remaining number of times is high. In other words, the impression that the player receives when the remaining number of times is increased by the increase notification will be significantly different. By using such a difference in the impression received by the player, a configuration is provided to suggest a setting value, so that, for example, by suggesting a low setting at a timing when the player feels happy about the increase notification, the sadness of the low setting can be alleviated, and conversely, by suggesting a high setting at a timing when the player feels less happy about the increase notification, the joy of the increase notification can be compensated for.

Feature ED7. The specific notification execution means includes:
when the setting value set by the setting means is a first setting value, the increase notification is executed in a first game, and when the setting value set by the setting means is a second setting value which is more advantageous to a player than the first setting value, the increase notification is executed in a second game which is a game subsequent to the first game,
When the set value set by the setting means is the same set value,
when the number of executions grasped by the grasping means is a first number of executions, a specific selection rate at which the second game is selected over the first game is a first selection rate;
A gaming machine described in any one of ED4 to ED6, characterized in that when the number of executions grasped by the grasping means is a second number of executions which is greater than the first number of executions, the specific selection rate is set to a second selection rate which is higher than the first selection rate, thereby making it possible to execute the specific notification.

According to the above configuration, the higher the setting, the more likely it is that an increase notification will be executed in a later game. Furthermore, when comparing with the same setting value, the more likely it is that an increase notification will be executed in a later game in the later stages when the specific game state is executed more frequently than in the early stages when the specific game state is executed less frequently. As a result, in the early stages when the specific game state is executed less frequently, an increase notification is executed in the first game and a hint that the setting is low is more likely to be given, but the sadness of the low setting can be alleviated by the joy of the increase notification. Conversely, since a hint that the setting is high is more likely to be given in the late stages of the specific game state, even in situations where an increase notification is not particularly welcome, it is possible to follow up with a hint that the setting is high.

Feature ED8. The increase notification is
A first means for executing the increase notification in the game in which the specific condition is satisfied (a function for executing a process for performing an immediate add-on effect in the display control device 81);
A second means for executing the increase notification in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific condition is satisfied (a function for executing a process for performing a subsequent bonus effect in the display control device 81);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features ED4 to ED7, wherein the increasing means executes the increasing process in a game in which the specific condition is met.

According to the above configuration, the increase process itself is executed in the game in which the specific condition is met, so even if the increase notification is performed in a subsequent game as in the second method, the only difference is the presentation, and the configuration for performing specific notifications by changing the execution timing of the increase notification while managing the number of executions, the maximum number of times, etc. is simplified.

Feature ED9. A number of times notifying means (a function of executing a process for managing the display remaining number counter HG by the display control device 81) capable of executing a number of times notifying corresponding to the remaining number by a predetermined notifying means,
The gaming machine described in feature ED8 is characterized in that, when the increase notification is executed by the second means in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, the number of times notification means performs the number of times notification without reflecting the result of the increase processing executed in the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, and reflects the result of the increase processing for the increase notification in the number of times notification based on the increase notification being performed by the second means.

According to the above configuration, when the remaining number of times is known to a certain extent by the number of times notification means and an increase notification is made after the fact, the result of the increase process is not reflected in the number of times notification until the increase notification occurs. This makes it possible to achieve the effect of simplifying the processing configuration like feature ED8 while achieving the effect of performing an increase notification in a later game.

Feature ED10. The gaming machine described in Feature ED9, characterized in that the specific notification execution means is capable of making the specific notification in response to information about the number of notifications notified by the number of notifications means.

According to the above configuration, the setting value is suggested (specific notification) by notifying an increase, taking into account information about the number of times displayed. In this way, for example, even if there are actually many remaining times, but the number of times displayed shows a small number, it is possible to treat the increase notification as a case in which the user will feel happy. Therefore, there will be more situations in which a configuration such as that of feature ED6 can be applied, and the dramatic effect of feature ED1 can be more effectively demonstrated.

<Feature FA group>
Feature FA1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state being a predetermined specific result;
A specific transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the specific game state;
A grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times of the specific game state (the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG);
A normal transition means for transitioning the specific game state to the normal game state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the grasping means in the specific game state (a function for executing an end process of the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a normal end condition in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
An increase means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
When the increase process is performed by the increase means, an increase notification execution means (a function of executing a setting process for the add-on effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing an increase notification (add-on notification) of the increase process by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
Equipped with
The increase notification execution means includes:
A first notification execution means capable of executing the increase notification in a first mode (a function of executing a process for performing an add-on performance based on an immediate add-on selection flag in the display control device 81);
A second notification execution means (a function of executing a process for performing an additional performance based on a later-addition selection flag in the display control device 81) capable of executing the increase notification in a second mode different from the first mode;
Equipped with
the first notification execution means, in a specific game in which the mode notification is not executed by the mode notification means, executes the increase notification in the first mode when the increase process is performed, based on the stop operation means being operated in a first specific stop operation mode and the corresponding rotating body being stopped;
The second notification execution means executes the increase notification in the second mode when the increase processing is performed based on the stop operation means being operated in a second specific stop operation mode different from the first specific stop operation mode in the specific game and the corresponding rotating body stopping.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, and a specific game state is provided in which the degree of advantage differs depending on whether or not there is a notification regarding the stop operation mode. Moreover, when a specific condition is met in the specific game state, the remaining number of times in the specific game state may be increased, and it may be possible to win a large amount of game media by continuing the specific game state for a long time, so the playability of each game is greatly improved.

On the other hand, in a specific gaming state, the player performs a stopping operation based on the state notification from the gaming machine, resulting in a winning result, and the game tends to be one-sided from the gaming machine. Considering the original gameplay of slot machines, in which the player aims for the image on the rotating body to stop it and receive a bonus, the above-mentioned gaming led by the gaming machine is not desirable.

The above configuration allows the player to select the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase process based on the establishment of a specific condition is performed, depending on the mode of the stop operation by the stop operation means in a specific game in which mode notification is not performed. In this way, it becomes possible to have the player intervene in the game in a specific game state, and it becomes possible to encourage the player's participation in gameplay that can be led by the gaming machine.

In addition, with regard to the "specific game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed", a "special result (specific combination, normal replay) is provided as the lottery result by the lottery means", and "if the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special result winning can be established by operating each of the stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and the special result winning can be established by operating each of the stop operation means in the second stop operation mode", so that the game in which "the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result" may be a "specific game".

The "first aspect" and "second aspect" may also be expressed as "first timing" and "second timing." In this way, by realizing the above configuration with only a difference in timing, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects with a simpler configuration.

Feature FA2. The lottery result by the lottery means includes a replay result that allows the player to replay the next game without needing new game media;
A gaming machine described in feature FA1, characterized in that when the specific gaming state is reached, the machine can transition to a re-game state in which the probability that the lottery result of the lottery means will be a specified re-game result is higher than in the normal gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the game moves to a specific game state where a mode notification is performed, the game may move to a so-called RT state where the probability of a predetermined replay result is high. The replay result is generally a winning result regardless of the stop operation mode of the stop operation means. In the RT state, in addition to the game where the first or second result is won and a bonus is obtained by the stop operation mode according to the mode notification, it is considered that games where the winning probability of a predetermined replay result is won frequently occur. As described above, since the replay result is generally a winning result regardless of the stop operation mode, these games are games where the stop operation is performed according to instructions from the gaming machine side, or games where the stop operation mode has no effect on whether or not a winning result is won, and there may be little room for the player to intervene in the game. In this regard, as described in feature FA1, the configuration is such that the execution mode of the increase notification is determined based on the stop operation mode of the specific game where the mode notification is not performed, so for example, it is possible to make the above-mentioned replay result winning game a specific game. As a result of the above, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

The above configuration can achieve the above effect more clearly by restricting that "if the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific replay result win, the specific replay result win is established regardless of the stop operation mode by each of the stop operation means."

Feature FA3. The specific condition is established based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a specific result,
A gaming machine described in feature FA1 or feature FA2, characterized in that when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specific result, the specific result can be won by operating each of the stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and the specific result can be won by operating each of the stop operation means in the second stop operation mode.

According to the above configuration, in the specific result winning game that triggers the execution of the increase process, the specific result win is established regardless of the stop operation mode of the stop operation means. In other words, the increase process is triggered by a game that is not the target of the mode notification by the mode notification means, and the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase process is performed is determined by the stop operation mode of the game. Assuming that in a specific game state, a player is playing while hoping that the increase process will be performed, it is thought that interest in such games that do not perform mode notification is higher than other games (games that perform mode notification). Therefore, by configuring the execution mode of the increase notification to be determined in a game that is originally of high interest, as in the above configuration, it is possible to fully enjoy the gameplay of selecting the increase notification by oneself.

Feature FA4. The gaming machine described in Feature FA3, wherein the specific game is a game in which the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specific result.

According to the above configuration, the specific result winning game becomes the specific game. In other words, the game in which the increase process is performed and the game in which the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase process is performed are the same game. It is thought that the joy of the player when an increase notification is performed varies not only depending on the execution mode but also on the progress of the game (the situation of the specific game state). With the above configuration, it is possible to select the execution mode of the increase notification in a situation that is closer to the progress situation, which changes from moment to moment. In other words, for example, it is possible to configure the execution mode of the special notification to be selected at the start of the game or the start of the specific game state. In such a configuration, there is a possibility that the increase notification will be performed in an execution mode different from the execution mode initially desired as the game progresses. In this respect, with the above configuration, it is possible to realize an increase notification that is more in line with the player's preferences.

Feature FA5. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the specific result prize is established by stopping a specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific result at the pay position,
The gaming machine described in feature FA4 is characterized in that in a specific one of the revolving bodies, a specific pattern that constitutes the specific pattern combination is attached to the specific revolving body so that it can be stopped at the effective position when the corresponding stop operation means is operated to stop in a first stop mode, but cannot be stopped at the effective position when the corresponding stop operation means is operated to stop in a second stop mode different from the first stop mode.

With the above configuration, the specific result is a result with so-called misses, so in a game where the stop operation mode in a specific result winning game allows the player to select the execution mode of the increase notification, the stop operation for making such a selection is configured to be performed without causing the specific result to be missed, making the operation more difficult and improving the playability.

Feature FA6. The second aspect occurs later than the first aspect;
The first specific stop operation mode is a stop operation mode in which a first stop operation means among the stop operation means is operated in a specific order to stop the operation,
The second specific stop operation mode is a stop operation mode in which a second stop operation means, which is different from the first stop operation means among the respective stop operation means, is operated to stop in the specific order,
The gaming machine described in feature FA5, wherein the stop operation means corresponding to the specific rotating body is the first stop operation means.

According to the above configuration, the execution mode of the increase notification is selected depending on which stop operation means is operated to stop in a specific order, and when the stop operation means for the circulating body with a missed prize is operated in a specific order in a specific result winning game, the first mode is selected. In this way, even if a prize is missed, the increase notification is made at a relatively early timing, and the configuration can be configured to quickly resolve questions and concerns based on multiple possibilities, such as whether it was a missed prize or whether the specific result was not won in the first place.

Feature FA7. The gaming machine described in Feature FA3, characterized in that the specific game is a game preceding a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result.

According to the above configuration, the mode of execution of the increase notification when the increase process is performed is selected depending on the mode of the stop operation of the game prior to the specific result winning game that triggers the increase process. In this way, it is possible to perform the selection operation and the operation to establish the specific result winning in separate games, allowing the player to concentrate on each operation.

Feature FA8. Based on the transition to the specific game state, a means for executing a transition notification (attack mode start presentation) of the transition to the specific game state by a predetermined notification means (a function for executing an attack mode start presentation by the display control device 81) is provided;
A gaming machine according to any one of features FA1 to FA7, wherein a game subsequent to the game in which the transition notification is made becomes the specific game.

The above configuration clarifies that one of the games in the specific gaming state is a specific game, and makes the difference in gameplay that can be selected before or at the start of the specific gaming state more clear. In other words, in games after the specific gaming state has started, it becomes possible to more clearly achieve the effect of increasing the enjoyment of games in which no mode notification is performed.

Feature FA9. The gaming machine described in any one of Features FA1 to FA8, characterized in that the second aspect is included in a game that is different from the game that includes the first aspect.

According to the above configuration, the game in which the increase notification is given may differ depending on the stop operation mode in a particular game. With this configuration, the result of the player's selection can affect the presentation across multiple games, making it possible to increase the importance and significance of the selection.

Feature FA10. The gaming machine described in Feature FA9, in which when the stop operation means is operated in the second specific stop operation mode in the specific game, if a game prior to the target game including the second mode is further set as the specific game, the increase notification execution means executes the increase notification in a mode corresponding to the stop operation mode of the stop operation means in the subsequent specific game.

In a configuration where an increase notification is made in a later game across games, as in feature FA9, it is conceivable that a specific game may be selected when the later game is selected. In this regard, the above configuration prioritizes the later selection, making it possible to execute an increase notification in a manner that takes into account the situation at the time of selection.

Feature FA11. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state being a predetermined specific result;
A specific transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the specific game state;
A grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times of the specific game state (the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG);
A normal transition means for transitioning the specific game state to the normal game state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the grasping means in the specific game state (a function for executing an end process of the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a normal end condition in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
An increase means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
When the increase process is performed by the increase means, an increase notification execution means (a function of executing a setting process for the add-on effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing an increase notification (add-on notification) of the increase process by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
Equipped with
The increase notification execution means includes:
A first notification execution means capable of executing the increase notification in a first mode (a function of executing a process for performing an add-on performance based on an immediate add-on selection flag in the display control device 81);
A second notification execution means (a function of executing a process for performing an additional performance based on a later-addition selection flag in the display control device 81) capable of executing the increase notification in a second mode different from the first mode;
Equipped with
the first notification execution means, in a specific game in which the mode notification is not executed by the mode notification means, executes the increase notification in the first mode when the increase process is performed, based on the stop operation means being operated in a first specific stop operation mode;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second notification execution means executes the increase notification in the second manner when the increase processing is performed based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in a second specific stop operation manner different from the first specific stop operation manner in the specific game.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, and a specific game state is provided in which the degree of advantage differs depending on whether or not there is a notification regarding the stop operation mode. Moreover, when a specific condition is met in the specific game state, the remaining number of times in the specific game state may be increased, and it may be possible to win a large amount of game media by continuing the specific game state for a long time, so the playability of each game is greatly improved.

On the other hand, in a specific gaming state, the player performs a stopping operation based on the state notification from the gaming machine, resulting in a winning result, and the game tends to be one-sided from the gaming machine. Considering the original gameplay of slot machines, in which the player aims for the image on the rotating body to stop it and receive a bonus, the above-mentioned gaming led by the gaming machine is not desirable.

The above configuration allows the player to select the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase process based on the establishment of a specific condition is performed, depending on the mode of the stop operation by the stop operation means in a specific game in which mode notification is not performed. In this way, it becomes possible to have the player intervene in the game in a specific game state, and it becomes possible to encourage the player's participation in gameplay that can be led by the gaming machine.

In addition, with regard to the "specific game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed", a "special result (specific combination, normal replay) is provided as the lottery result by the lottery means", and "if the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special result winning can be established by operating each of the stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and the special result winning can be established by operating each of the stop operation means in the second stop operation mode", so that the game in which "the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result" may be a "specific game".

The "first aspect" and "second aspect" may be expressed as "first timing" and "second timing". In this way, by realizing the above configuration only by changing the timing, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects with a simpler configuration.

Feature FA12. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific role process by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal game state being a predetermined specific result;
A specific transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the specific game state;
A grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times of the specific game state (the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG);
A normal transition means for transitioning the specific game state to the normal game state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the grasping means in the specific game state (a function for executing an end process of the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a normal end condition in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
An increase means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
When the increase process is performed by the increase means, an increase notification execution means (a function of executing a setting process for the add-on effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing an increase notification (add-on notification) of the increase process by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
Equipped with
The increase notification execution means includes:
A first notification execution means capable of executing the increase notification in a first mode (a function of executing a process for performing an add-on performance based on an immediate add-on selection flag in the display control device 81);
A second notification execution means (a function of executing a process for performing an additional performance based on a later-addition selection flag in the display control device 81) capable of executing the increase notification in a second mode different from the first mode;
Equipped with
the first notification execution means, in a specific situation in which each of the rotating bodies is rotating in a game in which the mode notification is not executed by the mode notification means, executes the increase notification in the first mode when the increase process has been performed based on the stop operation means being operated in a first specific stop operation mode;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second notification execution means executes the increase notification in the second manner when the increase processing is performed based on the fact that, in the specific situation, the stop operation means is operated in a second specific stop operation manner different from the first specific stop operation manner.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, and a specific game state is provided in which the degree of advantage differs depending on whether or not there is a notification regarding the stop operation mode. Moreover, when a specific condition is met in the specific game state, the remaining number of times in the specific game state may be increased, and it may be possible to win a large amount of game media by continuing the specific game state for a long time, so the playability of each game is greatly improved.

On the other hand, in a specific gaming state, the player performs a stopping operation based on the state notification from the gaming machine, resulting in a winning result, and the game tends to be one-sided from the gaming machine. Considering the original gameplay of slot machines, in which the player aims for the image on the rotating body to stop it and receive a bonus, the above-mentioned gaming led by the gaming machine is not desirable.

The above configuration allows the player to select the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase process based on the establishment of a specific condition is performed, depending on the mode of the stop operation by the stop operation means in a specific game in which mode notification is not performed. In this way, it becomes possible to have the player intervene in the game in a specific game state, and it becomes possible to encourage the player's participation in gameplay that can be led by the gaming machine.

In addition, regarding "games in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed", a configuration in which "a special result (specific combination, normal replay) is provided as the lottery result by the lottery means" and "if the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special result prize can be established by operating each of the stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and the special result prize can be established by operating each of the stop operation means in the second stop operation mode" may be used to define a game in which "the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result" as "a game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed".

The "first aspect" and "second aspect" may be expressed as "first timing" and "second timing". In this way, by realizing the above configuration only by changing the timing, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects with a simpler configuration.

<Feature FB group>
Feature FB1. As a game state, a low advantageous state (normal area) and a high advantageous state (advantageous area) are set in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low,
A grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times of the highly advantageous state (the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG);
A transition means for transitioning the highly advantageous state to the low advantageous state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the grasping means in the highly advantageous state (a function for executing an end process of the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a normal end condition in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
An increase means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
When the increase process is performed by the increase means, an increase notification execution means (a function of executing a setting process for the add-on effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing an increase notification (add-on notification) of the increase process by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
Equipped with
The increase notification execution means includes:
A first notification execution means (a function of executing a process for performing an additional performance based on an immediate additional selection flag in the display control device 81) capable of executing the increase notification triggered by a predetermined specific condition at a first timing based on a first selection operation by a player;
A second notification execution means (a function of executing a process for performing an additional performance based on a later additional selection flag in the display control device 81) capable of executing the increase notification triggered by the predetermined specific condition at a second timing that is later than the first timing based on the second selection operation performed by the player;
a third notification execution means (a function of executing a correction process in the display control device 81) for executing the increase notification triggered by the predetermined specific condition at a third timing different from the second timing, based on a third selection operation by the player in a specific situation after the second selection operation has been performed and before the second timing has been reached;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which there is a highly advantageous state and a low advantageous state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, when a specific condition is met, the number of times remaining in the highly advantageous state is increased, which is a so-called top-up function, and when the number of times remaining is increased, an increase notification is given as a top-up notification, which heightens the expectation that the specific condition will be met.

Moreover, in this gaming machine, the player can select whether the increase notification is to be executed at the first timing or the later second timing, so that the machine has a function for the player to customize the increase notification, making it possible to create a gaming machine that meets the needs of the player. Furthermore, when an increase notification at the second timing is selected, the machine also has a function that allows the player to select a third timing different from the second timing in a specific situation before the second timing, at the player's discretion. In this way, if a player initially selects the second timing but then changes their mind due to the game situation, etc., the timing for the increase notification can be changed after the fact, realizing a gaming machine that meets a variety of needs.

Feature FB2. The display control device 81 includes a storage unit (an individual area by the display control device 81) capable of storing the result of the increase process triggered by the predetermined specific condition, which is executed by the second notification execution unit at the second timing, in a predetermined storage area;
The third notification execution means is
A means for acquiring a result of the increase process triggered by the predetermined specific condition stored in the storage means (a function for executing the process of step S12806 by the display control device 81);
a means for executing the increase notification corresponding to the acquired result of the increase processing at the third timing (a function for executing the processing of step S12807 by the display control device 81);
A means for deleting the acquired result of the increase process from the storage means (a function for executing the process of step S12809 by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine described in feature FB1 is characterized by having:

With the above configuration, the content of the increase notification that was supposed to be executed at the second timing can be changed to be executed at the third timing without causing duplication or omission. In this way, it is possible to realize the gameplay of feature FB1 while avoiding inconveniences such as the player suffering disadvantages or the occurrence of inconsistencies in the presentation.

Feature FB3. The storage means is capable of individually storing the results of the multiple increase processes;
A gaming machine described in feature FB1 or feature FB2, wherein the third notification execution means is capable of executing the increase notification for the results of the increase processing individually stored at the third timing, based on the third selection operation by the player.

According to the above configuration, if there are multiple pieces of information corresponding to an increase notification that was supposed to be executed at the second timing, it is possible to change each of them to be executed individually at the third timing. In this way, it is possible to realize a presentation that better meets the needs of the player.

Feature FB4. The storage means can separately store information corresponding to the result of the increase process performed based on a first specific trigger and selected to be executed at the second timing, and information corresponding to the result of the increase process performed based on a second specific trigger different from the first specific trigger and selected to be executed at the second timing,
A gaming machine as described in feature FB3, characterized in that the increase processing is performed based on the first specific trigger based on the third selection operation by the player, and information corresponding to the result of the increase processing selected to be executed at the second timing can be executed at the third timing, and the increase processing is performed based on the second specific trigger, and information corresponding to the result of the increase processing selected to be executed at the second timing can be executed at the second timing.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature FB3.

In regards to the "second specific trigger," "different from the first specific trigger" does not only mean that the type of trigger when the "specific condition" is met is different, but also means that even if the type of trigger is the same, the timing (game) at which the "specific condition" is met is different.

Feature FB5. The storage means can separately store information corresponding to the result of the increase process performed based on a first specific trigger and selected to be executed at the second timing, and information corresponding to the result of the increase process performed based on a second specific trigger that occurred before the first specific trigger and selected to be executed at the second timing,
A gaming machine as described in feature FB3 or feature FB4, characterized in that the increase processing is performed based on the first specific trigger based on the third selection operation by the player, and information corresponding to the result of the increase processing selected to be executed at the second timing can be executed at the third timing, and the increase processing is performed based on the second specific trigger, and information corresponding to the result of the increase processing selected to be executed at the second timing can be executed at the second timing.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to keep the increase notification for the first specific trigger that occurred earlier at the second timing, while executing the increase notification for the first specific trigger that occurred later at the third timing that precedes the second timing. In other words, by using a configuration that can store the results of the increase processing individually, it is possible to perform the increase notification in an order different from the order in which the increase processing was performed.

Feature FB6. A display control means (display control device 81) having a predetermined display screen (auxiliary display unit 65);
A means for displaying, on the predetermined display screen, corresponding information corresponding to the information on the result of the increase process individually stored in the storage means in the specific situation (a function for executing the process of step S12804 by the display control device 81);
A means for enabling a selection of one of the displayed corresponding information based on a third selection operation by a player (a function for executing the processing of steps S12805 and S12806 by the display control device 81);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features FB2 to FB5, characterized in that the third notification execution means executes the increase notification for the selected corresponding information at the third timing.

According to the above configuration, the player can execute the increase notification at the third timing by selecting one of the corresponding information displayed on a predetermined display screen. In this way, by allowing the player to select while displaying it on the display screen, it is intuitively easy to understand, and even players who are not familiar with the game can easily perform the selection operation. This makes it possible to create a gaming machine that is very user-friendly.

Feature FB7. A gaming machine according to any one of features FB1 to FB6, characterized in that the game in which the first timing exists and the game in which the second timing exists are different games.

As in the above configuration, if the configuration of feature FB1 is applied to a gaming machine that is premised on the first selection operation and the second selection operation providing an increase notification in different games, the first timing and the second timing will be farther apart in time, making it easier for a specific situation to occur in which the second timing is selected and occurs before that, and also making it possible to secure a grace period for the third selection operation in such a specific situation.

Feature FB8. The first timing exists in a first game in which the specific condition is satisfied;
the second timing exists in a second game that is later than the first game,
the third timing exists in a third game prior to the second game,
The gaming machine according to feature FB7, wherein the third notification execution means executes the increase notification in the third game when the third selection operation is performed.

According to the above configuration, when the first selection operation is performed, an increase notification is generated in the game in which the specific condition is met, and when the second selection operation is performed, an increase notification is generated in the game after the game in which the specific condition is met. Based on this configuration, when the third selection operation is performed, an increase notification is generated in the game in which the selection operation was performed. In this way, since an increase notification is executed immediately when the third selection operation is performed, not only is it possible to make it easier for the player to understand, but the configuration can also be simplified since there is no need to re-store new information when the third selection operation is performed.

<Feature GA group>
Feature GA1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a payout of a number of game media corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As game states, a normal game state and a first specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode or the like) which is more likely to be advantageous to a player than the normal game state are provided,
a second specific game state (e.g., an attack mode) that is more advantageous to a player than other states (e.g., a challenge mode) in the first specific game state is set as a state included in the first specific game state;
A first transition lottery means for executing a first transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the first specific game state in a normal game state (a function for executing a transition lottery to a challenge mode in a first specific role process by the main control device 101);
A first specific transition means for transitioning to the first specific game state based on the result of the lottery by the first transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the first specific game state (a function for executing a process for transitioning to a challenge mode in a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101);
A second transition lottery means for executing a second transition lottery as to whether or not to transition to the second specific game state (a function for executing a transition lottery to the attack mode in the first specific role processing by the main control device 101);
A second specific transition means for transitioning to the second specific game state based on the result of the lottery by the second transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the second specific game state (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the attack mode in the winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101);
a first grasping means (number of games remaining in advantageous zone ZG) for grasping the number of remaining games until a predetermined end condition of the second specific game state is met (for example, the number of remaining games in attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in attack mode reaches a set number of games, or in the case of a number management configuration, the remaining number of payouts or the increased number of payouts becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the increased number of payouts reaches a set number) in the second specific game state;
A second grasping means (a number of games in an advantageous zone AG, a number of coins in an advantageous zone ZM) for grasping at least one of the number of times the first specific game state is executed and the number of coins in an advantageous zone that is increased or decreased in the first specific game state;
A first termination means for transitioning the second specific game state to the normal game state based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means (a function for executing a termination process of the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a normal termination condition in the second process of zone display by the main control device 101);
a second termination means (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous zone in a second process of zone display by the main control device 101) for transitioning the first specific game state including the second specific game state to the normal game state, regardless of the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means, based on at least one of the fact that the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number and the increase/decrease number has reached an upper limit increase number;
An increase means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process of the second specific game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
a specific event executing means (a function of executing each process for special notification in a situation where the sum of the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit number, or the sum of the increase/decrease number grasped by the second grasping means and a planned increase/decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit increase number) capable of generating a specific event that is an event different from the event based on the increase process and that can be beneficial to a player, based on the specific condition being satisfied in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit increase number, or based on the specific situation being achieved by performing the increase process based on the satisfaction of the specific condition;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is drawn by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, the payout means can pay out gaming media. In this so-called slot machine, a first specific game state is provided that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a second specific game state that is even more advantageous is provided as a state included in the first specific game state. Therefore, gameplay is realized that is premised on a transition from the normal game state to the first specific game state and then to the second specific game state, which can be very useful in increasing interest.

The first and second specific game states are set up so that the second specific game state will end based on the remaining number of times until the end condition of the second specific game state is met, and also so that the first specific game state will end regardless of the remaining number of times when the number of times the first specific game state has been executed reaches the upper limit, or when the increase or decrease in the number of game media reaches the upper limit of increase. This avoids inconveniences such as an increase in game media that exceeds the designer's expectations due to the first or second specific game state continuing indefinitely, or a player being unable to end the game.

However, if the upper limit number of times or the upper limit increase number of the first specific game state is specified as described above, when a so-called top-up occurs, such as an increase process for the second specific game state, if the sum of the current number of times it is executed and the remaining number exceeds the upper limit number, or if the sum of the current increase/decrease number and the planned increase/decrease number based on the remaining number exceeds the upper limit increase number, no further increase can be expected. This will drastically reduce expectations for the occurrence of the increase process, and the increase process may be perceived as a loss, which could result in a significant decrease in interest in the game.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when a specific situation occurs in which the above-mentioned upper limit number or upper limit increase number is exceeded, or when a specific situation occurs as a result of performing an increase process, a specific event that is different from the increase process (addition) and that can be beneficial to the player occurs. In this way, the specific event can be used as a substitute for no addition or for an addition being meaningless, making it possible to increase the fun of each game even in the above-mentioned specific situation.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the second specific game state is included in the first specific game state, and when the first specific game state ends, the second specific game state also ends at the same time, and conversely, when the second specific game state ends, the first specific game state also ends. For example, in a configuration in which the first specific game state does not end even when the second specific game state ends, if the upper limit number of times or the upper limit increase number of the first specific game state is specified, when the second specific game state ends while the first specific game state continues and the second specific game state is transitioned to, an event is likely to occur in which the number of times or the increase number up to the upper limit number of times or the upper limit increase number of the first specific game state is small. In contrast, if the first specific game state is set to end when the second specific game state ends, as in the above configuration, when the first specific game state transitions to the second specific game state, the amount consumed in the first specific game state up to that point in the second specific game state will no longer exist, and the above-mentioned situation of a small number of times or increase to the upper limit number of times or the upper limit number of increases will be unlikely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of playing the first specific game state, which has a specified upper limit number of times and upper limit number of increases, and the second specific game state contained therein.

More specifically, the "increase or decrease in the number of gaming media in the specific gaming state" refers to the "increase or decrease that is the difference between the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means in the specific gaming state and the number of gaming media used in the specific gaming state."

In addition, with regard to the "first specific game state" and the "second specific game state," "the lottery results by the lottery means include a first result in which a winning is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result in which a winning is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode, and based on the lottery results by the lottery means, a mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is issued by a predetermined notification means (instruction monitor In addition, the "first specific game state" may be expressed as "a first specific game state in which an event related to the mode notification is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal game state" and the "second specific game state" may be expressed as "a second specific game state in which an event related to the mode notification is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific game state." This point can also be applied to other configurations (including other feature groups).

Feature GA2. The gaming machine described in Feature GA1, wherein the second ending means transitions the first specific gaming state to the normal gaming state when the number of executions reaches the upper limit number, even if the increase/decrease number has not reached the upper limit number of increase, and transitions the first specific gaming state to the normal gaming state when the number of increase/decrease number has reached the upper limit number of increase, even if the number of executions has not reached the upper limit number.

According to the above configuration, when the number of executions reaches the upper limit number or the increase/decrease number reaches the upper limit increase number, the first specific game state is forcibly terminated by the second termination means and transitions to the normal game state. In this way, by terminating the game when either of the forced termination conditions (upper limit) is met regardless of the other situation, the significance of providing multiple types of forced termination conditions is enhanced. In other words, if the game is forcibly terminated by the second termination means after both termination conditions are met, the conditions for forced termination are made more severe, and it is expected that accidental forced termination can be avoided. However, if the game is forcibly terminated when either of the forced termination conditions is met as in the above configuration, the player's profits may differ depending on which forced termination condition is used, and it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game by using such multiple forced termination conditions.

Feature GA3. A gaming machine according to Feature GA1 or Feature GA2, characterized in that the increase/decrease number can reach the upper limit increase number before the number of executions reaches the upper limit number.

On the premise that the game involves receiving payouts of game media according to game results and aiming to increase the amount of game media, the end of the first specific game state by the second ending means when the upper limit increase number is reached can be said to be the achievement of the goal of the game. In contrast, if the number of executions reaches the upper limit number without reaching the upper limit increase number and the first specific game state is ended, the goal will end without being achieved. The above configuration is a configuration for ensuring the superiority of the upper limit increase number based on such a difference between the upper limit number and the upper limit increase number, and by configuring the upper limit increase number to be reached even if the number of executions has not reached the upper limit number, as in the above configuration, in other words, by not configuring the upper limit increase number to be reached even if the number of executions reaches the upper limit number, it is possible to clarify the goal of the game and set an upper limit that does not reduce the player's desire to play.

Feature GA4. A gaming machine according to any one of features GA1 to GA3, characterized in that the result of multiplying the average expected increase or decrease per game during the second specific gaming state by the upper limit number of times is greater than the upper limit number of increases.

The above configuration specifies that the average expected increase or decrease, calculated by multiplying the so-called net increase in number by the maximum number of times, is greater than the maximum increase in number. With this configuration, for example, reaching the maximum increase in number before the maximum number of times, as in feature GA3, is not a coincidence, but a normal (average) occurrence. In other words, it becomes easier to aim to exceed the maximum increase in number, and the goal of the game becomes clear, such as reaching the maximum increase in number before the game is forcibly terminated by the maximum number of times.

In addition, in the above configuration, when the first specific game state is played entirely in the second specific game state, the upper limit increase number is reached before the upper limit number is reached. Therefore, if the first specific game state includes a state that is not the second specific game state, the difference between the game that reaches the upper limit number and the game that reaches the upper limit increase number may narrow or be reversed by the number of times that state is executed. In other words, if the number of times a state that is not the second specific game state is executed is large, the upper limit number may be reached before the upper limit increase number is reached. In this way, the aim of the game, such as how to transition from the first specific game state to the second specific game state, becomes clearer, making it possible to easily bring out the fun of the game.

Feature GA5. The specific event execution means is
a first execution means (a function of executing a process for issuing various special notifications based on a first excess flag being set by the main control device 101) capable of generating a first specific event that can be beneficial to a player, which is different from an event based on the increase process, based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied in a first specific situation in which the sum of the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit number, or based on the fact that the first specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on the satisfaction of the specific condition;
a second execution means (a function of executing a process for issuing various special notifications based on the main control device 101 setting a second excess flag) capable of generating a second specific event that can be beneficial to a player, which is different from an event based on the increase process, based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied in a second specific situation in which the sum of the increase or decrease grasped by the second grasping means and the planned increase or decrease corresponding to the remaining number grasped based on the remaining number by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit increase number, or based on the fact that the second specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on the satisfaction of the specific condition;
A gaming machine described in any one of features GA1 to GA4, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In a configuration in which multiple termination conditions, such as the maximum number of times and the maximum increase number, are set, a first specific situation in which the maximum number of times is exceeded and a second specific situation in which the maximum increase number is exceeded are expected, and a difference in the profit that the player will no longer be able to obtain may occur between the first and second specific situations. Therefore, by managing these separately as in the above configuration and varying the specific events that occur depending on which specific situation occurs, it becomes possible to set specific events according to the loss of profit due to these specific situations, and it becomes possible to more appropriately compensate the player through the specific events.

Feature GA6. The gaming machine described in Feature GA5 is characterized in that it is at least one of the following: the first specific event and the second specific event are configured such that the degree of advantage or benefit to the player may differ; or the probability of winning a first lottery in a first lottery to determine whether or not the first specific event will be caused by the first execution means may differ from the probability of winning a second lottery in a second lottery to determine whether or not the second specific event will be caused by the second execution means.

Comparing the loss of the excess number of times the second specific game state was played with the loss of the excess number of increases/decreases (increases), the degree of sense of loss that the two may cause the player may differ. The above configuration is a configuration that follows up the degree of such sense of loss felt by the player depending on each specific event and the likelihood of the specific event occurring, and in this way, it becomes possible to more appropriately compensate the player.

Feature GA7. The gaming machine described in Feature GA6 is characterized in that it is at least one of the following: the second specific event is an event that is more beneficial to the player than the first specific event; or the probability of winning the second lottery in the second lottery to determine whether or not the second specific event is to be caused by the second execution means is higher than the probability of winning the first lottery in the first lottery to determine whether or not the first specific event is to be caused by the first execution means.

Comparing the loss of the excess number of times the second specific game state was played with the loss of the excess number of increments and decrements (increases), the loss of the excess number of increments and decrements (increases) is more directly linked to the player's profits, and the latter (loss of the increments) may cause the player a greater sense of loss. The above configuration is a configuration that follows up on whether or not there is a direct link to such profits and the degree of the sense of loss due to the loss of profits depending on each specific event and the likelihood of the specific event occurring, making it possible to more appropriately compensate the player.

Feature GA8. A calculation means for calculating the expected increase or decrease based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means (a function for executing a prediction process based on the expected increase or decrease number KM in the remaining payout number management process by the main control device 101),
The gaming machine described in feature GA6 or GA7, characterized in that the calculation means is capable of calculating the expected increase or decrease based on the remaining number and the average value of the expected increase or decrease that can be expected per game during the second specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, the expected increase or decrease is calculated based on the expected increase or decrease per game and the remaining number of times. With this configuration, it is only necessary to store the expected increase or decrease in the second specific gaming state in advance, and the expected increase or decrease can be calculated with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature GA9. A calculation means for calculating the planned increase or decrease based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means (a function for executing a prediction process based on the maximum increase or decrease number MM in the first adjustment process or the second adjustment process by the main control device 101) is provided;
A gaming machine described in any one of features GA5 to GA8, characterized in that the calculation means is capable of calculating the expected increase or decrease based on the remaining number and the maximum expected increase or decrease per game during the second specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, the expected increase or decrease is calculated based on the maximum expected increase or decrease per game and the remaining number of times. Therefore, it is only necessary to store in advance the maximum expected increase or decrease in the second specific gaming state, and the maximum expected increase or decrease can be calculated with a relatively simple configuration.

In particular, in the above configuration, since the maximum value of the expected increase or decrease is used, the calculated planned increase or decrease is the maximum value, and the actual increase or decrease will not exceed that value. In this way, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the first specific game state ending earlier than planned due to an increase or decrease exceeding that value.

When the above feature GA9 is applied to feature GA8, the "calculation means" of feature GA8 may be expressed as the "first calculation means" and the "calculation means" of feature GA9 may be expressed as the "second calculation means", or the same "calculation means" may be configured to perform calculations based on the "average value" and the "maximum value", respectively.

Feature GA10. The lottery result by the lottery means includes a transition result (such as a first BB or a second BB) that allows a transition to a transition gaming state in which the probability of the result being a payout target of gaming media by the payout means is different from the previous state;
A transition means (a function of executing a bonus state process of the main control device 101) for transitioning a gaming state to the transition gaming state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being the transition result and a transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result being stopped at the valid position;
A reserve means (a function of not clearing the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag by the main control device 101 until the corresponding BB winning is achieved) is provided, which reserves the transition result until the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result and the picture combination for the transition stops at the valid position;
The transitional gaming state is a state in which at least a predetermined number of games can be played by transitioning to the transitional gaming state,
a calculation means for calculating the planned increase or decrease based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means (a function for executing a remaining number management process by the main control device 101);
The gaming machine described in any one of features GA5 to GA9, characterized in that the calculation means is capable of calculating the expected increase or decrease based on the number of increase or decrease in gaming media during the transitional gaming state, the number obtained by subtracting the specified number from the remaining number, and the average or maximum value of the expected increase or decrease per game during the second specific gaming state.

When a transition to a transition gaming state occurs, the probability of winning the outcome that is the subject of the payout of gaming media differs, and therefore the increase or decrease in the number of gaming media may also differ. For example, to calculate the increase or decrease in the number of gaming media that can be expected during the second specific gaming state, the increase or decrease when the specified game is executed can be calculated by adding the increase or decrease in each game during the second specific gaming state to the transition rate to the transition gaming state or the increase or decrease in the transition gaming state. However, assuming that the first specific gaming state is forcibly terminated when the number of games in the first specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number of games, transitioning to the transition gaming state means that the corresponding number of games cannot be consumed in the first specific gaming state, particularly the second specific gaming state, and simply adding the increase or decrease in the transition gaming state to the increase or decrease in the second specific gaming state may result in a lack of accuracy in the predicted increase or decrease. Therefore, in the above configuration, the number of games played in the transition gaming state is subtracted from the number of games played in the second specific gaming state, and then the expected increase or decrease is calculated, making it possible to calculate an increase or decrease that is easy to use in relation to the forced termination conditions.

Feature GA11. A setting means (a function for executing a process for setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided with a plurality of setting values that can cause a change in the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of the gaming medium, and one of the plurality of setting values is set;
A gaming machine described in any one of features GA1 to GA10, characterized in that the specific event execution means performs a suggestive notification as the specific event, suggesting information about a setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, the setting value suggestion information is presented as a specific event, so the player can use it as a basis for deciding whether to continue playing after the first specific game state ends when the upper limit number of plays or the upper limit increase number has been reached. In other words, if the suggestion notification indicates a low setting, the player can decide that he or she should end the game after the first specific game state ends, and if the suggestion notification indicates a high setting, the player can decide that he or she should continue playing even after the first specific game state ends. For players who want to increase their gaming media and not decrease their gaming media, such suggestion notifications of setting values can be said to be beneficial.

Feature GA12. The gaming machine described in Feature GA11, characterized in that the probability of the specific condition being fulfilled is the same regardless of the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, the probability of the increase process is the same regardless of the set value. In other words, when the upper limit number or upper limit increase number has been reached, the specific condition that triggers the increase process occurs with the same probability regardless of the set value, and when it occurs, a suggestive notification of the set value is made. In this way, the element of luck can be made to play a strong role in the suggestive notification of the set value. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as, for example, the higher the setting, the more likely it is that a suggestive notification of the set value will occur, so that with a low setting, a suggestive notification will not actually occur.

Moreover, since the probability of the specific condition occurring is the same regardless of the set value as described above, the possibility that the first specific game state will reach the upper limit number of times or the upper limit increase number will also be the same regardless of the set value. In other words, the probability of a specific situation occurring in which a suggestive notification of the set value can be made will also be the same regardless of the set value, making it possible to further increase the independence of the setting value with regard to the occurrence rate of a suggestive notification of the set value.

Feature GA13. The specific condition when the increase process is performed may be satisfied based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a predetermined special result;
The probability of the specific condition being established when the increase process is performed varies depending on the type of the special result,
A gaming machine described in any one of features GA1 to GA12, characterized in that the higher the type of special result that increases the probability of the specific condition being fulfilled when the increase process is performed, the higher the probability of the specific condition being fulfilled when the specific event occurs.

According to the above configuration, the probability of a special result resulting in an increase process and the probability of a special result resulting in a specific event are linked. In this way, it is easy to understand that a specific event occurs in place of the increase process being performed based on the special result. Therefore, for example, in a specific situation, when a special result is won that results in an increase process with a high probability, it is possible to increase the anticipation of the specific event occurring in advance, and by preparing the player mentally, it is possible to increase the attention to the specific event.

Feature GA14. As the second specific game state, a plurality of types of predetermined states including a first predetermined state (attack mode) and a second predetermined state (specialized zone) different from the first predetermined state are set;
the specific condition when the increase process is performed is such that even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the same type of special result, the probability of the first predetermined state being realized is different from the probability of the second predetermined state being realized,
A gaming machine as described in feature GA13, characterized in that in the second specific gaming state, the higher the probability of the specific condition being fulfilled when the increase processing is performed, the higher the probability of the specific condition being fulfilled when the specific event occurs.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the probability of an increase process being performed changes depending on the type of second specific game state (predetermined state) even for the same type of special result, the probability of a specific event occurring also changes depending on the type of second specific game state (predetermined state) and is linked to the case of an increase process. In this way, it is possible to further enhance the effect of making it easier for players to understand that a specific event occurs instead of an increase process being performed based on a special result.

Feature GA15. As the second specific gaming state, a special state (VB mode, specialized zone) in which a minimum number of continuous games is set is set,
A special transition means (for example, a function of executing a process of setting a VB notification flag by the main control device 101) for transitioning the second specific game state to the special state based on the establishment of a predetermined special condition during the second specific game state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features GA1 to GA14, characterized in that the specific event execution means is capable of causing the specific event when the special condition is met in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by transitioning to the special state based on the fulfillment of the special condition.

When a transition to a special state occurs during the second specific game state, that special state continues for the minimum number of continuous games, and therefore the transition to the special state can be considered equivalent to the processing of increasing the minimum number of continuous games in terms of the number of games in the second specific game state. As such, a transition to a special state in a specific situation, or a specific situation resulting from a transition to a special state, may be meaningless to the player. Therefore, in the above configuration, by treating such special states as the subject of specific events, it is possible to avoid making the player feel that they are meaningless.

Feature GA16. The specific condition when the increase process is performed may be satisfied based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a predetermined special result;
The specific condition when the increase process is performed is configured such that even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the same type of special result, the special state has a higher probability of being established than other states in the second specific game state,
The probability of the specific condition being established when the specific event occurs is also higher in the special state than in other states in the second specific game state.
The gaming machine described in feature GA15, wherein the specific event execution means causes the specific event when the special condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by a transition to the special state based on the satisfaction of the special condition, allows a transition to the special state based on the satisfaction of the special condition.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a transition to a special state makes it easier for an increase process to be performed, when transitioning to a special state in a specific situation, or when a specific event occurs when a transition to a special state results in a specific situation, transitioning to a special state itself is permitted. Therefore, a specific event occurs when transitioning to the special state, and further, a specific event is permitted to occur even during the special state. In this way, by making the special state a state in which an increase process is easier to perform and a specific event is easier to occur, it is possible to make transitioning to the special state during the second specific game state something to look forward to, even in a specific situation or when that specific situation is approaching.

Feature GA17. When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by the increase process being performed based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, the device is provided with a storage means (a function of executing a process of adding an additional game number to the total number of games eliminated TEG by the main control device 101) for storing increase information corresponding to the remaining number that is increased when the increase process is performed based on the satisfaction of the specific condition in an increase information storage means (total number of games eliminated TEG);
A gaming machine described in any one of features GA1 to GA16, characterized in that the specific event execution means is capable of causing the specific event based on the increase information stored in the increase information storage means.

According to the above configuration, when a specific condition is met in a specific situation, a specific event may occur based on the increased information when the increase process is performed. In this way, it is possible to cause a specific event to occur as compensation for the benefit that would have been obtained by the increase process, for example, by making it more likely that the specific event will occur as the amount of increased information increases.

Feature GA18. The increase information stored in the increase information storage means is stored at least until the first specific game state in which the specific condition is established transitions to the normal game state, and when the specific condition is newly established in the specific state in the state in which the increase information is stored, or when the specific state is entered by the increase process being performed based on the establishment of the specific condition, the increase information corresponding to the remaining number that is increased when the increase process is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition can be added to the stored increase information to update it;
The gaming machine described in feature GA17 is characterized in that, when transitioning from the first specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, the specific event execution means is capable of causing the specific event based on the increase information stored in the increase information storage means.

According to the above configuration, when a specific condition is met multiple times in a specific situation, the increase information when the increase process is performed is accumulated, and a specific event occurs at the end of the first specific game state based on the total increase information. In this way, even if the increase information based on the satisfaction of each specific condition is small in the configuration of feature GA17, it is possible to cause a specific event by satisfying the specific condition multiple times, and the anticipation for the specific event can be sustained.

In particular, if a specific situation occurs relatively soon after entering the first specific game state (second specific game state), a game that could become a so-called "dead end game" will be played over a long period of time, where the number of times the first specific game state is executed reaches the upper limit or the increase/decrease number reaches the upper limit increase number. In this regard, by configuring in such a way that a specific event can occur by accumulating multiple increase processes, as in the above configuration, the more games that could become the dead end game, the more likely the specific event will occur, and it is possible to suppress the feeling that the game is a dead end game.

Feature GA19. The gaming machine described in Feature GA18, characterized in that the specific event execution means is capable of causing the specific event each time the specific condition is satisfied, and is capable of causing the specific event based on the increase information stored in the increase information storage means, based on the second ending means transitioning the first specific gaming state to the normal gaming state.

According to the above configuration, a specific event occurs each time a specific condition is met, and at the end of the first specific game state, a specific event can occur according to the accumulated value when the increase process is performed. In this way, it is possible to enjoy both the effect of preventing the first specific game state from becoming boring by having a specific event occur each time, and the effect of making the first specific game state enjoyable for a long period of time by having the specific condition be met multiple times.

Feature GA20. A gaming machine according to any one of Features GA1 to GA19, characterized in that the specific event execution means is capable of causing the specific event based on the specific condition being satisfied during the normal gaming state following the end of the first specific gaming state in which the specific condition is satisfied.

According to the above configuration, it is also possible to carry over as a specific event the establishment of a specific condition during the second specific game state (first specific game state) to the normal game state after the end of the first specific game state. And since the specific event is an event different from the increase process, the configuration is such that the event during the second specific game state (first specific game state) is carried over to the normal game state to the extent that it does not contradict the significance of forcibly terminating the first specific game state by setting the upper limit number of plays or the upper limit increase number. In this way, the link between the second specific game state (first specific game state) and the normal game state is improved, and the interest of the game is increased.

Feature GA21. When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is caused by the increase process being performed based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, a means for storing the increase information when the increase process is performed based on the satisfaction of the specific condition in a predetermined increase information storage means (total number of games eliminated TEG) (a function for executing a process of adding the number of added games to the total number of games eliminated TEG by the main control device 101);
An initialization means (a function of executing an initialization process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an initialization process for initializing various information used during the first specific game state when the first specific game state is transitioned to the normal game state by the second ending means;
When the initialization process is performed by the initialization means, a means for restricting the initialization of the information stored in the increase information storage means (a function for executing a process for storing the total number of games lost TEG in an area provided in the normal section area in the main control device 101);
The gaming machine described in feature GA20 is characterized by having:

According to the above configuration, when the number of executions during the first specific game state reaches the upper limit number or the increase/decrease number reaches the upper limit increase number and the first specific game state is terminated, various information used during the first specific game state is initialized. Therefore, even though the first specific game state was forcibly terminated, it is possible to expect the effect of feature GA20 while preventing the occurrence of a so-called consecutive win in which the first specific game state is transitioned to again based on the information during the forcibly terminated first specific game state.

Feature GA22. When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by the increase process being performed based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, a means for storing the increase information when the increase process is performed based on the satisfaction of the specific condition in a separate information storage means (the number of games to be prepared for elimination EJG) different from the predetermined increase information storage means (a function for executing a process of adding the number of added games to the number of games to be prepared for elimination EJG by the main control device 101);
A means for storing the increase information stored in the other information storage means in the increase information storage means at least before the initialization process is performed by the initialization means (a function for executing the disappearance game number transfer process by the main control device 101);
Equipped with
A gaming machine as described in feature GA21, characterized in that the information stored in the other information storage means is subject to initialization processing by the initialization means, while the information stored in the increased information storage means is not subject to initialization processing by the initialization means.

According to the above configuration, by moving information to an increased information storage means that is not subject to the initialization process before the initialization process, the convenience or accuracy of using the increased information to cause a specific event is improved. More specifically, for example, by setting access restrictions between areas to be initialized and areas that are not, it may be possible to avoid an event in which information that is not subject to the initialization process is initialized. In such a case, the area to be initialized may be more easily accessible than the area that is not subject to the initialization process. In this way, by temporarily storing the increased information in another information storage means that is subject to initialization, the convenience of the increased information is improved, and by moving the increased information to the increased information storage means during the initialization process, it is possible to avoid an event in which the increased information is initialized.

Feature GA23. A special event may occur in which the increase/decrease number grasped by the second grasping means does not reach the upper limit increase number after the specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation in which the sum of the increase/decrease number grasped by the second grasping means and the planned increase/decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means reaches the upper limit increase number, or after the specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on the satisfaction of the specific condition,
The gaming machine described in feature GA22 is characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing a reallocation process by the main control unit 101) for storing the increased information stored in the separate information storage means in a storage means that stores information corresponding to the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means based on the occurrence of the special event.

According to the above configuration, if the specific situation can be resolved later, if the increased information is not treated as the remaining number, a great disadvantage will occur to the player. Therefore, if the increased information is temporarily stored in another information storage means, and the temporarily stored information is returned when the specific situation is resolved, the player will not be disadvantaged. Furthermore, by temporarily storing the increased information in another information storage means different from the increased information storage means, as in the above feature GA22, the convenience and accuracy of causing a specific event using the increased information can be further improved. In other words, if the increased information is stored as it is in the increased information storage means, assuming that an access restriction is set as described above, when the specific situation is resolved, it is necessary to release the access restriction and move the increased information in the increased information storage means as the remaining number. In contrast, by temporarily storing the increased information in another information storage means that does not have an access restriction (is subject to initialization) as described above, such a process of releasing the access restriction is unnecessary, and convenience is improved.

Feature GA24. A gaming machine according to any one of features GA1 to GA23, characterized in that the increase process can be executed when the specific condition is met in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on the satisfaction of the specific condition.

In the above configuration, even if a specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation, or a specific situation is created by an increase process based on the satisfaction of a specific condition, it is made clear that the increase process itself is not limited. However, as mentioned above, even if an increase process is performed in the above situation, it may become meaningless due to the upper limit number of times or the upper limit increase number, and by causing a specific event in such a situation, the excellent effect of feature GA1 can be expected.

Feature GA25. A specific game state notification means (a function of executing the first section display process to the fourth section display process by the main control device 101) is provided, which starts notification by turning on a specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) based on the game state transitioning from the normal game state to the first specific game state, or based on the game state transitioning from the normal game state to the first specific game state and the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and ends notification by turning off the specific notification means based on the transition of the first specific game state to the normal game state;
A gaming machine described in any one of features GA1 to GA24, characterized in that the specific game state notification means ends the notification by turning the specific notification means off even when the first specific game state is transitioned to the normal game state by the second termination means.

According to the above configuration, when the normal game state transitions to the first specific game state, or when a predetermined start condition is subsequently met, the specific notification means starts to notify, and when the first specific game state ends and transitions to the normal game state, the notification also ends. In other words, by checking whether or not there is a notification from the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game is in the first specific game state, and this can eliminate a sense of inequality between, for example, a player who ends play without realizing that the first specific game state is still ongoing, and a player who sits down at the same gaming machine after the player who ended play. This makes it possible for all players to enjoy playing with special notifications equally to their heart's content.

In particular, even when the first specific game state reaches the upper limit number of times or the upper limit increase number and transitions to the normal game state, the notification by the specific notification means ends, so the player can clearly understand that the first specific game state has ended, that is, that the increase process was not performed even if the specific condition was met in the specific situation. In that case, with a configuration in which the notification by the specific notification means strictly ends, it is difficult to enjoy the afterglow of the first specific game state having ended, even if the specific condition is met in the specific situation. In that regard, if a configuration is used in which a specific event can be generated, as in feature GA1, it is possible to enjoy the afterglow based on the fulfillment of the specific condition through the specific event, even in a configuration in which it is clearly understood that the first specific game state has been forcibly ended by the specific notification means.

Feature GA26. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a payout of a number of game media corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As game states, a normal game state and a first specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode or the like) which is more likely to be advantageous to a player than the normal game state are provided,
a second specific game state (e.g., an attack mode) that is more advantageous to a player than other states (e.g., a challenge mode) in the first specific game state is set as a state included in the first specific game state;
A first transition lottery means for executing a first transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the first specific game state in a normal game state (a function for executing a transition lottery to a challenge mode in a first specific role process by the main control device 101);
A first specific transition means for transitioning to the first specific game state based on the result of the lottery by the first transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the first specific game state (a function for executing a process for transitioning to a challenge mode in a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101);
A second transition lottery means for executing a second transition lottery as to whether or not to transition to the second specific game state (a function for executing a transition lottery to the attack mode in the first specific role processing by the main control device 101);
A second specific transition means for transitioning to the second specific game state based on the result of the lottery by the second transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the second specific game state (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the attack mode in the winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101);
a first grasping means (number of games remaining in advantageous zone ZG) for grasping the number of remaining games until a predetermined end condition of the second specific game state is met (for example, the number of remaining games in attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in attack mode reaches a set number of games, or in the case of a number management configuration, the remaining number of payouts or the increased number of payouts becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the increased number of payouts reaches a set number) in the second specific game state;
A second grasping means (a number of games in an advantageous zone AG, a number of coins in an advantageous zone ZM) for grasping at least one of the number of times the first specific game state is executed and the number of coins in an advantageous zone that is increased or decreased in the first specific game state;
A first termination means for transitioning the first specific game state to the normal game state based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means (a function for executing a termination process of the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a normal termination condition in the second process of zone display by the main control device 101);
a second termination means (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous zone in a second process of zone display by the main control device 101) for transitioning the first specific game state including the second specific game state to the normal game state, regardless of the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means, based on at least one of the fact that the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number and the increase/decrease number has reached an upper limit increase number;
An increase means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process of the second specific game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
a specific event executing means (a function of executing each process for special notification in a situation where the sum of the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit number, or the sum of the increase/decrease number grasped by the second grasping means and a planned increase/decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit increase number) capable of generating a specific event different from the event based on the increase process based on the specific condition being satisfied in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit increase number, or based on the specific situation being achieved by performing the increase process based on the satisfaction of the specific condition;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is drawn by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, the payout means can pay out gaming media. In this so-called slot machine, a first specific game state is provided that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a second specific game state that is even more advantageous is provided as a state included in the first specific game state. Therefore, gameplay is realized that is premised on a transition from the normal game state to the first specific game state and then to the second specific game state, which can be very useful in increasing interest.

The first and second specific game states are set up so that the first specific game state will end based on the number of remaining games until the end condition of the second specific game state is met, and also so that the first specific game state will end regardless of the number of remaining games in the second specific game state if the number of times the first specific game state has been executed reaches the upper limit, or if the increase or decrease in the number of game media reaches the upper limit of increase. This avoids inconveniences such as an increase in game media that exceeds the designer's expectations due to the first or second specific game state continuing indefinitely, or a player being unable to end the game.

However, if the upper limit number of times or the upper limit increase number of the first specific game state is specified as described above, when a so-called top-up occurs, such as an increase process for the second specific game state, if the sum of the current number of times it is executed and the remaining number exceeds the upper limit number, or if the sum of the current increase/decrease number and the planned increase/decrease number based on the remaining number exceeds the upper limit increase number, no further increase can be expected. This will drastically reduce expectations for the occurrence of the increase process, and the increase process may be perceived as a loss, which could result in a significant decrease in interest in the game.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when a specific situation occurs in which the above-mentioned upper limit number or upper limit increase number is exceeded, or when a specific situation occurs as a result of performing an increase process, a specific event other than the increase process (addition) occurs. In this way, the specific event can be used as a substitute for no addition or for an addition being meaningless, making it possible to increase the fun of each game even in the above-mentioned specific situation. This makes it possible to ideally increase interest.

More specifically, the "increase or decrease in the number of gaming media in the specific gaming state" refers to the "increase or decrease that is the difference between the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means in the specific gaming state and the number of gaming media used in the specific gaming state."

Feature GA27. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a payout of a number of game media corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As game states, a normal game state (normal zone) and a specific game state (such as an attack mode in a favorable zone) that is more likely to be advantageous to a player than the normal game state are provided,
A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery as to whether or not to transition to the specific game state in the normal game state (a function for executing a transition lottery to the attack mode in the first specific role processing by the main control device 101);
A specific transition means for transitioning to the specific game state based on the result of the lottery by the transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the specific game state (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the attack mode in the winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101);
a first grasping means (number of games remaining in advantageous zone ZG) for grasping the number of remaining games until a predetermined end condition of the specific game state is met (for example, the number of remaining games in attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in attack mode reaches a set number of games, or in the case of a number management configuration, the remaining number of payouts or the increased number of payouts becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the increased number of payouts reaches a set number),
A second grasping means (number of games in the advantageous zone AG, number of coins in the advantageous zone ZM) for grasping at least one of the number of times a predetermined game state (advantageous zone) including the specific game state is executed and the number of coins in the predetermined game state;
A first termination means for transitioning the specific game state to the normal game state based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means (a function for executing a termination process of the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a normal termination condition in the second process of zone display by the main control device 101);
a second termination means (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous zone in a zone display second process by the main control device 101) for transitioning the specific game state to the normal game state regardless of the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means based on at least one of the fact that the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number of times and the increase/decrease number has reached an upper limit increase number;
An increase means (a function of executing a game number increase process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process of the specific game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
a specific event executing means (a function of executing each process for special notification in a situation where the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set by the main control device 101) is capable of generating a specific event that can be beneficial to a player, which is an event different from an event based on the increase process, based on the specific condition being established in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions recognized by the second recognition means and the remaining number recognized by the first recognition means has reached the upper limit number, or the sum of the increase/decrease number recognized by the second recognition means and a planned increase/decrease number based on the remaining number recognized by the first recognition means has reached the upper limit increase number, or based on the specific situation being established by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stopped number corresponds to the lottery result, the payout means can pay out game media. In this so-called slot machine, a specific game state is provided that is more likely to be advantageous for the player than the normal game state, and the specific game state is set to end based on the number of remaining numbers until the end condition of the specific game state is met, as well as when the number of times a predetermined state including the specific game state is executed reaches the upper limit number or when the increase or decrease in the number of game media reaches the upper limit increase number, regardless of the number of remaining numbers of the specific game state. This avoids inconveniences such as an increase in game media exceeding the designer's expectations due to the specific game state continuing endlessly, or a player being unable to finish the game.

However, if the upper limit number of times or the upper limit number of increases is specified as above, when a so-called top-up occurs, such as an increase process for a specific game state, if the sum of the current number of times it is executed and the remaining number exceeds the upper limit number of times, or if the sum of the current increase/decrease number and the planned increase/decrease number based on the remaining number exceeds the upper limit number of increases, no further increase can be expected. This will drastically reduce expectations for the occurrence of the increase process, and the increase process may be perceived as a loss, which could result in a significant decrease in interest in the game.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when a specific situation occurs in which the above-mentioned upper limit number or upper limit increase number is exceeded, or when a specific situation occurs as a result of performing an increase process, a specific event other than the increase process (addition) occurs. In this way, the specific event can be used as a substitute for no addition or for an addition being meaningless, making it possible to increase the fun of each game even in the above-mentioned specific situation. This makes it possible to ideally increase interest.

More specifically, the "increase or decrease in the number of gaming media in the specific gaming state" refers to the "increase or decrease that is the difference between the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means in the specific gaming state and the number of gaming media used in the specific gaming state."

Feature GA28. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a payout of a number of game media corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As game states, a normal game state (normal zone) and a specific game state (such as an attack mode in a favorable zone) that is more likely to be advantageous to a player than the normal game state are provided,
A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery as to whether or not to transition to the specific game state in the normal game state (a function for executing a transition lottery to the attack mode in the first specific role processing by the main control device 101);
A specific transition means for transitioning to the specific game state based on the result of the lottery by the transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the specific game state (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the attack mode in the winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101);
a first grasping means (number of games remaining in advantageous zone ZG) for grasping the number of remaining games until a predetermined end condition of the specific game state is met (for example, the number of remaining games in attack mode becomes 0, the number of executed games in attack mode reaches a set number of games, or in the case of a number management configuration, the remaining number of payouts or the increased number of payouts becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the increased number of payouts reaches a set number),
A second grasping means (number of games in the advantageous zone AG, number of coins in the advantageous zone ZM) for grasping at least one of the number of times a predetermined game state (advantageous zone) including the specific game state is executed and the number of coins in the predetermined game state;
A first termination means for transitioning the specific game state to the normal game state based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means (a function for executing a termination process of the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a normal termination condition in the second process of zone display by the main control device 101);
a second termination means (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous zone in a zone display second process by the main control device 101) for transitioning the specific game state to the normal game state regardless of the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means based on at least one of the fact that the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number of times and the increase/decrease number has reached an upper limit increase number;
An increase means (a function of executing a game number increase process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process of the specific game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
a specific event executing means (a function of executing each process for special notification in a situation where the sum of the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit number, or the sum of the increase/decrease number grasped by the second grasping means and a planned increase/decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit increase number) capable of generating a specific event different from the event based on the increase process based on the specific condition being satisfied in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit increase number, or based on the specific situation being achieved by performing the increase process based on the satisfaction of the specific condition;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stopped number corresponds to the lottery result, the payout means can pay out game media. In this so-called slot machine, a specific game state is provided that is more likely to be advantageous for the player than the normal game state, and the specific game state is set to end based on the number of remaining numbers until the end condition of the specific game state is met, as well as when the number of times a predetermined state including the specific game state is executed reaches the upper limit number or when the increase or decrease in the number of game media reaches the upper limit increase number, regardless of the number of remaining numbers of the specific game state. This avoids inconveniences such as an increase in game media exceeding the designer's expectations due to the specific game state continuing endlessly, or a player being unable to finish the game.

However, if the upper limit number of times or the upper limit number of increases is specified as above, when a so-called top-up occurs, such as an increase process for a specific game state, if the sum of the current number of times it is executed and the remaining number exceeds the upper limit number of times, or if the sum of the current increase/decrease number and the planned increase/decrease number based on the remaining number exceeds the upper limit number of increases, no further increase can be expected. This will drastically reduce expectations for the occurrence of the increase process, and the increase process may be perceived as a loss, which could result in a significant decrease in interest in the game.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when a specific situation occurs in which the above-mentioned upper limit number or upper limit increase number is exceeded, or when a specific situation occurs as a result of performing an increase process, a specific event other than the increase process (addition) occurs. In this way, the specific event can be used as a substitute for no addition or for an addition being meaningless, making it possible to increase the fun of each game even in the above-mentioned specific situation. This makes it possible to ideally increase interest.

More specifically, the "increase or decrease in the number of gaming media in the specific gaming state" refers to the "increase or decrease that is the difference between the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means in the specific gaming state and the number of gaming media used in the specific gaming state."

Furthermore, the configurations shown in features GA1 to GA25 may be applied individually or in combination to features GA26 to GA28.

<Feature GB group>
Feature GB1. As a gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal zone) and a high advantageous state (advantageous zone) are set in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low,
A specific highly advantageous state (e.g., an attack mode) that is more advantageous to the player than other states (e.g., a challenge mode) in the highly advantageous state is set as a state included in the highly advantageous state,
a remaining number grasping means (number of games remaining in advantageous zone ZG) for grasping the remaining number until a predetermined end condition of the specific highly advantageous state is met (for example, the number of remaining games in attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in attack mode reaches a set number of games, or in the case of a number management configuration, the remaining number of payouts or the increased number of payouts becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the increased number of payouts reaches a set number);
A normal termination means for terminating the specific highly advantageous state and transitioning to the low advantageous state based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing a process for terminating the advantageous zone without the forced termination condition being satisfied in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
a first specific termination means for terminating the highly advantageous state including the specific highly advantageous state and transitioning to the low advantageous state based on the establishment of a first specific condition regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing a process for forcibly terminating the advantageous zone based on the advantageous zone game number AG reaching the upper limit game number in the second zone display process by the main control unit 101);
a second specific termination means for terminating the highly advantageous state including the specific highly advantageous state and transitioning to the low advantageous state based on the establishment of a second specific condition, which is a predetermined condition different from the first specific condition, regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing a process for forcibly terminating the advantageous zone based on the advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM reaching the upper limit increase number in the second zone display process by the main control unit 101);
A first determination means (a function of executing a remaining game management process by the main control device 101) capable of determining in advance that the first specific condition will be established based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means in the specific highly advantageous state;
A second determination means (a function of executing a remaining number management process by the main control device 101) capable of determining in advance that the second specific condition will be established based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means in the specific highly advantageous state;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are high and low advantageous states in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and in a configuration in which the high advantageous state includes a specific high advantageous state in which the degree of advantage for the player is even higher, the specific high advantageous state may end based on the remaining number of the specific high advantageous state, or may end together with the high advantageous state based on the establishment of the first specific condition or the second specific condition in the high advantageous state, so that the degree of advantage of the high advantageous state, including the specific high advantageous state, is prevented from being extremely increased. For players who want the high advantageous state, especially the specific high advantageous state, to continue for a long time, it is considered that they want to know how long it will take for the first specific condition or the second specific condition in the high advantageous state including the specific high advantageous state to be established, as well as the remaining number of the specific high advantageous state. Therefore, in the above configuration, by configuring the first specific condition and the second specific condition to be able to be specified before the conditions are established, it is also possible to utilize the content that the player wants to know for gameplay, for example, by notifying the result of the specification in accordance with the progress of the game. In particular, by making it possible to end a highly advantageous state by different conditions, such as a first specific condition and a second specific condition, and by making it possible to specify each of these separately, the manner in which the highly advantageous state ends is diversified, the thrill of the highly advantageous state is heightened, and it is possible to realize gameplay that utilizes the thrill and the relationship between the two specific conditions in an optimal manner. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that "it is possible to determine in advance that the first specific condition will be met" and "it is possible to determine in advance that the second specific condition will be met" can also be expressed as, for example, "it is possible to determine in advance that the first specific condition will be met in a game before the first specific condition is met" and "it is possible to determine in advance that the second specific condition will be met in a game before the second specific condition is met."

The "first specific termination means" and "second specific termination means" may be expressed as, for example, "a first specific termination means which terminates the specific highly advantageous state and transitions to the low advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined first specific condition, regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means" or "a second specific termination means which terminates the specific highly advantageous state and transitions to the low advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined second specific condition different from the first specific condition, regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means."

Furthermore, the "first specific condition" and the "second specific condition" may be expressed as "a first specific condition set as an end condition of the highly advantageous state including the specific highly advantageous state" and "a second specific condition that is set as an end condition of the highly advantageous state including the specific highly advantageous state and is different from the first specific condition."

Feature GB2. A first specific event execution means (a function for executing a process for performing various special notifications by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81 when the first excess flag is set) capable of causing a first specific event that may be beneficial to a player before the first specific condition is satisfied when the first specific condition is satisfied by the first specifying means;
a second specific event execution means (a function of executing a process for performing various special notifications by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81 in a situation where the second excess flag is set) capable of causing a second specific event that may be beneficial to a player to occur before the second specific condition is satisfied when the second specification means specifies that the second specific condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine as described in feature GB1, characterized in that it is equipped with:

With the above configuration, not only is it possible to determine in advance that the first or second specific condition will be met, but based on the results of this determination, a first or second specific event that may be beneficial to the player may occur before the first or second specific condition is met. This increases the significance of determining that the first or second specific condition will be met before it is met, and adds gameplay such as determining (determining) in advance that the first or second specific condition will be met in a highly advantageous state (particularly a specific highly advantageous state) to cause the first or second specific event, making the game more interesting.

Note that the "first specific event execution means capable of causing a first specific event that may be beneficial to the player before the first specific condition is met" and the "second specific event execution means capable of causing a second specific event that may be beneficial to the player before the second specific condition is met" may also be expressed as "first bonus granting means capable of granting a first bonus to the player before the first specific condition is met" and "second bonus granting means capable of granting a second bonus to the player before the second specific condition is met". This also applies to "specific event execution means" defined by other features or other groups of features, and conversely, "bonus granting means" defined by other features or other groups of features may also be expressed as "specific event execution means".

Feature GB3. The first specific event by the first specific event execution means is more beneficial to the player the sooner the first specific condition is established in the specific highly advantageous state (the sooner the first excess flag is set, for example, the more times the setting value suggestion is made as the fifth special notification, and the easier it is to narrow down the setting value).
The gaming machine described in feature GB2 is characterized in that the second specific event by the second specific event executing means is more beneficial to the player the sooner the second specific condition is identified as being established in the specific highly advantageous state (the sooner the first exceedance flag is set, for example, the more times setting value suggestions will be made as the fifth special notification, and the easier it will be to narrow down the setting value).

The above configuration adds further excitement to the gameplay in which the first and second specific conditions are confirmed (specified) to be met in a specific highly advantageous state, causing the first and second specific events to occur before the highly advantageous state (specific highly advantageous state) ends, by confirming that the first and second specific conditions are met as soon as possible, creating new gameplay that utilizes the end conditions of the highly advantageous state.

Feature GB4. The first determination means is capable of determining in advance that the first determination condition is not satisfied based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features GB1 to GB3, characterized in that the second determination means is capable of determining in advance that the second determination condition will not be met based on the remaining number determined by the remaining number determination means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to specify in advance that the first specific condition or the second specific condition will not be met depending on the current remaining number, and assuming that such a situation exists, by making it possible to specify separately that the first specific condition or the second specific condition will be met, as in feature GB1 above, it becomes possible to specify situations such as, for example, that the first specific condition is met but the second specific condition is not met, or that the second specific condition is met but the first specific condition is not met. This further enhances the significance of setting multiple specific conditions, and makes it possible to be very useful for processing and presentation when the success or failure of each specific condition is specified in advance.

Feature GB5. A third specific event execution means (a function of executing a process for performing various special notifications by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81 in a situation where the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set) capable of generating a third specific event that may be beneficial to a player based on the first specification means specifying that the first specific condition is established and the second specification means specifying that the second specific condition is established,
A gaming machine described in any one of features GB1 to GB4, characterized in that the degree of advantage or potential benefit of the third specific event by the third specific event execution means differs between a case where the first specific condition is determined to be met by the first determination means and then the second specific condition is determined to be met by the second determination means, and a case where the second specific condition is determined to be met by the second determination means and then the first specific condition is determined to be met by the first determination means (difference in the type of fifth special notification due to differences between the first advance flag and the second advance flag).

According to the above configuration, the degree of advantage or the extent to which the third specific event that occurs differs depending on whether the first specific condition is identified by the first identification means as being met or the second specific condition is identified by the second identification means as being met. In this way, it is possible to incorporate gameplay into the game, such as deciding which of the first and second specific conditions to identify in advance as multiple forced termination conditions, thereby making the game more interesting.

Feature GB6. The remaining number grasping means grasps the remaining number of games as the remaining number of the specific highly advantageous state,
the first specific termination means, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, determines that the first specific condition is satisfied when the number of executed games in the highly advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games, and terminates the highly advantageous state and transitions to the low advantageous state;
The second specific termination means of the gaming machine described in any one of features GB1 to GB5 is characterized in that, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, when the increase/decrease, which is the difference between the number of gaming media paid out according to the playing results of each game in the highly advantageous state and the number of gaming media used in each game, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number, it terminates the highly advantageous state and transitions to the low advantageous state, assuming that the second specific condition is met.

According to the above configuration, when comparing the number of executions of the same highly advantageous state between a case where the upper limit game count is reached first and the upper limit increase number is reached later, and a case where the upper limit increase number is reached first and the upper limit game count is reached later, it is expected that the former will have a smaller increase or decrease compared to the number of executions. In this way, when the upper limit game count and the upper limit increase number are set as the forced termination conditions, which of these is determined first can be information that strongly reflects the game situation up to that point. Therefore, for example, as with feature GB5 above, by varying the degree of advantage of the third specific event depending on whether these are determined first, it is possible to generate a third specific event that is in line with the game situation up to that point.

Feature GB7. A gaming machine according to any one of features GB1 to GB6, characterized in that it is equipped with a determination grasping means (a function of executing a process by the main control device 101 to grasp the difference between the upper limit game number and the number of games that will exceed the upper limit increase number) capable of grasping whether the first specific condition or the second specific condition will be fulfilled first when the second specific condition is determined by the second specific means to be fulfilled in a situation where the first specific condition is determined to be fulfilled by the first specific means, or when the first specific condition is determined to be fulfilled by the first specific means to be fulfilled in a situation where the second specific condition is determined to be fulfilled by the second specific means to be fulfilled.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the fulfillment of the first specific condition and the fulfillment of the second specific condition can be specified in advance, when it is specified that both specific conditions will be fulfilled, the determination determination means determines which specific condition will be fulfilled first. Since both specific conditions end a highly advantageous state, unless both specific conditions are fulfilled in the same game, if one specific condition is fulfilled, the other specific condition will not be fulfilled. Therefore, by determining which specific condition will be fulfilled first, as in the above configuration, it becomes possible to determine which specific condition is most likely not to be fulfilled, and it becomes possible to perform processing that matches the specific condition that will not be fulfilled (such as following up on it).

Feature GB8. The gaming machine described in Feature GB7, characterized in that the identification means is capable of identifying the difference between a game identified when the first specific condition is met and a game identified when the second specific condition is met.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the establishment of the first specific condition and the establishment of the second specific condition can be specified in advance, when it is specified that both specific conditions are established, it is possible to grasp the difference between the games in which the specific conditions are established. As a result, for example, when there is a difference between the games in which the first specific condition is established, such as when the first specific condition is established relatively early but the second specific condition is not established for a long time, or vice versa, the highly advantageous state ends without being able to fully obtain the benefit of the highly advantageous state defined by the specific condition that is not established, and when the game in which the first specific condition is established and the game in which the second specific condition is established are almost the same game, the highly advantageous state ends after the benefit of the highly advantageous state defined by both specific conditions is fully obtained. In this way, it is possible to predict the benefit (profit) that can be received by the end of the highly advantageous state and perform processing according to the prediction.

In a configuration in which "the first specific condition is established based on the number of games executed in a highly advantageous state reaching a predetermined upper limit," the "game identified as the first specific condition being established" is "the game in which the number of games executed in a highly advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit."

Feature GB9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features GB1 to GB8, characterized in that even if the second specification means specifies in advance that the second specific condition will be met, the second specific condition may not be met and the highly advantageous state may end depending on the subsequent game situation.

According to the above configuration, even if it is determined that the second specific condition is established, that is, that the highly advantageous state will end in the future by the second specific end means, depending on the subsequent game situation, for example, the highly advantageous state may end without the second specific condition being established together with the end of the specific highly advantageous state. Therefore, if the establishment of the second specific condition is desirable for the player, it is not desirable for the player that the second specific condition is not established due to the subsequent game situation, and conversely, if the establishment of the second specific condition is not desirable for the player, it is desirable for the player that the second specific condition is not established due to the subsequent game situation. In other words, by leaving room for the result specified by the second specifying means to change depending on the subsequent game situation, it is possible to create playability that utilizes the result specified by the second specifying means, while suitably suppressing a decrease in the level of attention to the game thereafter.

Feature GB10. The gaming machine described in Feature GB9 is characterized by having a third specific event execution means (a function of executing processing in the main control device 101 or the display control device 81 to perform various special notifications based on reallocation processing) that generates a third specific event that may be beneficial to the player when the second specific condition is determined in advance to be met by the second identification means and the highly advantageous state ends without the second specific condition being met due to the subsequent game situation.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the fulfillment of the second specific condition is favorable to the player, if the highly advantageous state ends without the second specific condition being fulfilled due to the subsequent game situation, a third specific event that may be beneficial to the player occurs. In this way, it is possible for the third specific event to follow up on the sense of loss felt by the player who was hoping that the second specific condition would be fulfilled.

Feature GB11. The device includes a specific notification means (a function for executing a process for making a special notification by the main control device 101 that the second excess flag has been set) capable of executing a specific notification including the fact that the second specific condition is established in advance by the second identification means in a specific situation,
The gaming machine described in feature GB10 is characterized in that the degree of advantage of the third specific event in the event that the second specific condition is not met and the highly advantageous state ends is set to be more likely to be advantageous for the player when the specific notification is executed in the specific situation than when the specific notification is not executed in the specific situation, depending on the subsequent game situation.

On the premise that the establishment of the second specific condition is a favorable event for the player, when a specific notification is executed that the second specific condition is specified to be established, the player will assume that the second specific condition will be established in the future and will proceed with the game while feeling a sense of superiority, or will make calculations about the profits that will be made from the establishment of the second specific condition, and will enjoy the game to the fullest until the second specific condition is established. On the other hand, even if it is specified that the second specific condition will be established, the player has no way of knowing about it, and will not make such calculations, and even if the second specific condition does not become established, the player's degree of disappointment is considered to be low. The above configuration is intended to eliminate the inconvenience caused by the notification that the second specific condition is established (such as disappointing the player if the second specific condition is not established), and by adjusting the advantageous degree of the third specific event, it is possible to follow up on the above-mentioned inconveniences appropriately even if they occur. Additionally, even if the second specific condition is determined to be met, if that specific notification is not made, it is possible to lower the advantage of the third specific event, and by not setting the advantage for the player too high, it is possible to ensure sound play.

Feature GB12. A second specific event execution means (a function of executing a process for performing various special notifications by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81 based on the setting of the second excess flag) capable of causing a second specific event that may be beneficial to a player to occur before the second specific condition is realized when the second identification means identifies that the second specific condition is realized;
A gaming machine as described in feature GB10 or feature GB11, characterized in that the advantageous degree of the third specific event is set to be more likely to be advantageous to the player when the second specific event is not caused by the second specific event execution means than when the second specific event is caused by the second specific event execution means.

According to the above configuration, if the second specific condition is not met and the highly advantageous state ends, even if the player has raised expectations that the second specific condition will be met before the end of the highly advantageous state, the player will still be considered to have enjoyed that amount of benefit from the second specific event, and the advantage of the third specific event will be reduced. In this way, the player's advantage will not be unfairly increased, and the game can be balanced.

Feature GB13. The remaining number grasping means grasps the remaining number of games as the remaining number of the specific highly advantageous state,
the first specific termination means, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, determines that the first specific condition is satisfied when the number of executed games in the highly advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games, and terminates the highly advantageous state and transitions to the low advantageous state;
The second specific termination means of the gaming machine described in any one of features GB1 to GB12 is characterized in that, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, when the increase/decrease, which is the difference between the number of gaming media paid out according to the playing results of each game in the highly advantageous state and the number of gaming media used in each game, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number, it terminates the highly advantageous state and transitions to the low advantageous state, assuming that the second specific condition is met.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which multiple forced termination conditions are set, namely, a first specific condition that the number of games reaches the upper limit number of games, and a second specific condition that the increase/decrease in the number of gaming media reaches the upper limit increase number, whether or not the upper limit number of games will be reached is specified by the first specific means before the upper limit number of games is reached, and whether or not the increase/decrease in the number of gaming media reaches the upper limit increase number is specified by the second specific means before the upper limit number of games is reached. Since the increase/decrease in the number of gaming media increases/decreases based on the results of each game, basically, the number of games in a highly advantageous state and the increase/decrease are linked, but depending on the results of the game, the relationship between the number of games and the increase/decrease may not be constant. Therefore, by configuring the device to predict the number of games and the increase/decrease separately, it becomes possible to accurately predict that a highly advantageous state will be forced to terminate in the future.

Feature GB14. The gaming machine described in Feature GB13, characterized in that the second identification means includes a first prediction means (a function of executing a prediction process based on the expected increase or decrease KM in the remaining payout management process by the main control device 101) that predicts a first expected increase or decrease that can be expected to be obtained with the remaining number of games based on the remaining number of games grasped by the remaining number grasping means and the average expected increase or decrease per game in the specific highly advantageous state, and is capable of identifying in advance that the second identification condition will be met based on the prediction result of the first prediction means.

According to the above configuration, the number of remaining games and the average expected increase or decrease per game during a specific highly advantageous state (i.e., the average net increase) are used to predict the future increase or decrease, and based on the prediction result, it is determined that the increase or decrease will reach the upper limit increase. In this way, it is possible to predict and determine that the upper limit increase will be reached without using complex calculation processing, simply by storing the above average value in advance.

Feature GB15. The gaming machine according to Feature GB13 or GB14, characterized in that the second identification means includes a second prediction means (a function of executing a prediction process based on the maximum number of coins to be increased or decreased MM in the first adjustment process or the second adjustment process by the main control device 101) for predicting a second expected increase or decrease that can be expected to be obtained with the remaining number of games based on the remaining number of games grasped by the remaining number grasping means and the maximum expected increase or decrease per game in the specific highly advantageous state, and is capable of identifying in advance that the second specific condition will be met based on the prediction result of the second prediction means.

According to the above configuration, the number of remaining games and the maximum expected increase or decrease (i.e., the maximum net increase) per game during a specific highly advantageous state are used to predict the future increase or decrease, and based on the prediction result, it is determined that the increase or decrease will reach the upper limit increase. In this way, it is possible to predict and determine that the upper limit increase will be reached without using complex calculation processing, simply by storing the maximum value in advance.

In particular, this configuration makes it possible to effectively avoid reaching the upper limit of increase numbers unexpectedly. In other words, if the expected increase or decrease number for each game is the maximum value, the increase number will not be greater than that, so there will be no events where the upper limit of increase numbers is reached even though it was predicted that it would not be reached.

Feature GB16. As a game state, a low advantageous state (normal zone) and a high advantageous state (attack mode in an advantageous zone, etc.) are set in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low,
a remaining number grasping means (number of games remaining in advantageous zone ZG) for grasping the remaining number until a predetermined end condition of the highly advantageous state is met (for example, the number of remaining games in attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in attack mode reaches a set number of games, or in the case of a number management configuration, the remaining number of payouts or the increased number of payouts becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the increased number of payouts reaches a set number) in the highly advantageous state;
A normal termination means for terminating the highly advantageous state and transitioning to the less advantageous state based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing a process for terminating the advantageous zone without the forced termination condition being satisfied in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
a first specific termination means for terminating the highly advantageous state and transitioning to the less advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined first specific condition (reaching the upper limit game number of the advantageous zone) regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing a process for forcibly terminating the advantageous zone based on the advantageous zone game number AG reaching the upper limit game number in the second zone display process by the main control unit 101);
a second specific termination means for terminating the highly advantageous state and transitioning to the less advantageous state based on the establishment of a second specific condition (reaching the upper limit of the increase in the advantageous zone) which is a predetermined condition different from the first specific condition, regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing a process for forcibly terminating the advantageous zone based on the advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM reaching the upper limit of the increase in the advantageous zone in the second process for displaying the zone by the main control unit 101);
A first determination means (a function of executing a remaining game management process by the main control device 101) capable of determining in advance that the first determination condition will be established based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means in the highly advantageous state;
A second determination means (a function of executing a remaining number management process by the main control device 101) capable of determining in advance that the second determination condition will be satisfied based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means in the highly advantageous state;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantage state may end based on the remaining number of the high advantage state or based on the first specific condition or the second specific condition being established, so that the advantage of the high advantage state is prevented from being extremely high. A player who wants the high advantage state to continue for a long time would like to know how long it will take for the first specific condition or the second specific condition to be established, as well as the remaining number of the high advantage state. Therefore, in the above configuration, the first specific condition and the second specific condition are each configured to be identifiable before the condition is established, and it is also possible to utilize the content that the player wants to know for gameplay, for example, by notifying the result of the identification as the game progresses. In particular, by making it possible to end a highly advantageous state by different conditions, such as a first specific condition and a second specific condition, and by making it possible to specify each of these separately, the manner in which the highly advantageous state ends is diversified, the thrill of the highly advantageous state is heightened, and it is possible to realize gameplay that utilizes the thrill and the relationship between the two specific conditions in an optimal manner. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that "it is possible to determine in advance that the first specific condition will be met" and "it is possible to determine in advance that the second specific condition will be met" can also be expressed as, for example, "it is possible to determine in advance that the first specific condition will be met in a game before the first specific condition is met" and "it is possible to determine in advance that the second specific condition will be met in a game before the second specific condition is met."

The "first specific condition" and "second specific condition" may also be expressed as "a first specific condition set as an end condition of a predetermined state (advantageous zone) including the highly advantageous state" and "a second specific condition that is set as an end condition of a predetermined state including the highly advantageous state and is different from the first specific condition."

Furthermore, the configurations shown in features GB1 to GB15 may be applied individually or in combination to feature GB16 above.

In this case, for example, in the feature GB6, "the remaining number grasping means grasps the remaining number of games as the remaining number of the highly advantageous state,
the first specific termination means, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, terminates the highly advantageous state and transitions to the low advantageous state when the number of executed games in a predetermined state (advantageous zone) including the highly advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games, as the establishment of the first specific condition;
The second specific termination means, regardless of the remaining number of games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, terminates the highly advantageous state and transitions to the low advantageous state when the increase/decrease, which is the difference between the number of gaming media paid out according to the playing results of each game in a predetermined state (advantageous zone) including the highly advantageous state, and the number of gaming media used in each game, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number, which is the second specific condition being met, and terminates the highly advantageous state and transitions to the low advantageous state. Such modifications are also applicable when other corresponding configurations are applied to feature GB16.

<Characteristic GC group>
Feature GC1. As a game state, a low advantageous state (normal zone) and a high advantageous state (advantageous zone) are set in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low,
A specific highly advantageous state (e.g., an attack mode) that is more advantageous to the player than other states (e.g., a challenge mode) in the highly advantageous state is set as a state included in the highly advantageous state,
a remaining number grasping means (number of games remaining in advantageous zone ZG) for grasping the remaining number until a predetermined end condition of the specific highly advantageous state is met (for example, the number of remaining games in attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in attack mode reaches a set number of games, or in the case of a number management configuration, the remaining number of payouts or the increased number of payouts becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the increased number of payouts reaches a set number) in the specific highly advantageous state;
A normal termination means for terminating the specific highly advantageous state and transitioning to the low advantageous state based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing a process for terminating the advantageous zone without the forced termination condition being satisfied in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
a first specific termination means for terminating the highly advantageous state including the specific highly advantageous state and transitioning to the low advantageous state based on the establishment of a first specific condition regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing a process for forcibly terminating the advantageous zone based on the advantageous zone game number AG reaching the upper limit game number in the second zone display process by the main control unit 101);
a second specific termination means for terminating the highly advantageous state including the specific highly advantageous state and transitioning to the low advantageous state based on the establishment of a second specific condition, which is a predetermined condition different from the first specific condition, regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing a process for forcibly terminating the advantageous zone based on the advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM reaching the upper limit increase number in the second zone display process by the main control unit 101);
A first specific event execution means capable of generating a first specific event that may be beneficial to a player when the highly advantageous state is ended by the first specific end means (for example, a function of executing a sixth special notification process when the advantageous zone is forcibly ended by the main control device 101 based on the upper limit game number);
A second specific event execution means capable of generating a second specific event that may be beneficial to a player when the highly advantageous state is ended by the second specific end means (for example, a function of executing a sixth special notification process when the advantageous zone is forcibly ended by the main control device 101 based on the upper limit increase number);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are high and low advantageous states in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and in the configuration in which the high advantageous state includes a specific high advantageous state in which the degree of advantage for the player is even higher, the specific high advantageous state may end based on the remaining number of the specific high advantageous state, or may end together with the high advantageous state based on the establishment of the first specific condition or the second specific condition in the high advantageous state, so that the degree of advantage of the high advantageous state, including the specific high advantageous state, is prevented from being extremely increased. Since a player would like a high advantageous state, especially a specific high advantageous state, to continue for a long time, if the high advantageous state ends due to the first specific condition or the second specific condition regardless of the remaining number of the specific high advantageous state, the player may get the impression that the remaining specific high advantageous state has been exploited, and may lose the motivation to continue playing or to play again. Therefore, when the high advantageous state ends based on the establishment of the first specific condition or the second specific condition, by making it possible for a specific event that can be beneficial to the player to occur, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience of such a case in which the high advantageous state may be forcibly ended.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the specific event that occurs differs depending on whether the game is forcibly terminated due to the first specific condition or the second specific condition. This draws attention to which specific condition causes the game to be forcibly terminated, and even an event such as the forcible termination of a highly advantageous state can be used in the game. This increases the interest in the game.

The "first specific termination means" and "second specific termination means" may be expressed as, for example, "a first specific termination means which terminates the specific highly advantageous state and transitions to the low advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined first specific condition, regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means" or "a second specific termination means which terminates the specific highly advantageous state and transitions to the low advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined second specific condition different from the first specific condition, regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means".

Furthermore, the "first specific condition" and the "second specific condition" may be expressed as "a first specific condition set as an end condition of the highly advantageous state including the specific highly advantageous state" and "a second specific condition that is set as an end condition of the highly advantageous state including the specific highly advantageous state and is different from the first specific condition."

Feature GC2. A first determination means (e.g., a function of executing the process of step S13810 by the main control device 101) for determining the remaining number of the specific highly advantageous states until the second specific condition is satisfied when the highly advantageous state is ended by the first determination ending means;
A second determination means (e.g., a function of executing the process of step S13803 by the main control device 101) for determining the remaining number of the specific highly advantageous states until the first specific condition is satisfied when the highly advantageous state is ended by the second determination ending means;
Equipped with
the first specific event execution means is capable of causing the first specific event to occur based on a result of identification by the first identification means;
A gaming machine described in feature GC1, characterized in that the second specific event execution means is capable of causing the second specific event based on the result of identification by the second identification means.

In a configuration in which multiple forced termination conditions, such as a first specific condition and a second specific condition, are set, unless the first specific condition and the second specific condition are simultaneously met, when the first specific condition is met and the highly advantageous state ends, the second specific condition is not met, and when the second specific condition is met and the highly advantageous state ends, the first specific condition is not met, and the highly advantageous state ends without enjoying the maximum benefit of the highly advantageous state defined by any of the specific conditions. The above configuration is intended to compensate for such benefits that cannot be enjoyed as the first specific event or the second specific event, and by doing so, in a configuration having multiple forced termination conditions, it is possible to bring out more fun in the game, such as which forced termination condition will end the highly advantageous state.

In particular, in a configuration in which a specific highly advantageous state is included in the highly advantageous state, the first and second specific events are configured to correspond to the remaining number of specific highly advantageous states, so that the first and second specific events can be generated with maximum consideration given to the benefits that would have been enjoyed if the specific condition that is not met had been met, making it possible to further increase the player's interest in each specific event.

The "first identification means" and "second identification means" may be expressed as, for example, "a first identification means for identifying the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means until the second specific condition is satisfied when the highly advantageous state is terminated by the first specific termination means" or "a second identification means for identifying the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means until the first specific condition is satisfied when the highly advantageous state is terminated by the second specific termination means".

Feature GC3. The remaining number grasping means grasps the remaining number of games as the remaining number of the specific highly advantageous state,
the first specific ending means, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, determines that the first specific condition is satisfied when the number of executed games in the highly advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games, and ends the highly advantageous state and transitions to the low advantageous state;
the second specific ending means, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, determines that the second specific condition is satisfied when an increase or decrease, which is a difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game results of each game in the highly advantageous state and the number of game media used in each game, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number, and ends the highly advantageous state and transitions to the low advantageous state;
A gaming machine described in feature GC2, characterized in that the first specific event is more advantageous or potentially beneficial to the player than the second specific event.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which multiple forced termination conditions are set, namely, the first specific condition that the number of games reaches the upper limit of games and the second specific condition that the increase/decrease number reaches the upper limit of increase, when comparing the first specific event that occurs when the game is forced to terminate because the first specific condition that the upper limit of games is reached is met before the upper limit of increase, and the second specific event that occurs when the game is forced to terminate because the second specific condition that the upper limit of increase is reached before the upper limit of games is reached, the first specific event is more advantageous or more likely to be beneficial to the player than the second specific event. In other words, based on the premise of the game that the player receives gaming media as a result of each game and aims to increase the gaming media, the side that is forced to terminate because the upper limit of games is reached feels a sense of loss that further increase in gaming media was expected, but the side that is forced to terminate because the upper limit of increase is reached may think that the increase in the number of gaming media has already reached the upper limit and is sufficient. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by increasing the compensation for the side that has reached the upper limit of the number of games and decreasing the compensation for the side that has reached the upper limit of the increase, it is possible to maintain a balance between the two compensations (benefits) and optimize the game.

Feature GC4. The remaining number grasping means grasps the remaining number of games as the remaining number of the specific highly advantageous state,
the first specific termination means, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, determines that the first specific condition is satisfied when the number of executed games in the highly advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games, and terminates the highly advantageous state and transitions to the low advantageous state;
the second specific ending means, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, determines that the second specific condition is satisfied when an increase or decrease, which is a difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game results of each game in the highly advantageous state and the number of game media used in each game, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number, and ends the highly advantageous state and transitions to the low advantageous state;
a special state setting means (a function of executing a special section setting process by the main control device 101) capable of setting a special state (special section) advantageous to a player in the low advantageous state following the end of the high advantageous state when the high advantageous state is ended by the first specific ending means or the second specific ending means;
the first specific event execution means is capable of setting, as the first specific event, a termination condition of the special state set by the special state setting means such that the termination condition is established when a corresponding number of game media corresponding to an increase up to the upper limit increase number specified by the second specifying means has been paid out in the special state;
A gaming machine as described in feature GC2 or feature GC3, characterized in that the second specific event execution means is capable of setting, as the second specific event, an end condition of the special state set by the special state setting means to be established when a number of games corresponding to the number of games up to the maximum number of games specified by the first specification means have been executed.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which multiple forced termination conditions are set, namely, a first specific condition that the number of games reaches the upper limit number of games and a second specific condition that the increase/decrease number reaches the upper limit increase number, when a highly advantageous state ends due to one of the forced termination conditions, a special state that is advantageous to the player is set in a low advantageous state, and the number of games up to the upper limit number of games and the increase up to the upper limit increase number are used as the termination condition of the special state. More specifically, when the upper limit number of games is reached and the game is forced to end, the increase up to the upper limit increase number is used as the termination condition of the special state, and when the upper limit increase number is reached and the game is forced to end, the number of games up to the upper limit number of games is used as the termination condition of the special state. In this way, in a configuration in which multiple forced termination conditions are set for a highly advantageous state, it is possible to compensate for the sense of loss caused by not being able to satisfy the other forced termination condition when the game ends due to one forced termination condition by using the special state.

Feature GC5. A first information notification means (a function of executing a process of displaying the remaining number of games by the display control device 81) capable of notifying, in the specific highly advantageous state, first information corresponding to the number of games up to the upper limit number of games in the highly advantageous state by a predetermined notification means;
A second information notification means (a function of executing a process of displaying the remaining increase number by the display control device 81) capable of notifying second information corresponding to the increase number up to the upper limit increase number of the high advantageous state by a predetermined notification means in the specific high advantageous state;
a means for allowing the second information notifying means to continue notifying the second information that was notified in the specific highly advantageous state in the special state when the corresponding number corresponding to the increase number up to the upper limit increase number is set as an end condition of the special state by the first specific event executing means (a function for executing the process of step S14209 by the display control device 81);
a means for allowing the first information notifying means to continue notifying the first information that was notified in the specific highly advantageous state in the special state when the second specific event executing means sets a number of games corresponding to the number of games up to the upper limit number of games as a termination condition of the special state (a function for executing the processing of step S14206 by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine described in feature GC4 is characterized by being equipped with:

According to the above configuration, when the upper limit number of games is reached and forced termination is performed, the increase up to the upper limit increase number is used for the special state, and when the upper limit number of games is reached and forced termination is performed, the notification of information corresponding to the increase up to the upper limit increase number that was notified in the specific highly advantageous state up to that point, and the notification of information corresponding to the number of games up to the upper limit number of games are carried over to the special state and notified. By doing this, it is possible to make it seem as if the highly advantageous state (particularly the specific highly advantageous state) continues until the forced termination condition on the side that could not actually be satisfied is satisfied, and even if it is recognized that the transition to the special state has occurred, it is easy to understand that the difference up to the forced termination condition on the side that could not be satisfied in the highly advantageous state has been carried over to the special state, and it is possible to clearly understand that the difference up to the forced termination condition is made up in the special state.

Feature GC6. When the specific highly advantageous state is shifted to the low advantageous state, an end notification execution means (a function for executing the process of step S14203 by the display control device 81) capable of executing an end notification of the end of the specific highly advantageous state by a predetermined notification means;
A pseudo-end notification execution means (a function of executing a process for performing a termination effect when a later-add notification is generated by the display control device 81) capable of executing a pseudo-end notification by a predetermined notification means, the pseudo-end notification indicating that the specific highly advantageous state will end, when the specific highly advantageous state does not transition to the low advantageous state;
Equipped with
The pseudo-end notification by the pseudo-end notification execution means is configured to execute a continuation notification to make the player recognize that the specific highly advantageous state will continue after executing the pseudo-end notification by a predetermined notification means,
The gaming machine described in feature GC5 is characterized in that when the special state is set by the special state setting means, it is equipped with a pseudo-continuation notification execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S14205 by the display control device 81) that can execute the continuation notification by a specified notification means after the end notification is executed by the end notification execution means.

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that a pseudo end notification can be made by the pseudo end notification execution means, where the end notification makes it seem as if the specific highly advantageous state has ended, but the continuation notification indicates that the specific highly advantageous state will continue. Even when the specific highly advantageous state (highly advantageous state) is forcibly ended and transitions to a special state occur, a notification is made in the same manner as the pseudo end notification, making it possible to give the impression that the special state is a state in which the specific highly advantageous state is continuing. In this way, it is possible to further enhance the effect of information up to the upper limit number of games and information up to the upper limit number of increases being carried over to the special state.

Feature GC7. In the specific highly advantageous state, based on the establishment of a predetermined increase condition, an increase processing means capable of executing an increase processing of the specific highly advantageous state (a function of executing a game number addition processing such as an attack mode by the main control device 101);
an excess information storage means (total number of games lost TEG) for storing excess information of the specific highly advantageous state corresponding to the increase processing based on the establishment of the increase condition when the increase condition is established in a specific situation in which the first specific condition or the second specific condition is established after the fact based on the current remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, or when the specific situation is established by performing the increase processing by the increase processing means;
Equipped with
the first specific termination means, when the first specific condition is established, terminates the highly advantageous state regardless of the excess information stored in the excess information storage means;
the second specific termination means, when the second specific condition is established, terminates the highly advantageous state regardless of the excess information stored in the excess information storage means;
A third determination means (e.g., a function of executing the process of step S13708 by the main control device 101) for determining the excess information stored in the excess information storage means when the highly advantageous state is ended by the first determination ending means;
A fourth determination means (e.g., a function of executing the process of step S13702 by the main control device 101) for determining the excess information stored in the excess information storage means when the highly advantageous state is ended by the second determination ending means;
Equipped with
the first specific event execution means is capable of setting the first specific event based on a result of identification by the third identification means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features GC1 to GC6, characterized in that the second specific event execution means is capable of setting the second specific event based on the result of identification by the fourth identification means.

In the above configuration, if it is specified in advance that the first or second specific condition will be met, the excess remaining in the specific highly advantageous state is stored as excess information, and then, when the first or second specific condition is met, the highly advantageous state ends regardless of the excess information. In this case, players would like to have an increase process that increases the remaining number in the specific highly advantageous state as much as possible until the specific situation is identified as the first or second specific condition being met, but once the specific situation is reached, players are forced to feel that the increase process is meaningless, and there is a concern that their motivation to play will decrease significantly. Therefore, by configuring the system so that a specific event can occur at the end of the highly advantageous state using the excess in the specific highly advantageous state, it is possible to create a sense of purpose in increasing the excess, and to suppress a decrease in motivation to play.

When the above configuration is applied to features GC2 to GC6, the "first specific event execution means" and "first specific event" in the above configuration may be the same as or different from the "first specific event execution means" and "first specific event" in features GC2 to GC6. If they are different, the "first specific event execution means" and "first specific event" in the above configuration may be expressed as the "third specific event execution means" and "third specific event", respectively, in order to clearly distinguish them. Also, the "second specific event execution means" and "second specific event" in the above configuration may be the same as or different from the "second specific event execution means" and "second specific event" in features GC2 to GC6. If they are different, the "second specific event execution means" and "second specific event" in the above configuration may be expressed as the "fourth specific event execution means" and "fourth specific event", respectively, in order to clearly distinguish them.

Feature GC8. The remaining number grasping means grasps the remaining number of games as the remaining number of the specific highly advantageous state,
the first specific ending means, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, determines that the first specific condition is satisfied when the number of executed games in the highly advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games, and ends the highly advantageous state and transitions to the low advantageous state;
the second specific ending means, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, determines that the second specific condition is satisfied when an increase or decrease, which is a difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game results of each game in the highly advantageous state and the number of game media used in each game, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number, and ends the highly advantageous state and transitions to the low advantageous state;
The excess information storage means includes:
A first storage means for storing information on the number of games corresponding to the increase process as the excess information (a function for executing a process for adding the number of added games to the total number of games lost (TEG) when the first excess flag is set by the main control device 101);
A second storage means for storing information on the expected increase in the number of game media based on the number of games corresponding to the increase process as the excess information (a function for executing a process for adding the number of added games to the total number of games lost TEG when the second excess flag is set by the main control device 101),
The third determination means determines the excess information of the number of games stored in the first storage means,
The gaming machine described in feature GC7, wherein the fourth identification means is for identifying the excess information of the increased number stored in the second storage means.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which multiple forced termination conditions are set, namely, a first specific condition that the number of games reaches the upper limit of the number of games, and a second specific condition that the increase/decrease number reaches the upper limit of the increase number, if the fulfillment of these forced termination conditions is specified in advance, and if an increase process is performed as a so-called top-up process after the specification, the excess amount corresponding to the increase process is stored as the excess information of the number of games and the excess information of the increase number, respectively. Then, in the case of forced termination, a specific event occurs based on this excess information, and if forced termination occurs at the upper limit of the number of games, a specific event occurs based on the excess information of the number of games, and if forced termination occurs at the upper limit of the increase number, a specific event occurs based on the excess information of the increase number. In this way, the benefit that would have been received if the forced termination had not been made is linked to the reason for the forced termination, making it possible to appropriately follow up on the player's sense of loss due to the forced termination.

Feature GC9. In the specific highly advantageous state, based on the establishment of a predetermined increase condition, an increase processing means capable of executing an increase processing of the specific highly advantageous state (a function of executing a game number addition processing such as an attack mode by the main control device 101);
an excess information storage means (total number of games lost TEG) for storing excess information of the specific highly advantageous state corresponding to the increase processing based on the establishment of the increase condition when the increase condition is established in a specific situation in which the first specific condition or the second specific condition is identified to be established ex post facto based on the current remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, or when the specific situation is established by performing the increase processing by the increase processing means;
Equipped with
the first specific termination means, when the first specific condition is established, terminates the highly advantageous state regardless of the excess information stored in the excess information storage means;
the second specific termination means, when the second specific condition is established, terminates the highly advantageous state regardless of the excess information stored in the excess information storage means;
A first determination means (a function for executing the process of step S13810 by the main control device 101) for determining the number of remaining specific highly advantageous states until the second specific condition is satisfied when the highly advantageous state is ended by the first determination ending means;
A second determination means (a function for executing the process of step S13803 by the main control device 101) for determining the remaining number of the specific highly advantageous states until the first specific condition is satisfied when the highly advantageous states are ended by the second determination ending means;
A third determination means (a function of executing the process of step S13809 by the main control device 101) for determining the excess information stored in the excess information storage means when the highly advantageous state is ended by the first determination ending means;
A fourth determination means (a function of executing the process of step S13802 by the main control device 101) for determining the excess information stored in the excess information storage means when the highly advantageous state is ended by the second determination ending means;
Equipped with
the first specific event execution means is capable of setting the first specific event based on a result of identification by the first identification means and a result of identification by the third identification means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features GC1 to GC8, characterized in that the second specific event execution means is capable of setting the second specific event based on the identification result by the second identification means and the identification result by the fourth identification means.

In the above configuration, if it is specified in advance that the first or second specific condition will be met, the excess remaining number is stored as excess information, and then, when the first or second specific condition is met, the highly advantageous state ends regardless of the excess information. In this case, players would like to have the increase process executed to increase the remaining number in the highly advantageous state as much as possible until the specific situation is reached in which the first or second specific condition is met, but once the specific situation is reached, players are forced to feel that the increase process is meaningless, and there is a concern that their motivation to play will decrease significantly. Therefore, by using the excess to cause a specific event at the end of the highly advantageous state, it is possible to create a sense of purpose in increasing the excess, and to suppress a decrease in motivation to play.

However, in a configuration in which multiple forced termination conditions, such as the first specific condition and the second specific condition, are set, unless the first specific condition and the second specific condition are simultaneously satisfied, if the first specific condition is satisfied and the highly advantageous state ends, the second specific condition is not satisfied, and if the second specific condition is satisfied and the highly advantageous state ends, the first specific condition is not satisfied, and the highly advantageous state ends without enjoying the maximum benefit of the highly advantageous state defined by any of the specific conditions. In other words, for example, if a configuration is made in which a specific event occurs based on the excess of the first specific condition when a forced termination occurs due to the first specific condition, this can somewhat ease the player's sense of loss, but for players who were hoping for the benefit of the second specific condition, if a forced termination occurs due to the first specific condition, they may end up feeling dissatisfied because they were not able to fully enjoy that benefit.

Therefore, in the above configuration, a specific event is generated by taking into account the excess of the side that was forced to terminate when the forced termination occurred, as well as the benefit of the side that was not forced to terminate. In this way, it is possible to more appropriately handle the sense of loss that occurs when a game is forced to terminate in a gaming machine that has multiple forced termination conditions set.

Feature GC10. As a game state, a low advantageous state (normal zone) and a high advantageous state (for example, an attack mode in an advantageous zone) in which the advantageous degree for the player is relatively high or low are set,
a remaining number grasping means (number of games remaining in advantageous zone ZG) for grasping the remaining number until a predetermined end condition of the highly advantageous state is met (for example, the number of remaining games in attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in attack mode reaches a set number of games, or in the case of a number management configuration, the remaining number of payouts or the increased number of payouts becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the increased number of payouts reaches a set number) in the highly advantageous state;
A normal termination means for terminating the highly advantageous state and transitioning to the less advantageous state based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing a process for terminating the advantageous zone without the forced termination condition being satisfied in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
a first specific termination means for terminating the highly advantageous state and transitioning to the less advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined first specific condition (reaching the upper limit game number of the advantageous zone) regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing a process for forcibly terminating the advantageous zone based on the advantageous zone game number AG reaching the upper limit game number in the second zone display process by the main control unit 101);
a second specific termination means for terminating the highly advantageous state and transitioning to the less advantageous state based on the establishment of a second specific condition (reaching the upper limit of the increase in the advantageous zone) which is a predetermined condition different from the first specific condition, regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing a process for forcibly terminating the advantageous zone based on the advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM reaching the upper limit of the increase in the advantageous zone in the second zone display process by the main control unit 101);
A first specific event execution means capable of generating a first specific event that may be beneficial to a player when the highly advantageous state is ended by the first specific end means (for example, a function of executing a sixth special notification process when the advantageous zone is forcibly ended by the main control device 101 based on the upper limit game number);
A second specific event execution means capable of generating a second specific event that may be beneficial to a player when the highly advantageous state is ended by the second specific end means (for example, a function of executing a sixth special notification process when the advantageous zone is forcibly ended by the main control device 101 based on the upper limit increase number);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are high and low advantageous states in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantageous state may end based on the remaining number of the high advantageous state or based on the first or second specific condition being met in the high advantageous state, so that the degree of advantage of the high advantageous state is prevented from being extremely high. Since a player would like the high advantageous state to continue for a long time, if the high advantageous state ends due to the first or second specific condition regardless of the remaining number of the high advantageous state, the player may get the impression that the remaining high advantageous state has been exploited, which may reduce the player's motivation to continue playing or to play again. Therefore, when the high advantageous state ends based on the first or second specific condition being met, the inconvenience of such a case where the high advantageous state may be forcibly ended can be eliminated by making it possible for a specific event that may be beneficial to the player to occur.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the specific event that occurs differs depending on whether the game is forcibly terminated due to the first specific condition or the second specific condition. This draws attention to which specific condition causes the game to be forcibly terminated, and even an event such as the forcible termination of a highly advantageous state can be used in the game. This increases the interest in the game.

The "first specific condition" and "second specific condition" may also be expressed as "a first specific condition set as an end condition for a predetermined state (advantageous zone) including the highly advantageous state" and "a second specific condition that is set as an end condition for a predetermined state (advantageous zone) including the highly advantageous state and is different from the first specific condition."

Furthermore, the configurations shown in features GC1 to GC9 may be applied individually or in combination to feature GC10.

In this case, for example, in the feature GC3, "the remaining number grasping means grasps the remaining number of games as the remaining number of the highly advantageous state,
the first specific termination means, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, terminates the highly advantageous state and transitions to the low advantageous state when the number of executed games in a predetermined state (advantageous zone) including the highly advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games, as the establishment of the first specific condition;
the second specific ending means, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, terminates the highly advantageous state and transitions to the low advantageous state when the increase or decrease, which is the difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game results of each game in a predetermined state (advantageous zone) including the highly advantageous state and the number of game media used in each game, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase, as the second specific condition being satisfied, and
It is preferable to apply this after modifying the expression to "the first specific event is more advantageous or potentially beneficial to the player than the second specific event," etc., and such modification also applies when applying other corresponding configurations to feature GC10.

<Characteristic GD group>
Feature GD1. As a game state, a low advantageous state (normal area) and a high advantageous state (advantageous area) are set in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low,
A specific highly advantageous state (e.g., an attack mode) that is more advantageous to the player than other states (e.g., a challenge mode) in the highly advantageous state is set as a state included in the highly advantageous state,
a payout means (payout device 53) for paying out game media according to the results of each game;
a remaining number information storage means (number of games remaining in advantageous zone ZG) for storing remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number until a predetermined end condition of the specific highly advantageous state is met (for example, the number of remaining games in attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in attack mode reaches a set number of games, or in a number management configuration, the remaining number of payouts or the increased number of payouts becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the increased number of payouts reaches a set number) in a predetermined remaining number area;
a remaining number grasping means (e.g., a function of executing a second section display process by the main control device 101) for grasping a remaining number corresponding to the remaining number information stored in the remaining number information storage means;
A normal termination means for terminating the specific highly advantageous state and transitioning to the low advantageous state based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing a process for terminating the advantageous zone without the forced termination condition being satisfied in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
a first specific termination means for terminating the highly advantageous state including the specific highly advantageous state and transitioning to the low advantageous state, regardless of the remaining number information stored in the remaining number information storage means, based on the establishment of a first specific condition including the fact that the increase or decrease in the number of game media paid out according to the game results of each game in the highly advantageous state and the number of game media used in each game has reached a predetermined upper limit increase number (a function for executing a process of forcibly terminating the advantageous zone based on the fact that the advantageous zone increase or decrease number ZM has reached the upper limit increase number in the second zone display process by the main control unit 101);
An increase processing means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process of the specific highly advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined increase condition;
an expected increase or decrease ascertaining means for ascertaining an expected increase or decrease in the number of game media that can be expected when the increased number of games due to the increase process is played (a function for executing a remaining number management process by the main control device 101);
When the sum of the expected increase or decrease and the previous increase or decrease exceeds the upper limit increase, the excess information of the remaining number corresponding to the excess is stored in an excess area (the number of games to be eliminated EJG) different from the remaining number area. (The function of executing the process of step S14407 by the main control device 101)
A specific storage means (a function of executing a reallocation process by the main control unit 101) for storing the remaining number corresponding to the excess information in the remaining number area as the remaining number information when the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area becomes specific information corresponding to the specific number that triggers the termination process by the normal termination means and when the excess information is stored in the excess area;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are high and low advantageous states in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and in a configuration in which the high advantageous state includes a specific highly advantageous state in which the degree of advantage for the player is even higher, the specific highly advantageous state may end based on the remaining number in the specific highly advantageous state, or may end based on the increase or decrease in the number of game media paid out in the high advantageous state including the specific highly advantageous state reaching the upper limit increase number, so that the advantage of the high advantageous state, especially the specific highly advantageous state, is prevented from being extremely increased. In the specific highly advantageous state, a so-called addition such as an increase process may occur based on the establishment of an increase condition, and when the increase process is performed, if the expected increase or decrease in the number of game media that can be expected when the increased number of games of the increase process is played and the increase or decrease up to that point exceed the upper limit increase number, the excess information of the remaining number corresponding to the excess is stored in an excess area different from the remaining number area in which the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number is stored. In this way, by storing the excess information in a separate area from the area in which the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number is stored, it becomes easier to realize gameplay that utilizes the excess amount (the information stored in the excess area), and this can help simplify the processing configuration in order to increase the interest of highly advantageous states in which an upper limit on the number of increases is set.

Furthermore, when excess information is stored in such an excess area, depending on the progress of each game, it is possible that the increase or decrease in the number of highly advantageous states will not reach the upper limit increase number even if the specific highly advantageous states stored in the remaining number area are consumed. Therefore, in such cases, the excess information stored in the excess area is re-stored in the remaining number area as remaining number information. In this way, it is possible to prevent losses to the player due to processing errors as described above, while also preferably avoiding an incident in which the implementation of a specific highly advantageous state is restricted even though an increase process has been carried out.

Note that "remaining number information" and "excess information" can also be expressed as, for example, "first information" and "second information." In this case, "remaining number information storage means," "excess information storage means," "remaining number area," and "excess area" can also be expressed as "first information storage means," "second information storage means," "first area," and "second area," and the expressions of other configurations can also be modified as appropriate. Such modifications can also be applied to corresponding parts in other features and other groups of features.

Furthermore, if the "specific storage means" is configured to "store the remaining number corresponding to the excess information in the remaining number area as remaining number information" and "delete the excess information stored in the remaining number area as remaining number information from the excess information storage means", it will be more clearly understood that the "excess information" is temporarily stored in the "excess area". Note that the "specific storage means" may also be expressed as "means capable of executing a transfer process to transfer the remaining number corresponding to the excess information to the remaining number area as remaining number information when the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area becomes specific information corresponding to a specific number that triggers the termination process by the normal termination means and when the excess information is stored in the excess area". Such a modification can also be applied to other features or corresponding parts in other feature groups.

Feature GD2. The gaming machine described in Feature GD1 is configured such that when the highly advantageous state is ended by the first specific ending means, the excess information stored in the excess area is erased.

According to the above configuration, by configuring the excess information stored in the excess area to be erased when the upper limit increase number is reached and the game ends, the excess area to be erased and the remaining number area that is always used during the specific highly advantageous state are separate areas, which makes it possible to prevent processing errors such as erasing the information when the upper limit increase number has not been reached and reduce the risk to the player caused by such errors.

Feature GD3. A second specific termination means for terminating the highly advantageous state including the specific highly advantageous state and transitioning to the low advantageous state, regardless of the remaining number information stored in the remaining number information storage means, based on the establishment of a second specific condition including the number of games executed in the highly advantageous state reaching a predetermined upper limit number of games (a function for executing a process for forcibly terminating the advantageous zone based on the advantageous zone game number AG reaching the upper limit number of games in the second zone display process by the main control device 101);
A second determination means (a function of executing a remaining game number management process by the main control device 101) that can determine in advance that the second determination condition of the highly advantageous state including the specific highly advantageous state is established based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means in the specific highly advantageous state;
Equipped with
When the highly advantageous state is ended by the second specific ending means, the excess information stored in the excess area is erased.
A gaming machine described in feature GD1 or feature GD2, characterized in that it is equipped with a confirmed information storage means (a function of executing a disappearing game number movement process by the main control unit 101) that stores, based on the second determination means determining that the second determination condition is established, the remaining number corresponding to the excess number of games determined to exceed the maximum number of games, among the remaining numbers corresponding to the excess information stored in the excess area, as confirmed information in a confirmed area different from the remaining number area and the excess area.

The increase or decrease number fluctuates depending on the results of the game, and even if excess information is stored assuming that the upper limit increase number will be reached, there are cases where the upper limit increase number is not reached. In the above feature GD1, the excess information is re-stored as remaining number information in anticipation of such a case. In contrast, in a configuration in which the number of games reaches the upper limit game number and is forcibly terminated, if it is specified in advance that the upper limit game number will be reached, the highly advantageous state may end before the upper limit game number is reached by reaching the upper limit increase number, etc., but it is unlikely that the highly advantageous state will continue after exceeding the upper limit game number. In other words, it is considered that the amount that exceeds the upper limit game number will not be re-stored in the remaining number area depending on the subsequent game situation. Therefore, in the above configuration, the amount that exceeds the upper limit game number is stored in the fixed area as disappearance information, and a configuration is used in which each area such as a remaining number area that stores remaining number information that is always used in a highly advantageous state, an excess area that temporarily stores excess information that will be exceeded, and a fixed area that stores fixed information that is the amount that is confirmed to be exceeded is used. In this way, by storing the common information, such as information about the remaining number during a specific highly advantageous state, in separate areas, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration during the highly advantageous state, prevent errors, etc.

In addition, the "confirmed information" can also be expressed as, for example, "third information." In this case, the "confirmed information storage means" and the "confirmed area" can also be expressed as the "third information storage means" and the "third area," and the expressions of other components can also be modified as appropriate.

Furthermore, when the "determined information storage means" is configured to "store the remaining number corresponding to the excess number of games specified as exceeding the upper limit number of games as confirmed information in a confirmed area different from the remaining number area and the excess area as confirmed information," if the "excess information stored in the confirmed area as confirmed information is erased from the excess information storage means," it can be more clearly understood that the "excess information" is temporarily stored in the "excess area." Note that the "determined information storage means" may also be expressed as "means capable of executing a moving process to move, based on the second specifying means specifying that the second specifying condition is established, the remaining number corresponding to the excess number of games specified as exceeding the upper limit number of games, out of the remaining numbers corresponding to the excess information stored in the excess area, to a confirmed area different from the remaining number area and the excess area as confirmed information."

Feature GD4. When the highly advantageous state is terminated, an initialization means (a function of executing the initialization process in the section display second process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an initialization process for initializing various information used in the highly advantageous state is provided;
A gaming machine described in feature GD3, characterized in that the remaining area and the excess area are subject to the initialization processing by the initialization means, while the confirmed area is not subject to the initialization processing by the initialization means.

According to the above configuration, the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area and the excess information stored in the excess area are initialized when the highly advantageous state ends, while the final information stored in the final area is not subject to initialization, so the final information can be carried over until after the highly advantageous state ends. In other words, as described in feature GD2, since the final information is information on the remaining number that cannot be used during the highly advantageous state, it is considered that the significance of the initialization process is not violated even if it is not subject to the initialization process when the highly advantageous state ends. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to optimize the game progress in the high advantageous state and the low advantageous state, such as carrying over the final information from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state and using it for game presentation during the low advantageous state.

Feature GD5. The gaming machine described in Feature GD3 or Feature GD4, characterized in that when the second specification means specifies that the second specification condition is met and the excess information is not stored in the excess area, the determined information storage means stores, among the remaining numbers stored in the remaining number area, the remaining number corresponding to the excess number of games specified as exceeding the upper limit number of games as determined information in a determined area different from the remaining number area and the excess area.

According to the above configuration, if the excess information is not stored at the time when it is predicted that the upper limit number of games will be reached, the remaining number corresponding to the excess number of games from the remaining number information of the first information is stored as confirmed information. In other words, when it is predicted that the upper limit number of games will be reached, it may be predicted that the increase or decrease will reach the upper limit increase number before that, or it may not be predicted, and the above configuration specifies the storage of confirmed information in a situation where no prediction is made. With such a configuration, the significance of the existence of the confirmed area is made clearer, and it is made clearer that the excess area that stores the excess information is a temporary storage area before the confirmed information is stored in the confirmed area, making it possible to further highlight the benefits of temporary storage in the excess area described in feature GD1.

Feature GD6. The gaming machine described in Feature GD5 is characterized by having a determination means (a function of executing a process by the main control device 101 to determine the presence or absence of a second excess flag) capable of determining whether the determined information stored in the determined area by the determined information storage means is based on the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area or the excess information stored in the excess area.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the roots of the fixed information stored in the fixed area are multiple, such as the remaining number information in the remaining number area and the excess information in the excess area, the roots of the fixed information can be determined after the fact by the determination means, so that it is possible to realize gameplay that takes advantage of the differences in roots, for example by treating fixed information whose root is the remaining number information differently from fixed information whose root is the excess information (by granting different benefits, causing events with different degrees of advantage, etc.).

Feature GD7: A first process execution means for executing a first process based on the determination by the determination means that the determination information stored in the determination area is based on the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area (a function for executing a process for a sixth special notification based on the total number of games lost TEG when the second excess flag is not set by the main control device 101);
a second process execution means for executing a second process different from the first process based on the determination by the determination means that the determination information stored in the determination area is based on the excess information stored in the excess area (a function for executing a process for a sixth special notification based on the total number of games lost TEG when the second excess flag is set by the main control device 101);
The gaming machine described in feature GD6 is characterized by being equipped with:

The above configuration is a specific configuration to clarify the function of feature GD6.

Feature GD8. The gaming machine described in Feature GD7 is configured so that the player is more likely to benefit from the first process performed by the first process execution means than from the second process performed by the second process execution means.

According to the above configuration, when the number of increases or decreases is once stored as excess information and then stored as final information, it is a case where a prediction is made that the upper limit number of games will be reached after a prediction is made that the increase or decrease will reach the upper limit number of increases, and when the number of increases or decreases is stored as final information without being stored as excess information, it is a case where a prediction is made that the upper limit number of games will be reached before a prediction is made that the upper limit number of increases will be reached. In other words, in a highly advantageous state, particularly in a specific highly advantageous state, in a situation where a large payout is received for a small number of games, it is easy to predict that the upper limit number of increases will be reached even with the same number of remaining games. In other words, the smaller the payout in a highly advantageous state (specific highly advantageous state), the easier it is to predict that the upper limit number of games will be reached before a prediction is made that the upper limit number of increases will be reached. Moreover, if a prediction is made that the upper limit number of games will be reached before a prediction is made that the upper limit number of increases will be reached, there is a high possibility that the upper limit number of games will be reached without reaching the upper limit number of increases. Therefore, as configured above, by making the process (first process) in which a prediction is made that the upper limit number of games will be reached before the prediction that the upper limit increase number will be reached more advantageous to the player than the process (second process) in which a prediction is made that the upper limit number of games will be reached after the prediction that the upper limit increase number will be reached, it may be possible to compensate for the difference in the number of gaming media paid out during a highly advantageous state with the difference in the degree of advantage.

Feature GD9. In the specific highly advantageous state, based on the establishment of a predetermined increase condition, an increase means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process of the specific highly advantageous state;
A first increase notification means (a function of executing a process for an additional notification by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81) capable of executing an increase notification corresponding to the increase process by a predetermined notification means;
A second increase notification means (a function of executing the process of step S14317 by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increase notification by a predetermined notification means when the remaining number information is stored in the remaining number area by the specific storage means based on the excess information stored in the excess area;
A gaming machine described in any one of features GD1 to GD8, characterized by having:

According to the above configuration, in a configuration where a so-called top-up notification is set, in which an increase process is performed when an increase condition is met and an increase notification is generated, if the upper limit increase number is reached and the remaining number information becomes specific information before the upper limit increase number is reached, the remaining number information is re-stored in the remaining number area and an increase notification is generated. In this way, for example, when a notification corresponding to the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area (e.g., a notification of the number of games remaining) is being made, it is possible to resolve the inconsistency in the notification that accompanies the re-storage of the remaining number information with a configuration that is relatively unlikely to cause discomfort.

Feature GD10. As a game state, a low advantageous state (normal zone) and a high advantageous state (for example, an attack mode in the advantageous zone) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low are set,
a payout means (payout device 53) for paying out game media according to the results of each game;
a remaining number information storage means (favourable zone remaining game number ZG) for storing remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number until a predetermined end condition of the highly advantageous state is met (for example, the remaining number of games in attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in attack mode reaches a set number of games, or in a number management configuration, the remaining number of payouts or the increased number of coins becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the increased number of coins reaches a set number) in a predetermined remaining number area;
a remaining number grasping means (e.g., a function of executing a second section display process by the main control device 101) for grasping a remaining number corresponding to the remaining number information stored in the remaining number information storage means;
A normal termination means for terminating the highly advantageous state and transitioning to the less advantageous state based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing a process for terminating the advantageous zone without the forced termination condition being satisfied in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
a first specific termination means for terminating the highly advantageous state and transitioning to the less advantageous state, regardless of the remaining number information stored in the remaining number information storage means, based on the establishment of a first specific condition including the fact that the increase or decrease, which is the difference between the number of gaming media paid out according to the results of each game in a predetermined state (advantageous zone) including the highly advantageous state, and the number of gaming media used in each game, has reached a predetermined upper limit increase number (a function for executing a process for forcibly terminating the advantageous zone based on the fact that the advantageous zone increase or decrease number ZM has reached the upper limit increase number in the second zone display process by the main control unit 101);
An increase processing means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process of the highly advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined increase condition;
an expected increase or decrease ascertaining means for ascertaining an expected increase or decrease in the number of game media that can be expected when the increased number of games due to the increase process is played (a function for executing a remaining number management process by the main control device 101);
When the sum of the expected increase or decrease and the previous increase or decrease exceeds the upper limit increase, the excess information of the remaining number corresponding to the excess is stored in an excess area (the number of games to be eliminated EJG) different from the remaining number area. (The function of executing the process of step S14407 by the main control device 101)
Equipped with
When the highly advantageous state is ended by the first specific ending means, the excess information stored in the excess area is erased,
A specific storage means (a function of executing a reallocation process by the main control unit 101) for storing the remaining number corresponding to the excess information in the remaining number area as the remaining number information when the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area becomes specific information corresponding to the specific number that triggers the termination process by the normal termination means and when the excess information is stored in the excess area;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantage state may end based on the remaining number in the high advantage state, or may end based on the increase or decrease in the number of game media paid out in a predetermined state including the high advantage state reaching the upper limit increase number, so that the advantage of the high advantage state is prevented from being extremely increased. In the high advantage state, a so-called top-up such as an increase process may occur based on the establishment of an increase condition, and when the increase process is performed, if the expected increase or decrease in the game media that can be expected when the increased number of games in the increase process is played and the increase or decrease up to that point exceed the upper limit increase number, the excess information of the remaining number corresponding to the excess is stored in an excess area different from the remaining number area in which the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number is stored. In this way, by storing the excess information in an area different from the area in which the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number is stored, it becomes easier to realize playability using the excess (information stored in the excess area), and it can be useful for simplifying the processing configuration in order to improve the interest of the high advantage state in which the upper limit increase number is set. Furthermore, the excess information stored in the excess area is erased when the upper limit increase is reached and the game ends. This configuration means that the excess area to be erased and the remaining number area that is always used during a highly advantageous state are separate areas, which makes it possible to prevent processing errors such as erasing the information when the upper limit increase has not been reached and reduce the risk to players caused by such errors.

Furthermore, when excess information is stored in such an excess area, depending on the progress of each game, it is possible that the increase or decrease in the number of gaming media does not reach the upper limit increase number even if the highly advantageous state stored in the remaining number area is consumed. Therefore, in such a case, the excess information stored in the excess area is re-stored in the remaining number area as remaining number information. In this way, it is possible to prevent losses to the player due to processing errors as described above, while also preferably avoiding an incident in which the implementation of a highly advantageous state is restricted even after an increase process has been carried out.

Note that the configurations shown in features GD1 to GD9 may be applied individually or in combination to feature GD10.

<Feature GE group>
Feature GE1. As a game state, a low advantageous state (normal area) and a high advantageous state (advantageous area) are set in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low,
A specific highly advantageous state (e.g., an attack mode) that is more advantageous to the player than other states (e.g., a challenge mode) in the highly advantageous state is set as a state included in the highly advantageous state,
a remaining number grasping means (number of games remaining in advantageous zone ZG) for grasping the remaining number until a predetermined end condition of the specific highly advantageous state is met (for example, the number of remaining games in attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in attack mode reaches a set number of games, or in the case of a number management configuration, the remaining number of payouts or the increased number of payouts becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the increased number of payouts reaches a set number);
A normal termination means for terminating the specific highly advantageous state and transitioning to the low advantageous state based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing a process for terminating the advantageous zone without the forced termination condition being satisfied in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
A remaining number notifying means (a function for executing a process for notifying the remaining number of games corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG by the display control device 81) capable of notifying the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means by a predetermined notifying means;
a specific termination means for terminating the highly advantageous state including the specific highly advantageous state and transitioning to the low advantageous state based on the establishment of a specific condition (an upper limit increase of 2,400 coins) regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing a process for forcibly terminating the advantageous zone based on the advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM reaching the upper limit increase number in the second zone display process by the main control unit 101);
When the highly advantageous state is ended by the specific ending means, a notified remaining number grasping means grasps the remaining number information notified by the remaining number notifying means (for example, a function of executing the process of step S14803 by the main control device 101);
A specific event execution means (for example, a function of executing a seventh special notification process by the main control device 101) capable of generating a specific event that may be beneficial to a player based on the result of the notification remaining number determination means;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and in the configuration in which the high advantage state includes a specific high advantage state in which the advantage for the player is even higher, the specific high advantage state may end based on the remaining number of the specific high advantage state, or may end based on the establishment of a specific condition, so that the advantage of the high advantage state, especially the specific high advantage state, is prevented from being extremely increased. When a specific condition is established, the high advantage state ends regardless of the remaining number of the specific high advantage state, but if the remaining number is notified before the specific condition is established and the state ends, the player may have the impression that the remaining number that was notified was intentionally eliminated and exploited, which may cause a decrease in motivation to play. However, if the high advantage state is ended by waiting for the remaining number that was notified to be consumed, the significance of setting a forced end condition such as a specific condition is not guaranteed at all, and even if the remaining number is not notified, the needs of players who would be highly interested in the continuation of the high advantage state cannot be met. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by configuring the highly advantageous state to end when a specific condition is met regardless of whether or not a notification is given, and then by configuring a specific event to occur according to the remaining number of notifications, it is possible to prevent players from losing their motivation to play and provide a gaming machine that meets the diverse needs of players.

The "specific condition" may also be expressed as "a specific condition set as an ending condition for the highly advantageous state, including the specific highly advantageous state."

Feature GE2. Equipped with a payout means (payout device 53) that pays out game media according to the results of each game,
the specific condition is established when a difference between the number of game media paid out in accordance with the game results of each game in the highly advantageous state and the number of game media used in each game, that is, an increase or decrease, reaches a predetermined upper limit of an increase,
A gaming machine described in feature GE1, characterized in that the specific event execution means is capable of presenting information that may be beneficial to the player as the specific event.

According to the above configuration, based on the premise of the gaming machine that the player plays a game and receives the payout of gaming media as a result, and the gaming media is expected to increase, the ultimate goal of the highly advantageous state is for the increase or decrease in the number of gaming media to reach the upper limit of increase. In other words, even if the highly advantageous state is terminated by a specific termination means regardless of the remaining number of specific highly advantageous states in the highly advantageous state, if the increase or decrease in the number of gaming media reaches the upper limit of increase, the goal of the highly advantageous state is achieved, and even if the highly advantageous state is terminated without using up the notified remaining number, the player will be fully satisfied. Therefore, as in the above configuration, the specific event that is generated based on the notified remaining number is limited to the presentation of information that may be beneficial to the player, and it is possible to prevent the degree of advantage from rising too high by generating such a specific event.

Feature GE3. The remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means corresponds to the number of games that can be executed in the specific highly advantageous state,
A gaming machine according to feature GE2, characterized in that the remaining number information notified by the remaining number notifying means corresponds to the number of games.

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature GE2 is made clearer. In other words, the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means corresponds to the number of games remaining in the specific highly advantageous state, and when the increase or decrease in the number of gaming media during the highly advantageous state reaches the upper limit increase number, the highly advantageous state is forcibly ended regardless of the number of games remaining in the specific highly advantageous state. Then, the specific event execution means executes the presentation of information that may be beneficial to the player as a specific event based on the information corresponding to the remaining number of games that was notified at the time of the forced termination. By clarifying in this way, it is more clearly understood that a balance is maintained between the purpose of the game, which is to expect an increase in gaming media as a result of playing each game, and the configuration of feature GE1, which compensates for the inconsistency in the notification during the game with a specific event.

Feature GE4: A specific situation grasping means (a function of executing a remaining number management process by the main control device 101) capable of grasping that the specific situation is a specific situation in which the specific condition is satisfied ex post facto based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means;
A specific situation notification means (a function of executing a process for making an eighth special notification by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific situation notification corresponding to the specific situation being grasped by the specific situation grasping means by a predetermined notification means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features GE1 to GE3, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to the above configuration, when a specific situation occurs in which a forced termination condition such as a specific condition is likely to be met later, a specific situation notification is made by a specified notification means, so that the player can understand that the specific situation exists and can understand that a specific event will occur when the specific condition is met based on the remaining number information notified by the remaining number notification means. In this way, if the configuration is such that a more favorable specific event occurs the greater the remaining number corresponding to the notified remaining number information, when a specific situation notification is made, it is thought that the player will hope that the specific condition will be met without using up as many remaining numbers as possible corresponding to the notified remaining number information. In this way, rather than simply using up the remaining numbers until the specific condition is met after the specific situation occurs, the fun of playing until the specific condition is met is added, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature GE5. Equipped with a payout means (payout device 53) that pays out game media according to the results of each game,
the specific condition is established when a difference between the number of game media paid out in accordance with the game results of each game in the highly advantageous state and the number of game media used in each game, that is, an increase or decrease, reaches a predetermined upper limit of an increase,
The gaming machine described in feature GE4 is characterized in that, as the results of each game in the highly advantageous state, a first result which may result in the payout of a first number of gaming media (for example, a strong cherry role in which three medals are paid out) and a second result which may result in the payout of a second number of gaming media greater than the first number (for example, a bell role in which nine medals are paid out).

According to the above configuration, the specific condition is met when the increase or decrease in the number of gaming media during the highly advantageous state reaches the upper limit of the increase, so if one aims to meet the specific condition as soon as possible after the specific state notification is made, one would likely play the game in the hope that the game result will be the second result with a larger payout. This increases the interest in the game after the specific state is reached.

Feature GE6. The gaming machine described in Feature GE4 or Feature GE5, characterized in that the specific event execution means is configured to generate a specific event that is more advantageous to the player when the specific end means ends the highly advantageous state, the more the remaining number information reported by the remaining number notification means corresponds to a larger remaining number.

According to the above configuration, once a specific situation has been reached and a specific situation notification has been made, it is advantageous to realize the specific condition as soon as possible. This allows the player's desire to not let the highly advantageous state end, to be changed to the completely opposite goal of wanting the highly advantageous state to end quickly. This makes it possible to favorably improve the playability in a highly advantageous state where a forced end condition, such as a specific condition, is set.

Feature GE7. The gaming machine described in Feature GE4 or Feature GE5, characterized in that the specific event execution means is configured to generate a specific event that is more advantageous to the player when the specific end means ends the highly advantageous state, and the smaller the remaining number information reported by the remaining number notification means corresponds to, the smaller the remaining number.

According to the above configuration, once a specific situation has been reached and a specific situation notification has been made, it is advantageous to delay the establishment of the specific condition as long as possible. This allows the highly advantageous state to be enjoyed until the very end, and makes it possible to optimally enhance the playability in a highly advantageous state where a forced termination condition, such as a specific condition, is set.

Feature GE8. The gaming machine according to any one of Features GE4 to GE7, wherein the specific event execution means is configured to cause a specific event that is advantageous to the player when the notification of remaining number information by the remaining number notification means corresponds to a predetermined special number when the highly advantageous state is ended by the specific end means, compared to when this is not the case.

According to the above configuration, after a specific situation occurs and a specific situation notification is made, if the specific condition is met when the remaining number corresponding to the remaining number notification is a special number, it is more advantageous than if this is not the case. In other words, for example, if the special number is a nice round number, it is advantageous to be forced to end the game when that nice round number is not notified. By doing this, after the specific situation occurs and until the specific condition is met, the player is likely to adjust their game operation so that the specific condition is met at the special number, or to proceed with the game in the hope of this happening, which can significantly improve the playability under the specific situation.

Feature GE9. In the specific highly advantageous state, based on the establishment of a predetermined increase condition, an increase means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process of the specific highly advantageous state;
An increase notification means (a function of executing a process for an additional notification by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81) capable of executing an increase notification corresponding to the increase process by a predetermined notification means;
A determination means (e.g., a function of executing the process of step S13301 by the main control device 101) capable of determining whether or not the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means corresponds to the establishment of the specific condition based on the increase process performed by the increase means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features GE1 to GE8, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when an increase process is performed as a so-called top-up process that increases the remaining number in a specific highly advantageous state, it is determined whether or not the increase process will establish a specific condition as a condition for forcibly terminating the highly advantageous state. By doing this, if the highly advantageous state is going to be forcibly terminated anyway, it is possible to prevent the player from getting falsely excited by notifying them based on the increase process, or not to reflect the increase process in the notification of the remaining number information by the remaining number notification means, and it is possible to reduce the chances of a specific event occurring when a game is forcibly terminated by a specific termination means. In addition, assuming that a specific event occurs when a game is forcibly terminated by a specific termination means, if it is determined that a specific condition is established by the increase process as described above, it is also possible to notify the player in anticipation of a specific event occurring due to a forced termination, which makes it possible to move away from gameplay that simply increases the remaining number and to create new gameplay.

Feature GE10. The gaming machine described in Feature GE9, characterized in that the increase notification means is capable of adjusting the increase in the remaining number notified based on the increase process in accordance with the result of the determination means.

The above configuration makes it possible to adjust the increment notified based on the increment process depending on whether a forced termination condition, such as a specific condition, is met. For example, the increment up to the fulfillment of the specific condition can be notified, but an increment exceeding the remaining number at which the specific condition is met can be notified, or the information on the increment to be notified can be determined in relation to the increment at which the specific condition occurs. In this way, it is possible to avoid giving the player false hope and to entertain the player by taking advantage of the increase in the remaining number that cannot be consumed.

Feature GE11. The increase notification means is
A first means for executing the increase notification based on the fact that the increase process has been performed (a function for executing a process of performing an add-on notification as an immediate add-on notification by the display control device 81);
A second means for executing the increase notification based on the remaining number information notified by the remaining number notification means becoming predetermined information (a function for executing a process of performing an additional notification as a later-addition notification by the display control device 81);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in feature GE9 or feature GE10, characterized in that it is possible to select whether the increase notification corresponding to the current increase processing will be performed by the first means or the second means based on the result of the identification by the identification means.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which there is a so-called immediate addition notification, which is an increase notification based on the fact that an increase process has been performed, and a so-called later addition notification, which is an increase notification based on the fact that the remaining number information by the remaining number notification means has become a specified information, if it is determined that a specific condition will be met later, a selection is made between an immediate addition notification and a later addition notification as the current addition notification (increase notification). In this way, in a configuration in which the success or failure of a specific condition may be reversed later depending on the subsequent game situation, etc., it is possible to improve the entertainment value of the game by utilizing the relationship with the remaining number information, by postponing the increase notification, by giving or not giving the player false hope.

Feature GE12. A gaming machine according to any one of Features GE9 to GE11, characterized in that even if the identification means identifies in advance that the specific condition will be met, the specific condition may not be met and the highly advantageous state may end depending on the subsequent game situation.

According to the above configuration, even if it is specified that a specific condition will be met in the future, depending on the game situation thereafter, the highly advantageous state may end without the specific condition being met. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the increase process is not performed during the increase process, the player will suffer a great disadvantage if the specific condition is not met. In contrast, as described in the above feature GE9, etc., if the configuration is such that it is limited to specifying whether or not the specific condition will be met in the future, and the increase process itself is executed, and the notification side is configured to adjust (such as by causing a specific event to occur or not notifying the amount that has been notified), it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of the increase process being lost, and to prevent the game from feeling strange even if the specific condition is not met later.

Feature GE13. As a game state, a low advantageous state (normal zone) and a high advantageous state (attack mode in an advantageous zone, etc.) are set in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low.
a remaining number grasping means (number of games remaining in advantageous zone ZG) for grasping the remaining number until a predetermined end condition of the highly advantageous state is met (for example, the number of remaining games in attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in attack mode reaches a set number of games, or in the case of a number management configuration, the remaining number of payouts or the increased number of payouts becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the increased number of payouts reaches a set number) in the highly advantageous state;
A normal termination means for terminating the highly advantageous state and transitioning to the less advantageous state based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing a process for terminating the advantageous zone without the forced termination condition being satisfied in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
A remaining number notifying means (a function for executing a process for notifying the remaining number of games corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG by the display control device 81) capable of notifying the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means by a predetermined notifying means;
a specific termination means for terminating the highly advantageous state and transitioning to the less advantageous state based on the establishment of a specific predetermined condition (an upper limit increase of 2,400 coins) regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing a process for forcibly terminating the advantageous zone based on the advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM reaching the upper limit increase in the second zone display process by the main control unit 101);
When the highly advantageous state is ended by the specific ending means, a notified remaining number grasping means grasps the remaining number information notified by the remaining number notifying means (for example, a function of executing the process of step S14803 by the main control device 101);
A specific event execution means (for example, a function of executing a seventh special notification process by the main control device 101) capable of generating a specific event that may be beneficial to a player based on the result of the notification remaining number determination means;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are high and low advantageous states in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantageous state may end based on the remaining number of the high advantageous state or based on the establishment of a specific condition, so that the degree of advantage of the high advantageous state is prevented from being extremely high. When a specific condition is established, the high advantageous state ends regardless of the remaining number. However, if the remaining number is notified before the specific condition is established and the state ends, the player may have the impression that the remaining number that was notified was intentionally eliminated and exploited, which may reduce the player's motivation to play. However, if the high advantageous state is ended by waiting for the remaining number that was notified to be consumed, the significance of setting a forced termination condition such as a specific condition is not guaranteed at all, and even if the remaining number is not notified, the needs of players who would be highly interested in the continuation of the high advantageous state cannot be met. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by configuring the highly advantageous state to end when a specific condition is met regardless of whether or not a notification is given, and then by configuring a specific event to occur according to the remaining number of notifications, it is possible to prevent players from losing their motivation to play and provide a gaming machine that meets the diverse needs of players.

The "specific condition" may also be expressed as "a specific condition set as an end condition for a predetermined state (advantageous section) that includes the highly advantageous state."

Furthermore, the configurations shown in features GE1 to GE12 may be applied individually or in combination to feature GE13.

In this case, for example, in the feature GE2, "the game machine is provided with a payout means (payout device 53) that pays out game media according to the results of each game,
The specific condition is established based on the fact that the increase or decrease, which is the difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game results of each game in a predetermined state (advantageous zone) including the highly advantageous state and the number of game media used in each game, has reached a predetermined upper limit increase number,
It is preferable to apply this after modifying the expression to "The specific event execution means is capable of presenting, as the specific event, information that may be beneficial to the player," etc., and such modifications also apply when applying other corresponding configurations to feature GE13.

<Feature GF group>
Feature GF1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a payout of a number of game media corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As game states, a normal game state and a first specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode or the like) which is more likely to be advantageous to a player than the normal game state are provided,
a second specific game state (e.g., an attack mode) that is more advantageous to a player than other states (e.g., a challenge mode) in the first specific game state is set as a state included in the first specific game state;
A first transition lottery means for executing a first transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the first specific game state in a normal game state (a function for executing a transition lottery to a challenge mode in a first specific role process by the main control device 101);
A first specific transition means for transitioning to the first specific game state based on the result of the lottery by the first transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the first specific game state (a function for executing a process for transitioning to a challenge mode in a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101);
A second transition lottery means for executing a second transition lottery as to whether or not to transition to the second specific game state (a function for executing a transition lottery to the attack mode in the first specific role processing by the main control device 101);
A second specific transition means for transitioning to the second specific game state based on the result of the lottery by the second transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the second specific game state (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the attack mode in the winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101);
a first grasping means (number of games remaining in advantageous zone ZG) for grasping remaining number information corresponding to the number of games remaining until a predetermined end condition of the second specific game state is met (for example, the number of remaining games in attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in attack mode reaches a set number of games, or in a number management configuration, the remaining number of payouts or the increased number of coins becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the increased number of coins reaches a set number) in the second specific game state;
A second grasping means (a number of advantageous zone games AG) for grasping execution information corresponding to the number of executed games in the first specific gaming state;
A normal termination means for transitioning the second specific game state to the normal game state based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means (a function for executing a termination process of the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a normal termination condition in the second process of zone display by the main control device 101);
a first specific end means (a function of executing a process of forcibly ending an advantageous zone in a second process of zone display by the main control device 101) for transitioning the first specific game state including the second specific game state to the normal game state, regardless of the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, based on the fact that the execution information grasped by the second grasping means becomes information corresponding to a predetermined upper limit game number;
a prediction means (a function of executing a remaining number management process, a first adjustment process, a second adjustment process, etc. by the main control device 101) capable of predicting an expected increase or decrease in the number of game media that will increase or decrease in the second specific game state based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means before the game corresponding to the remaining number information is executed;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is held by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means in a so-called slot machine in which a first specific game state is provided that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a second specific game state that is even more advantageous is provided as a state included in the first specific game state, so that gameplay based on gradually advantageous state transitions is realized, such as transitioning from the normal game state to the first specific game state and aiming for the second specific game state, which can be very useful in increasing interest.

The first and second specific game states can end based on the number of games remaining until the end condition of the second specific game state (remaining number information), or can end when the number of times the first specific game state has been played reaches the upper limit, regardless of the number of games remaining in the second specific game state. This avoids inconveniences such as an increase in game media that exceeds the designer's expectations due to the first or second specific game state continuing indefinitely, or players being unable to finish playing.

Moreover, in the above configuration, a prediction of the increase or decrease in the number of gaming media that will increase or decrease during the second specific gaming state is made based on the number of games remaining in the second specific gaming state. With this configuration, the player can play while knowing how many more payouts will be made in relation to the number of games remaining in the second specific gaming state, which helps improve the playability during the second specific gaming state and makes it possible to optimally improve the playability.

Feature GF2. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a payout of a number of game media corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As game states, a normal game state and a first specific game state (an advantageous zone including an attack mode or the like) which is more likely to be advantageous to a player than the normal game state are provided,
a second specific game state (e.g., an attack mode) that is more advantageous to a player than other states (e.g., a challenge mode) in the first specific game state is set as a state included in the first specific game state;
A first transition lottery means for executing a first transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the first specific game state in a normal game state (a function for executing a transition lottery to a challenge mode in a first specific role process by the main control device 101);
A first specific transition means for transitioning to the first specific game state based on the result of the lottery by the first transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the first specific game state (a function for executing a process for transitioning to a challenge mode in a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101);
A second transition lottery means for executing a second transition lottery as to whether or not to transition to the second specific game state (a function for executing a lottery for transition to the attack mode in the first specific role processing by the main control device 101);
A second specific transition means for transitioning to the second specific game state based on the result of the lottery by the second transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the second specific game state (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the attack mode in the winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101);
a first grasping means (number of games remaining in advantageous zone ZG) for grasping remaining number information corresponding to the number of games remaining until a predetermined end condition of the second specific game state is met (for example, the number of remaining games in attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in attack mode reaches a set number of games, or in a number management configuration, the remaining number of payouts or the increased number of coins becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the increased number of coins reaches a set number) in the second specific game state;
A second grasping means (a number of advantageous zone games AG) for grasping execution information corresponding to the number of executed games in the first specific gaming state;
A normal termination means for transitioning the second specific game state to the normal game state based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means (a function for executing a termination process of the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a normal termination condition in the second process of zone display by the main control device 101);
a first specific end means (a function of executing a process of forcibly ending an advantageous zone in a second process of zone display by the main control device 101) for transitioning the first specific game state including the second specific game state to the normal game state, regardless of the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, based on the fact that the execution information grasped by the second grasping means becomes information corresponding to a predetermined upper limit game number;
a prediction means (a function of executing a remaining number management process, a first adjustment process, a second adjustment process, etc. by the main control device 101) capable of predicting an expected increase or decrease in the number of game media that will increase or decrease in the second specific game state based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means before the game corresponding to the remaining number information is executed;
A correction means capable of executing a correction process of the predicted increase or decrease based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a function of executing a first adjustment process to a third adjustment process by the main control device 101, a remaining number management process based on the establishment of the correction condition, and a remaining number management process after a change process of the prediction condition is performed);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is held by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means in a so-called slot machine in which a first specific game state is provided that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a second specific game state that is even more advantageous is provided as a state included in the first specific game state, so that gameplay based on gradually advantageous state transitions is realized, such as transitioning from the normal game state to the first specific game state and aiming for the second specific game state, which can be very useful in increasing interest.

The first and second specific game states can end based on the number of games remaining until the end condition of the second specific game state (remaining number information), or can end when the number of times the first specific game state has been played reaches the upper limit, regardless of the number of games remaining in the second specific game state. This avoids inconveniences such as an increase in game media that exceeds the designer's expectations due to the first or second specific game state continuing indefinitely, or players being unable to finish playing.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the increase or decrease in the number of gaming media that will increase or decrease during the second specific gaming state is predicted based on the number of games remaining in the second specific gaming state. With this configuration, the player can play while knowing how many more payouts will be made in relation to the number of games remaining in the second specific gaming state, which helps improve playability during the second specific gaming state. However, depending on the lottery results of each game and the stopping mode of each game, the predicted increase or decrease may differ significantly from the actual increase or decrease. Therefore, by making it possible to correct the predicted increase or decrease, it is possible to reduce the possibility of inconsistencies caused by prediction errors in games using the predicted increase or decrease, and to appropriately improve playability.

Feature GF3. The gaming machine described in Feature GF1 or Feature GF2, characterized in that the prediction means includes a means capable of predicting the maximum value of the predicted increase or decrease using the maximum value of the expected payout number per game (a function of executing a process of making a prediction using the maximum increase or decrease number MM corresponding to the maximum number of coins in the first adjustment process by the main control device 101).

With the above configuration, the predicted increase/decrease is a maximum value, and the actual increase/decrease does not exceed that value. In this way, it is possible to avoid inconveniences caused by the increase/decrease exceeding that value.

Feature GF4. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined payout result (e.g., bell) that is the subject of the payout of game media by the payout means is provided;
the payout means pays out a specific number of game media based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific payout result having the highest winning probability among the predetermined payout results during the current state, and a specific picture combination corresponding to the specific payout result has stopped at the pay position;
The gaming machine described in any one of features GF1 to GF3, characterized in that the prediction means is equipped with a means for predicting the predicted increase or decrease in the expected increase or decrease in each game using the specific number (a function for executing a process for making a prediction using the maximum increase or decrease in the number of coins MM corresponding to the number of main roles in the first adjustment process by the main control unit 101).

According to the above configuration, the so-called main role is used as the specific payout result with the highest winning probability, and the predicted increase or decrease is predicted as if the main role wins every game. When predicting the predicted increase or decrease, for example, a configuration in which the prediction is made as if the payout result with the maximum increase or decrease, such as feature GF3, wins every game is also conceivable. By doing so, it is unlikely that the actual increase or decrease will be greater than predicted, but the winning probability of the payout result with the maximum number is often set relatively low, and it is considered unrealistic to predict that such a payout result will win every game. Therefore, by using the above configuration, it is possible to predict the largest increase or decrease within a more realistic range, which increases the usefulness of the predicted result and reduces the need for correction.

Feature GF5. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a predetermined payout result (e.g., bell) that is the payout target of the payout means, and a transition result (e.g., 1st BB) that enables a transition to a special state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the predetermined payout result is higher than in the normal game state are set,
a second expected increase or decrease per game during the special state is greater than a first expected increase or decrease per game during the second specific gaming state;
A gaming machine described in any one of features GF1 to GF4, characterized in that if the lottery result by the lottery means during the second specific gaming state becomes the transition result, the third expected increase/decrease that can be expected per game in the pre-transition state until the transition to the special state occurs and in the post-transition state until the transition to the specific gaming state occurs after the special state ends is less than the first expected increase/decrease.

According to the above configuration, when predicting the predicted increase or decrease during the second specific game state, a special state is set in which the expected increase or decrease is large, and the difference between the predicted increase or decrease and the actual increase or decrease can be large depending on how many times a transition to such a special state occurs during the second specific game state. On the other hand, if a transition result that may cause a transition to a special state during the second specific game state is won, the expected increase or decrease in the pre-transition state until the transition to the special state occurs and the post-transition state after the special state ends until the transition to the second specific game state occurs is smaller than the expected increase or decrease during the second specific game state. In other words, when the expected increase or decrease for these pre-transition and post-transition states is taken into account, the increase during the special state is offset by the decrease during the pre-transition and post-transition states, and the difference between the predicted increase or decrease and the actual increase or decrease during the second specific game state can be small.

Feature GF6. The gaming machine described in feature GF5, characterized in that a fourth expected increase or decrease that can be expected per game, calculated from the sum of a first total increase or decrease in game media that increases or decreases in the special state calculated from the average number of continued games in the special state and the second expected increase or decrease, and a second total increase or decrease in game media that increases or decreases in the pre-transition state and the post-transition state calculated from the average number of continued games in the pre-transition state and the post-transition state and the third expected increase or decrease, and the average number of continued games in the special state, the pre-transition state, and the post-transition state, is set to be the same or approximately the same as the first expected increase or decrease.

The above configuration is a specific configuration for more optimally achieving the effect of feature GF5.

Feature GF7: A correction means for executing a correction process of the predicted increase or decrease based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition (a function for executing a remaining number management process based on the satisfaction of a correction condition by the main control device 101) is provided;
the prediction means is configured to predict the expected increase or decrease by using an average value of an expected increase or decrease per game during the stay,
A gaming machine described in any one of features GF1 to GF6, characterized in that the correction means is capable of executing the correction process based on a transition from the current state to a different state, or the occurrence of a transition event that allows a transition to the different state.

According to the above configuration, the predicted increase/decrease is predicted using the average value of the expected increase/decrease for the state in which the user is staying, and the predicted increase/decrease is corrected based on the transition of the state to a different state. This makes it possible to achieve the effects of the above feature GF1, etc., without going through complex processing such as predicting the transition of states in advance and then predicting the predicted increase/decrease.

Feature GF8. The prediction means is configured to predict the predicted increase or decrease in the number of times including the first specific gaming state,
A correction means (a function for executing a prediction condition correction process by the main control device 101: step S16109) capable of executing a correction process of the predicted increase/decrease number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
a specific game state notifying means (a function of executing a first section display process and a second section display process by the main control device 101) which starts a notification by a specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) based on the game state transitioning to the first specific game state, or based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition including the game state transitioning to the first specific game state and the state in which a state notification regarding the operation state by the stop operation means can be executed, and ends the notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the first specific game state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features GF1 to GF7, characterized in that the correction means is capable of executing the correction process based on the start of notification by the specific game state notification means.

According to the above configuration, by providing a specific notification means, it is possible to clearly understand whether or not there is a transition to the first specific game state, and it is possible to prevent an event such as ending the game without knowing that the first specific game state has been transitioned to at least after the start condition is met. Furthermore, the start condition of such a specific notification means includes a state in which a mode notification regarding the operation mode by the stop operation means can be executed, and since the winning result can differ depending on the mode notification, the increase or decrease in the number of game media in the specific game state can differ greatly before and after the start condition is met. Therefore, if the above correction process is to start a notification by the specific notification means, it is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a notification, making it relatively easy to determine whether or not the situation requires correction process.

Feature GF9. The device is provided with a correction means capable of executing a correction process of the predicted increase or decrease in the number of coins based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition (a function of executing a remaining number management process based on the satisfaction of a correction condition by the main control device 101);
As the lottery result by the lottery means, a predetermined payout result (e.g., a bell) which is the subject of the payout of game media by the payout means, and a transition result (e.g., a first BB) which enables a transition to a special state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the predetermined payout result is higher than that in a normal gaming state are set;
A gaming machine described in any one of features GF1 to GF8, characterized in that the specific condition can be established based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming the transition result.

According to the above configuration, when a winning transition result occurs that allows a transition to a special state in which the probability of a specified payout result is increased, a specific condition is met and the predicted increase/decrease is corrected. In this way, if the configuration is such that correction processing is performed when the actual increase/decrease is greater than the predicted increase/decrease or when it is certain that this will occur, it is possible to reduce the discrepancy between the predicted increase/decrease and the actual increase/decrease without using complex processing such as predicting the predicted increase/decrease while taking into account a winning transition result in advance.

Feature GF10. The device is provided with a correction means capable of executing a correction process of the predicted increase or decrease in the number of coins based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition (a function of executing a remaining number management process based on the satisfaction of a correction condition by the main control device 101);
a predetermined replay result is set as a lottery result by the lottery means, which allows a player to play a next game without needing new game media;
As game states, a first re-game state (e.g., a normal game state, a first RT state) and a second re-game state (e.g., a second RT state, a third RT state) are set, in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the predetermined re-game result is different,
A gaming machine described in any one of features GF1 to GF9, characterized in that the specific condition can be established based on a transition from a specified gaming state to the first re-play state or the second re-play state.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a first replay state and a second replay state, which have different probabilities of becoming a predetermined replay state, are set, when a transition from a predetermined play state to the first replay state or the second replay state occurs, that is, when the winning probability of the replay result becomes different from the previous state, a specific condition is met and the above-mentioned predicted increase/decrease number correction process is performed. Since the replay result allows the next game to be played without requiring new game media, the probability of the replay result can greatly affect the total number of increases/decrease numbers of game media in the second specific play state. In other words, if it is easy to win the replay result, the total number of increases/decrease numbers can naturally be large. Therefore, if a correction process is performed when an event occurs that causes the probability of the replay result to differ, as in the above configuration, it is possible to reduce the discrepancy between the predicted increase/decrease number and the actual increase/decrease number without using complex processing such as taking into account fluctuations in the replay result in advance.

Feature GF11. The device is provided with a correction means capable of executing a correction process of the predicted increase or decrease in the number of coins based on the establishment of a specific condition that is predetermined in the second specific gaming state (a function of executing a remaining number management process based on the establishment of a correction condition by the main control device 101);
a predetermined replay result is set as a lottery result by the lottery means, which allows a player to play a next game without needing new game media;
As game states, a first re-game state (e.g., a normal game state, a first RT state) and a second re-game state (e.g., a second RT state, a third RT state) are set, in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the predetermined re-game result is different,
The expected increase or decrease per game may be greater when the second specific game state is consumed in the second re-gaming state than when the second specific game state is consumed in the first re-gaming state;
A gaming machine described in any one of features GF1 to GF10, characterized in that the specific condition can be met based on a transition from a specified gaming state to the second re-play state in the second specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a first re-play state and a second re-play state are set with different probabilities of entering a specified re-play state, the second specific game state is configured such that the expected increase or decrease is greater if the second re-play state is consumed, and it is assumed that the second specific game state will be played mainly in the second re-play state during the second specific game state. In other words, if the second specific game state transitions from the second re-play state to another game state due to some circumstances in the second specific game state, it is considered that a difference may occur between the increase or decrease predicted by the prediction means and the actual increase or decrease. Therefore, in the case of transition to these other game states, a correction process is performed when returning to the second re-play state, so that it is possible to correct the difference between the predicted increase or decrease and the actual increase or decrease so as to be smaller.

In particular, in the above configuration, the correction process is performed when returning to the second re-play state, not when transitioning to another play state, so there is no need to reflect in advance in the correction process the difference between the predicted increase/decrease number that occurs upon transition to another play state and the actual increase/decrease number. In other words, if the correction process is performed when returning to the second re-play state, it is only necessary to perform a correction for the difference that actually occurs, making it possible to reduce the difference between the predicted increase/decrease number and the actual increase/decrease number with a simpler configuration.

Feature GF12. The device is provided with a correction means capable of executing a correction process of the predicted increase or decrease in the number of coins based on the establishment of a specific condition that is predetermined in the second specific gaming state (a function of executing a remaining number management process based on the establishment of a correction condition by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine described in any one of features GF1 to GF11, characterized in that the specific condition can be met based on the difference between the predicted increase/decrease by the prediction means and the actual increase/decrease becoming a predetermined special number.

The above configuration allows for a correction process to be performed when a difference occurs between the predicted increase/decrease and the actual increase/decrease, making it possible to correct the difference more simply without the need to understand state transitions, etc.

Feature GF13. The device includes a correction means (a function of executing the first to third adjustment processes by the main control device 101) capable of executing a correction process of the predicted increase or decrease based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition in the second specific gaming state;
The device further includes an increasing means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means based on the establishment of a predetermined increasing condition in the second specific gaming state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features GF1 to GF12, characterized in that the specific condition is fulfilled based on the fulfillment of the increase condition.

According to the above configuration, when a so-called top-up occurs, which increases the number of remaining games in the second specific gaming state, a specific condition is met and a correction process for the predicted increase/decrease is performed. If a top-up occurs in the second specific gaming state, the increase/decrease may increase accordingly, and by correcting the predicted increase/decrease in response to the top-up as described above, it is possible to perform a more accurate correction process.

For example, in a configuration in which a lottery result is provided that allows a transition to a state in which a state in which the probability of winning a small prize is high over multiple games can be exhausted, such as a so-called bonus state, winning the lottery result that allows a transition to the above state during the second specific game state can be said to be a result that leads to an increase in the number of remaining seconds in the second specific game state, and winning this result can be included in the establishment of the above-mentioned increase condition.

Feature GF14. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a payout of a number of game media corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As game states, a normal game state and a specific game state (such as an attack mode in an advantageous zone) that is more likely to be advantageous to a player than the normal game state are provided,
A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery as to whether or not to transition to the specific game state in the normal game state (a function for executing a transition lottery to the attack mode in the first specific role processing by the main control device 101);
A specific transition means for transitioning to the specific game state based on the result of the lottery by the transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the specific game state (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the attack mode in the winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101);
a first grasping means (number of games remaining in advantageous zone ZG) for grasping remaining number information corresponding to the number of games remaining until a predetermined end condition of the specific game state is met (for example, the number of remaining games in attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in attack mode reaches a set number of games, or in a number management configuration, the remaining number of payouts or the increased number of coins becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the increased number of coins reaches a set number) in the specific game state;
A second grasping means (advantageous zone game number AG) for grasping execution information corresponding to the number of executed games in a predetermined gaming state (advantageous zone) including the specific gaming state;
A normal termination means for transitioning the specific game state to the normal game state based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means (a function for executing a termination process of the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a normal termination condition in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
a first specific termination means (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous zone in a second process of zone display by the main control device 101) for transitioning the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, regardless of the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, based on the execution information grasped by the second grasping means becoming information corresponding to a predetermined upper limit game number;
a prediction means (a function of executing a remaining number management process, a first adjustment process, a second adjustment process, etc. by the main control device 101) capable of predicting an expected increase or decrease in the number of game media that will increase or decrease in the specific game state based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means before the game corresponding to the remaining number information is executed;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the rotation of the circling body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circling body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, a specific game state is provided that is more likely to be advantageous for the player than the normal game state, and the specific game state is set to end based on the number of games remaining (remaining number information) until the end condition of the specific game state is met, as well as to end regardless of the number of remaining games in the specific game state when the number of times the specific game state is executed reaches the upper limit, so that inconveniences such as an increase in game media beyond the designer's expectations due to the specific game state continuing endlessly and players being unable to finish the game are avoided.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the increase or decrease in the number of gaming media that will increase or decrease during a specific gaming state is predicted based on the number of games remaining in that specific gaming state. With this configuration, the player can play while knowing how many more payouts will be made in relation to the number of games remaining in the specific gaming state, which helps improve the playability during the specific gaming state and makes it possible to optimally improve the playability.

Feature GF15. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a payout of a number of game media corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As game states, a normal game state and a specific game state (such as an attack mode in an advantageous zone) which is more likely to be advantageous to a player than the normal game state are provided,
A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery as to whether or not to transition to the specific game state in the normal game state (a function for executing a transition lottery to the attack mode in the first specific role processing by the main control device 101);
A specific transition means for transitioning to the specific game state based on the result of the lottery by the transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the specific game state (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the attack mode in the winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101);
a first grasping means (number of games remaining in advantageous zone ZG) for grasping remaining number information corresponding to the number of games remaining until a predetermined end condition of the specific game state is met (for example, the number of remaining games in attack mode becomes 0, the number of games executed in attack mode reaches a set number of games, or in a number management configuration, the remaining number of payouts or the increased number of coins becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the increased number of coins reaches a set number) in the specific game state;
A second grasping means (advantageous zone game number AG) for grasping execution information corresponding to the number of executed games in a predetermined gaming state (advantageous zone) including the specific gaming state;
A normal termination means for transitioning the specific game state to the normal game state based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means (a function for executing a termination process of the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a normal termination condition in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
a first specific termination means (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous zone in a second process of zone display by the main control device 101) for transitioning the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, regardless of the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, based on the execution information grasped by the second grasping means becoming information corresponding to a predetermined upper limit game number;
a prediction means (a function of executing a remaining number management process, a first adjustment process, a second adjustment process, etc. by the main control device 101) capable of predicting an expected increase or decrease in the number of game media that will increase or decrease in the specific game state based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means before the game corresponding to the remaining number information is executed;
A correction means capable of executing a correction process of the predicted increase or decrease based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a function of executing a first adjustment process to a third adjustment process by the main control device 101, a remaining number management process based on the establishment of the correction condition, and a remaining number management process after a change process of the prediction condition is performed);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the rotation of the circling body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circling body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, a specific game state is provided that is more likely to be advantageous for the player than the normal game state, and the specific game state is set to end based on the number of games remaining until the end condition of the specific game state (remaining number information), as well as to end regardless of the number of remaining games in the specific game state when the number of times the specific game state has been executed reaches the upper limit, so that inconveniences such as an increase in game media exceeding the designer's expectations due to the specific game state continuing endlessly and players being unable to finish the game are avoided.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the increase or decrease in the number of gaming media that will increase or decrease during a specific gaming state is predicted based on the number of games remaining in that specific gaming state. With this configuration, the player can play while knowing how much more will be paid out in relation to the number of games remaining in the specific gaming state, which helps improve playability during the specific gaming state. However, depending on the lottery results of each game and the stopping mode of each game, the predicted increase or decrease may differ significantly from the actual increase or decrease. Therefore, by making it possible to correct the predicted increase or decrease, it is possible to reduce the possibility of inconsistencies caused by prediction errors in games using the predicted increase or decrease, and to appropriately improve playability.

The configurations shown in features GF1 to GF13 may be applied individually or in combination to feature GF14 and feature GF15.

<Characteristic GG group>
Feature GG1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As game states, a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including a challenge mode, etc.) which is more likely to be advantageous to a player than the normal game state are provided,
A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery as to whether or not to transition to the specific game state in the normal game state (a function for executing a transition lottery to the challenge mode in the first specific role processing by the main control device 101);
A specific transition means for transitioning to the specific game state based on the result of the lottery by the transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the specific game state (a function for executing a process for transitioning to a challenge mode in a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101);
a specific game state notification means (a function of executing a first section display process and a second section display process by the main control device 101) which starts a notification by a specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) based on the game state transitioning to the specific game state, or based on the game state transitioning to the specific game state and the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and ends the notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state;
In the specific game state, an advantage determination means performs an advantage determination as to whether or not an advantageous event advantageous to the player is generated (a function of executing the processing of step S15904 or step S16004 in the premonition setting processing when the overlapping target role is won during the CM by the main control device 101);
Equipped with
The specific game state notification means is configured to, when a result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is a corresponding result that will cause the advantageous event, continue notification by the specific notification means at least until the advantageous event occurs;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with an extension means (a function of executing the processing of step S15908 or step S16008 in the premonition setting processing when a duplicate target role is won during a commercial by the main control unit 101) that performs extension processing of the specific game state when the result of the advantageous judgment is a non-corresponding result that does not cause the advantageous event.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, a specific game state is provided that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state, and when the specific game state is entered or when the start condition is met thereafter, an announcement by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the announcement by the specific notification means also ends. In other words, by checking whether or not there is an announcement by the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific game state is entered, and it is possible to eliminate a sense of inequality between, for example, a player who ends a game without noticing that a game has been entered into the specific game state and a player who sits down at a game machine after the game has ended. Therefore, it is possible for all players to enjoy playing in the specific game state equally to their heart's content.

In addition, in a specific gaming state, an advantageous judgment may be made as to whether or not an advantageous event advantageous to the player will occur, and even if an advantageous event occurs, the specific notification means continues to notify. This improves playability during the specific gaming state while ensuring the effect of equalizing play through the specific notification means.

However, for example, if an advantageous judgment is made just before the end of a specific gaming state, and the advantageous judgment is a corresponding result indicating that an advantageous event will occur, the notification by the specific notification means will continue, but if the advantageous judgment is a non-corresponding result indicating that an advantageous event will not occur, the notification by the specific notification means will end when the specific gaming state ends. In this way, a situation may arise in which the result that the player is interested in, such as an advantageous judgment, will be clearly evident from whether or not the notification by the specific notification means continues.

Therefore, in the above configuration, if the result of the advantageous judgment is an incompatible result, an extension process of the specific game state is performed, although no advantageous event is generated. As a result, even if an advantageous judgment is made just before the end of the specific game state as described above and it results in an incompatible result, the end of the specific game state is postponed by the amount of the extension process, and the notification by the specific notification means. In this way, it is possible to obtain the effect of equalizing the game by the specific notification means, while avoiding an event where the result of the advantageous judgment becomes obvious, and to appropriately improve the playability during the specific game state.

In addition, after "setting a special game state (e.g., attack mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states in the specific game state (e.g., challenge mode) as a state included in the specific game state," the "specific game state notification means" may be expressed as "a specific game state notification means which starts notification by the specific notification means based on the game state transitioning to the specific game state, or based on the game state transitioning to the specific game state and the establishment of a predetermined start condition including an allowance condition under which the transition to the special game state is permitted, and ends the notification by the specific notification means based on the specific game state ending" or "a specific game state notification means which starts notification by the specific notification means based on the game state transitioning to the specific game state, or based on the game state transitioning to the specific game state and the establishment of a predetermined start condition including a notification condition for issuing a winning notification of winning the lottery for transitioning to the special game state, and ends the notification by the specific notification means based on the specific game state ending."

Feature GG2. When the advantageous judgment is made, an advantageous notification means (a function for executing a process for performing a performance during a premonition mode or a continuous performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing an advantageous notification corresponding to the result of the advantageous judgment by a predetermined notification means;
The gaming machine described in feature GG1 is characterized in that the extension means is capable of executing the extension process based on an advantageous notification being made by the advantageous notification means.

According to the above configuration, when an advantageous judgment is made, an advantageous notification corresponding to the result is made by a specified notification means, and players who are curious about the result of the advantageous judgment will be very interested in the advantageous notification. And as described in feature GG1 above, even if the result of the advantageous judgment is a non-corresponding result, by performing an extension process of the specific game state, it becomes impossible to determine the result of the advantageous judgment from the continuation or non-continuation of the notification by the specific notification means, so it is possible to suitably increase the attention to the advantageous notification.

In other words, in a configuration in which the result of an advantageous judgment is presented as an advantageous notification in this manner, if the result were obvious from whether or not the specific notification means continued to notify, not only would attention to the advantageous notification not be increased, but the advantageous notification would be made even though it was clear that the result of the advantageous judgment was a non-compatible result, making the advantageous notification stand out as being ridiculous and raising concerns that this would cause players to lose interest in the game presentation. In that regard, by applying the configuration of feature GG1 to a configuration in which such advantageous notifications are presented, as in the above configuration, it is possible to ideally increase interest in the game presentation.

Feature GG3. The gaming machine described in Feature GG2, characterized in that the extension means is capable of executing the extension process based on the advantageous result being notified by the advantageous result notification means, regardless of the result of the advantageous result determination.

According to the above configuration, regardless of the result of the advantageous judgment, the specific notification means will continue to notify, and therefore the processing configuration of the extension process is simplified to the extent that the result of the advantageous judgment is not referenced. On the other hand, since the occurrence of an advantageous notification is set as a condition for executing the extension process, it is also possible to avoid unnecessarily increasing the degree of advantage, compared to a configuration in which the extension process is uniformly performed when an advantageous judgment is made.

Feature GG4. The advantage notification means is capable of executing the advantage notification over a predetermined number of games,
A gaming machine described in feature GG2 or feature GG3, characterized in that the extension means is capable of executing the extension process depending on the number of games for which the advantageous notification means issues the advantageous notification.

The above configuration is premised on a configuration in which the advantageous notification means notifies an advantageous player over multiple games, and the extension process is performed according to the number of games for which the advantageous notification is performed. This makes it possible to keep the change in the advantageous degree caused by the extension process small, for example by preventing the advantageous degree of the specific game state from becoming excessively high as a result of the extension process. Therefore, it is possible to configure the extension process of the specific game state to be performed within a range that ensures the significance of a non-winning (non-corresponding result) in the advantageous determination of whether or not an advantageous event will occur (without increasing the advantageous degree too much).

Feature GG5. Equipped with a grasping means for grasping the number of remaining games in the specific game state when the advantageous notification is started (a function for executing the processing of steps S15906, S15907, S16006, and S16007 in the premonition setting processing when the overlapping target role is won during the CM by the main control device 101),
The gaming machine described in feature GG4 is characterized in that the extension means is capable of executing an extension process corresponding to the number of games obtained by subtracting the remaining number of games grasped by the grasping means from the specified number.

According to the above configuration, the extension process of the specific game state is performed by an amount equal to the predetermined number of games for which the advantageous notification is performed minus the number of games remaining in the specific game state when the advantageous notification is started. By doing this, it is also possible to synchronize the end of the advantageous notification with the end of the specific game state, and it is possible to eliminate unnecessary extension processes, such as when the specific game state is extended even though the advantageous notification has ended, and to eliminate the inconvenience of the advantageous degree becoming too high when adjusting the presentation. In other words, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of the advantageous degree becoming too high in an effort to achieve a presentation effect.

Feature GG6. As the advantageous notification, a first advantageous notification executed over a first predetermined number of games and a second advantageous notification executed over a second predetermined number of games different from the first predetermined number are set,
The advantageous notification means includes a selection means (a function of executing a lottery process of the number of premonition games by the main control device 101) for selecting one advantageous notification from a plurality of types of advantageous notifications including the first advantageous notification and the second advantageous notification, and is configured to be able to execute the advantageous notification selected by the selection means by the predetermined notification means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features GG2 to GG5, characterized in that the extension means is capable of executing an extension process of the specific gaming state depending on the number of games for which an advantageous notification selected by the selection means is performed.

According to the above configuration, by configuring multiple types of advantageous notifications to be set, it is possible to diversify the presentation, and even if multiple types are set in this way, the extension process is performed for the corresponding number of games, making it possible to accurately match the situation in which the advantageous notification is being performed with the extension of a specific game state.

Feature GG7. The present invention includes a first control device (main control device 101) having at least the lottery means, the advantage determination means, and the extension means, and a second control device (display control device 81) having the advantage notification means;
The first control device is
A lottery means for determining whether or not to execute the advantageous notification (a function for executing a lottery process for the number of premonition games by the main control device 101);
an output means for outputting the result of the lottery by the notification execution lottery means to the second control device (a function for executing a process for setting an output of a premonition command by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine described in any one of features GG2 to GG6, characterized by having:

According to the above configuration, the first control device, which has functions directly related to the player's profit such as the lottery means, advantage determination means, and extension means, and the second control device, which has a presentation function such as the advantage notification means, are separately provided, thereby sharing the functions and preventing a local increase in the processing load, and by consolidating the functions related to profits on the first control device side, it is possible to easily take measures against fraudulent acts and reduce the possibility that players and game halls will suffer disadvantages due to fraudulent acts. In addition, when a configuration in which an extension process is performed in response to an advantageous notification is applied to a gaming machine having such multiple control devices, if the first control device manages whether or not an advantageous notification is executed and outputs the information to the second control device as in the above configuration, it is not necessary to configure the second control device to output some information from the advantage notification means to the first control device, and the independence of the first control device and the second control device are ensured, and the extension process can be preferably realized while strengthening the above-mentioned fraud countermeasures.

Feature GG8. The second extension means (function of executing an add-on process such as an attack mode by the main control device 101) is provided, which is capable of executing an extension process (add-on) of the specific game state based on the occurrence of a predetermined extension condition;
A gaming machine described in any one of features GG1 to GG7, characterized in that when an extension process is performed by the second extension means, a notification (additional notification) is given that the extension process is being performed, whereas when an extension process is performed by the extension means, a notification that the extension process is being performed is not given.

According to the above configuration, when the extension process is performed by the second extension means, a so-called additional notification is generated as a notification to that effect. Based on this configuration, when the extension process is performed by the extension means based on the above-mentioned advantageous judgment, no additional notification is generated. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that the continuation of the notification by the specific notification means is based on the result of the advantageous judgment resulting in an advantageous event.

Feature GG9. As the specific game state, a high-advantage specific game state (first challenge mode) and a low-advantage specific game state (second challenge mode) are set, in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low,
A gaming machine described in any one of features GG1 to GG8, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of step S16008 by the main control unit 101) that can change the specific game state of the extended portion to the low-advantage specific game state based on the extension processing being performed by the extension means.

According to the above configuration, by making the extension of the specific game state based on the extension process into a low-advantage specific game state, it is possible to avoid the player's advantage level from unnecessarily increasing in order to eliminate the inconvenience of the presentation, such as the extension process.

Feature GG10. The gaming machine described in Feature GG9, characterized in that the degree of advantage of the low-advantage specific gaming state is equal to or approximately the same as the degree of advantage of the normal gaming state.

The above configuration makes it possible to postpone the notification end timing of the specific notification means without substantially increasing the degree of advantage.

Feature GG11. As the specific game state, a high-advantage specific game state (such as an attack mode) and a low-advantage specific game state (such as a challenge mode) are set so that the degree of advantage in the specific game state is relatively high and low,
The low-advantage specific game state is a state in which the winning probability or execution frequency of a lottery for transition to the high-advantage specific game state is higher than that of the normal game state,
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a transition result (first BB, second BB) is set which allows a transition to a transition state in which a winning probability of a predetermined payout result in which a predetermined number of gaming media is paid out as the bonus is different from that of the normal gaming state;
Furthermore, as a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a special result (specific combination) is set including a duplicate result (e.g., strong cherry duplicate 1) in which a predetermined specific result overlaps with the transition result to win, and a non-duplicate result (e.g., strong cherry) in which the specific result does not overlap with the transition result to win,
a transition means (a function of executing a bonus state process by the main control device 101) for transitioning a gaming state to the transition state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being the transition result and a transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result being stopped at the effective position;
The advantage determination means is configured to determine, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, whether or not the transition result is included as the special result as the advantage determination;
The gaming machine described in any one of features GG1 to GG10, characterized in that the extension means is capable of executing the extension processing based on the result of an advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means in the low-advantage specific gaming state being a judgment result that does not include the transition result.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a high-advantage specific game state in which the degree of advantage is relatively high in a specific game state and a low-advantage specific game state (a so-called chance zone) in which the winning probability and execution frequency of the lottery for transition to the high-advantage specific game state are higher than in the normal game state are provided, a route is assumed in which the game flow transitions from the normal game state to the low-advantage specific game state, and then from the low-advantage specific game state to the high-advantage specific game state. In such a configuration, players are interested in how to transition to a high-advantage specific game state during a low-advantage specific game state, and transitions to a transition state during a low-advantage specific game state may function as a lure to a high-advantage specific game state, and it is thought that there is great expectation that in a low-advantage specific game state, a transition result that transitions to a transition state occurs along with a transition to a high-advantage specific game state, that is, a special result that results in an advantageous judgment, and attention is increased to the presentation when such an advantageous judgment is made. However, even if a special result is reached in a low-advantage specific game state and an advantageous judgment is made, there is a possibility that the result of the advantageous judgment will be obvious depending on whether or not the announcement by the specific announcement means continues. Therefore, if an advantageous judgment is made during a low-advantage specific game state and the result does not include a transition result, an extension process for the low-advantage specific game state is performed to extend the announcement by the specific announcement means, thereby making it possible to preferably avoid the result being obvious due to the announcement.

Feature GG12. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As game states, a normal game state and a specific game state (an advantageous zone including a challenge mode, etc.) that is more likely to be advantageous to a player than the normal game state are provided,
A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery as to whether or not to transition to the specific game state in the normal game state (a function for executing a transition lottery to the challenge mode in the first specific role processing by the main control device 101);
A specific transition means for transitioning to the specific game state based on the result of the lottery by the transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the specific game state (a function for executing a process for transitioning to a challenge mode in a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101);
a specific game state notification means (a function of executing a first section display process and a second section display process by the main control device 101) which starts a notification by a specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) based on the game state transitioning to the specific game state, or based on the game state transitioning to the specific game state and the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and ends the notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state;
In the specific game state, an advantage determination means performs an advantage determination as to whether or not an advantageous event advantageous to the player will occur (a function of executing the processing of step S15904 or step S16004 in the premonition setting processing when the overlapping target role is won during a CM by the main control device 101);
Equipped with
The specific game state notification means is configured to, when a result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is a corresponding result that will cause the advantageous event, continue notification by the specific notification means at least until the advantageous event occurs;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with an extension means (a function of executing the processing of step S15908 or step S16008 in the premonition setting processing by the main control unit 101 when a duplicate target role is won during a commercial) that performs an extension process to extend the notification continuation game of the specific notification means by a predetermined number of games when the result of the advantageous judgment is a non-corresponding result that does not cause the advantageous event.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, a specific game state is provided that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state, and when the specific game state is entered or when the start condition is met thereafter, an announcement by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the announcement by the specific notification means also ends. In other words, by checking whether or not there is an announcement by the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific game state is entered, and it is possible to eliminate a sense of inequality between, for example, a player who ends a game without noticing that a game has been entered into the specific game state and a player who sits down at a game machine after the game has ended. Therefore, it is possible for all players to enjoy playing in the specific game state equally to their heart's content.

In addition, in a specific gaming state, an advantageous judgment may be made as to whether or not an advantageous event advantageous to the player will occur, and even if an advantageous event occurs, the specific notification means continues to notify. This improves playability during the specific gaming state while ensuring the effect of equalizing play through the specific notification means.

However, for example, if an advantageous judgment is made just before the end of a specific gaming state, and the advantageous judgment is a corresponding result indicating that an advantageous event will occur, the notification by the specific notification means will continue, but if the advantageous judgment is a non-corresponding result indicating that an advantageous event will not occur, the notification by the specific notification means will end when the specific gaming state ends. In this way, a situation may arise in which the result that the player is interested in, such as an advantageous judgment, will be clearly evident from whether or not the notification by the specific notification means continues.

In the above configuration, if the result of the advantageous judgment is a non-compatible result, an extension process is performed to extend the notification continuation game of the specific notification means by a predetermined number of games, without generating an advantageous event. As a result, even if an advantageous judgment is made just before the end of the specific game state as described above and it results in a non-compatible result, the end of the notification by the specific notification means is delayed by the amount of the extension process. In this way, it is possible to obtain the effect of equalizing the game by the specific notification means, while avoiding an event where the result of the advantageous judgment becomes obvious, and to appropriately improve the playability during the specific game state.

In addition, after "setting a special game state (e.g., attack mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states in the specific game state (e.g., challenge mode) as a state included in the specific game state," the "specific game state notification means" may be expressed as "a specific game state notification means which starts notification by the specific notification means based on the game state transitioning to the specific game state, or based on the game state transitioning to the specific game state and the establishment of a predetermined start condition including an allowance condition under which the transition to the special game state is permitted, and ends the notification by the specific notification means based on the specific game state ending" or "a specific game state notification means which starts notification by the specific notification means based on the game state transitioning to the specific game state, or based on the game state transitioning to the specific game state and the establishment of a predetermined start condition including a notification condition for issuing a winning notification of winning the lottery for transitioning to the special game state, and ends the notification by the specific notification means based on the specific game state ending."

Note that the configurations shown in features GG1 to GG11 may be applied individually or in combination to feature GG12 above.

<Characteristic GH group>
Feature GH1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As game states, a normal game state and specific game states (advantageous zones including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) which are more likely to be advantageous to a player than the normal game state are provided,
A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery as to whether or not to transition to the specific game state in the normal game state (a function for executing a transition lottery to the challenge mode or the attack mode in the first specific role processing by the main control device 101);
A specific transition means for transitioning to the specific game state based on the result of the lottery by the transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the specific game state (a function for executing a process for transitioning to a challenge mode or an attack mode in a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101);
A normal termination means for transitioning from the specific game state to the normal game state based on the establishment of a predetermined termination condition of the specific game state (a function for executing termination processing of the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a normal termination condition in the zone display second processing by the main control device 101);
a specific game state notification means (a function of executing a first section display process and a second section display process by the main control device 101) which starts a notification by a specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) based on the game state transitioning to the specific game state, or based on the game state transitioning to the specific game state and the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and ends the notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state;
Equipped with
As the specific game state, a highly advantageous specific game state (first challenge mode) and a low advantageous specific game state (second challenge mode) are set so that the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low,
The degree of advantage for a player is the same or approximately the same in the normal gaming state and the low-advantage specific gaming state,
A first extension means (a function of executing an add-on process of the challenge mode by the main control device 101) capable of executing an extension process of the highly advantageous specific game state based on the establishment of a predetermined first extension condition (add-on condition);
A second extension means (a function for executing the processing of step S16008 by the main control device 101) capable of executing the extension processing of the low-advantage specific game state based on the establishment of a second extension condition (a positive determination by the main control device 101 in step S16006) different from the first extension condition;
Equipped with
The specific game state notifying means includes:
It is possible to continue the notification by the specific notification means in the high-advantage specific game state extended by the first extension means,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to continue the notification by the specific notification means during the low-advantage specific gaming state extended by the second extension means.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, a specific game state is provided that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state, and when the specific game state is entered or when the start condition is met thereafter, an announcement by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the announcement by the specific notification means also ends. In other words, by checking whether or not there is an announcement by the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific game state is entered, and it is possible to eliminate a sense of inequality between, for example, a player who ends a game without noticing that a game has been entered into the specific game state and a player who sits down at a game machine after the game has ended. Therefore, it is possible for all players to enjoy playing in the specific game state equally to their heart's content.

However, by regulating the notification by the specific notification means as described above, it may cause problems in playing the game, for example, by enjoying whether or not the specific game state will continue. Specifically, when the specific notification means ends, the notification by the specific notification means ends, so even if a presentation is made to indicate whether or not the specific game state will continue, ultimately the notification by the specific notification means makes it clear. On the other hand, if the specific game state is configured to continue as long as the presentation is being performed, there is a possibility that the advantage of the specific game state may become unnecessarily high.

Therefore, by setting a high-advantage specific game state and a low-advantage specific game state as specific game states so that the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and then setting the degree of advantage of the low-advantage specific game state to be about the same as the normal game state, and providing cases in which the high-advantage specific game state and the low-advantage specific game state are extended, it becomes possible to continue (extend) the specific game state without terminating the notification of the specific notification means, and without increasing the degree of advantage of the specific game state too much, regardless of which state is extended.

Note that "the degree of advantage to the player is the same or approximately the same in the normal gaming state and the low-advantage specific gaming state" may also be expressed as "the expected number of bonus awards (net increase in number of coins) that can be expected per game in the normal gaming state is the same or approximately the same as the expected number of bonus awards that can be expected per game in the low-advantage specific gaming state."

Feature GH2. The specific game state is the low-advantage specific game state for the portion in which the extension process is performed by the second extension means, and the remaining portion is the high-advantage specific game state. A gaming machine according to feature GH1.

The above configuration is expected to have the effect of limiting the games played in the low-advantage specific gaming state, extending the games in which the specific notification means notifies the player without increasing the degree of advantage too much, without damaging the impression that the specific gaming state is an advantageous state (high-advantage specific gaming state) for the player.

Feature GH3. The gaming machine according to feature GH2, wherein the second extension means executes the extension process of the low-advantage specific gaming state by transitioning from the high-advantage specific gaming state to the low-advantage specific gaming state based on the second extension condition being satisfied in the high-advantage specific gaming state.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature GH2.

Feature GH4. The second extension means includes a determination means (a function of executing the process of step S16006 by the main control device 101) for determining whether or not the second extension condition is established based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (a double target role),
The gaming machine described in feature GH2 or feature GH3, wherein the establishment determination means is capable of determining that the second extension condition has been established when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result when the number of remaining games in the highly advantageous specific gaming state is less than a predetermined specific number (premonition game number), while determining that the second extension condition has not been established when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result when the number of remaining games in the highly advantageous specific gaming state is equal to or greater than the specific number.

According to the above configuration, if a special result is won at the end of the game when the number of remaining games in the high-advantage specific game state is less than a specific number, the extension process of the low-advantage specific game state can be performed, whereas if the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than a specific number, the extension process of the low-advantage specific game state is not performed even if the special result is won. In this way, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience of unintentionally setting the low-advantage specific game state when a special result is won in a situation where there are still many games remaining in the high-advantage specific game state, while having a relatively simple configuration in which the extension process is performed according to the game result. In other words, in a configuration in which the extension process can be performed based on a special result win, it is possible to accurately perform the extension process at the end of the high-advantage specific game state without using a complex configuration such as varying the probability of winning the special result according to the number of remaining games.

Feature GH5. The device is provided with a continuous effect execution means (a function for executing a continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing a continuous effect that can continue across a plurality of games by a predetermined effect means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features GH1 to GH4, characterized in that when the continuous performance by the continuous performance execution means is executed across the end game of the high-advantage specific gaming state, the second extension means is capable of executing an extension process of the low-advantage specific gaming state, assuming that the second extension condition is met.

According to the above configuration, when the continuous performance by the continuous performance execution means is executed across the end game of the high-advantage specific game state, an extension process of the low-advantage specific game state is performed. As a result, although there is a transition from the high-advantage specific game state to the low-advantage specific game state, it is possible to execute the continuous performance itself without spanning the end game of the specific game state. This makes it possible to avoid, for example, when the continuous performance is related to the continuity of the specific game state, the notification of the specific notification means being terminated as the specific game state ends, and the continuous performance becoming meaningless due to the end of the notification.

Feature GH6. A differential game number grasping means (a function of executing the process of step S16007 by the main control device 101) for grasping the differential game number between the remaining number of games in the highly advantageous specific game state and the continuing number of games of the continuous performance by the continuous performance execution means is provided;
The gaming machine described in feature GH5 is characterized in that the second extension means is capable of executing an extension process of the low-advantage specific game state so that the low-advantage specific game state is implemented after the high-advantage specific game state by the difference game number grasped by the difference game number grasping means.

With the above configuration, a low-advantage specific game state is added for the number of consecutive effects executed after the end of a high-advantage specific game state, making it possible to avoid an inappropriate extension of the specific game state, or, conversely, an event in which the specific game state ends before the consecutive effects even after the extension process has been performed.

Feature GH7. An extension notification execution means (a function for executing a process for performing an additional notification performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing an extension notification corresponding to the extension process by a predetermined notification means based on the extension process of the specific game state;
A gaming machine described in any one of features GH1 to GH6, characterized in that when the first extension means performs extension processing of the high-advantage specific game state, execution of the extension notification by the extension notification execution means is permitted, while when the second extension means performs extension processing of the low-advantage specific game state, the gaming machine is provided with a means for restricting the execution of the extension notification by the extension notification execution means (a function of executing processing for not generating an additional notification by the main control unit 101).

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that a so-called additional notification effect occurs as an extension notification corresponding to the extension process being performed, and when the extension process of the high-advantage specific game state is performed, the additional notification effect occurs, while when the extension process of the low-advantage specific game state is performed, the additional notification effect does not occur, so it is difficult for the player to understand that the extension process of the low-advantage specific game state has been performed. In this way, it is possible to give the impression that the event in which the notification of the specific notification means is continuing is caused by the fact that there are still many games remaining in the high-advantage specific game state, and it is possible to more effectively exert the effect of postponing the end of the notification of the specific notification means.

<Characteristic GI group>
Feature GI1. As a game state, a low expectation state (normal zone) and a high expectation state (advantageous zone) are set in which the expectation of acquisition of game media is relatively high and low,
A grasping means for grasping the number of executions of the high expectation state (number of games in the advantageous zone AG);
A specific termination means for terminating the high expectation state and transitioning to the low expectation state based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number (1500) (a function for executing a process for terminating the advantageous zone when a forced termination condition is satisfied in the second process for displaying the zone by the main control unit 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
As the high expectation state, a first high expectation state (ART such as attack mode) and a second high expectation state (bonus state) in which an increase in gaming media can be expected in each game, and a third high expectation state (bonus carryover state and return state occurring during attack mode) in which a decrease in gaming media can be expected in each game are set.
A first setting means (a function of executing a process of setting a bonus carryover state by the main control device 101) capable of setting the third high expectation state to exist between the first high expectation state and the second high expectation state when a transition from the first high expectation state to the second high expectation state occurs;
A second setting means (a function of executing a process of setting the gaming state after the bonus state by the main control device 101 to a normal gaming state) capable of setting the third high expectation state to exist between the second high expectation state and the first high expectation state when a transition from the second high expectation state to the first high expectation state occurs;
A determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S15810 by the main control unit 101) capable of determining whether or not a specific event occurs during the third high expectation state set by the second setting means, in which the number of executions recognized by the determination means becomes the upper limit number, when the third high expectation state is set by the first setting means;
A third setting means (a function for executing the processing of step S15812 by the main control device 101) capable of executing an addition process of adding a second continuation number (E) of the third high expectation state set by the second setting means to a first continuation number (B) of the third high expectation state set by the first setting means when the identification means identifies that the specific event will occur;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are a high expectation state and a low expectation state in which the expectation of acquiring game media is relatively high and low, and the high expectation state may be forcibly terminated when the number of executions reaches the upper limit, so that the advantage of the high expectation state is prevented from being extremely increased. The high expectation state is set to a first high expectation state and a second high expectation state in which the game media may increase in each game, and a third high expectation state in which the game media may decrease in each game. When the first high expectation state transitions to the second high expectation state, the third high expectation state is interposed between the first high expectation state and the second high expectation state, and when a transition occurs from the second high expectation state to the first high expectation state, the third highly advantageous state may also be interposed between the second high expectation state and the first high expectation state. In such a configuration, if the number of executions reaches the upper limit during the third high expectation state in a situation in which the game media in the third high expectation state may decrease and the high expectation state is terminated, the high expectation state will eventually end with a decrease in the number of game media and a tail-off.

In the above configuration, a transition such as the first high expectation state → third high expectation state → second high expectation state → third high expectation state → first high expectation state is assumed, and the number of continuations of the third high expectation state on the rear side is added to the number of continuations of the third high expectation state on the front side, and the position (timing) where the third high expectation state can exist is changed. In this way, what would have ended in the high expectation state by reducing the game media is changed to end the high expectation state without reducing the game media, and it is possible to prevent the satisfaction of the high expectation state from being lost without changing the number of game media increased. In this way, by performing the forced termination while utilizing the impression the player has at the time of the forced termination, it is possible to achieve both the effect of suppressing the increase in the advantage degree due to the forced termination of the high expectation state and the effect of satisfying the player's satisfaction with the high expectation state.

In addition, in the above configuration, "a remaining number grasping means (number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG) that grasps the remaining number until a predetermined end condition of the high expectation state is satisfied, and a normal end means (a function that executes a process to end the advantageous zone without a forced end condition being satisfied in the second zone display process by the main control unit 101) that ends the high expectation state and transitions to the low expectation state based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means" may be provided, and the "specific end means" may be expressed as "a specific end means that ends the high expectation state and transitions to the low expectation state based on the execution number grasped by the grasping means reaching a predetermined upper limit number, regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means."

Feature GI2. When the addition process is not performed by the third setting means, in the third high expectation state between the second high expectation state and the first high expectation state, the second grasping means (function to execute the process of step S15811 by the main control device 101) grasps the continuation number of the third high expectation state when the high expectation state is ended by the specific ending means in the third high expectation state between the second high expectation state and the first high expectation state;
The gaming machine described in feature GI1 is characterized in that the third setting means is capable of executing the addition process using the continuation number grasped by the second grasping means as the second continuation number.

According to the above configuration, when the first and second continuation numbers of the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state are consumed, the high expectation state is forcibly terminated in the ending game of the second high expectation state. In this way, by setting the forced termination at the end of the second high expectation state where an increase in gaming media can be expected, the forced termination occurs when the player's satisfaction is at its peak, improving the player's impression of the forced termination.

Feature GI3. The gaming machine described in Feature GI1 or Feature GI2, characterized in that the third high expectation state set by the second setting means is configured to allow transition to the first high expectation state based on the game lottery result being a predetermined specific result (first promotion replay).

According to the above configuration, the third high expectation state that exists after the second high expectation state is assumed to have a continuation number that changes depending on the lottery results on the gaming machine side, and the extent to which the player can influence the continuation number is limited. Therefore, for example, even if the operation mode is devised, there is a high possibility that the high expectation state will be forcibly terminated when the gaming medium is reduced. If the above feature GI1 is applied to such a configuration, it becomes possible for the gaming machine side to more effectively resolve the dissatisfaction that the player cannot resolve no matter how hard he tries.

Feature GI4. The first setting means can set the third high expectation state based on the lottery result of the game being a transition result (first BB, second BB) corresponding to the transition to the second high expectation state,
A second transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the second high expectation state based on the lottery result of the game being the transition result and the player performing a transition operation corresponding to the transition result;
A reservation means (a function of executing a process of setting the result of the lottery to a carryover state by the main control device 101) that can reserve the transition result until a transition to the second high expectation state occurs when the lottery result of the game is the transition result and the transition to the second high expectation state does not occur by the second transition means in the game;
A gaming machine described in any one of features GI1 to GI3, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to the above configuration, the transition result that triggers the setting of the third high expectation state on the previous side is reserved until the transition to the second high expectation state occurs, and the transition to the second high expectation state occurs when the player performs a transition operation, so the number of games until the transition to the second high expectation state occurs differs depending on whether the player performs a transition operation in the third high expectation state. By ending the third high expectation state as early as possible and transitioning to the second high expectation state, the number of game media decreased in the third high expectation state is reduced, so in the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state, the number of game media decreased changes depending on the player's operation, and as a result, the number of game media when the high expectation state is forcibly terminated may also change. In this way, on the gaming machine side, the number of game media at the time of forcible termination is not increased or decreased when the setting is made so that the game is not forcibly terminated during the decrease, but the number of game media may increase or decrease depending on the skill of the player, thereby stimulating the player's desire to play.

The above configuration can also be expressed, for example, as "the third high expectation state set by the first setting means has a continuation number that changes depending on the game operation of the player." In this expression, the above characteristic GI3 can be expressed as "the third high expectation state set by the second setting means has a continuation number that does not change or is unlikely to change depending on the game operation of the player."

Feature GI5. The third high expectation state set by the second setting means is configured to allow a transition to the second high expectation state based on the game lottery result being a predetermined specific result (first promotion replay);
A first transition means (a function of executing RT state processing by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the first high expectation state based on the fact that the lottery result of the game is the specific result and the player performs a specific operation corresponding to the specific result;
When the lottery result of the game is the specific result and the transition to the first high expectation state does not occur by the first transition means in the game, an erasure means (a function of executing a process of clearing a winning flag at the end of each game in the main control device 101) capable of erasing the specific result;
A gaming machine as described in feature GI4, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to the above configuration, in the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state, the transition result winning is reserved, so whether or not the transition operation corresponding to that transition result is performed has a large effect on the number of times that the third high expectation state continues, whereas in the third high expectation state after the second high expectation state, the specific result winning is not reserved, so in the third high expectation state, the number of times that the specific result is won is greatly related to the number of times that the third high expectation state continues. With this configuration, it is made clear that there is room for technical intervention by the player in the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state, and conversely, there is little room for technical intervention by the player in the third high expectation state after the second high expectation state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game that further stimulates the desire to play before the second high expectation state.

Feature GI6. The gaming machine described in Feature GI4 or Feature GI5, characterized in that, by performing an addition process by the third setting means, in the third high expectation state preceding the second high expectation state, the total number of game media that can be expected to be acquired in the high expectation state when the high expectation state is ended by the specific ending means, does not change or is unlikely to change from the first branching point at which the game of the first continuation number is executed until the second branching point at which the games of the first continuation number and the second continuation number are executed.

According to the above configuration, while there is room for technical intervention, such as minimizing the loss of gaming media by minimizing the number of continuations in the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state, in the third high expectation state added by the third setting means, which is from when the game with the first continuation number is played until the game with the first continuation number and the game with the second continuation number are played, even if it succeeds in causing a transition to the second high expectation state as early as possible, the total number of wins at the time of the forced termination of the high expectation state is unlikely to change. In this way, it is possible to ensure the significance of adding the second continuation number by the third setting means while stimulating the desire to play in the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state.

Feature GI7. In the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state, a specific effect execution means (a function for executing a process for performing an effect during the premonition mode by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81) capable of executing a specific effect (premonition effect, continuous effect) by a predetermined effect means is provided;
The gaming machine described in feature GI6, wherein the specific effect execution means is capable of changing the presentation manner of the specific effect before and after the first branch point.

According to the above configuration, the change in the presentation mode of the specific presentation allows the player to clearly understand that the first branching point has been reached. In this way, the player can understand that there is little point in causing an early transition in the game thereafter, and can change his/her mind, such as enjoying the specific presentation. This makes it easier for events such as forced termination to occur while the gaming medium is increasing, that is, makes it easier to play through the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state until the first continuation number and the second continuation number are reached.

Feature GI8. The first setting means sets the number of continuations of the effects executed by a predetermined effect means in the third high expectation state until a transition from the first high expectation state to the second high expectation state occurs as the first continuation number;
The third setting means sets the effect continuation number to a number obtained by adding the second continuation number to the first continuation number,
A gaming machine described in any one of features GI1 to GI7, characterized in that a transition from the third high expectation state to the second high expectation state can occur regardless of the number of continuations of the presentation.

According to the above configuration, when the third high expectation state intervenes when a transition from the second high expectation state to the first high expectation state occurs, the continuation number set by the first setting means or the third setting means is a continuation number for presentation, and a transition to the second high expectation state can occur regardless of the set continuation number. In this way, an event in which the set continuation number of the third high expectation state is forced to be consumed does not occur, and with a simple configuration in which the continuation number of presentation is changed while ensuring freedom of play, it is possible to significantly change the impression of a forced termination in relation to an increase or decrease in the actual game media.

Feature GI9. As the game state, a low expectation state (normal zone) and a high expectation state (advantageous zone) are set in which the expectation of acquisition of game media is relatively high and low,
A grasping means for grasping the number of executions of the high expectation state (number of games in the advantageous zone AG);
A specific termination means for terminating the high expectation state and transitioning to the low expectation state based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number (1500) (a function for executing a process for terminating the advantageous zone when a forced termination condition is satisfied in the second process for displaying the zone by the main control unit 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
As the high expectation state, a first high expectation state (ART such as attack mode) and a second high expectation state (bonus state) in which an increase in gaming media can be expected in each game, and a third high expectation state (bonus carryover state and return state occurring during attack mode) in which a decrease in gaming media can be expected in each game are set.
A first setting means (a function of executing a process of setting a bonus carryover state by the main control device 101) capable of setting the third high expectation state to exist between the first high expectation state and the second high expectation state when a transition from the first high expectation state to the second high expectation state occurs;
A second setting means (a function of executing a process of setting the gaming state after the bonus state by the main control device 101 to a normal gaming state) capable of setting the third high expectation state to exist between the second high expectation state and the first high expectation state when a transition from the second high expectation state to the first high expectation state occurs;
A determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S15810 by the main control unit 101) capable of determining whether or not a specific event occurs during the third high expectation state set by the second setting means, in which the number of executions recognized by the determination means becomes the upper limit number, when the third high expectation state is set by the first setting means;
a third setting means (a function of executing the process of step S15812 by the main control device 101) capable of executing a predetermined specific process when the specific event is determined to occur by the determination means;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are a high expectation state and a low expectation state in which the expectation of acquiring game media is relatively high and low, and the high expectation state may be forcibly terminated when the number of executions reaches the upper limit, so that the advantage of the high expectation state is prevented from being extremely increased. The high expectation state is set to a first high expectation state and a second high expectation state in which the game media may increase in each game, and a third high expectation state in which the game media may decrease in each game, and when the first high expectation state transitions to the second high expectation state, the third high expectation state is interposed between the first high expectation state and the second high expectation state, and when the second high expectation state transitions to the first high expectation state, the third highly advantageous state may also be interposed between the second high expectation state and the first high expectation state. In such a configuration, in a situation in which the game media in the third high expectation state may decrease, if the number of executions reaches a specific number during the third high expectation state and the high expectation state is terminated, the high expectation state will eventually end with a decrease in the number of game media and a tail-off.

The above configuration identifies specific events that will result in such a tail-off in advance, and is configured to execute specific processing based on the results of that identification, making it possible to effectively resolve the tail-off events or compensate for the tail-off.

<Characteristic GJ group>
Feature GJ1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stops the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a payout of a number of game media corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As game states, a normal game state and specific game states (advantageous zones including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) which are more likely to be advantageous to a player than the normal game state are provided,
A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery as to whether or not to transition to the specific game state in the normal game state (a function for executing a transition lottery to the challenge mode in the first specific role processing by the main control device 101);
A specific transition means for transitioning to the specific game state based on the result of the lottery by the transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the specific game state (a function for executing a process for transitioning to a challenge mode or an attack mode in a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101);
a specific game state notification means (a function of executing a first section display process to a fourth section display process by the main control device 101) which starts notification during the state by turning on a specific notification means (the eighth display segment N8) when the game state transitions to the specific game state and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and ends notification during the state by turning off the specific notification means when the specific game state ends;
A first grasping means (number of advantageous zone games AG) for grasping the number of executions of the specific gaming state;
A specific end means for transitioning the specific game state to the normal game state based on the fact that the execution number grasped by the first grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number (a function for executing a process for forcibly terminating the advantageous zone in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
A second grasping means (pre-start game number MG) for grasping the number of executions of a pre-state (pre-interval) from the transition to the specific game state to the establishment of the start condition;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, a specific game state is provided that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and when the start condition is met by transitioning to the specific game state, a state notification is started, and when the specific game state ends, the state notification ends. Therefore, the player can clearly understand from the state notification the situation in which the bonus is more likely to be obtained by the mode notification, and can avoid the occurrence of a disadvantage such as ending the game without knowing that the situation is reached. Moreover, the specific game state is configured to be forced to end when the number of executions reaches the upper limit, so that the advantage of the specific game state is not increased too much and the balance of the game is optimized.

However, as described above, since the in-state notification is configured to start after the transition to the specific game state and the start conditions are met, in the prior state before the in-state notification starts, the player has no way of knowing how many games remain before the upper limit, which can lead to inequality in the benefits between a player who reaches the upper limit soon after the in-state notification starts and a player who can play a considerable number of games in the specific game state after the in-state notification starts.

The above configuration is therefore configured to be able to grasp the number of games in the pre-state until the start condition is met after transition to a specific game state, and by informing the player of the grasped result, it is possible to make the player aware of the number of games up to the upper limit. This makes it possible to ensure fairness in the game.

In the above configuration, the device may be provided with "a remaining number grasping means (number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG) for grasping the remaining number until a predetermined end condition of the specific game state is satisfied, and a normal end means for transitioning the specific game state to the normal game state based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing a process for terminating the advantageous zone without a forced end condition being satisfied in the second zone display process by the main control device 101)," and the "specific end means" may be expressed as "a specific end means for transitioning the specific game state to the normal game state based on the execution number grasped by the first grasping means reaching a predetermined upper limit number, regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means."

In addition, "a special game state (e.g., attack mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states in the specific game state (e.g., challenge mode) is set as a state included in the specific game state," and the "specific game state notification means" may be expressed as "a specific game state notification means which starts notification by the specific notification means when the game state transitions to the specific game state and a predetermined start condition including an allowance condition for allowing the transition to the special game state is satisfied, and ends the notification by the specific notification means when the specific game state ends" or "a specific game state notification means which starts notification by the specific notification means when the game state transitions to the specific game state and a predetermined start condition including a notification condition for issuing a winning notification of winning the lottery for transition to the special game state is satisfied, and ends the notification by the specific notification means when the specific game state ends."

Feature GJ2. A gaming machine according to Feature GJ1, characterized in that in the pre-state, the number of gaming media used in each game tends to be greater than the number of gaming media paid out according to the game results of each game in the pre-state.

According to the above configuration, even after the transition to the specific game state, in the pre-state before the start condition is satisfied, the number of game media paid out in each game minus the number of games used is negative, resulting in a so-called negative net increase. In this pre-state, the specific game state notification means has not started notifying the specific notification means, and the net increase is also negative. Therefore, even if the start condition is subsequently satisfied and a mode notification occurs, the player is likely to end the game without knowing this. In this regard, as in the above feature GJ1, the number of games in the pre-state before the start condition is satisfied is grasped, and if the grasped result is displayed, the player can also grasp that a transition to the specific game state has occurred. In other words, the player can grasp that the pre-state is present as well as the degree of advantage after the start condition is satisfied, making it possible to effectively complement the relationship between the specific game state and the specific game state notification means.

Feature GJ3. A gaming machine according to Feature GJ1 or Feature GJ2, characterized in that the predetermined start condition includes an increase condition that makes it easier for the number of gaming media paid out according to the game results of each game in the specific gaming state to be greater than the number of gaming media used in each game.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined start condition includes an increase condition where the number of gaming media paid out in each game minus the number used is positive, resulting in a positive net increase. This configuration is precisely why the specific notification means issues a notification in a situation where substantial benefits can be obtained in the specific gaming state, and the relationship between the specific gaming state and the notification by the specific notification means is clarified.

On the other hand, in many cases, the remaining number or number of runs after the start conditions are met is known and reported, such as when reporting the number of games remaining in an advantageous state. If such a report includes a section where the net increase is negative, the player is likely to feel that the remaining number or number of runs has been exploited by the negative section. Therefore, it is common for reports of the number of games remaining in an advantageous state to not include such negative sections, and if this is the case, it is thought that the start conditions will include an increase condition.

However, with this type of configuration, the relationship with the specific termination means that is forcibly terminated when the upper limit is reached cannot be understood from the above notification, and even if it were to be notified, it would be thought that the notification would be made after the start conditions are met, so there would be no way of knowing this in the prior state. Therefore, by applying the invention of Feature GJ1 to such a gaming machine, it is possible to allow the player to play while understanding information such as remaining profits in the prior state.

Feature GJ4. The lottery results by the lottery means include a first result in which a prize is won when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result in which a prize is won when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
the predetermined start condition includes a notification condition that enables the mode notification means to execute the mode notification,
The gaming machine described in feature GJ3 is characterized in that the specific game state notification means initiates notification by the specific notification means, assuming that the start condition has been met even if the notification condition and the increase condition are met in different games.

According to the above configuration, a mode notification that may result in different winning results is performed, the notification conditions under which the mode notification may be executed are included in the notification start conditions of the specific notification means, and in a configuration in which the start conditions include multiple conditions such as the notification conditions and the start conditions, the success or failure of the notification start conditions is mitigated, and diversification of the game is expected. And because of this configuration, the number of executions of the pre-state is likely to change, and for example, even though mode notification has started, if a situation in which no increase in gaming media is expected continues for a long time, the benefit obtained from the establishment of the start condition to the upper limit number is likely to decrease.

The above configuration may also be expressed as "after the notification condition is satisfied, even if the increase condition is satisfied, the specific game state notification means starts notification by the specific notification means as if the start condition is satisfied, and after the increase condition is satisfied, even if the notification condition is satisfied, the specific game state notification means starts notification by the specific notification means as if the start condition is satisfied."

Feature GJ5. In the specific gaming state, a remaining number grasping means (remaining advantageous zone game number ZG) for grasping the remaining number until a predetermined end condition of the specific gaming state is satisfied;
A normal termination means for transitioning from the specific game state to the normal game state based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing a termination process of the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a normal termination condition in the zone display second process by the main control device 101);
Equipped with
the specific end means, based on the fact that the execution number grasped by the first grasping means in the specific gaming state has reached a predetermined upper limit number, regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, transitions the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features GJ1 to GJ4, characterized in that counting of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means begins after the start condition is satisfied, while counting of the execution number grasped by the first grasping means begins before the start condition is satisfied.

By applying feature GJ1 to a gaming machine with the above configuration, the significance of counting the prior state becomes clearer.

Note that "the counting of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means starts before the start condition is satisfied" is more specifically "the counting of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means starts from the transition to the specific game state, before the start condition is satisfied."

Feature GJ6. A gaming machine according to any one of features GJ1 to GJ5, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for executing a specific notification about corresponding information corresponding to the execution number grasped by the second grasping means by a predetermined notification means (a function for executing a process for making a notification based on a pre-start game number command by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, the player can know the number of executions of the previous state through the specific notification. This makes it possible to predict the remaining benefit that can be obtained in a specific gaming state in relation to the upper limit number, which can be useful for selecting a gaming machine, etc.

Feature GJ7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features GJ1 to GJ6, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for executing the processing of step S16106 by the main control device 101) capable of outputting corresponding information corresponding to the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means to an external device.

As an example of an external device, a hall computer or data device in an amusement hall can be envisaged. If the corresponding information corresponding to the number of executions of the previous state is output to these devices, the manager of the amusement hall, etc., can clearly grasp the remaining benefit of the specific game state, which cannot be grasped only by the notification from the specific notification means. Therefore, for example, when closing time, it is possible to perform a reset process on gaming machines with little remaining benefit of the specific game state, and the information can be used to eliminate disadvantages suffered by players.

Feature GJ8. A gaming machine according to any one of features GJ1 to GJ7, characterized in that it is provided with a second specific termination means (a function of executing a process to forcibly terminate the advantageous zone when the upper limit increase number is reached in the second zone display process by the main control device 101) that transitions from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the increase or decrease in the difference between the number of gaming media paid out according to the game results of each game in the specific gaming state and the number of gaming media used in each game reaching a predetermined upper limit increase number).

According to the above configuration, when the increase/decrease, which is the difference between the number of gaming media paid out and the number of gaming media used, reaches the upper limit increase number after transitioning to the specific gaming state, the game is forcibly terminated, so it is possible to avoid an event in which the advantage of the specific gaming state exceeds the content intended by the designer. In such a configuration, if the number of gaming media decreases in the pre-state and then increases after the start condition is met, the decrease in the pre-state is added to the increase from the start condition being met until the upper limit is reached, so that the gaming situation in the pre-state has a significant impact on the benefits after the start condition is met. In this regard, as in feature GJ1 above, since the number of executions of the pre-state is known, it is possible to, based on the content of the increase, give a notification according to the benefits after the start condition is met.

When applying the above configuration to feature GJ1, the "specific termination means" in feature GJ1 can be read as "first specific termination means."

<Characteristic goalkeeper group>
Feature GK1. As a game state, a low expectation state (normal zone) and a high expectation state (advantageous zone) are set in which the expectation of acquisition of game media is relatively high and low,
A gaming machine equipped with a specific termination means (a function of executing a process of terminating an advantageous zone when the upper limit increase number is reached in the second zone display process by the main control unit 101) that terminates the high expectation zone and transitions to the low expectation zone based on the fact that the increase or decrease in the difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game results of each game in the high expectation zone and the number of game media used in each game has reached a predetermined upper limit increase number,
The high expectation state is configured to transition from a pre-high expectation state (a pre-section such as a challenge mode) in which a decrease in game media is expected in each game to a substantial high expectation state (a substantial increase section such as an attack mode) in which an increase in game media is expected in each game,
A grasping means (pre-start game number MG) for grasping the number of executions of the pre-start high expectation state;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a corresponding notification execution means (a function of executing a process of making a notification based on a first pre-start game number command or a second pre-start game number command by a display control device 81) that can execute a corresponding notification regarding corresponding information corresponding to the execution number grasped by the grasping means by a specified notification means.

According to the above configuration, there are a high expectation state and a low expectation state in which the expectation of acquiring game media is relatively high and low, and the high expectation state may be forcibly terminated regardless of the remaining number when the increase or decrease in the number of game media reaches the upper limit increase number, so the advantage of the high expectation state is prevented from being extremely high. The high expectation state is configured to transition through a pre-high expectation state in which game media may decrease in each game, and then to an actual high expectation state in which game media may increase in each game. The decrease in the pre-high expectation state is added to the increase from the transition to the actual high expectation state until the upper limit increase number is reached, so that the game situation in the pre-high expectation state has a large impact on the benefit of the actual high expectation state. In other words, the longer the period in which the decrease in game media occurs, the greater the subsequent benefit, and by configuring a corresponding notification of corresponding information corresponding to the period in which this phenomenon occurs, it is possible to eliminate the frustration of the player who is slow to transition to the actual high expectation state. This improves the enjoyment of the game.

In the above configuration, "a remaining number grasping means (number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG) that grasps the remaining number until a predetermined end condition of the high expectation state is satisfied, and a normal end means (a function that executes a process to end the advantageous zone without a forced end condition being satisfied in the second zone display process by the main control unit 101) that ends the high expectation state and transitions to the low expectation state based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means" may be described as "a specific end means that ends the high expectation state and transitions to the low expectation state based on the increase or decrease, which is the difference between the number of gaming media paid out according to the playing results of each game in the high expectation state and the number of gaming media used in each game, reaching a predetermined upper limit increase number, regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means."

Feature GK2. The gaming machine described in Feature GK1, characterized in that the corresponding notification execution means is capable of executing an upper limit notification (display of "Expected number increasing!!") of information regarding the upper limit that can be increased in the subsequent substantially high expectation state, as the corresponding notification.

According to the above configuration, the corresponding notification directly expresses the upper limit of the benefit that can be received in the subsequent actual high expectation state, which is expected to have the effect of eliminating the frustration felt in the pre-high expectation state. In addition, such a direct expression makes it difficult to end the game in the pre-high expectation state, given the purpose of the game, which is to acquire gaming media according to the results of each game and expect an increase in gaming media. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the decision to continue playing.

Feature GK3. A second grasping means (number of games in an advantageous zone AG) for grasping the number of executions of the high expectation state;
A second specific termination means (a function of executing a process to terminate the advantageous zone when a forced termination condition is satisfied in the second process of displaying the zone by the main control device 101) that terminates the high expectation state and transitions to the low expectation state based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit game number (1500);
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature GK1 or feature GK2, wherein the second specific termination means terminates the high expectation state even if the increase/decrease number has not reached the upper limit increase number.

According to the above configuration, when the number of executions of the high expectation state reaches the upper limit number of games, the game is forcibly terminated even if the increase or decrease in the number of game media has not reached the upper limit number of increase, so the more the number of executions of the pre-high expectation state is, the greater the number of possible increases in the actual high expectation state; a balance with the number of executions of the high expectation state also arises. In this way, it is possible to enjoy the game while taking into account the level to which the number of possible increases in the actual high expectation state increases in the pre-high expectation state, and the level from which the game is subject to forcible termination by the second specific termination means and does not reach the upper limit number of increase. This can suitably increase the need for a corresponding notification regarding the number of executions of the pre-high expectation state grasped by the grasping means, and interest in the notification of said state.

Feature GK4. The corresponding notification execution means includes an upper limit notification means capable of notifying an upper limit (displaying "expected number increasing!!") of information on the upper limit that can be increased in the substantially high expectation state thereafter as the corresponding notification,
The gaming machine described in feature GK3 is characterized in that the upper limit notification means is capable of executing the upper limit notification in the pre-high expectation state up to a branching game in which the upper limit increase number is the sum of the actual increase obtained by subtracting the number of gaming media used in each game from the expected payout number of gaming media that can be expected to be paid out depending on the playing result of each game when the actual high expectation state of a first number of games is executed, and the actual decrease obtained by subtracting the expected payout number of gaming media used in each game from the number of gaming media used in each game when the pre-high expectation state of a second number of games, obtained by subtracting the first number of games from the upper limit number of games.

According to the above configuration, in relation to characteristic GK3, the upper limit notification is performed within a range that does not lie. In this way, it is possible to increase the credibility of the upper limit notification and further increase the effect of encouraging the player to continue playing by the upper limit notification.

Feature GK5. A gaming machine according to Feature GK3 or Feature GK4, in which the upper limit increase is the sum of the actual increase obtained by subtracting the number of gaming media used in each game from the expected payout number of gaming media that can be expected to be paid out depending on the playing result of each game when the actual high expectation state of the first number of games is executed, and the actual decrease obtained by subtracting the expected payout number of gaming media that can be expected to be paid out depending on the playing result of each game from the number of gaming media used in each game when the pre-high expectation state of the second number of games, which is the upper limit number of games minus the first number of games, is executed, the upper limit number of games is the sum of the actual increase obtained by subtracting the number of gaming media used in each game from the expected payout number of gaming media that can be expected to be paid out depending on the playing result of each game, after the pre-high expectation state of the branching game is exhausted, the expectation of transition to the actual high expectation state is likely to be higher than before the branching game.

The above configuration, in relation to feature GK3, can encourage players to continue playing after the branching game. In other words, after the branching game, the actual number of possible increases decreases, but the probability of transitioning to a state of substantial high expectation increases, so it is relatively easy to expect an increase in gaming media, which increases the significance of playing after the branching game.

Feature GK6. The gaming machine described in Feature GK5 is characterized in that it is equipped with a means capable of notifying information (displaying "Winning Probability Increasing!!") that indicates that the probability of transitioning to the actual high expectation state is likely to be high in the pre-high expectation state after the branching game by a specified notification means.

According to the above configuration, since a notification is given that a state is likely to transition to a substantial high expectation state, it is possible to hopefully expect the effect of eliminating frustration in a pre-high expectation state even when the branching game has been exceeded, and such direct expression makes it difficult to end play in a pre-high expectation state even when the branching game has been exceeded, in view of the purpose of the game being to acquire gaming media according to the results of each game and expect an increase in gaming media. Therefore, it is also possible to encourage the decision to continue playing.

Feature GK7. A gaming machine according to any one of features GK1 to GK6, characterized in that it is equipped with an initialization means (a function for executing a reset process by the main control device 101) capable of initializing at least the information on the increase or decrease number by a predetermined operation.

The above configuration creates gameplay similar to that of feature GK1, but also eliminates the disadvantage to the player in situations where the player cannot obtain sufficient benefit from playing the game, for example, when there is almost no benefit remaining from the substantial high expectation state.

The "predetermined operation" is preferably configured so that it cannot be freely operated by the player, and may be configured as "equipped with an operation means (reset button) for performing the predetermined operation, and the operation means is located in a position where it is impossible or difficult for the player to operate" or "a predetermined operation according to the lottery results of each game."

Note that, to each of the configurations of the feature AA group through the feature GK group described above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of the other feature AA group through the feature GK group individually, or to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a game ball launching means that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched game balls to a specified game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols in a variable manner and then displays the series of symbols in a final stopped state, in which the variation of the symbols is started by operating a start operating means, the variation of the symbols is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns and then displays the final stop of the pattern sequence, in which the pattern variation is started due to the operation of a start operating means, the pattern variation is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stop pattern at the time of the stop is a specific pattern, and further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving tray, and configured so that the operation of the start operating means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

10... slot machine as a gaming machine, 32... reels as a rotating body, 41... start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... stop switches as a stop operation means, 64... speaker constituting the auxiliary performance section, 65... auxiliary display section constituting the auxiliary performance section, 68... indication monitor, N8... eighth display segment as a section indicator, 81... display control device as a sub-control board, 101... main control device as a main control board, 102... CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means.

Claims (1)

A plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of patterns applied thereto in a circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated;
A stop operation means for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a lottery means for holding a lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
a mode notifying means capable of executing mode notifying regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode by a predetermined notifying means based on a lottery result by the lottery means,
At least a normal state and a specific state in which the execution frequency of the status notification by the status notification means is higher than that of the normal state are provided,
a transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result;
a means for starting a specific notification by turning on the specific notification means when the specific state is transitioned to, and for ending the specific notification by turning off the specific notification means when the specific state is ended;
a means for executing a special notification corresponding to the content of the specific state that is the target of the specific notification at a timing before the specific notification is started;
A gaming machine comprising:

Images